A00101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 3070A/B TERMINAL UTILITIES SUBROUTINES
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL HP-IB
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THESE SUBROUTINES PROVIDE AN EASY METHOD TO PERFORM INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATION ON THE 3070A/B TERMINAL AND ON ANY HP-IB DEVICES ATTACHED
TO IT.
THESE SUBROUTINES ARE FORTRAN AND BASIC CALLABLE. THEY REQUIRE RTE II/
III HARDWARE AND 9200A SUBSYSTEM OPTION 422. ADDITIONAL 3070/B
TERMINALS MAY BE REQUIRED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DESCRIPTION OF FILES 3-10
FILE# 3: %3070B : BIN.RELOC.3070 A/B TERMINAL UTILITIES
FILE# 4: $TEST : BASIC TEST PROGRAM
FILE# 5: $TEST : FTN4 TEST PROGRAM
FILE# 6: &3070B : 3070 A/B TERMINAL UTILITIES
FILE# 7: #LUN : LIBRARY FOR 5
FILE# 8: ERMES : LIBRARY FOR 5
FILE# 9: #BYTSC : LIBRARY FOR 5
FILE# 10: $NPT78 : HP-IB DEMO 3070 AND 2240.
FILE# 11: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTAION FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A00201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DECIMAL ARITHMETIC AND MOVE/COMPARE ROUTINES
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DECIMAL CHARACTER COMPARE
MOVE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
1129 FOR CHARACTER MOVE/COMPARE; 999 FOR DECIMAL ARITHMETIC
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE DECIMAL ARITHMETIC ROUTINES PERFORM ADDITION, SUBTRACTION, AND
MULTIPLICATION OF ASCII NUMERIC CHARACTER STRINGS OF UP TO 64 CHARAC-
TERS. MIXING OF SIGNED, UNSIGNED, FIXED POINT AND REAL STRINGS ARE
ALLOWED IN THE SAME OPERATION. LEADING, TRAILING, AND INTERSPERSED
NON-NUMERIC CHARACTERS ARE IGNORED, WHILE DECIMAL-POINT PLACEMENT AND
SIGN HANDLING ARE AUTOMATIC.
THE MOVE/COMPARE ROUTINES CALL THE DECIMAL ARITHMETIC TO MOVE OR COM-
PARE CHARACTER STRINGS. CHARACTERS ARE MOVED FROM LEFT TO RIGHT, AND
OVERLAPPING IS PERMITTED. CHARACTERS ARE COMPARED FROM LEFT TO RIGHT,
AND THE FIRST MISMATCH DETERMINES THE RELATION. A CONDITION CODE IS
RETURNED TO INDICATE THAT THE SOURCE STRING IS LESS THAN, EQUAL TO, OR
GREATER THAN THE COMPARISON STRING, TOGETHER THESE ROUTINES ALLOW TOTAL
MANIPULATION OF ALPHA-NUMERIC CHARACTER STRINGS.
THESE ROUTINES ARE ALGOL OR FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD INSTRUCTIONS FOR MOVE/COMPARE ROUTINES:
STANDARD ASSEMBLE/COMPILE AND LOAD PROCEDURES
LOAD INSTRUCTIONS FOR DECIMAL ARITHMETIC ROUTINES:
1. ASSEMBLE THE DECIMAL ARITHMETIC ROUTINES.
2. PREPARE THE VERIFICATION PROGRAM(S) PROVIDED:
A. TO RUN IN A BCS ENVIRONMENT, ASSEMBLE THE PROGRAM "TEST."
B. TO RUN IN A DOS ENVIRONMENT, COMPILE THE PROGRAM "VERFY."
3. IF RUNNING IN A DOS ENVIRONMENT, ASSEMBLE THE ".ERRR" ROUTINE
SUPPLIED USING THE DOS ASSEMBLER.
4. LOAD THE TEST PROGRAM, FOLLOW THE LOADING SEQUENCE BELOW:
BCS
A. "TEST"
B. DECIMAL ARITHMETIC ROUTINES (NAM = "STLIB")
C. RELOCATABLE PROGRAM LIBRARY
DOS/RTE
A. "VERFY"
B. "STLIB"
C. ".ERRR"
D. RELOCATABLE PROGRAM LIBRARY
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
MOVE/COMPARE ROUTINES
AFTER COMPLETION OF LOADING ("*RUN" IS TYPED BY BCS), PRESS RUN
TO EXECUTE THE TEST PROGRAM.
THE PROGRAM WILL REQUEST THAT THE OPERATOR TYPE A SENTENCE
TERMINATED BY A PERIOD (.) AND A RETURN, LINEFEED.
THE PROGRAM WILL DELETE ALL SPACED FROM THE SENTENCE (USING
SUBROUTINES "MVC" AND "ICLC") AND PRINT OUT THE REQUEST. THE
PROGRAM WILL THEN REQUEST ANOTHER SENTENCE.
DECIMAL ARITHMETIC ROUTINES
EXECUTE THE PROGRAM:
A. BCS - AFTER BCS TYPES "*RUN," PRESS "RUN." SET THE SWITCH
REGISTER SO AS TO EXECUTE THE REQUIRED SUBROUTINE:
SW0 = 0 ADDITION
SW0 = 1,SW15=1 SUBTRACTION
SW0 = 1,SW15=0 MULTIPLICATION
ENTER TWO NUMBERS ON THE TTY, EACH TERMINATED BY A "RETURN"
AND "LINEFEED." THE RESULT WILL THEN BE PRINTED AND THE
PROGRAM WILL WAIT FOR ANOTHER PAIR OF NUMBERS.
B. DOS/RTE - AFTER "LOADING COMPLETE" IS PRINTED, TYPE ":RUN,VERFY".
THE PROGRAM WILL PRINT OUT INSTRUCTIONS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
TWO TEST PROGRAMS ARE INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCES FOR MVC AND ICLC ---
MVC: CALLING SEQUENCE (ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE)
EXT MVC
JSB MVC
DEF *+6 RETURN ADDRESS
DEF ISORC ADDRESS OF SOURCE STRING
DEF ISOF ADDRESS OF SOURCE STRING OFFSET
(IN CHARACTERS, 0 - 32767)
DEF IDEST ADDRESS OF DESTINATION STRING
DEF IDOF ADDRESS OF DESTINATION STRING OFFSET
DEF LGTH LENGTH (NO. OF CHARACTERS TO BE MOVED)
CALLING SEQUENCE (FORTRAN)
CALL MVC (ISORC, ISOF, IDEST, IDOF, LGTH)
ICLC: CALLING SEQUENCE (ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE)
EXT ICLC
JSB ICLC
DEF *+6 RETURN ADDRESS
DEF ISORC ADDRESS OF SOURCE STRING
DEF ISOF ADDRESS OF SOURCE STRING OFFSET
DEF ICOMP ADDRESS OF COMPARISON STRING
DEF ICOF ADDRESS OF COMPARISON STRING OFFSET
DEF LGTH NO. CHARACTERS TO BE COMPARED
STA CCODE (A)=CONDITION CODE:
A>0 SOURCE > COMPARISON
A=0 SOURCE = COMPARISON
A<0 SOURCE < COMPARISON
FORTRAN:
ICODE = ICLC (ISORC,ISOF,ICOMP,ICOF,LGTH)
CALLING SEQUENCES FOR IADD,ISUB,IMULT
IADD - ADDITION
ISUB - SUBTRACTION
IMULT- MULTIPLICATION
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT IADD (OR ISUB OR IMULT)
JSB IADD (OR ISUB OR IMULT)
DEF *+7
DEF IX ADDRESS OF 1ST ARGUMENT STRING ARRAY/RESULT
STRING STORED HERE
DEF IXOF 1ST ARGUMENT STRING OFFSET IN CHARACTERS
(TWO ASCII CHARACTERS/WORD)
DEF IXLEN 1ST ARGUMENT STRING LENGTH
DEF IY ADDRESS OF 2ND ARGUMENT STRING ARRAY
DEF IYOF 2ND ARGUMENT STRING OFFSET IN CHARACTERS
(TWO ASCII CHARACTERS/WORD)
DEF IYLEN 2ND ARGUMENT STRING LENGTH
STA LRES LENGTH OF RESULT STRING IS RETURNED IN
A-REGISTER IN CHARACTERS
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
ILRES = IADD (IX, IXOF, IXLEN, IY, IYOF, IYLEN)
WHERE ILRES IS THE LENGTH (CHARACTERS) OF THE RESULT STRING.
THE RESULT STRING REPLACES THE FIRST ARGUMENT STRING (IX) IN
ALL CASES.
EXAMPLE: IF ARRAY IX = 12345.9 452189.LLKO 5.6 48.213, THEN
IXOF=25 AND IXLEN=6.
ARRAY IX MUST BE DIMENSIONED AT LEAST 16 WORDS SINCE
THERE ARE 31 ASCII CHARACTERS IN THIS STRING. REMEMBER
THAT THE RESULTANT STRING IS ALSO STORED IN THIS ARRAY;
HENCE, IF IT IS GREATER THAN 31 CHARACTERS, IX MUST BE
DIMENSIONED ACCORDINGLY. SIMILARLY, IF ARRAY IY=5.6
48.213 32.1, THEN IYOF=11 AND IXLEN=5. EFFECTIVELY,
THIS ISOLATES THE FIRST VARIABLE TO "48.213" AND THE
SECOND VARIABLE TO "32.1."
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ADDITIONAL EXITS FOR DECIMAL ARITHMETIC ROUTINES
ON CERTAIN ERRORS, CALLS TO .ERRR ARE MADE:
1. A NULL ARGUMENT STRING:
(A) BCS: "E-11 NS" IS PRINTED AND THE COMPUTER HALTS.
(B) DOS: "11 NS" IS PRINTED AND THE PROGRAM IS TERMINATED.
2. RESULT STRING LENGTH EXCEEDS 64 CHARACTERS:
(A) ADD: "E-11 OV" IS PRINTED
(B) MULTIPLY: "E-12 OV" IS PRINTED
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE MOVE/COMPARE ROUTINES REQUIRE ROUTINES "GETCR" AND "OUTCR"
WHICH ARE PART OF THE "DECIMAL ARITHMETIC ROUTINES". THESE ROUTINES
USE COMMON STORAGE (TOTAL DECLARATION = 80 WORDS). THUS, ANY USER
PROGRAMS WHICH REQUIRE COMMON STORAGE MUST INCLUDE A DUMMY COMMON
STATEMENT OF 80 WORDS.
IN THE DOS/RTE ENVIRONMENTS, A COMPATIBLE ERROR ROUTINE .ERRR IS
PROVIDED. THIS ROUTINE MAKES A CORRECT CALL TO THE DOS/RTE ERROR
ROUTINE ERR0 AND THEN TERMINATES THE PROGRAM.
SINCE THE RESULT STRING REPLACES THE FIRST ARGUMENT STRING, AMPLE
SPACE MUST BE PROVIDED, THEREFORE, THE FIRST ARGUMENT STRING SHOULD
BE PADDED ON THE RIGHT WITH BLANKS SO THAT THE TOTAL LENGTH CAN HOLD
THE RESULT STRING. THE LENGTH SPECIFIED IN THE CALLING SEQUENCE FOR
THE FIRST ARGUMENT STRING SHOULD BE THE ACTUAL LENGTH, NOT INCLUDING
THE PADDING.
THE CHOICE OF 63 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM WAS ARBITRARY AND CAN BE INCREASED
TO ANY PRACTICAL NUMBER OF CHARACTERS AS FOLLOWS:
EXAMPLE:
TO INCREASE THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DIGITS TO 256, THE
FOLLOWING EDITS ARE NEEDED:
SOURCE #1
/CR,8,21,22
256
/E
SOURCE #2
/R,460
SIZE EQU 256
/E
A00301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SORT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FAST CORE SORT OF INTEGERS, REALS, AND DOUBLE PRECISION NUMBERS
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
12808 W/EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (5080 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THERE ARE THREE SUBROUTINES IN THIS PACKAGE FOR A FAST "IN-CORE"
SORT OF INTEGERS, REALS, AND DOUBLE PRECISION NUMBERS. REQUIRES A
MINIMUM OF 8K CORE, FTN4 CALLLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
ENCLOSED IS A PROGRAM PROVA AND SUBROUTINE READ THAT INPUTS UP TO
3000 INTEGERS, LISTS THEM, SORTS THEM, LISTS THE INDEXES AND THE
ORDERED ARRAY.
THE READ SUBROUTINE ALLOWS THE USER TO CREATE TEST ARRAYS FROM THE
TELETYPE AND THE SORT SUBROUTINE. THE ROUTINE READS VALUES AS FOLLOWS:
READ(1,*) IFST,ILST,ISEQ,IVAL
--WHERE-- IFST = FIRST ITEM TO BE ASSIGNED
ILST = LAST ITEM TO BE ASSIGNED
ISEQ = SEQUENCE DESIRED (=9 TO END)
IVAL = STARTING VALUE
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINT(S)
SORT(ITEM,IPOS,NIT)
--SORTS INTEGERS
ITEM = BUFFER ADDRESS OF ITEMS
TO BE SORTED
IPOS = BUFFER ADDRESS FOR
INDEXES IN ASCENDING
ITEMS' VALUE ORDER
NIT = NUMBER OF ITEMS TO BE
SORTED
SORT2(BITEM,IPOS,NIT)
--SORTS REALS
SORT3(DITEM,IPOS,NIT)
--SORTS DOUBLE PRECISION VALUES
NTENT(N)
--(USED BY SORT)
DETERMINES THE NUMBER OF TRIES
BEFORE SEQUENTIAL SORTING
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A00401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: IPICK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ASCII/INTEGER CONVERSION ROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
ASCII CONVERSION CODE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS RTE DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
201 WITH/WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FUNCTION CONVERTS A SUBSTRING OF ASCII CHARACTERS INTO AN INTEGER
VALUE OR INTO A NAME OF FIVE CHARACTERS. THE SOURCE STRING IS WRITTEN
IN A1 FORMAT, TERMINATED BY A SPACE AND DIVIDED INTO SUBSTRINGS BY
COMMAS. THE DESTINATION, FOR INTEGER CONVERSION, IS AN INTEGER OR, FOR
ASCII CONVERSION, AN INTEGER ARRAY OF THREE WORDS, WHERE THE FIRST FIVE
CHARACTERS OF THE INPUT ARE PACKED IN THE FORMAT 2A2,A1.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
NORMAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
TO VERIFY THE CAPABILITIES OF THE FUNCTION IPICK, A PROGRAM IS EN-
CLOSED WHICH ASKS INPUT A STRING OF UP TO 72 CHARACTERS AND THE VALUE
OF NUM, AND TYPES THE CONTENTS OF IDEST AND THE VALUE OF IPICK.
FURTHER ASSIGNMENTS FOR NUM ARE AVAILABLE WITHIN THE SAME STRING, AS
LONG AS ZERO IS NOT ENTERED. TO END PROGRAM ENTER END.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
IPICK (ISOUR,NUM,IDEST)
IPICK = 0 FOR CONVERSION COMPLETED
IPICK = -1 SELECTED SUBSTRING IS EMPTY OR DOES NOT EXIST
IPICK = 1 NON NUMERICAL CHARACTERS, OR NUMBER EXCEEDING
THE RANGE -32768 TO 32767, IN SUBSTRING REFERED
TO WITH A NEGATIVE NUMBER.
ISOUR IS THE BUFFER ADDRESS OF THE SOURCE STRING
NUM INDICATES THE POSITION OF THE SELECTED SUBSTRING,
AND THE TYPE OF CONVERSION: POSITIVE FOR ASCII
CONVERSION, NEGATIVE FOR INTEGER CONVERSION.
IDEST IS THE BUFFER ADDRESS OF THE DESTINATION OF THE
CONVERTED SUBSTRING.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A00501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QSORT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE QUICK CORE SORT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'QSORT' IS AN EXTERNAL SUBROUTINE WHICH SORTS AN ARRAY OF RECORDS
IN CORE. THE SUBROUTINES USE A PARTITION-EXCHANGE SORT TECHNIQUE
(QUICKSORT) WHICH IS A VERY FAST METHOD OF SORTING UNORDERED ITEMS.
THE ARRAY IS SORTED IN PLACE INTO ASCENDING ORDER; AND IT CAN BE
SORTED ON ONLY ONE FIELD.
THIS SUBROUTINE OPERATES IN A MINIMUM RTE ENVIRONMENT AND IS CALLABLE
FROM ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD ASSEMBLE/COMPILE PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB QSORT
DEF RUNAD ADDRESS OF ARRAY IN CORE
DEF LRECL RECORD LENGTH IN WORDS
DEF RECNO NUMBER OF RECORDS IN ARRAY
DEF SRTOF OFFSET OF SORT FIELD FROM START OF RECORD
DEF SRTLN LENGTH OF SORT FIELD IN WORDS
DEF SKIP SKIP IS EQUATED TO 1 IF SORTING IS TO BEGIN
ON LOW-ORDER BYTE OF FIRST WORD; SKIP IS EQUATED
TO 0 OTHERWISE.
(RETURN)
RECORDS TO BE SORTED MUST BE CONTIGUOUS IN CORE AT THE ADDRESS
POINTED TO BY RUNAD. THE SUBROUTINE WILL SORT THE ARRAY IN PLACE
INTO ASCENDING ORDER.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
ASSEMBLE THE TEST PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINE.
LOAD TESTQ AND QSORT IN THAT ORDER.
READY PAPER TAPE READER WITH TAPE OF TEST DATA SUPPLIED.
BEGIN PROGRAM WITH:
*ON,TESTQ, LOGICAL UNIT # OF PAPER TAPE READER, LOGICAL UNIT
# OF LINE PRINTER.
IF LU # OF PAPER TAPE READER IS 4, AND LU # OF LINE PRINTER IS 6,
THE COMMAND WOULD BE:
*ON,TESTQ,4,6
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
QSORT WILL SORT A MAXIMUM OF 8191 RECORDS IN CORE. THIS NUMBER
MAY BE INCREASED BY EXPANDING TWO STACKS IN THE PROGRAM: LAD AND UAD.
THE MAXIMUM IS CALCULATED AS LOG(BASE 2)N, WHERE N IS THE LENGTH OF
EACH TABLE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A00601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DSORT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE DISC FILE SORT
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT FILES MERGE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'DSORT' IS AN EXTERNAL SUBROUTINE DESIGNED TO SORT LARGE FILES ON
DISC IN OPTIMUM TIME. INPUT TO 'DSORT' CAN BE FROM DISC, PAPER TAPE,
MAGNETIC TAPES, OR CARDS; AND THE MAXIMUM INPUT RECORD LENGTH MUST BE
LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 64 WORDS. AN OPTION IS AVAILABLE TO WRITE
THE SORTED OUTPUT FILE OVER THE INPUT FILE. FILES ARE SORTED IN
ASCENDING ORDER ON ONLY ONE FIELD.
'DSORT' LINKS TO A CORE SORT SUBROUTINE, 'QSORT', TO SORT SEGMENTS
OF THE INPUT FILE, AND PERFORMS TWO-WAY MERGES ON THE SORTED SEGMENTS.
'QSORT' IS INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE AND IS ALSO AVAILABLE SEPARATELY.
THE ONLY HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ARE A MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM WITH A DISC
OR VRC DRUM. 'DSORT' IS CALLABLE FROM ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE.
'DSORT' MAKES EXEC CALLS TO THE OPERATING SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE DSORT AND QSORT SUBROUTINES
2. ASSEMBLE CALLING PROGRAM
3. LOAD CALLING PROGRAM AND THE TWO SUBROUTINES TOGETHER
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
AN EXAMPLE TEST PROGRAM, 'TESTD' IS ENCLOSED.
LOAD TESTD, DSORT, AND QSORT IN THAT ORDER INTO THE BACKGROUND
PARTITION. READY PAPER TAPE READER WITH TESTD TEST DATA. BEGIN
PROGRAM WITH:
*ON,TESTD, PAPER TAPE READER LOGICAL UNIT #,
LINE PRINTER LOGICAL UNIT #
IF LU # OF PAPER TAPE READER IS 4, AND LU # OF LINE PRINTER IS 6,
THE COMMAND WOULD BE:
*ON,TESTD,4,6
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
RECORD LENGTH MUST BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 64 WORDS. FOR DISC OR
CARD FILES, END OF FILE MUST BE INDICATED BY $$ AFTER THE LAST
RECORD. FOR MAGNETIC TAPE INPUT, EITHER THE $$ OR AN END-OF-FILE
MARK MAY BE USED. BLOCK SIZE ON TAPE CANNOT BE GREATER THAN 2000 WORDS.
THE PROGRAM EXECUTION TIME IS OPTIMIZED IF, 1) THE SORTED OUTPUT FILE
IS NOT WRITTEN OVER THE INPUT FILE, AND, 2) RECORDS DO NOT RESPECT
SECTOR AND TRACK BOUNDARIES ON INPUT.
THE MAXIMUM RECORD COUNT POINTED TO BY PARM6 DETERMINES THE NUMBER OF
TRACKS DSORT WILL ALLOCATE FOR SORTING, AND SHOULD BE APPROXIMATELY
EQUAL TO, BUT NOT LESS THAN, THE ACTUAL NUMBER OF RECORDS. DSORT
WILL NOT READ MORE THAN THE NUMBER OF RECORDS GIVEN BY PARM6.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
DSORT GLOBALLY ALLOCATES DISC TRACKS TO SORT THE NUMBER OF RECORDS
GIVEN IN PARM6. THE NUMBER OF TRACKS REQUIRED FOR SORTING IS AT
LEAST TWICE THE NUMBER OF TRACKS REQUIRED TO HOLD THE FILE, SINCE
TWO WORK AREAS ARE USED. IF THE TRACKS ARE UNAVAILABLE, DSORT WILL
SUSPEND, WAITING FOR ALLOCATION.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A00701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SORT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE-II/III FMGR FILE TYPE 2 ASCII, INTEGER AND REAL SORT PROGRAM PACKAGE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT ASCII FILES
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2116
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SORT PACKAGE WILL SORT A FILE FMGR TYPE 2 FILE OF ANY SIZE AND
ANY MIX OF ASCII, INTEGER, AND/OR REAL FIELDS IN MIXED COMBINATIONS
OF ASCENDING AND DESCENDING ORDERS.
THE SORT PROGRAM MAY BE RUN INTERACTIVELY OR SCHEDULED PROGRAM-
MATICALLY. THE DESTINATION FILE MAY BE THE SOURCE, A NEW OR EXISTING
FILE. IF THE DESTINATION FILE IS NEW, IT WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE
CREATED.
CALCULATED SORT TIME FOR A 132 CHARACTER (66 WORD) RECORD AND 32000
RECORD FILE IN WORST CASE ORDER IS LESS THAN 45 MINUTES ON A 7900/21MX
RTE SYSTEM. ACTUAL MEASURED SORT TIME FOR A 20 CHARACTER RECORD AND
2236 RECORD FILE IS 2 MINUTES, 21 SECONDS.
TYPICAL APPLICATION IS IN CONJUNCTION WITH IMAGE/QUERY. A FORTRAN
PROGRAM CAN ACCESS THE DATA BASE AND CONSTRUCT A TYPE 2 FILE IN WHICH
EACH RECORD IS A LINE OF A REPORT. THE PROGRAM THEN SCHEDULES THE
SORT WITH WAIT AND PASSES THE KEY FIELD DESCRIPTIONS. UPON RETURN
THE PROGRAM INSERTS THE PROPER REPORT HEADERS WHILE PRINTING THE
REPORT FROM THE SORTED FILE.
THE SORT PACKAGE CONSISTS OF PROGRAMS SORT WITH ASSOCIATED SUPPORT
SUBROUTINES, AND MSORT. SORT EXTRACTS THE KEY FIELDS FROM THE SOURCE
FILE, WRITES THE KEYS TO SYSTEM TRACKS AND SCHEDULES MSORT WITH WAIT.
MSORT PERFORMS A DISC/MEMORY SORT. WHEN THE KEYS ARE IN SORTED ORDER,
SORT READS THE RECORD TAGS FROM THE SYSTEM TRACKS AND REWRITES THE
SOURCE FILE IN SORTED ORDER TO THE DESTINATION FILE.
THIS PACKAGE MAKES FMP AND EXEC CALLS. IT REQUIRES 7900, 7905, AND/OR
7920 DISC DRIVES. THIS PACKAGE MAY ALSO BE USED IN 2116/2100 CPU'S
IF THE 21MX WORD PROCESSING AND INDEX REGISTER INSTRUCTIONS ARE RECODED
IN PROGRAM MSORT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
FILE# 5: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE SUBROUTINES AND SAVE RELOCATABLES.
MOVE THE RELOCATABLES TO THE LOAD AND GO TRACKS AND LOAD SORT
AS A BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM.
ASSEMBLE MSORT AND LOAD IT AS A BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM.
IF RTE-III, LOAD MSORT INTO THE LARGEST PARTITION AVAILABLE AND GIVE
IT THE WHOLE PARTITION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
A. INTERACTIVELY - RU,SORT,LU WHERE LU IS THE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE
INTERACTIVE CONSOLE.
B. PROGRAMMATICALLY - CALL EXEC (ICODE,SORT,-LU,ICLASS)
REFER TO SORT LISTING FOR INTERACTIVE AND PROGRAMMATIC SORT FIELD
DEFINITIONS AND PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SORT IS INTERACTIVE AND SELF-EXPLANATORY.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
A. THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF SORT FIELDS AND THE MAXIMUM RECORD LENGTH
IS 10 FIELDS AND 66 WORDS (132 CHARACTERS). THESE MAXIMUMS MAY
BE INCREASED BY INCREASING THE EQUATE VARIABLES BLEN AND FMAX
RESPECTIVELY IN PROGRAM SORT.
B. DISC'S OTHER THAN 7900, 7905 OR 7920 MAY BE USED IF THE WORDS/
TRACK AND WORDS/SECTOR EQUATE VARIABLES ARE CHANGED IN PROGRAM
SORT.
C. PROGRAM MSORT USES ALL OF AVAILABLE MEMORY FOR SORTING.
THEREFORE WHEN LOADING MSORT IN A RTE-III SYSTEM, THE LOADER SIZE
OPTION MUST BE USED. THE MORE MEMORY MSORT HAS THE FASTER THE
SORT.
D. THERE MUST BE ENOUGH SYSTEM TRACKS TO CONTAIN THE KEY FIELDS.
(TOTAL WORDS IN KEY FIELDS + 1)*RECORDS
TOTAL SYSTEM TRACKS = --------------------------------------- + 1
WORDS/TRACK
E. IF A BUG REPORT IS SUBMITTED, PLEASE INCLUDE A PAPER TAPE,
TERMINAL CARTRIDGE OR MAG TAPE OF THE SOURCE FILE TO BE SORTED
AND A DESCRIPTION OF THE SORT KEY FIELDS.
F. LIBRARY ROUTINE PRTN MUST BE MEMORY RESIDENT OR LOADED IN LG
TRACKS BEFORE MSORT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A00801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FSORT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SORT ALL ASCII FMGR FILES WITHOUT EXTENTS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT ASCII FILES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
15K PARTITIONS (FITS IN PARTITIONS FROM 11-16K W/MINOR MODIFICATIONS)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
FSORT IS A VERY QUICK SINK-OR-SWIM CORE SORT WHICH CAN SORT UP TO 80
FIELDS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 40 WORDS (80 CHARACTERS) TOTAL. FSORT WILL
SORT ALL ASCII FMGR FILE TYPES IN ASCENDING SEQUENCE. THE FILES MUST
BE WITHOUT EXTENTS OR TRUNCATION WILL OCCUR. THE PROGRAM CAN BE
SCHEDULED FROM FMGR, OPERATOR, OR ANOTHER PROGRAM AND WILL ACCEPT
STRING PASSAGE OF REQUIRED INPUT. A MAXIMUM OF 32767 RECORDS CAN BE
SORTED WITH A MAXIMUM LENGTH AS WRITTEN OF 128 WORDS, HOWEVER THE USER
CAN EASILY MODIFY THE LENGTH REQUIREMENTS TO FIT HIS NEED.
MINIMUM SYSTEM REQUIRES ONE 7905 DISC AND ONE 21MX OR 2100 HP SYSTEM
WITH AT LEAST 11K PARTITIONS. FSORT IS SET UP FOR 15K PARTITIONS BUT
WITH MINOR MODIFICATIONS WILL FIT IN PARTITIONS FROM 11-16K. DECIMAL
STRING ARITHMETIC PACKAGE IS ALSO REQUIRED. FSORT MAKES FMP AND EXEC
CALLS.
EXECUTION TIME VARIES WITH SIZE OF FILE AND LENGTH OF SORT. 4000
RECORDS OF 72 CHARACTERS WERE SORTED ON 18 COLUMNS IN APPROXIMATELY
6 MINUTES. TIME IS DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
DETAILED INFORMATION ON MODIFICATIONS AND EXECUTION ARE INCLUDED WITHIN
THE PROGRAM COMMENTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: FSORT SOURCE
FILE# 3: FSORT SOURCE (CONTINUED)
FILE# 4: ASC2I SOURCE
FILE# 5: I2ASC SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
GIVEN IN PROGRAM LISTING.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
GIVEN IN PROGRAM LISTING.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
AFTER LOADING THE SORT PROGRAM, RUN THE SORT BY THE FOLLOWING
INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,FSORT,LU
NAME?
(NAME OF FILE STORED ABOVE)
SECURITY?
(SECURITY CODE IF ANY)
SORT FIELDS?
STARTING COLUMN. (1) IN THE TEST CASE.
NUMBER OF COLUMNS. (1) IN THE TEST CASE.
SAME AS ABOVE FOR AS MANY FIELDS AS YOU HAVE.
-1 TERMINATES THE INPUT LIST.
SAMPLE DATA FILE:
0001 1 THE
0002 2 QUICK
0003 3 BROWN
0004 4 FOX
0005 5 JUMPED
0006 6 OVER
0007 7 THE
0008 8 LAZY
0009 9 DOG.
0010 4 FOX
0011 1 THE
0012 7 THE
0013 9 DOG.
0014 2 QUICK
0015 5 JUMPED
0016 8 LAZY
0017 3 BROWN
0018 6 OVER
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR MESSAGES FROM BOTH FMGR AND THE PROGRAM ARE SENT TO THE USER'S
TERMINAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
FILES TO BE SORTED MUST BE WITHOUT EXTENTS.
A00901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: STRNG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
STRING CONVERSION SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION ASCII CODE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
SUBROUTINE STRNG WILL CONVERT FROM AN ASCII STRING, MIXED GROUPS OF
INTEGER AND REAL VALUES WHICH MAY BE PREFIXED BY ONE OR TWO ASCII
CHARACTERS. THE PREFIX, A REAL VALUE, AN INTEGER VALUE, AND ERROR
INDICATOR ARE RETURNED TO THE USER. THE PACKAGE CONTAINS THREE DEMON-
STRATION PROGRAMS USING STRNG, ONE OF WHICH ILLUSTRATES A PSEUDO-
NAMELIST CAPABILITY. STRNG CAN REPLACE THE ASTERISK FORMAT WHERE THE
FORTRAN FORMATTER IS NOT PRESENT (157 WORDS). STRNG USES FIRMWARE LBT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: STRNG SOURCE - ASMB
FILE# 3: IADRS SOURCE - ASMB
FILE# 4: DEMOA SOURCE - FTN4
FILE# 5: DEMOB SOURCE - FTN4
FILE# 6: DEMOC SOURCE - FTN4
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THREE DEMONSTRATION PROGRAMS ARE INCLUDED: DEMOA, DEMOB, DEMOC.
(FIRST PARAMETER OF RUN STRING IS LU OF INTERACTIVE DEMONSTRATION
DEVICE.)
DEMOA AND DEMOB WILL EXIT AFTER 10 STRINGS. DEMOC WILL EXIT ON
RECEIPT OF A DOUBLE COLON IN THE STRING.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
INPUT VALUES MAY NOT EXCEED 32767 IN MAGNITUDE AND REAL HAS 4
DECIMAL PLACES. USES FIRMWARE LBT. GROUPS IN INPUT STRING CAN BE
SEPARATED BY SPACES OR COMMA. EQUAL SIGN IS DISCARDED. PREFIXES
CAN INCLUDE MOST SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A01001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PROTK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE CHECK PROTECT SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PAYROLL ACCOUNTING
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
CHECK PROTECT SUBROUTINE. USEFUL IN PAYROLL AND ACCOUNTS PAYABLE
PROGRAMS WHERE CHECKS ARE COMPUTER GENERATED AND OUTPUT TO A LINE
PRINTER. INPUT IS EIGHT CHARACTER DECIMAL STRING, AND OUTPUT IS
SIXTY-EIGHT CHARACTERS.
PROTK USES THE DECIMAL STRING ARITHMETIC ROUTINES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: TRANSFER FILE & SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE TRANSFER FILE /DEMO.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A DEMONSTRATION PROGRAM DEMO IS ENCLOSED.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
EDITING OF INPUT STRING IS LEFT TO USER. INPUT GREATER THAN
09999999 RESULTS IN OUTPUT OF "ZERO*DOLLARS-00-CENTS".
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A01101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TMATT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
NON-DATACAP/1000 TIME-&-ATTENDANCE APPLICATION PGM. OPTIMIZED FOR SPEED
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL I/O TIME
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
F-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IVA RTE-IVB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
1*10K PARTITION
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
SYS.S/W DEPENDANCE: EXEC & FMP CALLS
SYS.H/W DEPENDANCE: MULTIPOINT/1000 I/F CARD (SUBSYS. HP P/N 91730A)
DRIVERS: DVR 07 (INCL. IN MULTIPOINT/1000 SUBSYSTEM)
DVR 32 OR SOME OTHER DRIVER TO HANDLE DISC STORAGE
MANUALS: HP 3075A/6A/7A REF. MAN. (HP P/N 03075-90011)
MULTIPOINT TERM. USER'S GUIDE (HP P/N 91730-90002)
RTE-IV P'GM'RS. REF. MANUAL (FOR RTE-4A OR -4B)
SPECIAL ROUTINES: SEVERAL ROUTINES IN $GPLB4 -- DATACAP UTILITY LIBRARY
'TMATT' IS A NON-DATACAP/1000 APPLICATIONS PROGRAM DESIGNED TO MONITOR
UP TO 20 HP 3077 TIME-REPORTING TERMINALS IN A RESPONSE-TIME-CRITICAL
TIME-AND-ATTENDANCE APPLICATION. TERMINAL LU#'S ARE PASSED THRU THE RUN
STRING (I.E. :RU,TMATT,LU#1,LU#2,...,LU#20). 'TMATT' HAS BEEN DESIGNED
WITH A MINIMUM AMOUNT OF OVERHEAD -- ALL IT DOES IS READ DATA FROM THE
HP 3077 TERMINALS AND LOG IT TO A DISC FILE. NO VALIDATION IS DONE ON
THE DATA (VALIDATION CAN BE ADDED IF THE USER DESIRES -- COMMENTS IN THE
CODE INFORM THE USER WHERE). THE CODE HAS MANY COMMENTS IN IT TO LEAD
THE USER IN THE DIRECTION OF MODIFICATIONS REQUIRED FOR HIS OWN SITU-
ATION. 'TMATT' IS VERY FAST (RESPONSE TIME = 1.0 SEC. FOR 10 TERMINALS)
AND UTILIZES THE CPU AT MAX 10%. 'TMATT' USES CLASS I/O FOR ALL TERM-
INAL COMMUNCATION -- THUS DERIVING ITS SPEED. 'TMATT' USES ROUTINES IN
A UTILITY LIBRARY FOR RTE-4 (CALLED $GPLB4) THAT IS AVAILABLE AS PART
OF DATACAP 1000. THESE ROUTINES ALLOW STRING, CHARACTER, AND BIT MAN-
IPULATION TO BE PERFORMED MORE EASILY THAN WITH ROUTINES IN THE DECIMAL
STRING ARITHMETIC PACKAGE SUPPLIED WITH RTE-4 GRANDFATHERS (%DECAR).
'TMATT' IS SOMEWHAT CONVERSATIONAL ALREADY BUT THIS CAN BE CHANGED OR
NOT DEPENDING ON THE USERS NEED. AGAIN, THE COMMENTS IN THE CODE POINT
THE USER IN THIS DIRECTION. TO USE 'TMATT' ON A SYSTEM, ONE NEEDS HP
3077A TERMINALS, A MULTIPOINT/1000 SUBSYSTEM (DVR 07 INCLUDED HERE), A
DISC DEVICE OF SOME SORT TO SUPPORT DATA STORAGE, AND $GPLB4. MEMORY
REQUIREMENTS ARE NEGLIGIBLE SINCE THE PROGRAM-PLUS-LIBRARY ONLY TAKES
UP 10 PAGES. IF SO DESIRED, THE USER MAY ALSO EMPLOY THE HP FACTORY
DATA LINK AND DATA LINK CONVERTERS CONNECTED IN A CONFIGURATION SHOWN
IN THE HP 3075A/6A/7A REF. MANUAL PP. 2-5.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: >TMATT--LOADR COMMAND FILE
FILE# 3: &TMATT--PROGRAM PLUS DUMMY STORAGE ROUTINE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
PROGRAM CAN EITHER BE BACKGROUND OR REAL-TIME
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,TMATT,LU#1,LU#2,...,LU#20
LU#1...LU#20 = HP 3077A TERMINAL LU#'S
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A01201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LIST2
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MULTI-RECORD FORMATTED OUTPUT LISTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FORMATTING REPORTS TEXT
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
6185 WORDS WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS, 3192 WITHOUT.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES USER CAPABILITY TO OUTPUT MULTI-RECORD FORMATTED
DATA STREAMS TO ONE OR MORE LIST DEVICES VIA USER COMMAND CONTROL UNDER
DOS. OSTENSIBLY FOR LINE PRINTER LISTINGS OF PUNCHED CARDS, THE USER
COMMAND SET ALLOWS SELECTIVE INPUT FROM SEVERAL DEVICES AND JUXTA-
POSITION OF THESE INPUT FIELDS, THE COMMAND SET ALSO CONTROLS INSERTIONS
OF SPACES, CHARACTERS, PORTIONS OF A CORE-SAVED RECORD, PAGE NUMBERS,
PAGE HEADINGS, TOP-OF-FORM LINE SPACES, AND LINEFEEDS INTO THE DATA
STREAM. THE USER MAY VARY OUTPUT RECORD LENGTH BY STRIPPING TRAILING
BLANKS, OR PARTIALLY SUPPRESS A LISTING OF THE OUTPUT DATA STREAM VIA
COMMAND CONTROL.
THE COMMAND SET ITSELF MAY BE PARTIALLY INPUT THROUGH THE TERMINAL IN A
CONVERSTAIONAL MODE OR MIXED WITH THE INPUT DATA STREAM IN A CARD
READER, PHOTOREADER, OR OTHER INPUT DEVICE.
LIST2 USES EXEC CALLS TO THE OPERATING SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THE ROUTING SLIP BRINGS UP ONE OF THE PROGRAM'S APPLICATIONS, NAMELY
DISTRIBUTION LISTS. THIRTY CARD COLUMNS ARE ALLOCATED TO NAME AND MAIL
STOP. THE REMAINING 50 COLUMNS REPRESENT DIFFERENT DISTRIBUTION LISTS
THAT A PERSON MIGHT BE ON, THIS BEING INDICATED BY PUNCHING A CHARACTER
IN THE PROPER COLUMN. IN SOME CASES THE CHARACTER WAS THE NUMBER OF
COPIES AND IN A FEW CASES, BECAUSE OF QUANTITIES, TWO COLUMNS WERE
ASSOCIATED WITH ONE LIST. A //SUP N 1 500 COMMAND (DON'T PRINT IF THE
COLUMN IS BLANK) CONTROLS THE LISTING, AN APPROPRIATE JCL INSTRUCTION
PICKS UP THE QUANTITIES WHEN DESIRED. CONSECUTIVE PAGES ARE OVERLAPPED
IN THE COPY MACHINE TO PRODUCE A MULTICOLUMNAR FORMAT.
THE FOLLOWING RECORDS WILL NOW BE LISTED TO DEMONSTRATE USE OF THE
BUFFER AND JCL INSTRUCTIONS.
//SKP SKIP TO A NEW PAGE,
//SPC 5
//BUF LOAD THE BUFFER (601 THRU 680) WITH THE FOLLOWING RECORD,
............................
//JCL JUXTAPOSITION INSTRUCTIONS FOLLOW.
1,, 1,30 501,,ONE ! FOR TRIM ,5SPACES & REPEAT 1,30 501,,
PLEASE ROUTE AS INDICATED
//JCL
1,2, 321,2SPACES 601,5DOTS ,,2SPACES 1,20NAME ,,9SPACES 601,5 ,,2 1,20
//LFD 2 LINEFEEDS, //SPC 2 WOULD GIVE 4 SINCE LSP = 2 FROM LAST JCL.
HERB SHEAR ADDRESS CITY,STATE,ZIP PHONE
JOHN DOE OR OTHER DEPARTMENTAL DATA AS DESIRED IN THESE
MARY DOUGH FIELDS. WITH FIELD SELECTION AND JUXTAPOSITION
BILL SMITH ONE FILE SERVES SEVERAL FUNCTIONS.
//JCL
1,, 1,30 ,,6 1,30
IF COPIES ARE DESIRED
INDICATE QUANTITY BY YOUR
NAME, BE SURE DISCARD
CONDITION DOES NOT EXIST.
>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>&g
//SPC @12 10 SPACES, NOTE OCTAL NUMBERS MAY BE USED.
---------------------------------------------
//JCL
1
//HED 0 0
//SPC 5
TEST CASE COMPLETED. (NOT REALLY)
//END
PLEASE ROUTE AS INDICATED ! PLEASE ROUTE AS INDICATED !
..... HERB SHEAR ..... HERB SHEAR
..... JOHN DOE ..... JOHN DOE
..... MARY DOUGH ..... MARY DOUGH
..... BILL SMITH ..... BILL SMITH
IF COPIES ARE DESIRED IF COPIES ARE DEISRED
INDICATE QUANTITY BY YOUR INDICATE QUANTITY BY YOUR
NAME, BE SURE DISCARD NAME, BE SURE DISCARD
CONDITION DOES NOT EXIST. CONDITION DOES NOT EXIST.
.... DISCARD WHEN ROUTED .... DISCARD WHEN ROUTED
RTN TO SECRETARY FOR RTN TO SECRETARY FOR
.... COPIES AND/OR FILING .... COPIES AND/OR FILING
FILE TO:................. FILE TO:.................
COMMENTS: COMMENTS:
---------------------------- -------------------------------
TEST CASE COMPLETED. (REALLY)
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A01301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RTDMO
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PAGE ORIENTED TEXT DISPLAY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
TEXT DISPLAY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ILLUSTRATES HOW TO UTILIZE THE FILE MANAGER CALL AND
PROGRAM THE 2640 SERIES TERMINALS. SINCE THE NATURE OF THE PROGRAM
LENDS ITSELF TOWARD A GENERAL ASCII MESSAGE PROCESSOR (PAGE ORIENTED),
IT CAN BE USED TO IMPLEMENT AND DISPLAY ANY DESIRED DATA CASE WITH
LIMITS TAILORED TO THE 2640 SERIES SCREEN FOR 23 LINES WITH 132
CHARACTERS PER LINE. THE CURSOR IS RESERVED FOR LINE 24.
THE PROGRAM ACCESSES ANY ONE OF 100 FILES OF TEXT AND DISPLAYS THE
TEXT ON THE TERMINAL DISPLAY. IT USES EXEC AND FMP CALLS.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A 2640 OR 2644 TERMINAL FOR DISPLAY
PURPOSES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: RTE-3 SOURCE AND SAMPLE ASCII DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMPILE AND LOAD THE PROGRAM 'RTE3'
2. STORE SAMPLE ASCII DATA ON ASCII (TYPE 3 OR 4) DATA FILES USING THE
"ST" COMMAND IN THE FOLLOWING FORMAT:
RTE3XX, WHERE XX IS ANY TWO LETTERS YOU CHOOSE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:RU,RTE3[,LU] WHERE LU = DISPLAY TERMINAL LU.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL ERRORS ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IT IS SUGGESTED THAT THE 2640 OR 2644 TERMINAL HAVE AT LEAST 4K
MEMORY.
A01401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FORMT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
AUTOMATIC TEXT REPORT FORMATTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FORMATTING TEXT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE RTE-II,-III, OR -M USER TO PRODUCE A FORMATTED
LISTING OF AN FMP FILE WITH AUTOMATIC PAGE NUMBERING AND TITLES. THE
PROGRAM ACCEPTS A FILE NAME (NAMR) AND PROMPTS THE USER FOR PRINT
CONTROL INFORMATION TO PRODUCE THE LISTING. FOR EDITING PURPOSES,
THERE IS AN OPTION TO PRODUCE LINE NUMBERS FOR EACH LINE OF TEXT.
THE PROGRAM HAS EXTENSIVE ERROR CHECKING, CAN BE RUN UNDER BATCH OR
SPOOLING, AND TEXT INPUT CAN BE FROM EXTERNAL DEVICES THROUGH FMP
TYPE 0 FILES.
FORMT USES EXEC AND FMP CALLS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: FTN4 PROGRAM SOURCE OF FORMT
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL ERROR MESSAGES ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A01501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: WOLF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
AUTOMATIC TYPING PROGRAM
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FORMATTING TEXT REPORTS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
A FORTRAN IV PROGRAM FOR THE HEWLETT-PACKARD 2100 SERIES COMPUTER
PROVIDES FOR AUTOMATIC TYPING OPERATIONS AND CAN, WHEN EMPLOYED WITH
MANUFACTURER'S TEXT EDITOR, PROVIDE A SYSTEM TO GREATLY FACILITATE
PREPARATION OF REPORTS, LETTERS AND OTHER TEXT. THE INPUT TEXT AND
IMBEDDED CONTROL DATA CAN PERFORM NEARLY ALL OF THE FUNCTIONS OF A
TYPIST. A FEW OF THE FEATURES AVAILABLE ARE CENTERING, TITLES,
FOOTNOTES, INDENTATION, PAGE NUMBERING (INCLUDING ROMAN NUMERALS),
AUTOMATIC PARAGRAPHING, AND TWO FORMS OF TAB OPERATIONS. THE DOCUMENTA-
TION CONTAINS BOTH USER AND TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION OF THE PROGRAM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: TRANSFER FILE TO LOAD WOLF OFF TAPE
FILE# 3: &WOLF MAIN SEGMENT
FILE# 4: &MAINC THE FOLLOWING ARE WOLF SUBPROGRAMS
FILE# 5: &IPARS
FILE# 6: &IGETC
FILE# 7: &IWORD
FILE# 8: &ILINE
FILE# 9: &ILINO
FILE# 10: &IDSWP
FILE# 11: &IOUTP
FILE# 12: &$.OVY
FILE# 13: &$$WLF
FILE# 14: &IFIGC
FILE# 15: &WLF.0
FILE# 16: &IINIT
FILE# 17: &IOPEN
FILE# 18: &WLF.1
FILE# 19: &IPAGC
FILE# 20: &IPAUS
FILE# 21: &IPAGP
FILE# 22: &ROMAN
FILE# 23: &DECIM
FILE# 24: &IPARC
FILE# 25: &ICMDH
FILE# 26: &ITTLP
FILE# 27: &IFTLP
FILE# 28: &WLF.2
FILE# 29: &IFTHC
FILE# 30: &IFILE
FILE# 31: &IALPX
FILE# 32: &WLF.3
FILE# 33: &IERRM
FILE# 34: &CFILE
FILE# 35: &CMOVE
FILE# 36: &WLF.4
FILE# 37: &ICMDA
FILE# 38: &ITIFT
FILE# 39: &INUMX
FILE# 40: %WOLF RELOCATABLE FILES
FILE# 41: %MAINC
FILE# 42: %IPARS
FILE# 43: %IGETC
FILE# 44: %IWORD
FILE# 45: %ILINE
FILE# 46: %ILINO
FILE# 47: %IDSWP
FILE# 48: %IOUTP
FILE# 49: %$.OVY
FILE# 50: %$$WLF
FILE# 51: %IFIGC
FILE# 52: %WLF.0
FILE# 53: %IINIT
FILE# 54: %IOPEN
FILE# 55: %WLF.1
FILE# 56: %IPAGC
FILE# 57: %IPAUS
FILE# 58: %IPAGP
FILE# 59: %ROMAN
FILE# 60: %DECIM
FILE# 61: %IPARC
FILE# 62: %ICMDH
FILE# 63: %ITTLP
FILE# 64: %IFTLP
FILE# 65: %WLF.2
FILE# 66: %IFTHC
FILE# 67: %IFILE
FILE# 68: %IALPX
FILE# 69: %WLF.3
FILE# 70: %IERRM
FILE# 71: %CFILE
FILE# 72: %CMOVE
FILE# 73: %WLF.4
FILE# 74: %ICMDA
FILE# 75: %ITIFT
FILE# 76: %INUMX
FILE# 77: *WOLFL TRANSFER FILE TO LOAD WOLF PROGRAM
FILE# 78: "APPXA SOURCE TEXT FOR APPENDIX A
FILE# 79: &HASHT HASH TABLE PROGRAM
FILE# 80: HASHT CURRENT COMMANDRNO. LIST FOR PROG. HASHT
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
CONTACT CONTRIBUTOR FOR WOLF REFERENCE MANUAL.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CONTACT CONTRIBUTOR FOR WOLF REFERENCE MANUAL.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE REFERENCE MANUAL.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A01601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: JFORM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CRT FORMS CREATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 1 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FORMATTING TERMINAL DISPLAY
REPORTS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE 264X HP TERMINAL USER TO INTERACTIVELY CREATE
FORMS AND STORE THE RESULT IN AN FMP FILE. THE PROGRAM LOADS SOFT
KEYS WITH VARIOUS ENHANCEMENT OPTIONS THAT ARE USED TO CREATE THE
DESIRED FORM. THE PROGRAM IS SELF-INSTRUCTIONAL AND PERFORMS EXTENSIVE
ERROR CHECKING.
THE PROGRAM IS COMPLETELY CONVERSATIONAL, USES ESCAPE SEQUENCES, AND
SHOULD BE RUN ON A CRT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: JFORM SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE AND LOAD AS USUAL WITH NO SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:RU,JFORM[,TERMINAL-LU]
THE REST IS SELF-INSTRUCTIONAL.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
B00101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: HPCG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SYSTEMS OF ORDINARY DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DIFF.EQ.
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
2688 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (2572 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
USED BY THE RTE OR DOS OPERATING SYSTEM, THIS FORTRAN CALLABLE ROUTINE
SOLVES A SYSTEM OF FIRST-ORDER ORDINARY GENERAL DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS
WITH GIVEN INITIAL VALUES. A FOURTH ORDER METHOD, HAMMINGS MODIFIED
PREDICTOR-CORRECTOR METHOD IS USED. THIS PROCEDURE REQUIRES FOUR PRE-
CEDING POINTS FOR COMPUTATION OF A NEW VECTOR (Y) OF THE DEPENDENT
VARIABLES. THE FOURTH-ORDER RUNGE-KUTTA METHOD IS USED FOR ADJUSTMENT
OF THE INITIAL INCREMENT AND FOR COMPUTATION OF STARTING VALUES.
DURING THE ENTIRE ROUTINE, THE INCREMENT IS AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTED BY
HALVING OR DOUBLING.
FOR MAXIMUM FLEXIBILITY IN OUTPUT, AN OUTPUT SUBROUTINE MUST BE
SUPPLIED BY THE USER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
NORMAL LOAD AND GO PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
NORMAL LOAD AND GO PROCEDURES.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SUBROUTINE HPCG SOLVES A SYSTEM OF FIRST ORDER ORDINARY GENERAL DIF-
FERENTIAL EQUATIONS WITH GIVEN INITIAL VALUES.
EVALUATION IS DONE USING HAMMINGS MODIFIED PREDICTOR-CORRECTOR METHOD.
IT IS A FOURTH ORDER METHOD, USING FOUR PRECEEDING POINTS FOR COM-
PUTATION OF A NEW VECTOR Y OF THE DEPENDENT VARIABLES.
FOURTH ORDER RUNGE-KUTTA METHOD SUGGESTED BY RALSTON IS USED FOR AD-
JUSTMENT OF THE INITIAL INCREMENT AND FOR COMPUTATION OF STARTING
VALUES.
SUBROUTINE HPCG AUTOMATICALLY ADJUSTS THE INCREMENT DURING THE WHOLE
COMPUTATION BY HALVING OR DOUBLING.
TO GET FULL FLEXIBILITY IN OUTPUT, AN OUTPUT SUBROUTINE MUST BE CODED
BY THE USER.
HPCG IS WRITTEN WITH EXTENDED FORTRAN II CAPABILITY. RTE OR DOS
FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
TERMINATES AND RETURNS IF: (1) MORE THAN 10 BISECTIONS OF THE INITIAL
INCREMENT ARE NECESSARY TO GET SATISFACTORY ACCURACY (ERROR MESSAGE
IHLF=LL); (2) INITIAL INCREMENT IS EQUAL TO 0 OR HAS WRONG SIGN (ERROR
MESSAGES IHLF=12 OR IHLF=13); (3) THE WHOLE INTEGRATION INTERVAL IS
WORKED THROUGH.; (4) SUBROUTINE OUTP HAS CHANGED PRMT (5) TO NON-ZERO.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
(1) RALSTON/WILF, MATHEMATICAL METHODS FOR DIGITAL COMPUTERS, WILEY,
NEW YORK,1960, PP. 95-109.
(2) RALSTON, RUNGE-DUTTA METHODS WITH MINIMUM ERROR BOUNDS, MTAC.
VOL. 16, ISS. 80, 1962, PP. 431-437.
B00201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: EULT3
**PROGRAM TITLE:
3-D TRANSFORMATIONS USING EULER'S ANGLES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
TRANSFORM EULER GEOMETRY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
954 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (392 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN CALLABLE SUBROUTINE TRANSFORMS THE COORDINATES (X, Y, Z)
OF A DATA SET TO (X', Y', Z') USING EULER'S ANGLES. IT IS PARTICULARLY
USEFUL IN OBTAINING PLANAR PROJECTIONS OF CRYSTAL STRUCTURES. RE-
FERENCES CITED IN THE DOCUMENTATION GIVE A DETAILED EXPLANATION OF THE
METHOD OF EULER'S ANGLES.
ONLY 8K OF CORE AND AN HP2752 TELEPRINTER ARE REQUIRED, BUT THE ROUTINE
IS PARTICULARLY USEFUL IN CONJUNCTION WITH AN HP1300A DISPLAY SYSTEM.
TWO TEST PROGRAMS DEMONSTRATE OUTPUT ON A TELEPRINTER AND AN HP1300A
SCOPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE PURPOSE OF THIS SUBROUTINE IS THE TRANSFORMATION OF CO-ORDINATES
OF A SET OF DATA (X,Y,Z) TO (X',Y',Z') USING EULER'S ANGLES. IT IS
PARTICULARLY USEFUL IN OBTAINING PLANAR PROJECTIONS OF CRYSTAL STRUC-
TURES. A MORE DETAILED EXPLANATION OF THE METHOD OF EULER'S ANGLES
CAN BE OBTAINED FROM THE REFERENCES CITED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
H. GOLSTEIN, CLASSICAL MECHANICS. READING, MASSACHUSETTS: ADDISON-
WESLEY (1950)
G. ARFKEN, MATHEMATICAL METHODS FOR PHYSICISTS. NEW YORK: ACADEMIC
PRESS (1966)
B00301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ASICO
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INVERSE SIN AND COS ROUTINE (SINGLE PRECISION)
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
TRIGONOMETRY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
407 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (94 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE TWO ENTRY POINTS OF THIS ROUTINE, 'ASINE' AND 'ACOS', WILL RETURN,
AS A NORMAL PRECISION REAL VALUE, THE INVERSE 'SIN' AND 'COS' OF AN
ARGUMENT. THE FUNCTION IS CALLABLE FROM FORTRAN AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
AND WILL OPERATE IN A DOS, DOS-M, OR RTE ENVIRONMENT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
GIVEN IS A LISTING OF A TEST PROGRAM
FTN,L
PROGRAM ATEST
DO 1 I=1,50
X=I-10
X=X/10
P=COS(X)
Y=ACOS(P)
Q=SIN(X)
Z=ASIN(Q)
WRITE(6,6) X,P,Y,Q,Z
6 FORMAT(X5F10.5)
1 CONTINUE
END
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
ANGLE=ASIN(X)
ANGLE=ACOS(X)
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT ASIN OR ACOS
JSB ASIN OR ACOS
DEF *+2
DEF X (ARGUMENT)
VALUE IN A & B
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE TWO ENTRY POINTS OF THIS ROUTINE, ASIN AND ACOS, WILL RETURN, AS A
NORMAL PRECISION REAL VALUE, THE INVERSE SIN AND COS OF AN ARGUMENT.
THE FUNCTION IS CALLABLE FROM FORTRAN AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE AND WILL
OPERATE IN A DOS, DOS-M, OR RTE ENVIRONMENT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF ARGUMENT GT 1 OR LT -1, MESSAGE 03 UN IS PRINTED (VIA ERRO) AND ZERO
IS RETURNED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALGORITHM FROM HASTINGS, APPROXIMATIONS FOR DIGITAL COMPUTERS, SHEET 30.
B00401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SNCOS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
M-SERIES MICROCODED SIN-COS-TAN
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
TRIGONOMETRY MICROCODE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS DOS RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS 21MX ASSEMBLER/MICROCODE ROUTINE COMPUTES THE SINE AND COSINE
FIVE TIMES FASTER THAN THE STANDARD DOS/RTE LIBRARY ROUTINES. THE
TANGENT FUNCTION RUNS THREE TIMES FASTER.
EXECUTION TIMES ARE:
SINE 302-340 MICROSECONDS
COSINE 297-335 MICROSECONDS
TANGENT 685-715 MICROSECONDS
EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENT IS A 21MX. THE PROGRAM OPERATES IN A BCS, DOS,
OR RTE ENVIRONMENT WITH RESPECTIVE MINIMUM CORE REQUIREMENTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SNCOS SOURCE (ASSEMBLER)
FILE# 3: SNCOS SOURCE (MICROCODE)
FILE# 4: TRIG SOURCE (FTN4 TEST PROGRAM)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE NORMAL CALL TO SIN, COS OR TAN IN A USER PROGRAM WILL INVOKE THE
MICROCODE, PROVIDED THE ASSEMBLER ROUTINE (SNCOS):
1. HAS REPLACED THE STANDARD SINE, COSINE, AND TANGENT LIBRARY
ROUTINES AT SYSGEN TIME, OR
2. IS LINKED IN WHEN THE RELOCATING LOADER LINKS THE USER PROGRAM.
THE MICROCODE MUST BE IN PROM CHIPS OR IN WCS AT EXECUTION TIME.
THE MICROCODE CONTAINS 2 ORIGIN STATEMENTS. THESE ARE SET FOR MODULE
12. IF A DIFFERENT MODULE IS USED, THESE ORIGIN STATEMENTS MUST BE
CHANGED.
THE ASSEMBLER ROUTINE REQUIRES 293 FEWER MEMORY LOCATIONS THAN THE
STANDARD LIBRARY ROUTINES.
THE MICROCODE USES 233 CONTROL STORE LOCATIONS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS 21MX ASSEMBLY/MICROCODE ROUTINE COMPUTES SINE AND COSINE 5 TIMES
FASTER THAN THE STANDARD DOS/RTE LIBRARY ROUTINES. TANGENT IS COM-
PUTED 3 TIMES FASTER.
EXECUTION TIMES ARE AS FOLLOWS:
SINE 302-340 MICROSECONDS
COSINE 297-335 MICROSECONDS
TANGENT 685-715 MICROSECONDS
THE ROUTINES ARE CALLABLE FROM ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE, FORTRAN, OR ALGOL.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
COMPUTER APPROXIMATIONS BY JOHN F. HART.
B00501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FFT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
M-SERIES FFT WITH AUTOMATIC SCALING ON OVERFLOW
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FOURIER MICROCODE TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
21MX
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
COMPLEX TRANSFORM SIZE N REQUIRES 2*N LOCATIONS, REAL - N LOCATIONS.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE PERFORMS A MICROCODE ENHANCED FFT (FAST FOURIER
TRANSFORM) WITH AUTOMATIC SCALING ON OVERFLOW.
DATA TO BE TRANSFORMED MUST BE PRESENTED AS A SINGLE INTEGER ARRAY.
THE DATA MAY BE COMPLEX OR REAL. IF COMPLEX, THE ODD SUBSCRIPTED
ELEMENTS ARE THE "REALS", AND THE EVEN SUBSCRIPTED ELEMENTS ARE THE
"IMAGINARIES". IF REAL, THE "REALS ARE CONTIGOUS.
A COMPLEX TRANSFOM OF SIZE N REQUIRES 2*N MEMORY LOCATIONS. A REAL
TRANSFORM OF SIZE N REQUIRES N MEMORY LOCATIONS.
EXECUTION TIME FOR 1024 COMPLEX POINT IS ABOUT 300MS (MILLISECONDS).
EXECUTION TIME FOR 1024 (ALL IMAGINARIES = 0) POINTS OR 1024 REAL
POINTS IS ABOUT 160 MS. EACH OVERFLOW INCREASES EXECUTION TIME BY 6
MS FOR COMPLEX TRANSFORMS; EACH OVERFLOW INCREASES ESECUTION TIME
BY 3 MS FOR COMPLEX (ALL IMAGINARIES = 0) OR REAL TRANSFORMS.
THE ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PORTION OF THE SUBROUTINE REQUIRES 269 MEMORY
LOCATIONS. THE MICROCODED PORTION REQUIRES 512 WORDS OF CONTROL STORE.
THE SUBROUTINE HAS 3 ENTRY POINTS: FFT, CMPRS, XPAND.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. FFTC COMPLEX FFT MICROCODE MICMX,L
2. FFTR REAL FFT MICROCODE MICMX,L
3. FFTIF ASSEMBLER FFT SUBROUTINE ASMB,L
4. FFTT TEST PROGRAM FTNR,L
MICROASSEMBLE TAPE 1 AND SAVE OBJECT. MICROASSEMBLE TAPE 2 AND SAVE
OBJECT. ASSEMBLE TAPE 3 AND SAVE RELOCATABLE. COMPILE TAPE 4 AND LOAD
WITH TAPE 3 RELOCATABLE . LOAD WCS CARD(S) WITH OBJECT FROM TAPES 1
AND 2. RUN FFTT.
THE PROGRAMS ARE SET UP FOR RTE OPERATION AND MUST BE MODIFIED FOR
OPERATION FOR OPERATING IN DOS OR BCS EINVIRONMENTS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
REQUIRES RTE OPERATING SYSTEM FOR UNMODIFIED OPERATION. ALSO, REQUIRES
RTE MICROSOFTWARE (92061). MICROCODE SET FOR MODULES 12 AND 13, AND
MUST BE MODIFIED IF LOCATED ELSEWHERE IN CONTROL STORE. THIS ROUTINE
WILL RUN ONLY ON A 21MX!
IF ARRAYS GREATER THAN 1024 POINTS ARE USED, THEN THE FOLLOWING
MODIFICATIONS MUST BE MADE.
1. THE SINE TABLE MUST BE ADJUSTED SO THAT IT IS 1/4 THE ARRAY SIZE.
2. THE MICROINSTRUCTION LABELED SETNMAX IN THE COMPLEX MICROCODE MUST
BE ADJUSTED.
FOR EXAMPLE, SUPPORT ARRAYS OF UP TO 4096 POINTS WERE TO BE TRANSFORMED.
LINE 157 IN FFTC, TAPE 1 , SHOULD BE CHANGED TO
SETNMAX IMM RES2 CMHI S7 367B S7=2048-NMAX/3=NH
LINE 76 IN FFTR, TAPE 2, SHOULD BE CHANGED TO
COS.SIN IMM COV CMHI S7 367B S7=2048=NMAX/2
NO CHANGES ARE REQUIRED FOR FFTT, TAPE 3.
LINES 3,4,12 IN FFTT, TAPE 4, SHOULD BE CHANGED TO
DIMENSION IDATA (8192)
DIMENSION ITABL (1024)
...
NMAX = 4096
NOTE THAT NO CHANGES ARE REQUIRED FOR SMALLER ARRAYS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THERE ARE 3 CALLING SEQUENCES:
1. COMPLEX
2. COMPLEX (ALL IMAGINARIES = 0)
3. REAL
1. COMPLEX CALLING SEQUENCE.
CALL FFT (IDATA,N,ITABL,ISIGN,IEXP)
WHERE
IDATA IS THE INTEGER ARRAY TO BE TRANSFORMED; IDATA MUST BE IN
NORMAL SEQUENCE. AT THE END OF THE TRANSFORM IDATA WILL ALSO BE
IN NORMAL SEQUENCE.
N IS THE NUMBER OF DATA POINTS, AND MUST BE AN INTEGRAL POWER OF
2, E.G. 64, 128, 256, ...
ITABLE IS A TABLE OF 256 SINE VALUES USED BY ALL TRANSFORMS OF 1024
POINTS OR LESS. ITABL MAY BE GENERATED AS FOLLOWS:
K = NMAX/4
DO 10 I = 1,K
ARG = 3.1415926536*(I-1)/(NMAX/2)
10 ITABL(I) = SIN(ARG)*32768. + .5
C NMAX = 1024. IF ARRAYS GREATER THAN 1024 POINTS
C ARE TO BE TRANSFORMED, NMAX MUST BE CHANGED.
ISIGN = (-1 = FORWARD TRANSFORM, +1 = REVERSE TRANSFORM)
IEXP IS THE MAGNITUDE OF IDATA. FOR FORWARD TRANSFORMS, IEXP MUST BE
INITIALIZED TO CORRECTLY INDICATE THE MAGNITUDE OF IDATA. SETTING
IEXP TO 0 INDICATES THAT IDATA IS NOT SCALED. FOR EXAMPLE,
IF AFTER A FORWARD TRANSFORM IEXP = +3, AND A PARTICULAR ELEMENT
VALUE IS 5, THE TRUE VALUE OF THAT ELEMENT IS 5 * 2**3. FOR
REVERSE TRANSFORMS, IEXP SHOULD BE INITIALIZED TO THE VALUE RETURNED
WHEN IDATA WAS ORIGINALLY FORWARD TRANSFORMED.
2. COMPLEX (ALL IMAGINARIES = 0) CALLING SEQUENCE.
CALL CMPRS (IDATA,N,ISIGN,IEXP)
CALL FFT (IDATA,N,ITABL,ISIGN,IEXP)
CALL XPAND (EDATA,N,ISIGN,IEXP)
WHERE
IDATA,N, AND IEXP ARE AS PREVIOUSLY DEFINED
ISIGN = (-1 = FORWARD TRANSFORM, +1 = REVERSE TRANSFORM)
CMPRS IS A SECTION OF CODE THAT COMPRESSES N COMPLEX (ALL IMAGINARIES
= 0) POINTS OCCUPYING 2*N MEMORY LOCATIONS TO N REAL POINTS
OCCUPYING N MEMORY LOCATIONS.
XPAND IS A SECTION OF CODE THAT EXPANDS N REAL POINTS OCCUPYING N
MEMORY LOCATIONS TO N COMPLEX (ALL IMAGINARIES = 0) POINTS
OCCUPYING 2*N MEMORY LOCATIONS.
3. REAL CALLING SEQUENCE.
CALL FFT (IDATA,N,ITABL,ISIGN,IEXP)
WHERE
IDATA,N, AND IEXP ARE AS PREVIOUSLY DEFINED.
ISIGN = (-1 = FORWARD TRANSFORM, +1 = REVERSE TRANSFORM)
AT THE END OF A FORWARD TRANSFORM, IDATA(1) AND IDATA(2) REPRESENT
THE DC LEVEL AND 1/2 THE SAMPLING FREQUENCY, RESPECTIVELY, AS
FOLLOWS:
DC LEVEL = IDATA(1) + IDATA (2)
1/2 SAMPLING FREQUENCY = IDATA(1) - IDATA(2)
FOR REVERSE TRANSFORMS, IDATA(1) AND IDATA(2) MUST BE AS RETURNED
AFTER THE ORIGINAL FORWARD TRANSFORM.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
1. IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON AUDIO AND ELECTROACOUSTICS, VOL AU-15, JUNE
1967 PAGES 45-55.
2. THE FFT ALGORITHM AND ITS APPLICATIONS, IBM RESEARCH PAPER RC-1743,
FEBRUARY 9, 1967, PAGES 30-33.
B00601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SQRT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MICROCODED SQRT AND BIT/WORD MICROCODE FOR 21MX-M
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
BIT MICROCODE WORD
**LANGUAGES:
MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE CONSISTS OF THIRTEEN MICROCODED ROUTINES; THESE COM-
PREHEND A SQUARE ROOT SUBROUTINE FOR FLOATING POINT NUMBERS (INDE-
PENDENT FROM THE PRESENCE OF THE FLOATING POINT FIRMWARE PACKAGE),
VARIOUS SUBROUTINES TO MOVE WORDS AND TO TEST, CLEAR AND SET ANY BIT
IN A 16 BIT WORD.
A DETAILED DESCRIPTION FOLLOWS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1) ASSEMBLE SQRT SUBROUTINE.
2)LOAD THE RELOCATABLE SQRT ROUTINE WITH YOUR OWN PROGRAM TO SUBSTITUTE
THE PROGRAM LIBRARY ROUTINE WITH THE SAME ENTRY POINT.
3) COMPILE THE MICROPROGRAMMED ROUTINE AND LOAD THE MICROCODE IN THE
WCS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
ALL THESE MACROS ARE CONFIGURED FOR THE WCS MODULE NUMBER THREE AND
CAN BE EASILY ADAPTED FOR ANOTHER MODULE.
TO TEST THE MICROPROGRAMMED SQRT, WE TAKE THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE
VALUE X AND THE VALUE SQRT (X) ** 2 FOR ALL THE APPROXIMATELY 8.4 X
(10**6) DIFFERENT BITS COMBINATIONS FOR REAL NUMBERS FROM 1. TO 4. IN
ALL CASES THIS DIFFERENCE WAS 0 OR 1 ON THE LAST SIGNIFICANT BIT.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SUBROUTINES OR MICROPROGRAMS
1) SQRT SUBSTITUTES WITH THE MACRO 105143 THE JSB SQRT
2) MICROPORGRAMMED MODULE 1:
MACRO
105143 MACRO SQUARE ROOT.NORMAL RETURN IN P+2. ERROR RETURN
JMP ERROR IN P+1 WITH IN A-B REGISTERS THE 03UN CODE.
105144 MACRO SET THE N(TH)(,I) BIT IN WORD X(,I)
DEF N(,I)
DEF X(,I)
105145 IDEM CLEAR THE N(TH)(,I) BIT IN WORD X(,I).
105146 IDEM TEST THE N(TH)(,I) BIT IN WORD X(,I) AND SKIP
IF SET (P+3 NORMAL RETURN, P+4 SKIP RETURN).
105147 IDEM IDEM BUT SKIP IF BUT IS CLEARED.
105150 IDEM TEST THE N(TH)(,I) BIT IN WORD X(,I) SKIP IF
SET AND CLEAR.
105151 IDEM TEST THE N(TH)(,I) BIT IN WORD X(,I) SKIP IF
CLEARED AND SET.
105152 IDEM COMPLEMENT THE N(TH)(,I) BIT IN WORD X(I)
105153 MACRO DECREMENT THE WORD X(,I) AND SKIP (P+3) IF
DEF X(,I) THE CONTENT RESULTS ZERO.
105154 MACRO MOVE N(,I) WORDS TO END(,I) STARTING FROM
DEF END(,I) START(,I) THE VECTORS WHICH FIRST LOCATION IS
DEF START(,I) IN END(,I) AND START(,I) CAN BE LOCATED ELSE-
DEF N(,I) WHERE IN THE MEMORY AND CAN RECOVER ONE
ANOTHER IN ANY WAY.
105155 MACRO MOVE THREE WORDS IN MEMORY FROM START(,I) TO
DEF END(,I) END(,I)
DEF START(,I)
105156 IDEM IDEM FOR TWO WORDS
105157 IDEM IDEM FOR ONE WORD.
FOR THE MACRO 105155 AND 105156 THE VECTORS CANNOT RECOVER ONE
ANOTHER.
ALL THE MACRO FROM 105144 TO 105157 ARE FREE FROM MEMORY PROTECT
CONTROL.
ALL THE MACRO PRESERVE THE A-B REGISTERS CONTENTS (EXCLUDING OB-
VIOUSLY THE SQRT MACRO).
FINALLY, THE A-B REGISTER CAN BE USED IN ANY WAY (DIRECT OR INDIRECT)
TO DEFINE N,X,END,START LOCATIONS.
N IS A LOCATION (D/I) WHICH CONTAIN THE ORDER NUMBER OF THE N(TH)
BIT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
B00701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
21MX-E MICROCODED SIN-COS-TAN
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
TRIGONOMETRY MICROCODE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
E-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS IS THE 22681-90090 MICROCODED SIN-COS-TAN PROGRAM CONVERTED TO
RUN ON THE MX-E. THE SIN AND COS ARE ABOUT 1.5 FASTER AND THE TAN
ABOUT 2.5 TIMES FASTER THAN THE STANDARD FORTRAN LIBRARY ROUTINES.
THE EXECUTION TIMES ARE:
SIN - ABOUT 200-220 MICRO-SECONDS
COS - ABOUT 200-220 MICRO-SECONDS
TAN - ABOUT 450 MICRO-SECONDS
THE ROUTINES ARE CALLABLE FROM ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE, FORTRAN, OR ALGOL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
&SCMXE MICRO SIN/COS/TAN FOR MX-E
&SNCOS ASSEMBLY LANG. CALLS TO MICRO-CODED ROUTINES
&TRIG FORTRAN TEST PROGRAM
&SNCOZ SPECIAL ASSEMBLY ROUTINE FOR COMPARISION TEST
&SCTST FORTRAN TEST PROGRAM COMPARES MICRO TO REGULAR
SIN/COS/TAN
LOG SAMPLE INPUT-OUTPUT
OPERATIONAL: ASSEMBLE &SCMXE, PUT IN WCS OR PROM. EITHER REPLACE
LIBRARY ROUTINES WITH SNCOS OR LOAD SNCOS WITH CALLING
ROUTINE. CALLING ROUTINES USE NORMAL CALLS TO SIN,
COS, TAN.
TEST: ASSEMBLE &SCMXE, PUT IN WCS. COMPILE &SCTST, ASSEMBLE
&SNC02, LOAD. &SNC02 IS A SPECIAL TEST PROGRAM TO ALLOW
THE REGULAR AND MICRO-CODED SIN/COS/TAN TO BE CALLED FROM
ONE PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
PRELIMINARY TESTS SHOW THAT THE MICRO-CODED ROUTINES HAVE THE SAME
ACCURACY AS THE REGULAR LIBRARY ROUTINES. THE ROUTINES &SCTST AND
&SNC02 SHOULD BE USED TO VERIFY THAT THE ACCURACY IS ADEQUATE FOR YOUR
APPLICATION.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
COMPUTER APPROXIMATIONS BY JOHN F. HART.
B00801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CNVMN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION PACKAGE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GEOMETRY TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
21MX
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
MINIMUM 8K PARTITION & AT LEAST 138 WORDS OF BACKGROUND COMMON.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
CNVMN - A FORTRAN SUBROUTINE WHICH DRIVES TWO BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT
PROGRAMS, AND ALLOWS THE USER TO HAVE LARGE APPLICATIONS PRO-
GRAMS AND STILL PERFORM COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS FOR A WIDE
RANGE OF X,Y PROJECTIONS. CNVMN PERFORMS LAT-LON TO X,Y AND
THE INVERSE.
CONV8 - IS A FORTRAN BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM WHICH IS SCHEDULED
BY CNVMN WHEN PROJECTION OR SPHEROID CONSTANTS NEED TO BE ES-
TABLISHED.
CONV9 - IS A FORTRAN BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM WHICH IS SCHEDULED
BY CNVMN TO PERFORM ACTUAL TRANSFORMATIONS.
RCONV - IS A SAMPLE MAIN, PERFORMING SINGLE POINT COORDINATE TRANS-
FORMATIONS VIA INTERACTIVE KEYBOARD DIALOG.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: TRANSFER
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. CNVMN - THE RELOCATABLE %CNVMN SHOULD BE LINKED WITH THE MAIN
DESIRING COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS:
EXAMPLE: (USING RCONV)
:LG
:LG,6
:MR,%RCONV
:MR,%CNVMN
:RU,LOADR,99,,10
:SP,RCONV
:OF,RCONV
2. CONV8 - TO LOAD CONV8 USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE:
:LG
:LG,6
:MR,%CONV8
:RU,LOADR,99,,10
:SP,CONV8
:OF,CONV8
3. CONV9 - TO LOAD CONV9 USE THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE:
:LG
:LG,6
:MR,%CONV9
:RU,LOADR,99,,10
:SP,CONV9
:OF,CONV9
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
IRCONV - A TRANSFER FILE HAS BEEN INCLUDED TO 'RP' THE TYPE 6 FILES
RCONV, CONV8 AND CONV9 REQUIRED TO RUN RCONV. TO EXECUTE FROM
FMGR OR BATCH THE COMMAND TO EXECUTE !RCONV IS :RU,!RCONV,LUIN
WHERE LUIN IS THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE INTERACTIVE TERM-
INAL TO BE USED. UPON COMPLETION !RCONV WILL AUTOMATICALLY
'OF' THE PROGRAMS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
CARD INPUT CONSIDERATIONS:
1. CONV8 - SHOULD CONV8 BE SCHEDULED WITH A PROJECTION TYPE CODE
OF 3 (LAMBERT) OR 4 (TRANSVERSE MERCATOR) AND A STATE
CODE OF 99 (CARD INPUT), CONV8 WILL ATTEMPT TO READ THE
STATE PLANE CONSTANTS ACCORDING TO THE CARD FORMATS IN-
CLUDED HERE. THE COMPLETE LIST OF CONSTANTS AND THEIR
DEFINITIONS MAY BE OBTAINED FROM #2 UNDER TECHNICAL
REFERENCES. (AVAILABLE FROM THE GOVERNMENT PRINTING
OFFICE.)
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
PURPOSE:
THE COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION PACKAGE IS AN ADPATATION OF THE
COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION ROUTINES CONTAINED IN TECHNICAL REFERENCE
#1. REVISIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING CAPABILITIES
OR REQUIREMENTS.
1. X,Y PROJECTION AND SPHEROID CONSTANTS EITHER CONTAINED IN OR
GENERATED BY THE PROGRAMS.
2. METHOD OF SELECTION BASED ON A PRE-DEFINED SET OF CODES.
3. THE INCORPORATION OF THE MERCATOR PROJECTION.
4. THE ABILITY TO ACCESS THE COORDINATE TRANSFORMATION ROUTINES
FROM ANOTHER PROGRAM.
5. ALLOW FULL TRANSFORMATION CAPABILITY WITH MINIMUM STORAGE RE-
QUIREMENTS ON THE APPLICATION PROGRAM.
SOFTWARE DEFINITIONS:
1. CNVMN - THIS SUBROUTINE WHEN LINKED WITH ANY APPLICATION PRO-
GRAM ALLOWS FULL TRANSFORMATION CAPABILITIES. FROM
1 - N POINTS MAY BE TRANSFORMED PER CALL. N IS LIMITED
BY THE SIZE OF THE BACKGROUND COMMON AREA.
2. CONV8 - THIS IS A BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM SCHEDULED
BY CNVMN TO ESTABLISH PROJECTION AND SPHEROID CON-
STANTS BASED ON CODES PASSED TO CNVMN. THE FOLLOWING
SUBROUTINES ARE CALLED BY CONV8 BASED ON THOSE SAME
CODES:
A) UTMGP - CALCULATES SHPEROID CONSTANTS USED IN
TRANSFORMATION TO AND FROM GEODETIC COORDINATES.
B) RMINV - GENERAL PURPOSE MATRIX INVERSION ROUTINE
USED BY UTMGP.
C) TMCNT - ESTABLISHES TRANSVERSE MERCATOR PROJECTION
CONSTANTS.
D) LCNST - ESTABLISHES LAMBERT PROJECTION CONSTANTS.
3. CONV9 - THIS IS A BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM SCHEDULED
BY CNVMN TO PERFORM COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS. THE
FOLLOWING SUBROUTINES ARE CALLED BY CONV9 BASED ON
CODES AND CONSTANTS ESTABLISHED BY CNVMN AND CONV8.
A) TMGPN - PERFORMS COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS TO AND
FROM TRANSVERSE MERCATOR.
B) LMGPN - PERFORMS COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS TO AND
FROM LAMBERT STATE PLANE.
C) MCGPN - PERFORMS COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS TO AND
FROM AN ARBITRARY MERCATOR PROJECTION WITH A PRE-
DEFINED RECTIFYING LATITUDE. THE X,Y'S GENERATED
SHOULD BE USED FOR GRAPHIC REPRESENTATION ONLY AND
ARE NOT INTENDED TO CORRESPOND TO ANY KNOWN GEO-
GRAPHIC POSITION.
D) UTGPN - PERFORMS COORDINATE TRANSFORMATIONS TO AND
FROM A UTM ZONE AS WELL AS ALASKA UTM BASED ZONES
2 - 9.
4. RCONV - MAIN PROGRAM PERFORMING SINGLE POINT COORDINATE TRANS-
FORMATIONS VIA INTERACTIVE KEYBOARD DIALOG. RCONV IS
RESPONSIBLE FOR QUESTIONING THE USER FOR ALL NECESSARY
CONVERSION CONTROL. RCONV PASSES THESE CONTROLS TO
CNVMN IN THE FOLLOWING CALL SEQUENCE:
CALL CNVMN (ITYP,IPC,ISP,IDIR,IPTS,XX,YY,LAT,LON,
IU,RL)
(SEE SOURCE LISTINGS FOR PARAMETER EXPLANATIONS.)
ALL CONVERSION CONTROLS ARE TAKEN FROM THE #CODES
LISTING INCLUDED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE FOLLOWING
SUBROUTINES ARE CALLED BY RCONV BASED UPON USER
REQUESTS:
A) LLXY - PERFORMS ALL LAT., LON. TO XY CONVERSIONS
B) XYLL - PERFORMS ALL XY TO LAT., LON. CONVERSIONS
C) DMS - CONVERTS DECIMAL DEGREES TO DEGREES, MINUTES
AND SECONDS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
RCONV: "INVALID CONVERSION CODES, ABORT NN,NN,NN"
(WHERE NN,NN,NN=ITYP,IPC,ISP AS INPUT)
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. IN ORDER TO ACCOMPLISH THE DESIRED PURPOSE OF THE TRANSFORMATION
ROUTINES, EXECUTION TIME HAS BEEN DEEMED SECONDARY. HOWEVER, IN-
CREASED EXECUTION TIME MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED BY TRANSFORMING AS MANY
POINTS AS POSSIBLE AT ONE TIME. THIS ELIMINATES MULTIPLE SCHEDULE
CALLS FOR CONV9. IF SEVERAL LARGE BACKGROUND PARTITIONS ARE AVAIL-
ABLE, THE USER MAY ALSO DESIRE TO LOCK CONV8 AND CONV9 OR AT LEAST
CONV9 TO ELIMINATE SWAP TIME.
2. SINCE THESE ROUTINES REQUIRE A MINIMUM OF 138 WORDS OF BACKGROUND
COMMON FOR A SINGLE POINT CONVERSION, THE CONSIDERATIONS LISTED IN
#1 ARE DEPENDENT ON THE AVAILABILITY OF COMMON. SHOULD THE USER
LACK ADEQUATE COMMON, IT WOULD BE RELATIVELY EASY TO MODIFY THE
ROUTINES TO USE SAM AS A COMMUNICATION MEDIA VIA CLASS I/O.
SIZE REQUIREMENTS:
1. CNVMN - 344 WORDS + 138 WORDS BACKGROUND COMMON
*2. CONV8 - 8 PAGES + 126 WORDS BACKGROUND COMMON
*3. CONV9 - 7 PAGES + 138 WORDS BACKGROUND COMMON
*NOTE: PARTITION SIZE REQUIREMENTS CAN BE REDUCED BY OVERLAYING IN-
DIVIDUAL SUBROUTINES.
TECHNICAL REFERENCES:
1. COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY.
TECHNICAL REPORT 34. AUGUST 1967
"AEROTRIANGULATION: TRANSFORMATION OF SURVEYING AND MAPPING
COORDINATE SYSTEMS". MELVIN J. UMBACH
2. COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY.
SPECIAL PUBLICATION 62-4. 1968
"STATE PLANE COORDINATES BY AUTOMATIC DATA PROCESSING".
CHARLES N. CLAIRE
3. DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY.
TECHNICAL MANUAL 5-241-8. APRIL 1973
"UNIVERSAL TRANSVERSE MERCATOR GRID"
4. GEODESY - BONFORD OXFORD PRESS 1975.
B00901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FFTIF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
E-SERIES MICRODED FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM WITH AUTO. SCALING ON OVERFLOW.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MICROCODE FOURIER TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
E-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
COMPLEX TRANSFORM SIZE REQUIRES 2*N. REAL REQUIRES N LOCATIONS.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE PERFORMS A MICROCODE ENHANCED FFT (FAST FOURIER
THIS SUBROUTINE PERFORMS A MICROCODE ENHANCED FFT (FAST FOURIER
DATA TO BE TRANSFORMED MUST BE PRESENTED AS A SINGLE INTEGER ARRAY.
THE DATA MAY BE COMPLES OR REAL. IF COMPLEX, THE ODD SUBSCRIPTED
ELEMENTS ARE THE "REALS", AND THE EVEN SUBSCRIPTED ELEMENTS ARE THE
"IMAGINARIES". IF REAL, THE "REALS" ARE CONTIGUOS.
A COMPLEX TRANSFORM OF SIZE N REQUIRES 2*N MEMORY LOCATIONS. A REAL
TRANSFORM OF SIZE N REQUIRES N MEMORY LOCATIONS.
USES DVR36 - THE WCS DRIVER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
MICROASSEMBLE THE TWO MICROPROGRAMS, THEY WILL BE STORED INTO 'FFTC
AND 'FFTR, THEN LOAD THESE INTO WCS.
ASSEMBLE THE ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SUBROUTINE INTO THE RELOCATABLE FILE
%FFT1F.
COMPILE THE FORTRAN PROGRAM INTO THE RELOCATABLE FILE %FFTT. LOAD
THE RELOCATABLE FILES TOGETHER, THEN RUN FFTT.
:RU,FFTT,,LIST
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
1. IEEE TRANSACTIONS ON AUDIO AND ELECTROACOUSTICS, VOL. AU-15,
JUNE 1967, PAGES 45-55.
2. "THE FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM ALGORITHM AND ITS APPLICATIONS," IBM
RESEARCH PAPER RC-1743, FEBRUARY 9, 1967, PAGES 30-33.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
DATA MUST BE IN AN INTEGER ARRAY OF LENGTH N WHERE N IS AN INTEGER
POWER OF TWO.
B01001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: IMBUI
**PROGRAM TITLE:
IMBUI-B, SCATTERER INTEGRAL, ONE INTERACTION, DISC.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PHYSICS
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K SYSTEM
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
SEVERAL FUNCTIONS AND PARAMETERS ARE NEEDED IN FAST NEUTRON TIME-OF-
FLIGHT SPECTROSCOPY; THEY ARE REFERRED TO AS SCATTERER INTEGRALS. THE
FOLLOWING QUANITIES ARE COMPUTED BY IMBUI FOR A DISC SCATTERER:
1. THE NEUTRON TIME OF FLIGHT SPECTRUM
2. THE DISTRIBUTION OF SCATTERING ANGLES
3. THE DISTRIBUTION OF PRIMARY NEUTRON ENERGIES
4. THE SCATTERING PROBABILITY AND
5. THE INTEGRAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE IMBUI
2. LOAD IMBUI
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. READY INPUT ON LOGICAL UNIT 5, OUTPUT COMES TO LU 6.
2. RUN IMBUI. CONTROL RETURNS TO THE SYSTEM AT THE END OF IMBUI.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DUE TO THE TECHNICAL CONTENT OF THE DOCUMENTATION AND THE USE OF
SPECIAL SYMBOLS IN THE EQUATIONS, THE PROGRAM DESCRIPTION AND OTHER
IMPORTANT IMFORMATION ON HOW TO USE THE PROGRAM IS NOT INCLUDED IN
THIS DOCUMENTATION. DOCUMENTATION DOES EXIST ON PAPER.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE:
L.E. BEGHIAN, B.K. BARNES, G.P. COUCHELL, J.J. EGAN, P. HARIHAR, G.H.
KEGAL, T. MARCELLA, A. MITTLER, D.J. PULLEN, AND W.A. SCHIER, "NEURTRON
SCATTERING CROSS SECTIONS OF (238)U", NUCLEAR SCIENCE AND ENGINEERING.,
69 191 (1979).
B01101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 7210 PLOTTER DRIVER FOR RTE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PLOTTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
1. THIS PROGRAM IS A DRIVER FOR THE HP 7210 PLOTTER. THE DRIVER DOES
NOT REQUIRE DMA AND IS SHORT SO THAT IT MAY BE MADE CORE RESIDENT
WITHOUT SIGNIFICANTLY DECREASING THE USER AREA OF AN RTE SYSTEM.
THE PROGRAM WHICH CALLS THE DRIVER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR GENERATING
THE PROPER COMMAND WORD SEQUENCE SINCE THE DRIVER DOES NOT CHECK
THE SEQUENCE FOR LEGALITY. THE DRIVER RETURNS STATUS AT THE COM-
PLETION OF EACH CALL.
2. LITERATURE REFERENCE
1. 17210A INTERFACE KIT MANUAL
2. 7210A INTERFACE MANUAL
3. 7210A OPERATORS GUIDE
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
STORE THE TEST PROGRAM SOURCE ON AN RTE FILE. LIST THE SOURCE AND EDIT
IT SO THAT THE LOGICAL UNIT REFERENCE IS CORRECT. ASSEMBLE AND LOAD
THE PROGRAM. SET THE LOWER LEFT AND UPPER RIGHT LIMIT ON THE PLOTTER
AND LEAVE PEN AT THE UPPER RIGHT. RUN THE PROGRAM. THE PEN SHOULD
MOVE TO THE LOWER LEFT (PEN UP) AND SHOULD DRAW A LINE TO THE UPPER
RIGHT (PEN DOWN). THIS PROGRAM CHECKS OUT BOTH ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE
MODE PEN MOVES AND PEN UP/DOWN.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SUBPROGRAM INFORMATION
ENTRY POINT(S)
THE FOLLOWING EXEC CALL SHOULD BE MADE TO USE THE PLOTTER:
FORMAT
CALL EXEC (2, IDRT, IBUF, N)
WHERE
IDRT = PLOTTER LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
IBUF = INTEGER ARRAY OF COMMAND WORDS
N = NUMBER OF COMMAND WORDS IN IBUF
THE COMMAND WORDS IN IBUF ARE SENT DIRECTLY TO THE PLOTTER. FOUR
WORDS ARE REQUIRED TO MOVE THE PEN AND ONE WORD IS REQUIRED FOR A
PEN UP/DOWN. SEE THE 17210A INTERFACE KIT MANUAL FOR ACTUAL BIT
CONFIGURATION OF THE COMMAND WORDS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. THE DRIVER RETURNS THE LOWER 8 BITS FROM THE INPUT REGISTER OF THE
PLOTTER INTERFACE CARD IN THE A REGISTER AND THE NUMBER OF COMMAND
POINTS OUTPUT IN THE B REGISTER UPON COMPLETION OF THE REQUEST.
2. ONLY A WRITE CALL WILL BE ACCEPTED BY THE DRIVER.
B01201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 7210 PLOTTING ROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
PLOTTER CALCOMP GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4222 LOCATIONS WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (2681 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THESE PROGRAMS WHEN USED WITH THE DOS-M, OR RTE 7210 PLOTTER
DRIVER, (HP 22471 AND HP 22473 RESPECTIVELY), GREATLY SIMPLIFY
THE PROGRAMMING REQUIRED TO DO THE FOLLOWING:
1. PLOT LINES OR POINTS
2. SCALE AND PLOT DATA
3. AXIS GENERATION
4. PLOT CHARACTERS AND NUMBERS
LITERATURE REFERENCE
1. HP RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINES MANUAL (HP 02116-91780)
2. HP 7210 OPERATOR'S GUIDE
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE SUBPROGRAMS CAN EITHER BE LOADED AS TYPE 7 RELOCATABLE
LIBRARY MODULES AT GENERATION TIME, OR, THEY CAN BE STORED AS
RELOCATABLE MODULES AND LINKED WITH THE MAIN PROGRAM AT LOAD
TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
LOAD THE TEST PROGRAM INTO A SOURCE FILE. EDIT THE SOURCE SO
THAT THE CALL PLTLU (-) REFERS TO THE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE
PLOTTER. COMPILE AND LOAD THE PROGRAM. PLACE A PIECE OF 15X10
INCH PLOTTER PAPER ON THE PLOTTER AND SET UP THE PLOT LIMITS.
RUN THE PROGRAM. THE RESULTS SHOULD BE A GRAPH OF A SINE WAVE
WITH AXES LABELED "PSI" AND "POWER".
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
CALLS TO THE ROUTINES PLOT,LINE,SCALE,AXIS,NUMB, AND SYMB DO
NOT REQUIRE LARGER THAN THE 10 WORD INTERNAL BUFFER (IN THE
PLOT ROUTINE) SINCE THEY CALL THE PLOTTER DRIVER FOR EACH PEN
MOVEMENT.
B01301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR47
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE 1331C STORAGE SCOPE DRIVER - DVR47
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER GRAPHIC SCOPE
DISPLAY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
55 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS RTE DRIVER ALLOWS POINTS TO BE OUTPUT AND ERASED ON THE HP 1331C
STORAGE SCOPE. THE DRIVER DOES NOT WORK UNDER INTERRUPT, THEREFORE,
THE NUMBER OF POINTS OUTPUT SHOULD BE KEPT SMALL IN ORDER NOT TO BLOCK
HIGHER PRIORITY DEVICES. THE CONTRIBUTED PACKAGE HP 22506 IS A SET OF
SUBROUTINES DESIGNED TO WORK WITH THIS DRIVER. THE ONLY EQUIPMENT RE-
QUIRED BESIDES THE SCOPE IS THE HP 12555A/B INTERFACE.
SEE "RTE HP 1331C STORAGE SCOPE LIBRARY", HP 22506, A CONTRIBUTED SET
OF SUBROUTINES WHICH USE THIS DRIVER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE THE DRIVER.
2. GENERATE A RTE SYSTEM, AND LOAD THE DRIVER TOGETHER WITH THE OTHER
DRIVERS.
3. THE EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRY IS:
SC,DVR47
WHERE: SC = SELECT CODE OF DUAL D/A INTERFACE.
THE DRIVER DOES NOT USE DMA, AND BUFFERING OR TIME-OUT HAS NO
SENSE, SINCE IT DOES NOT WORK UNDER INTERRUPT.
4. GIVE THE DESIRED LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER.
5. DO NOT MENTION THE DRIVER IN THE INTERRUPT TABLE (DOES NOT WORK
UNDER INTERRUPT).
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. WRITE
CALLING SEQUENCE: JSB EXEC
DEF *+5
DEF IRC
DEF IFUN
DEF BUF
DEF LEN
WHERE:
IRC DEC 2 NORMAL WRITE REQUEST
IFUN OCT XX LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
BUF BSS N CONTAINS THE POINTS TO OUTPUT: THE Y-COORDINATE
IN THE UPPER 8 BITS, THE X-COORDINATE IN THE
LOWER 8 BITS.
LEN DEC N NUMBER OF POINTS TO OUTPUT (POSITIVE N INDICATES
WORDS, NEGATIVE N INDICATES CHARACTERS)
THE OUTPUT IS NOT DONE UNDER INTERRUPT. IN ORDER NOT TO TIE-UP THE
SYSTEM, KEEP THE NUMBER OF POINTS SMALL.
2. ERASE
CALLING SEQUENCE: JSB EXEC
DEF *+3
DEF IRC
DEF IFUN
WHERE:
IRC DEC 3 NORMAL CONTROL REQUEST
IFUN OCT 20XX WHERE XX IS THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER (20 IS
THE SUB-FUNCTION)
THE DRIVER DOES THE ERASE, AND RETURNS IMMEDIATELY TO THE USER.
THE CALLING PROGRAM MUST TAKE CARE NOT TO USE THE DRIVER DURING
1 SECOND.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE DRIVER DOES NOT WORK UNDER INTERRUPT:
- KEEP THE BUFFER LENGTH SMALL
- THE DRIVER STARTS THE ERASE, AND RETURNS IMMEDIATELY: THE CALLING
PROGRAM HAS TO SUSPEND ITSELF DURING 1 SECOND.
B01401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE 1331C STORAGE SCOPE LIBRARYRTE 1331C STORAGE SCOPE LIBRARY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DISPLAY SCOPE GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
759 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE CONSISTS OF FIVE FORTRAN CALLABLE SUBROUTINES
DESIGNED TO USE AN HP 1331C STORAGE SCOPE DISPLAY IN AN RTE
ENVIROMENT. THE SUBROUTINES PERMIT THE USER TO OUTPUT POINTS,
LINES, AND CHARACTERS ON THE DISPLAY, AND ALSO TO DO AN ERASE
WITH AUTOMATIC SUSPENSION OF THE PROGRAM. THE PACKAGE REQUIRES
THE HP 12555A DUAL D/A INTERFACE AND THE CONTRIBUTED RTE HP
1331C SCOPE DRIVER, HP 22505.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY AND LOAD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE HP 1331C DRIVER DOES NOT WORK UNDER INTERRUPT. IT WILL START
AN ERASE AND RETURN IMMEDIATELY; THEREFORE, IT IS NECESSARY FOR
THE CALLING PROGRAM TO SUSPEND ITSELF FOR 1 SECOND.
B01501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TEKTRONIX T4002 PLOTTER LIBRARY FOR RTE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
PLOTTER TEKTRONIX SCOPE
GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE ALLOWS BASIC PLOT FUNCTIONS TO BE PERFORMED ON THE
TEKTRONIX T4002 GRAPHIC COMPUTER TERMINAL IN AN RTE ENVIROMENT.
IT IS A MODIFIED AND EXTENDED VERSION OF A PACKAGE DEVELOPED BY
TEKTRONIX,INC. FOR THE HP BCS OPERATING SYSTEM.
THE FUNCTIONS PROVIDED BY THIS RTE PLOTTER LIBRARY ALLOWS THE
USER TO PLOT POINTS, LINES, AND CHARACTERS; OUTPUT IN ITALICS,
DOUBLE SIZED, OR DOUBLE INTENSIFIED; AND USE THE GRAPHIC CURSOR.
MEMORY REQUIREMENTS FOR THE LIBRARY ARE 334 OCTAL WORDS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE FILE
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
AS A DEFAULT OPTION, THIS PACKAGE AUTOMATICALLY SETS THE
LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER FOR THE TEKTRONIX TERMINAL EQUAL TO 16
(DECIMAL). THE USER MAY CHANGE THIS NUMBER BY USING THE TPTLU
CALL.
COORDINATES OF THE SCREEN:
X (HORIZONTAL) 0-1023 INCLUSIVE
Y (VERTICLE) 0-760 INCLUSIVE
SCREEN SIZE: 8.25 INCH X 6.5 INCH
ORIGIN (0,0): LOWER LEFT CORNER
CHARACTER SPECIFICATIONS:
SIZE: 7 X 9 COORDINATES (NORMAL SIZE)
14 X 18 COORDINATES (DOUBLE SIZE)
SPACE: 12 HORIZONTAL COORDINATES
LINE FEED: 16 VERTICAL COORDINATES
# OF NORMAL SIZE CHARACTERS PER LINE: 85
CURSOR: THE ELECTRONIC BEAM THAT WRITES ON THE SCREEN
COMPARABLE TO THE PEN OF A CALCOMP PLOTTER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
B01601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE CALCOMP/TEKTRONIX PLOT LIBRARY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
PLOTTER GRAPHIC DISPLAY
TEKTRONIX SCOPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SET OF SUBROUTINES, USED IN AN RTE ENVIROMENT, GENERATES
PLOT CODES AND SYMBOLS FOR THE CALCOMP 565 PLOTTER OR THE
TEKTRONIX T4002 GRAPHIC COMPUTER TERMINAL. AT PROGRAMMING AND/OR
EXECUTION TIME THE USER IS ABLE TO DETERTMINE TO WHICH DEVICE
THE GRAPH IS TO BE SENT. THIS MAKES IT POSSIBLE TO REPRODUCE A
PLOT, MADE ORIGINALLY ON THE TEKTRONIX SCREEN, ON THE CALCOMP
PLOTTER OR VICE VERSA.
THIS PACKAGE IS REVISED AND EXTENDED VERSION OF THE STANDARD
CALCOMP PLOTTER LIBRARY, HP 20810. ONLY THE SUBROUTINES PLOT
AND SYMB HAVE BEEN CHANGED AND ARE INCLUDED IN THE SOURCE TAPES
PROVIDED. THE SUBROUTINES SCALE, AXIS, AND LINE HAVE NOT BEEN
MODIFIED AND MUST BE OBTAINED FROM THE STANDARD LIBRARY HP-
20810. BESIDES THE PLOTTERS, THE ONLY NECESSARY EQUIPMENT IS A
MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THIS PACKAGE CONSISTS OF 6 UTILITY SUBROUTINES DESCRIBED IN THE
ATTACHED PAGES. THE USER MAY CALL ONE OR MORE OF THESE IN HIS
MAIN PROGRAM. THE FIRST CALL, HOWEVER, MUST BE A PLTLU CALL TO
SET THE LOGICAL UNIT # OF THE DESIRED PLOTTING DEVICE.
THERE ARE TWO PLOT MODES:
--CALCOMP MODE
--TEKTRONIX MODE
DURING EXECUTION TIME THIS MODE IS DETERMINED BY THE PLTLU
ROUTINE FROM THE EQUIPMENT TABLE NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE GIVEN
LU NUMBER.
IN ORDER TO REPRODUCE A PLOT MADE ON THE TEKTRONIX SCREEN ON THE
CALCOMP PLOTTER OR VICE VERSA, THE USER NEEDS TO CHANGE THE
DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE OF THE RTE USING AN OPERATOR LU REQUEST
AND TO RUN THE PROGRAM AGAIN. THE SAME EFFECT MAY BE OBTAINED
BY RESETTING THE LOGICAL UNIT # OF THE DESIRED PLOTTING DEVICE
WITHIN THE PROGRAM.
COORDINATES:
CALCOMP MODEL 565
Y: 0 - 11 INCHES
X: UNLIMITED
TEKTRONIX GCT : ASSUMING SCALING FACTORS = 1
ORIGIN:
Y : 0 - 7.60 INCLUSIVE
X : 0 - 10.23 INCLUSIVE
MAXIMUM ACCURACY : .01 INCH (CALCOMP) OR .01 (TEKTRONIX)
ORIGIN:
CALCOMP: TO BE SET THE USER. (SEE PLOT CALL)
TEKTRONIX - LOWER LEFT CORNER IS (0,0) UNLESS CHANGED BY THE
USER
CURSOR:
THE ELECTRONIC BEAM THAT WRITES INFORMATION ON THE SCREEN OF
THE TEKTRONIX TERMINAL, COMPARABLE TO THE PEN OF THE CALCOMP
PLOTTER.
UNIT:
CALCOMP MODE : 1 INCH
TEKTRONIX MODE : 1 COORDINATE
HOWEVER, IF THE FACT-ROUTINE IS USED TO CHANGE THE SCALING
FACTORS, THEN THIS MUST BE TAKEN INTO ACCOUNT.
EXAMPLE: 1 "UNIT" AFTER THE CALL
CALL FACT (0.5,20) IS:
CALCOMP MODE:
X-DIRECTION: 0.5 INCH
Y-DIRECTION: 2.0 INCH
TEKTRONIX MODE:
X-DIRECTION: 0.5 COORDINATES
Y-DIRECTION: 2.0 COORDINATES
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
B01701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
UPPER/LOWER CASE CHARACTER GENERATOR FOR HP 7210 PLOTTER.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
PLOTTER CHARACTER TEXT
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M BCS RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
1209 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (304 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE OF ROUTINES PROVIDES THE CAPABILITY TO PLOT
CHARACTERS IN UPPER OR LOWER CASE, AND FLOATING POINT NUMBERS IN
F FORMAT ON THE HP 7210 PLOTTER. THE ROUTINE ZPLOT GENERATES
SINGLE CAPITAL AND SMALL CHARACTERS AND HANDLES THE TRANS-
FORMATION OF FLOATING POINT NUMBERS. IT CAN BE USED ALONE OR
IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE ROUTINE TPLOT.
TPLOT TRANSLATES THE TEXT CONTAINED IN A FORMAT STATEMENT OR IN
THE DIMENSION OR COMMON AREA OF A PROGRAM TO A FORM USABLE BY
ZPLOT, AND THEN CALLS ZPLOT TO GENERATE THE CHARACTERS. THE
TEXT CAN BE IN UPPER OR LOWER CASE WITH LEFT ARROWS AND UP
ARROWS SIGNIFYING WHICH CHARACTERS ARE TO BE PLOTTED AS SMALL
LETTERS AND CAPITALS RESPECTIVELY. TPLOT WAS WRITTEN TO BYPASS
THE FORMATTER AND THEREBY SAVE A LARGE AREA OF CORE.
ALSO INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE ARE THREE ROUTINES WHICH LINK
ZPLOT TO THE CORRESPONDING STANDARD PLOTTER DRIVER OF THE
OPERATING SYSTEM BEING USED. THE SYSTEMS ALLOWED ARE BCS,MTS,
DOS,DOS-M,RTE, AND RTE-C WITH A MINIMUM OF 4K CORE REQUIRED
FOR BCS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES.
LOAD ZPLOT WITH THE APPROPRIATE LINK ROUTINE.
BCSPL FOR A BCS OR MTS ENVIROMENT
DOSPL FOR A DOS OR DOS-M ENVIROMENT
RTEPL FOR AN RTE OR RTE-C ENVIROMENT
TPLOT MUST BE LOADED WITH ZPLOT PLUS THE APPROPRIATE LINK
ROUTINE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
B01801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DRAFT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CERTIFICATE DRAFTING PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PLOTTER DISPLAY GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M DOS-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
COMPILATION - 24K MINIMUN, EXECUTION - 24K MINIMUM
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
OPERATING IN A DOS-M, DOS-III, OR RTE ENVIRONMENT WITH AN HP7210
PLOTTER, THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO DESIGN AND PLOT COURSE
GRADUATION CERTIFICATES, SIGNS, POSTERS, AND PROPOSALS. THE PROGRAM IS
COMPLETELY OPERATOR ORIENTED, REQUIRING NO PRIOR KNOWLEDGE OF PROGRAM-
MING. A TOTAL OF 30 CONVERSATIONAL COMMANDS ARE AVAILABLE. THE
PROGRAM CAN BE USED TO DRAW STRAIGHT LINES AS WELL AS TO PRINT CHARAC-
TERS AT ANY ANGLE AND OFFSET. OTHER CAPABILITIES INCLUDE: AUTOMATIC
HEADER CENTERING; FLOWCHART SYMBOL PLOTTING; VARIABLE CHARACTER HEIGHT;
CHARACTER STRING PLOTTING; CHARACTER SHADING, TRACING, ANGLING, AND
ROTATING; ALL COORDINATES ARE EXPRESSED IN INCHES OR METRIC UNITS;
CONSOLE SESSION ACCOUNT; CMND BATCHING; UNLIMITED DESIGN APPLICATIONS
DYNAMIC LOGICAL UNIT ASSIGNMENT; PLOTTER VARIABLE FORMS. ADDITIONAL
REQUIRED SOFTWARE IS THE PLOTTER LIBRARY (20810B). THE DOS PLOTTER
DRIVE DVR 10 (20581A) OR RTE PLOTTER DRIVER DVR 10 (20581A) OR RTE
PLOTTER DRIVER DVR 10 (72009A).
FOR COMPILATION AND EXECUTION 24K WORDS ARE REQUIRED. TWO DMA CHANNELS
MUST BE AVAILABLE AND THE HP2767 LINE PRINTER IS RECOMMENDED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE PRIMARY FUNCTION OF THIS PROGRAM IS TO PRINT THREE MESSAGES OF ANY
SIZE ON A STANDARD HP CERTIFICATE FORM USING THE HP 7210A PLOTTER. THE
PROGRAM IS SPECIFICALLY DESIGNED AROUND A 9 X 7 INCH FORM, ALTHOUGH
THIS AND OTHER FEATURES CAN BE TEMPORARILY OR PERMANENTLY DYNAMICALLY
ALTERED WITH PROGRAM COMMANDS DURING RUN TIME. THERE ARE A TOTAL OF 30
FUNCTIONAL OPERATOR COMMANDS AVAILABLE FOR RIGID AND FLEXIBLE PLOTTING
CONTROL. AS EACH COMMAND IS ENTERED, IT AND ASSOCIATED VALUES (IF ANY)
ARE PRINTED ON THE LIST OUTPUT DEVICE WHICH CAN ALSO BE CHANGED AT ANY
POINT DURING RUN TIME. UNDER NORMAL CIRCUMSTANCES, THE PROGRAM IS COM-
PLETELY SELF-CONTAINED WITH LITTLE OR NO SYSTEM RELATED ACTIVITIES.
THE ORIGINAL VERSION WAS DESIGNED AND WRITTEN BY LARRY W. SMITH, DATA
SYSTEMS, CUPERTINO FOR THE SOLE PURPOSE OF FINDING A FLEXIBLE MEANS TO
DESIGN COURSE GRADUATION CERTIFICATES INTERNALLY, THUS ELIMINATING ALL
OUTSIDE COSTS. THE PROGRAM IS COMPLETELY OPERATOR ORIENTED, REQUIRING
NO PRIOR KNOWLEDGE OF PROGRAMMING OR SYSTEM RELATED ACTIVITIES. WITH
THE SIMPLE PROGRAM STRUCTURE, THE USER IS GIVEN AN EASY MEANS OF CON-
VERSATIONALLY DESIGNING FORMS WITH THE 7210 PLOTTER.
FEATURES:
SIMPLE OPERATOR COMMANDS
AUTOMATIC HEADER CENTERING
FLOWCHART SYMBOL PLOTTING
VARIABLE CHARACTER HEIGHT
CHARACTER STRING PLOTTING
CHARACTER SHADING
CHARACTER TRACING
CHARACTER ANGLING
CHARACTER ROTATING
ALL COORDINATES ARE EXPRESSED IN INCHES
CONSOLE SESSION ACCOUNTING
LIST OUTPUT ACCOUNTING
COMMAND BATCHING
UNLIMITED DESIGN APPLICATIONS
DYNAMIC LOGICAL UNIT ASSIGNMENT
PLOTTER VARIABLE FORMS
DUE TO THE LOGICAL AND SIMPLISTIC STRUCTURE OF THE PROG, THE USER CAN
SIT AT A CONSOLE AND CONVERSATIONALLY DESIGN WHAT HE/SHE WISHES ON THE
PLOTTER. SINCE ALL CMNDS THAT EITHER INSTRUCT THE PLOTTER TO PERFORM
AN ACTION OR SIMPLY DETERMINE THE STATUS OF SOMETHING ARE ALL 2 LETTER,
THE USER IS NOT BURDENED WITH LEARNING THE O.S. (DOS OR RTE)
UNDER WHICH IT RUNS, NOT A COMPLICATED INSTRUCTION SET. FURTHERMORE,
ONCE THE USER IS UNDER CONTROL OF THE PROGRAM, THE FORMAT AND USE OF
ALL COMMANDS ARE LOGICAL AND STRAIGHTFORWARD AS TO THEIR INDIVIDUAL
FUNCTION AND RELATIONSHIP FOR OTHER COMMANDS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
LANGUAGE: FORTRAN IV
OPERATING SYSTEM: DOS-M, DOS-III, OR RTE
LOGICAL UNIT ASSIGNMENTS: COMPLETELY PROGRAM INDEPENDENT
ADDITIONAL SOFTWARE: PLOTTER LIBRARY (20810B),
DOS PLOTTER DRIVER DVR10 (20581A) OR
RTE PLOTTER DRIVER DVR10 (72009A).
NOTE:THE AUTHOR HAS MODIFIED THE PLOTTER LIB. (20810B) TO INCREASE
PLOT SPEED. IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE MODIFIED VERSION BE
USED FOR PLOTTING CLARITY.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
CPU: 2100 OR 2116
PERIPHERAL DEVICES: REQUIRED RECOMMENDED
1. 7210A PLOTTER 1. LINE PRINTER (2767)
2. 2600A CRT OR 2. MOVING HEAD - 7900A
2752 TTY
3. DISC (FIXED 3. 2600A CRT
HEAD OR MH)
DMA: 2 CHANNELS
MEMORY: COMPILATION - 24K MINIMUM
EXECUTION - 24K MINIMUM
FLOATING POINT HARDWARE IS RECOMMENDED TO INCREASE PLOT SPEED.
PROGRAM OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
THE DRAFTING PROG MUST BE COMPILED UNDER FORTRAN IV AND STORED ON A
DISC FILE CALLED "DRAFT" IN ABSOLUTE FORM READY FOR EXECUTION. THIS
WAY, THE USER CAN INSERT HIS/HER DISC PACK CONTAINING THE PROG AND
RETRIEVE IT EASILY UNDER THE APPROPRIATE OPERATING SYSTEM.
B01901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: JGL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
JIM'S GRAPHICS LIBRARY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
GRAPHIC LIBRARY INTERFACE
TERMINAL
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
JGL IS A LIBRARY OF FORTRAN ROUTINES WHICH PROVIDE A SIMPLE
INTERFACE TO THE GRAPHICS CAPABILITIES OF THE 2648 TERMINAL.
THE USER MUST HAVE A 2648 HP GRAPHICS TERMINAL TO USE JGL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: SUBMITT FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
PLEASE SEE EXAMPLE SOURCE PROGRAM FILE &JGL2.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE EXAMPLE PROGRAM &JGL3.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
USER MUST HAVE A 2648 HP GRAPHICS TERMINAL TO USE JGL PACKAGE.
B02001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PENNY
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COMPUTER AIDED SCHEMATIC DRAWING PROGRAM WITH DATA BASE.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
GRAPHIC DISPLAY DATA BASE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
E-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IVB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
101 PAGE MOTHER PARTITION
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PENNY IS A COMPUTER AIDED SCHEMATIC DRAWING PROGRAM THAT CAN INCREASE
THE PRODUCTIVITY OF ENGINEERING OR DESIGN PERSONNEL. PENNY CAPABILITIES
ALLOW USERS TO INTERACTIVELY CREATE DRAWINGS. A POWERFUL HIERARCHICAL
DATA BASE STRUCTURE ALLOWS THE DESIGNER TO USE PREDEFINED STANDARDIZED
FIGURES; ELIMINATING DRAFTING AND DESIGN ERRORS. WITH SUITABLE PLOTTERS,
THE HARDCOPY OUTPUT IS OF GOOD DRAFTING QUALITY ELIMINATING THE NEED TO
RE-DRAFT DESIGNER SKETCHES.
THE PENNY PROGRAM WAS ORIGINALLY WRITTEN TO HELP WITH DIGITAL SCHEMATIC
DESIGN. HOWEVER, IT IS BASICALLY A LINE DRAWING PROGRAM AND THUS HAS
BEEN USED FOR OTHER APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS FLOOR LAYOUTS, PIPING DIAGRAMS
AND OTHERS.
PENNY USES IMAGE/1000,PROD#92069A,REV.1912; GRAPHICS/1000,PROD#
92840A, REV.1901; AND OPERATES UNDER RTE-IVB. IT REQUIRES A GRAPHICS
TERMINAL, EITHER A 2647A OR 2648A. PENNY CAN OUTPUT HARD COPY TO THE
7221A OR 9872A FOUR COLOR PLOTTERS BUT,THEY ARE NOT NECESSARY FOR THE
OPERATION OF PENNY. HIGH SPEED MEMORY AND A 7905/6/20 DISK ARE RECOM-
MENDED TO GET GOOD REAL TIME RESPONSE. A 101 PAGE MOTHER PARTITION IS
ALSO REQUIRED TO OPERATE PENNY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: LOAD - PENNY LOAD TRANSFER FILE:TR,LOAD,LISTLU#
FILE# 3: DLOD - LOADR COMMAND FILE
FILE# 4: CREATE - DATA BASE CREATE TRANSFER FILE
FILE# 5: SAVEIT - TRANSFER FILE TO "SP" PENNY AND SEGMENTS
FILE# 6: OFPEN - TRANSFER FILE TO OF,PENNY AND SEGMENTS
FILE# 7: PURGIT - TRANSFER FILE TO PURGE PENNY AND SEGMENTS
FILE# 8: &PMAIN - PENNY MAIN PROGRAM SOURCE
FILE# 9: &PENY0 - PENNY SEGMENT 0 SOURCE
FILE# 10: &PENY1 - PENNY SEGMENT 1 SOURCE
FILE# 11: &PENY2 - PENNY SEGMENT 2 SOURCE
FILE# 12: &PENY3 - PENNY SEGMENT 3 SOURCE
FILE# 13: &PENY4 - PENNY SEGMENT 4 SOURCE
FILE# 14: &PENY5 - PENNY SEGMENT 5 SOURCE
FILE# 15: &PSUBS - PENNY SUBROUTINES SOURCE
FILE# 16: &DELAY - PENNY SUBROUTINE ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 17: &DLTBL - GRAPHICS DEVICE LINK TABLE ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 18: &PENPL - IMAGE DATA BASE SCHEMA SOURCE
FILE# 19: !REPOR - QUERY REPORT FILE FOR DETAIL RECORDS
FILE# 20: !LINES - QUERY REPORT FILE FOR DETAIL RECORDS
FILE# 21: !DRWGS - QUERY REPORT FILE FOR MASTER RECORDS
FILE# 22: MANUAL - PENNY PROGRAMMING AND REFERENCE MANUAL
FILE# 23: %PMAIN - PENNY MAIN PROGRAM BIN RELOC
FILE# 24: %PENY1 - PENNY SEGMENT 1 BIN RELOC
FILE# 25: %PENY2 - PENNY SEGMENT 2 BIN RELOC
FILE# 26: %PENY3 - PENNY SEGMENT 3 BIN RELOC
FILE# 27: %PENY4 - PENNY SEGMENT 4 BIN RELOC
FILE# 28: %PENY5 - PENNY SEGMENT 5 BIN RELOC
FILE# 29: %PSUBS - PENNY SUBROUTINES BIN RELOC
FILE# 30: %DELAY - PENNY SUBROUTINE BIN RELOC
FILE# 31: %ZAP - PENNY SUBROUTINE BIN RELOC
FILE# 32: %DLTBL - GRAPHICS DEVICE LINK TABLE BIN RELOC
FILE# 33: %LDSEG - PENNY SUBROUTINE BIN RELOC
FILE# 34: %OLY.E - PENNY SUBROUTINE BIN RELOC
FILE# 35: %PADCR - DRAWING TABLET DRIVER FOR 2648A
FILE# 36: CPENNY - TRANSFER FILE TO COMPILE PENNY ROUTINES
FILE# 37: DTBASE - PRE-PREPARED DATA BASE: PENNY"AN"FORMAT
FILE# 38: %PENY0 - PENY SEGMENT
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
TR,LOAD,P1
P1 = LIST LU#
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,PENNY,P1,P2
P1 = INTERACTIVE INPUT LU#, DEFAULT = SCHEDULING TERMINAL
P2 = HARD COPY PLOTTER LU#, DEFAULT = NO HARD COPY ALLOWED
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE MANUAL
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE MANUAL
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE MANUAL
**MISCELLANEOUS:
TO CREATE PENNY DATA BASE:
TR,CREATE,P1
P1 = LIST LU#
[CREATES DATA BASE WITH NAME: PENJM:7500:PW]
COMPILE ALL PENNY SOURCES:
TR,CPENNY,P1
P1 = LIST LU#
PRINT THE PENNY MANUAL:
DU,MANUAL,P1
P1 = LINE PRINTER LU#
PRINT THE PENNY MANUAL WITH THE SPOOL SYSTEM:
SL,P1,MANUAL,,P1
CS,P1
P1 = LINE PRINTER LU#
B02101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: HP45
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP CALCULATOR SIMULATOR W/ OCTAL FUNCTIONS FOR 2645+ TERMINAL
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 2 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
CALCULATOR FLOATING POINT TERMINAL
DISPLAY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IVB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
HP45 SETS UP A 2645 (OR GREATER) TERMINAL TO SIMULATE AN HP POCKET CAL-
CULATOR WITH RPN LOGIC. THE CALCULATOR HAS A 4 LEVEL STACK AND 10
ADDRESSABLE MEMORIES. IT HAS ABOUT 20 SCIENTIFIC FUNCTIONS INCLUDING
THE STANDARD STACK AND MEMORY FUNCTIONS. THE PROGRAM ALSO INCLUDES A
'BINARY CALCULATOR' MODE WHICH PERFORMS OPERATIONS ON OCTAL NUMBERS.
NUMBERS READ IN IN THIS MODE ARE INTERPRETED AS OCTAL WITHOUT THE USUAL
'@' CHARACTER PRECEEDING THE NUMBER. ONE FUNCTION IN THIS MODE IS TO
DISPLAY THE INTEGER, OCTAL, & ASCII EQUIVALENTS OF THE NUMBER INPUT.
THE PROGRAM TURNS ON & OFF 'DISPLAY FUNCTIONS' AROUND THE ASCII EQUI-
VALENT TO ALLOW OUTPUTTING OF SPECIAL CHARACTERS.
THE PROGRAM SETS UP THE TERMINAL IN FORMAT MODE AND PERFORMS BLOCK
READS. THIS MEANS THAT THE 'ENTER' BUTTON ON THE TERMINAL MUST BE USED
INSTEAD OF THE CARRIAGE RETURN TO INPUT TO THE COMPUTER.
HP45 USES EXEC AND REIO CALLS TO THE SYSTEM, AND REQUIRES AT LEAST AN
HP 2645 TERMINAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: &HP45 - MAIN SOURCE W/ BINC & DISP SUBROUTINES
FILE# 3: &SET
FILE# 4: &BLKRD
FILE# 5: &RESET
FILE# 6: *HP45 - LOADR COMMAND FILE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
NOTHING UNUSUAL. COMPILE &HP45 & THE 3 TERMINAL ROUTINES (&SET, &BLKRD,
&RESET) AND RUN THE LOADER USING *HP45.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM IS COMPLETELY INTERACTIVE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
NUMBERS ARE PASSED BACK AND FORTH BETWEEN THE REGULAR CALCULATOR AND
THE BINARY CALCULATOR VIA MEMORY NUMBER ZERO.
THE CALCULATOR RUNS VERY MUCH LIKE A TYPICAL HP CALCULATOR. INPUTTING
A NUMBER CAUSES IT TO BE PUSHED UP INTO THE STACK, OPERATIONS ARE PER-
FORMED ON THE X & Y REGISTERS IN THE STACK, THE TOP OF THE STACK DUPLI-
CATES AS IT DROPS DOWN, ETC.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
C00101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CONVC
**PROGRAM TITLE:
4221 BCD TO FLOATING POINT CONVERSION ROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION BCD FLOATING POINT
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
534 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (84 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THESE TWO ROUTINES CONVERT 4-2-2-1 BCD DATA TO BINARY. THE DATA IS
READ BY THE SUPPORTED DRIVER, DVR40 FROM A DSI CARD CONNECTED TO A
FIVE-DIGIT COUNTER. INPUT IS FIVE DIGITS, TWENTY BITS, STORED IN TWO
WORDS; OUTPUT IS A TWO-WORD FLOATING POINT NUMBER. THE RANGE AND
FUNCTION RETURNED BY SOME INSTRUMENTS ARE IGNORED. IT CAN BE EASILY
MODIFIED TO CONVERT DATA FROM AN EIGHT-DIGIT COUNTER.
THESE ROUTINES ARE FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
FOLLOW THE STANDARD RTE PROCEDURE TO ASSEMBLE THESE SUBROUTINES. THE
SUBROUTINES ARE CONFIGURED INTO THE LIBRARY AT SYSTEM GENERATION TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE:
FORTRAN: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE:
CALL CONVC(DATA) JSB CONVC
DEF *+2
DEF DATA
WHERE: DATA IS A TWO WORD COUNTER READING ON ENTRY AND A
FLOATING POINT NUMBER ON EXIT WITH NO DIGITS TO THE
RIGHT OF THE DECIMAL POINT.
TO CHANGE THIS ROUTINE TO BE USED WITH AN 8 DIGIT COUNTER, OMIT LINE
NR. 44 "AND =B17". THIS WILL ALLOW CONVERSION ON THE UPPER THREE
SIGNIFICANT DIGITS.
INCLUDED ALSO WITH THIS PACKAGE IS A ROUTINE TO CONVERT A 4221 CODED
NUMBER TO A BINARY NUMBER.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
FORTRAN: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE:
CALL F4221(DATA) JSB F4221
DEF *+2
DEF IDATA
IDATA=4221 NUMBER ON ENTRY TO THE ROUTINE AND BINARY ON EXIT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
C00201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR42
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DVR42 RTE CROSSBAR SCANNER DVR & CHANNEL CODE CONVERSION ROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER SCANNER CONVERSION
CODE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
197 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (145 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DVR42 OPERATES UNDER THE I/O CONTROL MODULE OF RTE TO CONTROL THE
HP2911 CROSSBAR SCANNER. THIS DRIVER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR CONTROLLING
OUTPUT TO ANY NUMBER OF SCANNER CARDS SIMULTANEOUSLY. IT ACCEPTS
BINARY WRITE AND CLEAR REQUESTS.
IT IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
FOLLOW STANDARD TECHNIQUES TO ASSEMBLE THESE PROGRAMS. THIS DRIVER
MUST BE CONFIGURED INTO THE SYSTEM AT RTE SYSTEM GENERATION TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A SIMPLE FORTRAN PROGRAM TO TEST THIS DRIVER FOLLOWS:
FTN
PROGRAM TEST(3,60)
5 WRITE(1,10)
10 FORMAT(//"ENTER CHANNEL NUMBER & PROGRAM CODE"//)
READ(1,*)ICHAN,IPROG
C (NOTE: FOR A 4221 SCANNER USE THIS LINE OF CODING):
CALL T4221(ICHAN)
C (NOTE: FOR A 8421 SCANNER USE THIS LINE OF CODING):
CALL BTBCD(ICHAN)
WRITE(13)ICHAN,IPROG
WRITE(1,20)
20 FORMAT(//"CHECK TO SEE THAT SCANNER IS"/" ON RIGHT CHANNEL"//)
GO TO 5
END
END$
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TWO WORDS OF DATA ARE REQUIRED TO OPERATE THE SCANNER.
1. CHANNEL NUMBER - - (0-999) 8421 OR 4221 CODE, DEPENDING ON THE
SCANNER USED.
2. SCANNER PROGRAM
BITS 15...0
FUNCTIONS: OHM/FREQ. OR DELAY
WHERE:
BITS. 5- - - - - - - - - - 3 2- - - - - - - - - - - - 0
0 = AC/DC VOLTS 0 = 15.0 MSEC
1 = FREQUENCY 1 = 17.5 MSEC
2 = RESISTANCE 2 = 22.0 MSEC
3 = 27.0 MSEC
4 = 42.0 MSEC
5 = 62.0 MSEC
6 = 145.0 MSEC
7 = 500.0 MSEC
THERE IS NO CONTINUATOR SECTION FOR THE DRIVER AND THE CONTENTS OF THE
INTERRUPT CELL SHOULD BE OCTAL 1067SC--WHERE SC = SELECT CODE OF THE
SCANNER.
ENTRY POINT(S)
FORTRAN USE INFORMATION:
FOR A 4221 CONTROLLED SCANNER:
CALL T4221(ICHAN)
(ICHAN IS BINARY IN ENTRY AND 4221 CODE ON EXIT)
WRITE(IEQT) ICHAN,IPROG
(IPROG IS THE PROGRAM CONTROL WORD DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4.0)
FOR A 8421 CONTROLLED SCANNER:
CALL BTBCD(ICHAN)
(ICHAN IS BINARY IN ENTRY AND 8421 CODE ON EXIT)
WRITE (IEQT) ICHAN,IPROG
(IEQT IN BOTH THE ABOVE IS THE DEVICE REFERENCE NUMBER
ASSIGNED TO THE SCANNER AT SYSTEM GENERATION TIME)
THE SCANNER IS THEN SET TO THE INDICATED CHANNEL.
BTBCD (BINARY TO BCD (8421) CONVERSION ROUTINE)
FORTRAN CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CALLING SEQUENCE:
CALL BTBCD(INUMB) JSB BTBCD (JUMP TO ROUTINE)
DEF *+2 (DEFINES RETURN PT)
DEF INUMB (DEFINES NUMBER TO
CONVERT)
INUMB IS BINARY AND BCD (8421) ON EXIT.
T4221 (BINARY TO 4221 CONVERSION ROUTINE)
FORTRAN CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CALLING SEQUENCE:
CALL T4221(INUMB) JSB T4221 (JUMP TO ROUTINE)
DEF *+2 (DEFINES RETURN PT)
DEF INUMB (DEFINES NUMBER TO CONVERT)
INUMB IS BINARY ON ENTRY AND 4221 CODE ON EXIST.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
C00301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS/DOS-M/RTE 3480 DVM DVR AND BCD CONVERSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER BCD
CONVERSION
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
138 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
1. THIS DRIVER INPUTS BCD DATA FROM THE HP3480 DVM, AND (BCD) CONVERTS
IT TO FLOATING POINT. THE INITIATOR WILL TEST FOR THE CORRECT CALL-
ING SEQUENCE AND THEN START THE MEASUREMENT. THE CONTINUATOR RETURNS
THE RAW DATA INTO A TWO-WORD ARRAY WHERE THE CONVERSION ROUTINE CON-
VERTS IT TO FLOATING POINT FORMAT.
THE DRIVER IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
2. HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
3480 DVM
11146A INTERFACE
MINIMUM RTE, DOS OR DOS-M CONFIGURATION
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. SELECT PROPER CONTROL STATEMENT
'N' = RTE
'Z' = DOS, DOS-M
2. COMPILE/ASSEMBLE THE TEST DRIVER AND SUBROUTINE BCD
3. INCORPORATE DRIVER INTO SYSTEM AT SYSTEM CONFIGURATION TIME.
USE STANDARD LOADING PROCEDURE OF YOUR SYSTEM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS DRIVER ALLOWS DOS, DOS-M AND RTE USERS TO INPUT BCD DATA FROM
THE 3480 DVM AND CONVERT IT TO FLOATING POINT.
WHEN THE DRIVER IS CALLED, THE INITIATOR WILL TEST FOR THE CORRECT
CALLING-SEQUENCE AND THEN START THE MEASUREMENT. THE CONTINUATOR
RETURNS THE RAW DATA INTO A FLOATING POINT ARRAY.
FROM THERE THE USER CAN CONVERT THE DATA TO FLOATING POINT FORMAT
USING THE ROUTINE "BCD". FORTRAN-CALLABLE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
WHEN USING EXEC-CALLS:
CALL EXEC (1,LU,ARRAY,LEN)
'LEN' MUST BE # OF WORDS IN THE FLOATING POINT ARRAY *2.
FOR EXAMPLE:
DIMENSION A(100)
.
.
.
CALL EXEC (1,LU,A,200)
NOTE:
THE DRIVER WILL ONLY RETURN RAW DATA INTO THE ARRAY! THIS DRIVER
DOES NOT USE DMA.
C00401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ADCIN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE HP 2310 ANALOG TO DIGITAL CONVERTER DISC STORAGE ROUTINE.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DISC STORAGE ANALOG/DIGITAL
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
2939 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS, (327 WITHOUT).
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN CALLABLE SUBROUTINE ALLOWS RTE TO USE MOST OF
MEMORY AS A BUFFER TO INPUT DATA FROM THE HP2310 ANALOG-TO-
DIGITAL CONVERTER AND OUTPUT IT TO THE DISC AT THE FULL SPEED
OF THE MULTIVERTER WITH NO BREAK IN DATA. ALL SAMPLES ARE
EVENLY SPACED AND THE NUMBER OF DATA POINTS TAKEN IS LIMITED
ONLY BY THE SIZE OF THE DISC. THE MAXIMUM POSSIBLE THROUGHPUT
RATE IS 80 KHZ.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS A MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM, AN HP2310 ANALOG-
TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER, AND AN HP2770 60 HZ OR 50 HZ DISC.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TERMINAL READY
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
LOAD PROGRAM "TESTA", FOLLOWED BY SUBROUTINE "DREAD" THEN
DO A LIBRARY LOAD AND WHEN THE LOADER ASKS FOR "ADCIN" LOAD IT.
BE SURE "ADCIN" RESIDES ABOVE 30401B. IF NOT, ADD A LARGER
DUMMY BUFFER IN LINE 3 OF "TESTA".
PROGRAM "TESTA" PLOTS THE DATA ON A CALCOMP MODEL 565
PLOTTER. IF THIS PLOTTER IS NOT AVAILABLE, THEN THE FOLLOWING
EDIT FILE MUST BE APPLIED TO "TESTA" TO PRINT THE DATA ON THE
TTY.
/R,62,72
190 NTRAK=NTRAK-3
/R,74
INDAT=1
/R,81,83
IC=II-1
Y=FLOAT(-IDATA)/3276.8
WRITE(1,500)INDAT,Y,IC
500 FORMAT("POINT #"15"="E12.5" VOLTS ON CHAN #"15)
INDAT=INDAT+1
/D,95,98
/E
A PLOT OF THE DATA IS MORE USEFUL AS IT ALLOWS THE USER
TO SPOT DATA BREAKS ON THE PLOT. THESE BREAKS MAY OCCUR WHEN
THE MAXIMUM SPEED OF THE ROUTINE OF 80K IS EXCEEDED.
THE MAIN PURPOSE OF "TESTA" IS TO SHOW THE USER HOW TO
EXTRACT THE DATA FROM THE DISC IN A FASHION EASY TO ANALYZE.
THE DISC CHANNELS USED ARE 12 & 13B. IF THE USER OF THIS
ROUTINE WISHES TO CHANGE THIS ASSIGNMENT TO SOMETHING ELSE, HE
MUST CHANGE LINES 413,435 & 436 IN "ADCIN" TO THE APPROPRIATE
SETTING.
# OF DATA TRACKS? 3
CHAN & MODE (6,7)#? 0,7
ADC SC(@)? @16
(RTE IS SWAPPED TO DISC, 3 TRACKS OF DATA ARE TAKEN AND
RTE IS SWAPPED BACK)
# OF SEQUENTIAL CHANNELS? 16
(CALCOMP MODEL 565 PLOTTER BEGINS PLOTTING HERE AND USER
JUST EXAMINE THE DATA FOR CORRECTNESS. IT IS RECOMMENDED
THE USER PUT A SINE WAVE INTO CHANNELS 0,2,4,6,8,10,12,14,16,
AND A SHORT INTO CHANNELS 1,3,5,7,9,11,13,15).
THIS MAKES DATA RETRIEVAL PROBLEMS MORE OBVIOUS.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
BE SURE THIS SUBROUTINE RESIDES ABOVE LOCATION 30401(OCTAL) IN
MEMORY AS DESCRIBED IN SECTIONS 2.0,4.0, & 4.2.1.
C00501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR75
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PRIVILEGED RTE DRIVER FOR HP8054 AUDIO ANALYZER.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PRIVILEGED AUDIO ANALYZER
ANALYZER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
204 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PRIVILEGED RTE DRIVER, DVR75, CONTROLS THE HP8054A AUDIO ANALYZER
ON READ/WRITE REQUESTS. IT REQUIRES THE HP15163A DATA SOURCE INTERFACE
CARD WITH CABLE AND THE HP12620A BREADBOARD INTERFACE CARD.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DVR75 SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES. DRIVER MUST BE CONFIGURED AT SYSTEM
GENERATION TIME. IT IS TO BE LOADED WITH THE FOLLOWING SUBROUTINE.
ASMB,R,B,L
NAM $JP75
ENT $JP75, $JT75
$JB75 JSB P.55
$JT75 JSB T.55
END
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE DRIVER IS SENT A CONTROL WORD BY MEANS OF A WRITE REQUEST. THE
DRIVER SENDS THE CONTROL WORD TO THE 3RD OCTAVE ANALYZER AND RETURNS
WITH AN IMMEDIATE COMPLETION. AT THIS POINT, THE CALLING PROGRAM MUST
SUSPEND ITSELF OR WAIT FOR TIME INDICATED BY THE DELAY CONTROL PART OF
THE CONTROL WORD. THE DRIVER IS THEN SENT A READ REQUEST AND AN INPUT
BUFFER OF EVEN LENGTH AND AT LEAST 48 WORDS LONG. UNDER INTERRUPT THE
THE DATA IS TAKEN AND RETURNED TO THE INPUT BUFFER INTERFACED WITH THE
CHANNEL NUMBERS UPON WHICH THE DATA WAS TAKEN. WHEN ALL 24 CHANNELS ARE
READ, THE TBG IS FOOLED INTO COMPLETING THE DRIVER AS IN ALL PRIVILEGED
DRIVERS USING ONE DUMMY CARD.
ENTRY POINT(S)
I.75, P.75, T.75, C.75
I.75 ENTRY/EXIT FOR INITIATOR
P.75 ENTRY/EXIT FOR PRIVILEGED SECTION
T.75 ENTRY/EXIT FOR TIMER INTERRUPT
C.75 ENTRY/EXIT OF COMPLETION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
C00601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: R3485
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CONVERSION ROUTINE FOR HP 2058E SUBSYSTEM RTE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION FLOATING POINT DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
97 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE DOES A SERIES OF MEASUREMENTS ON AN HP 2058E OPTION 167
SUBSYSTEM (HP 3480A VOLTMETER/3485A SCANNER), AND THEN DOES THE CON-
VERSION OF THE DATA TO FLOATING POINT.
THE SUBROUTINE USES THE HP 2058E SCANNER SUBSYSTEM RTE DRIVER (DVR57),
CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM HP 22508.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALLING SEQUENCE:
- ASSEMBLER:
EXT R3485
JSB R3485
DEF *+5
DEF IFUN
DEF DATA
DEF INUM
DEF IPW
FORTRAN:
CALL R3485 (IFUN, DATA, INUM, IPW)
WHERE:
IFUN = FUNCTION BITS 0-5: LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
BITS 6: = 0 = SEQUENTIAL
= 1 = DIGITISE
DATA = BUFFER WHERE DATA IS TO BE STORED
INUM = NUMBER OF MEASUREMENTS
IPW = PROGRAM WORD BITS 0-5: CHANNEL NUMBER
BITS 6-7: RANGE = 0 = 100MV
= 1 = 1 VOLT
= 2 = 10 VOLTS
BIT 9: FILTER= 0 = OUT
= 1 = IN
WHEN RETURNING FROM THE ROUTINE, THE FLOATING POINT DATA WILL BE STORED
IN DATA. IF THERE WAS AN OVERLOAD, THE NUMBER 1E+30 WILL BE STORED.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
FTN,L
PROGRAM TRY2
DIMENSION X(10)
C
C
C THIS SAMPLE PROGRAM WILL DO 10 MEASUREMENTS ON CHANNEL 3
C OF A 3480A-3485A SUBSYSTEM (DIGITISE). THE RANGE IS
C 10 VOLT, AND THE FILTER IS OUT.
C THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE SUBSYSTEM IS 8.
C
C
CALL R3485(110B,X,10,203B)
WRITE(6,100)X
100 FORMAT(X,"THE DATA IS:",/,5F12.3)
END
RESULTS
THE DATA IS:
-7.380 4.000 5.799 6.000 -1.999
THE DATA IS:
-7.200 2.009 5.999 5.000 -3.799
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IN CASE OF OVERLOAD, THE NUMBER 1E+30 IS RETURNED. SEE ALSO THE
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR THE DRIVER DVR57 (HP22508).
**MISCELLANEOUS:
C00701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
7
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 2058E SCANNER SUBSYSTEM RTE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER SCANNER METER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
238 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS IS AN RTE DRIVER FOR THE HP2058E OPTION 167 SCANNER SUBSYSTEM
(HP3480A VOLTMETER WITH HP3485A SCANNER). THE DRIVER PERMITS YOU TO
DO A SERIES OF MEASUREMENTS ON THE SAME (DIGITISE) OR DIFFERENT
(SEQUENTIAL) CHANNELS. THE DRIVER WORKS UNDER DMA TO OBTAIN THE
MAXIMUM SPEED OF THE SUBSYSTEM (1000 MEASUREMENTS/SEC.).
THIS PROGRAM REQUIRES A MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM (16K, DMA, EAU)
AND 2058E OPT. 167 SUBSYSTEM (3480A VM - 3485A SCANNER)
LITERATURE REFERENCE
RTE MANUAL, HP2058E SCANNER SUBSYSTEM OPTION 167 MANUAL
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE THE DRIVER WITH A DOS OR RTE SYSTEM.
2. GENERATE A RTE SYSTEM, AND INCLUDE THE DRIVER WITH THE OTHER DRIVERS.
3. WHEN THE GENERATOR ASKS:
*EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRY
TYPE AT THE APPROPRIATE PLACE:
SC, DVR57, D, (T)
WHERE: SC = SELECT CODE OF DSI OF SUBSYSTEM
(HIGHEST PRIORITY INTERFACE)
4. GIVE THE DESIRED LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
5. WHEN THE GENERATOR ASKS:
*INTERRUPT TABLE
TYPE:
S1, EQU, N
S2, EQT, N
WHERE: S1 = SELECT CODE OF DSI
S2 = SELECT CODE OF PROGRAM CARD (MUST BE S1 + 1)
6. DO REST OF GENERATION AS USUAL.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALLING PROCEDURE:
1. ASSEMBLER:
EXT EXEC
JSB EXEC
DEF *+6
DEF IRC
DEF IFUN
DEF BUF
DEF INUM
DEF IPW
2. FORTRAN:
CALL EXEC (IRC, IFUN, BUF, INUM, IPW)
WHERE:
IRC = REQUEST CODE FOR RTE: MUST BE 1 (READ)
IFUN = FUNCTION: BITS 0-5: LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF SUBSYSTEM
BIT 6 : = 0: SEQUENTIAL (DIFFERENT
CHANNELS)
= 1: DIGITISE (SAME CHANNEL)
BUF - BUFFER WHICH HAS TO CONTAIN THE MEASUREMENTS (LENGTH
MUST BE AT LEAST INUM*2)
INUM = NUMBER OF MEASUREMENTS
IPW = PROGRAM WORD:
BITS 0-5: CHANNEL NUMBER (STARTING CHANNEL FOR
SEQUENTIAL)
BITS 6-7: RANGE = 0 = 100 MV
= 1 = 1 VOLT
= 2 = 10 VOLT
BIT 9: FILTER = 0 = FILTER OUT
= 1 = FILTER IN
STATUS INFO:
STATUS BIT 0 IN EQT CONTAINS FILTER INFORMATION:
IF = 0: FILTER WAS OUT
IF = 1: FILTER WAS IN
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. THE DRIVER CAN BE USED FOR SEVERAL SUBSYSTEMS.
2. IN THE CASE OF SEQUENTIAL, IF STARTING FROM A CHANNEL OTHER THAN 1,
AND IN THE CASE OF DIGITISE, THE DRIVER DOES ONE DUMMY MEASUREMENT TO
INITIATE THE CHANNEL NUMBER.
3. IF THE FILTER IS PROGRAMMED "OUT" AND IT WAS PREVIOUSLY PROGRAMMED
"IN", THEN THE DRIVER DOES 2 DUMMY MEASUREMENTS TO GIVE THE 2 MS
DELAY (SEE 2058 OPT. 167 MANUAL).
4. ALL REAL MEASUREMENTS ARE DONE AT MAXIMUM SPEED (THE TIME BETWEEN
TWO MEASUREMENTS IS ALWAYS THE SAME!)
5. TO MEASURE RANDOMLY, DO THE CALL FOR 1 MEASUREMENT.
6. THE RETURNED DATA IS THE ORIGINAL HP 3480 DATA WITHOUT ANY CON-
VERSION. THE CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM HP 22507, CONVERSION ROUTINE FOR
HP 2058E SUBSYSTEM RTE DRIVER, WILL DO THE CONVERSION OF THE DATA TO
FLOATING POINT.
C00801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR62
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE 4271A 1 MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER METER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
RTE DRIVER 62 (DVR62) OPERATES THE 4271A 1MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER CON-
FIGURED WITH OPTIONS 1 AND 5. THE DRIVER OPERATES UNDER CONTROL OF
THE I/O MODULE OF THE REAL TIME EXECUTIVE (RTE). DVR62 IS LINKED TO BY
MEANS OF THE FORTRAN CALLS SETLC AND MEALC, WHICH CONTROL THE 4271A.
THESE CALLS PERFORM AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING OF THE RANGE, FUNCTION, AND
BIAS VOLTAGE AND AUTOMATIC MEASURING OF THE CAPACITANCE-INDUCTANCE AND
CONDUCTANCE-RESISTANCE-DISSIPATION FACTOR VALUES. THIS DRIVER HAS BEEN
USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH TEST PROGRAMS TO CONTROL I/C PROCESSING BY
DETERMINATION OF THE DOPING PROFILE DENSITIES IN SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES.
THE 12566B MICROCIRCUIT INTERFACE KIT WITH NO OPTIONS IS REQUIRED TO
INTERFACE THE 4271A TO THE HP 2100.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
RTE SYSTEM GENERATION (RTGEN) PROCEDURES:
1. PROGRAM INPUT PHASE
A. THE DRIVER RELOCATABLE IS LOADED WITH THE OTHER RTE SYSTEM DVRS.
B. THE L4271 TYPE 7 RELOCATABLE LIBRARY ROUTINE WHICH CONTAINS THE
SETLC AND MEALC FORTRAN CALLS FOR DVR62 IS LOADED WITH THE OTHER
LIBRARY MODULES.
C. FORTRAN OR FORTRAN IV AND THE FORTRAN LIBRARY MUST BE PART OF THE
RTE SYSTEM.
2. DISC LOADING PHASE
A. THE EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRY FOR DVR62 IS,
SC,DVR62
WHERE, SC=THE COMPUTER SELECT CODE NUMBER OF THE 4271A 1MHZ
DIGITAL LCR METER. DMA IS NOT USED BY THE DRIVER. A TIMEOUT
VALUE AND BUFFERING CAN BE DECLARED IF DEEMED NECESSARY BY THE
USER.
3. THE NORMAL PROCEDURES ARE UTILIZED TO CONFIGURE THE REMAINDER OF
THE RTE SYSTEM GENERATION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
LCR TEST PROGRAM PROCEDURE
1. CALIBRATE THE 4271A USING THE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE IN THE 4271A
OPERATORS MANUAL
2. MAKE SURE ALL THE CABLES ARE CORRECTLY WIRED AND CONNECTED TO
INTERFACE THE 4271A TO THE MODIFIED 12566B MICROCIRCUIT CARD.
3. PLACE THE FRONT PANEL SWITCHES OF THE 4271A IN THE "REM" POSITIONS
AND THE REAR PANEL SWITCH TO OPT 001 (INT).
4. CONNECT A LOAD TO THE TERMINALS OF THE 4271A.
5. LOAD THE RELOCATABLE OF THE LCR TEST PROGRAM WITH THE RTE LOADER
AND SCHEDULE LCR.
6. PROGRAM STEPS (KEYBOARD INTERRACTION)
A. CHECK FRONT AND REAR PANEL SWITCHES OF 4271A.
B. INPUT LOGICAL UNIT # OF 4271A.
C. INPUT RANGE SETTING OF 4271A.
D. INPUT FUNCTION SETTING OF 4271A.
E. INPUT BIAS SETTING OF 4271A.
F. OUTPUT OF CAPACITANCE-INDUCTANCE AND CONDUCTANCE-RESISTANCE-
DISSIPATION FACTOR VALUES.
G. CONTINUE MEASUREMENTS (YES OR NO).
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
RTE DRIVER 62 (DVR62) OPERATES THE 4271A 1MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER CON-
FIGURED WITH OPTIONS 1 AND 5. THE DRIVER OPERATES UNDER CONTROL OF
THEI/O MODULE OF THE REAL TIME EXECUTIVE (RTE). DVR62 IS LINKED TO
BY MEANS OF THE FORTRAN CALLS SETLC AND MEALC, WHICH CONTROL THE 4271A.
THESE CALLS PERFORM AUTOMATIC PROGRAMMING OF THE RANGE, FUNCTION, AND
BIAS VOLTAGE AND AUTOMATIC MEASURING OF THE CAPACITANCE-INDUCTANCE AND
CONDUCTANCE-RESISTANCE-DISSIPATION FACTOR VALUES. THIS DRIVER HAS
BEEN USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH TEST PROGRAMS TO CONTROL I/C PROCESSING
BY DETERMINATION OF THE DOPING PROFILE DENSITIES IN SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICES.
DIRECT CALLS TO ENTER THE DRIVER ARE AS FOLLOWS:
A. CALL SETLC(ILU,IRNG,IFCM,V)
--ILU(INTEGER)--LOGICAL UNIT # OF 4271A SET UP IN DEVICE REF. TABLE.
--IRNG(INTEGER)--RANGE OF 4271A (0-4).
--IFCM(INTEGER)--FUNCTION OF 4271A (0-3).
--V(FLOATING POINT)--VOLTAGE BIAS (0-399 VOLTS).
NOTE: SEE 4271A OPERATORS MANUAL FOR COMPLETE EXPLANATION OF IRNG,
IFCM, AND V INPUT VALUES.
B. CALL MEALC(ILU,CL,GR,IERR)
--ILU(INTEGER)--SAME AS SETLC CALL.
--CL(FLOATING POINT)--RETURNED CAPACITANCE (F) OR INDUCTANCE (H)
VALUE.
--GR(FLOATING POINT)--RETURNED CONDUCTANCE (MHOS), RESISTANCE (OHMS),
OR DISSIPATION FACTOR VALUE.
--IERR(INTEGER)<>0, NON-FATAL ERROR DETECTED.
=0, NO ERROR
NOTE: IF AN ERROR IS DETECTED THE RETURNED CL AND GR VALUES MAY BE
INVALID. ALWAYS BEWARE OF NEGATIVE VALUES.
THE SETLC AND MEALC CALLS ARE ENTRY POINTS CONTAINED IN THE L4271
LIBRARY PROGRAM. L4271 REFERENCES THE FOLLOWING EXTERNALS:
.ENTR,EXEC,IFIX,ERR0,.STOP,FLOAT, AND .RTOI
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR CODES:
A. FATAL ERRORS--PROGRAM STOPS EXECUTION
LC1--INVALID RANGE (CHECK SETLC CALL)
LC2--INVALID FUNCTION (CHECK SETLC CALL)
LC3--INVALID BIAS (CHECK SETLC CALL)
LC4--NO (-) RECEIVED ON EXPONENT OF DATA VALUE (CHECK
4271A OPERATION)
LC5--NO (,) RECEIVED AFTER C/L DATA (CHECK 4271A OPERATION)
LC6--NO (;) RECEIVED AFTER G/R DATA (CHECK 4271 OPERATION)
B. NON-FATAL ERRORS--PROGRAM EXECUTION CONTINUES AND ERROR CODE (IERR)
RETURNED TO CALLING PROGRAM
LC20--"UNBAL" DETECTED (CHECK 4271A PANEL SWITCHES OR SETLC CALL)
LC21--EXPONENT -38 RECEIVED (CHECK CONNECTION AND 4271 OPERATIONS)
LC22--"OUT OF RANGE" (CHECK 4271A PANEL SWITCHES OR STELC CALL)
LC23--"D-G,R" (RESET FUNCTION SWITCH IN SETLC CALL)
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THE PROGRAMMED VALUES (SETLC) AREN'T SENT TO THE 4271A UNTIL A
MEASURING 9MEALC) COMMAND IS RECEIVED BY DVR62.
THE FRONT PANEL SWITCHES MUST BE SET IN THE "REM" POSITIONS FOR
CORRECT OPERATION WITH DVR62. THE BACK PANEL SWITCH OF THE 4271A
MUST BE SET TO THE OPT 001 (INT) POSITION.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
RTE SYSTEM WITH FORTRAN -- HP2100.
4271A 1MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER WITH OPTIONS 1 AND 5.
THE 4271A 1MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER REQUIRES THE 12566B MICROCIRCUIT.
INTERFACT KIT, WITH NO OPTIONS, TO INTERFACE THE 4271A TO THE HP 2100.
NOTE HOWEVER, THAT CIRCUIT MODIFICATIONS ARE NEEDED TO DELAY THE I00
SIGNAL AN ADDITIONAL APPROX. 150 NS TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH AN HP 2100.
THE PURPOSE OF THIS EXTRA DELAY IS TO ALLOW THE DATA TO ARRIVE AT THE
DATA BUSS BEFORE I00 ARRIVES.
THE DETAILS OF THE MODIFICATION ARE ILLUSTRATED IN FIGURE 1. PIN 3
OF U67A IS DISCONNECTED FROM THE PC BOARD AND THE DIODE (1910-0022),
RESISTOR (2K), AND CAPACITOR (470PF) ARE CONNECTED AS SHOWN.
THE DELAY IS INCREASED FROM APPROX. 38 NS TO APPROX. 180 NS WITH THE
CIRCUIT MODIFICATION. ALSO, THE INTERFACE CABLE THAT CONNECTS THE
12566B MICROCIRCUIT CARD TO THE 4271A 1MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER MUST BE
WIRED AS SHOWN IN FIGURE 2 TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE SYNTAX OF DVR62.
LITERATURE REFERENCE
RTE SOFTWARE SYSTEM PROGRAM AND OPERATING MANAUL.
12566B, 12566B-001, 002, 003 MICROCIRCUIT INTERFACE KITS AND
OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUAL.
1MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER 4271A OPERATING AND SERVICE MANUAL.
CALCULATOR INTERFACE MODEL 4271A OPT 005 1MHZ DIGITAL LCR METER
OPERATING NOTE.
SUBPROGRAMS USED TO LINE TO DVR62 SETLC AND MEALC CALLS WHICH ARE
CONTAINED IN THE L4271 LIBRARY UTILITY PROGRAM. L4271 IS SUPPLIED
WITH DVR62 SOFTWARE.
C00901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BIBCD
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BINARY TO BCD CONVERSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
BCD CONVERSION
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M BCS RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE ALLOWS AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE, OR FORTRAN PROGRAM, TO
CONVERT ANY POSITIVE INTEGER FROM 0 TO 9999 TO A 4 DIGIT BCD NUMBER
CONTAINED IN A 16-BIT WORD RETURNED TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
DOS-M, BCS, MTS, RTE, SIO.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
1) COMPILE THE FORTRAN TEST PROGRAM. ASSEMBLE THE CONVERSION SUB-
ROUTINE.
2) LOAD BOTH PROGRAMS AND THE RELOCATABLE PROGRAM LIBRARY.
3) ENTER THE BINARY NUMBER IN FREE FORMAT (INTEGER DECIMAL) ON THE
SYSTEM TTY. THE PROGRAM WILL PRINT THE BINARY INTEGER, NUMBER AND
THE BCD CONVERTED NUMBER.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE.
EXT BIBCD
.
.
.
.
JSB BIBCD
DEF * +3
DEF I ADDRESS OF BINARY NUMBER
DEF J ADDRESS OF BCD NUMBER
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL BIBCD (I,J)
WHERE I IS THE BINARY NUMBER IN INTEGER FORMAT TO BE CONVERTED AND J
IS THE BCD VALUE RETURNED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF THE INPUT NUMBER IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE 0 TO 9999, THE SUBROUTINE
MERELY RETURNS WITHOUT ATTEMPTING A CONVERSION.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
C01001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 3437A SYSTEM VOLTMETER DEVICE SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
METER HP-IB ATS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THE 3437A DEVICE SUBROUTINES ARE HIGH LEVEL INTERFACE ROUTINES WHICH
CONVERT SIMPLE CALL STATEMENTS IN FORTRAN OR BASIC INTO RTE CALLS TO
THE HP-IB DRIVER.
PROGRAMMING THE 3437A IS DIVIDED INTO A SETUP CALL (DSVSU) AND A
MEASUREMENT CALL (DSVMS). ALL FRONT PANEL SWITCHES OF THE 3437A ARE
PROGRAMMABLE FOR RANGE, TRIGGER-SOURCE, AND DELAY. UP TO 100 READING
MAY BE MADE IN THE DIRECT MODE AND 1250 READING IN A SECOND MODE WHERE
THE READINGS ARE PUT INTO A DISC FILE.
USAGE IS MADE OF SOFTWARE FROM THE MULTI-TERMINAL INTERFACE SOFTWARE,
HP PART NO. 92425A TO BE COMPATABLE IN A MULTI-TERMINAL ENVIRONMENT.
MINOR MODIFICATIONS ARE NECESSARY IF THAT SOFTWARE IS NOT USED. SEE
HP-ATS APPLICATION NOTE AN 237-1.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
COMPUTER SYSTEM WITH RTE-II OR RTE-III
HP3437A SYSTEM VOLTMETER
HP 59310B INTERFACE BUSS I/O KIT
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMPILE BOTH MODULES AND SAVE THE RELOCATABLES.
2. THESE RELOCATABLE FILES MAY NOW BE USED LIKE ANY OTHER SUBROUTINE
WHEN LOADING A PROGRAM. OTHER ROUTINES ARE NEEDED FROM THE MULTI-
TERMINAL SOFTWARE (MTIS) PACKAGE HP 9245A. THE FILES WHICH CON-
TAIN THE NEEDED ROUTINES ARE:
%LUDV
%GTLU#
%IBLU0
%PAK
%UNPAK
%A2F
%ERROR
THEY MAY BE SPECIFIED AT LOAD TIME, OR IF INCLUDED DURING SYSTEM
GENERATION, WILL BE IN THE RTE SYSTEM LIBRARY.
NOTE THAT %ERROR REPLACES THE ERROR MODULE OF BASIC 1000/D.
3. THERE IS ALSO AN EXTERNAL REFERENCE TO DRTXX WHICH IS A MEMORY
RESIDENT MODULE FROM MTIS AND MUST BE INCLUDED AT SYSTEM GENERATION.
REFER TO THE MTIS MANUAL HP PART NO. 92425-93001 FOR FURTHER IN-
FORMATION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCES
SUBROUTINE DSVSU
FORTRAN - CALL DSVSU(IUNIT,R,IT,DD1)
CALL XSVSU(LU1,LU2,IERMS,IUNIT,R,IT,DD1)
BASIC - CALL DSVSU(U,R,T,D)
CALL XSVSU(L1,L2,I(1),U,R,T,D)
IUNIT = U = UNIT NUMBER OF THE HP 3437A
R = R = VOLTAGE RANGE:
.1, 1, 10 VOLTS
IT = T = TRIGGER SOURCE
1 - INTERNAL
2 - EXTERNAL
DD1 = D = DELAY SETTING:
175 MICROSECONDS TO 999,999 MICROSECONDS
IN 0.1 MICROSECOND STEPS
LU1 =L1 = LU NUMBER OF THE HP-IB INTERFACE CARD
LU2 = L2 = LU NUMBER OF THE 3437A
IERMS = L(1) = FIVE-ELEMENT INTEGER ARRAY, IN WHICH:
IERR(1) = ERROR CODE:
0 - NO ERROR
1 - PARAMETER ERROR, REPORTED IF:
VOLTAGE RANGE (R) < 0.1 OR >10
TRIGGER SOURCE (IT) <1 OR > 2
DELAY SETTING (DD1) < 175 OR
> 999,999
IERR(2) = CHARACTER COUNT OF MNEMONIC NAME
(5 IN THIS CASE)
IERR(3-5) = THE PACKED ASCII OF THE MNEMONIC NAME
IF IERR(1) > 0
BASIC CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
DSVSU(I,R,I,R)
SUBROUTINE DSVMU
FORTRAN - CALL DSVMU(IUNIT,ABUF,IN,IMODE)
CALL XSVMU(LU1,LU2,IERMS,IUNIT,ABUF,IN,IMODE)
BASIC - CALL DSVMU(U,B(1),N,M)
CALL XSVMU(L1,L2,I(1),U,B(1),N,M)
IUNIT = U = UNIT NUMBER OF HP 3437A
ABUF = B(1) = NAME OF BUFFER WHERE DATA IS STORED
IN = N = NUMBER OF READINGS:
MAXIMUM = 100 IF IMODE = 0
MAXIMUM = 1250 IF IMODE = 1
IMODE = M = MODE OF DATA TRANSFER:
0 - DIRECT TRANSFER VIA SPACE AVAILABLE MEMORY (SAM)
1 - TRANSFER DATA TO DISC (FILE NAME = VMOUT)
LU1 = L1 = LU NUMBER OF HP-IB INTERFACE CARD
LU2 = L2 = LU NUMBER OF HP 3437A
IERMS = I(1) = FIVE-ELEMENT INTEGER ARRAY, IN WHICH:
IERR(1) = ERROR CODE:
0 - NO ERROR
1 - PARAMETER ERROR, REPORTED IF:
NUMBER OF READINGS (IN) < 0 OR > 1250
MODE OF DATA TRANSFER (IMODE) < 0 OR
> 1
MODE OF DATA TRANSFER (IMODE) = 0 AND
NUMBER OF READINGS (IN) > 100
4 - BAD DATA FROM HP 3437A, REPORTED IT:
ANY NON-ASCII CHARACTER IS RETURNED
AS DATA FROM HP 3437A SYSTEM VOLT-
METER
IERR(2) = CHARACTER COUNT OF MNEMONIC NAME
(5 IN THIS CASE)
IERR(3-5) = THE PACKED ASCII OF THE MNEMONIC NAME
IF IERR(1) > 0
BASIC CONFIGURATION INFORMATION
DSVMU(I,RA,I,I)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR MESSAGES WHICH PERTAIN TO THE HP-IB:
9 - I/O CALL REJECTED
10 - LU1 OR LU2 NOT ASSIGNED TO STATION
11 - DMA INPUT REQUEST PREMATURELY TERMINATED
12 - I/O DEVICE TIME OUT
13 - IFC (INTERFACE CLEAR) DETECTED DURING I/O REQUEST
14 - SRQ SERVICE ABORTED
15 - NON-EXISTENT ALARM PROGRAM
16 - ILLEGAL CONTROL REQUEST
17 - EQT EXTENSION AREA FULL, NO NEW DEVICE MAY BE ADDED ON LINE
ERROR MESSAGE WHICH PERTAINS TO THE DISC:
18 - DISC WRITE ERROR
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THE 3437A HAS A BURST MODE CAPABILITY WHERE UP TO 9999 READINGS MAY BE
TAKEN WITH ONE CALL. THE DEVICE SUBROUTINE ALLOWS UP TO 100 READINGS
(MAY BE LIMITED BY SAM) IN THE DIRECT MODE (READING STORED IN MEMORY)
AND UP TO 1250 READINGS IF STORED IN A DISC FILE (MODE = 1). WHEN
USING MODE 1, A TYPE 1 FILE CALLED "VMOUT" WITH SECURITY CODE "OP" AND
20 BLOCKS IN SIZE MUST BE CREATED. A SEPARATE PROGRAM MUST BE WRITTEN
TO ACCESS THE DATA WRITTEN IN THE DISC FILE.
C01101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RDWRT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RDWRT -- MASS STORAGE PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FILES ANALYZER STORAGE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THE PROGRAM "RDWRT" DEMONSTRATES THE MASS STORAGE AND FILE HANDLING
CAPABILITIES OF THE HP 1000 WHEN USED WITH THE 3582A SPECTRUM ANALYZER.
(THIS IS A USER PROGRAM WHICH PROMPTS THE OPERATOR TO RESPOND TO COM-
MANDS. RDWRT ALLOWS THE RAW TIME WAVEFORM OR THE TRANSFORMED FREQUENCY
DOMAIN WAVEFORM FROM THE 3582A TO BE STORED IN AN HP 1000 DISC FILE. AT
SOME TIME LATER THESE FILES MAY BE RESTORED TO THE INSTRUMENT FOR
COMPARISON OR THEY CAN BE RE-ANALYZED. THE PROGRAM ALLOWS:
1. STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL OF FREQUENCY SPECTRA.
2. STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL OF THE ORIGINAL TIME WAVEFORMS FOR:
A. LATER ANALYSIS,
B. LATER ANALYSIS OF THE EXPERIMENT USING DIFFERENT TRANSFER
FUNCTIONS (FLAT TOP, HANNING, OR UNIFORM) OR,
C. MODIFICATION OR PREPROCESSING OF THE TIME WAVEFORM (I.E., PASSING
IT THROUGH A SIMULATED FILTER) BEFORE SPECTRUM ANALYSIS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: RDWRT2 - SOURCE
FILE# 3: RDWRT3 - SOURCE (INPRM)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE PROGRAM RDWRT ALSO CONTAINS INFORMATION ABOUT HP 1000 SYSTEM
SUBROUTINES AND HOW THEY CAN BE USED IN MEASUREMENT SITUATIONS AS WELL
AS I/O INFORMATION ABOUT THE 3582A. RDWRT CAN,
1. ACCESS 3582A MEMORY DIRECTLY (DISPLAY MEMORY IN LINES 194 THROUGH
197, TIME MEMORY IN LINES 206 THROUGH 208),
2. ANALYZE BINARY DATA RECEIVED FROM THE 3582A (SUBROUTINE "SENSI"
STARTING IN LINE 305) AND,
3. WRITE BINARY DATA TO 3582A MEMORY (DISPLAY MEMORY IN LINES 249
THROUGH 252 AND LINE 259, TIME MEMORY IN LINES 255 THROUGH 257 AND
LINE 259).
HP 1000 "EXEC" REQUESTS ARE USED TO OUTPUT MESSAGES TO THE USER
TERMINAL INSTEAD OF INCURRING THE ADDED MEMORY OVERHEAD REQUIRED FOR
THE FORTRAN FORMATTER. (THE FORMATTER IS USED IN THE SUBROUTINE "SENSI"
BUT CAN BE EXCLUDED BY CONVERTING THESE "WRITE" STATEMENTS TO EXEC
CALLS ALSO.) THERE ARE TWO OPERATION TYPES USED REPEATEDLY IN THE
PROGRAM:
SD OR ST SAVE 3582A MEMORY IN A DISC FILE.
RD OR RT RESTORE DISC FILE TO 3582A MEMORY.
THE 3582A TIME AND DISPLAY MEORIES ARE TRANSFERRED USING BINARY EXEC
REQUESTS IN THE HP 1000 (LINE 208, FIGURE 12-3). THESE I/O REQUESTS
ALLOW THE COMPUTER TO IGNORE DATA WHICH MAY OTHERWISE BE INTERPRETED
AS AN END-OF-RECORD (EOR). THIS WAY, 3582A MEMORY CAN BE TRANSMITTED
DIRECTLY TO THE HP 1000 AT HIGH SPEED IN LARGE BUFFERS, WITH NO BINARY
TO ASCII CONVERSION IN THE PROCESS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THIS PACKAGE REQUIRES A 3582A SPECTRUM ANALYZER.
ALSO SEE 'APPLICATION NOTE' 401-12 FOR A COMPLETE AND DETAILED
DOCUMENTATION 'RDWRT'.
C01201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: P1640
**PROGRAM TITLE:
P1640 - TO EXPAND CAPABILITIES OF 1640 SERIAL LOGIC ANALYZER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 3 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STORAGE ANALYZER FORMATTING
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
REQUIRES 17 PAGES OF MEMORY
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
P1640 IS A PROGRAM TO EXPAND THE CAPABILITIES OF THE 1640 SERIAL LOGIC
ANALYZER BY PROVIDING:
- STORAGE OF DATA FROM THE 1640 ON MEMORY, DISK, TAPE, ETC.
- ALTERABLE FORMATTING OF SAVED DATA FOR ANY TYPE OF CODE.
- FORMATTED OUTPUT TO THE LINE PRINTER OR A FILE.
- AUTOMATIC INITIALIZATION OF THE 1640 THROUGH TRANSFER FILE.
- USER DOESN'T NEED TO KNOW HP-IB BUT MUST HAVE THE HARDWARE
AND SOFTWARE IN THE SYSTEM.
THE PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO BE USED INTERACTIVELY BUT COULD BE RUN BY
BATCH.
ALSO: REQUIRES HP-IB INTERFACE CARD, TERMINAL INTERFACE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: TRANSFER FILE USED TO SAVE THE OTHER FILES ON TAPE
FILE# 3: THE SOURCE FILE FOR THE PROGRAM
FILE# 4: AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SUBROUTINE USED BY P1640
FILE# 5: A LISTING OF SOME EXAMPLES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXAMPLE LISTINGS IN FILE #5
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE EXAMPLE LISTINGS IN FILE #5
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE DOCUMENTATION IN SOURCE CODE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
USES 'FMGR' ERROR CODES, OTHER ERRORS ARE PRINTED ON THE LOG LU
(TERMINAL).
**MISCELLANEOUS:
NOTE: P1640 CALLS EXEC, REIO
NEED HP-IB DRIVER GENERATED INTO RTE.
NEED TO DEFINE AN LU FOR EACH DEVICE ON THE HP-IB BUS.
D00101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR52
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE MULTIPLEXOR DRIVER (12920A)
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 4 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PRIVILEGED
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-C
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE IS AN INPUT/OUTPUT DRIVER (DVR 52) WHICH OPERATES UNDER
CONTROL OF THE REAL TIME EXECUTIVE (RTE) OPERATING SYSTEM. DATA TRANS-
MISSION IS POSSIBLE WITH ANY EIA RS-232 COMPATIBLE TERMINAL CONNECTED
TO THE 12920A ASYNCHRONOUS MULTIPLEXOR. THE (SYSTEM CONSOLE) CAN BE
CONNECTED TO THIS INTERFACE. SPEED DETECTION IS POSSIBLE AT SPEEDS OF
10, 15, 30, 60, 120, AND 240 CHARACTERS/SECOND. THIS DRIVER DOES NOT
USE THE FULL CAPABILITY OF THE MODEM CONTROL CARD. THIS ROUTINE IS A
PRIVELEGED DRIVER AND IS COMPATIBLE WITH RTE, RTE-C, RTE-II, AND RTE-III
OPERATING SYSTEMS.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR THE RTE MULTIPLEXOR DRIVER, REQUIRED BY ANY
MEMBER OF THE FAMILY OF THE RTE SYSTEMS, ARE A 12920A OR 12920B ASYN-
CHRONOUS MULTIPLEXOR, AND A 12620A OR 12936A PRIVILEGED I/O BOARD.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
D00201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
OPTIONAL DVR51 - RTE AUTO DIAL DRIVER FOR 12589A INTERFACE KIT.
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 4 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER INTERFACE DATA COMM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS RTE AUTO DIAL DRIVER USES 12589A INTERFACE KIT TO OPERATE ON
AUTOMATIC CALLING UNIT (ACU). USE OF THIS, ALONG WITH COMPLEMENTARY
AUTO ANSWER UNITS IN A DISTRIBUTED COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, ALLOWS LINE
CONNECTIONS AND DISCONNECTIONS TO BE MADE AUTOMATICALLY UNDER PROGRAM
CONTROL. THE DRIVER SUPPORTS (WRITE) REQUEST TO ENABLE DIALING AND
(CONTROL) REQUEST TO DO A DISCONNECT. LINE SELECTION FROM 1 TO 4 IS
PERMITTED BY SOFTWARE ALTHOUGH THE CURRENT CABLE ASSEMBLY OF 12589A
ALLOWS FOR ONE LINE ONLY (WITH REFERENCE TO MULTIPLE ACU'S BEING
CONNECTED TO THE SAME INTERFACE BOARD). THE DRIVER HANDLES ITS OWN
TIME OUT AND THE STATUS WORD REFLECTS (ON-LINE) AND (OFF-LINE) CON-
DITION ON COMPLETION OF REQUEST. (END-OF-NUMBER) OPTION IS ALSO SUP-
PORTED IN SOFTWARE, ALLOWING LINE TO BE HANDED OVER TO THE MODEM WHILE
IT IS RINGING.
APPROPRIATE TIME OUT VALUES (NEGATIVE DIGITS) MAY BE INSERTED IN THE
DIAL BUFFER AT PLACES WHERE DIAL TONES ARE EXPECTED. THIS IS IMPORTANT
IN CASE OF A MULTIPLE DIAL SEQUENCE OVER AN ACU WHICH DOES NOT SUPPORT
(POSITIVE DIAL TONE IDENTIFICATION); E.G., BELL 801A. IF AN ACU DOES
SUPPORT THIS FEATURE (E.G., VADIC CORP'S ACU), ILLEGAL DIGITS SHOULD
BE INSERTED IN THE WRITE BUFFER AT DIAL TONE POINTS. THE OVERALL
DRIVER TIME OUT VALUE (IN EQT14) SET AT SYSTEM GENERATION TIME IS IN-
DEPENDENT OF THE TIME OUT VALUES SPECIFIED WITHIN THE DIAL SEQUENCE IN
CASE OF TANDOM DIALING, AND SHOULD PREFERABLY BE GREATED THAN THE ACU'S
TIMER.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: 12589A INTERFACE KIT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE DRIVER ONLY ENTERTAINS WRITE AND CONTROL REQUESTS. REFER TO
SOURCE LISTING FOR DETAILS ON ALLOWABLE CALLING SEQUENCE.
DURING RTE SYSTEM GENERATION, BE AWARE THAT THIS DRIVER HANDLES ITS
OWN TIMEOUT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
D00301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE ASYNCHRONOUS DATA SET INTERFACE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 4 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTERFACE DATA COMM ASYNCHRONOUS
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DVR72 IS A RTE DRIVER WHICH CONTROLS AN HP 12587 ASYNCHRONOUS DATA SET
INTERFACE. THE TERMINALS EXPECTED BY DVR72 ARE AN HP7260 CARD READER
AND/OR A GENERAL ELECTRIC TERMINET 1200 PRINTER. EACH HP 12587 INTER-
FACE HAS ONE BELL SYSTEM TYPE 103 OR 202 DATA SET (OR EQUIVALENT)
CONNECTED TO IT.
USING DVR72, THE USER PROGRAM CAN ISSUE COMMAND SEQUENCES TO THE 7260
CARD READER TO RETURN CARD DATA AND/OR STATUS INFORMATION.
THE DRIVER SUPPORTS ONLY PRINTING CAPABILITY FOR THE GE 1200 AND DOES
AN IMMEDIATE COMPLETION IF KEYBOARD INPUT IS PROGRAMMED.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: MINIMUM RTE HARDWARE CONFIGURATION PLUS AN
HP 12587 ASSEMBLY I/F, AND EITHER OR BOTH HP7260 MARK SENSE CARD READER,
GE TERMINET 1200 PRINTER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
DVR72 MUST BE GENERATED INTO RTE DURING SYSTEM GENERATION AS FOLLOWS:
*EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRY
SC,DVR72,D
THE DRIVER USES DMA FOR THE 7620 CARD READER INPUT AND DEALLOCATES
DMA FOR ALL OTHER I/O. THE DRIVER ALSO PROCESSES ITS OWN TIME-OUTS
AND SHOULD BE NON-BUFFERED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE: OPERATING MANUAL FOR HP 7260 (PART NUMBER
07260-90000).
D00401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: UTERM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CDC-200 USER TERMINAL SIMULATOR FOR HP 1000
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 4 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL DRIVER CDC
SIMULATOR
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
7 PAGES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
UTERM SIMULATES A CDC 200 USER TERMINAL (200UT) ON A HEWLETT-PACKARD
SERIES-1000 MINICOMPUTER RUNNING UNDER THE RTE-IV OPERATING SYSTEM AT
SPEEDS UP TO 4800 BAUD. THIS DOCUMENT DESCRIBES VERSION 3.1E (25MAY79);
RELATIVE TO EARLIER VERSIONS OF THIS PROGRAM WHICH WERE CONTRIBUTED TO
LOCUS, THIS VERSION CONTAINS IMPROVEMENTS/MODIFICATIONS.
UTERM REQUIRES AN HP SERIES-1000 MINICOMPUTER RUNNING UNDER THE
RTE-IV OPERATING SYSTEM. A SYNCHRONOUS MODEM UTILIZING AN HP 12618A
SYNCHRONOUS DATA SET INTERFACE KIT IS NEEDED. THE 12936A PRIVILEGED
INTERRUPT FENCE MUST BE UTILIZED TO OBTAIN GOOD PERFORMANCE FROM THIS
PROGRAM. TO EFFECT A PROPER SIMULATION, UTERM CONTAINS ITS OWN
AUTONOMOUS DRIVER FOR THE DATA SET INTERFACE. THE ONLY (AND HENCE THE
BEST) DOCUMENTATION OF THE CDC 200UT IS THE CONTROL DATA HARDWARE
REFERENCE MANUAL FOR THE 200 USER TERMINAL (CDC PUBLICATION #82128000).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE AND DOCUMENTATION
FILE# 3: SOURCE AND DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE $UTERM FOR COMPLETE LOADER DIRECTIONS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**MISCELLANEOUS:
D00501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ASCII/IBM-360 CONVERSION ROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 4 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION ASCII IBM
CODE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
215 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (178 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE READS IBM 8-LEVEL CHARACTERS FROM 9-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE,
CONVERTS THE CHARACTERS TO ASCII FORM, AND LISTS OR PUNCHES THE ASCII
CHARACTERS ON THE TELEPRINTER. THE PROGRAM ALSO READS ASCII CHARACTERS
FROM PUNCH CARDS, CONVERTS THE CHARACTERS TO IBM 8-LEVEL CODE, AND
RECORDS THE 8-LEVEL CHARACTERS ON MAGNETIC TAPE.
CONVERSION TIME IS APPROXIMATELY 100 MICROSECONDS TIMES LENGTH OF
ARRAY IN WORDS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
INCLUDED ARE PROGRAMS TLIST, MLIST AND CWRIT WHICH USE THE CON-
VERSION SUBROUTINES ASTOI AND ITOAS. PROGRAM TLIST LISTS FROM MAG
TAPE USING THE FIRST CHARACTER PER RECORD AS A CARRIAGE CONTROL
CHARACTER. PROGRAM MLIST LISTS FROM MAG TAPE ASSUMING EACH MAG TAPE
RECORD IS MADE UP OF TEN CARD IMAGES. PROGRAM CWRIT READS CARDS AND
PUTS THEM ONTO MAG TAPE WITH A BLOCKING FACTOR OF TEN. THE CARD DECK
IS TERMINATED BY A CARD WITH A /* IN THE FIRST TWO COLUMNS.
MAG TAPE GENERATED BY CWRIT MAY BE READ ON THE 360, AND THE MAG TAPE
USED BY TLIST AND MLIST IS PRODUCED ON THE 360.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCES
CALLED AS
CALL ITOAS (IA(1),LEN)
WHERE IA = NAME OF ARRAY DIMENSIONED TO AT LEAST "LEN"
LEN = INTEGER VARIABLE NAME OR CONSTANT SET TO THE NUMBER OF WORDS
TO BE CONVERTED.
ROUTINE CONVERTS FROM IBM TO ASCII CODE - THE RESULT IS LEFT IN
ARRAY IA.
CALL ASTOI (IA(1),LEN)
SAME AS ABOVE - BUT CONVERTS ASCII TO IBM CODE.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATION
ONLY THE LAST SIX BITS OF EACH CHARACTER ARE EXAMINED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
D00601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: EBC2A
**PROGRAM TITLE:
EBCDIC TO ASCII TRANSLATOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 4 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
ASCII EBCDIC CONVERSION
CODE CHARACTER
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
5 PAGES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM EBC2A CONVERTS VARIABLE-LENGTH EBCDIC-CODED RECORDS FROM AN
INPUT DEVICE (OR DISC FILE) TO ASCII CODE, AND STORE THE TRANSLATED
RECORDS TO AN OUTPUT DEVICE (OR DISC FILE).
THE LENGTH OF THE OUTPUT RECORD IS IDENTICAL TO THE LENGTH OF THE
INPUT RECORD. IF DISC FILES ARE USED FOR INPUT OR OUTPUT, THEN THE
SPOOL MONITOR PROGRAM (SMP) MUST BE ACTIVE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: EBC2A SOURCE
FILE# 3: EBCDIC TEST DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. RUN ALGOL COMPILER ON SOURCE FILE (&EBC2A)
2. RUN LOADR ON CODE PRODUCED BY COMPILER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN: *RU,EBC2A,P1,P2,P3,P4,P5 WHERE THE OPTIONAL PARAMETERS ARE
DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
P1 - TERMINAL LU (DEFAULT=VALUE RETURNED BY MTM)
P2 - INPUT LU (DEFAULT=LU2)
P3 - OUTPUT LU (DEFAULT=LU2)
P4 - FIRST RECORD TO BE
TRANSLATED (DEFAULT=1)
P5 - NUMBER OF RECORDS TO
BE TRANSLATED (DEFAULT=ALL)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A DISC FILE CONTAINING DATA IN EBCDIC CODE, &EBCDC, IS USED AS INPUT
TO THE PROGRAM EBC2A. THE OUTPUT FILE, &ASCII, DOES NOT EXIST BUT IS
CREATED BY THE PROGRAM, AND THE TRANSLATED DATA IS WRITTEN TO THIS
FILE. FILE LISTING OF BOTH FILES ARE ON THE FOLLOWING PAGES. THE
TERMINAL CONVERSATION IS AS FOLLOWS:
*RU,EBC2A
INPUT FILE NAME? &EBCDC
OUTPUT FILE NAME? &ASCII
** END EBC2A
A SECOND TRANSLATION IS PLACED IN THE FILE &ASCJJ, BEGINNING THE
TRANSLATION AT RECORD NUMBER 5 AND CONTINUING FOR 5 RECORDS:
*RU,EBC2A,,,,5,5
INPUT FILE NAME? &EBCDC
OUTPUT FILE NAME? &ASCJJ
** END EBC2A
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RECORD LENGTH IS 1024 WORDS, BUT CAN BE MODIFIED
AS REQUIRED BY SETTING THE VARIABLE BUFLEN TO BE 1+MAXIMUM RECORD
LENGTH. OPTIONS ARE SET THROUGH THE RUN PARAMETERS. THE OPTIONS
ALLOW YOU TO BEGIN TRANSLATION AT A SPECIFIED RECORD, AND TRANSLATE
A GIVEN NUMBER OF RECORDS. DEFAULTS FOR THE PROGRAM ARE INPUT AND
OUTPUT FROM THE DISC, BEGINNING AT RECORD 1, AND TRANSLATING THE EN-
TIRE FILE.
IF INPUT OR OUTPUT IS FROM THE DISC, THE PROGRAM WILL INTERACTIVELY
PROMPT FOR THE INPUT OR OUTPUT FILE NAME. IF THE OUTPUT FILE DOES
NOT EXIST, EBC2A WILL CREATE IT, WITH A DEFAULT SIZE OF 24 BLOCKS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
INPUT FILE ERROR: - XX WHERE XX IS ERROR CODE
OUTPUT FILE ERROR: - XX WHERE XX IS ERROR CODE
**END EBC2A MESSAGE ON END OF PROGRAM
**MISCELLANEOUS:
D00701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: A2EBC
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ASCII TO EBCDIC TRANSLATOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 4 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
ASCII EBCDIC CONVERSION
CODE CHARACTER
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
5 PAGES BACKGROUND MEMORY
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM A2EBC CONVERTS VARIABLE-LENGTH ASCII CODED RECORDS FROM AN
INPUT DEVICE (OR DISC FILE) TO EBCDIC CODE, AND STORES THE TRANSLATED
RECORDS TO AN OUTPUT DEVICE (OR DISC FILE).
THE LENGTH OF THE OUTPUT RECORD IS IDENTICAL TO THE LENGTH OF THE
INPUT RECORD. IF DISC FILES ARE USED FOR INPUT OR OUTPUT, THEN THE
SPOOL MONITOR PROGRAM (SMP) MUST BE ACTIVE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: A2EBC SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN ALGOL COMPILER ON SOURCE PROGRAM (&A2EBC).
RUN LOADR ON CODE PRODUCED BY COMPILER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN: *RU,A2EBC,P1,P2,P3,P4,P5, WHERE THE OPTIONAL PARAMETERS ARE
DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
P1-TERMINAL LU (DEFAULT=VALUE RETURNED BY
MTM)
P2-INPUT LU (DEFAULT=LU2)
P3-OUTPUT LU (DEFAULT=LU2)
P4-FIRST RECORD TO BE TRANSLATED (DEFAULT=1)
P5-NUMBER OF RECORDS TO BE (DEFAULT=ALL)
TRANSLATED
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A DISC FILE CONTAINING TEST DATA IS TRANSLATED TO EBDIC CODE, AND
LISTED ON THE LINE PRINTER:
*TU,A2EBC,,,6
INPUT FILE NAME? ==TEST
** END A2EBC
A SECOND TRANSLATION IS PERFORMED ON A FILE THAT IS ON CARTRIDGE TAPE
ON LU8, AND STORED IN A DISC FILE, TOUT, WHICH IS CREATED BY THIS
PROGRAM:
*RU,A2EBC,,8
OUTPUT FILE NAME? TOUT
**END A2EBC
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE RECORD LENGTH IS 1024 WORDS, BUT CAN BE MODIFIED AS
REQUIRED BY SETTING THE VARIABLE BUFLEN TO BE 1+MAXIMUM RECORD LENGTH.
OPTIONS ARE SET THROUGH THE RUN PARAMETERS. THE OPTIONS ALLOW YOU TO
BEGIN TRANSLATION AT A SPECIFIED RECORD, AND TRANSLATE A GIVEN NUMBER
OF RECORDS. DEFAULTS AT RECORD 1, AND TRANSLATING THE ENTIRE FILE.
IF INPUT OR OUTPUT IS FROM THE DISC, THE PROGRAM WILL INTERACTIVELY
PROMPT FOR THE INPUT OR OUTPUT FILE NAME. IF THE OUTPUT FILE DOES NOT
EXIST, A2EBC WILL CREATE IT, WITH A DEFAULT SIZE OF 24 BLOCKS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ANY ERROR MESSAGES ARE SENT TO THE TERMINAL. ALSO THERE IS AN END OF
PROGRAM MESSAGE SENT TO THE TERMINAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DCODE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M ABSOLUTE OBJECT DECODER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER ABSOLUTE INVERSE
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
10532 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (7933 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
DOS ABSOLUTE OBJECT DECODER IS A DOS VERSION OF HP22292 BCS
ABSOLUTE OBJECT DECODER. IT IS AN ALGOL PROGRAM DESIGNED TO PRODUCE
A PSUEDO SOURCE FROM AN ABSOLUTE BINARY TAPE, COMPLETE WITH LABELS,
WHICH WILL ASSEMBLE BACK TO THE ORIGINAL ABSOLUTE. SUCH A
TAPE WOULD BE RELATIVELY EASY TO DECIPHER AND EDIT INTO A FUNCTIONAL
EQUIVALENT OF THE ORIGINAL SOURCE.
DECODING IS BY WORD COMPARISON WITH THE CONSOLIDATED CODING SHEET.
A PROGRAMMER MAY GENERATE A BINARY WORD BY ANY OF SEVERAL METHODS,
DEPENDING ON HIS PURPOSE. DCODE TRIES TO CONVERT TO MACHINE
INSTRUCTIONS IF POSSIBLE, OTHERWISE TO AN (OCT) CONSTANT. THE
GENERATION OF DEF, ABS, ASC, DEC, DEX, AND BSS PSUEDO INSTRUCTIONS,
EXPRESSION OPERANDS AND (OCT) OTHER THAN BY DEFAULT ARE NOT WITHIN
THE SCOPE OF THIS PROGRAM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE THE PROGRAM AND THE PROCEDURES, AND ASSEMBLE THE SUBROUTINE.
USE LOADR TO GENERATE OBJECT PROGRAM, AND :STORE,P DIRECTIVE TO STORE
THE PROGRAM ON THE DISC.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO EXECUTE PROGRAM:
TYPE :PROG,DCODE ON SYSTEM TTY. PROGRAM WILL ASK:
"LISTING?" TYPE "YES" OR "NO"
"PUNCH OUTPUT?" TYPE "YES" OR "NO"
"MAGTAPE OUTPUT?" TYPE "YES" OR "NO"
"EAU INSTRUCTIONS?" TYPE "YES" IF DECODING OF EAU INSTRUCTIONS
IS DESIRED, OTHERWISE "NO".
THE PHOTOREADER WILL READ THE BINARY TAPE, STORE THE CODE ON THE
DISC FOR THE SECOND PASS. DURING THE SECOND PASS, THE PSUEDO SOURCE
WILL BE OUTPUTTED TO THE SELECTED PERIPHERALS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
EXPERIMENT WITH YOUR OWN ABSOLUTE OBJECT TAPE.
THE PROGRAM WAS TESTED IN THE FOLLOWING WAY:
A BINARY TAPE CONTAINING ALL BIT COMBINATIONS FROM 000000 TO 007777
AND FROM 100000 TO 107777 WAS GENERATED.
THIS TAPE WAS DECODED, AND PSUEDO SOURCE OUTPUT ON MAG TAPE.
THE PSUEDO SOURCE WAS REASSEMBLED USING THE DOS ASSEMBLER.
THE BINARY TAPE GENERATED BY THE ASSEMBLER WAS COMPARED TO THE
ORIGINAL.
DECODING OF MEMORY REFERENCE INSTRUCTIONS WAS CHECKED IN A SIMILAR WAY.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IF AN INSTRUCTION CAN BE DECODED AS TWO ASCII CHARACTERS, THESE
WILL APPEAR IN THE COMMENT FIELD ON THE LISTING ONLY.
THIS PROGRAM AS WRITTEN HAS CAPABILITY FOR HANDLING UP TO 4096 LABELS.
IF TABLE OVERFLOW OCCURS, PROGRAM HALTS AFTER DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGE.
AMAX IN LINE 28 CAN BE INCREASED TO APPROXIMATELY 7500 IN A 32K MACHINE
FOR INCREASED CAPACITY. IF THE COMPUTER HAS ONLY 16K OF CORE MEMORY,
AMAX MUST BE SET TO 3000.
DECODING THE ENTIRE ALGOL COMPILER GENERATED 1130 LABELS.
IN INTERPRETING THE RESULTS OF A DCODE PROGRAM LISTING, ONE MUST BE
AWARE IF SEVERAL POSSIBILITIES AND PITFALLS. CERTAIN EAU INSTRUCTIONS,
FOR EXAMPLE, CREATE A WORD IN THE NEXT LOCATION WHICH CONTAINS THE
OPERAND ADDRESS. THEREFORE, A CONSTANT WHICH DECODED INTO A TWO-WORD
EAU INSTRUCTION WOULD USE THE SECOND WORD FOR THE OPERAND ADDRESS
USING BITS 14-0 TO DETERMINE ITS VALUE, AND BIT 15, IF SET, DETERMINES
THAT IT IS AN INDIRECT REFERENCE. THUS, ALL INFORMATION REQUIRED TO
RECONSTRUCT BOTH WORDS AS CONSTANTS IS AVAILABLE.
IT SHOULD ALSO BE NOTED THAT DEF, ASC AND CONSTANTS OF ANY TYPE CAN
GENERATE FALSE LABELS. SUITABLE EDITING OF THE CONSTANT SECTIONS OF
THE PROGRAM AND ANY ASC BUFFERS WILL ELIMINATE MANY OF THE FALSE
LABELS. IT IS VERY IMPORTANT THAT ANY DEF INSTRUCTIONS BE PROPERLY
RECONSTRUCTED PRIOR TO ANY EDITING WHICH WOULD RELOCATE ANY PORTION
OF THE PROGRAM.
IT IS LEFT TO THE USER TO MAKE FINAL DETERMINATIONS OF ACTUAL CODING,
AND TO RESOLVE SUCH DILEMMAS AS NOTED.
CERTAIN BIT COMBINATIONS FORM VARIATIONS ON STANDARD MACHINE CODES
THAT CAN BE EXECUTED BY THE COMPUTER. EXAMPLE: CLE IS BY THE HP
ASSEMBLER CODED TO 000040. HOWEVER THE FOLLOWING CODES WILL ALSO BE
EXECUTED AS CLE: 004040, 002100, 006100. SUCH VARIATIONS ON STANDARD
MACHINE CODES WILL NOT BE DECODED, SINCE A REASSEMBLY OF THE PSUEDO
SOURCE WOULD PRODUCE A DIFFERENT OBJECT CODE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE/DOS ALGOL COMPILER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
COMPILER ALGOL
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
15527 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS, 6165 WITHOUT
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE PROVIDES THE USER WITH A MODIFIED HP24129 ALGOL COMPILER.
THE MODIFICATION OUTPUTS A MORE READABLE OBJECT CODE LISTING THAN THE
UNMODIFIED ALGOL COMPILER. FOR ANY GIVEN OPERATING SYSTEM THE ALGOL
COMPILER REQUIRES AT LEAST 8K MORE OF CORE THAN THE MINIMUM FOR THAT
SYSTEM. THUS, THE CODE FOR OBJECT LISTING IS MINIMIZED. FOR USERS WITH
MORE CORE, THIS VERSION OF THE COMPILER WILL GIVE A PSEUDO-ASSEMBLY
LANGUAGE FORMATTED OBJECT CODE LISTING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: SOURCE
FILE# 10: SOURCE
FILE# 11: SOURCE
FILE# 12: SOURCE
FILE# 13: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A TEST PROGRAM GRAPH IS INCLUDED.
NOTE: NO REPRESENTATION IS MADE AS TO THE WORKABILITY OF THE TEST
PROGRAM GRAPH. IT IS INCLUDED HERE SOLELY AS A TEST PROGRAM
FOR THE OBJECT CODE LISTING ROUTINES OF THE SUBMITTED ALGOL
COMPILER.
CHANGE THE CONTROL OF GRAPH TO HPAL,A,"GRAPH". COMPILE WITH HP 22443
ALGOL COMPILER AND THE SUPPORTED HP 24129 ALGOL COMPILER. COMPARE
LISTINGS.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ANYONE WHO HAS EVER HAD TO OBTAIN AN OBJECT CODE LISTING FROM THE ALGOL
COMPILER (EITHER DOS/RTE OR MTS (STANDALONE)) KNOWS WHAT A FRUSTRATING
EXPERIENCE IT CAN BE. ALL REQUIRED INFORMATION IS THERE, BUT IT IS
VIRTUALLY UNREADABLE UNLESS:
1. THE USER KNOWS THE OCTAL CODES FOR ALL THE REGISTER-REFERENCE AND
OTHER ABSOLUTE INSTRUCTIONS, OR DOES NOT MIND LOOKING THEM UP
INDIVIDUALLY WHEN ENCOUNTERED.
2. HE CAN EASILY SPOT THE CODE WHICH IS EMITTED OUT-OF-LINE (A
NECESSARY FEATURE OF A SINGLE-PASS COMPILER).
3. HE CAN TELL THE DIFFERENCE (FROM CONTEXT) BETWEEN ABSOLUTE
INSTRUCTIONS (E.G., REGISTER-REFERENCE) AND DATA WORDS (CONSTANTS,
ASCII CHARACTER PAIRS IN FORMAT STRINGS, ETC.).
4. AT A MEMORY-REFERENCE INSTRUCTION, HE DOES NOT MIND TRANSLATING THE
GIVEN OCTAL OPERAND ADDRESS INTO THE PARTICULAR SYMBOL BEING
REFERENCED AT THE TIME.
THE REASON FOR THIS SITUATION IS SIMPLY THE AMOUNT OF CORE AVAILABLE.
FOR ANY GIVEN OPERATING SYSTEM, THE ALGOL COMPILER IS SO LARGE THAT IT
REQUIRES AT LEAST 8K MORE CORE THAN THE MINIMUM FOR THAT SYSTEM. CORE
CANNOT BE SAVED BY SEGMENTING, SINCE THE RECURSIVE ROUTINES (AND THEIR
SUPPORTING STACKS) CANNOT BE SWAPPED IN AND OUT DURING COMPILER EXECU-
TION. THUS, THE CODE FOR OBJECT LISTING MUST BE MINIMIZED.
FOR USERS WITH EXTRA CORE, THIS PACKAGE PROVIDES THE HP 24129 ALGOL
COMPILER WITH "A MODIFIED" ROUTINE TO PRINT A MORE READABLE OBJECT CODE
LISTING. THIS VERSION OF THE COMPILER PROVIDES A PSEUDO-ASSEMBLY
LANGUAGE FORMATTED OBJECT CODE LISTING. ALL REGISTER-REFERENCE
MNEUMONICS ARE PRINTED, AS ARE MEMORY-REFERENCE MNEUMONICS. RELOCATABLE
ADDRESSES ARE LISTED AS DEF'S. IF THE CONTENTS OF THE OPERAND FIELD OF
A MEMORY-REFERENCE OR DEF INSTRUCTION HAVE A SYMBOLIC REFERENCE IN THE
SYMBOL TABLE, THAT REFERENCE IS PRINTED IN THE OPERAND FIELD. DOUBLE
LOAD/STORE INSTRUCTIONS HAVE "+1" APPENDED TO THE LDB/STB OPERAND
(E.G., LDB SYMBOL+1). ALL OPERANDS WHICH HAVE NO SYMBOLIC REFERENCES
ARE PRINTED AS OCTAL ADDRESSES. ALL OPERANDS (SYMBOLIC OR NUMERIC)
HAVE ",I" APPENDED IF THE INSTRUCTION IS INDIRECT.
CERTAIN ASSEMBLE PSEUDO-OPS AID READABILITY OF THE LISTING. OCT IS
USED WHEREVER CONSTANTS ARE INSERTED IN THE CODE. THE ORG-ORR PAIR IS
USED WHENEVER CODE IS EMITTED OUT OF LINE (A BLANK LINE PRECEDES THE ORG
AND FOLLOWS THE ORR). THE BSS IS USED WHEREVER SPACE IS TO BE RESERVED
BUT NOT LOADED (THE DOS RELOCATING LOADER CHANGES ALL SUCH LOCATIONS TO
NOP). THE OPERAND FIELD OF THE BSS IS THE ONLY FIELD CONTAINING A
DECIMAL (INSTEAD OF OCTAL) NUMBER, IN THE OBJECT CODE LISTING.
MEMORY-REFERENCE OPERANDS AND DEF OPERANDS WHICH CANNOT BE MATCHED
SYMBOLICALLY WILL BE LISTED IN "*+N" FORMAT IF N <=7.
THE SWITCH REGISTER OPTION OF MTS ALGOL HAS BEEN RE-INSTATED INTO THIS
VERSION OF THE COMPILER.
THE ABOVE MODIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO THE HP CUPERTINO-SUPPORTED
HP 24129 DOS/RTE ALGOL COMPILER. THE COST IN ADDITIONAL CORE IS 555
(DECIMAL) WORDS OF PROGRAM AND (APPROXIMATELY) 20 WORDS OF BASE PAGE
LINKS. THE LATTER QUANTITY WILL DEPEND ON THE FIRST WORD OF USER AREA
(OR BACKGROUND PARTITION) SPECIFIED AT SYSTEM GENERATION TIME.
CONTROL AND SYNTAX REQUIREMENTS OF THIS COMPILER ARE UNCHANGED FROM
THAT OF THE HP 24129. THE SOURCE LISTING IS UNCHANGED. THE ALGOL
USER'S MANUAL REMAINS APPLICABLE EXCEPT FOR THE ADDITION OF THE ,S
OPTION TO DOS/RTE ALGOL. THE OBJECT CODE PRODUCED FOR LOADING AND
EXECUTION IS UNCHANGED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ASM1
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTEL 8008 ASSEMBLER FOR THE HP 2100
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEL ASSEMBLER
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM. 'ASMI', RUNS ON AN HP2100 SERIES COMPUTER AND
ASSEMBLES 'INTEL' 8008 MICRO-COMPUTER SOURCE CODE. IT IS A TWO
PASS ASSEMBLER WHICH WILL RUN IN A DOS-M, RTE, OR BCS ENVIRONMENT.
AN 8K COMPUTER IS REQUIRED FOR BCS, 12K FOR DOS-M.
THE INPUT TO 'ASMI' IS A PAPER TAPE SOURCE CONTAINING SYMBOLIC
LANGUAGE INSTRUCTIONS. THE OUTPUT IS A LINE PRINTER (OR TELETYPE)
LISTING OF THE SYMBOL TABLE, THE CODE GENERATED BY THE ASSEMBLER,
AND THE SOURCE CODE. IT WOULD BE EASY TO MODIFY THE PROGRAM TO
PUNCH THE OUTPUT CODE IN (INTEL) 'BNPF' FORMAT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
TWO SAMPLE INTEL SOURCE PROGRAMS ARE INCLUDED.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE LISTING.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: AMWCS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE MICROASSEMBLER FOR WRITEABLE CONTROL STORE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MICROCODE ASSEMBLER WCS
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8.5K BACKGROUND
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'AMWCS' IS A WRITEABLE CONTROL STORE, MICROCODE ASSEMBLER WHICH
OPERATES UNDER CONTROL OF THE REAL-TIME EXECUTIVE OPERATION SYSTEM.
MICROCODE ASSEMBLY SOURCE MAY BE INPUT FROM ANY LOGICAL UNIT
NUMBER (PAPER TAPE, CARDS, ETC.), LOGICAL SOURCE (LS) TRACKS OR
FROM A FILE MANAGER PACKAGE (FMP) FILE. MICROCODE OUTPUT FROM THE
ASSEMBLER MAY BE TO ANY OUTPUT LOGICAL UNIT OR TO AN FMP FILE VIA
FMP CALLS.
SOURCE LANGUAGE INPUT FORMAT, LIST FORMAT AND MICROCODE OUTPUT FORMAT
ARE HP STANDARD AS OUTLINED IN THE HP MICRO-PROGRAMMING MANUALS
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR 'AMWCS' INCLUDE: STANDARD RTE CONFIGURATION
WITH A MINIMUM OF 8.5K BACKGROUND.
LITERATURE REFERENCE
RTE PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING MANUAL #HP 02005-90001 MICROPROGRAMMING
SOFTWARE MANUAL #HP 02100-90133 MICROPROGRAMMING GUIDE MANUAL #HP 5951-
3028 DOS MICROPROGRAMMNG SOFTWARE MANUAL #HP 02100-90146
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
FILE# 5: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE AND ASSEMBLE PROGRAM AND SUPPORTING SUB-ROUTINES. LOAD INTO
SYSTEM AS A BACKGROUND DISC-RESIDENT PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO SCHEDULE AMWCS:
*ON,AMWCS, A, B, C, D
WHERE:
A = LOGICAL UNIT OF SOURCE INPUT DEVICE. DEFAULT
= 5. 2 = LS TRACKS.
B = LOGICAL UNIT OF LIST DEVICE. DEFAULT = 6.
C = LOGICAL UNIT OF PUNCH DEVICE. DEFAULT = 4.
D = MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LINES/PAGE FOR SOURCE MICROPROGRAM LISTING.
DEFAULT = 56.
NOTE: IF 100 IS ADDED TO A KYBD/DISPLAY LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER AND
SUPPLIED FOR PARAMETERS A AND/OR C, THE MICROASSEMBLER WILL REQUEST A
FMP FILE NAME TO BE ENTERED THRU THAT DEVICE. THE FMP FILE(S) WILL
THEN BE USED FOR SOURCE AND/OR OBJECT MICROCODE RESPECTIVELY.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
NOT SUPPLIED - SUGGEST USING ANY LAB EXERCISE IN 2100 MICROPROGRAMMING
STUDENT'S MANUAL
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE RTE MICROASSEMBLY INCORPORATES ALL OF THE FEATURES OF THE HP DOS
MICROASSEMBLER AS OUTLINED IN THE HP MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE MANUAL
(HP # 02100-90146).
ALL REFERENCES TO FILES IN THE DOS MANUAL ARE CHANGED TO RTE FMP FILES.
SOURCE FILES ARE TYPE 0 OR 4. OBJECT MICROCODE FILES ARE TYPE 0 OR 7.
THE CONTROL STATEMENT $NAME = XXXXXX, WHERE XXXXXX IS ANY 1 TO 6 SIX
CHARACTER NAME, HAS BEEN INCORPORATED TO PERMIT THE PROGRAM NAME TO BE
LISTED AT THE TOP OF EACH LISTING PAGE.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
AMWCS ASSUMES THE RTE FILE MANAGER PACKAGE OPTION TO BE PRESENT IN THE
SYSTEM. THE FMP IS NOT ESSENTIAL TO THE OPERATION OF THE ASSEMBLER
AND MAY BE ELIMINATED BY:
1. DELETED ALL STATEMENTS IN THE MAIN PROGRAM THAT REFERENCES FMP
ROUTINES.
2. SUPPLY DUMMY ENTRY POINTS FOR ALL HP ROUTINES UTILIZED AND NOT
INVOKING FMP FEATURES.
3. FORCE END OF LOAD WITH OUT SATISFYING FMP EXTERNALS AND NOT
INVOKING FMP FEATURES.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES AND ERROR CODES ARE IDENTICAL TO THOSE CONTAINED IN
THE HP MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE MANUAL # 02190-90133 AND THE DOS MICRO-
PROGRAMMING SOFTWARE MANUAL # 02100-90146.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MACRO
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE MACRO PROCESSOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MACRO ASSEMBLER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
MACRO IS A GENERALIZED MACRO PROCESSOR WHICH PROVIDES FACILITIES FOR
DEFINING, INVOKING, AND PURGING MACRO-DEFINITIONS. IT MAY BE USED TO
EXTEND EXISTING PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES BY ADDING MACRO STATEMENTS, OR
TO TRANSLATE SIMILIAR LANGUAGES.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: 2100 SERIES WITH 64K, A CONSOLE, I/O DEVICES,
AND DISC. RTE-II/III WITH FMP.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: MACRO SOURCE
FILE# 3: LBBLD SOURCE
FILE# 4: TEST SOURCE
FILE# 5: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FOR DETAILS.
1) COMPILE, LOAD, AND RUN LBBLD TO CONSTRUCT MACRO LIBRARY (MACLIB).
2) COMPILE AND LOAD MACRO.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
AFTER PREPARING SOURCE INPUT AS DESCRIBED IN EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION,
RUN MACRO WITH THE COMMAND;
RU,MACRO,LSU,LOU,LLU
LSU = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE SOURCE INPUT DEVICE (DEFAULT IS 1)
LOU = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE SOURCE OUTPUT DEVICE (DEFAULT IS 6)
LLU = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE LOG DEVICE (DEFAULT IS 1)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A TEST SOURCE IS PROVIDED WITH MACRO. THE EXPECTED OUTPUT AND LOG
CONTENTS ARE SHOWN IN THE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION. THE APPEARANCE OF
THE OUTPUT MAY VARY SLIGHTLY DEPENDING ON THE TYPE OF PRINTER OR TERMIN-
AL TO WHICH OUTPUT IS DUMPED.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DUE TO SPACE LIMITATIONS, MACRO IS DESIGNED TO PERFORM I/O ON DEVICES
ONLY (WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THE LIBRARY). THE CODE COULD EASILY BE
MODIFIED, HOWEVER, TO MAKE FMGR READ AND WRITE CALLS, AND ALLOW DIRECT
PROCESSING OF FILES. AN ALTERNATE METHOD OF ACCESSING FILES IS TO ASSIGN
THEM LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS VIA A BATCH-SPOOL MONITOR (IF IT IS AVAILABLE)
LITERATURE REFERENCE:
AHO, ALFRED V. AND CORASICK, MARGARET J., "EFFICIENCY STRING MATCHING:
AN AID TO BIBLIOGRAPHIC SEARCH," COMMUNICATIONS OF THE ACM, VOL 18, #6.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
NUMERIC ERROR MESSAGES ARE PROVIDED BY MACRO TO INDICATE INVALID INPUT
OR FILE MANAGER ERRORS. A COMPLETE TABLE OF ERROR MESSAGES IS GIVEN
IN APPENDIX A OF THE MACRO MANUAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MINV
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INVERSE ASSEMBLER FOR 2100 MICROCODE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER MICROCODE INVERSE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'MINV' IS AN INVERSE ASSEMBLER FOR 2100 MICROCODE. IT WILL PRODUCE
A LISTING FROM A BINARY TAPE GENERATED BY THE MICRO ASSEMBLER. 'MINV'
WILL ALSO PRODUCE SOURCE CODE THAT CAN BE DIRECTLY INCORPORATED IN
ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMS. IT GENERATES 'OCT' STATEMENTS WITH THE
PROPER MICRO INSTRUCTION CODES AND PUTS THE CORRESPONDING INVERSE
ASSEMBLY IN THE COMMENTS FIELD. THIS CAN BE PUT INTO A PROGRAM SO THAT
THE PROGRAM CAN WRITE IT TO WCS, MAKING THE PROGRAM MORE SELF CONTAINED.
'MINV' MAKES EXEC CALLS TO THE OPERATING SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: MINV SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE AND LOAD. NO SUBROUTINES OTHER THAN SYSTEM LIBRARY ARE
REQUIRED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:ON,MINV,I,O,F
WHERE I = INPUT UNIT. (DEFAULT = 5). CANNOT BE A DISC FILE.
O = OUTPUT UNIT. (DEFAULT = 6). CANNOT BE A DISC FILE.
F = FLAG. 0 TO INVERSE ASSEMBLE. NON - 0 TO GENERATE PROGRAM
CODE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
MICROCODE BINARY FORMAT DOES NOT HAVE A 4 FRAME INTER-RECORD GAP LIKE
STANDARD VARIABLE LENGTH BINARY FORMAT. THEREFORE, IF THE PHOTOREADER
BRAKE IS WEAK OR THE TAPE IS SLIPPERY, THE READER WILL STOP THE TAPE
PART WAY INTO THE NEXT FRAME. THIS WILL CAUSE A CHECKSUM ERROR ON THE
NEXT BLOCK OF CODE. USE CLEAN TAPE AND HAVE THE BRAKES CHECKED EVERY
12000 MILES.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
A CHECKSUM ERROR WILL CAUSE MINV TO PAUSE. EXECUTION CONTINUES WITH
A GO,MINV COMMAND.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: M8080
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTEL 8080 ABSOLUTE PROGRAM ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER INTEL ABSOLUTE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
M8080 ASSEMBLES ABSOLUTE PROGRAMS WRITTEN IN THE ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
DESCRIBED IN THE "INTEL 8080 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING MANUAL,"
WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTIONS:
1) MACROS ARE NOT SUPPORTED, BECAUSE MORE POWERFUL MACRO FACILITIES ARE
ALREADY AVAILABLE.
2) ONLY THE OPERANDS + AND - ARE ALLOWED WITHIN EXPRESSIONS.
(OTHERS SEEMED UNNECESSARY.)
3) STATEMENT LABELS ARE LIMITED TO 5 CHARACTERS.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: RTE SYSTEM WITH A MINIMUM OF 32K AND A PAPER-
TAPE PUNCH (OR OTHER MICRO-PROCESSOR SUPPORTED MEDIA).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: M8080 SOURCE
FILE# 3: TEST INPUT
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMPILE THE SOURCE PROGRAM M8080, USING FTN4.
2. LOAD THE RESULTING RELOCATABLE PROGRAM, USING LOADR.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN M8080, ENTER:
*RU,M8080,AB,CD,EF,LLU,PLU
WHERE:
"ABCDEF" IS THE NAME OF THE INTEL 8080 SOURCE FILE,
"LLU" IS THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF A LIST DEVICE, AND,
"PLU" IS THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF A PUNCH (BINARY OUTPUT)
DEVICE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
M8080 MAY BE TESTED TO VERIFY CORRECT LOADING BY STORING THE TEST DATA
INTO A DISC FILE, AND RUNNING M8080 USING THE FILE AS SOURCE INPUT.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
INTEL 8080 ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMING MANUAL, INTEL PART
NUMBER 98-004C REV C.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
M8080'S SYMBOL TABLE SPACE IS LIMITED TO 200 SYMBOLS, 10 OF WHICH ARE
PRE-DEFINED BY THE ASSEMBLER. THIS SPACE MAY BE EXPANDED BY CHANGING
THE FIRST DIMENSION OF THE ARRAY ISMTAB IN LINES 83, 839, AND 908, AND
CHANGING THE VALUE OF ISMLIM IN LINE 148 TO MATCH THE NEW DIMENSION.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
INVALID SOURCE STATEMENTS AND EXPRESSIONS IN THE USER'S PROGRAMS
WILL BE FLAGGED WITH SELF-EXPLANATORY ERROR MESSAGES, KEYED TO LINE
NUMBERS IN THE USER'S PROGRAM.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: COMP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COMPILING FROM A FILE WITHOUT LS AND LG AREAS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
COMPILER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'COMP' PERMITS COMPILING FROM A FILE, BYPASSING THE LS AND LG AREAS. THE
LISTING AND THE RELOCATABLE ELEMENT ARE DIRECTED TO OUTPUT FILES OR TO
LOGICAL UNITS. 'COMP' REQUIRES ANOTHER PROGRAM FROM THE CONTRIBUTED
LIBRARY, "USER SPOOL POOL ACCESS OR SPOOLING MADE EASIER". COMP
USES EXEC CALLS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: COMP SOURCE
FILE# 3: DATE SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1)THE COMP PROGRAM IS COMPILED IN THE USUAL MANNER USING THE FORTRAN
IV COMPILER. TO LOAD, COMP REQUIRES SUBROUTINE GETST FROM THE CURRENT
RTE LIBRARY, NAMR FROM THE CURRENT RELOCATABLE LIBRARY, AND SFILL,
SMOVE, SGET, AND JSCOM FROM THE DECIMAL STRING ARITHMETIC LIBRARY.
SOME OLDER SYSTEMS MAY NOT INCLUDE THESE. IT ALSO REQUIRES SUBROUTINES
SPOLU AND IFMGR FROM THE LOCUS CONTRIBUTION "USER SPOOL POOL ACCESS
OR SPOOLING MADE EASIER" (OLD PART 22682-28931).
2)PROGRAM DATE IS USED BY COMP TO PRINT THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME
(FR0M THE SYSTEM CLOCK) AT THE START OF THE COMPILER LISTINGS. IT MUST
BE KNOWN TO THE SYSTEM (RP'ED) FOR COMP TO WORK. IT IS STARTED BY THE
EXEC CALL ON LINE 132 OF THE COMP SOURCE CODE. ANOTHER CALL
OR CONTINUE MAY BE SUBSTITUTED HERE TO ELIMINATE THE NEED FOR DATE.
3)PROGRAM SPLUM FROM "USER SPOOL POOL ACCESS OR SPOOLING MADE EASIER"
IS USED BY COMP. IT MUST ALSO BE KNOWN TO THE SYSTEM FOR COMP TO WORK
PROPERLY.
4)THE SYSTEM OUTSPOOL LOGICAL UNITS ARE IDENTIFIED TO COMP BY ARRAY
OSLST IN SUBROUTINE ASG. THE DATA STATEMENT ON LINE 208 OF THE COMP
SOURCE CODE LISTS THE OUTSPOOL LOGICAL UNITS. THE FIRST NUMBER IN THE
ARRAY IS THE NUMBER OF OUTSPOOL LOGICAL UNITS; SUCCEEDING NUMBERS ARE
THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS. OUTSPOOL LU'S 6 AND 8 ARE SPECIFIED
IN THE SUPPLIED CODE. THESE SHOULD BE CHANGED TO THE APPROPRIATE
NUMBERS FOR YOUR SYSTEM.
5)THE SUPPLIED CODE PRODUCES LISTINGS WITH 50 LINES PER PAGE. THIS
CAN BE CHANGED BY CHANGING THE SIXTH PARAMETER IN THE EXEC CALL THAT
STARTS THE COMPILER (LINE 133 IN THE COMP SOURCE CODE).
6)COMP USES THE FORTRAN ASSIGN STATEMENT AND FORMAT STATEMENTS TO
INITIALIZE CERTAIN ASCII STRINGS. THIS IS A NON-STANDARD USE OF FTN.
WHILE IT WORKS WELL WITH H-P FORTRAN IV (PART 24177-60001 REV. 1442),
IT CANNOT BE GUARANTEED WHEN USING OTHER FORTRAN COMPILERS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1.COMP REQUIRES THE USER TO SUPPLY PARAMETERS DESIGNATING THE
LANGUAGE PROCESSOR TO BE USED AND THE SOURCE, RELOCATABLE, AND LIST
FILES OR LU'S. THESE CAN BE SUPPLIED AS A PARAMETER STRING IN
THE :RUN STATEMENT OR AS RESPONSES TO PROMPTS FROM THE PROGRAM.
2)THE GENERAL FORM FOR THE :RUN STATEMENT TO START COMP IS:
:RU,COMP[,TERMINAL,PROCESSOR,SOURCE[,RELOCATABLE [,LIST]]]
IF THE PROCESSOR PARAMETER IS OMITTED, COMP PROMPTS FOR ALL ENTRIES.
THE TERMINAL PARAMETER DEFAULTS TO THE USER'S TERMINAL. THE SOURCE,
RELOCATABLE, AND LIST PARAMETERS CAN BE EITHER FMGR FILES OR
LU'S. IF A FILE SPECIFIED FOR THE RELOCATABLE OR LIST PARAMETER
DOES NOT EXIST, IT WILL BE CREATED, IF POSSIBLE.
3)THE CHARACTER "-" CAN BE USED FOR THE RELOCATABLE AND THE LIST
PARAMETERS. WHEN USED FOR THE RELOCATABLE PARAMETER, THE PROGRAM
SUBSTITUTES "%" FOR THE FIRST CHARACTER IN THE SOURCE FILE NAMR AND
USES THE RESULT AS THE NAMR FOR THE RELOCATABLE FILE. THE ACTION IS
SIMILAR WHEN USED AS THE LIST PARAMETER, BUT CHARACTER "'"
IS USED TO FORM THE LIST FILE NAMR.
4)THE CHARACTER "/" CAN BE USED FOR THE SOURCE, RELOCATABLE, OR LIST
PARAMETER, BUT ONLY FOR ONE AT A TIME. IT MEANS THE TERMINAL IS
USED FOR THE PARAMETER.
5)WHEN THE PROGRAM IS PROMPTING FOR INPUT, RESPONDING TO A PROMPT WITH
TWO EXCLAMATION POINTS (!!) WILL CAUSE THE PROGRAM TO ABORT.
6)IF THE RELOCATABLE PARAMETER IS NULL, NO RELOCATABLE ELEMENT IS
PRODUCED. IF THE LIST PARAMETER IS OMITTED, NO LISTING IS PRODUCED.
THIS FEATURE DEPENDS ON AN UNDEFINED LU EXISTING IN THE SYSTEM.
IF AN UNDEFINED LOGICAL UNIT CANNOT BE FOUND, LU 1 IS USED FOR
THE PARAMETER.
7)WHEN THE RELOCATABLE OR LIST PARAMETER IS AN LU NUMBER,
OUTPUT IS SPOOLED TO THE LU IF AN OUTSPOOL LU IS SPECIFIED.
TO AVOID THE SPOOLING, THE USER CAN SPECIFY THE NEGATIVE OF THE LU
NUMBER.
8)WHEN A FILE IS SPECIFIED FOR THE LIST PARAMETER, THE OUTPUT TO THE
FILE WILL BE IN SPOOL FORMAT.
9)WHEN THE PROG CREATES A FILE, IT USES 24 BLOCKS FOR THE LENGTH. WHEN
OUTPUT IS COMPLETE, THE PROG CHECKS THE ACTUAL LENGTH OF THE CREATED
FILES. IF ANY EXTENTS WERE CREATED FOR A FILE, NO ACTION IS TAKEN.
OTHERWISE THE CREATED FILE IS TRUNCATED TO THE LENGTH OF THE DATA IT
CONTAINS.
10)IF THE PROGRAM ABORTS THROUGH ITS INTERNAL ERROR HANDLING MECHANISM,
ALL FILES WILL BE CLOSED AND CREATED FILES WILL BE PURGED. IF THE
PROGRAM IS ABORTED BY SOME OTHER MEANS, THESE ACTIONS MAY NOT HAPPEN.
IN PARTICULAR, CREATED FILES WILL NO BE PURGED AND SPOOL FILES MAY BE
LEFT OPEN. GASP CAN BE USED TO CHECK THE SPOOL FILES.
11)EXAMPLE OF A ONE LINE INITIATION FOR COMP:
:RU,COMP,,FTN4,&SOURCE:SC:12,-,/
THIS CALLS THE FORTRAN COMPILER TO COMPILE THE SOURCE PROGRAM &SOURCE
WITH SECURITY CODE SC ON CARTRIDGE 12. THE RELOCATABLE ELEMENT WILL
BE ON FILE %SOURCE:SC:12. THIS FILE WILL BE CREATED IF IT DOES NOT
ALREADY EXIST. THE LISTING WILL GO TO THE USER'S TERMINAL.
12)ANY STANDARD LANGUAGE PROCESSOR (FTN4,ALGOL,ASMB) CAN BE CALLED
USING THIS PROGRAM.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
ANY SOURCE PROGRAM CAN BE USED TO TEST COMP. TESTS SHOULD INCLUDE ALL
APPLICABLE FEATURES AND ERROR MODES.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1.THE PROGRAM REQUIRES A 5 PAGE PARTITION.
2.THE PROGRAM DATE AND THE LANGUAGE PROCESSOR ARE SCHEDULED WITH WAIT
IN QUEUE. THEREFORE, MULTIPLE COPIES OF COMP CAN BE USED.
3.COMP USES THE "PUNCH" PARAMETER OF THE LANG. PROCESSOR TO OUTPUT THE
RELOCATABLE ELEMENT. THE "B" OPTION MUST BE SPECIFIED IN THE CONTROL
LINE FOR ANY SOURCE PROGRAM TO BE COMPILED OR ASSEMBLED USING COMP.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE PROGRAM WILL ABORT IF:
1.THE PARAMETERS ARE INCORRECT.
2.A FILE CANNOT BE OPENED.
3.THE USER RESPONDS TO A PROMPT WITH "!!".
THE MESSAGE "ABEND COMP ABORTED" WILL BE DISPLAYED ON THE TERMINAL IN
THESE CASES. A FILE ERROR WILL CAUSE A FMGR ERROR TO BE DISPLAYED.
A FMGR ERROR THAT OCCURS WHEN THE PROGRAM IS CHECKING OR TRIMMING
THE LENGTH OF A CREATED FILE WILL NOT CAUSE THE PROGRAM TO ABORT.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E00901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: F8
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FAIRCHILD F-8 ASSEMBLER FOR THE HP2100-21MX
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER FAIRCHILD
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM, F8, RUNS ON AN HP 2100, 21MX SERIES COMPUTER AND
ASSEMBLES FAIRCHILD F-8 MICROPROCESSOR SOURCE CODE. IT IS TWO-PASS
ASSEMBLER WHICH WILL RUN IN A DOS,RTE OR BCS ENVIRONMENT. AN 8K
COMPUTER IS REQUIRED FOR BCS,16K FOR DOS.
THE INPUT TO F8 IS A PAPER TAPE SOURCE CONTAINING SYMBOLIC LANGUAGE
INSTRUCTIONS. THE OUTPUT IS A LINE PRINTER (OR TTY) LISTING OF THE
SYMBOL TABLE THE CODE GENERATED BY THE ASSEMBLER, AND THE SOURCE CODE.
THE TAPE PUNCH OUTPUT (FORMATTED OUTPUT) IS READY FOR FAIR-BUG
LOADER.
IT IS A MODIFIED VERSION OF PREVIOUSLY CONTRIBUTED ASSEMBLER OF THE
INTEL 8080 MICROPROCESSOR.
FOR FULL DETAILS SEE SOURCE LISTING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: F8 SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO USE F8, LOAD THE PAPER TAPE CONTAINING THE SOURCE CODE, AND THEN
RUN F8 (METHOD DEPEND ON OPERATING SYSTEM).
AFTER THE END STATEMENT IS REACHED, THE PROGRAM WILL PAUSE.
REWIND THE TAPE RELOAD, AND RESTART THE ASSEMBLER FOR PASS TWO. THE
PROGRAM PRODUCES LISTINGS AND PUNCHES BINARY TAPES.
LU 5 = SOURCE CODE INPUT
LU 6 = LISTING OUTPUT
LU 4 = PUNCH OUTPUT
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
FILE 2 CONTAINS THE SOURCE OF EXAMPLE FAIRCHILD PROGRAMS.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ASSEMBLER ERRORS AND DIAGNOSTICS ARE OUTPUT ON LINE PRINTER (OR TTY).
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A GUIDE TO PROGRAMMING THE FAIRCHILD F-8 MICROCOMPUTER. FAIRCHILD
SEMICONDUCTOR (1975).
(LITERATURE REFERENCE)
E01001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PASCS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PASCAL-S COMPILER AND RUN-TIME LIBRARY
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PASCAL COMPILER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
A PARTITION OF AT LEAST 12 PAGES.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PASCS TRANSLATES SOURCE PROGRAMS WRITTEN IN PASCAL-S (A SUBSET OF THE
PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE PASCAL) INTO RELOCATABLE BINARY CODE. THIS CODE
MUST THEN BE LOADED ALONG WITH A RUN-TIME LIBRARY OF SUBROUTINES (ALSO
PROVIDED WITH THE SYSTEM), WHICH PROVIDES SUPPORT FOR THE EXECUTION.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO DECLARE, IN THE PASCAL SOURCE PROGRAMS, THAT SOME
ROUTINES (PROCEDURES OR FUNCTIONS) ARE EXTERNAL (WRITTEN SEPERATELY,
E.G. IN FORTRAN). THEY ARE LINKED TO THE CODE BY THE RELOCATING LOADER.
A FULL INSTALLATION AND USER MANUAL IS PROVIDED ALONG WITH THE SYSTEM,
IN MACHINE-READABLE FORM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: PASCS - PASCAL COMPILER
FILE# 3: PARUN - RUN-TIME LIBRARY
FILE# 4: WRITEUP - INSTALLATION AND USER'S MANUAL
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE FILE WRITEUP SHOULD FIRST BE LISTED. IT CONTAINS A FULL MANUAL
FOR INSTALLATION AND FOR THE USE OF THE COMPILER. IF LOGICAL UNIT 6
IS A LINE-PRINTER, ONE SHOULD USE THE COMMAND :ST,WRITEUP,6, TO OBTAIN
A PROPERLY PAGINATED TEXT.
ASSEMBLE, LOAD AND SAVE PACCC (THIS PRODUCES THE ABSOLUTE PROGRAM
PASCS). ASSEMBLE PADDD, AND SAVE THE RESULTING RELOCATABLE CODE IN A
FILE PARUN. CREATE A BINARY FILE PASBIN, WHERE THE COMPILER WILL STORE
THE RELOCATABLE CODE IT WILL PRODUCE. REFER TO THE WRITEUP MANUAL FOR
ALL DETAILS ABOUT COMPILING, LOADING AND RUNNING PASCAL SOURCE
PROGRAMS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
REFER TO REFERENCE MANUAL.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE REFERENCE MANUAL.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SPL/2100 COMPILER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
SPL COMPILER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
PARTITION OF 15 PAGES.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
SYSTEM PROGRAMMING LANGUAGE (SPL) IS A HIGH-LEVEL LANGUAGE FOR WRITING
PROGRAMS SUCH AS COMPILERS, DEVICE DRIVERS AND OPERATING SYSTEMS.
SPL/2100 IS THE VERSION DESIGNED FOR USE WITH THE 21MX SERIES OF
COMPUTERS.
THE SPL/2100 COMPILER CAN BE USED WITH AN RTE2,3,4 SYSTEM. A PROGRAM
SIZE OF 15 PAGES SHOULD BE SPECIFIED WHEN THE COMPILER IS LOADED.
THE COMPILER TRANSLATES PROGRAMS WRITTEN IN SPL/2100 TO HP ASSEMBLY
LANGUAGE. THE SPL PROGRAM IS INPUT FROM THE LS AREA AND THE RESULTING
ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM IS OUTPUT BACK TO THE LS AREA. THE COMPILER
THEN SCHEDULES THE HP ASSEMBLER TO PROCESS THE ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM
AND GENERATE THE OBJECT CODE.
SINCE THE RTE4 ASSEMBLER DOES NOT ACCEPT SOURCE PROGRAMS FROM THE LS
AREA, THE USER MUST FIRST SAVE THE LS AREA AS A DISC FILE AND THEN
SCHEDULE THE ASSEMBLER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: TRANSFER FILE
FILE# 3: RELOCATABLE OF SPL/2100 COMPILER
FILE# 4: EXAMPLE SPL SOURCE PROGRAM
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOADING THE SPL/2100 COMPILER.
==============================
USE THE FOLLOWING TO LOAD THE SPL/2100 COMPILER:
IN A RTE2/3 SYSTEM:
-------------------
:LG,16
:MR,MAG TAPE LU
:RU,LOADR,99,LIST LU,...
(SPECIFY A 15 PAGE PARTITION AND SEGMENTED PROGRAMS
IN A RTE4 SYSTEM:
-----------------
:ST,MAG TAPE LU,%SPL:SC:CRN:5:750,BR
:RU,LOADR
LOADR: S2,15
LOADR: RE,%SPL
LOADR: EN
THE SPL COMPILER HAS 10 SEGMENTS, SG01C TO SG10C.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILING A SPL PROGRAM.
========================
SUPPOSE THE FMGR FILE "SOURCE" CONTAINS A SPL PROGRAM. USE THE
FOLLOWING TO COMPILE THIS PROGRAM AND STORE THE RELOCATABLE BINARY IN
A FMGR FILE CALLED "OBJECT".
IN A RTE2/3 SYSTEM:
-------------------
:LG,N N SHOULD BE SUFFICIENT TRACKS FOR THE PROGRAM
:MS,SOURCE
:RU,SPL,2,LIST LU,99
THE SPL COMPILER
1. ACCEPTS THE SOURCE PROGRAM IN THE LS AREA,
2. TRANSLATES IT TO ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE,
3. STORES THE ASSEMBLY VERSION BACK IN THE LS AREA,
4. SCHEDULES THE ASSEMBLER TO PRODUCE THE OBJECT CODE.
:SA,LG,OBJECT
THE OBJECT CODE NOW RESIDES IN THE FILE "OBJECT".
IN A RTE4 SYSTEM:
-----------------
:MS,SOURCE
:RU,SPL,2,LIST LU,99
THE SPL COMPILER
1. ACCEPTS THE SOURCE PROGRAM IN THE LS AREA,
2. TRANSLATES IT TO ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE,
3. STORES THE ASSEMBLY VERSION BACK IN THE LS AREA,
4. SCHEDULES THE ASSEMBLER TO PRODUCE THE OBJECT CODE.
HOWEVER, SINCE THE RTE4 ASSEMBLER DOES NOT USE THE LS/LG AREA
THE ASSEMBLER DOES NOT RECOGNIZE THE PROGRAM CREATED BY THE SPL
COMPILER. THE ASSEMBLER ABORTS WITH A "NO INPUT SOURCE FILE" ERROR.
ASMB: $END NPRG
ASMB: $END
THE SOLUTION IS FOR THE USER TO SAVE THE LS AREA AS A FMGR FILE
AND THEN RUN THE ASSEMBLER WITH THIS FILE AS THE INPUT SOURCE FILE.
SUPPOSE THIS FILE IS CALLED "ASMB-SOURCE".
:SA,LS,ASMB-SOURCE
:RU,ASMB,ASMB-SOURCE,LIST LU,OBJECT
THE OBJECT CODE NOW RESIDES IN THE FILE "OBJECT" AND CAN BE LOADED.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A SAMPLE SPL SOURCE PROGRAM IS INCLUDED.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS.
----------
SINCE THE ASSEMBLER IS SCHEDULED BY THE SPL COMPILER, THE ASSEMBLER'S
MAIN AND ALL OF ITS SEGMENTS MUST HAVE ID SEGMENTS(I.E. MUST HAVE BEEN
RP'D) WHEN THE SPL COMPILER IS RUN. IN ADDITION, IF A CROSS REFERENCE
LISTING IS DESIRED, THE CROSS REFERENCE PROGRAM (XREF) MUST ALSO HAVE
BEEN RP'D.
FOR EXAMPLE, IF THE ASSEMBLER'S MAIN PROGRAM DOES NOT HAVE AN ID
SEGMENT, THE USER WILL SEE THIS MESSAGE AT HIS TERMINAL WHEN HE RUNS
SPL:
ABEND SPL ABORTED
THE SYSTEM CONSOLE WILL SOON SHOW THIS MESSAGE:
SPL: ASMB SCHEDULED
SC05 SPL XXXXX
SPL ABORTED
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: UNBLK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DEC RT-11 TO HP RTE SOURCE CONVERTER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DEC CONVERSION TRANSLATOR
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM CONVERTS DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. (DEC) RT-11 SOURCE
FILES ON MAGNETIC OR PAPER TAPE INTO HP RTE DISC FILES. THE ORIGINAL
SOURCE CAN BE FORTRAN, RT11 ASSEMBLER, TEXT, DATA, OR RESULTS. THE
PROGRAM CONVERTS CARRIAGE RETURNS, LINE FEEDS, TABS, NULLS, AND
APOSTROPHES INTO ACCEPTABLE RTE SYNTAX. HOWEVER, THERE ARE OTHER RT-11
PECULIARS THAT THE PROGRAM CANNOT RESOLVE INTO ACCEPTABLE RTE FORMAT.
THEREFORE, THE USER MUST FURTHER MODIFY THE RESULTING DISC FILE AS
REQUIRED. HOWEVER, MUCH TIME IS SAVED BY AUTOMATICALLY CONVERTING
MOST OF THE SOURCE FIRST WITH THIS PROGRAM.
THIS CONVERSION ALSO INCLUDES SUGGESTION OF AN
APPROPRIATE RTE DISC FILE NAME BASED ON THE RTE-11 FILE NAME AND
EXTENSION (TYPE). FOR FORTRAN FILES, THE CONTROL STATEMENTS FTN4, L,C
AND END$ ARE PLACED AT THE BEGINNING AND END OF THE FILE RESPECTIVELY.
LITERATURE REFERENCE: RT-11 SOFTWARE SUPPORT MANUAL DEC-11-ORGPA-B-D,
DNI FOR MAGNETIC TAPE FILE
STRUCTURE PP. 3-11, 3-12.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: UNBLK SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
:ST,5,&UNBLK
:RU,FTN4,&UNBLK,1,%UNBLK
:LG
:LG, 3
:MR,%UNBLK
:RU,LOADR,99,1,,,3
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:RU,UNBLK,A,B,C,D,E
WHERE A - TERMINAL LU NUMBER (1 IS DEFAULT)
B - LIST DEVICE LU NUMBER (6 IS DEFAULT)
C - DISC CARTRIDGE NUMBER (2 IS DEFAULT)
D - INPUT DEVICE LU NUMBER (POSITIVE FOR MAG TAPE, NEGATIVE
FOR PAPER TAPE, 8 IS DEFAULT)
:RU,UNBLK,A,B,C,D,E
WHERE E - PROGRAM CONTROL PARAMETER
0 FOR DISC FILE NAMING REQUESTS (DEFAULT),
1 FOR NO NAMING REQUESTS. CONVERTS ENTIRE MAG TAPE WITHOUT
INTERRUPTION (SAME EFFECT AS 0 WITH PAPER TAPE). INTERRUPTION IS
POSSIBLE WITH THE FOLLOWING COMMAND:
*BR, UNBLK
2 FOR FILE NAMING REQUESTS WITH SPECIAL DEBUGGING OUTPUT. SCATTERED
THROUGHOUT THE PROGRAM ARE WRITE STATEMENTS THAT OUTPUT THE VALUES
OF VARIOUS VARIABLES AT CERTAIN KEY LOCATIONS. *DIGITS 2,7,9, AND
13 WERE DESIRED,THE CORRESPONDING OCTAL DEBUG CODE WOULD BE:
BIT LOCATION 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
BINARY NUMBER 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
OCTAL NUMBER 1 0 5 0 2
AS THE PROG RUNS, SEVERAL QUESTIONS MUST BE ANSWERED FROM THE TERMINAL.
THESE INCLUDE SELF-EXPLANATORY REQUESTS FOR THE OCTAL DEBUG CODE IF E=2,
WHICH TAPE FILES ARE TO BE TRANSFERRED IF E IS NOT EQUAL TO 1, AND HOW
THE DISC FILES SHOULD BE NAMED IF E IS NOT EQUAL TO 1.
* DURING "NORMAL" RUNS WHEN PROG DEBUGGING IS NOT NEEDED (E IS NOT EQUAL
TO 2), THESE WRITE STATEMENTS ARE TRANSPARENT(INACTIVE). WHEN DUBUGGING
IS NEEDED (E=2), ANY SINGLE OR COMBINATION OF DEBUGGING WRITE'S CAN
BE ACTIVATED BY INPUT OF THE CORRESPONDING DEBUG CODE IN OCTAL. THERE IS
A 1 TO 1 CORRESPONDENCE BETWEEN EACH DEBUGGING WRITE AND THE BITS OF THE
OCTAL NUMBER. THEREFORE, IN A 5 DIGIT OCTAL NUMBER, THERE ARE 15 BINARY
DIGITS AND UP TO 15 DIFFERENT WRITE STATEMENTS THAT CAN BE ASSOCIATED
WITH AND SELECTED FROM THAT 15 DIGIT NUMBER.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
EXAMPLE INPUT/OUTPUT (TEST CASE)
IT IS NOT POSSIBLE TO INCLUDE A SAMPLE DEC SOURCE FOR TEST PURPOSES DUE
TO PROPRIETARY AND COPYRIGHT RESTRAINTS. FOR DEMO PURPOSES, ASSUME THE
USER HAS A MAG AND A PAPER TAPE, EACH WITH THE FOLLOWING FILES
NAME1 .FOR (FORTRAN)
NAME2 .FOR (FORTRAN)
NAME3 .MAC (ASSEMBLER)
NAME4 .MAC (ASSEMBLER)
NAME5 .TXT (TEXT)
NAME6 .DAT (DATA)
NAME7 .RES (RESULTS)
NAMER8.FOR (FORTRAN)
WHILE RTE USES A SPECIAL CHARACTER INDICATING FILE TYPE AND 5 FOLLOWING
ALPHANUMERICS, RT-11 USES SIX ALPHANUMERICS FOR THE NAME AND THREE
ALPHANUMERICS FOR THE TYPE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
RTE11 SOFTWARE SUPPORT MANUAL DEC-11-ORPGA-B-D, DNI FOR MAG TAPE FILE
STRUCTURE, PP. 3-11, 3-12.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
WITH PAPER TAPE, THE USER SHOULD NOT REQUEST FURTHER CONVERSION AT THE
EOT OR A "RUN AWAY" CONDITION WILL OCCUR (THE PROGRAM AUTOMATICALLY
REWINDS THE MAG TAPE WHEN THE LOGICAL END-OF-TAPE IS ENCOUNTERED.)
"BSM ERR-11" AFTER A *BR, UNBLK COMMAND INDICATES THAT THE MAG OR PAPER
TAPE IS NOT POSITIONED CORRECTLY. REPOSITION THE TAPE AT THE START AND
RERUN THE PROGRAM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES/ADDITIONAL EXITS
THE PROG HAS EXTENSIVE ERROR CHECKING. ANY DETECTED ANOMALY RESULTS IN A
"BSM ERROR - XXX" ON THE TERMINAL. THE "-XXX". NUMBER COMES FROM THE
STANDARD HP2100 RTE/FMGR ERROR CODES.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CAMP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MOTOROLA M6800 ASSEMBLER FOR THE 2100/21MX
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER MOTOROLA
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM, CAMP, RUNS ON AN HP 2100, 21MX SERIES COMPUTER AND
ASSEMBLES MOTOROLA M-6800 MICROPROCESSOR SOURCE CODE. IT IS TWO-PASS
ASSEMBLER WHICH WILL RUN IN A DOSM,RTE OR BCS ENVIRONMENT. AN 8K
COMPUTER IS REQUIRED FOR BCS, 16K FOR DOS.
THE INPUT TO CAMP IS A PAPER TAPE SOURCE CONTAINING SYMBOLIC
LANGUAGE INSTRUCTIONS. THE OUTPUT IS A LINE PRINTER (OR TTY) LISTING
OF THE SYMBOL TABLE THE CODE GENERATED BY THE ASSEMBLER, AND THE SOURCE
CODE. THE TAPE PUNCH OUTPUT (FORMATTED OUTPUT) IS READY FOR MIKBUG
LOADER.
CAMP IS A MODIFIED VERSION OF PREVIOUSLY CONTRIBUTED ASSEMBLER OF
THE INTEL 8080 MICROPROCESSOR.
FOR FULL DETAILS SEE SOURCE LISTING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: CAMP SOURCE
FILE# 3: EXAMPLE MOTOROLA SOURCE PROGRAMS
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CAMP (METHOD DEPEND ON OPERATING WILL SYSTEM).
AFTER THE END STATEMENT IS REACHED, THE PROGRAM WILL PAUSE.
REWIND THE TAPE RELOAD, AND RESTART THE ASSEMBLER FOR PASS TWO. THE
PROGRAM PRODUCES LISTING AND PUNCHES BINARY TAPES.
LU 4 - PUNCH OUTPUT
LU 5 - SOURCE CODE INPUT
LU 6 - LISTING OUTPUT
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
FILE 2 CONTAINS THE SOURCE OF EXAMPLE MOTOROLA PROGRAMS.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
M6800 MICROCOMPUTER SYSTEM DESIGN DATA. MOTOROLA INC.,1976
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ASSEMBLER ERRORS AND DIAGNOSTICS ARE OUTPUT ON LINE PRINTER (OR TTY).
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE HP2020 MAG TAPE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER MAGNETIC TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS RTE DRIVER CONTROLS I/O OPERATIONS WITH THE HP2020 MAGNETIC TAPE
UNIT. WHEN WRITING ON TAPE, THE ROUTINE CONVERTS ASCII DATA TO
ALPHANUMERIC BCD FORM; THE ROUTINE THEN RECORDS THE BCD CHARACTERS ON
TAPE WITH EVEN PARITY. WHEN READING TAPE, THE ROUTINE ACQUIRES
ALPHANUMERIC BCD CHARACTERS WITH EVEN PARITY, AND CONVERTS THE
CHARACTERS TO ASCII. NO PROVISION IS MADE FOR WRITING OR READING
WITHOUT ASCII-BCD CONVERSION.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS ONE HP2020 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT WITH INTERFACE KIT,
AND THE DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS OPTION FOR THE COMPUTER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL PROCEDURES FOR CONFIGURATING A DRIVER INTO THE RTE SYSTEM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A TEST PROGRAM IS INCLUDED. USUAL COMPILE,LOAD, AND RUN PROCEDURES.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINTS: I.21
C.21
SEE SECTION 4.0 OF RTE MANUAL
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR61
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE MULTIPROGRAMMER DRIVER 6936A
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER MULTIPROGRAM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DVR61 IS AN RTE DRIVER TO OPERATE THE HP 6936A MULTIPROGRAMMER. THE
DRIVER PERFORMS THREE SEPARATE FUNCTIONS. A RESET WILL RESET ALL CARDS
IN THE 6936 SYSTEM. READING FROM THE DEVICE WILL INPUT A WORD FROM
THE SWITCH REGISTER OF THE 6936 TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. THIS ALLOWS
REMOTE CONTROL OF THE USERS SYSTEM. FINALLY, THE WRITE ROUTINE WILL
OUTPUT CONTROL AND DATA WORDS FOR CONTROL OF DEVICES CONNECTED TO THE
6936A. FORTRAN-CALLABLE.
DVR61 REQUIRES A MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM AND A 6936A WITH MICROCIRCUIT
INTERFACE KIT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES. DRIVER MUST BE CONFIGURED INTO USER'S RTE
SYSTEM AT SYSTEM GENERATION TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A SAMPLE FORTRAN TEST PROGRAM IS INCLUDED.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINTS
THE DRIVER REQUIRES THE "B" VERSION OF RTE.
FORTRAN CALL STATEMENT:
CALL EXEC (N,IDRT,IUAD,IDB,ISAD,IDATA)
N 1-READ OUTPUTS A SIGNAL WORD TO THE SWITCH REGISTER OF THE 6936A.
WHEN A MANUAL FLAG IS RETURNED THE DRIVER CHANGES THE
VALUE OF IUAD TO THE VALUE READ.
2-WRITE OUTPUT IUAD AND ICB AS A CONTROL WORD AND ISAD WITH IDATA
AS A DATA WORD.
3-RESET 0'S ARE OUTPUT TO ALL CARDS OF THE USERS UNITS.
IDRT FOR READ OR WRITE USE THE MULTIPROGRAMMER DEVICE
REFERENCE NUMBER.
FOR RESET USE AN OCTAL 1XX. WHERE XX IS THE MP DEVICE
REFERENCE NUMBER.
IUAD READ ACTUAL SIGNAL WORD OUTPUT TO MP.
WRITE THE OCTAL UNIT NUMBER YOU WISH TO TALK TO (0 TO 17) FOR
THE 16 UNITS.
RESET THE NUMBER OF UNITS IN THE SYSTEM (1 TO 16).
ICB WRITE OCTAL NUMBER REFERING TO BITS 4,5,6 OF THE CONTROL WORD.
SEE BELOW.
ICB DTE SYE TME
0 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
2 0 1 0
3 0 1 1
4 1 0 0
5 1 0 1
6 1 1 0
7 1 1 1
READ VALUE READ FROM MP AFTER RETURN DATA BUTTON IS SET BY THE
OPERATOR.
ISAD WRITE ONLY SLOT ADDRESS (0 TO 14).
IDATA WRITE ONLY DATA WORD (4 OCTAL DIGITS).
NOTE: MAKE SURE THAT ALL UNITS ARE TURNED ON BEFORE PROGRAMMING STARTS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR54
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE NON-DMA DRIVER FOR HP 5401B MULTICHANNEL ANALYZER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER ANALYZER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS RTE DRIVER HANDLES INPUT AND OUTPUT FOR THE HP5401B MULTI-
CHANNEL ANALYZER, OPTION 08. IT IS A NON-BUFFERED, NON-DMA DRIVER
WHICH WILL WRITE ASCII CODE AND READ ASCII OR BINARY CODE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DVR54 SOURCE (ASMB,R,B,L,C)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
CONFIGURATION
DIRVER IS CONFIGURED AS A NON-BUFFERED, NON-DMA RTE DRIVER.
IT REQUIRES ON I/O SLOT CONFIGURED FOR INTERRUPTS.
I.E.
.
.
.
14 , DVR 54
.
.
. IN EQT ENTRY
AND .
.
14 , EQT, N IN INTERRUPT TABLE
.
.
.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
EXAMPLE INPUT/OUTPUT (TEST CASE)
READ: FORMAT (14, 10I7)
E.G. READ (IAN,2) N, (A(J), J = 1, 10)
WRITE: FORMAT (10I7)
E.G. WRITE (IAN,3) (A(J), J = 1, 10)
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
WRITE REQUEST
ALL OUTPUT REQUESTS ARE TREATED ALIKE. THE EXACT NUMBER OF
CHARACTERS OR WORDS ARE TRANSMITTED. THE NATURE OF THE STRING IS
THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE USER PROGRAM.
READ REQUESTS
THIS CAN BE IN TWO FORMS: ASCII OR BINARY
ASCII INPUT
IN THIS MODE, DATA IS READ IN RECORD FORMAT I.E., 'LF' IS ON END OF
RECORD. 'CR' IS IGNORED. THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS TRANSMITTED TO
THE USER BUFFER IS THE REQUESTED NUMBER OR THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS IN
THE RECORD WHICHEVER IS THE SMALLER. IF THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS OR
WORDS REQUESTED IS LESS THAN THE LENGTH OF THE RECORD, THEN BEFORE THE
DRIVER COMPLETES, CHARACTERS ARE SKIPPED UNTIL AN END OF RECORD CHARACT-
ER IS FOUND. CR AND LF ARE NOT TRANSFERRED TO THE USER BUFFER.
TIME OUT IS USED IN THIS MODE AND IS HANDLED BY THE DRIVER TO GIVE A
SIMULATED EOT RETURN.
BINARY INPUT
THE EXACT NUMBER OF CHARACTERS OR WORDS ARE RETURNED TO THE USER IR-
RESPECTIVE OF THE NATURE OF THE DATA. NO CHECK IS MADE FOR END OF
RECORD MARKS.
NO TIME OUT IS SET FOR THIS MODE OF INPUT.
ENTRY POINTS
I.54 INITIATOR ENTRY
C.54 CONTINUATOR ENTRY
LITERATURE REFERENCE
REAL-TIME EXECUTIVE SOFTWARE SYSTEM, 02005-90001
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
DRIVER TIMES-OUT WHEN ANALYZER IS SWITCHED OFF IN THE MIDDLE OF A
TRANSFER. THE RETURN TO A PROGRAM IS THE SAME AS THAT WHEN AN "EOT"
CHARACTER IS ENCOUNTERED.
NO "RTE-TYPE" ERROR RETURNS ARE MADE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR57
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SPECIAL PRIVILEGED RTE DRIVER FOR HP 2313 SUBSYSTEM
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PRIVILEGED ANALOG/DIGITAL
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DRIVER ENABLES THE HP 2313 DATA ACQUISITION SUBSYSTEM TO BE USED
UNDER RTE FOR CONTINUOUS FAST DATA ACQUISITION. READINGS ARE TAKEN IN
GROUPS OF THREE OR MORE RANDOM HIGH LEVEL MULTIPLEXOR (+/-10 VOLTS)
CHANNELS. THE TIME BETWEEN TWO READINGS IN ONE GROUP IS FIXED AT 30
MICROSECONDS. ALL THE READINGS WITHIN A GROUP ARE REPEATED AFTER A
PRECISE PROGRAMMABLE DELAY (T) WHICH MAY BE BETWEEN 500 AND 2550
*MICROSECONDS WITH A 10 MICROSECOND RESOLUTION.
FOR SPEED REASONS, THE DRIVER REQUIRES DOUBLE BUFFERS WITHIN THE
CALLING PROGRAM. THESE BUFFERS NEED TO BE APPROXIMATELY 1000 WORDS
EACH FOR CONTINUOUS THROUGHPUT TO MAGNETIC TAPE AT ABOUT 4 X 2000=8 KHZ.
THE DRIVER DOES NOT USE DMA OR THE LAST ADDRESS DETECTOR CARD IN THE
HP 2313. THE ONLY NECESSARY HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ARE A MINIMUM RTE
SYSTEM AND THE HP 2313 WITH PROGRAMMABLE PACER.
*THERE IS A VERSION OF THIS DRIVER FROM 500 TO 25960 MICROSECONDS
AVAILABLE ON SPECIAL REQUEST FROM THE AUTHOR.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE DRIVER AND ITS LINKING ROUTINE, THEN INCLUDE THEM AT GENERATION
TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A TEST PROGRAM IS INCLUDED ON TAPE. THE OUTPUT WILL DEPEND ON THE
ANALOG INPUT VALUES.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE TO THE DRIVER IS NON-STANDARD TO ALLOW FOR DOUBLE
BUFFERING OF THE OUTPUT.
CALL IS AS FOLLOWS:
EXT EXEC
JSB EXEC
DEF *+5
DEF RCODE WHERE RCODE IS A 1 FOR READ
DEF CONND CONND IS THE LOGICAL UNIT#
DEF BUFF BUFF IS ADD. OF PRAM BLOCK
DEF BLNTH BLNTH IS LENGTH OF BLOCK
FORMAT OF PRAM BLOCK IS
*
WORD 1*TIME INTERVAL IN 10'S OF MICROSECONDS DEC X <255
2*BUFFER 1 FULL/EMPTY FLAG(ALL 1'S S/O) OCT O
3*BUFFER 2 FULL/EMPTY FLAG(ALL 1'S S/O) OCT O
4*ADDRESS OF BUFFER 1 DEF B1
5*ADDRESS OF BUFFER 2 DEF B2
6*# OF SCANS PER BUFFER DEC M
7*# OF READINGS PER SCAN DEC N
8*CHAN # OF FIRST READING FOR SCAN OCT
9*CHAN # OF 2ND READING FOR SCAN OCT
10*CHAN # OF 3RD READING FOR SCAN OCT
*ETC - MUST BE AT LEAST 3 CHANS
*CHAN # OF NTH READING FOR SCAN OCT
*BUFFER 1 B1 BSS M*N
*BUFFER 2 B2 BSS M*N
FORMAT OF WORD CHAN# IS THE SAME AS SHOWN ON PAGE
3-12 OF DAS CONTROL CARD MANUAL FOR
"B. DATA WORD-LAST ADDRESS DETECTOR" WITH BIT 12=0.
NOTES ON OPERATION OF DRIVER:
THE DRIVER SETS THE FLAGS IN WORDS 2 AND 3 OF PRAM
BLOCK WHEN A BUFFER IS FULL.
THE PROGRAM MUST CLEAR THESE FLAGS AS THE DATA IS
PROCESSED.
IF FLAG IS NOT CLEAR WHEN THE DRIVER REQUIRES TO
USE A BUFFER, THEN DRIVER STOPS AND SETS WORD 1
OF PRAM BLOCK TO ZERO.
THUS TO STOP DRIVER, LEAVE FLAG IN WORD 2 OR 3
SET. PROGRAM LOOKS FOR WORD 1 TO GO ZERO TO
INDICATE DRIVER HAS INPUT LAST BLOCK.
AS THIS DRIVER SETS WORD 1 OF PRAM BLOCK TO ZERO WHEN
IT STOPS, THE USER MUST RESET WORD 1 BEFORE ANOTHER
CALL IS MADE TO THIS DRIVER, I.E., ALWAYS SET UP WORD 1
AT THE START OF THE USER CALLING PROGRAM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
1. EXIT BACK TO USER WITH B REGISTER ALL 1'S INDICATES DRIVER
ALREADY IN USE.
2. IO07 RESULTS IF A REQUEST IS MADE FOR READINGS AT SPEEDS IN
EXCESS OF THAT CAPABLE BY THE DRIVER OR THE HARDWARE.
3. WORD ONE OF PRAM BLOCK IS SET TO ZERO IF INPUT TO DOUBLE
BUFFERS IS FASTER THAN USER PROGRAM OUTPUTS THE DATA.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF CALLING PROGRAM IS DISC RESIDENT, THE "OFF" COMMAND MUST NOT BE
USED TO STOP THE PROGRAM. THE REASON FOR THIS IS THAT THE CALLING
PROGRAM IS NEVER I/O SUSPEND ON THE HP 2313, AND SO IT WILL CONTINUE
TO TRANSFER DATA INTO BUFFERS (AND POSSIBLY OVER THE TOP OF THE NEXT
PROGRAM THAT COMES IN.)
THE CALLING PROGRAM MUST NEVER BE ALLOWED TO SWAP OUT; I.E., IT MUST
HAVE PRIORITY 1 AND NEVERY GO OPERATOR SUSPEND OR MEMORY SUSPEND, AND
NEVER I/O SUSPEND ON A BUFFER IN R.T COMMON.
ALL SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS RESULT FROM THE AUTHOR'S INTENT TO ATTAIN
THE HIGHEST POSSIBLE SPEED FOR THE HP 2313 PRIVILEGED DRIVER.
OVERHEADS: APPROXIMATELY 200 MICROSECONDS PER GROUP IS REQUIRED TO
MAKE SURE THE DRIVER IS READY TO TAKE THE READINGS ON TIME AND A FURTHER
30 MICROSECONDS PER READING IS REQUIRED TO TAKE THE SAMPLE. THE COM-
PLETION SECTION OF THE DRIVER RUNS WITH THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM OFF.
AT FAST DATA RATES, THE UTILIZATION OF THE CPU CAN BE VERY HIGH
(OVER 50%!)
E01801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR44
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE DVR FOR INTERMEDIA SYS 4406/4416 GRAPHIC VIDEO GENERATORS (HP 5662B)
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER GRAPHIC DISPLAY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-C RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DVR 44 IS AN RTE DRIVER FOR THE INTERMEDIA SYSTEMS 4406 GRAPHIC VIDEO
GENERATOR. AN RTE PROGRAM CAN CALL THE DRIVER TO DISPLAY GRAPHICAL
INFORMATION VIA THE 4406/4416 GVG ON A VIDEO MONITOR. THE BASIC
FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE IN THE DRIVER ARE: SET POINTS, CLEAR POINTS,
ERASE SCREEN, AND SELECT VIDEO POLARITY.
** HARDWARE **
INTERMEDIA SYSTEMS 4406 OR 4416 GRAPHIC VIDEO GENERATOR (HP PART NO.
5662B)
CONNECTOR AND 75 OHM COAXIAL CABLE ASSEMBLY
VIDEO MONITOR
DMA (OPTIONAL)
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DVR 44 SOURCE (ASMB, R,B,L,T)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
DURING THE RTE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE, DVR 44 SHOULD BE
LOADED IN THE PROGRAM INPUT PHASE AT THE SAME TIME THAT ALL OTHER I/O
DRIVERS ARE LOADED. FOR THE EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRY, THE "D" PARAMETER
MUST BE SPECIFIED FOR DMA OPERATION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
CONTACT THE FACTORY FOR TEST CASE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
FUNCTIONS AND CALLING SEQUENCES
WRITE FUNCTION: CALL EXEC (2, ICON, IBA, IBL)
ICON - CONTROL PARAMETER, DETAILED BELOW
(NN = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER):
OCTAL VALUE FUNCTION
----------- --------
NN SET POINTS VIA DMA.
1NN CLEAR POINTS VIA DMA.
2NN SET POINTS VIA INTERRUPT.
3NN CLEAR POINTS VIA INTERRUPT.
IBA - BUFFER CONTAINING POINTS TO BE SET OR CLEARED.
EACH 16 BIT WORD IN THE BUFFER CONTAINS THE X
AND Y COORDINATES OF ONE POINT, AS SHOWN BELOW:
BIT 15 8 7 0
VALUE Y COORDINATE X COORDINATE
NOTE THAT THE POINT (Y = 0, X = 0) IS AT THE
LOWER LEFT CORNER OF THE DISPLAY MATRIX.
IBL - NUMBER OF POINTS TO BE PLOTTED. THIS MUST BE A
POSITIVE NUMBER.
CONTROL FUNCTION: CALL EXEC (3, IFLU)
IFLU: CONTROL PARAMETER, DETAILED BELOW
(NN = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER):
OCTAL VALUE FUNCTION
----------- --------
30NN CLEAR SCREEN.
31NN SET VIDEO POLARITY TO WHITE DOTS
ON A BLACK BACKGROUND.
32NN SET VIDEO POLARITY TO BLACK DOTS
ON A WHITE BACKGROUND.
NOTES: 1. VIDEO POLARITY SELECTION ONLY APPLIES TO THE
4416 GRAPHIC VIDEO GENERATOR.
2. THE TERMINATION PROCEDURE FOR A DATA
TRANSFER AUTOMATICALLY SETS THE VIDEO
POLARITY TO WHITE DOTS ON BLACK BACKGROUND.
3. PHYSICAL STATUS FOR THE DEVICE IS ALWAYS
ZERO.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E01901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR33
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE WRITEABLE CONTROL STORE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER WCS MICROCODE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DVR33 OPERATOR UNDER CONTROL OF THE I/O CONTROL MODULE OF THE REAL-
TIME-EXECUTIVE. THIS DRIVER PERFORMS THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS BETWEEN
A USER'S PROGRAM AND A WRITEABLE CONTROL STORE (WCS) MODULE:
1. WRITE UNCONDITIONALLY (BIT 10 SET IN CONTROL WORD OF THE EXEC CALL)
AND SET "IN USE" FLAG.
2. WRITE ONLY IF "IN USE" FLAG IS NOT SET AND SET "IN USE" FLAG.
IF "IN USE" FLAG IS SET, REJECT REQUEST.
3. READ FROM WCS MODULE INTO USER'S BUFFER.
4. RESET "IN USE" FLAG.
WRITE REQUESTS MAY BE MADE UNDER DMA CONTROL. READ REQUESTS ARE
ALWAYS NON DMA.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
STANDARD RTE WITH WRITEABLE CONTROL STORE (WCS) MODULE(S).
LITERATURE REFERENCE
RTE PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING MANUAL - HP #02005-90001
MICROPROGRAMMING GUIDE - HP #5951-3028
MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE - HP #02100-90133
DOS MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE - HP #02100-90146
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DVR33 SOURCE (ASMB,R,B,L,C)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
CONFIGURE INTO SYSTEM AT GENERATION TIME IN THE SAME MANNER AS ANY
OTHER STANDARD DRIVER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
A THOROUGH CHECK OUT OF DVR33 CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED BY USE OF THE
CONTRIBUTED RTE MICRO-DEBUG-EDITOR.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THE FOLLOWING GROUND RULES SHOULD BE FOLLOWED, IF SWAPPING IS ALLOWED
AND DIFFERENT MICROPROGRAMS ARE REQUIRED BY FOREGROUND AND/OR BACK-
GROUND PROGRAMS.
1. ALL PROGRAMS REQUEST STATUS AND SUSPEND THEMSELVES UNTIL THE "IN
USE FLAG" IS CLEAR.
2. IF "IN USE" FLAG IS CLEAR PROGRAM LOADS WCS MODULE WITH MICROCODE
AND CONTINUES EXECUTION.
3. WHEN MICROCODE IS NO LONGER NEEDED AND BEFORE PROGRAM TERMINATION,
PROGRAMS CLEARS "IN USE" FLAG.
BUG REPORT
THIS DRIVER APPEARS TO BE NAMED INCORRECTLY FOR RTE, AS DVR30 TO
DVR33 ARE RESERVED FOR DISC DRIVERS.
AS A RESULT, WHEN THE DRIVER IS REFERENCED IT RETURNS ERROR IO01
(NOT ENOUGH PARAMETERS). RENAMING THE DRIVER TO DVR37 WORKS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
INITIATION SECTION RETURN STATUS:
A REG. = 0 = OPERATION INITIATED
A REG. = 1 = ILLEGAL REQUEST OR ZERO LENGTH READ/WRITE:
A REG. = 3 = WRITE REQUESTED BUT IN USE FLAG SET. REQUEST IS
REJECTED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E02001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR56
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE HP 2310C SPECIAL SUBSYSTEM DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DRIVER (56) IS A SPECIAL APPLICATIONS DRIVER FOR THE 2310 MINIVERTER,
WHICH OPERATES UNDER CONTROL OF THE I/O MODULE OF THE REAL TIME EXECU-
TIVE. THIS DRIVER ALLOWS DATA TO BE SAMPLED FROM A GIVEN MINIVERTER
CHANNEL (ICHAN) A SPECIFIED NUMBER (N) OF TIMES. THE RANDOM ADVANCE OR
SEQUENTIAL MODES ARE NOT ALLOWED WITH THIS DRIVER. THIS DRIVER OPERATES
ONLY IN THE RANDOM START MODE. THE STRUCTURING OF THIS DRIVER IN THIS
MANNER SAVES A SIGNIFICANT NUMBER (ABOUT 1/2) OF THE MEMORY LOCATIONS
REQUIRED OF THE 2310/2311 SUBSYSTEM RTE DRIVER. THIS DRIVER DOESN'T
CONVERT THE MINIVERTER DATA. THE MCONV CALL MUST BE UTILIZED FOR THE
CONVERSION. I.56 AND C.56 ARE THE ENTRY POINTS OF THE INITIATOR AND
CONTINUATOR SECTIONS OF D.56 ARE THE ENTRY POINTS OF THE INITIATOR
AND CONTINUATOR SECTIONS OF D.56 RESPECTIVELY.
LITERATURE REFERENCE
1. HIGH SPEED DAT ACQUISITION SUBSYSTEM 2310C OPERATING AND SERVICE
MANUAL (HP PART NO. 02310-90005)
2. RTE HP 2310/2311 SUBSYSTEM DRIVER (DVR56).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: TEST PROGRAM
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD DVR56 WITH THE DRIVERS WHEN GENERATING AN RTE SYSTEM USING THE
FIXED HEAD OR MOVING HEAD RTE GENERATOR (FH RTGEN OR MH RTGEN).
2. CONFIGURE THE DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE, EQUIPMENT TABLE, AND INTERRUPT
TABLE TO REFERENCE THE MINIVERTER DRIVER (DVR56) AND THE COMPUTER
SELECT CODE OF THE MINIVERTER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
PROGRAM MINI ALLOWS THE USER TO SAMPLE A CHANNEL OF THE MINIVERTER A
SPECIFIED NUMBER OF TIMES. IT THEN PRINTS OUT THE AVERAGE, RANGE,
MINIMUM, AND MAXIMUM IN MILLIVOLTS OF THE SAMPLED DATA.
1. LOAD TEST PROGRAM (MINI) AND SUBROUTINE (MCONV) WITH THE RTE LOADER.
2. APPLY A VOLTAGE TO CHANNEL OF MINIVERTER TO BE MEASURED.
3. SCHEDULE MINI; ON,MINI
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
I.56 - INITIATOR SECTION
C.56 - CONTINUATOR SECTION
DVR 56 IS CONTROLLED BY THE RTE EXEC CALLING SEQUENCE:
A. FORTRAN
CALL EXEC(1,IDRT,IBUFF,N,ICHAN)
B. ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT EXEC
.
.
.
JSB EXEC
DEF *+6
DEF 1
DEF IDRT
DEF IBUFF
DEF N
DEF ICHAN
WHERE;
IDRT - DEVICE REF. TABLE NUMBER (LU#)
IBUFF - INTEGER ARRAY (DATA STORAGE BUFFER)
N - NUMBER OF TIMES TO SAMPLE ICHAN
ICHAN - CHANNEL NUMBER (1-256)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERRORS: A REGISTER SET = 1 WHEN,
1. ILLEGAL REQUEST CODE, ONLY READ REQUEST ALLOWED.
2. INVALID NUMBER OF DATA SAMPLES
3. INVALID CHANNEL NUMBER
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E02101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVP10
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE DRIVER PACKAGE FOR XYNETICS AND CALCOMP PLOTTERS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PLOTTER XYNETICS
CALCOMP GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS, 280 DRIVER, 459 PLOT ROUTINE
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DRIVER ALLOWS XYNETICS 1100,1200, & 2000 SERIES PLOTTERS
EQUIPPED WITH SG-50 SLOPE GENERATORS TO OPERATE AS STANDARD
SYSTEM PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT. STANDARD EXEC CALLS MAY BE MADE TO
OUTPUT DATA AND CHECK STATUS OF PLOTTER. STANDARD SYSTEM
FEATURES SUCH AS BUFFERED OUTPUT, EQUIPMENT TIMEOUT, ETC ARE
AVAILABLE. THIS DRIVER ALLOWS PROGRAMMABLE PEN COLOR CHANGES
WITH AUTOMATIC OFFSETTING SO THAT ALL COLORS LINE UP. DRIVER
ALSO SUPPORTS CALCOMP 560 SERIES INCREMENTAL PLOTTERS. TYPE OF
PLOTTER TO BE USED IS SPECIFIED BY SUBCHANNEL AT SYSTEM
GENERATION TIME.
SEE XYNETICS MANUAL P/N TM-1038 "BASIC OPERATION MANUAL, MODEL
SG50 FOR HP 2100 COMPUTER."
PLOT MODULE REPLACES PLOT PORTION OF STANDARD HP PLOTTER
LIBRARY. THESE ROUTINES FORMAT DATA FOR THE XYNETICS FLATBED
PLOTTERS, MODELS 1100,1200, & 2000 EQUIPPED WITH SG50 SLOPE
GENERATORS AND HP INTERFACES. EACH LINE DRAWN REQUIRES 8 WORDS
OF DATA. ROUTINE UPDATES CURRENT PEN COORDINATES, HANDLES PEN
UP/DOWN COMMANDS, AND NEW ORIGIN COMMANDS SAME AS STANDARD PLOT
MODULE. THIS IS A UTILITY SUBROUTINE, TYPE 7, TO BE APPENDED TO
USERS PROGRAM WHICH GENERATES DATA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
DRIVER
1. ASSEMBLE RTE DRIVER DVP10.
(NOTE THAT SOURCE MAY BE EDITTED TO DELETE SUBCHANNEL
SWITCHING FOR CALCOMP PLOTTER; IF THIS IS DONE, IGNORE
FOLLOWING COMMENTS ABOUT SUBCHANNELS AND CALCOMP REFERENCES)
2. INSTALL RELOCATABLE OF DRIVER AT SYSTEM GENERATION TIME:
A. EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRIES
EQT N? FOR XYNETICS, RESPOND:
SCI,DVP10,B,T=1000
EQT M? FOR CALCOMP, RESPOND:
SC2,DVP10,B,T=100
(B AND T ENTRIES OPTIONAL)
B. DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE:
P = EQT #? FOR XYNETICS, RESPOND:
N,1
Q = EQT #? FOR CALCOMP, RESPOND:
M,0
C. INTERRUPT TABLE
SC1,EQT,N FOR XYNETICS
SC2,EQT,M FOR CALCOMP
PLOT SUBROUTINE
1. ASSEMBLE PLOT MODULE SOURCE AND STORE AS RELOCATABLE SUB-
ROUTINE.
2. APPEND PLOT SUBROUTINES TO EACH USER PROGRAM THAT USES
XYNETICS PLOTTER. LOAD THIS PLOT MODULE BEFORE SCANNING HP
PLOT LIBRARY. OTHER PLOTTER ROUTINES SUCH AS SYMB, LINE,
AXIS, ETC, MUST BE SUPPLIED FROM THE HP PLOT LIBRARY.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
1. COMPILE TEST PROGRAM AND LOAD ALONG WITH PLOT MODULE.
SYSTEM MUST HAVE DVP10 CONFIGURED IN AND SYNETICS PLOTTER
CONNECTED UP.
2. TURN ON TEST PROGRAM: *ON,TEST,P1,P2,P3,P4,(SEE BELOW FOR
PARAMETER
DEFINITION)
3. IF PLOTTER IS NOT SET TO AUTO (ALL 3 BUTTONS), SYSTEM WILL
RESPOND:
I/O ERR NR EQT #_
SET ALL BUTTONS TO AUTO AND ENTER *UP,EQT#
4. PLOTTER WILL DRAW 4 SQUARES IN 4 COLORS AND LETTER "TEST
COMPLETE" AND THEN PROGRAM WILL TERMINATE.
PARAMETERS:
P1-LU OF TERMINAL
P2-LU OF PLOTTER
P3-VALUE FOR ISPD DEFAULT 28
P4-VALUE FOR IAC DEFAULT 11
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
DRIVER
DRIVER PROVIDES ALL NORMAL TYPES OF EXITS TO SYSTEM--SEE RTE
MANUAL.
DRIVER WILL REJECT READ CALLS AND I/O CONTROL CALLS WITH
FUNCTIONS NOT EQUAL TO 0,1,2,3, OR 4.
PLOTTER IN MANUAL MODE WILL CAUSE A NOT READY I/O ERROR.
PLOT ROUTINE
NO ERROR EXITS PROVIDED.
PLOT ROUTINE RETURNS TO USER PROGRAM WHEN DATA HAS BEEN PASSED
TO PLOTTER; IF PLOTTER IS BUFFERED, NEXT DATA POINT MAY BE
FORMATTED WHILE CURRENT LINE IS BEING DRAWN.
IF A ZERO LENGTH LINE IS REQUESTED, CONTROL RETURNS IMMEDIATELY;
NO I/O CALL IS MADE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E02201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR55
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DRIVER FOR 12555B D-TO-A CONVERTER INTERFACE CARD
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER CONVERSION GRAPHIC
ANALOG/DIGITAL PLOTTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-M RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DVR55 IS A RTE-I,II,III AND M DRIVER FOR THE 12555B DIGITAL-TO-
ANALOG CONVERTER INTERFACE CARD. DVR55 PROCESSES FOUR WRITE
REQUESTS AND TWO CONTROL REQUEST.
DVR55 DOES NOT PERFORM THE REFRESH FUNCTION AND IS NOT INTENDED FOR
GRAPHICS ON A NON-STORAGE-TYPE SCOPE. DVR55 IS INTENDED FOR D TO A
OPERATIONS (INCLUDING STAIR STEP IN 10MS INCREMENTS), DRIVING X-Y
PLOTTERS OR FOR GRAPHICS ON STORAGE-TYPE SCOPES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DVR55 DOCUMENTATION AND SOURCE
FILE# 3: CKD2A SOURCE (CHECK-OUT PROGRAM)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE DOCUMENTATION FILE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E02301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVC12
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CENTRONICS COMPATIBLE PRINTER DRIVER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
CENTRONICS PRINTER DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IV RTE-III RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
DVC 12 IS A STANDARD PRINTER DRIVER AND PERFORMS ESSENTIALLY THE SAME
FUNCTIONS. AN EXTENTION OF THE FEATURE OF PRINTER CONTROLS BY THE
FIRST CHARACTER OF THE USER'S BUFFER IS INCLUDED. SEVERAL PARAMETERS
CAN BE DEFINED BY CHANGING THE SUBCHANNEL NUMBER OF EACH DEVICE'S EQT.
PARAMETERS SUCH AS: 1. NO. LINES/PAGE
2. NO. CHAR.S/LINE
3. SIMULATE DISPLAY FUNCTIONS
4. IGNORE CONTROL WORD BIT 8
(PRINT FIRST COLUMN)
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DRIVER SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE INTO A FILE.
2. GENERATE INTO A SYSTEM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE LISTING.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
TRY IT!
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE DRIVER LISTING.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
USES 21MX MICROCODE IF APPROPRIATE (ASSEMBLED WITH Z IN CONTROL
STATEMENT).
E02401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DUPL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE/DOS DUPLICATOR PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
COPY SAVE/RESTORE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
966 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (640 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS RTE AND DOS PROGRAM DUPLICATES PUNCHED TAPES. THE DATA FROM THE
MASTER TAPE IS STORED ON DISC, AND ONE OR MORE COPY TAPES ARE THEN
PERFORMED, AND EACH COPY TAPE CAN BE REREAD AND COMPARED WITH THE
DISC FILE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DUPL SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY AND LOAD PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
AN EXAMPLE OF AN OPERATING PROCEDURE IN A RTE ENVIRONMENT IS GIVEN
BELOW:
START WITH: ON,DUPL,A,B,C,D,E
WHERE: A=0 RELOCATABLE TAPES
ELSE ABSOLUTE TAPES
B=0 VERIFY CHECKSUM ONLY
B=1 VERIFY CHECKSUM AND PUNCH
B=2 PUNCH A COPY AND ASK FOR THE
COMPARE PHASE IN A SECOND PASS
C (USEFUL ONLY FOR RELOCATABLE
TAPES)
C=0 STOP DUPLICATION ON END RECORD
ELSE DO NOT STOP ON END RECORD (FOR
LIBRARIES USE)
D NUMBER OF TRACKS FOR DISC ALLOC-
ATION (ONLY IF B=0)
E DISC AVAILABILITY INDICATOR
E=0 WAIT FOR DISC AVAILABLE
ELSE DO NOT WAIT FOR DISC
IF ANY PARAMETER IS NOT PRESENT, IT IS AUTOMATICALLY SET TO ZERO.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
ON,DUPL,,2,1,4,1 DUPLICATE A RELOCATABLE TAPE
CONTAINING THE RELOCATABLE
BCS LIBRARY, WITH THE COMPARE
PHASE IN A SECOND PASS, NOT
WAITING FOR END RECORD, USING
A MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FOUR TRACKS
AND DO NOT WAIT FOR DISC
AVAILABILITY.
UP,N WHERE N IS THE EQT OF INPUT UNIT
GO,DUPL,1
/DUPL: ENTER "GO" PARAMETERS!
GO,DUPL,1 COMPARE PHASE WITHOUT PUNCHING
ANOTHER COPY.
UP,N
GO,DUPL,1
/DUPL: ENTER "GO" PARAMETERS!
GO,DUPL,0 TERMINATE THE PROGRAM
END DUPL
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
DURING THE JOB YOU MAY GET THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES!
1. END DUPL - PROGRAM TERMINATED AND TRACKS RELEASED
2. /DUPL: ENTER "GO" PARAMETERS!
- REPLY WITH:
GO,DUPL,X X=0 TERMINATES PROGRAM
X=1 COMPARE PHASE
X=2 COMPARE AND PUNCH
ANOTHER COPY
3. /DUPL : CHECKSUM ERROR!
/DUPL : COMPARE ERROR
- REPOSITION TAPE AT THE BEGINNING
OF THE LAST RECORD AND REPLY WITH:
GO,DUPL
4. /DUPL : DISC OVERFLOW!
DISC NOT AVAILABLE!
- IRRECOVERABLE CONDITION
REPOSITION THE TAPE AT THE BEGINNING
AND REPLY WITH:
GO,DUPL,A,B,C,D,E
5. IF END OF TAPE CONDITION IS DETECTED ON THE INPUT UNIT REPLY
WITH:
GO,DUPL,Y Y = 0 GO AHEAD READING
ELSE TERMINATE
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E02501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BEDIT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE BINARY TAPE/FILE UTILITY
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
FILES PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
AT LEAST 6105 OF BACKGROUND
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE RTE UTILITY PROGRAM 'BEDIT' IS DESIGNED TO TAKE BINARY
RELOCATABLE PROGRAMS AND SUBROUTINES FROM PAPER TAPES OR FILE
MANAGER FILES AND REARRANGE THEM. THE NEW ARRANGEMENT CAN BE
DIRECTED TO PAPER TAPE OR A FILE MANAGER FILE. 'BEDIT' WILL ALSO LIST
THE NAME AND, OPTIONALLY, THE 'ENT' AND 'EXT' POINTS OF ALL
RELOCATABLES ON A PAPER TAPE OR IN A RELOCATABLE FILE MANAGER FILE.
A MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM IS REQUIRED TO RUN THIS UTILITY. IT WILL EXECUTE
AS IS WITHOUT THE RTE FILE MANAGER, IF DUMMY SUBROUTINES ARE SUPPLIED
TO SATISFY THE REFERENCES TO THE FILE MANAGER LIBRARY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: BEDIT SOURCE
FILE# 3: BEDIT SOURCE (CONTINUED)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE AND ASSEMBLE SOURCE TAPES, THEN LOAD AS A BACKGROUND, DISC
RESIDENT PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
CONTACT CONTRIBUTOR FOR EXTENDED INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
A CHECKSUM IS PERFORMED DURING LISTINGS OF PROGRAMS AND/OR ENT, EXT
POINTS; THEREFORE, THIS FEATURE MAY BE USED TO VERIFY THAT TYPES
AND/OR DISC FILES ARE CHECKSUM FREE.
INPUT COMMANDS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
1. /C = CHANGE INPUT COMMAND DEVICE OR FILE NAME.
/D = CHANGE LIST DEVICE
/E = TERMINATE PROGRAM.
/I = CHANGE PROGRAM INPUT DEVICE OR FILE NAME.
/L = LABEL PAPER TAPE.
/M = CHANGE MESSAGE LOGICAL UNIT.
/N = LIST ALL PROGRAM NAMES AND THEIR ENTRY/EXTERNAL NAMES.
/O = CHANGE PROGRAM OUTPUT DEVICE OR FILE NAME.
/S = SEARCH INPUT FOR A PROGRAM AND COPY IT ONTO THE OUTPUT UNIT.
/T = GENERATE TAPE LEADER OR AN EOF MARK IN FILE.
NOTE: AN INPUT COMMAND IS ALWAYS PRECEEDED BY A SLASH WHEREAS A FILE
NAME OR PROGRAM NAME IS NOT.
THE INPUT COMMAND DEVICE, OPERATOR MESSAGE DEVICE AND LIST DEVICE MAY
BE DESIGNATED AS INPUT PARAMETERS WHEN BEDIT IS ON'ED. DEFAULT IS
1,1,6 RESPECTIVELY.
THE PROGRAM IS INTUITIVELY TUTORIAL AND ITS FLEXIBILITY IS LIMITED
ONLY BY THE USER AND HIS KNOWLEDGE OF THE RTE FILE MANAGER.
EXPECTED REPLIES TO A "?" (INPUT REQUEST) MAY BE EXPANDED BY TYPING
A "?".
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E02601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MEMORY TO PAPER TAPE ABL FORMAT
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
PAPER TAPE DUMP MEMORY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2114
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS 79 WORD ROUTINE DUMPS SELECTIVE POSITIONS OF CORE TO A PAPER
TAPE DEVICE IN STANDARD ABL FORMAT. RECORDS ARE DUMPED IN FULL RECORD
LENGTH (RL=377B) WITH NO BLANK FEED FRAMES BETWEEN RECORDS. THUS, NO
TAPE IS WASTED AND PUNCHING SPEED IS INCREASED. THE ROUTINE IS
SELF-CONFIGURING AND CAN FIT INTO THE ABL REGION IF THE SELF-
CONFIGURATION PART IS OMITTED. EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENT IS A 2100 SERIES
COMPUTER WITH 4K CORE OF STORAGE AND A TELETYPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE (ASMB,R,L,B)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1) ASSEMBLE SOURCE TAPE
2) LOAD ABSOLUTE TAPE WITH ABL
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. P=72100B
2. A=FWA OF MEMORY TO BE DUMPED.
3. B=LWA OF MEMORY TO BE DUMPED.
4. S=SELECT CODE OF PUNCH DEVICE.
5. INTERNAL PRESET.
6. RUN
7. MEMORY WILL BE DUMPED WITH THE CURRENT ADDRESS DISPLAYED IN THE
DISPLAY REGISTER.
8. AFTER A "HLT 77B" OCCURS, GO TO STEP 2 IF MORE MEMORY IS TO BE
PUNCHED.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THE ACCOMPANIED VERSION STARTS AT ADDRESS 72100B, THE SOURCE
TAPE MUST BE RE-ASSEMBLED IF A DIFFERENT REGION OM MEMORY IS TO BE
SELECTED FOR THE ROUTINE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E02701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DUPER
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE FILE MANAGER DUMP
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DISC FILES MAGNETIC TAPE
DUMP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
6.5K BACKGROUND
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS BACKGROUND PROGRAM WILL DUMP SELECTED RTE FILE MANAGER FILES.
THE SOURCE AND DESTINATION OF THE DUMP MAY BE ANY COMBINATION OF DISC
AND MAGNETIC TAPE. THE FILES TO BE DUMPED ARE SELECTED BY NAME,
SECURITY CODE OR TYPE OR BY A COMBINATION OF THESE. WITH THIS SAME
METHOD, ALSO SELECTED DIRECTORY LISTINGS CAN BE MADE. FILES ON
MAGNETIC TAPE CONSIST OF RECORDS OF ABOUT 2560 WORDS. THIS DENSELY
PACKED TAPE ASSURES A LATER QUICK FILE RETRIEVAL. FILES MAY BE DUMPED
FROM SEVERAL DISCS TO ONE MAGNETIC TAPE, THEREFORE WHEN MAGNETIC TAPE
IS THE DESTINATION, A TEMPORARY DIRECTORY IS CREATED ON A SYSTEM TRACK
TO AVOID DUPLICATE NAMES. INSTRUCTIONS ARE CODED INTO THE PROGRAM WHICH
WILL PRINT ALL THE LEGAL ANSWERS TO A QUESTION IF THE USER IS IN DOUBT.
ALL DISC FILE ACCESSES AND DISC DIRECTORY CHANGES ARE MADE VIA THE FILE
MANAGER INTERFACE ROUTINES.
6.5K BACKGROUND, DISC (MAGNETIC TAPE WILL VASTLY INCREASE THE UTILITY)
ARE THE HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
FILE# 5: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THIS PROGRAM CONSISTS OF A MAIN PROGRAM (DUPER) WITH 3 SEGMENTS
(DUPSA,DUPSB,DUPSC). THERE ARE ALSO 3 SUBROUTINES (CHECK,CONVT,CHARC).
LOAD THE SUBROUTINES CHECK AND CONVT WITH THE MAIN PROGRAM DUPER. LOAD
THE SUBROUTINE CHARC WITH THE SEGMENT DUPSA.
ASSEMBLE WITH LG OPTION THE MAIN PROGRAM THE 3 SEGMENTS AND THE 3
SUBROUTINES IN THE FOLLOWING SEQUENCE: DUPER,CHECK,CONVT,DUPSA,CHARC,
DUPSB,DUPSC.
IF A LOADER REVISION D OR LATER IS AVAILABLE, LOAD FROM LG WITH
PARAMETER 4=1. IF ONLY A LOADER OF OLDER VINTAGE THAN REVISION D IS
AVAILABLE, THEN LOAD FROM PAPER TAPE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SCHEDULE WITH *ON,DUPER,P1,P2 WHERE:
P1 = LU SYSTEM TTY, DEFAULT = 1
P2 = LU LIST DEVICE, DEFUALT = 6
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. A SERIES OF QUESTIONS WILL BE PRINTED TO WHICH THE USER ANSWERS VIA
THE CONSOLE. EACH ANSWER MAY BE "ABORT" WHICH WILL ABORT DUPER, OR
THE ANSWER MAY BE "??" WHICH WILL RESULT IN A SHORT DESCRIPTION OF
THE VALID ANSWERS TO BE PRINTED. IF THE ANSWER IS TO CONSIST OF MORE
THAN ONE ELEMENT, THEN THE ELEMENTS MUST BE SEPARATED BY ONE OR
MORE COMMAS AND/OR SPACES.
QUESTIONS FOR EXECUTION COMMANDS, SOURCE AND DESTINATION.
Q. EXECUTE WHAT?
A. DUMP DLIST PURGE PRINT
A COMBINATION OF THESE COMMANDS MAY BE GIVEN IN ANY ORDER. "DUMP"
WILL DUMP SELECTED FILES, "DLIST" WILL PRINT A DIRECTORY LISTING
ONLY OF SELECTED FILES. IF "DLIST" IS GIVEN WITH "DUMP" THEN A
DIRECTORY LISTING WILL BE MADE AFTER THE DUMP OF THE WHOLE
DESTINATION.
"PURGE" WILL PURGE A FILE AFTER IT HAS BEEN DUMPED, ONLY LEGAL WHEN
GIVEN WITH A DUMP COMMAND AND WITH DISC AS SOURCE. "PRINT" WILL
LIST THE FILES WHICH ARE DUMPED.
QUESTIONS CONCERNING THE SOURCE AND DESTINATION ARE THEN ASKED
TO WHICH THE ANSWERS ARE SELF-EVIDENT. ("??" MAY ALWAYS BE GIVEN
FOR MORE INFORMATION).
IF "MTAPE" IS GIVEN AS DESTINATION THEN "UPDATE DESINATION TAPE?"
WILL BE ASKED. ANSWERING "YES" WILL CONNECT NEW FILES AFTER OLD,
"NO" WILL START THE FILES FROM THE BEGINNING OF THE TAPE.
CHECKS FOR DUPLICATE NAMES ARE MADE IN BOTH CASES. IF "NO" WAS
GIVEN HERE AS ANSWER, THE WARNING WILL BE PRINTED THAT MAG. TAPE
FILES MAY BE OVERWRITTEN, ANSWER "YES" TO THE QUESTION "CONTINUE?"
IF THIS IS PERMITTED, OTHERWISE TYPE "NO".
IF "DLIST" AND/OR "PRINT" HAS BEEN SPECIFIED THEN "MASTER SECURITY
CODE?" WILL BE ASKED. GIVING THE CORRECT CODE WILL RESULT IN THE
LISTINGS INCLUDING FILE SECURITY CODES.
NOTE: ALL ANSWERS IN ASCII MAY BE ABBREVIATED TO THE TWO FIRST
CHARACTERS.
QUESTIONS FOR FILE SELECTION
HERE THE ELEMENTS OF AN ANSWER MAY CONTINUE ON A NEXT LINE IF &
IS GIVEN AS LAST ELEMENT.
ANY OF THE FOLLOWING THREE QUESTIONS MAY BE ANSWERED WITH THE
EXCEPT OPTION WHICH WILL EXCLUDE SELECTED FILES. PRECEDE ELEMENTS
WHICH ARE TO BE EXCLUDED WITH "EXCEPT".
IF ALL FILES WITH THE ASKED SPECIFICATION ARE TO BE TAKEN TYPE "ALL"
AS ANSWER.
Q. FILE NAME (S)? A FILTER MAY BE USED HERE TO SELECT NAMES WITH
SIMILAR CHARACTERS. EACH CHARACTER SPECIFIED IN THE FILTER MUST BE
MATCHED BY VALUE AND POSITION WITH A CHARACTER IN THE FILE NAME
E.G. AB**** SPECIFIES ALL NAMES STARTING WITH AB.
Q. SECURITY CODE (S)? EITHER ASCII CHARACTERS OR NUMERIC, OR A
COMBINATION OF BOTH MAY BE GIVEN.
Q. TYPE (S)? ONLY NUMERIC.
2. THE DUMP AND/OR DIRECTORY LISTING WILL NOW BE EXECUTED. THE PROGRAM
TERMINATES WITH THE MESSAGE "END DUPER" OR AFTER AN IRRECOVERABLE
ERROR WITH "DUPER ABORTED".
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE FOLLOWING ERROR MSG'S MAY OCCUR DURING THE EXECUTION OF DUPER.
***MESSAGE*** ***EXPLANATION***
OVERFLOW TOO MANY SELECTIONS IN STACK.
NOT LEGAL ENTRY CARTRIDGE LABEL OR LU OR FILE TYPE NOT
NUMERIC.
INPUT ERROR ERROR IN A FILE OR SOURCE OR DESTINATION
SPECIFICATION.
PURGE WITHOUT DUMP NOT LEGAL SELF EVIDENT
NOT MOUNTED N CARTRIDGE N NOT MOUNTED
MTAPE WON'T BE PURGED A WARNING ONLY
LOCKED N CARTRIDGE N LOCKED
INPUT = OUTPUT DISC SELF EVIDENT
INPUT = OUTPUT MT,GIVE NEW LU SELF EVIDENT
OUTPUT
MAKE READY MTAPE MAG. TAPE PROBABLY OFF-LINE
NOT A MTAPE UNIT MAG. TAPE DRIVER NOT 20 SERIES
MTAPE DOWN SELF EVIDENT
MTAPE ERROR PARITY OR TIMING ERROR
END OF TAPE END OF MAG. TAPE
BUG! FMGR ERR-NNN NNNNN FILE MANAGER ERROR NUMBER AND ADDRESS
GIVEN
DUPLICATE NAME FILENAME SELF EVIDENT
FILE TOO LONG NO ROOM FILENAME SELF EVIDENT
DIRECTORY FULL SELF EVIDENT
OPEN FILENAME OPENED FILES ARE NOT DUMPED
TEMP DIREC FULL MAX. OF 16X(NUMBER OF SECTOR/TRACK)
FILES ON 1 MAG. TAPE
DISC I/O ERROR SELF EVIDENT
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
ZERO TYPE FILES ARE NEVER DUMPED.
FILES WHICH ARE OPENED TO ANOTHER PROG OR WHICH ARE ON A LOCKED DISC
ARE NOT DUMPED.
E02801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DLU
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DLU FOR RTE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DUMP MAGNETIC TAPE SAVE/RESTORE
CARTRIDGE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
30K OCTAL PARTITION
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
DLU IS A PROGRAM TO DUMP, RESTORE AND VERIFY WHOLE 7900 CARTRIDGES TO
AND FROM MAGNETIC TAPE. IT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE STAND-ALONE DLU
HP 25123-60030 BUT RUNS UNDER RTE.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: 30K OCTAL PARTITION, 7900 AND MAGNETIC TAPE
DRIVE. RTE OPERATING SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE AND LOAD USING NORMAL PROCEDURES. DLU IS NOT SEGMENTED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN:
RU,DLU[,TERMINAL[,INPUT[OUTPUT]]]
TERMINAL LU OF TERMINAL FROM WHICH DLU IS BEING RUN. USED FOR ERROR
MESSAGES AND "END DLU" MESSAGE. DEFAULT IS 1.
INPUT LU FOR INPUT OF COMMANDS. DEFAULT IS TERMINAL.
OUTPUT LU FOR OUTPUT OF PROMPTS. DEFAULT IS TERMINAL.
THE SEPARATION OF INPUT & OUTPUT IS FOR EASE OF RUNNING IN BATCH - THE
PROMPTS CAN BE SENT TO A SUITABLE DRAIN.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
EXAMPLE TERMINAL SESSION:
*RU,DLU (NO PARAMETERS NEEDED IF ON LU1)
RTE DISC DUMP/LOAD
MT FILE NAME? UNIT 10
TASK? COPY
COPY FROM? DISC
DISC LU? 12
MT FILE NO? 1
ID? CR 12 19676-09-21
TASK? V (ONLY 1ST LETTER OF COMMAND NEEDED)
DISC LU? 12
MT FILE NO? 1
CR 12 1976-09-21? YES
VERIFY COMPLETE
TASK? /E
END DLU
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ON DETECTION OF FMP ERRORS, DLU HALTS WITH THE ERROR & LOCATION REPORTED
ON THE TERMINAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE CORE REQUIREMENT COULD BE REDUCED A LITTLE BY SHORTENING THE VERIFY
BUFFER, AT THE EXPENSE OF RUNNING TIME.
E02901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FMP-UTILITIES
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
FILES MAGNETIC TAPE SAVE/RESTORE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2116
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THESE THREE PROGRAMS ALLOW THE USER TO RESTORE, SAVE, OR RETRIEVE
FILE MANAGER FILES ON 7970 OR 3030 MAG TAPE TRANSPORTS AND A 7900 OR
7905 DISC. ALL UTILITIES ARE COMPLETELY CONVERSATIONAL AND SELF-
CONFIGURING WITH ELABORATE ERROR CHECKING. CHECKS ARE MADE TO ENSURE
FILE MANAGER DIRECTORY COMPATABILITY. THESE UTILITIES OPERATE ON A
2116 OR LATER COMPUTER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE AND LOAD TAPES 1 AND 2 SEPARATELY.
ASSEMBLE TAPES 3 AND 4 SEPARATELY AND LOAD TOGETHER. THE ASCII
SUBROUTINE IS CALLED FGETR.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN WITH NO PARAMETERS OR
RU, JRSTR ,LU
JSAVE
LU= TERMINAL LUN.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
J R S T R
RU,JRSTR
/JRSTR: REV 4-24-76
/JRSTR: MAG TAPE LU: 8
/JRSTR: MAG TAPE FILE: (<0 = DIRECTORY, 0 = END)1
CR=15: LWS SEICUS JSAVE @ 800 BPI 4/JAN/77 ?YES
/JRSTR: DISC LU: 15
/JRSTR: CR 'MASTER' DIRECTORY ON TRACK 202
/JRSTR: MAG TAPE FILE: 0
/JRSTR: DONE!
:
J S A V E
RU,JSAVE
/JSAVE: REV 5-04-76
/JSAVE: MAG TAPE LU: 8
/JSAVE: DISC LU: ([,LAST TRACK] LU= 0 => END) 15
/JSAVE: MAG TAPE FILE: 1
/JSAVE: HEADER: CR=15: LWS SEICUS JSAVE @ 800 BPI 4/JAN/77
/JSAVE: DISC LU: 0
/JSAVE: DONE!
:
F G E T R
RU,FGETR
MAG TAPE LU: 8
DO YOU WISH A DIRECTORY ?NO
FILE NAME: &FGETR
WHAT SECURITY CODE?LS
MAG TAPE FILE: 1
CR=15: LWS SEICUS JSAVE @ 800 BPI 4/JAN/77 ? YES
NO FILE
ANY MORE ? YES
DO YOU WISH A DIRECTORY ?NO
FILE NAME: &SMUT
WHAT SECURITY CODE?LS
MAG TAPE FILE: 1
CR=15: LWS SEICUS JSAVE @ 800 BPI 4/JAN/77 ?YES
FILE CREATION ERROR00- 02
ANY MORE ? NO
:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL ERROR MESSAGES ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCOPY
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE 7900/7905 TO MULTIPLE FLEXIBLE DISCS
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DISC CARTRIDGE COPY
FILES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
GCOPY COPIES ONE 7900/7905, 96 SECTOR/TRACK, DISC LU, TO MULTIPLE
FLEXIBLE DISCS (60 SECTORS/TRACKS) IN FILE MANAGER FORMAT. IN OTHER
WORDS, ONE 7900/7905 DISC LOGICAL UNIT MAPS TO MULTIPLE FLEXIBLE DISC
CARTRIDGES. GCOPY STARTS AT THE TOP OF THE 7900/7905 DIRECTORY AND
COPIES AS MANY FILES AS IT CAN TO THE FIRST FLEXIBLE DISC. IT THEN ASKS
FOR THE NEXT DISC. THIS CONTINUES UNTIL ALL DISCS ARE COPIED. THE USER
ALSO HAS THE OPTION OF SKIPPING A DISC OR NUMBER OF DISCS. BY SKIPPING
THROUGH ALL THE DISCS THE FIRST TIME, THE USER MAY DETERMINE THE NUMBER
OF FLEXIBLE DISCS NEEDED FOR THE COPY. A DIRECTORY LIST MAY BE OBTAINED
FOR EACH FLEXIBLE DISC. NOTE: ONLY ONE 7900/7905 DIRECTORY TRACK IS
ALLOWED. NO EXTENTS ARE ALLOWED ON SOURCE DISCS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: GCOPY SOURCE (FTN4,L)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
:RU,LOADR,99,LU#,,,3
:OR * RU,GCOPY,INPUT,LIST
GCOPY: ENTER SOURCE (7900/7905) DISC LU#: (YOU ENTER THE DISC LOGICAL
UNIT THAT YOU WANTED COPIED TO THE FLEXIBLE DISCS, IN FILE MANAGER
FORMAT.).
GCOPY: ENTER DESTINATION (9885) DISC LU#: (YOU ENTER THE FLEXIBLE DISC
LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER THAT YOU WANT COPIED TO).
GCOPY: DISC #1
GCOPY: DISC #? (YOU ENTER 1 IF YOU WANT TO EITHER LOOK AT THE NAMES OF
FILES WHICH WILL GO ON THE FIRST FLEXIBLE DISC OR IF YOU
ACTUALLY WANT TO COPY THE 1ST DISC. LIKEWISE, ENTER N FOR
THE NTH DISC YOU DESIRE.
GCOPY: SKIP ? RETURN OR YES RETURN WILL CAUSE THE NEXT CONSECUTIVE DISC
TO BE SELECTED.
OTHERWISE:
GCOPY: INSERT THE RIGHT DISC
THE USER NOW PHYSICALLY INSERTS THE PROPER DISC AND ENTERS:
*GO,GCOPY
GCOPY: CARTRIDGE #?
AT THIS POINT THE USER CREATES A CARTRIDGE NUMBER FOR THE NEW
FLEXIBLE DISC CARTRIDGE ABOUT TO BE COPIED. AFTER RETURN THE DISC
IS COPIED.
GCOPY THEN RETURNS AND ASKS FOR THE NEXT DISC.
GCOPY: DISC # X
GCOPY: DISC # ?
NOTE: A /E AFTER 'DISC#?' TERMINATES THE PROGRAM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: JOB3M
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TAPE CARTRIDGE SAVE AND RESTORE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
FILES CARTRIDGE MAGNETIC TAPE
SAVE/RESTORE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE CONSISTS OF A MAIN PROGRAM JOB3M WRITTEN IN FORTRAN,
TWO FORTRAN SUBROUTINES AND AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SUBROUTINE DESIGNED TO
OPERATE IN THE RTE-II -III ENVIRONMENT USING THE FILE MANAGER PACKAGE
(FMP) CALLS AND INTERACTS WITH MAGNETIC TAPE CARTRIDGES. THIS PERMITS
THE USER TO SAVE AND RESTORE FILE MANAGER FILES IN 128 WORD RECORDS,
THUS INCREASING THE STORAGE CAPACITY OF THE TAPE TO ABOUT 468 BLOCKS. A
HEADER IS WRITTEN WHICH PROVIDES A MEANS TO RECREATE THE FILE MANAGER
FILE ON RECOVERY. A LIST OF FILES IS INPUT FROM EITHER KEYBOARD OR A
FILE MANAGER FILE. ANY EXTENTS IN THE INPUT FILES WILL BE PACKED OUT
UPON RECOVERY. RECOVERY CAN BE SELECTED FILES FROM THE CARTRIDGE OR ALL
FILES ON THE CARTRIDGE. MEANS ARE PROVIDED TO COPY THE DIRECTORY AND
USER INFORMATION.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ARE: AN HP2100, 21MX, OR 21MX E-SERIES COMPUTER,
A 7900, 7905, OR 7920 DISC FILE SYSTEM, AND A CRT WITH MAGNETIC TAPE
CARTRIDGE OPTION DIRECTLY CONNECTED TO 12966 BUFFERED ASYNCHRONOUS
DATA SET INTERFACE KIT WITH OPTION 001.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD THE THREE FORTRAN FILES, JOB3M, COMPA, DATE, AND IGET/IXGET WITH
THE FOLLOWING CONSIDERATIONS:
IF YOUR SYSTEM IS RTE-II AND DOES NOT HAVE IGET, ASSEMBLE AND LOAD
THE ONE SUPPLIED. IF YOUR SYSTEM IS RTE-III, REPLACE THE CALL TO IGET
WITH A CALL TO IXGET, ASSEMBLE AND LOAD THE ONE SUPPLIED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:RU, JOB3M [,LU]
WHERE LU IS THE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE INTERACTIVE DEVICE, TYPICALLY
A CRT
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE PROGRAM REQUESTS THE TASK. ENTER CK TO CHECK A LIST, WR WRITE A
TAPE, RE RECOVER A FILE, RA RECOVER ALL FILES, (EN WILL TERMINATE). NEXT
ENTER CARTRIDGE NUMBER (POSITIVE) OR CARTRIDGE NUMBER LU (NEGATIVE),
(RECOVERY CANNOT BE TO SYSTEM LU). NEXT THE PROGRAM REQUESTS AN LU FOR
A RECORD COPY OF THE DIRECTORY, WHICH IS TYPICALLY A LINE PRINTER, IF
NO RECORD LIST IS DESIRED, ENTER 0, BIT BUCKET OR JUST A C/R. FOR CASE
CK AND WR THE PROGRAM NEXT REQUESTS A SOURCE LIST, WHICH MAY BE A FILE
MANAGER FILE NAME OR MAY BE ENTERED INTERACTIVELY BY ENTERING ::. IF
ENTERED INTERACTIVELY, THE PROGRAM CREATES THE SOURCE LIST ON A FILE
JOB3MM. THE INTERACTIVE LIST IS TERMINATED BY ENTERING ::. THE FILE
MANAGER FILE SHOULD BE AN ASCII LIST OF THE FILES TO BE SAVED, ONE PER
LINE.
THE PROGRAM THEN REQUESTS THE LU OF THE MAGNETIC TAPE CARTRIDGE UNLESS
THE TASK IS CK. FOR RE AND RA SEE BELOW. THE FILES ON THE SOURCE LIST
ARE OPENED IN SEQUENCE AND CHECKED FOR ERRORS AND TYPE, ONLY TYPE 3, 4,
OR 5 CAN BE USED. A TABLE IS OUTPUT ON THE CRT WITH A HEADING FILE
NUMBER, NAME, TYPE AND INTERNAL IDENTIFIER CODE IF PRESENT (SEE DISCUS-
SION IN SOURCE LISTING), NUMBER OF BLOCKS, RECORD NUMBER ON THE TAPE OF
THE FIRST BLOCK OF THIS FILE AND THE NUMBER OF BLOCKS REMAINING ON THE
TAPE. A TABLE IS BUILT BY THE PROGRAM, POINTING TO THE TRACK NUMBER AND
SECTORS REQUIRED FOR WRITING THE TAPE. THE PROGRAM THEN REQUESTS THE
USER'S INITIALS, ENTER UP TO 4 CHARACTERS, THE PROGRAM THEN REQUESTS
A CARTRIDGE I.E., ENTER 6 CHARACTERS OR A C/R IN WHICH CASE THE SOURCE
FILE NAME WILL BE USED. THE PROGRAM THEN REQUESTS UP TO 40 CHARACTERS OF
IDENTIFYING TEXT. THE PROGRAM THEN WRITES THE TAPE AND WHEN COMPLETE
ASKS IF THE SOURCE FILES ARE TO BE PURGE. REPLY YE TO PURGE THE FILES,
ANY OTHER REPLY INCLUDING C/R IS ASSUMED TO MEAN NO. THE PROGRAM THEN
OUTPUTS A SUMMARY LINE OF NUMBER OF BLOCKS WRITTEN AND EXITS. FOR TASK
RE AND RA, THE DIRECTORY IS DISPLAYED ON THE INTERACTIVE DEVICE, AND IF
RE, AN ADDITIONAL LINE REQUESTING THE FILE NUMBER TO BE RECOVERED. ENTER
THE FILE NUMBER FROM THE DIRECTORY LISTING OR ZERO TO TERMINATE PROGRAM.
THE PROGRAM CREATES A FILE NAME JOB3MM AND WRITES THE APPROPRIATE BLOCK
TO THIS FILE. THIS FILE IS THEN CHECKED FOR ERRORS AND RENAMED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
1. CARTRIDGE (NUMBER) NOT FOUND
THE PROGRAM CHECKED THE CARTRIDGE LIST AND DID NOT FIND THE
CARTRIDGE. CHECK CARTRIDGE LIST, MOUNT CARTRIDGE CORRECT NUMBER.
PROGRAM WILL NOT RECOVER FILES TO SYSTEM CARTRIDGE (LU2).
2. FILE SLFILE NOT FOUND
THE FILE SLFILE THE SOURCE LIST FILE NOT FOUND ON ANY MOUNTED
CARTRIDGE. CORRECT NAME OR ENTER /E TO TERMINATE PROGRAM.
3. LU LU NOT READY
THE TAPE CARTRIDGE IS NOT READY, MAKE READY AND TRY AGAIN.
4. LU LU NOT A 3M CARTRIDGE DEVICE
THE DRIVER FOR THIS LU IS NOT DVR 05. RE-ENTER THE PROPER LU.
5. LINE N FILE SLFILE ERROR M
ERROR M WAS FOUND WHEN CHECKING THE FILE ON LINE N OF SOURCE LIST
FILE SLFILE. ONLY 7, RECORD LENGTH ERROR, 8 BUSY SHOULD BE
ENCOUNTERED.
6. NNN NAMES ON FILE LIST LIMIT 125
THE DIRECTORY HAS A CAPACITY FOR 125 FILE NAMES, SHORTEN LIST.
7. TABLE OVERFLOW - OVERFLOW OF PROGRAM'S INTERNAL WORK TABLES
REMOVE EXTENTS FROM SOURCE FILES AND TRY AGAIN OR REDUCE NUMBER OF
NAMES ON FILE LIST.
8. EXTENT OUT OF ORDER FILE NAME
THIS SHOULD NOT NORMALLY OCCUR. HOWEVER, IF YOU HAVE BEEN USING SMUT
OR CMM3 OR A SIMILAR PROGRAM TO TRY TO RECOVER A DAMAGED DISC, DON'T
GIVE UP YET. EACH EXTENT MUST BE ENCOUNTERED IN ORDER OF INCREASING
DIRECTORY SEARCH SEQUENCE IN ORDER UP TO AN EXTENT CONTAINING AN END
OF FILE WORD. DIRECTORY SECTORS ARE SEARCHED (0,1) (14,15) (28,29)
(42,43) (56,57) (70,71) (84,85) THEN (2,3) (16,17).......(82,83).
9. TOO MANY BLOCKS NNN LIMIT MMM
THE LIMIT MMM WAS GUESED AT TO LEAVE A FEW INCHES OF TAPE BEFORE
DVR 05 BOMBS OUT. A DATA STATEMENT MBLOX SETS THIS PARAMETER IN THE
SOURCE PROGRAM.
10. N ERRORS IN PASS ONE
TAPE CANNOT BE WRITTEN IF ANY ERRORS FOUND. TAKE CORRECTIVE ACTION
AND TRY AGAIN.
11. CREATE ERROR N
ON RECOVERY THE PROGRAM TRIED TO CREATE FILE JOB3MM. LOOK FOR A FILE
BY THIS NAME AND PURGE, CHECK AVAILABLE DISC SPACE.
12. ERROR N IN RECOVERED FILE
THIS ERROR WAS DISCOVERED BY READING THE RECOVERED FILE WHICH WAS
MADE BY COPYING THE REQUISITE NUMBER OF BLOCKS FROM THE TAPE TO
FILE JOB3MM.
13. DUPLICATE FILE NAME FILNM
THE PROGRAM TRIED TO RENAME JOB3MM FILNM. THE OPERATOR IS GIVEN A
CHOICE OF RENAMING THE FILE, PURGING THE CURRENT FILE FILNM AND
RENAMING THE NEW FILE OR SKIPPING THIS FILE.
14. ERROR N ON PURGE OF FILNM
FROM 13 ABOVE PURGE WAS CHOSEN BUT FILNM CANNOT BE PURGED BECAUSE OF
REASON N. ENTER EN TO TERMINATE PROGRAM.
15. PURGE ERROR N FILE FILNM
THE OPTION TO PURGE THE FILES WRITTEN TO TAPE WAS TAKEN BUT FILNM
CANNOT BE PURGED BECAUSE OF REASON N.
16. PURGE FILE FILNM FROM LU LU
PROGRAM COULD NOT PURGE THIS FILE.
17. TAPE FORMAT ERROR
ON RECOVERY THE TAPE SUPPLIED DOES NOT HAVE THE PROPER CHECK WORD.
THERE IS AN ASCII CHECK WORD IN THE FIRST DIRECTORY RECORD WHICH IS
CHECKED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TCMPR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TAPE CASSETTE COMPARE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
COMPARE CASSETTE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPARES THE DATA ON TWO TAPE CASSETTES, RECORD BY RECORD,
LISTING THE DIFFERENCES BY WORD NUMBER. A SUMMARY OF THE COMPARISON IS
OUTPUT. TCMPR REQUIRES THE 2645 TAPE CASSETTE OPTION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: TCMPR SOURCE (FTN4,L)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD AS RTE BACKGROUND.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:ON,TCMPR,LISTLU,LUCARTI,LUCARTZ[,NOERS]
WHERE NOERS IS THE LIMIT OF THE NUMBER OF ERROR RECORDS TO BE
LISTED.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IF LISTING LU IS 6, LONGER LINES ARE WRITTEN. USER POSITIONS TAPE FOR
BEGINNING OF TEST.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
BAD LU DEF.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LIBRN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LIBRN: SEPARATE/COMBINE BINARY RELOCATABLE PROGRAMS
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
RELOCATABLE FILES LIBRARY
MERGE
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IV RTE-III RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
LIBRN IS A RTE UTILITY PROGRAM FOR SEPARATING AND COMBINING BINARY
RELOCATABLE PROGRAMS AND SUBROUTINES. LIBRN ALSO MAY BE USED TO LIST
THE NAMES AND OPTIONALLY THE ENTRY AND EXTERNAL DECLARATIONS OF
RELOCATABLE PROGRAMS/SUBROUTINES.
LIBRN PROCESSES RELOCATABLE PROGRAMS FROM ANY INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE
SUPPORTING RELOCATABLE READ/WRITE AND/OR RTE FMP TYPE 5 DISC FILES.
INPUT COMMANDS MAY BE ISSUED FROM A KEYBOARD DEVICE. ANY ASCII INPUT
DEVICE OR FROM A FMP TYPE 4 FILE.
THE USER WILL FIND LIBRN EXTREMELY USEFUL IN UPDATING LIBRARY PAPER
TAPES, MAGNETIC TAPES AND DISC FILES.
LIBRN MAY ALSO BE USED TO RETRIEVE SUBROUTINES FROM THE SYSTEM DISC
LIBRARY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: LIBRN SOURCE (MAIN)
FILE# 3: NUM SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 4: OCTAL SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 5: RDLIB SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 6: ALPHA SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 7: ASCIN SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 8: BINRY SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 9: FETCH SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 10: IFMGR SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
FILE# 11: PRINT SOURCE (SUBROUTINE)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE LISTING OF LIBRN
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE LIBRN SOURCE LISTING.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SHOULD BE SELF-EXPLANATORY
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DBCPY
**PROGRAM TITLE:
IMAGE DATA BASE COPY UTILITY
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DATA BASE IMAGE SAVE/RESTORE
COPY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
COPIES AN IMAGE/1000 DATA BASE TO AN EMPTY BASE. DBCPY CAN BE USED FOR
BACK-UP, RECOVERY, AND RESTRUCTURING WITHOUT A MAG TAPE. IT CAN BE
USEFUL EVEN IF A MAG TAPE IS PRESENT SINCE IT DOES NOT ABORT THE COPY
ON FINDING AN ERROR IN THE DESTINATION DATA BASE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: "DBCPY - EDITED CONSOLE LOG
FILE# 3: &DBCPY - SOURCE
FILE# 4: &WHOMI - SOURCE SUBROUTINES USED BY DBCPY.
FILE# 5: &DBCP2 - SOURCE (USES NO ADDITIONAL SUBROUTINES)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE &DBCPY SOURCE FOR COMPLETE INSTRUCTIONS
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE FILE "DBCPY FOR A SAMPLE RUN AND THE HEADING COMMENT OF &DBCPY FOR
COMPLETE OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE "DBCPY FILE FOR SAMPLE RUN.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
WHOMI - RETURNS NAME OF CURRENTLY EXECUTING PROGRAMS FROM I.D. SEGMENT
(RTE-II,III,IV)
DBCPY MUST BE STOPPED WITH THE BR COMMAND, NOT BY ABORTING IT.
IF DBCPY IS ABORTED TWO CLASS NUMBERS WILL BE LOST.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL IMAGE/1000 ERRORS ARE REPORTED ON THE LOG DEVICE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
GSAVE/GRSTR DISC LU SAVE AND RESTORE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
CARTRIDGE DISC SAVE/RESTORE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
GSAVE, GSAV2, GRSTR, GRST2 ARE RTE UTILITY PROGRAMS WHICH SAVE (VERIFY)
AND RESTORE (VERIFY) ANY FILE MANAGER DISC CARTRIDGES. GSAVE (GSAV2)
ALLOW FROM 1 TO 20 DISC LU'S TO BE SAVED TO MAG TAPE WITH A MINIMUM OF
OPERATOR ENTRY. THE OPERATOR ENTERS THE STRING OF DISC LU'S AND THE
STARTING MAGTAPE FILE# ONLY. THE PROGRAM THEN SAVES AND VERIFIES EACH
DISC LU, PRINTS APPROPRIATE MESSAGES TO THE TTY, AND IN THE EVENT OF A
VERIFY ERROR IT WILL AUTOMATICALLY PROCEED TO THE NEXT LU (AFTER
PRINTING A MESSAGE TO THAT EFFECT). IT ALSO CREATES ITS OWN HEADER WITH
TBG TIME, DATE, LU#, CR#, CR LABEL, 1ST FMGR TRACK, AND THE NEXT
AVAILABLE TRACK.
GRSTR (GRST2) WILL SELECTIVELY RETRIEVE A GSAVE FILE FROM TAPE AND
RESTORE IT TO ANY DISC LU#. IT WILL RESTORE A DIFFERENT LU, DIFFERENT
SIZE LU, OR A DIFFERENT SYSTEM (RTE). IN THE EVENT THAT THE DESTINATION
DISC LU IS NOT LARGE ENOUGH, GRSTR WILL PRINT A MESSAGE AND ABORT.
THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN GSAVE-GSAV2, AND GRSTR-GRST2 IS BUFFER SIZE AND
THEREFORE THE REQUIRED PARTITION SIZE. GSAVE USES A 6144 WORD BUFFER AND
GSAV2 USES A 2048 WORD BUFFER.
NOTE: THESE PROGRAMS DO NOT WORK ON LU 2 OR 3.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ARE: A 7900,7905,7906,OR 7920 DISC DRIVE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: LTRAK SOURCE
FILE# 3: GSAVE SOURCE
FILE# 4: GRSTR SOURCE
FILE# 5: GSAV2 SOURCE
FILE# 6: GRST2 SOURCE
FILE# 7: DATE SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. STORE <RAK, &GSAVE, &GRSTR, &GSAV2, &GRST2, AND &DATE ON DISK
2. A. RU, FTN4, &GSAVE, TTY,-
B. RU, FTN4, &GRSTR, TTY,-
C. RU, FTN4, &DATE, TTY,-
3. RU, ASMB, <RAK, TTY,-
4. RU, LOADR GSAV2 REQUIRES 10 PAGES
RE,%GSAVE
RE,%LTRAK REQUIRES 18 PAGES
RE,%DATE
END
5. RU, LOADR
RE,%GRSTR
RE,%LTRAK REQUIRES 18 PAGES
RE,%DATE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU, GSAVE, TTY, TAPE LU# (IF NOT EQUAL TO 8)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE ABSTRACT
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
LU 2(3) CANNOT BE GSAVED (GRSTR'D)! USE SAVE, VERFY
LU M IS NOT MOUNTED
VERIFY BAD! ERROR ON TRACK# MMMM
#TRKS REQUIRED = NNNN, #TRKS ON LU#NN = NNNN (THIS ERROR MESSAGE IS IN
GRSTR ONLY)
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CHAR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PAPER TAPE TITLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
LABEL PAPER TAPE CHARACTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
389 WITH SUBPROGRAMS (251 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN-CALLABLE SUBROUTINE ALLOWS THE USER TO LABEL HIS PAPER
TAPES UNDER PROGRAM CONTROL. CHARACTER SIZE IS EQUIVALENT TO THE WIDTH
OF EIGHT-LEVEL PUNCHED PAPER TAPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD ASSEMBLY AND LOAD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT CHAR
.
.
.
.
.
JSB CHAR
DEF *+3 IF COUNT = 1 ONLY ONE CHAR/16 BIT-WORD (RIGHT HALF)
DEF COUNT = 2 TWO CHAR/16-BIT WORD
DEF WORD
.
.
.
.
COUNT DEC 2
WORD ASC 1,AB
.
.
.
END
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
.
.
DIMENSION I(5)
.
.
.
READ (5,10)I
10 FORMAT (5A1)
.
.
.
DO 20 J = 1,5
20 CALL CHAR (1,I(J))
.
.
END
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
WHEN PUNCHING 1 CHARACTER PER 16-BIT WORD WITH FTN4, CARE MUST BE TAKEN
TO INSURE THAT A CALL TO "OLDIO" (AS IN TEST CASE) IS MADE PRIOR TO CALL
TO CHAR. ANOTHER FIX FOR THIS IS TO REPLACE LINE 25 OF SUBROUTINE CHAR
WITH A "NOP".
EITHER OF THESE FIXES WILL ALLOW THE USER TO RUN UNDER "NEWIO" OR
"OLDIO", WHICHEVER IS DESIRABLE TO HIM. THE SOURCE TAPE FOR CHAR IS SET
FOR "OLDIO".
WITH VERY LITTLE CHANGE IN THE EXEC CALL, THIS PROGRAM CAN RUN WITH THE
DOS/DOS-M SYSTEM. ALSO THERE SHOULD NOT BE ANY PROBLEM IN CONVERTING
THE OUTPUT PORTION FOR A BCS SYSTEM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ALGOL ARRAY TRANSFER FOR SEGMENTATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
ARRAY ALGOL SEGMENTATION
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
3560 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE ALLOWS THE TRANSFER OF ARRAY DATA BETWEEN ALGOL MAIN AND
SEGMENTS UNDER DOS, DOS-M, OR RTE. SINCE COMMON IS NOT NORMALLY
AVAILABLE IN ALGOL, THIS ROUTINE ACCEPTS THE ADDRESSED OF UP TO 10 ALGOL
ARRAYS AND SAVES THE ADDRESSES OF THE ARRAY TABLES. ANOTHER CALL ALLOWS
THE SEGMENTS TO GET THESE ADDRESSES SO THAT IT MAY USE THE ORIGINAL
ARRAY DIRECTLY. THUS, COMMON IS ESTABLISHED BETWEEN A MAIN PROGRAM AND
ITS SEGMENTS BY COPYING THE ORIGINAL ARRAY TABLE OF MAIN INTO A DUMMY
ARRAY TABLE OF THE SEGMENT. REQUIRES ALGOL COMPILER HP24129B.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL COMPILE/ASSEMBLE AND LOAD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINTS
ITATA AND RTATA
TWO ENTRY POINTS ARE PROVIDED ONLY TO ALLOW ALGOL TO CALL WITH THE NAME
OF REAL AND INTEGER ARRAYS. THERE IS NO FUNCTIONAL DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
ITATA AND RTATA.
0004* TRANSFERS ALGOL ARRAYS FOR USE IN ALGOL SEGMENTED SYSTEMS.
0005* TATA HAS ROOM FOR A CERTAIN NUMBER OF ARRAY TABLE ADDRESSES,
0006* (THE NUMBER IS EQUAL TO SIZE)
0007* AND EXPECTS TO BE CALLED TO REMEMBER A CERTAIN ARRAY.
0008* THIS CALL IS : ITATA(-N,A) OR RTATA(-N,A)
0009* WITH - TO SAY "THIS IS THE CALL TO SET THE ADDRESS"
0010* N THE SEQUENCE NUMBER ( 1 TO MAXIMUM SIZE )
0011* A (WITHOUT INDEX) THE NAME OF THE ARRAY
0012* USE ITATA FOR INTEGER ARRAYS AND RTATA FOR REAL ARRAYS.
0013*
0014* THE CALLING SEQUENCE TO GET THE ARRAY IS :
0015* ITATA(+N,A) OR RTATA(+N,A)
0016* WITH + TO SAY "GIVE ME THE ARRAY"
0017* N THE SEQUENCE NUMBER ( 1 TO MAXIMUM SIZE )
0018* A (WITHOUT INDEX) THE NAME OF THE ARRAY. THIS ARRAY
0019* HAS TO BE DECLARED IN THE CALLING PROGRAM IN THIS
0020* WITH CORRECT TYPE INTEGER OR REAL AND WITH
0021* CORRECT NUMBER OF INDICES, BUT SHOULD BE MINIMUM IN
0022* SIZE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
PRINTOUT OF TA 00 NO -N CALL BEFORE +N CALL, I.E. NO ARRAY SAVED,
BUT ARRAY REQUESTED
TA 01 N = 0 OR \N\>10
TA 02 ARRAY TYPE OF GRANTED
ARRAY AND OF REQUEST ARRAY
DIFFERS OR # OF INDICES DIFFERS
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE SEGMENT REQUESTING AN ARRAY SHOULD DECLARE IT WITH SAME TYPE AND
SAME NUMBER OF INDICES AS THE ORIGINAL ARRAY, BUT SHOULD GIVE MINIMUM
DIMENSIONS, 1:1, TO SAVE CORE SPACE.
BE SURE TO HAVE THE ARRAY ALWAYS CORE RESIDENT, I.E., DON'T HAVE IT IN
A SEGMENT.
E03801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FORTRAN IV CORE SAVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
FORMATTING FORTRAN
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE ALLOWS THE FORTRAN IV PROGRAM THAT USES ONLY FORTRAN II
I/O FUNCTIONS TO USE THE FORTRAN II FORMATTER AND THUS SAVE A
CONSIDERABLE NUMBER OF WORDS. THE SAVINGS IN RTE/DOS ARE A MAXIMUM OF
882 WORDS. IN BCS THE SAVINGS ARE A MAXIMUM OF 651 WORDS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
IN MTS, DOS, DOS-M AND RTE, LOAD RELOCATABLE TAPE GENERATED BY
ASSEMBLING THIS PROGRAM, PRIOR TO THE FORMATTER AND THE REST OF THE
LIBRARY. DO NOT LOAD THE FORTRAN IV FORMATTER; HOWEVER, IF FORTRAN IV
FEATURES SUCH AS DOUBLE PRECISION OR COMPLEX NUMBERS ARE TO BE USED,
THE FORTRAN IV LIBRARY, EXCLUSIVE OF THE FORMATTER, SHOULD BE LOADED.
IN ANY CASE, SINCE THE FORTRAN IV ARRAYS ARE DIFFERENT, THE ..MAP
ROUTINE FROM THE FORTRAN IV LIBRARY MUST BE LOADED IF ARRAYS ARE USED.
IN BCS, NON-MTS, LOAD THE RELOCATABLE TAPE, IF NEEDED (I.E., IF
REAL OR INTEGER I/O IS BEING DONE WITH FORTRAN IV), JUST BEFORE
LOADING THE FORTRAN FORMATTER. AFTER THE FORMATTER IS LOADED, THE
LIBRARY SWITCH IS TURNED ON AND THE APPROPRIATE LIBRARIES ARE LOADED.
IN BCS, IT IS OKAY TO SUBMIT THE FORTRAN IV FORMATTER AT THIS TIME
(IT WILL NOT BE LOADED HOWEVER).
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINT(S)
.RIO. REAL VARIABLE I/O
CALLING SEQUENCE
JSB .RIO.
DEF REAL
CAUSES A CALL TO .RAR. FOR AN ARRAY
LENGTH OF 1.
.RAY. REAL ARRAY I/O
CALLING SEQUENCE
JSB .RAY.
DEF ADDRESS
DEC LENGTH
CAUSES A CALL TO .RAR.
.IIO. INTEGER VARIABLE I/O
CALLING SEQUENCE
JSB .IIO.
DEF INTEGER
CAUSES A CALL TO .IAR. FOR AN ARRAY
LENGTH OF 1.
IAY. INTEGER ARRAY I/O
CALLING SEQUENCE
JSB .IAY.
DEF ADDRESS
DEC LENGTH
CAUSES A CALL TO .IAR.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E03901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RTEM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ON-LINE SYSTEM LOAD FOR MOVING-HEAD RTE.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DISC BOOT-UP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
97 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO START UP A MOVING-HEAD RTE SYSTEM FROM
ANOTHER RTE SYSTEM (WITH A FIXED-HEAD OR MOVING-HEAD DISC) WITHIN THE
SAME HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WITHOUT HALTING THE COMPUTER AND LOADING A
PAPER TAPE BOOTSTRAP. THE I/O CHANNELS OF THE MOVING-HEAD DISC, THE
SUBCHANNEL NUMBER AND THE STARTING TRACK NUMBER OF THE SYSTEM TO BE
STARTED ARE SPECIFIED IN THE PROGRAM DIRECTIVE. A TYPICAL DIRECTIVE
MIGHT BE "ON,RTEM,22,1,100"
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: RTEM SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE AND LOAD THE PROGRAM IN AN RTE SYSTEM IN WHICH IT IS
DESIRABLE TO TRANSFER TO A MOVING-HEAD RTE SYSTEM WITHIN THE SAME
HARDWARE CONFIGURATION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL THE PROGRAM WITH THE DIRECTIVE
ON,RTEM,CHAN,SUBCH,TRACK
WHERE:
"CHAN" IS THE HIGHER PRIORITY I/O CHANNEL NUMBER (IN
DECIMAL) OF THE MOVING-HEAD DISC.
"SUBCH" IS THE SUBCHANNEL NUMBER OF THE DISC ON WHICH
THE SYSTEM RESIDES.
"TRACK" IS THE STARTING TRACK NUMBER OF THE RTE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
IF THE SYSTEM IS ON SUBCHANNEL 1 AND THE DISC I/O CHANNELS ARE 26 AND
27 (OCTAL) AND THE SYSTEM STARTS AT TRACK 100, THE DIRECTIVE IS
ON,RTEM,22,1,100 (DECIMAL NUMBERS)
THE SYSTEM SHOULD START UP JUST AS IT NORMALLY DOES WITH THE PAPER
TAPE BOOTSTRAP.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E04001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DOSM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M BOOTSTRAP PROGRAM FROM RTE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DISC BOOT-UP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
138 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO START UP A DOS-M SYSTEM FROM AN RTE
SYSTEM HARDWARE CONFIGURATION WITHOUT HALTING THE COMPUTER AND LOADING
A PAPER TAPE BOOTSTRAP. THE I/O CHANNELS OF THE MOVING-HEAD DISC AND
THE SUBCHANNEL NUMBER ARE SPECIFIED IN THE PROGRAM DIRECTIVE. A TYPICAL
DIRECTIVE MIGHT BE: "ON,DOSM,22,1"
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DOSM SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE AND LOAD THE PROGRAM IN AN RTE SYSTEM IN WHICH IT IS
DESIRABLE TO TRANSFER TO A DOS-M SYSTEM WITHIN THE SAME HARDWARE
CONFIGURATION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL THE PROGRAM WITH THE DIRECTIVE
ON,DOSM,CHAN,SUBCH
WHERE:
"CHAN" IS THE HIGHER PRIORITY I/O CHANNEL NUMBER (IN
DECIMAL) OF THE MOVING-HEAD DISC.
"SUBCH" IS THE SUBCHANNEL NUMBER OF THE DISC ON WHICH
THE SYSTEM RESIDES.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
IF THE SYSTEM IS ON SUBCHANNEL 1 AND THE DISC I/O CHANNELS ARE 26 AND
27 (OCTAL) THE DIRECTIVE IS
ON,DOSM,22,1 (DECIMAL NUMBERS)
THE SYSTEM SHOULD START UP JUST AS IT NORMALLY DOES WITH THE PAPER TAPE
BOOTSTRAP.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E04101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MTU
**PROGRAM TITLE:
EASY MAGNETIC TAPE I/O AND STATUS INFORMATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
STATUS MAGNETIC TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
280 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (260 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS UTILITY IS USED IN A DOS/DOS-M OR RTE ENVIRONMENT TO ELIMINATE THE
TEDIOUS PROGRAMMING REQUIRED TO ACHIEVE MAGNETIC TAPE DATA TRANSFER OR
STATUS INFORMATION. IT CHECKS FOR ON-LINE CONDITION, WRITE RING PRESENT,
END OF TAPE, AND CALLS EXEC FOR DATA TRANSFERS AND STATUS. BY CHECKING
THE INDICATORS RETURNED BY THIS ROUTINE THE USER MAINTAINS THE
FLEXIBILITY OF BRANCHING IN HIS OWN PROGRAM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: MTU SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE PROGRAM AND STORE (OR SAVE) RELOCATABLE FOR USE AS A LIBRARY
ROUTINE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE LISING
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E04201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE LOGIN AND LOGBOOK
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
STATUS REPORTS ACCOUNTING
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS, 3494 FOR LOGIN AND 9579 FOR LOGBOOK
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THE TWO FORTRAN PROGRAMS IN THIS PACKAGE ALLOW A USER TO (LOG): TIME-IN
OF JOB, DESCRIPTION OF JOB, DAY, TIME-OUT OF JOB; AND GENERATE A
PERIODIC SUMMARY REPORT WHICH INCLUDES THE NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS, THE
NUMBER OF COMPUTER HOURS AVAILABLE, ONE-LINE PRINTOUTS OF EACH JOB RUN
ALONG WITH ITS RUN-TIME, TOTAL USER HOURS, TOTAL COMPUTER HOURS, AND
OTHER INFORMATION PERTINENT TO AN RTE ENVIRONMENT.
THIS PACKAGE REQUIRES AN ASR-35 TELETYPE, TIME BASE GENERATOR, PHOTO-
READER, TTY AND 16K CORE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. USE STANDARD PROCEDURES TO COMPILE, LOAD, AND STORE THE LOG BOOK
PROGRAM UNDER THE NAME OF LBOOK.
2. USE STANDARD PROCEDURES AS DEFINED BY THE RTE OPERATING MANUAL TO
COMPILE, LOAD, AND STORE LOGIN AS A BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
1. SET THE TIME CORRECTLY WITH A "TM" COMMAND.
2. TURN THE ASR-35 SELECTOR SWITCH TO THE "T" POSITION TO PUNCH AND
PRINT, FOR TEST CASE ONLY.
3. TYPE "ON, LOGIN, 3".
4. THE PROGRAM WILL ASK FOR A JOB NAME.
5. TYPE A JOB NAME OF 5 OR LESS CHARACTERS.
6. THE PROGRAM WILL PUNCH AND PRINT THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE:
**ON!XXXX/0YYY/0ZZ/0WW/0SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
XXXXX - JOB NAME
YYY - DAY OF YEAR
ZZ - HOUR (24 HOUR CLOCK)
WW - MINUTES
7. THIS COMPLETES A LOG IN ENTRY. PROCEED AS USUAL.
8. TO LOG OFF (TERMINATE THE TIME OF YOUR JOB), TYPE "ON, LOG, 1".
9. THE PROGRAM WILL ASK FOR THE JOB NAME GIVEN IS STEP 5. TYPE IT.
10. THIS CREATES AN ENTRY TO TERMINATE YOUR JOB.
11. SINCE RTE IS REAL TIME, ANY NUMBER OF JOBS MAY BE SCHEDULED DURING
ANY TIME AND TERMINATED IN ANY ORDER.
12. ON, LOG, 2 IS USED FOR THE SELDOM USED JOBS. THE PROCEDURE IS TO
TYPE THE L.U. OF THE DEVICE WHICH SERVES AS JOB DESCRIPTION INPUT,
NORMALLY THE CARD READER.
13. AFTER A GENERAL IDEA OF OPERATION IS GAINED, TURN THE SELECTOR
SWITCH TO THE "KT" POSITION.
14. FOR USER'S CONVENIENCE HAVE A MEMO TYPED TO IDENTIFY NUMBERS WITH
JOB DESCRIPTIONS. THESE NUMBERS ARE RESERVED:
1 - TERMINATE A JOB.
2 - SPECIAL JOB INPUT OPTION
3 - SOFTWARE MAINTENANCE
4 - PERSONAL USE
5 - DEMONSTRATION PROGRAMS
10 - THIS DELETES A JOB ENTRY
12 - HARDWARE MAINTENANCE ON (DEVICE)
15. BY TYPING "ON, LOG, (JOB#), 1" THE PROGRAM WILL BY-PASS STEP 4'S
QUESTION AND WAIT FOR INPUT (STEP 5).
LBOOK
1. LOAD DATA TAPE IN PHOTOREADER.
2. TYPE "ON, LBOOK".
3. TYPE "APRIL" CR.LF., THEN "4" CR.LF.
4. COMPARE YOUR OUTPUT LISTING AGAINST LISTING ENCLOSED.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
LOGIN
1. USE STANDARD PROCEDURES AS DEFINED BY THE RTE OPERATING MANUAL TO
COMPILE, LOAD, AND STORE LOGIN AS A BACKGROUND DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM.
2. TO GAIN ACCURATE TIME INFORMATION WITH EACH JOB, IT IS IMPERATIVE TO
SET THE DAY OF YEAR AND TIME CORRECTLY. CONSULT RTE'S SYSTEM CMNDS
FOR CORRECT TIME SET.
3. THE I/O IS CONVERSATIONAL.
4. REFER TO SECTION 7.0 (TEST CASE) FOR NORMAL OPERATION OF LOGIN.
5. AFTER THE USER IS FAMILIAR WITH THE OUTPUT, HE SHOULD LOOK AT THE
SOURCE LISTING, IN PARTICULAR, THE COMMENTS AND STATEMENT NUMBER 855
(NOTING THAT THE VALUE OF I IS EQUAL TO THE PARAMETER PASSED WHEN
TYPING "ON, LOG, NUMBER").
6. TO ADD A NEW JOB DESCRIPTION SET LASTJ TO THE NEXT AVAILABLE NUMBER
(6). THIS NUMBER WILL BE THE NEW JOB DESCRIPTION'S NUMBER.
NOTE: 1 THRU 5, 10 AND 12 ARE USED.
7. CHECK STATEMENT 855 (A COMPUTED GO-TO) TO SEE WHICH LINE # THE "I"
WILL POINT TO.
8. THEN FOLLOW THE PROGRAM LOGIC (LINE NUMBER PLUS 2) TO THE 2ND LINE
OF THE FORMAT STATEMENT. EDIT THIS LINE WITH THE NEW JOB DESCRIPTION
LEAVING THE QUOTE FIELD LENGTH UNCHANGED.
9. GO TO STEP 1.
NOTE: TO TERMINATE A GROUP OF ENTRIES (THE LOG BOOK PROGRAM REQUIRES
IT) TYPE "ON, LOGIN, 101". THIS COMMAND PUNCHES A "/EE", CR.LF.,
THEN LEADER.
LBOOK
1. I/O IS CONVERSATIONAL.
2. USE STANDARD PROCEDURES TO COMPILE, LOAD, AD STORE THE LOG BOOK
PROGRAM UNDER THE NAME OF LBOOK.
3. LBOOK REQUIRES A LARGE AMOUNT OF STORAGE FOR THE DATA INPUT. REFER
TO THE SOURCE LISTING COMMENTS FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON CHANGING ARRAY
SIZES TO RETAIN AS MUCH DATA STORAGE AS POSSIBLE.
4. PLACE THE "LOGIN" TAPE IN THE PHOTOREADER.
5. TYPE "ON, LBOOK".
6. LBOOK WILL ASK FOR THE MONTH OF THIS REPORT AND HOW MANY WORKING
DAYS DURING THE MONTH OR PERIOD.
7. TYPE MONTH ON ONE LINE, THE NUMBER OF WORKING DAYS ON THE NEXT.
8. PROGRAM OPERATION IS AUTOMATIC FROM THIS POINT.
9. THE TERMINATION OF THE DATA IS RECOGNIZED WHEN A "/EE" RECORD IS
READ. THIS RECORD IS PUNCHED BY TYPING "ON, LOGIN, 101"
(REFER TO LOGIN DOCUMENTATION.)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LOGIN
SET THE SELECTOR SWITCH OF THE ASR-35 TTY TO THE "KT" POSITION FOR
NORMAL OPERATION OF LOGIN.
LOGIN'S EXEC CALLS WILL THEN PUNCH DATA ON THE ASR-35 PAPER TAPE, ALL
OTHER RTE COMMANDS AND NORMAL WRITES AND READS TO THE TTY WILL NOT TURN
ON THE PUNCH.
LBOOK
IF THE USER FINDS THE ARRAY TOO SMALL WITH NO CORE AVAILABLE, LBOOK CAN
RUN UNDER DOS WITH NO CHANGES EXCEPT EXPANDING THE ARRAY SIZES.
E04301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: JOBPR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE FOR BATCH PROCESSING.
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
BATCH
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
880 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (791 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS).
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
RTE JOB PROCESSOR IS A FOREGROUND DISC RESIDENT ROUTINE FOR THE
HP2005A, 2005B, OR 2005C REAL TIME EXECUTIVE WHICH PROVIDES A PRIMITIVE
JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE FOR CONTROLLING THE EXECUTION OF PROGRAMS FROM A
BATCH DEVICE SUCH AS A CARD READER, MAG TAPE OR TAPE READER. THE PROGRAM
ACCEPTS DIRECTIVES FOR JOB, STATEMENT, END JOB, PAUSE, COMMENT, LOGICAL
SOURCE DECLARATION, LOAD AND GO ASSIGNMENT, SCHEDULE REQUEST, AND JOB
PROCESSOR TERMINATE. TYPICAL USES OF THIS PROGRAM MIGHT INCLUDE
COMPILING, LOADING, AND EXECUTING A FORTRAN OR ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM
IN THE BACKGROUND OF RTE, OR RUNNING A SERIES OF PROGRAMS TO PERFORM A
SPECIFIC TASK (EITHER FOREGROUND OR BACKGROUND).
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
HP2005A, 2005B, 0R 2005C REAL TIME EXECUTIVE SYSTEM (MINIMUM SYSTEM)
16K 2100 SERIES COMPUTER, EAU, DMA
DISC MEMORY (2766 OR 7900)
TELETYPE (ASR33, ASR35)
TAPE READER
(2761A CARD READER IMPROVES OPERATION)
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: JOBPR SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE JOBPR SOURCE
2. USING THE RTE RELOCATING LOADER (EDIT OPERATION, ON-LINE PROGRAM
ADDITION) ADD THE JOB PROCESSOR TO THE SYSTEM. THE PROGRAM TYPE IS
REAL TIME, DISC RESIDENT (TYPE 2).
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. PLACE BATCH DECK IN BATCH INPUT DEVICE.
2. TYPE ON, JOBPR, P1, P2
WHERE P1 = LOGICAL UNIT OF BATCH INPUT DEVICE
P2 = LOGICAL UNIT OF HIGH-SPEED LIST DEVICE
(OR 0 IF NOT AVAILABLE)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
JOB CONTROL LANGUAGE SYNTAX
THE FIRST CARD IN THE JCL DECKS SHOULD BE A JOB CARD:
JO,NAME "NAME" IS ANY 1-5 CHARACTER JOB NAME.
WHEN THE JO CARD IS ENCOUNTERED, A JOB MESSAGE IS PRINTED ON THE
SYSTEM CONSOLE, INDICATING THE JOB NAME AND CURRENT TIME OF DAY. A JOB
CARD MUST APPEAR BEFORE ANY OTHER JCL DIRECTIVES CAN BE ACCEPTED. NOTE:
JO APPEARS IN COLUMNS 1 AND 2. IF A LIST DEVICE IS SPECIFIED WHEN THE
JOB PROCESSOR IS SCHEDULED, THE JOB INFORMATION IS PRINTED ON THE LIST
DEVICE IN ADDITION. IF ANOTHER JOB CARD IS ENCOUNTERED BEFORE AN EJOB
OR /& CARD, THE EJOB SEQUENCE WILL BE EXECUTED, THEN THE NEW JOB WILL
BE LOGGED ON.
EJ [OB) END OF JOB CARD (COLUMNS 1-4).
[ ]= OPTIONAL
THE EJOB CARD CAUSES AN END OF JOB MESSAGE TO BE PRINTED ON THE SYSTEM
CONSOLE AND LIST DEVICE, IF PRESENT. THE TOTAL ELAPSED TIME FOR THE JOB
WILL BE PRINTED IN MINUTES AND SECONDS. THIS CARD IS USED TO INDICATE
THE END OF A JOB. THE JOB PROCESSOR WILL IGNORE ALL FOLLOWING JCL CARDS
EXCEPT "/&" OR A "JOB" STATEMENT.
PA[CHARACTER STRING] PAUSE CARD. SUSPEND JOB PROCESSOR
FOR MANUAL INTERVENTION. THE OPTIONAL
CHARACTER STRING MAY BE USED FOR
MESSAGES TO THE OPERATOR. TYPE
"GO, JOBPR" TO RESUME BATCH PROCESSING.
CO CHARACTER STRING COMMENT CARD. THE SPECIFIED CHARACTER
STRING IS PRINTED ON THE SYSTEM TTY.
/& END OF BATCH OPERATIONS. THE JOB
PROCESSOR IS TERMINATED. IF INSIDE A
JOB, THE EJOB SEQUENCE IS EXECUTED FIRST.
LS,U,T LOGICAL SOURCE DIRECTIVE (SAME AS RTE
LS DIRECTIVE). U=DISC LOGICAL UNIT, 2 OR
3. T=DISC TRACK OF SOURCE FILE.
LG,N SAME RTE LG (LOAD AND GO) DIRECTIVE.
IF N=0, RELEASE PREVIOUS LOAD AND GO
TRACKS, ELSE N=NO. OF TRACKS TO ALLOCATE.
ON,PNAME,P1,P2,P3,P4,P5 PROGRAM SCHEDULE (WITH WAIT). PNAME IS 1-5
CHARACTER PROGRAM NAME. P1-P5 ARE DECIMAL
CONSTANTS IN THE RANGE OF 0-32767 WHICH ARE
PASSED TO THE SCHEDULED PROGRAM.
EG: ON,FTN,5,99.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
WHEN LOAD AND GO TRACKS ARE RELEASED USING THE LG DIRECTIVE, THE TRACK
ASSIGNMENT TABLE IS UPDATED, BUT NO CHECK IS MADE TO SEE IF ANY PROGRAMS
ARE WAITING FOR DISC SPACE.
E04401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SUSP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE SELF-SUSPEND ROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TIME STATUS SCHEDULING
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE ALLOWS A USER TO (PROGRAM) A SUSPEND FOR A SPECIFIED
LENGTH OF TIME IN HIS APPLICATIONS PROGRAM. IF THE CALLING ROUTINE
WAS IN THE TIME LIST BEFORE SUSPENSION, IT WILL BE REINSTATED AND
RESCHEDULED IN THE TIME LIST. SUSP SUSPENDS USING EXEC CALLS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SUSP SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY AND LOAD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
CALL SUSP (1,20)
WOULD EFFECTIVELY SUSPEND THE CALLING PROGRAM FOR
200 MILLISECONDS.
CALL SUSP (3,4)
WOULD SUSPEND FOR FOUR MINUTES.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE LISTING
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF THE SCHEDULED TIME OF THE PROGRAM OCCURS DURING SUSPENSION,
THE PROGRAM WILL NOT BE EXECUTED AGAIN FOR 24 HOURS.
E04501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LABEL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE ALPHANUMERIC TAPE LABEL GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
LABEL PAPER TAPE CHARACTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
523 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
OPERATING IN A RTE ENVIRONMENT, THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES A MEANS OF
LABELING A PAPER TAPE BY GENERATING A BLOCK-LETTERING LEADER OR
TRAILER ON THE TAPE. LABEL MAKES EXEC I/O CALLS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: LABEL SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY AND LOAD PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO USE:
ON, LABEL, I, N CR,LF
WHERE:
I = INPUT LOGICAL UNIT DEVICE NUMBER (USUALLY KEYBOARD)
N = PUNCH LOGICAL UNIT DEVICE NUMBER
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THIS PROGRAM MAY BE CONVERTED TO BCS BY:
1. HARD CODING THE LOGICAL UNITS OR USING .ENTR TO GET THEM
AS PARAMETERS.
2. REPLACING THE EXEC I/O CALLS WITH CALLS TO .IOC..
3. REPLACING THE TERMINATING EXEC CALL WITH THE PROPER
TERMINATION.
E04601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVR67
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MAKE RTE DRIVERS DISC RESIDENT
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS LINKING DRIVER, DVR67, ENABLES STANDARD HP OR USER WRITTEN RTE
DRIVERS TO BE DISC RESIDENT, AND THUS IT CAN SAVE VALUABLE CORE
STORAGE. THE LINKING DRIVER IS INCORPORATED INTO A STANDARD RTE AT
GENERATION TIME. DRIVERS NEED NO MODIFICATION TO USE DVR67; HOWEVER,
THEY MUST BE LOADED AFTER AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SUBROUTINE WHICH
PROVIDES THE LINK TO DVR67.
DVR67 IS DEVICE INDEPENDENT AND SO PROVIDES THE USEFUL FACILITY OF
ALLOWING NEW PERIPHERALS AND THEIR DRIVERS TO BE ADDED WITHOUT
GENERATING A NEW SYSTEM. PROTOTYPE PERIPHERAL DRIVERS CAN BE TESTED;
AND IF ERROR IS FOUND, THE DRIVER CAN BE CORRECTED, COMPILED, AND
LOADED WITHOUT REGENERATING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DVR67 SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE LINKING DRIVER DVR67 AND INCORPORATED BINARY IN A STANDARD
RTE AT GENERATION TIME. DEVICES WHICH NEED TO BE RUN WITH DISC
RESIDENT DRIVERS ARE LINKED TO DVR67 AS IF THIS WAS THE REAL DRIVER
FOR THAT DEVICE. SEE ALSO PROGRAM DESCRIPTION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THE FOLLOWING LINKING SUBROUTINE WAS USED TO RUN THE RTE EDITOR WITH
DISC RESIDENT CARD READER AND LINE PRINTER DRIVERS.
NAM LINK,7
EXT I.11,C.11,I.12,C.12
DEC 9 CARD READER LU #
DEF I.11 CARD READER DRIVER
DEF C.11 ENTRY POINTS
DEC 6 LINE PRINTER LU #
DEF I.12 LINE PRINTER DRIVER
DEF C.12 ENTRY POINTS
THIS SUBROUTINE WAS COMPILED ONTO THE LOAD AND GO TRACKS AND THEN THE
EDITOR, DVR11 AND DVR12 RELOCATABLES WERE ADDED USING THE FMGR. THE
LOADER WAS THEN USED TO LOAD THE REPLACEMENT EDITOR FROM THE LOAD AND
GO.
THIS RESULTED IN THE SUBROUTINE LINK BEING LOADED FIRST, FOLLOWED BY
THE DVR11 AND DVR12.
NB. THAT THE EDITOR WAS NOT MODIFIED.
*ON,EDIT,9,6,1 THEN LISTED FROM THE CARD READER TO THE LINE PRINTER
VIA THE LINKING DRIVER.
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION WAS SUPPLIED AT GENERATION TIME.
* EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRY
. . .
. . .
14,DVR67 LINE PRINTER EQT#6
. . .
. . .
12,DVR67,D CARD READER EQT,#9
. . .
. . .
*DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE
. . .
. . .
6=EQT#?
6
. . .
. . .
9=EQT#?
9
. . .
. . .
*INTERRUPT TABLE
. . .
. . .
12,EQT,9
. . .
. . .
14,EQT,6
N.B. DVR67 IS THE LINKING DRIVER
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE PROGRAM USING THE LINKING DRIVER MUST BE LOADED WITH A SUBROUTINE
OF THE FORM:
ASMB,R,L
NAM LINK
EXT I.XX,C.XX,I.YY,C.YY
DEC N LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER FOR DEVICE X
DEF I.XX DRIVER ENTRY POINTS FOR
DEF C.XX DEVICE X
DEC P LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER FOR DEVICE Y
DEF I.YY DRIVER ENTRY POINTS FOR
DEF C.YY DEVICE Y
..
..
..
DEC 1000 TERMINATES
ANY NUMBER OF DRIVERS CAN BE USED VIA THE LINKING DRIVER AS LONG AS
THE RELEVENT LU AND ENTRY POINT ADDRESSES APPEAR IN THE LINKING SUB-
ROUTINE.
N.B. LINKING SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED FIRST.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
1007 RESULTS IF:
1. LINKING DRIVER IS HANDLING BUFFERED DEVICE.
2. FOR READ/WRITE CALLS IF I/O BUFFER IS IN COMMON.
3. IF LINKING SUBROUTINE CONTAINS LU WHICH CANNOT BE FOUND AT
BEGINNING OF PROGRAM.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
RTE SYSTEMS ANALYST NOTE OF FEBRUARY 15, 1972 BY SAME AUTHOR.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
TO MAKE SURE THE CALLING PROGRAM IS NOT SWAPPED, THE LINKING
DRIVER CHECKS THAT:
1. THE DEVICE IS NOT BUFFERED.
2. THE DATA IS NOT IN REAL TIME COMMON.
E04701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PMOD
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE DISC PROGRAM PATCH UTILITY
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
1512 (OCTAL) WITH LIBRARY (INPUT, RMPAR, GETAD, .ENTR), 1340 WITHOUT
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'PMOD' ALLOWS PATCHES TO BE MADE TO DISC-RESIDENT (FOREGROUND OR
BACKGROUN) PROGRAMS. INFORMATION SUPPLIED TO 'PMOD' IS READILY
OBTAINED FROM THE CORE MAP; TRACK AND SECTOR ADDRESSES ARE COMPUTED
FROM THE NAME OF THE PROGRAM (OR SEGMENT) AND THE STARTING DISC
ADDRESS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: PMOD SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD ASSEMBLE AND LOAD
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
ON,PMOD,P
WHERE P=0 TO OBTAIN PRINTOUT OF LEGAL COMMANDS
OTHERWISE SUPPRESS PRINTOUT
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
PMOD (RTE BACKGROUND DISC-RESIDENT, PRIORITY 90)
USE:
ON, PMOD, OPTION
OPTION = 0 TO PRINT COMMAND EXPLANATION
OTHERWISE INHIBIT PRINT
PROG NAME?
ENTER PROGRAM (OR SEGMENT) NAME
COMMAND?
M OCTAL ADDRESS OF MODULE TO BE PATCHED (NOT NECESSARILY
THE FIRST ADDRESS OF THE SEGMENT)
COMMAND?
OTHER COMMANDS:
D D1 [,D2]
DUMPS LOCATIONS D1 THRU D2 IN OCTAL AND ASCII
S S1 D1 [,D2, ...DN]
STORED DATA ITEMS D1 THRU DN IN LOCATIONS
STARTING AT S1
E QUIT (EXIT)
ALL NUMBERS ARE OCTAL
PMOD CAN OPTIONALLY BE MADE A FOREGROUND DISC-RESIDENT PROGRAM
WITHOUT CHANGES IN CODING.
RESTRICTIONS:
PROGRAMS TO BE PATCHED MUST HAVE AN ID SEGMENT (OR THE ERROR MESSAGE
"PROG NOT FOUND" IS PRINTED) AND MUST BE DISC-RESIDENT (TYPES 2, 3 OR
5; THE ERROR MESSAGE "PROG NOT DISC RES." IS PRINTED).
BASE PAGE LOCATIONS START ON THE NEXT SECTOR BOUNDARY AFTER THE LAST
PROGRAM DATA ON THE DISC. THEREFORE, TO GET AT THE BASE PAGE AREA SET
M TO THE HIGH MAIN ADDRESS OF YOUR PROGRAM AND ROUND IT UP TO THE
NEXT SECTOR; I.E.
M <- ENTER ([HIGH MAIN + 63]/64)
THIS PROGRAM MODIFIES THE TRACK ASSIGNMENT TABLE BEFORE WRITING ON
THE DISC; TRACKS ARE ASSIGNED "GLOBALLY" AND THEN RESTORED AFTERWARDS.
THEREFORE, ANY PROGRAM KNOWN TO THE SYSTEM (I.E., HAS AN ID SEGMENT)
CAN BE PATCHED; HOWEVER, COCKPIT ERRORS CAN POTENTIALLY DESTROY THE
SYSTEM PERMANENTLY SO BE CAREFUL.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
1. IF THE PROGRAM NAME GIVEN IS NOT DISC-RESIDENT, "PROG NOT DISC RES."
IS PRINTED, AND "PROG NAME?" IS REPEATED.
2. IF THE PROGRAM IS NOT PRESENT (HAS NO ID SEGMENT), "PROG NOT FOUND"
IS PRINTED, AND "PROG NAME?" REPEATED
3. IF A COMMAND OTHER THAN "M" OR "E" IS ENTERED AND M IS 0, "NO
MEMORY BASE 'M'" IS PRINTED, AND "COMMAND?" REPEATED.
4. NO CHECKING THAT THE ADDRESS GIVEN IS CONTAINED IN THE PROGRAM
IS PERFORMED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. PMOD COMPUTES THE TRACK AND SECTOR IT IS READING/WRITING TO ITSELF,
READS OR WRITES IT, AND THEN RESTORES THE ASSIGNMENT. A MISTAKE IN
AN "S" COMMAND COULD WRITE DATA IN AN UNWANTED PLACE.
DO NOT PURGE PMOD WITH AN OF,PMOD COMMAND WHILE IT IS RUNNING.
2. USE "E".
E04801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MFORM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FORMATTER FOR ASCII
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
FORMATTING ASCII DECIMAL
CONVERSION FORTRAN
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE IS INTENDED TO BE A REPLACEMENT FOR THE FORMATTER IN THOSE
APPLICATIONS WHERE AN INTEGER IS TO BE CONVERTED INTO ASCII (DECIMAL)
AND OUTPUT WITHIN A MESSAGE, SUCH AS AN ERROR CODE.
MINIMUM DOS OR RTE IS THE HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. USING THE HP FTN4 COMPILER, COMPILE THE TEST PROGRAM "TEST9".
2. ASSEMBLE "MFORM".
3. LOAD THE TEST PROGRAM IN EITHER DOS-M OR RTE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TURN ON THE PROGRAM:
DOS-M :PR,TEST9
RTE *ON,TEST9
ENTER THE NUMBER YOU WANT FORMATTED, THE SIZE OF THE FORMAT FIELD, AND
THE CHARACTER POSITION OF THE LEFT MOST PART OF THE FIELD.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS ROUTINE IS INTENDED TO BE A REPLACEMENT FOR THE FORMATTER IN THOSE
APPLICATIONS WHERE AN INTEGER IS TO BE CONVERTED INTO ASCII (DECIMAL)
AND OUTPUT WITHIN A MESSAGE, SUCH AS AN ERROR CODE.
THE MESSAGE ITSELF IS GENERATED BY FORMAT STATEMENTS. THE ADDRESS OF THE
FORMAT IS OBTAINED BY EXECUTING AN ASSIGN XXX TO III, WHERE XXX IS THE
FORMAT STATEMENT NUMBER AND III IS ANY INTEGER. III IS THEN PASSED TO
THE MINIFORMATTER AS ITS FIRST PARAMETER.
WHEN GENERATING THE FORMAT STATEMENTS, LEAVE ROOM FOR THE CONVERSION,
INCLUDING SIGN IF NECESSARY. FOR EXAMPLE:
IE = ERROR CODE, NUMST = STATEMENT NUMBER
100 FORMAT ("ERROR XXXXXIN STATEMENT YYYYY")
ASSIGN 100 TO I
CALL MFORM (I, IEN, 5, 6, 0)
CALL MFORM (I, NUMST, 5, 23, 6)
THE FIRST CALL TO MFORM WILL CONVERT IERR INTO DECIMAL ASCII CHARACTERS,
STORING THEM IN THE XXXXX CHARACTERS OF THE FORMAT (ANY CHARACTERS MAY
BE USED. IF THE CONVERSION DOES NOT REQUIRE ALL THE CHARACTERS, BLANKS
WILL BE USED). THE SECOND CALL CONVERTS NUMST INTO THE YYYYY CHARACTERS,
AND WILL PRINT THE WHOLE LINE ON LU = 6.
THE GENERAL FORM OF THE CALL IS:
CALL MFORM (I, NUMBR, MAXCH, IPOSN, LU)
WHERE: I HAS BEEN ASSIGNED THE ADDRESS OF THE DESIRED FORMAT STATEMENT.
IN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CODE, I SHOULD CONTAIN A DEF TO THE MESSAGE
BUFFER -2 (SEE THE NOTE ON FTN-IV OVERHEAD BELOW).
NUMBR = NUMBER TO BE CONVERTED.
MAXCH = NUMBER OF CHARACTERS TO USE IN THE CONVERSION. IF FEWER
CHARACTERS ARE USED, THE REST WILL BE BLANK-FILLED. IF
MAXCH = 0, NO CONVERSION IS DONE, THE MESSAGE BUFFER IS
MERELY OUTPUT. THIS IS USEFUL FOR OUTPUTTING QUESTION
MESSAGES.
IPOSN = CHARACTER POSITION OF THE LEFT-MOST CHARACTER IN THE
CONVERSION, STARTING FROM THE SECOND CHARACTER AFTER THE
LEFT PAREND [(]. IN THIS CASE, IPOSN = # OF CHARACTERS IN
MESSAGE +1.
LU = LOGICAL UNIT TO OUTPUT THE MESSAGE. USE 0 IF NO OUTPUT IS
DESIRED, AS IN THE CASE WHEN SEVERAL NUMBERS MUST BE CONVERTED
(SEE THE EXAMPLE).
NOTE ON FTN-IV OVERHEAD:
EACH FORMAT STATEMENT IN HP FTN-IV GENERATES TWO WORDS OF OVERHEAD:
A JMP INSTRUCTION AND THE ASCII CODE FOR THE LEFT PAREND [(] AND QUOTE
(") CHARACTERS. THIS SPACE CAN BE USED BY CALLING MFORM WITH IPOSN = 0.
HOWEVER, SINCE MFORM ASSUMES THAT THE MESSAGE BUFFER ADDRESS + IPOSN +
MAXCH -1 SPECIFY THE END OF THE BUFFER, TWO CALLS ARE REQUIRED. FOR
EXAMPLE, TO CONVERT IERR INTO 6 CHARACTERS USING THE 4 OVERHEAD CHAR-
ACTERS PLUS THE FIRST TWO IN THE FORMAT:
105 FORMAT ("XX ERROR")
ASSIGN 105 TO I
CALL MFORM (I, IERR, 6, 0, 0)
CALL MFORM (I, IERR, 0, 13, 6)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
NONE. NO ERROR CHECKING OF LOGICAL UNITS OR DATA BUFFER ADDRESSES IS
DONE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E04901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GTIME
**PROGRAM TITLE:
READ TIME FROM HP 5666A CLOCK
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TIME DATE SCHEDULING
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS IS A FORTRAN CALLABLE SUBROUTINE WHICH ALLOWS READING THE MONTH,
DAY, HOUR, MINUTE AND SECOND FROM AN HP 5666A CLOCK. THE SELECT CODE
OF THE CLOCK INTERFACE IS A CONSTANT DECLARED IN THE SOURCE CODE. THIS
ROUTINE REQUIRES THAT MEMORY PROTECT IF PRESENT BE TURNED OFF.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: TEST PROGRAM
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. USE EDITOR TO ESTABLISH SELECT FOR CLOCK IN LINE 8 OF SOURCE CODE.
GTIME SELECT CODE IS CURRENTLY EQUAL TO 11.
2. STANDARD ASSEMBLE AND LOAD WITH CALLING PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE:
DIMENSION ITIME(5)
.
.
.
CALL GTIME (ITIME)
.
.
.
OR:
CALL GTIME (ITIME,LGTH)
LGTH INDICATES THE NUMBER OF WORDS TO BE RETURNED, THIS IS A NUMBER
BETWEEN 1 AND 5.
THE INTEGER VALUES RETURNED ARE ALWAYS IN THE SEQUENCE: MONTH, DAY,
HOUR, MINUTE, SECOND. IF FEWER THAN FIVE TIMES ARE REQUESTED, THE VALUES
ARE RETURNED IN THIS SEQUENCE ALWAYS STARTING WITH MONTH. IF LGTH IS NOT
SPECIFIED, ALL FIVE VALUES ARE RETURNED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF THIS ROUTINE IS USED IN AN OPERATING SYSTEM WHICH USES MEMORY
PROTECT, A CALL SHOULD BE MADE TO TURN OFF MEMORY PROTECT BEFORE
CALLING THIS ROUTINE. THIS REQUIREMENT APPLIES TO RTE, AND SOME
DOS-M SYSTEMS.
E05001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE LIBRARY SPEED IMPROVEMENTS
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
LIBRARY PERFORMANCE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE CONSISTS OF TWO SUBROUTINES WHICH TOGETHER RESULT IN VAST
IMPROVEMENTS TO THE EXECUTION TIMES OF TYPE 6 RTE LIBRARY SUBROUTINES.
ON FLOATING POINT HP2100 COMPUTERS MANY OF THE ARITHMETIC SUBROUTINES
(E.G., SIN, COS) RUN UP TO TWICE AS FAST, AND ON NON FLOATING POINT
MACHINES THE IMPROVEMENT IS UP TO THREE TIMES AS FAST.
TO BE EFFECTED, THE TYPE 6 SUBROUTINES MUST NOT BE IN THE CORE RESIDENT
LIBRARY AREA, AND THEY MUST BE LOADED ON-LINE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
A. ASSEMBLE DUMRX TO LOAD AND GO.
B. ASSEMBLE .ZRLP TO LOAD AND GO.
C. COMPILE OR ASSEMBLE USER PROGRAM TO LOAD AND GO.
D. LOAD PROGRAM TO REQUIRED AREA.
NOTE:
DO NOT INTERCHANGE A. WITH B. AS SYSTEM WILL CRASH.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
FTN,L
PROGRAM BENCH
DO 10 I=1,100
A=SIN(1.99) * COS(1.99)
10 CONTINUE
WRITE(6,100)
100 FORMAT("STOP")
END
END$
ON A NON FLOATING POINT 2100 COMPUTER THE ABOVE BENCHMARK TOOK 50
SECONDS. WHEN LOADED WITH DUMRX AND .ZRLP IT TOOK 18 SECONDS.
ON A FLOATING POINT 2100 COMPUTER THE BENCHMARK TOOK 7 SECONDS WITHOUT
THE MODIFICATIONS AND 3.5 SECONDS WITH THEM.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
NOTE DUMRX AND .ZRLP MUST BE LOADED BEFORD THE DISC LIBRARY IS SCANNED.
IF DUMRX AND .ZRLP ARE LOADED THEN:
1. REENTRANT ROUTINES MUST BE RECURSIVE.
2. PRIVILEGED ROUTINES MUST NOT ASSUME THE FENCE IS SWITCHED OFF.
I.E. THEY MUST NOT TRY AND WRITE BELOW THE FENCE (BECAUSE THEY WILL
REALLY RUN AS UTILITY).
3. THE FILE MANAGER MUST NOT BE LOADED ON-LINE FOR REASON 2 ABOVE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E05101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
2100 BYTE MANIPULATION ROUTINES
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
BYTE ASSEMBLER COMPARE
CHARACTER ARRAY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2116
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
185 (DECIMAL)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SET OF 8 FORTRAN, ALGOL OR ASSEMBLY CALLABLE ROUTINES PROVIDE
THE USER WITH STRING OR BYTE OPERATION CAPABILITY ON AN ARRAY.
THEY PARALLEL MOST OF THE HP3000 HARDWARE INSTRUCTION CAPABILITIES
AND OFFER THE USER MAXIMUM BYTE MANIPULATION. ALL ROUTINES ARE
COMPLETELY MODULARIZED AND COMPRISE ONLY 295 DECIMAL WORDS OF
STORAGE. THE ROUTINES INCLUDE LDB (LOAD BYTE), STB (STORE BYTE),
SCU (SCAN BYTE UNTIL), SCW (SCAN BYTE WHILE), MVBU (MOVE BYTE
UNTIL), MVBW (MOVE BYTES WHILE), AND CMPB (COMPARE BYTES).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
CHECK SOFTWARE BREAKDOWN DESCRIPTION FOR PACKAGE ENTRY POINTS
IN SOURCE LISTING.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE PROGRAM
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E05201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ALPHA
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PAPER TAPE IDENTIFICATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PAPER TAPE LABEL CHARACTER
ASCII
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS RTE AND DOS-M PAPER TAPE UTILITY PUNCHES LARGE BLOCK LETTERS ON
PAPER TAPE. ALPHA MAKES EXEC I/O CALLS.
THE USER MAY CHANGE THE INTERNALLY REPRESENTED ASCII CHARACTERS.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: SYSTEM CONSOLE AND A PAPER TAPE PUNCH.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: ALPHA SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD ASSEMBLE AND LOAD.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
PATCH: PROGRAM ALPH
SYMPTOM - WON'T WORK WITH BUFFERED PUNCH.
FIX;
SUBROUTINE (LEADR) CALLS PUNIT THREE TIMES, BUT LOAD A SPACE ONLY ON
THE FIRST CALL.
TO FIX A SPACE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE EACH CALL TO PUNIT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E05301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RTEIF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MESSAGE PROCESSOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
BATCH MULTITERMINAL TERMINAL
TEXT MESSAGE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PASSES OPERATOR INPUTS FROM THE KEYBOARD TO THE RTE-II
MESSAGE PROCESSOR AND PRINTS SYSTEM RESPONSE FOR THE OPERATOR. THUS ALL
RTE OPERATOR REQUESTS ARE AVAILABLE FROM WITHIN THE FILE MANAGER, VIA
THIS PROGRAM. FURTHERMORE, RTE COMMAND CAN BE STACKED AND EXECUTED FROM
(BATCH) FILES, WHICH CAN CALL OTHER FILES TO A NESTING OF 10 DEEP.
RECURSIVE CALLING IS ALLOWED. RTEIF ACCESSES THE FILES VIA FMP CALLS.
THE PROGRAM WILL OPERATE IN A MULTI-TERMINAL MODE. ALL I/O IS DONE VIA
RE-ENTRANT ROUTINE ON THE LOGICAL UNIT PROVIDED AS THE FIRST RMPAR
PARAMETER. IT IS SMALL ENOUGH TO OPERATE IN A FOREGROUND SINCE THE
FORMATTER IS NOT USED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: RTEIF SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E05401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MDE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE 2100 MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
MICROCODE ASSEMBLER WCS
DEBUG EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE CONTAINS THE RTE VERSIONS OF THE HP MICROASSEMBLER, THE HP
MICRO DEBUG EDITOR, AND THE WRITABLE CONTROL STORE DRIVER (33). THESE
PROGRAMS ARE DIRECT MODIFICATIONS OF THE HP SUPPORTED DOS/DOS-M
VERSIONS. THE DOS/DOS-M VERSION OF THE HP WRITABLE CONTROL STORE UTILITY
ROUTINE CAN BE USED UNDER RTE WITHOUT MODIFICATIONS.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM WITH FILE MANAGER AND WRITABLE
CONTROL STORE SUBSYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: MICRO ASSEMBLER
FILE# 3: MICROASSEMBLER
FILE# 4: MICRO DEBUG EDITOR
FILE# 5: MICRO DEBUG EDITOR
FILE# 6: MICRO DEBUG EDITOR
FILE# 7: WCS DRIVER AND FMGR ERROR
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
REFER TO HP REFERECE MANUALS
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:ON, MICRO, P1, P2, P3, P4
:ON, MDE
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IN ORDER TO PERFORM DISC FILE OPERATIONS THROUGH THE MICROASSEMBLER
AND/OR THE MICRO DEBUG EDITOR, THE ASSIGNED FILE(S) MUST PREVIOUSLY BE
CREATED WITH A FILE MANAGER CREATE TYPE 5 FILE COMMAND WITH SECURITY
CODE MA.
FOR EXAMPLE: :CR,HPMIC:MA::5:1:1
FILE SPACE WILL ALWAYS BE SUFFICIENT AS LONG AS THE FILE MANAGER CAN
FIND ENOUGH ROOM FOR EXTENSIONS ON THE DISC WHERE THE FILE NAME RESIDES.
THE FILE NAMES USED BY THE MICROASSEMBLER AND THE MICRO DEBUG EDITOR MAY
CONTAIN SIX CHARACTERS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL ERROR MESSAGES WITH RELATION TO DISC FILE OPERATIONS ARE
ACCOMPANIED BY FMGR ERROR CODES. REFER PRIMARILY TO THESE ERROR-CODES
INSTEAD OF THE MESSAGES ISSUED BY THE MICROASSEMBLER OR THE MICRO DEBUG
EDITOR.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E05501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SMUT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE UTILITY
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DISC DEBUG SYSTEM TABLES
HP-IB
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
21MX
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE ALLOWS, THE RTE-II OR III USER TO PERFORM USEFULL DISC
AND MEMORY RELATED FUNCTIONS FOR BOTH 7900 AND 7905 DISCS. THE ROUTINE
USES SEVERAL SYSTEM INTRINSICS, AND CAN RUN IN A 5K OR 12K ENVIRONMENT.
IT HAS A BUILT IN CALCULATOR FOR PERFORMING ARITHMETIC AND BIT MANIPULA-
TION CALCULATIONS. THE FOLLOWING ARITHMETIC CAPABILITIES ARE OFFERED BY
THE ROUTINE:
1. DISPLAY AND ALTER MEMORY.
2. REPLACE, COPY, SUM, AND INITIALIZE BLOCKS OF MEMORY.
3. DISPLAY AND ALTER ANY DISC.
4. MODIFY CORRESPONDING DISC BY ADDRESS MEMORY.
5. LIST SYMBOLIC CONTENTS OF TRACK ASSIGNMENT TABLE.
6. LIST ADDRESS OF ALL SYSTEM TABLES.
7. LIST ENTIRE EQT, LU, INT, AND I/O TABLES.
8. LIST CONTENTS OF ANY PROGRAMS ID SEGMENT.
9. LIST COMPACT TABLE OF HP-IB DEVICE TALK/LISTEN ADDRESSES.
10. INTERROGATE THE BUS.
11. SMUT COMMAND FILES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE (SMUT)
FILE# 3: SOURCE (SMUT)
FILE# 4: SOURCE (SCB)
FILE# 5: SOURCE (ASSEMBLY)
FILE# 6: SOURCE (SHELP)
FILE# 7: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMBINE FILES 1 AND 2 WITH EDITOR OR WITH FMP STORE COMMAND.
2. COMPILE FILES 1 AND 2
3. ASSEMBLE FILE 3.
4. ON FILE 4, INDIVIDUALLY ASSEMBLE ALL 15 ASSEMBLY ROUTINES.
5. LOAD THE SYSTEM LOADR AND THE RESULTING PROGRAM NAME SHOULD BE SMUT.
6. COMPILE FILE 5 (HELP PROCESSOR).
7. LOAD WITH SYSTEM LOADR, THE RESULTING PROG NAME SHOUD BE "SHELP".
8. TO RUN SMUT OR SHELP, SEE ATTATCHED USERS GUIDE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SMUT CAN BE EXECUTED IN ONE OF TWO WAYS. FROM A NON-DISC DEVICE SUCH
AS A TERMINAL OR FROM A PREVIOUSLY PREPARED FMP COMMAND INPUT TRANSFER
FILE.
TERMINAL SCHEDULE:
RU,SMUT[,COMND[,LOG[,LIST[,MODE[,HPIB]]]]]
COMND -- COMMAND INPUT DEVICE LU (DEFAULT IS TERMINAL)
LOG -- COMMAND OUTPUT LOG LU (DEFAULT IS 0)
LIST -- COMMAND LIST LU (DEFAULT IS COMND)
MODE -- ASCII DISPLAY MODE (DEFAULT IS PARTIAL)
HPIB -- HP-IB IBI LU (DEFAULT IS 0)
COMMAND INPUT FILE SCHEDULE:
RU,SMUT,FI,LE,X[,COMND[,LIST]]
FI,LE,X -- FMP COMMAND FILE NAME (DEFAULT IS COMND)
COMND -- COMMAND INPUT LU (DEFAULT IS 1)
LIST -- COMMAND LIST LU (DEFAULT IS 1)
WHEN SCHEDULING FROM A COMMAND INPUT FILE, THE FILE IS OPENED NON-
EXCLUSIVELY AND ACCORDING TO ITS FILE TYPE. CARE MUST BE TAKEN SUCH
THAT THE FILE EXISTS AND DOES NOT CONTAIN NON-ASCII DATA. IF THE COMMAND
FILE CANNOT BE LOCATED, A RESULTING ERROR WILL BE ISSUED AND SMUT ABORT-
ED. UPON COMPLETION OF THE COMMAND FILE, COMMAND TRANSFER WILL BE GIVEN
TO COMND OR TO LU 1 IF NOT SPECIFIED. A TRANSFER TO ANOTHER FILE WITHIN
A COMMAND FILE WILL RESULT IN CLOSING THE CURRENT FILE AND TRANSFERRING
CONTROL TO THE SECOND FILE AS FOLLOWS:
TR,FILE[,REC#[,COMND]]
FILE -- FILE NAME
REC# -- RECORD NUMBER TO BEGIN PROCESSING (DEFAULT IS 1)
COMND -- COMMAND INPUT LU (DEFAULT IS 1)
IF A REC# LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO WILL START WITH THE FIRST RECORD.
IF ANY ERRORS OCCUR DURING THE INPUT OF A COMMAND, I.E. AN ERROR
OCCURRED WHILE EXECUTING THE "READF" SUBROUTINE, WILL RESULT IN CLOSING
THE FILE, REPORTING THE ERROR NUMBER, AND TRANSFERRING THE COMMAND INPUT
CONTROL TO THE LU SPECIFIED BY "COMND".
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
1. HP-IB NOT INSTALLED - IN RESPONSE TO "LI,HPIB".
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SYSTEM LOADR MUST BE ABLE TO HANDLE EXTERNAL REFERENCES WITH OFFSETS.
E05601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SPLUM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
USER SPOOL POOL FILE ACCESS OR SPOOLING MADE EASIER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
SPOOLING FILES
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
SPLUM ENABLES A USER PROGRAM TO SPOOL A LOGICAL UNIT VIA A SPOOL POOL
FILE. I.E. SPLUM OVERCOMES NOT BEING ABLE TO UTILIZE THE INTERFACE
SUBROUTINE TO CLOSE AND PASS THE SPOOL POOL FILE SET UP BY SPOLU AND
SPLUM. THE USE OF THESE SUBROUTINES PERMITS EASY ACCESS TO THE SPOOL
FEATURES OF RTE BY THE NON-EXPERIENCED SYSTEMS PROGRAMMER. YOU MAY NOW
SPOOL TO SUCH THINGS AS THE LINE PRINTER TO AVOID INTERLEAVING WITHOUT
HAVING TO PLAY GAMES WITH SMP AND CREATING YOU OWN SPOOL FILES.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: STANDARD RTE II/III CONFIGURATION WITH BATCH-
SPOOL SOFTWARE OPTION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SPOLU, SPLOT AND IFMGR, ALTHOUGH NOT REQUIRED, SHOULD BE ADDED TO THE
SYSTEM LIBRARY ON THE NEXT RTGEN.
LOAD SPLUM AS A DISC RESIDENT OR CORE RESIDENT FOREGROUND PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
NORMAL CONFIGURATION IS TO HOLD SPOOL FILES UNTIL CLOSED. THIS PREVENTS
SLOW RUNNING PROGRAMS FROM TYING UP THE SPOOLED LOGICAL UNIT.
LINE 331 "DFLAG OCT 413" MAY BE CHANGED TO "DFLAG OCT 411" IF IT IS
DESIRED TO START THE OUT SPOOLS IMMEDIATELY AND NOT HOLD THEM UNTIL
THEY ARE CLOSED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
"FMGR OPEN ERROR 6 IN FILE JOBFIL" - YOU FORGOT TO INITIALIZE SPOOLING
VIA GASP.
"SPOOL FILE DID NOT SET UP!" - LOGICAL UNIT WAS NOT SET UP AS A SPOOL
LOGICAL UNIT BY GASP.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IFMGR - FILE MANAGER ERROR REPORTING FUNCTION. ENCLOSED WITH PACKAGE.
VERY HANDY - SEE ITS LISTING FOR OTHER GENERAL USES.
E05701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
12 X 12 CHARACTER GENERATOR SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
CHARACTER LABEL FORMATTING
DISPLAY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS-M DOS-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
MINIMUM 2K FOR SUBROUTINE
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE 12 X 12 CHARACTER GENERATOR ALLOWS THE USER TO CREATE BLOCK LETTERS
FROM THE FOLLOWING CHARACTER SET:
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789$#:"/+!'()*?.-%\^[]
THE SUBROUTINE IS CALLED WITH THE DESIRED CHARACTER, A 12 X 12 MATRIX,
AND THE DESIRED PATTERN CHARACTER. THE MATRIX IS THEN FILLED IN AI
FORMAT, WITH THE DESIRED CHARACTER USING THE PATTERN CHARACTER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD COMPILE AND LOAD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TO CALL THE PROGRAM IN FORTRAN:
CALL CHAR (LETTER,MATRIX,OK,PATTERN)
WHERE:
LETTER - DESIRED CHARACTER IN "AI" FORMAT
MATRIX - 12 BY 12 INTEGER MATRIX OR EQUIVALENT
OK - ERROR/SUCCESS INDICATOR - SEE 4.4
PATTRN - THE LETTER THAT IS USED TO CREATE THE BLOCK
CHARACTER. (IN "AI" FORMAT)
NOTE: ALL VARIABLES ARE INTEGER.
EXAMPLE:
CALL CHAR (IHA,MATRIX,OK,IH$)
MATRIX WILL CONTAIN THE LETTER "A". THE BLOCK LETTER
"A" IS MADE UP OF SPACES AND DOLLAR SIGNS.
UPON RETURN, "OK" WILL EQUAL I SINCE "A" IS A VALID
CHARACTER.
TO CALL THE PROGRAM IN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE:
JSB CHAR
DEF *+5
DEF LETTER ADDRESS OF DESIRED CHARACTER - AI FORMAT
DEF MATRIX ADDRESS OF 12 BY 12 MATRIX
DEF OK ADDRESS OF ERROR/SUCCESS INDICATOR
DEF PATTERN ADDRESS OF PATTERN CHARACTER - AI FORMAT
(NORMAL RETURN)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE SUBROUTINE IS CALLED WITH THE INTEGER VARIABLE "OK".
UPON RETURN,
OK EQUALS I; NORMAL RETURN
OK EQUALS O; ILLEGAL CHARACTER REQUESTED. THE
MATRIX IS FILLED WITH SPACES.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
NONE (JUST A CORE HOG)
E05801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PROGRAMMING FOR HP2645 TERMINAL SOFTKEYS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
SOFTKEYS TERMINAL DISPLAY
FORMATTING
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
JKEYS OPERATES INTERACTIVELY, PROMPTING AND RECEIVING FROM THE OPERATOR
THE DATA REQUIRED TO CREATE OR EDIT A DISC FILE CONTAINING PROGRAMMING
INFORMATION FOR HP2645 TERMINAL (SOFTKEYS).
DUMPING THE FILE (:DU, FMGR COMMAND) TO A 2645:
A. PROGRAMS THE 8 SOFT KEYS AS SPECIFIED.
B. WRITES A (MENU) ACROSS THE TOP OF THE CRT SCREEN, IN A PROTECTED
FIELD, USING INVERSE VIDEO CAPABILITIES OF THE TERMINAL.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: MINIMAL RTE-II/III OPERATING SYSTEM WITH 2645
TERMINAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
JKEYS AND COLON ARE COMPILED AND LOADED SAME AS ANY RTE BACKGROUND DISC-
RESIDENT PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
- ENTERING A "/A" AT MOST PROMPTS RESULTS IN CLEAN UP AND TERMINATION.
- WHEN UPDATING, DEFAULT INPUT (SPACE, RETURN) LEAVES CURRENT VALUES
UNCHANGED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E05901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
21MX MICROCODED .PACK AND .FLUN
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
MICROCODE
**LANGUAGES:
MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
21 MX
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THESE TWO ROUTINES ARE DIRECT REPLACEMENTS FOR THE STANDARD LIBRARY
SUBROUTINES. A TOTAL OF 17 WORDS OF MICROCODE REPLACES MORE THAN 100
WORDS OF ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE A 21MX CPU AND USER CONTROL STORE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
REFER TO 21MX MICROPROGRAMMING MANUAL FOR DIRECTIONS IN THE USE OF
MICROASSEMBLER AND MICRODEBUG.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
REFER TO 21MX MICROPROGRAMMING MANUAL FOR DIRECTIONS IN THE USE OF
MICROASSEMBLER AND MICRODEBUG.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
.PACK USES SOME OF THE CODE IN THE STANDARD 21MX CONTROL STORE.
THE TEST PROGRAMS WERE RUN WITH 21MX MICRO DEBUG EDITOR ON A DOS-II
SYSTEM. IF THIS MICROCODE IS INSTALLED IN A MODULE OTHER THAN 12 OR IF
THE JMP TABLE IS MODIFIED, THE OP CODES IN THE TEST PROGRAMS MUST BE
CHANGED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
TEST PROGRAMS HALT IF MICROCODE RESULTS DO NO AGREE WITH LIBRARY
SUBROUTINE RESULTS.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E06001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TIMES
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TIME AND DATE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TIME DATE
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
RTE-II
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM TIMES PROVIDES AN EASY METHOD TO SET THE RTE SYSTEM DATE AND
TIME AND TO AUTOMATICALLY SCHEDULE PROGRAMS.
TIME PRINTS THE CURRENT DATE AND TIME AND THEN REQUESTS THE OPERATOR
TO ENTER THE DATE AND TIME. IF THE DATE AND TIME ARE CORRECT, THE
OPERATOR MERELY PRESSES THE RETURN KEY. IF THEY ARE INCORRECT, THE
OPERATOR MAY ENTER THE CORRECT DATE AND TIME IN ANY OF THE FOLLOWING
FORMATS OR COMBINATIONS THEREOF. FORMAT EXAMPLES ARE FOR MARCH 10, 1977
2:15:20 P.M.
FORMAT EXAMPLES
3/10/77 14:15:20
MAR 10,1977 14,15,20
MARCH 10,77 14:15,20
3/10/1977,14,15,20
3,10,77,14,15,20
ETC.
PROGRAM TIME WILL THEN UPDATE THE SYSTEM CLOCK AND SCHEDULE (PLACE IN
THE TIME LIST) ANY PROGRAMS CONTAINED IN A TYPE 4 FMGR FILE NAMED PSHED.
IF AN ABSOLUTE STARTING TIME IS NOT SPECIFIED FOR A PROGRAM, THEN IT
WILL BE SCHEDULED TO START AT THE NEXT RESOLUTION CODE MULTIPLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
ON,TIME,LU OR :RU,TIME,OG
WHERE LU = LOGICAL UNIT OF OPERATOR'S CONSOLE.
NOTE: TIME MAY BE INCLUDED IN THE "WELCOM" FILE.
CALL DATE (ITIME)
WHERE ITIME IS A 7 WORD INTEGER BUFFER. SEE LISTING FOR FORMAT.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SUBROUTINE DATE RETURNS THE MONTH, DAY, YEAR, HOUR, MINUTE, AND SECOND
TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. DATE CALLS THE SYSTEM CLOCK AND CONVERTS IT TO
THE FOLLOWING ARRAY FORMAT.
WORDS FORMAT
1 & 2 ASCII MONTH
3 INTEGER DAY
4 INTEGER YEAR
5 INTEGER HOUR
6 INTEGER MINUTE
7 INTEGER SECOND
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E06101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
21MX EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET SIMULATOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
SIMULATOR
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE BCS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS GROUP OF SUBROUTINES SIMULATES ALL BIT, BYTE, WORD, AND INDEX
INSTRUCTIONS OF THE 21MX. THE CALLING SEQUENCE AND RESULTS ARE
IDENTICAL. THESE ROUTINES MAKE THE COMPLETE LINE OF 21XX COMPUTERS
DOWNWARD COMPATIBLE. TOTAL MEMORY REQUIRED APPROXIMATELY 500 WORDS.
SEE 21MX COMPUTER SERIES REFERENCE MANUAL, #02108-90002.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USE IN ADDITION TO REGULAR LIBRARY.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
USE IN ADDITION TO REGULAR LIBRARY.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
NONE
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
NONE
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E06201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SYSTK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTER-TTY MESSAGE PROCESSOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL TEXT MULTITERMINAL
MESSAGE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
ENABLES MESSAGE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TWO TERMINALS IN A MTM EN-
VIRONMENT. UP TO 10/80 CHARACTER MESSAGE LINES MAY BE SENT FROM ONE
TERMINAL TO ANOTHER. CONTROL MAY BE MAINTAINED AT ONE TERMINAL OR
PASSED ALONG WITH/OR WITHOUT A MESSAGE TO THE SECOND TERMINAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD SYSTK AS FOREGROUND DISC OR CORE RESIDENT - 2 PAGES REQURED.
:RU,LOADR,99,,009,,
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
FUNCTIONS ARE DETERMINED THROUGH 4 COMMANDS PRECEEDED BY A PROGRAM
PROMPT (?):
1. TEST - READ THE CURRENT CONTROL TTY'S MESSAGE (?? AT THE START OF
A LINE RETURNS TO PROMPT OR 10 LINES, WHICHEVER COMES FIRST)
2. SEND - OUTPUT THE CURRENT MESSAGE BUFFER AND RETAIN CONTROL.
3. GIVE - OUTPUT THE CURRENT MESSAGE BUFFER (IF ANY) AND PASS CONTROL
TO NEXT USER.
4. END - TERMINATE SYSTK
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
INVALID COMMANDS PASS CONTROL TO PROMPT CHARACTER (?)
**MISCELLANEOUS:
NO MORE THAN 10 LINES OF TEXT AT ONE PASS.
E06301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: UPIT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
UPIT - RTE DEVICE LOGICAL UNIT UP ROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
STATUS SCHEDULING MONITOR
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
ALLOWS THE RTE USER TO ENSURE THAT A RANGE OF DEVICE LU'S ARE
ALWAYS UP. IT CAN BE TIME-SCHEDULED OR SCHEDULED ONCE. IT COULD BE
CALLED A LINE MONITOR. THE ROUTINE IS OPTIMIZED FOR REAL-TIME AND
REQUIRES LITTLE RESOURCES OF RTE. THIS ROUTINE IS A MUST IF YOU CANNOT
AFFORD OPERATOR INTERVENTION SIMPLY TO MAKE A DEVICE AVAILABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: UPIT SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
NORMAL LOAD
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,UPIT,START-LU,END-LU
FOR TIME SCHEDULE, ENTER: IT,UPIT,RES,MULT,HR,MIN,SEC,MS
ON,UPIT,NOW,START-LU,END-LU
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
NO PRINTABLE MESSAGES
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E06401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE READABLE PUNCH ROUTINE WITH SYSTEM DATE AND TIME
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TIME DATE PAPER TAPE
LABEL
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
RDBLP - DOES A LOOK-UP TABLE CONVERSION OF AN ASCII INPUT BUFFER
TO A BINARY OUTPUT BUFFER. THE WORDS IN THE OUTPUT BUFFER ARE
READABLE CHARACTERS WHEN PUNCHED ON PAPER TAPE. CONVERTS 64
CHARACTER ASCII SUBSET OF UPPER CASE,NUMERALS, AND SYMBOLS.
JULIA/JULIS - RETURNS SYSTEM TIME AS A STRING:
FORMAT---- JULIA JULIS
1234 10DEC77 01:23:15 25JAN77
THE DAY OF THE MONTH IS RETURNED IN THE A-REGISTER AND THE
MONTH IN THE B-REGISTER.
TITLE - PUTS A READABLE TITLE, OPTIONALLY CONTAINING THE TIME/
DATE, ON A PAPER TAPE. THE INPUT IS EITHER FROM THE RUN STRING
IN THE SCHEDULE CALL, OR INTERACTIVELY FROM A TERMINAL. FOR
REFERENCE, SEE NATIONAL SEMICONDUCTOR MM4240AA ROM DATA SHEET.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE RDBLP AND SAVE RELOCATABLE.
ASSEMBLE AND SAVE AS RELOCATABLE. PUT THE RELOCATABLE IN THE
LIBRARY AT GENERATION OR MOVE IT INTO L.G. AT LOAD.
ENTRIES : JULIA OR JULIS (ASSEMBLY OPTION)
EXTERNALS: EXEC, .ENTR
ASSEMBLE, TITLE, AND LOAD ALONG WITH %JULIA AND %RDBLP.
:RU,TITLE,-1,TI,STRING ------
PUTS THE STRING IN READABLE FORM ON THE PAPER TAPE, FOLLOWED BY
THE SYSTEM TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
JULIA/JULIS INCLUDED AS COMMENT IN SOURCE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
21MX OR 21MX-E
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. RDBLP OUTPUT BUFFER MUST BE 6 TIMES THE LENGTH OF THE INPUT
BUFFER.
2. USER MUST PROVIDE A BUFFER OF:
6 WORDS (12 CHAR) FOR JULIA OR
8 WORDS (16 CHAR) FOR JULIS
3. TITLE ASSUMES TAPE PUNCH IS LU 4.
E06501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: IDLE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
IDLE - RTE SYSTEM ACTIVITY VISUALIZER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PERFORMANCE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
26 DECIMAL WORDS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM RUNS WITH THE LOWEST PRIORITY FOR PURPOSES OF VISUALLY
INDICATING HOW BUSY THE SYSTEM IS. THE SWITCH REGISTER IS USED FOR
GIVING A ROCKING EFFECT OF ACTIVITY. THE PROGRAM IS ONLY 26 DECIMAL
WORDS LONG AND CAN BE PUT MEMORY RESIDENT INTO THE SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE AND CREATE A RELOCATABLE FILE. PUT IN, IN PROGRAM PHASE
DURING SYSTEM GENERATION TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO EXECUTE: ON,IDLE[,BIT PATTERN[,COUNT]]
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
NONE - THE SWITCH REGISTER IS USED AS A CONTINOUS OUTPUT DEVICE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E06601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DBLIST
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE-II/III DBLIST - IMAGE DATA BASE INFORMATION LISTER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
IMAGE DATA BASE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SHORT PROGRAM ALLOWS THE IMAGE USER TO LIST INFORMATION ABOUT
ALL DATA SETS OF ANY GIVEN DATA BASE. THE OUTPUT CONSISTS OF A NICE
COMPACT TABLE INDICATING THE SET, ENTRY, FMP BLOCKS, NAME, TYPE,
CAPACITY, RECORD LENGTH, AND TOTAL NUMBER OF FMP BLOCKS REQUIRED. THE
OUTPUT LISTING CAN BE DIRECTED TO ANY OUTPUT DEVICE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO EXECUTE ENTER: RU,DBLIST[,LIST LU]
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
/DBLST: DBOPN ERROR N -DATA BASE COULD NOT BE OPENED.
/DBLST: DBCLS ERROR N -DATA BASE COULD NOT BE CLOSED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E06701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PWCP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE-II/III PROM WRITER CONTROL PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PROM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS TO BURN PROM ON THE HP 12909B PROM WRITER UNDER
RTE II/III SYSTEM.
THE PROM MASK TAPE MUST BE IN A FMGR FILE (ASCII), ONE FILE PER MASK
TAPE, OR ON PAPER TAPE BUT IN THAT CASE THE USER MUST CREATE A TYPE O
FILE FOR THE PAPER TAPE READER.
REFER TO PROM WRITER OPERATING AND REFERENCE MANUAL (PN 12909-90009)
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
ALL ACTIVITIES ON THE SYSTEM MUST BE STOPPED BECAUSE THE PROGRAM TURNS
OFF THE MEMORY PROTECT AND THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM.
TO RUN THE PROGRAM THE USER TYPES:
*RU,PWCP
AT THAT POINT PWCP WILL REQUEST SOME INITIAL PARAMETERS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
:RU,PWCP
PROM WRITER CONTROL PROGRAM
TYPE SC OF PROM WRITER CARD? 25
PROM BURN PARAMETERS
CHIP INITIAL STATE (0 OR 1)? 1
MINIMUM BURN TIME (MILLISECONDS)? 1
MAXIMUM BURN TIME (MILLISECONDS)? 21
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF RETRIES? 5
WAIT TIME RATIO? 10
TIMING CONSTANT? 220
COMMAND?
LOAD
TYPE FILENAME?
MCARD:RT:-2
ID LINE 1 THREE LINES FOR THE TAPE IDENTIFICATION
ID LINE 2
ID LINE 3
456 CHECKSUM
COMMAND?
VFILE
CONTENTS VERIFIED O-K
COMMAND?
VCHIP
CHIP READY
COMMAND?
BURN
CHIP PROGRAMMING COMPLETED
COMMAND?
VBURN
CHIP CONTENTS VERIFIED O-K
COMMAND?
STOP
END OF PROGRAM
TEST:
INSTALL THE TEST PROM (PN 12909-90009) WHICH IS PART OF THE PROM
WRITER KIT.
RUN PWCP, AND AFTER THE REPLIES FOR INITIAL PARMETERS PWCP
WILL TYPE:
COMMAND?
CREAD THAT LOAD THE CONTENT OF THE PROM INTO THE MEMORY BUFFER
COMMAND?
SHOW
ON WHICH LU?
6 DISPLAYS THE BUFFER CONTENTS ON THE L.P.
COMMAND?
PTAPE
PUNCH LU?
4 PUNCHES A MASK TAPE FROM THE MAIN MEMORY BUFFER.
COMMAND?
LOAD
TYPE FILENAME?
PR PR IS A 0 TYPE FILE FOR THE PAPER TAPE READER
COMMAND?
SHOW
ON WHICH LU?
6 DISPLAYS THE BUFFER CONTENTS ON THE L.P. AND THE PRINTOUT MUST
BE THE SAME AS THE FIRST ONE, AND MUST AGREE WITH THE LISTING
BELOW.
COMMAND?
STOP
END OF PROGRAM
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
REFER PROM WRITER OPERATING AND REFERENCE MANUAL (PN 12909-90009)
PAGE 5-1.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALL ACTIVITIES ON THE RTE SYSTEM MUST BE STOPPED BEFORE RUNNING PWCP
FOR BURNING PROM.
E06801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ABDMP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ABORTING PROGRAM FREEZER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DUMP DEBUG
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE ALLOWS YOU TO FIX UP RTE SO THAT IT WILL "FREEZE" THE
PROGRAM IN ITS PARTITION AND DUMP THE PROGRAM TO SOME DEVICE FOR
ANALYSIS, OR, BETTER YET, USE A DEBUGGING UTILITY TO DETERMINE WHAT IT
WAS DOING, WITHOUT HAVING TO DECODE INSTRUCTIONS. THE MAIN PROGRAM
IS ABDMP. YOU RUN IT, AND SPECIFY THE NAME OF ONE OR MORE PROGRAMS
WHICH ARE TO BE "FROZEN" FOR YOUR EXAMINATION, SHOULD THEY BE ABORTED
BY RTE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SPATC MUST BE GENERATED INTO THE SYSTEM TABLE AREA I. COMPILE AND
ASSEMBLE THE OTHERS (ABDMP, ABRSV, DMPRN, CMDIN, MSGFR) AND LOAD THEM
ON-LINE (MAY BE GENERATED INTO SYSTEM, IF THERE ARE NO ENTRY-POINT
CONFLICTS). PROGRAM MUST BE BACKGROUND DIS-RESIDENT, TYPE 3.
ASSEMBLE AND LOAD THE TEST PROGRAM (TEST). RUN ABDMP, ADD PROGRAM
TEST TO ITS LIST. EXIT ABDMP.
SET TESTS "BREAK" BIT (*BR,TEST)
ABDMP WILL BE SCHEDULED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
REQUIRES RTE-IV DBUGR MODULE.
E06901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MTMXX
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE-II/III MULTI-TERMINAL PROGRAM DEVELOPMENTS & EXECUTION INTERFACE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
MULTITERMINAL MULTIPROGRAM SPOOLING
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE RTE-II/III MULTI-TERMINAL (MTMXX) PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT INTERFACE
ESTABLISHES A TRUE MULTI-TERMINAL, MULTI-PROGRAM DEVELOPMENT AND EX-
ECUTION ENVIRONMENT WITH AUTOMATIC SPOOLING. THAT IS LS/LG BOTTLENECKS
ARE ELIMINATED AND ANY LISTINGS, REPORTS, ETC., CONTENDING FOR THE SAME
PERIPHERALS ARE AUTOMATICALLY SPOOLED INSTEAD OF INTERLEAVED. FURTHER-
MORE, NO COOPERATION IS REQUIRED AMONG USERS THAT ARE EDITING, COM-
PILING LOADING AND EXECUTING PROGRAMS CONCURRENTLY. (MTMXX), ASSEMBLES
/COMPILES PROGRAMS EITHER FROM LOGICAL UNITS AND/OR FILES. LISTINGS
AND THE OBJECT CODE MAY BE DIRECTED TO EITHER LOGICAL UNITS OR FILES.
IF AN OUTPUT LOGICAL UNIT IS A SPOOLED DEVICE, A SPOOL POOL FILE IS
AUTOMATICALLY SET-UP. THE SPOOL FILE IS CLOSED AND PASSED AT THE END
OF THE OPERATION. IN THE CASE OF OUTPUT FILES, DUPLICATE FILES ARE
PURGED AND RECREATED. IF THE FILE DOES NOT EXIST IT WILL BE CREATED.
MTMXX LOADS PROGRAMS FROM LOGICAL UNIT DEVICES AND/OR FILES AND THEN
PERFORMS A LIBRARY SEARCH. BOTH COMPILE AND LOAD OPERATIONS MAY BE
FROM MULTIPLE FILES AND/OR LOGICAL UNITS. IN THE CASE OF MULTIPLE
SOURCES, TAPE NUMBERS WILL IDENTIFY EACH SOURCE IN THE LISTING.
STANDARD NAMR PARAMETERS ARE USED FOR FILE NAMES I.E., NAME:SC:C#.
ALL MESSAGES ARE DIRECTED TO THE USER'S CONSOLE INSTEAD OF THE SYSTEM
CONSOLE, I.E., LOADER UNDEFINED EXTERNALS, NO SOURCE, ETC.,.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. EDIT LIBRARY ROUTINE MTMRN LINE #3 FOR THE PROPER PROGRAM TYPE.
I.E., TYPE 14 FOR RTE II OR TYPE 30 FOR RTE III.
2. COMPILE AND ASSEMBLE ALL SOURCES. NOTE: THE SPECIAL RTE II AND III
LOADERS ARE PROVIDED IN RELOCATABLE FORM.
3. GENERATE A NEW SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES MTMRN AS A MEMORY RESIDENT,
SPULU AND SPLOT AS LIBRARY ROUTINES AND THE SPECIAL LOADER IN LIEU
OF THE STANDARD RTE LOADER. MTMXX REQUIRES 10 RESOURCE NUMBERS.
BE SURE TO INCLUDE ENOUGH RESOURCE NUMBERS IN THE GENERATION AND
ENOUGH SPOOL LOGICAL UNITS TO HANDLE YOUR TERMINALS. YOU WILL
REQUIRE AT LEAST TWO SPOOL LOGICAL UNITS PER TERMINAL.
4. LOAD MTMXX AND ITS SUPPORTING SUBROUTINES ON-LINE AS A TEMPORARY
BACKGROUND PROGRAM.
5. SAVE MTMXX, OFF MTMXX, MAKE MULTIPLE COPIES OF MTMXX AND CREATE THE
TRANSFER FILES AS OUTLINED IN MTMXX'S LISTING.
6. RUN GASP AND INITIALIZED SPOOLING. AS A RULE OF THUMB, USE TWO
SPOOL POOL FILES PER TERMINAL.
7
. FOR 2645/2648 TERMINALS USE THE "KEYS" PROGRAM TO CREATE SOFTKEY
"DUMP" FILES. THESE FILES CAN THEN BE INCLUDED IN "DO" COMMANDS
IN THE WELCOM FILE. SUGGESTED SOFTKEY SET-UP IS:
RU,ALGXX RU,ASBXX RU,BSCXX RU,EDRXX
RU,FTNXX RU,FMGXX RU,LDRXX EX
WHERE XX = THE LOCAL TERMINAL LOGICAL UNIT.
SUGGESTED SOFTKEY LABELING IS:
ALGOL ASSEMBLER BASIC EDITOR
FORTRAN FMGR LOADER EXIT
8
. ESTABLISH THE FOLLOWING GROUND RULES:
A. ALL USERS MUST RUN FROM THEIR OWN COPY OF THE FILE MANAGER.
B. ALL USER PROGRAMS UTILIZING COMMON OUTPUT PERIPHERALS
(I.E. LINE PRINTER, PAPER TAPE PUNCH, ETC.) MUST MAKE CALLS
TO SPOLU AND SPLOT FOR SPOOLING. SEE SPOLU AND SPLOT LISTINGS
FOR CALLING SEQUENCE.
C. ALL USERS, WHERE POSSIBLE, LOAD THEIR PROGRAMS AS TEMPORARY, DO
A FMGR SAVE AND THEN AN "OF,PROG". THIS WILL SAVE ID SEGMENTS.
9. CREATE TRANSFER FILES TO MAKE MULTIPLE COPIES OF THE EDITOR, BASIC
MAIN, QUERY MAIN, ETC., AS REQUIRED FOR YOUR SYSTEM CONFIGURATION.
10.SAVE A COPY OF ALL THE ABOVE WORK AND FILES ON A GENERATION
CARTRIDGE AND MAKE-UP A TRANSFER FILE SO THAT YOU DON'T HAVE TO
DO IT ALL MANUALLY AGAIN AT YOUR NEXT GENERATION.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SHOULD HAVE A GOOD WORKING KNOWLEDGE OF THE BATCH-SPOOL MONITOR AND
TRANSFER FILES IN ORDER TO IMPLEMENT.
ASSEMBLER AND COMPILER CONTROL STATEMENTS MUST CONTAIN THE "B" OPTION
IN ORDER TO PRODUCE RELOCATABLE CODE.
E07001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
STATUS DECODING FUNCTIONS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
STATUS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THESE 4 SUBPROGRAMS TEST THE STATUS OF A LOGICAL UNIT FOR END OF FILE.
END OF MEDIUM, AND ERROR CONDITIONS. THEY CAN BE CALLED AS LOGICAL
FUNCTIONS.
SEE RTE III SOFTWARE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING MANUAL,
MARCH 1977, PG 3-17.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
FOR GENERALITY, THE END, ERR, AND EOT ROUTINES CONTAIN MASKS FOR ALL
64 POSSIBLE DRIVERS. MOST INSTRUMENT DRIVERS DO NOT RETURN A STATUS
CODE, HOWEVER. THE EXTRA MASKS CAN BE DELETED TO MAKE THE ROUTINES
SHORTER. IF THIS IS DONE, A TEST SHOULD BE INSERTED AT AROUND LINE 19
OF THE SOURCE CODE TO DETECT INQUIRIES FOR THE UNUSED DRIVERS AND TO
RETURN .FALSE. FOR THESE CALLS.
THE MASKS ARE BASED ON THE CODES LISTED IN THE REAL TIME EXECUTIVE III
SOFTWARE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING MANUAL, MARCH 1977, PG 3-17
THE TEST PROGRAM ET SHOULD BE RUN WITH A VARIETY OF LOGICAL UNITS.
ANY PROBLEMS WILL PROBABLY BE DUE TO AN INCORRECT MASK FOR THE SPECIFIC
EQUIPMENT BEING USED. IT IS DIFFICULT TO SIMULATE AN I/O ERROR TO
TEST THE ERR ROUTINE. PROGRAM ET CAN TELL YOU THAT AN ERROR INDICATION
IS NOT GIVEN WHEN NO ERROR EXISTS, HOWEVER. PROGRAM SPET IS SET UP TO
READ THE &SPEND SOURCE FILE FROM THE DISC. (SEE THE COMMENTS IN
&SPEND.)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THE TEST PROGRAMS WRITE THEIR OUTPUT TO LOGICAL UNIT 1. THE EXAMPLES
SHOW NORMAL OUTPUT WITH A PAPER TAPE SOURCE FILE FOR INPUT TO PROGRAM
ET AND WITH A DISC SOURCE FILE FOR SPOOL INPUT TO PROGRAM SPET.
:RU,ET
EOF AT RECORD 205
EOT AT RECORD 205
EQT5 IS 000440
RECORD NUMBER IS 205
:RU,SPET
EOF AT RECORD 27
EXIT AT RECORD NUMBER 27
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. CALLING SEQUENCE:
END, ERR, EOT, AND SPEND ARE ALL LOGICAL FUNCTIONS AND MUST BE
DECLARED AS LOGICAL IN FORTRAN OR BOOLEAN IN ALGOL.
LOGICAL L,END,ERR,EOT,SPEND
C...TEST FOR END OF FILE ON LU
L=END(LU)
C...TEST FOR ERROR ON LU
L=ERR(LU)
C...TEST FOR END OF MEDIUM ON LU
L=EOT(LU)
C...TEST FOR END OF SPOOL FILE
L=SPEND(LUSP)
2. ARGUMENTS:
IN THE ABOVE EXAMPLE, LU IS THE NUMBER OF THE LOGICAL UNIT TO BE
TESTED. THE SPEND FUNCTION TESTS FOR END OF FILE ON A SPOOL LOGICAL
UNIT, SHOWN AS LUSP IN THE EXAMPLE.
3. THE FOLLOWING TABLE SHOWS HOW THE END, ERR AND IOT ROUTINES WORK WITH
THE VARIOUS DRIVERS USING THE MASKS SUPPLIED. IF THE LU HAS A DRIVER
OTHER THAN THOSE SHOWN, THE ROUTINES ALL RETURN .FALSE. FOR ALL CON-
DITIONS ON THE LU. AN X IN THE TABLE SHOWS THE TEST IS MADE; A -
SHOWS THAT NO TEST IS MADE AND THE ROUTINE ALWAYS RETURNS .FALSE.
FOR THAT DRIVER.
DVR END ERR EOT
00 NOTE 1 - X
01 NOTE 1 - X
02 NOTE 1 - X
05 TERMINAL NOTE 2 - NOTE 2
05 TAPE X X X
11 NOTE 3 X NOTE 3
15 X X NOTE 4
22 X X X
23 X X X
24 X X X
30 - X -
31 - X NOTE 5
32 - X -
37 - X -
NOTES:
1. END OF TAPE SETS .TRUE.
2. CONTROL D SETS .TRUE.
3. HOPPER EMPTY SETS .TRUE
4. HOPPER EMPTY OR STACKER FULL SETS .TRUE.
5. END OF TRACK SETS .TRUE.
4. SPOOL FILES USE THE EQT TABLE DIFFERENTLY THAN ORDINARY LOGICAL
UNITS. THE FUNCTION SPEND TESTS THE END OF FILE FLAG IN THE EX-
TENSION OF A SPOOL EQT ENTRY. IT SHOULD BE USED INSTEAD OF END
FOR SPOOL LOGICAL UNITS.
5. THESE ROUTINES MAY BE USED AT ANY POINT IN A PROGRAM. THEY DO NOT
HAVE TO BE ADJACENT TO THE I/O CALL, AND MORE THAN 1 TEST CAN BE
MADE ON A DEVICE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E07101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TMSHR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE PROGRAM TIME-SHARE PROCESSOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PERFORMANCE TIME MULTIPROGRAM
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE RTE USER TO TIME-SHARE UP TO 64 COMPUTE-BOUND
PROGRAMS, I.E. IT SERVES AS AN ON-LINE REAL-TIME EXECUTION MONITOR.
THE USER RUNS THE PROGRAM WITH THE RU OR ON COMMAND TO PASS IT CON-
FIGURATION INFORMATION OR PLACE IT IN THE TIME-LIST FOR PERIODIC EX-
ECUTION TO PERFORM THE TIME-SHARING FUNCTION RESPECTIVELY. WHILE IN
TIME-SHARE MODE OF OPERATION, THE PROGRAM TIME-SLICES PROGRAM EXECUTION
OF ALL ENTERED PROGRAM NAMES ACCORDING TO EACH PROGRAM'S CONFIGURATION
INFORMATION. THE PROGRAM TAKES ONLY 2K WORDS OF MEMORY AND CAN RUN IN
ANY AREA OF RTE, ALTHOUGH MEMORY RESIDENT IS SUGGESTED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMPILE WITH FORTRAN IV COMPILER AND CREATE RELOCATABLE MODULE:
RTE-III RTE-IV
:MS,&TMSHR :RU,FTN4,&TMSHR,6,-
:LG,1
:RU,FTN4,2,99
2. PROGRAM IS DISTRIBUTED AS RT DISC RESIDENT WITH PRIORITY OF 25.
YOU MIGHT WISH TO CHANGE BEFORE STEP 1 IS DONE.
3. LOAD WITH APPROPRIATE LOADR. NO SPECIAL LIBRARIES, ETC. REQUIRED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN, ENTER THE FOLLOWING:
CONFIGURATION MODE
RU,TMSHR,PR[,OG][,A][,NTIME][,LUN]
PR,OG,A ----------NAME OF RTE PROGRAM TO ENTER INTO TIME-SHARE
TABLE
NTIME-------------NUMBER OF TIMES A PROGRAM CAN BE CAUGHT AT THE
TOP OF THE SCHEDULED LIST BEFORE SUSPENDED
AND FORCED TO THE BOTTOM OF THE LIST.
LUN---------------LUN FOR MY ERROR REPORTING
PRINT STATUS MODE
RU,TMSHR,-N
-N ---------------ANY NEGATIVE NUMBER PRINTS ALL TIME-SHARE
PROGRAM ENTRIES AND THE CURRENT TIME-SHARE
STATUS. SEE EXAMPLE INPUT/OUTPUT.
TIME-SHARE MODE
*IT,TMSHR, RESOLUTION, MULTIPLE
*ON,TMSHR, NOW
THIS INITIATES PROGRAM TIME-SHARING. RECALL, AN RTE RU COMMAND
WITH AND FIRST PARAMETER NEGATIVE PRINTS STATUS (SEE ABOVE).
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
?? -------- PROGRAM NAME NOT DEFINED
NONE------- NO PROGRAMS TO TIME-SHARE
FULL ------ TIME-SHARE TABLE FULL
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E07201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RTEM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTEM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION FILES BOOT-UP
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE PROGRAM RTEM CONVERTS A TYPE 7 FILE (ABSOLUTE BINARY) INTO A
TYPE 1 FILE WHICH IS A MEMORY IMAGE. IN ADDITION, IT SUPPLIES A BOOT-
STRAP IN THE FIRST RECORD SUCH THAT, IF THE TYPE 1 FILE BEGINS ON
CYLINDER 0, THEN THE MEMORY IMAGE MAY BE BOOTED INTO PHYSICAL MEMORY
WITH THE ROM BOOT (OR EQUIVALENT) SUPPLIED WITH THE HP-1000 SYSTEM.
THIS PROGRAM IS OF GREATEST USE IN DEVELOPING APPLICATIONS (USING THE
RESOURCES OF A LARGE SYSTEM) WHICH WILL LATER BE TRANSPORTED TO A
MINIMAL HARDWARE CONFIGURATION. THE PROGRAM IS INTERACTIVE - THE ONLY
PARAMETER IN THE RU OR ON COMMAND IS THE TERMINAL LOGICAL UNIT, WHICH
WILL DEFAULT TO 1.
ONE WOULD NORMALLY USE THE HP PROGRAM RTMLG, A COMBINATION LOADER/
GENERATOR FOR RTE-M WHICH IS A PART OF DS-1000, PRODUCT 91740A.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
FMP ERRORS ARE REPORTED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
REMEMBER THAT THE ROM BOOT WILL WORK ONLY IF THE TYPE 1 FILE IS
INSTALLED AT CYLINDER ZERO AND THE STARTING HEAD IS NOT GREATER
THAN 3.
ANY HP-1000 SYSTEM WITH 7905, 7906, 7920, 7925 DISC.
E07301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TIME
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TIME
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TIME BOOT-UP DATE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
'TIME' IS A USER PROGRAM WRITTEN IN FORTRAN WHICH ACCESSES THE
59309A HP-IB CLOCK TO SET THE TIME IN AN RTE-M (II-III), RTE-II,
RTE-III, OR RTE-IV SYSTEM. THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF 'TIME' IS TO AUTO-
MATICALLY SET THE SYSTEM TIME IN THE WELCOM FILE DURING RTE BOOT-UP.
'TIME' IS FULLY DOCUMENTED IN APPLICATION NOTE 401-8,
((PART # 5959-2807(22))
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
'TIME' IS A USER PROGRAM WRITTEN IN FORTRAN WHICH ACCESSES THE
59309A HP-IB CLOCK TO SET THE TIME IN AN RTE-M (II AND III), RTE-II,
RTE-III, OR RTE-IV SYSTEM. ACTUALLY, FOUR COMMANDS CAN BE USED WHEN
THE PROGRAM IS RUN INTERACTIVELY: 'CS' ACCESSES THE CLOCK, OBTAINS THE
TIME AND SETS THE SYSTEM TIME; 'SC' OBTAINS THE SYSTEM TIME AND THEN
ACCESSES THE 59309A AND UPDATES IT; 'OS' ALLOWS AN OPERATOR AT A USER
TERMINAL TO UPDATE THE 59309A FROM THE PROGRAM (WITHOUT TOUCHING THE
CLOCK), SIMULTANEOUSLY THE SYSTEM TIME IS UPDATED. 'OC' IS SIMILAR
TO 'OS' EXCEPT THAT ONLY THE 59309A IS UPDATED.
THE PRIMARY PURPOSE OF 'TIME' IS TO AUTOMATICALLY SET THE SYSTEM TIME
IN THE WELCOM FILE DURING RTE BOOT-UP. SIMPLY ENTER:
"RU,TIME,1,1978,50
IF, 1) THE INPUT LU IS 1
2) THE YEAR IS 1978
3) THE 59309A LU IS 50
4) AND YOU WISH TO SET THE SYSTEM TIME (CS).
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
REQUIRES HP-IB 59309A HP CLOCK
E07401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TODAY
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TODAY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DATE TIME
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
"TODAY" SUBROUTINE PURPOSE IS:
TO BUILD CALLERS 14 WORD BUFFER INTO A DATE/TIME MESSAGE
IN THE FOLLOWING FORM:
"FRI 26 MAR 1976 18:24:30.9"
WHERE:
TODAY'S DATE IS FRIDAY, MARCH 26, 1976 AND THE TIME
IS 6:24 PM & 30.09 SECONDS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE COMMENTS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E07501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: POWER
**PROGRAM TITLE:
POWER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
SPOOLING PRINTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
POWER REQUIRES 7K CORE STORAGE
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
POWER WILL ADD VERSATILITY TO YOUR OUTSPOOL APPLICATIONS. POWER
OFFERS FORWARD AND BACKWARD POSITIONING, LINE AND PAGE COUNTS, MULTIPLE
COPIES, SPOOL OR STANDARD FORMAT, AND RUN COST BASED ON CPU TIME WHEN
THE STANDARD JOB HEADERS ARE PRESENT IN THE OUTSPOOL FILE.
POWER HAS MANY DEFINITE ADVANTAGES OVER GASP IN THAT SPOOLING CAN BE
SHUT DOWN AND POWER CAN HANDLE THE PRINTING. A FILE MAY BE RESTARTED
FROM ANY PAGE OR LINE IN THE EVENT OF PRINTER MALFUNCTION. THE FILE
REMAINS INTACT AFTER PRINTING UNTIL THE OPERATOR ISSUES THE "KS"
COMMAND.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CREATE AN OUTSPOOL FILE AND RUN POWER.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
POWER WILL ADD VERSATILITY TO YOUR OUTSPOOL APPLICATIONS. POWER
OFFERS FORWARD AND BACKWARD POSITIONING, LINE AND PAGE COUNTS, MULTIPLE
COPIES, SPOOL OR STANDARD FORMAT, AND RUN COST BASED ON CPU TIME WHEN
THE STANDARD JOB HEADERS ARE PRESENT IN THE OUTSPOOL FILE.
POWER HAS MANY DEFINITE ADVANTAGES OVER GASP IN THAT SPOOLING CAN BE
SHUT DOWN AND POWER CAN HANDLE THE PRINTING. A FILE MAY BE RESTARTED
FROM ANY PAGE OR LINE IN THE EVENT OF PRINTER MALFUNCTION. THE FILE
REMAINS INTACT AFTER PRINTING UNTIL THE OPERATOR ISSUES THE "KS"
COMMAND.
ALL I/O IS DONE THROUGH EXEC CALLS EXCEPT FOR THE MESSAGES TO THE
OPERATOR WHICH USE THE FORTRAN FORMATTER. POWER USES THE "@" AS A
PROMPT CHARACTER AND WHEN ?? IS ENTERED IT WILL LIST ALL AVAILABLE
FUNCTIONS.
POWER LOCKS THE LINE PRINTER WITH A CALL TO "LURQ" AND WILL RESPOND
TO THE BREAK FLAG WHILE PRINTING.
THE SOURCE FILE IS WELL COMMENTED GIVING THE USER EASY READING FOR
ON SITE MODIFICATIONS IF REQUIRED.
POWER REQUIRES 7K CORE STORAGE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL SPOOL ERROR MESSAGES AS WELL AS FILE MANAGER MESSAGES ARE DIRECTED
TO THE USER'S TERMINAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
REQUIRES LINE PRINTER AND 7905 DISC.
E07601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE/DOS FTN4 COMPILER WITH CROSS REFERENCE GENERATOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
COMPILE FORTRAN
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
10K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE RTE/DOS FORTRAN IV COMPILER (10K COMPILER AREA) WITH CROSS
REFERENCE GENERATOR IS ADAPTED FROM THE HP SUPPORTED RTE/DOS FORTRAN
IV COMPILER, HP PROGRAM NUMBER 24177B. IT COMPILES EXACTLY THE SAME
SOURCE CODE (AS SPECIFIED BY THE HP FORTRAN IV REFERENCE MANUAL) AND
PRODUCES EXACTLY THE SAME OBJECT CODE AS THE HP24177B COMPILER.
HOWEVER, THE PRESENCE OF A 'C' ON THE FTN4 (OR FTN) CONTROL STATEMENT
WILL CAUSE A CROSS REFERENCE LIST TO BE PRODUCED FOR EACH PROGRAM UNIT
(PROGRAM, SUBROUTINE, OR FUNCTION) IN THE COMPILATION. THE CROSS
REFERENCE LISTING SERVES AS A USEFUL PROGRAMMING AND DEBUGGING AID,
PARTICULARY IN ANALYZING LOGIC PATHS IN A PROGRAM. THIS VERSION OF THE
HP FORTRAN IV COMPILER GIVES FORTRAN IV PROGRAMMERS THE SAME TOOL
ALREADY AVAILABLE FOR HP ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMMERS.
THE HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ARE THE SAME AS FOR THE HP24177B COMPILER,
THAT IS, A DOS, DOS-M OR RTE CONFIGURATION WITH A MINIMUM 10K USER
AREA (DOS) OR BACKGROUND (RTE). THE COMPILER IS APPROXIMATELY 150 WORDS
LARGER THAN 24177B SINCE MOST OF THE PROGRAMMING IS IN THE ADDITIONAL
SEGMENT, F4.3. COMPILATION SPEED REMAINS THE SAME.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE MAIN PROGRAM FTN4. A SINGLE BINARY TAPE IS PRODUCED,
OF THE MAIN SIZE ABLE TO FIT IN THE PHOTOREADER HOPPER.
2. ASSEMBLE ALL FOUR SEGMENTS. ALL FOUR RELOCATABLE BINARY TAPES CAN
FIT TOGETHER ON ONE TAPE, WHICH WILL BE ABOUT THE SAME SIZE AS FOR
THE MAIN PROGRAM.
3. LOAD THE BINARIES IN THE USUAL WAY, MAIN FOLLOWED BY SEGMENTS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE YOUR FORTRAN IV PROGRAMS. A 'C' ON THE FTN4 OR FTN CONTROL
STATEMENT WILL PRODUCE THE CROSS REFERENCE LISTINGS. BECAUSE HP
FORTRAN II PROGRAMS CAN BE COMPILED BY THE FORTRAN IV COMPILER, IT IS
ALSO POSSIBLE TO PRODUCE CROSS REFERENCE LISTINGS FOR FORTRAN II
PROGRAMS. THE PRESENCE OF A 'C' ON THE FTN CONTRTOL STATEMENT IS
IGNORED BY THE FORTRAN II COMPILER, SO IT IS UNNECESSARY TO CHANGE
THE CONTROL STATEMENT WHEN SWITCHING BACK AND FORTH BETWEEN COMPILERS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
ANY FORTRAN OR FORTRAN IV PROGRAM CAN BE COMPILED AFTER LOADING THE
COMPILER TO SEE IF IT IS (FUNCTIONING PROPERLY).
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE CROSS REFERENCE LISTING IS THE LAST LISTING PRODUCED FOR EACH
PROGRAM UNIT'S COMPILATION. IT FOLLOWS ALL LISTINGS PRODUCED BY THE
'L', 'M', 'A', AND 'T' OPTIONS. CROSS REFERENCE INFORMATION, I.E. A
LIST OF ALL REFERENCES TO PROGRAM SYMBOLS, IS PRODUCED FOR ALL
STATEMENT NUMBERS, SIMPLE AND SUBSCRIPTED VARIABLES, SUBROUTINE AND
FUNCTION NAMES IN EACH PROGRAM UNIT.
EACH SYMBOL IS PRINTED FOLLOWED BY THE LINE NUMBERS IN WHICH IT OCCURS.
MULTIPLE REFERENCES TO A SYMBOL IN ONE LINE ARE ALL ACCOUNTED FOR IN
THE CROSS REFERENCE LISTING. STATEMENT LABELS ARE PRECEDED BY THE '@'
CHARACTER, AS IN THE SYMBOL TABLE LISTING.
UP TO EIGHT LINE NUMBERS ARE PRINTED PER LINE OF THE CROSS REFERENCE
LISTING. THEY ARE GENERALLY IN ASCENDING ORDER EXCEPT FOR OCCURENCES
IN EQUIVALENCE STATEMENTS. FOR EXAMPLE,
0099 COMMON N
0100 EQUIVALENCE (N(1),M(1))
0101 DIMENSION N(50),M(50)
0102 N(1) = 1
PRODUCES, FOR THE SYMBOL N, THE FOLLOWING CROSS REFERENCE INFORMATION:
N 0099 0101 0100 0102
THE ONLY "LIMITATION" ON THE CROSS REFERENCE GENERATOR'S CAPABILTIES
IS THAT CROSS REFERENCE INFORMATION IS PRODUCED FOR ONLY THE FIRST
275 LINES OF EQUIVALENCE STATEMENTS PER PROGRAM UNIT. SINCE THIS IS
OVER FIVE PAGES OF EQUIVALENCE STATEMENTS, THIS IS HARDLY A SERIOUS
LIMITATION. THE LIMIT OF 275 CAN BE INCREASED BY INCREASING THE SIZE
OF A TABLE IN SEGMENT F4.0, THEREBY INCREASING THE SIZE OF THE COMPILER.
LARGE CORE CONFIGURATION SYSTEMS (24-32K) CAN INCREASE THE SPEED OF
CROSS REFERENCE GENERATION FOR LARGE PROGRAMS. FOR EXAPLE, A CROSS
REFERENCE FOR A 2400 LINE PROGRAM WHICH WAS 35 PAGES LONG TOOK 12
MINUTES ON A 16K MACHINE BUT ONLY 3 MINUTES ON A 24K COMPUTER. THE
REASON IS THAT THE DISC IS NOT USED WHEN ENOUGH CORE IS AVAILABLE TO
HOLD THE NECESSARY TABLES. FOR MOST PROGRAMS, CROSS REFERENCE LISTINGS
ARE PRODUCED VERY QUICKLY, EVEN IN THE MINIMUM CORE CONFIGURATION.
IN ADDITION TO THE CROSS REFERENCE, THE COMPILER HAS BEEN MODIFIED TO
PRINT THE PROGRAM OBJECT CODE SIZE AND ITS COMMON BLOCK SIZE (IF ANY).
THEY ARE PRINTED ON THE SAME LINE WHERE THE NUMBER OF ERRORS IS
REPORTED, IN DECIMAL. THE FORM IS
**NO ERRORS* PROGRAM = XXXXX COMMON = YYYYY
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IN THE UNLIKELY EVENT THAT A PROGRAM IS TOO LARGE (I.E. HAS TOO MANY
SYMBOLS) TO HAVE A CROSS REFERENCE PRODUCED, THE MESSAGE
PROGRAM TOO LARGE - CROSS REFERENCE ABORTED
IS PRINTED AND THE COMPILER PROCEEDS TO THE NEXT SUBROUTINE. SINCE A
CROSS REFERENCE IS GUARANTEED FOR ALL PROGRAMS HAVING LESS THAN
APPROXIMATELY 2000 UNIQUE SYMBOLS IN THEM (AND AN UNLIMITED NUMBER OF
REFERENCES ON THESE) THIS MESSAGE SHOULD NEVER OCCUR SINCE THE
COMPILER WILL RUN OUT OF SYMBOL TABLE SPACE FIRST.
THE CROSS REFERENCE IS GUARANTEED COMPLETE AND ACCURATE FOR PROGRAMS
WHICH HAVE NO COMPILATION ERRORS. THE PRODUCTION OF CROSS REFERENCE
INFORMATION PROCEEDS ONLY AS FAR AS THE COMPILATION OF THAT LINE PRO-
CEEDS. IF THE COMPILATION OF A LINE IS TERMINATED BECAUSE OF A
"STATEMENT TERMINATED TYPE ERROR, THEN SYMBOLS WHICH ARE BEYOND THE
ERROR DETECTION POINT GENERALLY WILL NOT APPEAR IN THE LISTING.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
OBJECT CODE GENERATED BY BY THE COMPILER ALSO OPERATES ON BCS AND MTS,
IN ADDITION TO RTE, DOS, AND DOS-M.
E07701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: EXC
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTERCHANGE FORMAT PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
FLOPPY DISC DISC FORMATTING
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL WRITE A FILE TO A FLOPPY IN THE HP INTERCHANGE
FORMAT.
DATA IS READ FROM A NON-DISC DEVICE (SUCH AS MAG TAPE OR 2645 TAPE
CARTRIDGE). THE DATA MAY BE BLOCKED OR UNBLOCKED ON TAPE.
THE PROGRAM WILL CREATE A VOLUME LABEL AND DIRECTORY ON THE FLOPPY,
DE-BLOCK THE INPUT DATA IF REQUIRED AND WRITE THE RECORDS TO THE FLOPPY
IN THE INTERCHANGE FORMAT.
THIS PROGRAM DOES NOT READ THE INTERCHANGE FORMAT AT THIS TIME.
HOWEVER, I PLAN TO ADD THAT SOMETIME IN THE FUTURE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR MESSAGES ARE PRINTED FOR I/O ERRORS
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THIS IMPLEMENTATION OF THE HP INTERCHANGE FORMAT IS A SUB-SET OF THE
STANDARD, I.E. IT ALLOWS ONLY ONE FILE PER FLOPPY AND A FILE MAY NOT
SPAN VOLUMES (FULL DESCRIPTION GIVEN IN THE COMMENTS IN THE SOURCE
PROGRAM).
E07801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SCAN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TERMINAL HARD COPY PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PRINTER DISPLAY TERMINAL
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
SCAN IS A FORTRAN PROGRAM THAT SUPPLIES A TERMINAL HARD-COPY FUNCTION
FOR HEWLETT-PACKARD'S DOS-M AND RTE SYSTEMS USING THE 2645 AND 2648
TERMINALS. SCAN EMULATES A TERMINAL HARD-COPY DEVICE BY INTERROGATING
THE TERMINAL'S LOCAL MEMORY AND TRANSMITTING ITS CONTENTS TO THE
STANDARD SYSTEM PRINTER. TO GET A COPY OF ALL OF THE TERMINAL'S CON-
TENTS TYPE: RU,SCAN. SCAN WILL AUTOMATICALLY SEND THE CURSOR TO THE
HOME POSITION AND TRANSFERS THE DISPLAY INFORMATION TO THE SYSTEM
PRINTER (LU 6). FOR A PARTIAL SCAN, TYPE: RU,SCAN,,P (MOVE THE CURSOR
TO THE FIRST LINE TO BE COPIED BEFORE TYPING "RETURN"). SCAN WILL COPY
FROM THAT LINE UP TO BUT NOT INCLUDING THE LINE CONTAINING RU,SCAN,,P.
IN EITHER CASE, A FORM FEED IS PROVIDED AFTER THE COPY AS AN ADDED
CONVENIENCE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
OPERATES WITH 2645 AND 2648 TERMINALS.
E07901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: VASP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
VIRTUAL ARRAY SUBROUTINE PACKAGE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
ARRAY MEMORY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
21MX-E
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
3808 WORDS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN SUBROUTINE PACKAGE ENABLES A FORTRAN PROGRAMMER TO HANDLE
VERY LARGE MULTIDIMENSIONAL REAL OR INTEGER ARRAYS. THE ARRAYS ARE
STORED AND RECALLED FROM DISK BY CALLS TO THE SUBROUTINES IN SUCH A WAY
THAT ANY ARRAY ELEMENT IS ACCESSIBLE USING SUBSCRIPT NOTATION SIMILAR TO
THAT OF A STANDARD FORTRAN ARRAY. UP TO 5 ARRAYS ARE ALLOWED, ANY
OF WHICH CAN BE REAL OR INTEGER. THE INTEGER ARRAYS CAN HAVE UP TO
4,194,176 ENTRIES; THE REAL ARRAYS UP TO 2,097,088 - DEPENDING UPON
AVAILABLE DISK SPACE. UP TO 4 DIMENSIONS ARE ALLOWED EACH ARRAY. THE
COMPLETE PACKAGE USES 3808 WORDS OF STORAGE. SEVERAL OTHER ROUTINES
ARE INCLUDED WHICH CAN BE USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE ABOVE DESCRIBED
PACKAGE. THESE ADDITIONAL ROUTINES MAY BE USED TO CREATE AND ACCESS
ARRAYS STORED PERMANENTLY ON THE DISK AND TO INSPECT THE ARRAY CONTENTS
FOR TROUBLESHOOTING PURPOSES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
E08001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SHEMA
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SHARED-EMA CAPABILITY FOR RTE-IV
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
ARRAY MEMORY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS ANY NUMBER OF EMA PROGRAMS TO SHARE AS MUCH PHYSICAL
MEMORY THAT IS ALLOWED IN ANY GIVEN CONFIGURATION. THIS CAPABILITY USES
STANDARD HP SUPPLIED SOFTWARE AND REQUIRES ONLY ONE SUBROUTINE CALL IN
EACH PROGRAM BEFORE EMA SHARING CAN BE DONE. THE SCHEME DEVELOPED FOR
THIS CAPABILITY ALLOWS ANY PROGRAM TYPE TO PARTICIPATE AND DOES NOT MAKE
USE OF ANY OTHER AREA OF MEMORY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E08101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SMESS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SYSTEM MESSAGE PROCESSOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL TEXT MULTITERMINAL
MESSAGE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
SMESS - ENABLES SYSTEM CONSOLE (OR INITIATOR) TO OUTPUT A MESSAGE
TO ALL TTY'S IN AN MTM ENIRONMENT.
UP TO 10/80 CHARACTER MESSAGE LINES MAY BE SENT/TEXT-SEND
COMMAND. THE FIRST MESSAGE SENT ALSO INCLUDES THE GREGORIAN
DATE AND CURRENT TIME.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD SMESS AS FOREGROUND DISC RESIDENT -
5 PAGES REQUIRED - (SIZE MAY BE REDUCED
BY REMOVING DATE AND TIME CODE AS IT BRINGS IN THE FORMATTER ETC.)
:RU, LOADR, 99,,007,,
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SMESS FUNCTIONS ARE DETERMINED THROUGH 3 COMMANDS PRECEEDED BY A
PROGRAM PROMPT(?):
1. TEXT - READ UP TO 10 LINES OF MESSAGE FROM THE SYSTEM CONSOLE
(OR INITIATOR).
(10 LINES OR A (??) AT THE START OF A LINE RETURNS PROMPT)
2. SEND - OUTPUT THE MESSAGE TO ALL ONLINE TERMINALS.
3. END - TERMINATE SMESS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
INVALID COMMANDS PASS CONTROL TO PROMPT CHARACTER (?)
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ONLY TYPE 'O' DEVICES ARE QUALIFIED AS OUTPUT. BIT'S 14 AND 15 OF EQT
WORD 5 ARE TESTED FOR DEVICE DOWN ONLY. USER MAY WISH TO PUT
MORE RESTRICTIONS ON DEVICE AVAILABILITY.
E08201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MESIO
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTERACTIVE I/O SUBROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION FORMATTING TEXT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
21MX
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THREE SUBROUTINES WHICH ALLOW THE USER TO PERFORM INTERACTIVE AND/0R
BATCH I/O ALONG WITH ALPHA TO NUMERIC AND NUMERIC TO ALPHA CONVERSIONS.
MESIO - OUTPUTS MESSAGES AND ACCEPTS SINGLE OR MULTIPLE ENTRIES
ACCORDING TO SEVERAL DIFFERENT STRUCTURES. DIRECT WRITES AND
READS ARE ALSO SUPPORTED FOR BATCH MODE.
ATON - INTERROGATES ANY ALPHA STRING AND RETURNS EITHER A REAL
OR INTEGER VALUE.
NTOA - FORMATS EITHER REAL OR INTEGER NUMBERS INTO AN ALPHA
STRING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
:RU,TESTA,LU1,LU2 (LU1 = LOGICAL UNIT TO INPUT TEST DATA)
(LU2 = LOGICAL UNIT OF TTY)
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E08301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CMPCT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ABSOLUTE BINARY COMPACTOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
ABSOLUTE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
21MX
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PACK ABSOLUTE BINARY CODE IN RECORDS OF UP TO 128 WORDS IN LENGTH.
ARRANGE THE LOAD IN ASCENDING MEMORY LOCATION ORDER.
PROVIDE A MEANS TO IDENTIFY UNDEFINED AREAS AND TO SELECTIVELY
PRESET THESE AREAS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD BINARY OF CMLIB WITH CMPCT
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL SEQUENCE: RU, CMPCT, [LU] PROGRAM IS INTERACTIVE
PARAMETERS OR ARGUMENTS:
LU THE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE INTERACTIVE DEVICE.
ENTER BINARY ABSOLUTE FILE NAME.
OUTPUT CAN BE TO A FILE MANAGER FILE OR A LOGICAL UNIT.
DISPLAY UNDEFINED CELLS:
REPLY C/R OR YES FOR DISPLAY ON LU.
REPLY WITH INTEGER GREATER THAN 3 FOR UNDEFINES LIST.
REPLY NO OR XX FOR NO DISPLAY OF UNDEFINED CELLS.
PRESET UNDEFINED:
REPLY WITH STRING NUMBER TO PRESET THAT STRING.
REPLY WITH 2 DECIMAL INTEGERS TO PRESET ALL UNDEFINED CELLS
IN THAT RANGE.
REPLY ALL TO SET ALL UNDEFINED CELLS IN THE LOAD RANGE.
IF A DISPLAY OF UNDEFINES WAS REQUESTED ON THE USER CONSOLE,
IT WILL BE REPEATED AFTER EACH PRESET REQUEST.
REPLY NL TO STOP LISTING ON THE CONSOLE.
REPLY NO OR GO TO END PRESET OPERATIONS AND GO TO OUTPUT.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE BINARY INPUT FILE IS EXAMINED AND A TABLE HAVING ONE BIT
FOR EACH WORD FOUND IS CONSTRUCTED. THE BOUNDS AND NO. OF RECORDS
FOUND ARE OUTPUT. IF REQUESTED, THIS TABLE IS SEARCHED FOR UNDEFINED
STRINGS AND A LIST OF THE UNDEFINED STRINGS IS OUTPUT ON THE SELECTED
LOGICAL UNIT.
FORMAT OF LISTING:
STRING NUMBER, SIZE, DECIMAL AND BINARY BEGIN AND END. FOLLOWING
COMPLETION OF THE PRESET, THE INPUT FILE IS RESCANNED, RETRIEVING N
PAGES OF DATA PER SCAN.
THE DATA IS THEN FORMED INTO BINARY ABSOLUTE RECORDS USING THE
PREVIOUSLY CONSTRUCTED TABLE AS A GUIDE.
THE VALUE OF N IN THIS VERSION IS SET TO FOUR (4096) BUT THE USER
CAN CHANGE N IF MORE OR LESS MEMORY IS AVAILABLE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
PROGRAM EXITS FOR:
FILE MANAGER ERRORS
SOURCE FILE NOT A TYPE 7 FILE
ENTRY OF /E WILL ABORT PROGRAM
**MISCELLANEOUS:
NO PRESET WILL BE PERFORMED ON THE BASE PAGE.
ORDER OF LOADING COMPACTED FILES MAY BE IMPORTANT IF ANY PRESETS
WERE SPECIFIED.
IF PRESET IS NOT REQUESTED, OUTPUT RECORDS WILL NOT BE MERGED OVER
UNDEFINED MEMORY LOCATIONS, IN GENERAL SHORTER OUTPUT RECORDS WILL
PRODUCED.
THIS PROGRAM WAS PREPARED TO REDUCE LOADING TIME WITH TAPE CASSETTES
AND INCREASE THEIR CAPACITIES.
E08401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: JKEYS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DEFINE USER SOFT KEYS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL SOFTKEYS DISPLAY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE HP 264X TERMINAL USER TO INTERACTIVELY DEFINE
THE CONTENTS OF ALL SOFT KEYS AND STORE THE RESULTS IN A FILE. THE
FILE CAN THEN BE DUMPED TO THE TERMINAL WITH A TWO LINE LEADER DESCRIB-
ING EACH SOFT KEY. THE PROGRAM IS COMPLETELY SELF-INSTRUCTIONAL AND
PERFORMS ALL NECESSARY ERROR CHECKING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN JKEYS(,LU) WHERE LU IS THE TERMINAL FOR INTERACTION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
/JKEYS: FILE ERROR = N
/JKEYS: INVALED COMMAND
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E08501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: UCU
**PROGRAM TITLE:
USER CODE UTILITY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
CODE FILES DIRECTORY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS GROUP OF FIVE UTILITY PROGRAMS AID IN HOUSEKEEPING OF FILES STORED
IN FILE MANAGER FORMAT ON 7900, 7905, 7906, 7920 DISC FILES RUNNING
UNDER RTE. A TWO CHARACTER USER CODE CAN BE ATTACHED TO EACH FILE,
THE FILE MANAGER DIRECTORY CAN BE SELECTIVELY LISTED, FILE NAMES
HAVING COMMON UNCODES CAN BE COLLECTED OR DIRECTORY SORTED IN ORDER
OF FILE SIZE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
EACH PROGRAM IS AN INDEPENDENT UNIT AND IS LOADED VIA THE RTE SYSTEM
LOADER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU, UCODE, <LU> , <CARTLU> , <UCODE>
LU - THE INTERACTIVE DEVICE LU DEFAULTS TO ONE.
CARTLU - THE CARTRIDGE NUMBER (POSITIVE), OR LOGICAL UNIT OF THE
CARTRIDGE (NEGATIVE) HAS AN INTERNAL DEFAULT SET TO 9.
UCODE - THE UCODE CHARACTER PAIR TO BE ATTACHED TO THE FILES,
DEFAULTS TO AN INTERACTIVE REQUEST FOR A UCODE.
RU, ULIST,<LU> , <CR> , <UCODE> , <LISTLU> , <SKIP>
LU-INTERACTIVE CONSOLE, DEFAULTS TO 0G OR ONE.
CR - CARTRIDGE NUMBER, DEFAULTS TO 9 INTERNALLY.
UCODE - THE UCODE PAIR FOR SELECTED FILES, IF OMITTED, ALL TYPE 3,4,5
FILES ARE LISTED.
LISTLU - THE LU UPON WHICH THE LIST WILL BE WRITTEN. IF SIX 132
WIDE COLUMN FORMAT WILL BE USED, DEFAULTS TO LU.
SKIP- IF PRESENT, THE NUMBER OF FILE NAMES TO BE SKIPPED BEFORE
TESTING BEGINS.
------------
RU, ALIST,<LU> , <CR> , <UCODE> , <LISTLU> , <"S">
PARAMETERS AS ABOVE EXCEPT "S", IF PRESENT, WILL CAUSE TYPE 5 FILES TO
BE OMITTED.
------------
RU, BLIST,<LU> , <CR> , <LISTLU> PARAMETERS AS ABOVE.
------------
RU, UFILE, <LU> , <CR> , <UCODE> , <UFILE> , <SC> , <CR2>
LU INTERACTIVE DEVICE FOR OPERATOR COMMUNICATION
CR CARTRIDGE NUMBER OF LU (NEGATIVE) WHICH IS TO BE SEARCHED
UCODE A 2 CHARACTER USER CODE WHICH DEFINES THE FILES
UFILE THE FILE ON WHICH THE LIST IS TO BE WRITTEN
SC SECURITY CODE OF THE CREATED FILE
CR2 CARTRIDGE ON WHICH UFILE IS TO BE FOUND OR CREATED
CR2 DEFAULTS TO CR
SC DEFAULTS TO NO SECURITY CODE
UFILE DEFAULTS TO A FILE NAME UCFILE
UCODE IF DEFAULTED WILL BE REQUESTED INTERACTIVELY
CR DEFAULTS TO CARTRIDGE 9
LU DEFAULTS TO 1
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS GROUP OF FIVE (5) UTILITY PROGRAMS AID IN HOUSEKEEPING OF FILES
STORED IN FILE MANAGER FORMAT ON 7900, 7905, 7906, 7920 DISC FILES
RUNNING UNDER RTE. A 2 CHARACTER USER CODE CAN BE ATTACHED TO EACH FILE
(UCODE), THE FMGR DIRECTORY CAN BE SELECTIVELY LISTED (ULIST,ALIST),
FILE NAMES HAVING COMMON UCODES CAN BE COLLECTED (UFILE) OR DIRECTORY
SORTED IN ORDER OF FILE SIZE (BLIST).
UCODE
IS AN INTERACTIVE
UCODE IS AN INTERACTIVE PROGRAM THAT ADDS A CHARACTER PAIR (UCODE) TO
A TYPE 3, 4, OR 5 FILE. THE UCODE IS STORED IN THE DIRECTORY IN THE
PLACE NORMALLY USED FOR RECORD SIZE IN TYPE 2 AND 6 FILES.
ULIST IS A PROGRAM WHICH CAN SELECTIVELY LIST THE FILE NAMES IN THE
FILE DIRECTORY, WITH THEIR ASSOCIATED UCODES.
ALIST IS SIMILAR TO ULIST EXCEPT AN INCORE SORT IS PERFORMED BEFORE
LISTING.
BLIST PROVIDES A DIRECTORY LIST OF THE FILE NAMES IN ORDER OF SIZE OF
EACH ENTRY IN BLOCKS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
TERMINAL READY
E08601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COMMENT INSERTER FOR ASSEMBLER PROGRAMS
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
PAPER TAPE EDITOR ASSEMBLER
TEXT
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
5067 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (442 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ASSISTS IN ADDING COMMENTS TO ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
SOURCE PROGRAMS.
ONE RECORD OF THE SOURCE PROGRAM IS READ BY THE PHOTOREADER AND
PRINTED ON THE TELETYPE. THE TELETYPE IS THEN TABULATED TO COLUMN
21 OR THREE SPCES PAST THE LAST CHARACTER IN THE SOURCE PROGRAM
RECORD, WHICHEVER IS GREATER. THE USER NOW TYPES THE COMMENT TO BE
ADDED, FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN AND LINE FEED (IF NO COMMENT
THEN TYPE SPACE, CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED). THE ENTIRE RECORD WILL
NOW BE PUNCHED. THE STEPS ABOVE WILL BE REPEATED FOR EACH RECORD OF
THE SOURCE PROGRAM.
TO TERMINATE WITH TRAILER, TYPE A SLASH: '/'.
USES DRIVERS D.00,D.01,D.02.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE THE SOURCE TAPE USING ALGOL COMPILER (CONTROL STATEMENT
CONTAINS "S" PARAMETER).
LOAD COMPILED PROGRAM USING CONFIGURED BCS. OBSERVE THE FOLLOWING
LOAD-TIME ORDER
A. CONFIGURED BCS
B. COMPILED PROGRAM
C. RELOCATABLE LIBRARY (FORTRAN/ALGOL)
PLACE USERS ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SOURCE PROGRAM INTO PHOTOREADER,
TURN ON PUNCH, AND PRESS RUN.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
PROGRAM BEGINS BY PUNCHING LEADER. TO TERMINATE WITH TRAILER, TYPE
SLASH "/".
E08701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: XREF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE CROSS-REFERENCE GENERATOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
FROM AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SOURCE PROGRAM, THIS PACKAGE PRODUCES AND
PRINTS AN ALPHABETIZED CROSS-REFERENCE LIST OF ALL SYMBOLS APPEARING
IN THE PROGRAM. EACH SYMBOL IS FOLLOWED BY THE SEQUENCE NUMBER OF THE
STATEMENT IN WHICH IT IS DEFINED, AND BY THE SEQUENCE NUMBERS OF ALL
STATEMENTS REFERRING TO THE SYMBOL. IF THE PROGRAM IS MORE THAN ONE
TAPE LONG, THE 4-DIGIT SEQUENCE NUMBER IS FOLLOWED BY A SLASH AND THE
NUMBER OF THE TAPE ON WHICH IT APPEARS.
THE CROSS-REFERENCE GENERATOR WILL OPERATE IN A MINIMUM RTE SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMS:
A. RTE CROSS-REFERENCE GENERATOR (XREF)
B. IFMGR
C. X.REF
2. LOAD INTO DISC RESIDENT BG THE RELOCATABLE PROGRAMS IN THE FOLLOWING
ORDER:
A. RTE CROSS-REFERENCE GENERATOR (XREF)
B. IFMGR
C. RTE LIBRARY
D. X.REF
NOTE: X.REF MUST BE LOADED LAST SINCE IT DEFINES THE CROSS-REFERENCE
TABLES IN THE UNUSED CORE. AFTER THE LIBRARY IS LOADED, THE LOADER
TYPES ARE:
/LOADER: UNDEFINED EXTS
/LOADER: IDCB
/LOADER: LTAB
/LOADER: FWA1
PLACE THE X.REF TAPE IN THE PHOTOREADER AND TYPE GO,LOADR. AFTER
THE TAPE IS LOADED, TERMINATE THE LOADING OPERATION WITH A GO,
LOADR, 1.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THE FORMAT FOR SCHEDULING THE CROSS-REFERENCE GENERATOR IS
ON, XREF, A,B,C,D,E,
WHERE:
A = LOGICAL UNIT OF INPUT DEVICE
IF 2, READ SOURCE FR0M LS TRACKS
DEFAULT=LOGICAL UNIT 5
B = LOGICAL UNIT OF LIST DEVICE - DEFAULT = 6
C = LINESPPAGE ON LISTING - DEFAULT = 6
D # 0 - IF USED, D MUST BE A LEGAL LOGICAL UNIT OF A KEYBOARD
PRINTER DEVICE. THE DEVICE WILL BE USED TO REQUEST AND INPUT
THE FILE MANAGER SOURCE FILE NAME.
E = KEYBOARD INPUT LOGICAL UNIT - IF PRESENT TWO CHARACTERS ARE
READ FROM THE KEYBOARD. THESE GIVE THE BOUNDS OF LABELS WHICH
ARE TO BE CONSIDERED. ALL OTHERS ARE IGNORED. FOR EXAMPLE, IF:
M IS TYPED, ONLY SYMBOLS WHOSE FIRST LETTER IS BETWEEN "."
AND "M" ARE CONSIDERED IN THE CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF THE FILE MANAGER PACKAGE IS NOT USED, DUMMY ROUTINES MAY BE
SUPPLIED TO SATISFY THE EXTERNALS OPEN, READF, CLOSE AND IFMGR OR
THIS SECTIONS MAY BE EDITED OUT OF THE XREF SOURCE.
E08801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE DEBUG WITH TRACE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
DEBUG
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS RTE DEBUGGING ROUTINE PROVIDES THE FOLLOWING PROGRAMMING AIDS:
1. PRINT (DUMP ON LIST DEVICE) SELECTED AREAS OF MEMORY IN OCTAL OR
ASCII FORMAT.
2. TRACE (ON LIST DEVICE) PORTIONS OF THE PROGRAM DURING EXECUTION.
3. MODIFY THE CONTENTS OF SELECTED AREAS IN MEMORY.
4. MODIFY SIMULATED COMPUTER REGISTERS.
5. INSTRUCTION AND OPERAND BREAK POINTS.
6. INITIATE EXECUTION AT ANY POINT IN PROGRAM.
7. DEBUGGING ROUTINE RESTART.
8. SPECIFYING RELOCATABLE PROGRAM BASE.
9. TERMINATING PROGRAM BEING DEBUGGED.
THE ROUTINE IS IDENTICAL IN OPERATION TO THE STANDARD HP BCS DEBUG
ROUTINE. SEE A POCKET GUIDE TO HP COMPUTERS, 5950-8313.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. EDIT LINE 74 TO REFLECT THE PROPER SPARE BASE PAGE LINK AS
OUTLINED UNDER MISCELLANEOUS.
2. ASSEMBLE THE SOURCE TAPE AND SAVE THE RELOCATABLE OBJECT EITHER ON
PAPER TAPE OR AS AN RTE FILE MANAGER FILE.
3. LOAD THE PROGRAM TO BE DEBUGGED IN THE NORMAL BACKGROUND MANNER AND
INCLUDE RTE DEBUG AS THE LAST PROGRAM BEFORE THE LIBRARY.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
FOLLOW THE DIRECTIONS FOR BCS DEBUG AS OUTLINED IN A POCKET GUIDE
TO HP COMPUTERS, 5950-8313.
TO TERMINATE THE BACKGROUND OPERATION TYPE "E," AS AN OPERATOR COMMAND.
NOTE: SWITCH REGISTER BIT 15 WILL CAUSE A BREAKPOINT.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. THE EFFECTIVE (FINAL) OPERAND ADDRESS IS STORED IN WORD -MEMRY-.
THIS WORD MUST BE IN BASE PAGE TO ALLOW DEBUG TO BE RELOCATABLE.
THEREFORE, ONE BASE PAGE WORD MUST BE RESERVED AT RTGEN TIME. THIS
MAY BE ACCOMPLISHED BY SETTING FWA BP LINKAGE TO ONE PLUS THE
FIRST AVAILABLE SELECT CODE NUMBER AFTER THE LAST I/O CARD AND
EQU MEMRY TO THE SPARE BASE PAGE WORD.
2. THE DUMP AND TRACE FUNCTIONS ARE DIRECTED TO THE LIST LOGICAL UNIT.
BOTH INPUT/OUTPUT AND LIST LOGICAL UNITS ARE DEFAULTED TO LOGICAL
UNIT 1. THESE MAY BE CHANGED BY SUPPLYING THEM AS PARAMETERS IN THE
"ON" REQUEST. PARAMETER ONE IS THE INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICE AND PARAMETER
TWO IS THE LIST DEVICE.
3. ALL CALLS TO EXEC ARE TRAPPED, TRANSFERRED TO DEBUG, AND THEN MADE
DIRECTLY FROM DEBUG. THIS AVOIDS MEMORY PROTECT VIOLATIONS, HOWEVER,
SINCE THE EXEC CALLS ARE INITIATED BY DEBUG, ANY DEBUG OPERATIONS,
SUCH AS BREAKPOINT AND TRACE, WILL AUTOMATICALLY BYPASS THE EXEC
REQUEST LOCATIONS IN THE PROGRAM BEING DEBUGGED.
4. ANY REFERENCES TO REAL TIME RESIDENT LIBRARY ROUTINES WILL CAUSE A
MEMORY PROTECT VIOLATION UNLESS THESE ROUTINES ARE TRAPPED IN A
SIMILAR MANNER AS THE EXEC REQUEST CALLS ARE.
E08901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: EDIT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE CONVERSATIONAL SUPER EDITOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
6.9K OF BACKGROUND
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'EDIT' IS AN RTE CONVERSATIONAL EDITOR. THE EDIT COMMANDS MAY BE
ENTERED IN NON-SEQUENTIAL ORDER FROM ANY LOGICAL UNIT DEVICE, LS TRACKS
OR A FILE MANAGER PACKAGE (FMP) FILE.
THE SOURCE TO BE EDITED MAY BE APPENDED FROM ANY INPUT LOGICAL UNIT, LS
TRACKS OR AN FMP FILE.
SOURCES OR PORTIONS MAY BE MERGED WITH THE SOURCE BEING EDITED. LINES
MAY BE DELETED, INSERTED, MOVED OR REPLACED IN ANY ORDER IN THE EDIT
FILE.
CHARACTER STRINGS MAY BE EDITED WITHIN A SINGLE LINE, A GROUP OF LINES
OR WITHIN THE ENTIRE SOURCE.
THE EDITED FILE OR ANY PORTION OF IT MAY BE LISTED WITH LINE NUMBERS
ON ANY LOGICAL UNIT OR FMP FILE.
THE EDITED FILE OR ANY PORTION OF IT MAY BE OUTPUTTED TO ANY LOGICAL
UNIT, LS TRACKS OR FMP FILE.
THE LS TRACK(S) ASSIGNMENT IS MADE BY THE EDITOR ON OUTPUT AND LS
TRACK(S) ARE RELEASED ON INPUT.
THIS EDIT REQUIRES 6.9K OF BACKGROUND AND THE RTE FILE MANAGER SOFTWARE
PACKAGE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
RTE EDITOR HAS TWO LINES WHICH MAY HAVE TO BE CONFIGURED IF THE SYSTEM
CONTAINS I/O PERIPHERALS IN ADDITION TO THE STANDARD LOGICAL UNITS IN
THE SYSTEM. IF THE SYSTEM CONTAINS KEYBOARD LOGICAL UNITS OTHER THAN
1, THEN EDIT THIS LINE TO INCLUDE THE LOGICAL UNITS. TERMINATE THE LIST
WITH A ZERO. FOR EXAMPLE: IF THE SYSTEM HAS A LOGICAL UNIT 7 WHICH IS
A CRT/KYBD AND AN EXTRA TTY AT LOGICAL UNIT 11, THEN LINE 702 WOULD BE
DEC 1, 7, 11, 0.
LIKEWISE, LINE #711 CONTAINS A LIST OF ALL LEGAL OUTPUT LOGICAL UNITS
IN THE SYSTEM. IN THE ABOVE EXAMPLE, LINE #711 WOULD BE CHANGED TO
LEGAL DEC 1, 2, 4, 6, 7, 11, 0.
ASSEMBLE THE MAIN RTE EDITOR PROGRAM AND ITS SUPPORTING SUBROUTINES.
NOTE: SUBROUTINE NUM IS A FORTRAN PROGRAM.
USING THE LOADER, REPLACE THE OLD EDITOR WITH THE NEW EDITOR.
NOTE: IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT THE EDITOR ALWAYS BE ADDED TO THE SYSTEM
AFTER THE RTGEN TO PREVENT ITS SUBROUTINES FROM BECOMING PART OF THE
LIBRARY UNLESS, OF COURSE, YOU WANT THE SUBROUTINES IN THE LIBRARY OR
DON'T CARE IF THEY ARE.
A TYPE 2, 44 WORD/RECORD FMP FILE, NAMED EDITOR WITH A SECURITY CODE OF
0 IS REQUIRED FOR THE EDIT WORK FILE. THIS FILE SHOULD BE LARGE ENOUGH
TO HANDLE THE LARGEST EXPECTED EDIT JOB. AS A RULE OF THUMB, A 600
BLOCK FILE WILL HANDLE A SOURCE OF APPROXIMATELY 1200 LINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
LINE #739 OF RTE EDITOR IS THE LISTS DEVICE MAXIMUM WORD LENGTH AND IS
SET TO 36 (72 CHARACTERS). THIS LENGTH MAY BE CHANGED TO SUIT OTHER
LIST DEVICES OF DIFFERENT CHARACTER PER LINE LENGTH.
SPECIAL DEVICES MAY BE HANDLED AS EDITOR INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES BY
CREATING TYPE ZERO FMP FILES FOR THESE DEVICES.
E09001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RTMDE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE MICRO DEBUG EDITOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
EDITOR DEBUG MICROCODE
PROM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
'RTMDE' FACILITATES LOADING AND DEBUGGING A USERS WRITABLE CONTROL
STORE (WCS) MICRO PROGRAM IN A REAL TIME EXECUTIVE (RTE) OPERATING
SYSTEM. SPECIFICALLY IT ALLOWS A USER TO LOAD OR READ WCS; EXECUTE A
MICROCODE PROGRAM WITH BREAKPOINTS THAT WILL DISPLAY THE FIRMWARE
REGISTERS; AND GENERATE MASK TAPES THAT ARE USED TO PROGRAM PROM CHIPS.
RTMDE INCORPORATES ALL OF THE FEATURES OF THE DOS MICRO-DEBUG-EDITOR.
A MINIMUM RTE CONFIGURATION WITH ONE OR MORE WCS MODULES ARE THE
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS.
LITERATURE REFERENCE
RTE PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING MANUAL HP 02005-90001
MICROPROGRAMMING GUIDE HP 5951-3028
MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE HP 02100-90133
DOS MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE HP 02100-90146
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE RTMDE AND SUBROUTINE IFMGR.
2. SAVE RELOCATABLE CODE ON A FMP FILE OR TAPE.
3. LOAD RTMDE, IFMGR AND OPTIONALLY A TEST* PROGRAM INTO BACKGROUND.
*TEST - INITIALIZATION PROGRAM AS DESCRIBED IN THE DOS MICRO-
PROGRAMMING MANUAL (HP #02100-90146) SECTION 9.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO SCHEDULE RTMDE
*ON, RTMDE, A
WHERE A = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF KYBD/DISPLAY DEVICE FOR OPERATOR
COMMUNICATION WITH THE MICRO-DEBUG-EDITOR. DEFAULT FOR A = 1, SYSTEM
CONSOLE.
FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS LISTED IN THE DOS MICROPROGRAMMING MANUAL.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
AS LISTED SECTION 9 OF THE HP DOS MICROPROGRAMMING MANUAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
ALL BETS ARE OFF OF MAINTAINING THE RTE OPERATING SYSTEM DURING MICRO
CODE DEBUGGING SO APPROPRIATE WARNINGS SHOULD BE GIVEN TO OTHER USERS.
THE GREATEST DANGER LIES IN MICROCODE MODIFYING THE RESIDENT OR HANGING
IN A LOOP. IF THE PROGRAMMER USES BREAKPOINTS AND ABORTS MICRO-CODE
EXECUTION BEFORE THE ABOVE OCCURS, SYSTEM INTEGRITY CAN BE MAINTAINED.
RTMDE SETS THE WCS MODULE "IN USE" FLAG PRIOR TO THE 1ST WCS LOAD
COMMAND AND THEN DOES NOT RELEASE (CLEAR) THE FLAG UNTIL THE TERMINATE
COMMAND. DURING THIS PERIOD THE MODULE IS NOT AVAILABLE FOR USE FOR
OTHER FOREGROUND OR BACKGROUND PROGRAMS. (SEE DVR33 DOCUMENTATION FOR
EXPLANATION AND GROUNDRULES OF THE "IN USE" FLAG).
E09101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RAPG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE ACTIVITY PROFILE GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
STATUS PERFORMANCE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
'RAPG' ACCUMULATES A SPECTRUM FROM THE P-REGISTER TO PROVIDE AN
ACTIVITY PROFILE FOR PROGRAM TIMING ANALYSIS. THE ANALYSIS WILL
INDICATE WHAT AREAS CAN BE MICROCODED OR RECORDED TO IMPROVE EXECUTION
TIME.
THE CORE REGION OF INTEREST IS PARAMETER DEFINED WHEN 'RAPG' IS INVOKED.
THE CORE AREA IS BROKEN UP INTO 50 CELLS PLUS 1 CELL ABOVE AND BELOW THE
DEFINED AREA. CELLS ARE MAINTAINED IN COMMON SO THAT THEY MAY BE
ACCESSED BY AN ANALYSIS PROGRAM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE SUBROUTINE RAPG AND SAVE RELOCATABLE.
2. ADD THE FOLLOWING CALLS TO THE PROGRAM THAT IS TO BE ANALYZED.
A. CALL MAPON (IFIRST,LAST)
OR
JSB MAPON
DEF *+3
DEF IFIRST
DEF LAST
WHERE: IFIRST = OCTAL ADDRESS OF 1ST CORE LOCATION OF INTEREST.
LAST = OCTAL ADDRESS OF LAST CORE LOCATION OF INTEREST.
B. CALL MAPOF
OR
JSB MAPOF
DEF *+1
THE MAPON CALL MUST BE ADDED BEFORE THE 1ST. STATEMENT TO BE
ANALYZED.
THE MAPOF CALL MUST BE ADDED BEFORE THE 1ST. STATEMENT TO BE
ANALYZED AND BEFORE PROGRAM TERMINATION.
3. LOAD THE PROGRAM TO BE ANALYZED WITH SUBROUTINE RAPG INTO
BACKGROUND AND SCHEDULE THE PROGRAM FOR EXECUTION.
4. WHEN THE PROGRAM TERMINATES, PROGRAM ACP OR A USER WRITTEN PROGRAM
MAY BE EXECUTED TO OBTAIN THE ANALYSIS.
5. SEE RAPG LISTING FOR DESCRIPTION OF THE COMMON CELLS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
INSTRUCTIONS FOR TEST CASE:
1. LOAD PROGRAM MAPTT AND RAPG SUBROUTINE INTO BACKGROUND AND SAVE
THE CORE LOAD MAP.
2. LOAD PROGRAM ACP INTO BACKGROUND.
3. SCHEDULE MAPTT BY ON,MAPTT AND THEN SCHEDULE ACP. NOTE THE PROFILE
LISTED BY ACP.
4. TO "ZOOM" IN ON THE ROUTINES REQUIRING THE MOST EXECUTION TIME
SCHEDULE MAPTT BY UN,MAPTT,A,B WHERE A AND B ARE THE BOUNDARY
ADDRESSES OF THE AREA OF INTEREST.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
1. RAPG IS INTENDED TO RUN IN BACKGROUND, THEREFORE AREAS BELOW THE
1ST. WORD OF AVAILABLE BACKGROUND AREA ARE NOT INCLUDED IN THE
MAP. TO CHANGE THIS LOWER BOUND, THE BKDRA EQUATE STATEMENT MAY BE
CHANGED TO POINT TO ANOTHER AREA OF CORE.
2. RAPG REQUIRES ONE BASE PAGE LINK. THIS BASE PAGE LINK CAN EITHER BE
ESTABLISHED AS A SPARE AT RTGEN TIME OR AN UNUSED I/O TRAP CELL.
3. BEFORE ASSEMBLING RAPG, EDIT LINES 57 AND 58 TO POINT TO THE TBG
AND SPARE BASE PAGE LINK RESPECTIVELY.
4. RAPG OVERLAYS CODING IN THE RTIOC MODULE IN ORDER TO TRAP THE TBG
INTERRUPTS. A CALL TO MAPOF MUST BE MADE TO RESTORE THE ORIGINAL
CODE AND SPARE BASE LINK BEFORE TERMINATION. IF FOR ANY REASON THE
PROGRAM IS ABORTED BEFORE MAPOF IS CALLED, THE SYSTEM WILL HAVE TO
BE REBOOTED.
5. IT MAY BE NECESSARY TO LOOP THE PROGRAM IN THE AREA OF INTEREST
SEVERAL TIMES IN ORDER TO BUILD UP THE PROFILE.
E09201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RENUM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RENUM: RESEQUENCES FORTRAN SOURCE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
MINIMUM OF 8K USER PROGRAM AREA
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL RE-SEQUENCE THE STATEMENT NUMBERS OF A FORTRAN
SOURCE PROGRAM. UP TO 200 STATEMENT NUMBERS ARE ALLOWED. THE OPERATOR
SPECIFIES THE BEGINNING ST # AND INCREMENT VALUE, INPUT AND OUTPUT
DEVICES OR FILE NAMES. THE PROGRAM DOES NOT SEARCH CONTINUATION LINES
OR COMMENT LINES. DURING EXECUTION, A LINE BY LINE LISTING IS PROVIDED
SHOWING THE ORIGINAL LINE AND THE NEW LINE. THE ORIGINAL SOURCE IS LEFT
INTACT AND A NEW SOURCE IS GENERATED. UPON COMPLETION, THE TABLE OF
OLD #'S AND NEW #'S IS LISTED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMPILE SOURCE RENUM.
2. ASSEMBLE SOURCE $UNPK.
3. IF THE HOST SYSTEM IS NON-RTE II, ASSEMBLE SOURCE $CNUMD.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN THE PROGRAM;*ON,RENUM. THE PROGRAM IS CONVERSATIONAL (SEE
EXAMPLE RUN PROCEDURE).
IF THE LOGICAL UNIT FOR INPUT IS THE DISC (LU = 2), THE FILE NAME WILL
BE REQUESTED.
IF THE OUTPUT IS ALSO TO THE DISC, THE FILE NAME REQUESTED BY THE
PROGRAM WILL BE CREATED.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. ALL I/O CHECKS WITH REFERENCE TO LU ASSIGNMENTS ARE SYSTEM
DEPENDENT, I.E., WRITES TO AN INPUT DEVICE.
2. LOGICAL UNIT #1 = TTY.
3. CONTINUATION LINES THAT ARE CREATED BY THE PROGRAM ARE NOT
NECESSARILY CORRECT AND MAY REQUIRE AN EDIT.
THIS IS SHOWN IN THE EXAMPLE I/O RUN PROCEDURE. AN EXAMPLE OF A
CREATED CONTINUATION LINE IS SHOWN IN THE EXAMPLE RUN PROCEDURE OF
THE TEST SOURCE.
4. THE PROGRAM SEARCHES FOR THE FIRST VALID END STATEMENT, NOT AN END$.
HOWEVER, AN END$ IS INSERTED IN THE NEW SOURCE FOLLOWING THE END
STATEMENT IN ALL CASES.
E09301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BREF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CROSS REFERENCE TABLE GENERATOR FOR HP 92101A
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
BASIC COMPILER PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4300B WORDS WITH SUBROUTINES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
(BREF) IS A CROSS-REFERENCE TABLE GENERATOR FOR HP 92101A MULTIUSER
REAL TIME BASIC. IT WILL ACCEPT A FILE MANAGER SOURCE FILE FOR INPUT
AND PRODUCE A FORMATTED LISTING OF ALL VARIABLES USED IN THE SOURCE
PROGRAM.
THE LISTING IS DIVIDED INTO FOUR PARTS:
1. 1 CHARACTER SIMPLE VARIABLES.
2. STRING VARIABLES.
3. ARRAY VARIABLES.
4. 2 CHARACTER SIMPLE VARIABLES.
WITHIN EACH PART, THE LIST OF THE VARIABLES IS ALPHABETICAL, AND THE
LIST OF THE LINE NUMBERS WHICH FOLLOWS EACH VARIABLE IS ARRANGED
NUMERICALLY. THE ALGORITHM USED BY (BREF) SHOULD REMAIN COMPATIBLE
WITH FUTURE REVISIONS OF RTE-II BASIC.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
PLACE THE TAPE CONTAINING "BREF" SOURCE AND THE SUBROUTINE "NAMR" IN
THE TAPE READER. ISSUE THE FOLLOWING FILE MANAGER COMMANDS:
:MS,5 MOVE THE "BREF" SOURCE INTO THE LS AREA
:LG,3 ASSIGN LOAD AND GO TRACKS
:RU,ASMB,2,99 ASSEMBLE BREF INTO RELOCATABLE IN LG
:MR,5 MOVE "NAMR" INTO LOAD AND GO AREA
:RU,LOADR,99,,9 LOAD "BREF" PERMANENTLY INTO THE SYSTEM
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
1. SCHEDULE BREF WITH THE FOLLOWING COMMAND:
ON,BREF,<TTY>,<LIST>
WHERE: <TTY> IS THE MTM LU OF A TERMINAL TO WHICH REQUESTS AND
ERRORS WILL BE DIRECTED. DEFAULT IS LU #1 OR THE
MTM TERMINAL WHICH ISSUED THE "ON" COMMAND.
<LIST> IS THE LU OF THE LIST DEVICE ON WHICH THE XREF IS
TO BE PRINTED. DEFAULT IS LU #6.
2. BREF RESPONDS: /BREF: FILENAME?
REPLY WITH THE FILENAME:SECURITY CODE:CRNUMBER OF THE FILE TO
BE USED FOR SOURCE INPUT. IT IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED THAT THIS FILE
WAS CREATED WITH THE BASIC "SAVE" COMMAND TO INSURE PROPER SYNTAX.
IF A CROSS-REFERENCE IS NOT DESIRED, ENTER CNTL-D.
3. BREF WILL THEN OPEN THE FILE. IF A FMGR ERROR OCCURS, BREF WILL
PRINT: /BREF: FILE MANAGER ERROR - XX
/BREF: BREF ABORTED
4. BREF WILL THEN GENERATE A SYMBOL TABLE, AND WHEN ALL SOURCE HAS
BEEN PROCESSED, IT WILL PRINT THE CROSS-REFERENCE LISTING.
5. IF A VARIABLE IS ONLY USED ONCE IN A PROGRAM (THEREBY MAKING IT A
CONSTANT, AND SOMEWHAT USELESS...), BREF WILL FLAG IT IN THE
LISTING BY PLACING A COMMERCIAL AT SIGN (@) NEXT TO THE VARIABLE
NAME.
6. POSSIBLE ERROR MESSAGES: MEANING:
/BREF: $END <******> PROGRAM ****** XREF DONE
/BREF: LINE SYNTAX ERROR LINE DOESN'T BEGIN WITH A NUMBER. BREF
PRINTS THE OFFENDING LINE.
/BREF: BREF ABORTED AN IRRECOVERABLE ERROR HAS OCCURRED
/BREF: TABLE OVERFLOW NOT ENOUGH MEMORY TO HOLD ALL SYMBOLS
/BREF: NO SYMBOLS THE PROGRAM HAD NO VARIABLE REFERENCES
7. TO VERIFY PROPER OPERATION, RUN BREF TO PRODUCE A CROSS REFERENCE
LISTING OF ANY PROGRAM THAT IS HANDY. THEN, MANUALLY CHECK THE
VARIABLE USAGE IN THE PROGRAM AGAINST THE LISTING.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
BREF AND SUBROUTINES FROM THE RELOCATABLE LIBRARY USE APPROXIMATELY
4300B WORDS. BREF USES ALL OF CORE EXCLUSIVE OF ITSELF FOR BUILDING
THE SYMBOL TABLES. THE MORE BACKGROUND CORE THAT IS AVAILABLE, THE
LARGER A SYMBOL TABLE CAN BE PROCESSED.
E09401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: APG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE 2/3/4 ACTIVITY PROFILE GENERATOR FOR HP 1000 M-,E-, AND F-SERIES
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
PERFORMANCE STATUS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PACKAGE ANALYZES ACTIVITY IN ONE OR MORE APPLICATION
PROGRAMS. ON A BASIS OF THIS ACTIVITY, THE APPLICATIONS MAY BE
OPTIMIZED BY RECORDING OR MICROCODING.
THE PROGRAMS BEING ANALYZED NEED NOT BE MODIFIED FOR PURPOSES OF THE
ANALYSIS.
THE RTE SYSTEM MUST HAVE DVR36(13197-16001) AND A LU FOR THE WCS CARD.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE AND LOAD ALL PROGRAMS SEPARATELY. NOTE THAT APGI REQUIRES A
RELOCATABLE COPY OF WLOAD (13197-16003) BE LOADED WITH IT. THE RTE
SYSTEM MUST HAVE DVR36 (13197-16001), AND A LOGICAL UNIT MUST BE
ALLOCATED FOR THE WCS CARD. BE SURE TO READ THE COMMENTS IN &APG2
(OR APG34). NOT ALL PROGRAMS ARE REQUIRED FOR A PARTICULAR SYSTEM.
IF THE SYSTEM IS RTE 2, USE &APG2 (OMIT &APG3). IF THE SYSTEM IS
RTE 3 OR 4, USE &APG34 (OMIT &APG2). IF RUNNING ON A 21MX M-SERIES,
USE &APGM (OMIT &APGME). IF RUNNING ON A 21MX E-SERIES, USE &APGME
(OMIT &APGM). MICROASSEMBLE &APGM (21MX M-SERIES ONLY), OR &APGME
(21MX E-SERIES ONLY).
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO START THE ACTIVITY PROFILE GENERATION, RUN APGI. APGI WILL
ACCEPT PARAMETERS AS PART OF THE RU DIRECTIVE; IF THE PARAMETERS
ARE OMITTED, APGI WILL REQUEST THE REQUIRED PARAMETERS. USERS MAY
USE APG TO ANALYZE WHERE THEIR APPLICATION PROGRAMS ARE BUSIEST;
SYSTEM OPTIMIZATION, INCLUDING MICROCODING "TOO SLOW" SUBROUTINES,
MAY THEN BE PERFORMED USING THE ACTIVITY INFORMATION. NEVER OF THE
ACTIVITY PROFILE GENERATOR (APG). APG MAY ALWAYS BE ABORTED USING
THE BR DIRECTIVE, E.G., *BR,APG. APGI AND APGL MAY BE OF'D.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM PACKAGE CONTAINS SEVERAL PROGRAMS WHICH
CAN BE USED TO GENERATE ACTIVITY PROFILES.
APGI - FTN4 INITIALIZATION PROGRAM
APG2 - ASMB PROFILE GENERATION PROGRAM - RTE 2 ONLY
APG34 - ASMB PROFILE GENERATION PROGRAM - RTE 3 OR 4
APGM - MICROPROGRAM FOR USE ON 21MX M-SERIES ONLY
APGME - MICROPROGRAM FOR USE ON 21MX E-SERIES ONLY
APGL - FTN4 COMPLETION PROGRAM
TRIG - FTN4 TEST PROGRAM
SINES - FTN4 TEST PROGRAM
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E09501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: OVER
**PROGRAM TITLE:
OVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER ABSOLUTE MEMORY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2116
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
THE PROGRAM REQUIRES 5K OF MEMORY.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE RTE-II/III USER TO INPUT ABSOLUTE RECORDS
FROM ANY DEVICE INTO CORRESPONDING MEMORY. THE PROGRAM IS COMPLETELY
CONVERSATIONAL AND IS PRIMARILY DESIGNED FOR ON-LINE DRIVER
DEVELOPMENT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,OVER(,LUTTY(,LUINP(,LULST))) WHERE:
LUTTY - CONSOLE LUN FOR NORMAL AND ERROR I/O
LUINP - INPUT LUN FOR ABSOLUTE RECORD(S)
LULST - LIST LUN FOR ECHO PRINTOUT(S)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E09601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LOG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE VIRTUAL TIMER SUBSYSTEM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
TIME PERFORMANCE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-I RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE RTE VIRTUAL TIMER SUBSYSTEM IMPLEMENTS A VIRTUAL TIMING SCHEME
FOR RTE SYSTEMS. A VIRTUAL TIMER IS AN ELAPSED TIMER THAT MEASURES
CPU TIME USED BY A PARTICULAR PROGRAM, INDEPENDENT OF THE CPU TIME
USED BY OTHER PROGRAMS IN A MULTIPROGRAMMING ENVIRONMENT, IT ATTEMPTS
TO TIME THE CPU USAGE OF A PROGRAM AS IT WOULD BE IN A SINGLE-USER
NON-MULTIPROGRAMMED SYSTEM.
THE SUBSYSTEM CONSISTS OF A DRIVER THAT MAINTAINS TIMERS FOR UP TO
20 PROGRAMS, AND AN OPERATOR INTERFACE USED TO MONITOR THE OPERATION
AND STATUS OF THE SUBSYSTEM. ANY USER PROGRAM CAN MAKE CALLS TO THE
DRIVER TO DETERMINE THE AMOUNT OF CPU TIME USED BY THE CALLER. IN
ADDITION, INFORMATION ON SYSTEM IDLE TIME IS KEPT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD THE THREE PROGRAMS INTO SOURCE FILES USING THE FMGR.
ASSEMBLE THE DRIVER WITH "Z" FOR RTE-III OR "N" FOR RTE-I/II.
THE DRIVER MUST BE LOADED AT GENERATION TIME, SO YOU WILL HAVE
TO RE-GENERATE YOUR SYSTEM. SEE THE COMMENTS IN THE DRIVER PROGRAM
FOR GENERATION PARTICULARS. COMPILE THE LOG PROGRAM AND ASSEMBLE
THE SUPPORT SUBROUTINES AND LOAD THE PAIR ON-LINE WITH THE LOADR
(BACKGROUND).
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPLETE INFORMATION IN OPERATING THE DRIVER (I.E. LEGAL CALLS) AND
THE USER INTERFACE CAN BE FOUND IN THE ASSOCIATED SOURCE LISTINGS.
BASICALLY, PROGRAM COMMUNICATION WITH THE VIRTUAL TIMING SUBSYSTEM
IS BY MEANS OF EXEC CALLS DIRECTED TO THE LU ASSOCIATED WITH THE
VIRTUAL DRIVER. ALL POSSIBLE CALLS ARE COVERED THOROUGHLY IN THE
DRIVER LISTING.
NOTE THAT THE VIRTUAL TIMING SUBSYSTEM MUST BE ENABLED BEFORE USING.
IT IS RECOMMENDED THAT YOU PLACE A ":RU,LOG,FI,LE" IN YOUR "WELCOM"
FILE. "FILE" SHOULD CONTAIN COMMANDS TO ENABLE TIMING AND OPTIONALLY
SET ANY TIMERS YOU MIGHT WANT. I SET UP TIMERS FOR FMGR, EDITR,
AND OTHER "SYSTEM" TYPE PROGRAMS SO I CAN SEE WHERE MY CPU TIME IS
GOING.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
AS A TEST, SET UP A VIRTUAL TIMER FOR ANY PROGRAM WITH THE "LOG"
USER INTERFACE. THEN RUN THE PROGRAM. RUN "LOG" AGAIN AND DISPLAY THE
CPU TIME USED BY THAT PROGRAM TO VERIFY THAT THE VIRTUAL DRIVER
ACTUALLY RECORDED THE PROGRAM'S TIME PROPERLY. REMEMBER THAT YOU MUST
ENABLE THE VIRTUAL TIMING SUBSYSTEM BEFORE YOU CAN SET THE TIMER FOR
THE PROGRAM (SEE THE LISTING OF "LOG" TO SEE HOW TO ENABLE THE
SUBSYSTEM).
INSTRUMENTING PROGRAMS FOR TIMING TAKES THE FOLLOWING FORM:
.
.
.
CALL EXEC(1,VLU,NAME,5)
.
.
<PART TO BE TIMED>
.
.
CALL EXEC(1,VLU,NAME2,5)
WHERE VLU IS THE LU ASSOCIATED WITH THE VIRTUAL DIVER, NAME AND NAME2
ARE TWO 5 WORD BUFFERS SPECIFYING THE PROGRAM NAME AND A PLACE TO PUT
THE CONTENTS OF THE PROGRAM'S TIMER. THE TWO TIMES WOULD THEN BE
SUBTRACTED TO GET THE AMOUNT OF CPU TIME TAKEN BY THE INSTRUMENTED
SECTION.
YOU MIGHT FIND SOME OF THE SUBROUTINES USED BY "LOG" TO BE USEFUL
("VSUBS" ARE THE SUBROUTINES USED BY LOG), ESPECIALLY "FMTIM" (FORMAT
A TIMER INTO ASCII), "LADD", AND "LFLT" (USED TO ADD AND FLOAT THE
DOUBLE INTEGER FORMS BY THE VIRTUAL DRIVER).
SINCE COMMUNICATION IS THRU EXEC (WITH CORRESPONDING OVERHEAD) AND
SINCE TBG TICKS ARE ONLY GOOD TO 10MS. RESOLUTION, I WOULDN'T TRY
TO TIME SINGLE INSTRUCTIONS OR EVEN SMALL LOOPS, UNLESS YOU'RE
PREPARED TO HAVE YOUR INTERRUPT SYSTEM OFF MOST OF THE TIME! THE
INTENTION BEHIND THE VIRTUAL TIMING SUBSYSTEM WAS TO BE ABLE TO
EVALUATE PROGRAM CHANGES FOR EFFECIENCY (IN OTHER WORDS, TO TIME THE
CPU TIME USED BY THE ENTIRE PROGRAM, START TO FINISH, AND RUN WITH
A SPECIFIC SET OF DATA). RTE DOES NOT REALLY HAVE THE RESOLUTION TO DO
CLOSED LOOP TIMING.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE TWO ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAMS USE MUCH OF THE 21MX EXTENDED
INSTRUCTION SET. TO USE THESE ON NON-21MX MACHINES, THE OPTIONAL
CONTRIBUTED LIBRARY PROGRAM LISTED IN THE "CONTRIBUTED SOFTWARE
REQUIREMENTS" SECTION MUST BE USED. THE 21MX INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE
REPLACED WITH CALLS TO THE SIMULATION SUBROUTINES. I HAVE NOT CHECKED
COMPATABILITY WITH THESE SUBROUTINES, SOOO...
I WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE IF YOUR SYSTEM BLOWS UP WITH THEM.
I WOULD NOT RECOMMEND PERFORMING SURGERY UNLESS YOU ARE PROFICIENT
WITH ASSEMBLER.
THIS DRIVER CAN BE USED WITH RTE-IV, BUT DVT77 MUST BE RELOCATED IN
THE SDA.
E09701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FRW
**PROGRAM TITLE:
READ/WRITE DOS-M FILES IN RTE ENVIRONMENT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
360 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE, OPERATING IN A RTE ENVIRONMENT, ENABLES THE USER TO
READ AND WRITE ON DOS-M FILES. THE FILES MUST HAVE BEEN PREVIOUSLY
CREATED BY A DOS-M SYSTEM. THE ROUTINE CHECKS THE DOS-M DIRECTORY
TO DETERMINE THE ORIGIN AND THE LENGTH OF THE FILE, AND THEN READS
OR WRITES DATA ON THE FILE. TRACK SWITCHING IS AUTOMATICALLY DONE
AND TESTS ARE MADE TO BE SURE THE USER STAYS WITHIN THE FILE. THE
DISC CONTAINING THE DOS-M FILE MUST BE DECLARED AS PERIPHERAL DISC
IN THE RTE SYSTEM.
THIS ROUTINE IS PARTICULARLY USEFUL WHEN DATA ACQUISITION IS DONE IN
A RTE SYSTEM, AND LATER THE DATA MUST BE USED IN A DOS-M SYSTEM
BECAUSE MORE CORE IS REQUIRED TO PROCESS IT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE THE SUBROUTINE. USE AS AN UTILITY (TYPE 7) ROUTINE IN RTE.
THE DISC WHICH CONTAINS THE FILE MUST BE DECLARED AS A PERIPHERAL DISC
TO THE RTE SYSTEM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THE ENTRY POINT IS: FRW
CALLING SEQUENCE:
FORTRAN: CALL FRW(IRC, IFUN, IDAT, INUM, IFIL, ISEC)
ASSEMBLER: EXT FRW
JSB FRW
DEF *+7
DEF IRC
DEF IFUN
DEF IDAT
DEF INUM
DEF IFIL
DEF ISEC
WHERE:
IRC = REQUEST CODE (SAME AS RTE: 1 = READ
2 = WRITE)
IFUN = FUNCTION AND LU (SAME AS RTE I/O FUNCTION)
IDAT = NAME OF DATA BUFFER
INUM = POSITIVE NUMBER OF WORDS TO WRITE
IFIL = 3 WORD ARRAY WHICH CONTAINS THE DOS-M FILE NAME
ISEC = RELATIVE STARTING SECTOR (ATTENTION: 128 WORD DOS-M
SECTORS MUST BE USED!!)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE ROUTINE DOES SEVERAL TESTS. IN CASE OF ERROR, A MESSAGE IS PRINTED,
AND THE PROGRAM IS TERMINATED. FORMAT OF THE ERROR MESSAGES:
NAME : FM XX
WHERE: NAME = NAME OF THE PROGRAM
FM = IDENTIFIER FOR THIS ROUTINE
XX = ERROR NUMBER : 0 1 : THE DISC IS NOT A DOS-M DISC
0 2 : FILE DOES NOT EXIST
0 3 : FILE IS NOT A DATA FILE
0 4 : RELATIVE STARTING SECTOR IS
NEGATIVE
0 5 : NUMBER OF WORDS IS <= 0
0 6 : OUTSIDE FILE LIMITS
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE ROUTINE ALWAYS READS THE DOS-M DIRECTORY BEFORE DOING THE ACTUAL
I/O. THIS CAN CAUSE SEVERAL DISC ACCESSES FOR EACH I/O, AND THUS
LIMITING THE SPEED OF THE SYSTEM. WHEN THIS COULD BE A PROBLEM, THEN
YOU CAN DIVIDE THE ROUTINE IN 2 PARTS (DIVIDE AT LINE 160). THE FIRST
PART WHICH DOES THE LOOK-UP IN THE DIRECTORY, AND RETURNS THE DISC
ADDRESS AND FILE LENGTH; THE SECOND PART WHICH DOES THE ACTUAL I/O
WITH TRACK SWITCHING. IN THIS CASE YOU WILL ONLY CALL THE FIRST PART
ONCE FOR EACH FILE.
E09801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TAPE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE MAGNETIC TAPE FILE MANAGER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES MAGNETIC TAPE DIRECTORY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THE RTE MAGNETIC TAPE FILE MANAGER IS A RELATIVELY SMALL (450 WORDS)
DISC RESIDENT PROGRAM WHICH ENABLES THE USE OF MAG TAPE FOR PROGRAM
STORAGE AND RECALL, AT THE SOURCE OR BINARY LEVEL, BY PROGRAM NAME.
IN ADDITION, NO MODIFICATION IS REQUIRED TO THE RTE SYSTEM, NOR ARE
ANY OF THE SYSTEM RESOURCES AFFECTED. PROVISIONS ARE AVAILABLE FOR
LOADING A SOURCE, RELOCATABLE, OR EXECUTABLE MODULE FROM TAPE; STORING
A SOURCE OR RELOCATABLE MODULE ONTO TAPE; GETTING A DIRECTORY LISTING
OF THE CONTENTS OF A TAPE; REWINDING THE TAPE; DUMPING A MODULE TO TAPE
IN DOS-M FORMAT; AND INITIALIZING A NEW TAPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
CONFIGURE THE RTE SYSTEM TO INCLUDE THE SUPPLIED PHANTOM DEVICE
DRIVER D.37.
INSTALLING MANAGER
1. EDIT LINES 430 AND 431 OF THE TAPE PROGRAM AS FOLLOWS:
/R,430,431
MAGTP EQU --WHERE-- IS L.U. # OF MAG TAPE UNIT
CRT EQU --WHERE-- IS L.U. # OF D.37 PHANTOM
/E
2. ASSEMBLE THE TAPE PROGRAM ONTO THE LOAD-AND-GO TRACKS.
3. LOAD THE TAPE PROGRAM WITH THE COMMAND
ON,LOADR,99,1,2
4. RESPOND TO THE LOADER PROMPT WITH
GO,LOADR,1,2
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
OPERATOR COMMANDS
ON,TAPE,9 INITIALIZE A NEW REEL OF TAPE.
ON,TAPE,2,X (WHERE X IS 1 OR 2)
WRITE A PROGRAM TO TAPE.
X=1 WRITES A SOURCE PROGRAM
X=2 WRITES A RELOCATABLE PROGRAM
NOTE: 1) THE LOGICAL SOURCE FILE MUST HAVE
BEEN IDENTIFIED BY AN LS OPERATOR
REQUEST.
2) WHEN WRITING A PROGRAM, THE DESIRED
PROGRAM NAME WILL BE REQUESTED, AND
MUST BE ENTERED.
3) WHEN WRITING A SOURCE PROGRAM, FOLLOWING
THE NAME REQUEST, THE FOLLOWING PROMPT
WILL BE ISSUED: /EDIT: ENTER EDIT FILE
RESPOND WITH: /E
WHEN THE SOURCE PROGRAM HAS BEEN
WRITTEN, NEW LS TRACKS WILL BE
ASSIGNED TO THE SOURCE PROGRAM ON
DISC.
ON,TAPE, 1, X (WHERE X=1, 2, OR 3)
READ A PROGRAM FROM TAPE.
X=1 READS A SOURCE PROGRAM
X=2 READS A RELOCATABLE PROGRAM
X=3 READS AN EXECUTABLE PROGRAM
NOTE: 1. WHEN READING A PROGRAM, THE DESIRED
PROGRAM NAME WILL BE REQUESTED, AND
MUST BE ENTERED.
2. WHEN LOADING A SOURCE PROGRAM, GIVE
THE FOLLOWING RESPONSE WHEN THE TAPE
STOPS:
GO, EDIT, 1
3. WHEN LOADING A RELOCATABLE PROGRAM,
THE LOAD-AND-GO TRACKS MUST HAVE
BEEN ASSIGNED BY AN LG OPERATOR
REQUEST.
4. WHEN LOADING AN EXECUTABLE MODULE,
ADDITIONAL PROGRAMS WILL BE REQUESTED
BY THE PROMPT:
/LOADR: LOAD
IF THERE ARE NO ADDITIONAL PROGRAMS
TO BE LOADED, RESPOND WITH:
GO, LOADR, 3
ON, TAPE, 3, X (WHERE X=L.U. # OF LIST DEVICE)
LIST THE CONTENTS OF THE TAPE ON THE LIST DEVICE.
A LISTING IS MADE OF ALL THE PROGRAM NAMES PLUS
THEIR TYPE (1=SOURCE, 2=RELOCATABLE)
ON, TAPE, 4 REWIND THE TAPE.
ON, TAPE, 6 DUMP A PROGRAM TO TAPE IN DOS-M FILE FORMAT.
NOTE: 1. THE LOGICAL SOURCE FILE MUST HAVE BEEN
IDENTIFIED BY AN LS OPERATOR REQUEST.
2. WHEN THE PROGRAM HAS BEEN WRITTEN, NEW
LS TRACKS WILL BE ASSIGNED TO THE SOURCE
PROGRAM ON DISC.
PROGRAM NAMES MAY BE UP TO 12 CHARACTERS LONG. A DIRECT LISTING OF
THE TAPE WILL SHOW THAT THE PROGRAM NAME IS INSERTED AS LINE 1 OF
THE PROGRAM WHEN THE PROGRAM IS WRITTEN TO TAPE. THE NAME IS DELETED
FROM THE INPUT STREAM AS THE PROGRAM IS READ.
THE TAPE PROGRAM UTILIZES THE RTE EDITOR, ASSEMBLER, AND LOADER TO
PERFORM THE MAJORITY OF OPERATIONS, THE SUPPLIED D.37 PHANTOM DRIVER
SERVES TO ABSORB UNDESIRABLE OUTPUT FROM THESE UTILITY PROGRAMS.
THE TAPE PROGRAM IS FOREGROUND DISC-RESIDENT, AND EXECUTES FUNCTIONS
3, 4, AND 9 IN THEIR ENTIRETY. FUNCTIONS 1, 2, AND 6 ARE PARTIALLY
EXECUTED BY THE ABOVE DESCRIBED UTILITY PROGRAMS IN THE BACKGROUND.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E09901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DIRCT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DESCRIPTION DIRECTORY FOR RTE FILE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC DIRECTORY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
MAIN AND 3 SEGMENTS REQUIRE 6030 WORDS BACKGROUND MEMORY
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO MAINTAIN A DISC FILE CONTAINING THE
SYMBOLIC NAMES OF SELECTED RTE FILE MANAGER FILES TOGETHER WITH
AS MANY AS 64 CHARACTERS OF DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION ON EACH FILE.
THE ENTIRE FILE MAY BE LISTED ALPHABETICALLY OR SELECTIVELY BY
FILE NAME. ENTRIES CAN BE COMPARED TO THE FILE MANAGER DIRECTORY
TO OBTAIN A LIST OF FILE MANAGER FILES NOT INCLUDED IN THIS
DIRECTORY, AND IN ADDITION, PURGED FILES CAN BE DELETED FROM THIS
DIRECTORY.
THE PROGRAM CONSISTS OF A MAIN CONTROL PROGRAM AND 3 SEGMENTS
REQUIRING A TOTAL OF 6030(DEC) WORDS OF BACKGROUND MEMORY. THIS
CONFIGURATION CAN EASILY BE EDITED TO INCLUDE MORE OR LESS
ENTRIES DEPENDING UPON THE BACKGROUND MEMORY ALLOCATION.
THE HARDWARE REQUIRED FOR THIS PROGRAM IS A STANDARD HP 9600E/F
OR EQUIVALENT. THE ADDITION OF AN HP 2600 CRT AND A LINE PRINTER
SUBSYSTEM IS BENEFICIAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO RUN PROGRAM DIRCT, A DATA FILE MUST BE CREATED
WITH THE SYMBOLIC NAME DIRCT$. THIS FILE CAN BE ANY TYPE AND AT LEAST
71 BLOCKS LONG FOR THE ORIGINAL VERSION OF THIS PROGRAM. THE REQUIRED
LENGTH CAN BE CALCULATED FOR ANY SIZE PROGRAM BASED ON THE MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF FILE ENTRIES TO BE ALLOWED. SEE SOURCE LISTING FOR THE METHOD
USED TO CALCULATE THE REQUIRED LENGTH.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM IS RUN AS FOLLOWS:
*ON, DIRCT (,CT(,LIST(,OP(,INPUT) ) ) )
WHERE: CR = CARTRIDGE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
LIST = LIST DEVICE LOGICAL UNIT
INPUT = INPUT DEVICE LOGICAL UNIT
OP = OPERATORS CONSOLE LOGICAL UNIT
DEFAULT TURN ON PARAMETERS ARE:
*ON, DIRCT, 2, 6, 1, 1
USER EXECUTION OPTIONS ARE ENTERED ON THE OPERATORS CONSOLE IN RESPONSE
TO THE MESSAGE NEXT
THESE INCLUDE:
LIST TO LIST THE DESCRIPTION INFORMATION OF A FILE
DIRECTORY TO OBTAIN AN ALPHABETIZED LISTING OF ALL THE FILE ENTRIES
AND THEIR ASSOCIATED DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION
ENTER TO ENTER A FILE NAME AND DESCRIPTIVE INFORMATION
UPDATE TO LIST ALL FILE MANAGER FILE NAMES NOT INCLUDED IN THE
DIRECTORY FILE
PURGE TO DELETE ALL DIRECTORY ENTRIES NO LONGER IN THE FILE
MANAGER DIRECTORY
CR TO CHANGE THE CARTRIDGE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
LU TO CHANGE THE LIST AND INPUT DEVICE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
?? TO LIST THE EXECUTION OPTIONS
OFF TO RETURN TO THE SYSTEM EXECUTIVE
%% TO INITILIZE THE DIRECTORY DATA FILE. THIS OPTION IS NOT
LISTED ON THE OPERATORS CONSOLE FOR OBVIOUS REASONS.
ONLY THE FIRST TWO CHARACTERS OF ANY EXECUTION OPTION ARE REQUIRED TO
INITIATE THAT OPTION.
A LISTING OF THE EXECUTION OPTIONS IS GIVEN UPON CALLING DIRCT AND EACH
TIME AN IMPROPER DIRECTIVE IS ISSUED.
THE PROGRAM IS SELF-INITIALIZING THE FIRST TIME IT IS EXECUTED AFTER
BEING INSTALLED ON A USER CARTRIDGE. IT MUST BE INSTALLED ON EACH
CARTRIDGE FOR WHICH IT WILL MAINTAIN A DIRECTORY.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IN ORDER TO CHANGE THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ENTRIES, IT IS ONLY
NECESSARY TO CHANGE THE VALUE OF MXFILS AND THE DIMENSION OF THE
VARIABLES NMFIL AND LBLF IN THE COMMON DECLARATION. THESE SHOULD
BE DIMENSIONED TO 4 * MXFILS AND 3 * MXFILS RESPECTIVELY.
A BACK UP DIRECTORY FILE CAN BE KEPT ON PAPER OR MAG TAPE BY
USING THE D1 DIRECTIVE AFTER ASSIGNING THE DESIRED LU.
E10001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: EDITL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE RELOCATABLE EDITOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
EDITOR RELOCATABLE LIBRARY
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ALGOL PROGRAM PROVIDES A CAPABILITY FOR RELOCATABLE OBJECT
LIBRARIES WHICH ARE ANALOGOUS TO THAT PROVIDED BY THE RTE EDITOR FOR
SOURCE FILES. THE PROGRAM RUNS IN AN RTE ENVIRONMENT; IT EXPECTS TO
FIND THE INPUT LIBRARY AND EDIT FILES ON DISC IN RTE FILE MANAGERS FILES
AND IT PRODUCES A RELOCATABLE LIBRARY AS OUTPUT WHICH IS PLACED IN AN
RTE FILE MANAGER FILE.
IN ADDITION TO MODIFICATION OF AN EXISTING RELOCATABLE LIBRARY, LIBRARY
EDITOR PROGRAM ALSO PROVIDES CAPABILITIES FOR CREATING A NEW RELOCATABLE
LIBRARY AND FOR LISTING THE CONTENT OF A RELOCATABLE LIBRARY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E10101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TFER
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FILE TRANSFER BETWEEN RTE AND DOS-M/III
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES COPY DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-I RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
AT LEAST 24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES THE CAPABILITY OF TRANSFERRING FILES BETWEEN
RTE AND DOS-M OR DOS-III SYSTEMS. THE PROGRAM WILL RUN UNDER RTE-I,
RTE-2 OR RTE-3. A DOS-M OR DOS-III DISC MUST BE PLACED INTO A
PERIPHERAL DISC SUBCHANNEL. FILES MAY THEN BE TRANSFERRED FROM RTE TO
THE DOS-M/III DISC, OR VICE VERSA. SOURCE, RELOCATABLE, OR BINARY
FILES MAY BE TRANSFERRED. IN THE RTE HOST SYSTEM, FILES HANDLED MAY
RESIDE IN THE FILE MANAGER, ON LS TRACKS OR ON LG TRACKS. IN THE
DOS-M/III SYSTEM ON THE PERIPHERAL DISC SUBCHANNEL, FILES IN THE
SYSTEM OR USER AREA MAY BE HANDLED.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED: RTE-1, RTE-2, OR RTE-3 AND ASSOCIATED PERIPHERALS.
AT LEAST 24K CORE AND A DISC DRIVE HAVING ONE OR MORE RTE ASSOCIATED
SUBCHANNELS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE LISTING
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E10201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DOSLI
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M/III FILE DIRECTORY LISTING FROM RTE ENVIRONMENT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC DIRECTORY
LIST
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-I RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
AT LEAST 24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES THE CAPABILITY OF LISTING THE DIRECTORY
OF A DISC PACK FROM WITHIN AN RTE ENVIRONMENT. THE PROGRAM WILL
RUN UNDER RTE-1, RTE-2, OR RTE-3. THE DOS-M OR DOS-III DISC
WHOSE DIRECTORY LISTING IS DESIRED IS PLACED INTO A PERIPHERAL
DISC SUBCHANNEL. THE DOS-M/III DIRECTORY LISTING GENERATED BY
THIS PROGRAM IS IDENTICAL WITH THE DIRECTORY LISTINGS GENERATED
BY DOS-M OR DOS-III. THE SYSTEM DIRECTORY AND USER DIRECTORY MAY
BOTH BE LISTED.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: RTE-1, RTE-2 OR RTE-3 AND ASSOCIATED
PERIPHERALS. AT LEAST 24K CORE, AND A DISC DRIVE HAVING ONE OR
MORE RTE PERIPHERAL SUBCHANNELS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE LISTING
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E10301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: UNEXT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
UNEXT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM SEARCHES EACH MOUNTED DISC FOR FILES WITH EXTENTS,
TYPE 3 OR GREATER, AND RESTORES THEM WITHOUT EXTENTS.
IT WILL ALSO, OPTIONALLY RECLAIM FROM TYPE 4 FILES ONLY, ANY
UNUSED BLOCKS FROM THE FILE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN, UNEXT, LU(,RE)
WHERE:
LU = LU OF LIST DEVICE (CRT OR LINEPRINTER)
RE = IF ENTERED WILL, AFTER UNEXTENTING EXTENTED FILES,
RECLAIM UNUSED PORTIONS OF TYPE 4 FILES.
ENTER PACK COMMAND AFTER UNEXT IS DONE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IUBYT - RETURNS VALUE OF UPPER 8 BITS OF INTEGER
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
IUPER = IUBYT(IWORD)
WHERE IUPER = UPPER 8 BITS OF IWORD IN BITS 0-7
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E10401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: STRAK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TEMPORARY, EXPANDABLE FIXED LENGTH RECORD DISC FILE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'STRAK' PROVIDES THE RTE USER WITH A TEMPORARY FILE WHICH IS
AUTOMATICALLY EXPANDABLE. THE FILE IS WRITTEN ON THE SYSTEM
TRACKS AND OPERATES LIKE A RANDOM ACCESS TYPE 2 FILE MANAGER FILE.
IT SUPPORTS FIXED LENGTH RECORDS WITH THE LENGTH SPECIFIED IN A
SETUP CALL. THE PROGRAM IS USEFUL FOR TEMPORARY STORAGE OF DATA
WHEN THE QUANTITY OF DATA CANNOT BE DETERMINED BEFOREHAND.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
A) INITIALIZE CALL - CALL STOPN(J) WHERE
J LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 0 MEANS RELEASE ALL TRACKS
ASSIGNED TO THE PROGRAM
J GREATER THAN 0 MEANS DEFINE THE RECORD SIZE TO BE
J WORDS AND REWIND THE FILE FOR SEQUENTIAL ACCESS.
B) WRITE CALL - CALL STWRT(IER,IBUF,IREC) WHERE
IER = ERROR CODE. ALSO RETURNED IN A REG.
0 = O.K.; -4 = NO STOPN CALL YET; -6 = NO DISK SPACE OR
RECORD EXCEEDS FILE
SIZE
IBUF = BUFFER ADDRESS
IREC = ABSOLUTE RECORD #. 0 OR NOT GIVEN MEANS USE NEXT
SEQUENTIAL RECORD.
C) READ CALL - CALL STRED(IER,IBUF,IREC) WHERE PARAMETERS ARE
THE SAME AS FOR STWRT
SYSTEM TRACKS ARE ALLOCATED AS THEY ARE NEEDED. IF NO TRACKS ARE
AVAILABLE, THE PROGRAM WILL SUSPEND.
STRAK TREATS THE STORAGE AREA AS A RANDOM ACCESS FILE MUCH LIKE
A FMGR TYPE 2 FILE. THERE ARE NO END OF FILE MARKS AND A RECORD
MAY BE READ BEFORE IT IS WRITTEN.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF IT IS DESIRED THAT THE PROGRAM NOT SUSPEND ON TRACK ALLOCATION
FAILURE, THE EXEC CONTROL WORD CAN BE CHANGED.
STRAK ALLOCATES TRACKS LOCALLY SO THAT IF THE PROGRAM ABORTS
ABNORMALLY THE SYSTEM WILL RELEASE THE TRACKS.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: 7900 DISC DRIVE
E10501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LISTF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SELECTIVE FMGR DIRECTORY LISTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DIRECTORY DISC
CARTRIDGE LIST
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'LISTF' PRODUCES A PARTIAL DIRECTORY LIST OF FMGR DIRECTORY(S)
BASED ON USER SPECIFIED CRITERIA. ANY COMBINATION OF THE
FOLLOWING CRITERIA MAY BE SPECIFIED BY THE USER:
1. FILENAME, OR MORE GENERALLY, THE PRESENCE OF GIVEN CHARACTERS
IN ANY OF THE 6 FILENAME CHARACTER POSITIONS.
2. FILETYPE
3. CARTRIDGE REFERENCE NUMBER
4. EXTENT NUMBER.
A FILE MUST SATISFY ALL THE CRITERIA GIVEN BY THE USER IN ORDER
TO BE INCLUDED IN THE OUTPUT LIST. OMITTED CRITERIA DEFAULT TO
'ALL'. OUTPUT MAY BE DIRECTED TO A FILE (NAMED LISTXX) IN
PROCEDURE FILE FORMAT FOR SUBSEQUENT PROCESSING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD AS BACKGROUND PROGRAM
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN TYPE:
RU,LISTF,INLU,OUTLU
INLU LU OF DIALOG DEVICE; DEFAULTS TO 1 IF OMITTED.
OUTLU LU OF OUTPUT DEVICE; DEFAULTS TO INLU VALUE IF
OMITTED. IF OUTLU=2 THEN OUTPUT GOES TO A NEW FILE
LISTXX IN THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE FILE FORMAT:
:--,FILENM::CR:FILETYPE,FILENM::::SIZE
(A PREVIOUSLY-EXISTING LISTXX IS PURGED, THEN A NEW
LISTXX IS CREATED FOR THE OUTPUT.)
LISTF PROMPTS USER FOR FILENAME, FILETYPE, CR, AND EXTENTS
THAT SPECIFY FILES TO BE LISTED. THE FORM OF THE USER
RESPONSE IS:
FILENM,TYPE,CR,EXT
FILENM NAME(S) OF FILES TO BE LISTED. THIS FIELD IS TREATED
AS A 6 CHARACTER FILTER; IF FEWER THAN 6 CHARACTERS
ARE SPECIFIED THEN TRAILING BLANKS ARE USED TO
EXTEND THE FILTER TO 6 CHARACTERS. EACH CHARACTER IN
THE FILTER IS USED TO MATCH THE CORRESPONDING
CHARACTER IN THE FILENAME OF THE FILE. ONLY IF ALL
THE CHARACTER POSITIONS MATCH IS THE FILE A
CANDIDATE FOR BEING LISTED. A MINUS SIGN MAY APPEAR
IN ANY POSITION TO INDICATE THAT ANY CHARACTER IN
THAT POSITION IS ACCEPTABLE. IF THIS FIELD IS
OMITTED, THEN IT IS TREATED AS IF THE USER ENTERED 6
MINUS SUGNS, I.E., ALL FILE NAMES ARE ACCEPTABLE.
TYPE THE FILETYPE OF THE FILES TO BE LISTED; IF OMITTED,
FILETYPE IS IGNORED IN SELECTING FILES TO BE LISTED.
CR THE CR OF THE FILES TO BE LISTED; IF OMITTED, CR IS
IGNORED IN SELECTING FILES TO BE LISTED.
EXT USE OF THIS PARAMETER RESTRICTS OUTPUT TO ONLY THOSE
DIRECTORY ENTRIES WHOSE EXTENT NUMBER MATCHES THE
VALUE OF THIS PARAMETER. IF OMITTED, THERE ARE NO
OUTPUT RESTRICTIONS BASED ON EXTENT NUMBER, I.E.,
EACH FILE AND EACH EXTENT IS A CANDIDATE FOR BEING
LISTED. HOWEVER, IN THE CASE OF FILE OUTPUT
(LISTXX), THE OMISSION OF THIS PARAMETER DEFAULTS TO
ZERO, I.E., ONLY THE MAIN FILE ENTRIES AND NOT THE
EXTENTS ARE LISTED.
AFTER THE OUTPUT IS PRODUCED, A COUNT OF THE NUMBER OF THE
ENTRIES IS PRINTED ON THE DIALOG DEVICE; THEN THE PROGRAM
PROMPTS FOR MORE REQUESTS FROM THE USER. THE USER MAY EXIT
LISTF BY ENTERING CONTROL D.
EXAMPLES OF SPECIFICATIONS:
-,,2
ALL ONE-CHARACTER FILENAMES ON CR 2.
X-----,4,22
ALL FILENAMES BEGINNING WITH THE LETTER X, WHOSE
FILETYPE IS 4, AND WHICH APPEAR ON CR 22.
,,2,1
ONLY THE FIRST EXTENTS FOR FILES ON CR 2. (THIS
ESSENTIALLY PROVIDES A LIST OF FILES HAVING ONE OR
MORE EXTENTS.)
,
,,
,,,
ANY OF THESE WILL SUPPLY ALL THE FILES ON ALL THE
CR.
-TESTS
ALL FILES WHOSE SECOND THROUGH SIXTH LETTERS ARE
TESTS.
&-----
ALL FILES WHOSE NAMES BEGIN WITH & (AMPERSAND).
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THE ONLY TESTS ARE MANUAL COMPARISONS OF THE OUTPUT PRODUCED BY THE
FMGR "DL" COMMAND AGAINST THE OUTPUT PRODUCED BY THIS PROGRAM.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
STANDARD LIBRARY SUBROUTINES:
IGET,CODE,IAND,EXEC,RMPAR
FMP CALLS:PURGE,CREAT,WRITF,LOCF,CLOSE
E10601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: NAMRX
**PROGRAM TITLE:
NAMRX
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'NAMRX' IS AN RTE-II OR RTE-III SUBROUTINE THAT INTERFACES TO
SYSTEM SUBROUTINE $PARS TO BREAK OUT THE INDIVIDUAL FIELDS OF A
STANDARD RTE FILE NAME. THE PASSED BUFFER INITIALLY CONTAINS
NAME:SC:CRN AND NAMR RETURNS THE NAME AS AN ASCII STRING AND THE
SECURITY CODE AND CARTRIDGE NUMBER AS BINARY INTEGERS. 'NAMRX'
CAN BE PASSED A BUFFER OR IT WILL INPUT THE BUFFER FROM A
SPECIFIED LOGICAL UNIT, USING SYSTEM SUBROUTINE REIO.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL NAMRX(IBUF,NAM,ISC,ICRN,ITYPE,ILEN) WHERE
IBUF = INPUT LU OR
USER BUFFER CONTAINING THE STRING TO CONVERT WITH
FIELDS SEPERATED BY COLONS AND STRING ENDING WITH
A BLANK.
NAM = 3 WORD BUFFER FOR RETURN OF THE ASCII PART OF THE
FILE NAME, PADDED WITH BLANKS IF NEEDED, OR A
LOGICAL UNIT #.
ISC = INTEGER VARIABLE FOR RETURN OF SECURITY CODE. SET
TO 0 IF NOT GIVEN.
ICRN = INTEGER VARIABLE FOR RETURN OF CARTRIDGE NUMBER.
SET TO 0 IF NOT GIVEN.
ITYPE = INTEGER VARIABLE FOR RETURN OF FILE TYPE. SET
TO 0 IF NOT GIVEN.
ILEN = INTEGER VARIABLE FOR RETURN OF RECORD LENGTH.
SET TO 0 IF NOT GIVEN.
ON RETURN, THE A REGISTER IS SET TO 2 IF A FILE NAME WAS
PROCESSED OR IT EQUALS 1 IF A LOGICAL UNIT WAS PROCESSED.
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO SPECIFY ALL VARIABLES. THE LIST CAN
BE TERMINATED AT ANY POINT AFTER NAM. ONLY THE REQUESTED
INFO WILL BE RETURNED.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
PROGRAM TEST CALLS NAMRX TWICE. THE FIRST TIME, IT INPUTS
A BUFFER AND PASSES IT TO NAMRX. THE SECOND TIME, IT ALLOWS
NAMRX TO DO THE INPUT. AFTER EACH CALL, THE RETURNED DATA
AND THE CONTENTS OF THE A REGISTER ARE PRINTED. NOTE THAT
IN THE LAST EXAMPLE, THE 7 CHARACTER FILE NAME IS TRUNCATED
TO 6 CHARACTERS.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE FIRST BLANK ENCOUNTERED TERMINATES THE STRING WHEN
IT IS PASSED TO NAMRX, SO MAKE SURE THAT THERE ARE NO
IMBEDDED BLANKS.
E10701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SDLS4
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ROUTINES TO READ INFORMATION FROM CUPERTINO DISTRIBUTION TAPES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
MAGNETIC TAPE COPY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
"SDLS4" IS A ROUTINE WHICH WILL READ INFORMATION FROM CUPERTINO
DISTRIBUTION TAPES (SDLS OR MTLS FORMAT) DIRECTLY INTO RTE FMP FILES.
IT WILL ACCEPT ABSOLUTE, RELOCATABLE, OR SOURCE PROGRAMS, BUT A NOT
YET IMPLEMENTED CHANGE IS REQUIRED TO READ "DATA" FILES FROM THE
MTLS TAPES. THE ROUTINE OTHERWISE ACCEPTS ALL TAPE FORMATS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E10801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DFIL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ALPHABETIC FMGR DIRECTORY LISTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC DIRECTORY
LIST
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM LISTS THE FILE DIRECTORIES FOR ONE OR MORE DISC
CARTRIDGES. THE LIST IS ORDERED ALPHABETICALLY BY FILE NAME. THE
FORMAT OF THE LIST IS THE SAME AS THAT OF THE "LONG LIST" PRODUCED
BY THE FMGR :DL COMMAND.
THE PROGRAM IS SET UP FOR THE RTE II OPERATING SYSTEM WITH HP
7900 DISC DRIVE(S).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO EXECUTE DFIL, ENTER THE FOLLOWING COMMAND:
RU, DFIL, ITTY, LIST
WHERE: ITTY : LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE TERMINAL FROM WHICH
THE PROGRAM IS RUN.
LIST : LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE DEVICE ON WHICH THE
DIRECTORY LISTS ARE TO BE PRINTED.
SUBSEQUENT COMMANDS ARE ENTERED THROUGH THE SAME TERMINAL AS
RESPONSES TO QUESTIONS ASKED BY DFIL
** DFIL DIALOGUE **
**DFIL REQUEST** **USER RESPONSE**
DISC LUN (ENTER LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE DISC
0 TO QUIT)? FOR WHICH A DIRECTORY IS DESIRED.
ENTER 0 TO TERMINATE DFIL
CANNOT LOCK THE DISC THIS MESSAGE DOES NOT NORMALLY OCCUR.
CONTINUE (YES OR NO)? IT INDICATES THAT DFIL CAN'T LOCK
THE DISC INVOLVED IN THE DIRECTORY
LIST OPERATION.
(A) A RESPONSE OF "YES" CAUSES
DFIL TO CONTINUE. WARNING
- THE USER SHOULD ENSURE THAT
NO ONE IS ALTERING THE DISC
DIRECTORY.
(B) A RESPONSE OF "NO" CAUSES DFIL
TO REQUEST A NEW DISC LOGICAL
UNIT NUMBER.
DFIL KEEPS ASKING FOR DISC UNIT NUMBERS UNTIL THE USER ENTERS 0.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
MESSAGE SIGNIFICANCE/RECOVERY ACTION
ANSWER YES OR NO - SELF EVIDENT
TRY AGAIN.
CARTRIDGE NOT TERMINATE DFIL, MOUNT THE CARTRIDGE
MOUNTED. USING FMGR :MC COMMAND, AND RERUN.
THAT IS NOT A DISC ENTER VALID DISC LU . NOTE THAT
THE PROGRAM IS SET UP TO HANDLE
ONLY 7900 CARTRIDGES.
STOP 1 MORE THAN 1000 FILES ON A DISC
CARTRIDGE. THIS PROBLEM CAN BE
OVERCOME BY ALTERING THE PROGRAM
TO HANDLE MORE FILES.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E10901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ROBIN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
OBJECT MODULE LISTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES LIST
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III RTE-IV RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM INPUTS A TYPE 5 BINARY RELOCATABLE FILE NAME (NAMR)
AND PRODUCES A CONSOLIDATED LISTING OF ITS CHARACTERISTICS. THE LISTING
INCLUDES PROGRAM NAME, TYPE, EXTENDED NAM RECORD, LOCAL LENGTH, COMMON
LENGTH, BASE PAGE LENGTH, PRODUCER, ALL ENTRY POINTS, ALL EXTERNALS,
EMA RECORD, AND TRANSFER ADDRESS IF MAIN. THE PROGRAM CAN BE RUN IN
BATCH OR CONVERSATIONAL MODE AND HAS EXTENSIVE ERROR CHECKING,
INCLUDING BREAK CAPABILITY. THE LISTING FORMAT IS SUITABLE FOR EASY
TO READ DOCUMENTATION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
IF YOU ARE LOADING THIS IN RTE 2/3/M, THEN IGNORE THE UNDEFINED
EXTERNAL LOGLU
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:RU,ROBIN [,TERMINAL LU[,LIST LU]]
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
/ ROBIN: FILE OPEN ERROR N
/ ROBIN: FILE CLOSE ERROR N
/ ROBIN: FILE READ ERROR N
/ ROBIN: INVALID INPUT
/ ROBIN: WRONG FILE TYPE
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FDUMP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FMP FILE DUMP
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DUMP LIST
FORMATTING
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
9K CORE STORAGE
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
FDUMP IS A PROGRAM THAT WILL DUMP FILE MANAGER FILES LESS THAN TYPE
11 TO YOUR LIST DEVICE IN A FORMAT MUCH LIKE THAT USED IN THE IBM DITTO
UTILITY. THE RECORD IS LISTED IN 128 CHARACTER BLOCKS, GIVING OCTAL
REPRESENTATION AND COLUMN ALIGNMENT NUMBERS BELOW THE ASCII VALUES.
INPUT IS FROM FILE OR LOGICAL UNIT. BY SPECIFYING THE STARTING RECORD
NUMBER YOU CAN POSITION THE FILE TO A PREDETERMINED RECORD. FDUMP WILL
RESPOND TO THE BREAK FLAG AT ANY TIME.
FDUMP USES APPROXIMATELY 9K CORE STORAGE HOWEVER THE PROGRAM IS SET
UP FOR MAXIMUM RECORD LENGTH OF 1024 WORDS. IF THIS IS LARGER THAN THE
MAXIMUM LENGTH FOR YOUR INSTALLATION THE DCB AND BUFFER AREA COULD BE
REDUCED. THE MAXIMUM CHARACTER OUTPUT IS 1024. FDUMP MAKES FMP CALLS.
FDUMP IS VERY USEFUL FOR VISUAL VERIFICATION AND ALIGNMENT CHECKING
OF DATA FORMATS. INTEGER VALUES ARE NOT PRINTED, HOWEVER, THEIR OCTAL
VALUES ARE LISTED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: FDUMP SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE LISTING
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
FILE MANAGER ERROR MESSAGES ARE DIRECTED TO THE USER'S TERMINAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
WILL NOT TYPE LIST TYPE 11 FILES.
E11101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LDISC
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FMP CORRUPT FILE ANALYZER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES ANALYZER DEBUG
DISC
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IV RTE-III RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO ANALYZE AND VERIFY THE INTEGRITY OF ALL
FILES ON A CARTRIDGE, FILES THAT ARE NOT 0, 1, 2, OR 6. THE PROGRAM
OPENS EACH FILE AND READS ALL RECORDS AND REPORTS ANY ERRORS TO A LIST
DEVICE. A RESULTING STATISTICAL PRINTOUT OCCURS SHOWING SUCH ITEMS AS
TOTAL STORAGE, NUMBER OF FILES, AVERAGE RECORD LENGTH, AND OTHERS. THE
PROGRAM WILL ALSO WORK FOR FILES CONTAINED ON LU=2 OR 3. LDISC MAKES
FMP CALLS TO ACCESS THE FILES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: LDISC SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE LISTING
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LISTB
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FILE MANAGER LIST PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES LIST
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
REQUIRES 8 PAGES BACKGROUND MEMORY
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM LISTB IS A PROGRAM TO LIST AN FMP FILE OF ANY TYPE TO AN
OUTPUT DEVICE IN BINARY-MIXED FORMAT, OR ASCII FORMAT. THE PROGRAM IS
ESPECIALLY USEFUL FOR LISTING OF FILES WITH RECORD LENGTHS OF GREATER
THAN 128 WORDS, AND WILL HANDLE FILES WITH RECORD LENGTHS OF UP TO 1024
WORDS. THE LIST FORMAT IS SIMILAR TO THE FILE MANAGER :LI COMMAND
FORMAT, BUT REQUIRES 130 COLUMNS ON A LINE PRINTER. YOU MAY LIST THE
ENTIRE FILE, OR ONLY PART OF THE FILE. LISTB REQUIRES 8 PAGES BACKGROUND
MEMORY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN: *RU,LISTB,P1,P2,P3,P4,P5 WHERE THE OPTIONAL PARAMETERS ARE
DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
P1 - TERMINAL LU (DEFAULT=VALUE
RETURNED BY MTM)
P2 - LIST LU (DEFAULT=LU6)
P3 - FIRST RECORD TO BE LISTED (DEFAULT=1)
P4 - NUMBER OF RECORDS TO BE LISTED (DEFAULT=ALL)
P5 - LIST FORMAT, ASCII "A" FOR ASCII LIST (DEFAULT BINARY)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
FMP ERROR MESSAGES AND END OF PROGRAM MESSAGES SENT TO TERMINAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DIRC
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTERACTIVE EDIT OF FMP ASSIGNED DISC SPACE
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
DISC EDITOR FILES
DIRECTORY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE DIRC PROGRAM IS AN HP-1000 INTERACTIVE RTE FORTRAN IV PROGRAM THAT
IS USED TO EDIT FMP ASSIGNED DISC SPACE FOR 7900 AND 7905 DISC SUB-
SYSTEMS. THE PROGRAM PERMITS DISC FILE EDITING BY SECTOR ADDRESSES.
DISC FILE ENTRIES IN THE DIRECTORY CAN BE EDITED WITHIN SPECIFIED
RESTRICTIONS SUCH AS NOT PERMITTING FILE ADDRESS MODIFICATIONS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DIRC SOURCE
FILE# 3: XAMFL SOURCE
FILE# 4: UNPUR SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,FTN4,&DIRC,1,%DIRC
RU,FTN4,&XAMFL,1,%XAMFL
RU,FTN4,&UNPUR,1,%UNPUR
LG,1
MR,%DIRC
MR,%XAMFL
MR,%UNPUR
RU,LOADR,99,1
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,DIRC,USER CONSOLE LU#, LIST DEVICE LU#
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
"*** CAN NOT FIND CR# ***"
DISPLAYED AT USER'S CONSOLE AND PROGRAM ABORTED WHEN USER INPUTS CR#
DOES NOT EXIST IN THE CARTRIDGE DIRECTORY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PURGE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FMGR FILE PURGE UTILITY
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES DISC
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IV RTE-III RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
5 PAGES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM "PURGE" IS AN RTE UTILITY PROGRAM WHICH ALLOWS THE USER TO
QUICKLY PURGE A GROUP OF FILES WITH SIMILAR NAMES. IF THE USER WISHES TO
PURGE %FILE1, &FILE1, #FILE1, HE ENTERS "-FILE1" AS THE QUALIFIER. IF HE
WISHES TO PURGE ALL FILES BEGINNING WITH THE CHARACTERS XYZ, HE CAN
ENTER "XYZ---". IT DOES NOT WORK ON THE SYSTEM LU (2 OR 3). BEFORE IT
PURGES A FILE, IT WILL PRINT OUT THE FILE QUALIFIED AND ASK THE OPERATOR
IF HE WISHES TO PURGE IT. HE ENTERS YES, NO, OR ABORT. ABORT WILL STOP
ALL PURGES FOR THAT QUALIFIER.
PROGRAM PURGE WORKS ONLY 1 LU AT A TIME AND THAT LU IS ENTERED BY THE
OPERATOR DURING EXECUTION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: PURGE AND QPURG SOURCE
FILE# 3: LTRAK SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. STORE &PURGE,<RAK ONTO DISK
2. RU, FTN4, &PURGE, TTY, -
3. RU, ASMB, <RAK, TTY, -
4. RU, LOADR
REL, %PURGE REQUIRES 5 PAGES
REL, %LTRAK REQUIRES 5 PAGES
END
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU, PURGE, TTY
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF LU=2 OR 3 ENTERED, YOU GET **PURGE ONLY WORKS WITH NON-SYSTEM LU'S**
IF ABORT IS ENTERED, A STOP 0001 IS EXECUTED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FMGR DIRECTORY LIST
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
DIRECTORY FILES DISC
LIST SORT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
13 PAGES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM DL IS AN RTE UTILITY PROGRAM WHICH WILL GIVE AN ALPHABETIZED
DIRECTORY LISTING ON THE LINE PRINTER. IT WORKS ON ANY FILE MANAGER DISC
LU (INCLUDING 2,3) AND WILL NOT MODIFY THE DISC LU IN ANY WAY. IT GIVES
ONLY 1 ENTRY PER DISC FILE (I.E., IT DOESN'T SHOW EACH EXTENT). ALL THE
FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS LISTED:
1. FILE NAME
2. FILE TYPE
3. NUMBER OF EXTENTS IN THIS FILE
4. TOTAL NUMBER OF BLOCKS IN FILE
5. SECURITY CODE (ALPHANUMERIC)
IN ADDITION, THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION IS LISTED IN THE HEADER:
1. CARTRIDGE LABEL
2. LU#
3. CR#
4. NEXT FMGR TRACK
5. NEXT SECTOR
6. 1ST FMGR TRACK
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. STORE <RAK, &DATE, &DL ON DISC
2. A. RU, FTN4, &DATE, TTY,-
B. RU, FTN4, &DL, TTY,-
3. RU, ASMB, <RAK, TTY,-
4. RU, LOADR
RE, %DL REQUIRES 13 PAGES
RE, %LTRAK REQUIRES 13 PAGES
RE, %DATE REQUIRES 13 PAGES
END
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,DL
ENTER DISK LU# = 13
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
DISC LU NOT MOUNTED
WARNING - - ONLY THE 1ST 1000 DIRECTORY ENTRIES USED (IF LARGER
PARTITIONS ARE AVAILABLE, INCREASE THE DIMENSIONS).
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TATLG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE TRACK ASSIGNMENT TABLE LOG
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
SYSTEM TABLES LIST DISC
DIRECTORY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
206 WITHOUT EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM IS USEFUL AS A UTILITY ROUTINE IN THE REAL TIME EXECUTIVE
SYSTEM. ITS FUNCTION IS TO LIST OUT THE TRACK ASSIGNMENTS OF THE RTE
SYSTEM AND AUXILIARY DISCS (LU2 AND LU3) AT TRACK ASSIGNMENT TABLE
(TAT). IF A TRACK IS ASSIGNED TO THE SYSTEM, 'SYSTEM' IS PRINTED; IF
ALLOCATED AS GLOBAL, 'GLOBAL' IS PRINTED; IF ALLOCATED AS OWN, THE NAME
AND TYPE OF THE PROGRAM TO WHICH IT IS ASSIGNED IS PRINTED; AND IF NOT
ASSIGNED, 'AVAIL' IS PRINTED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. AS WRITTEN, THE PROGRAM WILL OUTPUT TO LOGICAL UNIT 7.
2. TO CHANGE OUTPUT DESTINATION, CHANGE LINE 199 TO REFERENCE A LOGICAL
UNIT OTHER THAN 7.
3. IF AN OUTPUT DEVICE OTHER THAN A 2600A IS USED, THE USER MAY WISH TO
DELETE LINE 13 WHICH IS A JSB TO A ROUTINE WHICH CLEARS THE CRT.
4. ONLY THE FIRST TRACK IN A CONTIGUOUS BLOCK OF TRACKS HAVING THE SAME
ASSIGNMENT IS PRINTED OUT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LIST
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LIST THE RTE TABLES
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
LIST SYSTEM TABLES
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL LIST THE DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE, THE EQUIPMENT TABLE,
AND THE PROGRAM ID TABLE OF A REAL TIME SYSTEM. ONLY A MINIMUM RTE
ENVIRONMENT IS REQUIRED.
FOR THE DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE THE PROGRAM PRINTS EACH LOGICAL UNIT
NUMBER WITH ITS CORRESPONDING EQT AND SUBUNIT NUMBERS.
FOR THE EQUIPMENT TABLE THE FOLLOWING IS PRINTED: EQUIPMENT TABLE NUMBER
NUMBER, SELECT CODE, DRIVER FOR THE DEVICE, A 'D' IF DMA IS USED, A 'B'
IF BUFFERED, LAST SUBUNIT NUMBER, STATUS, AND TIME OUT FOR THE DEVICE.
FOR THE PROGRAM ID TABLE THE FOLLOWING IS PRINTED FOR EACH PROGRAM:
PROGRAM NAME, PROGRAM TYPE, PRIORITY, STATUS, AND SUBSTATUS (WAIT,
SUSPEND, DORMANT, OR ABORT), TIME RESOLUTION CODE, TIME MULTIPLE, NEXT
EXECUTION TIME, A 'T' IF PROGRAM IS IN TIME LIST AND A 'P' IF PROGRAM
HAS BEEN LOADED DURING GENERATION. IF A PROGRAM IS DISC RESIDENT, MAIN
CORE LIMITS, BASE PAGE LIMITS AND A PROGRAM DISC ADDRESS ARE ALSO
PRINTED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. THE TYPE OF THE PROGRAM IS 3 AND THE PRIORITY IS 99. TO MODIFY THIS,
EDIT LINE 3.
2. ASSEMBLE THE PROGRAM, AND LOAD IT DURING SYSTEM GENERATION OR WITH
THE LOADER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THE CALLING SEQUENCE IS:
ON, LIST, P1, P2, P3
WHERE: P1 = LIST DEVICE LU (PRESET TO 6 IF NOT GIVEN).
P2 = PARAMETER WHICH DEFINES WHICH TABLE YOU WANT
= 1 : LIST LU TABLE.
= 2 : LIST EQT.
= 4 : LIST PROGRAM ID TABLE.
YOU CAN ALSO ADD 2 OR 3 NUMBER TO OBTAIN 2 OR 3 TABLES
SIMULTANEOUSLY. [E.G., : P2 = 7 LISTS THE 3 TABLES (THIS
PARAMETER IS PRESET TO 7 IF NOT GIVEN)].
P3 = 0 : LIST ALL ENTRIES IN THE TABLES.
= 1 : FOR EQT AND ID TABLE, LIST ONLY THOSE ENTRIES WHICH ARE
BUSY (PRESET TO 0).
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
FOR EACH TABLE A TITLE IS PRINTED AND THEN THE CONTENTS OF THE TABLE.
LU = EQT [,4]
WHERE LU = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER.
EQT [,4] = CORRESPONDING EQT NUMBER AND EVENTUALLY THE
SUBUNIT NUMBER.
FOR EQT IT PRINTS:
EQ SC DVR## D B U# S TO
WHERE: EQ = EQUIPMENT TABLE NUMBER
SC = SELECT CODE
DVR## = DRIVER FOR THIS DEVICE
D = 0 IF NO DMA IS USED
= D IF DMA IS USED
B = 0 IN NON-BUFFERED
= B IF BUFFERED
U# = LAST USED SUBUNIT NUMBER
S = STATUS (SEE RTE MANUAL)
TO = TIME OUT FOR THIS DEVICE (IN 1/100 SEC.)
FOR THE PROGRAM ID TABLE IT PRINTS:
NAME I PR S-S R MTP HR MI SE MS T P PROG LIMITS B.P.LIM. D TRA SEC
WHERE:
NAME = PROGRAM NAME
I = PROGRAM TYPE
PR = PRIORITY
S-S = STATUS AND SUBSTATUS (SEE RTE MANUAL FOR STATUS)
THE SUBSTATUS CAN BE:
= 0 : NO SUBSTATUS
= W : WAIT BIT SET
= S : SUSPEND BIT SET
= D : DORMANT BIT SET
= A : ABORT BIT SET
R = TIME RESOLUTION CODE (SEE RTE MANUAL)
MTP = TIME MULTIPLE
HR, MI, SE, MS,
= NEXT EDUCATION TIME
T = T IF PROGRAM IS IN TIME LIST
= 0 IF NOT
P = P IF PROGRAM HAS BEEN LOADED DURING GENERATION
= 0 IF PROGRAM HAS BEEN LOADED ON LINE
PROG LIMITS
= MAIN CORE LIMITS (*)
B.P.LIM
= BASE PAGE PROGRAM LIMITS (*)
D,TRA,SEC
= PROGRAM DISC ADDRESS (*)
(*) = ARE ONLY PRINTED FOR DISC RESIDENT PROGRAMS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF THE P3 OPTION IS USED, IT IS AVAILABLE TO MAKE THE PROGRAM HIGH
PRIORITY FOREGROUND.
E11801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MAPIO
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PRINT RTE I/O CONFIGURATION
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
SYSTEM TABLES LIST DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III RTE-II RTE-I
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PRINTS A COMPACT TABLE BY LOGICAL UNIT OF ANY RTE I/II OR
III I/O CONFIGURATION. THE MAP INCLUDES THE LU, EQT, SELECT CODE, SUB-
CHANNEL AND CHANNEL, EQT ADDRESS, DRIVER ADDRESS, AND DEVICE TYPE. THE
OUTPUT CAN BE SENT TO ANY DEVICE AND DEVICE NAMES CAN BE CHANGED BY THE
USER.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: TERMINAL OR PRINT DEVICE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU, LUMPR [,LU]
WHERE LU = LIST DEVICE LU (DEFAULT = TERMINAL LU)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IODVC - CONTAINS THE ASCII PRINT IMFORMATION ABOUT EACH DEVICE.
IGET - RETRIEVES THE CONTENTS OF A MEMORY LOCATION; CALLABLE AS A
FUNCTION SUBROUTINE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E11901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CLASS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTERROGATE CLASS I/O SYSTEM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
SYSTEM TABLES LIST
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE RTE-II OR RTE-III USER TO COMPLETELY INTERROGATE
THE CLASS I/O SYSTEM. IT IS CAPABLE OF DISPLAYING THE ENTIRE CLASS TABLE
STATUS, LISTING THE CONTENTS OF THE CLASS TABLE, AND CLEARING OUT
PENDING CLASS BUFFERS ON A PARTICULAR CLASS NUMBER. THE UTILITY IS
COMPLETELY CONVERSATIONAL WITH ERROR MESSAGES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN WITH OR WITHOUT ANY PARAMETER:
P1 DISPLAY FLAG: =O CONVERSATIONAL MODE
#O FIRST CLASS #
P2 SECOND CLASS # (USED ONLY IF P,#O)
P3 DISPLAY LU
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL ERRORS ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E12001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TRACK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE WORK AREA OWNERSHIP
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
DISC SYSTEM TABLES DIRECTORY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM GIVES A COMPLETE BREAKDOWN IN TABULAR FORM OF THE RTE
SYSTEM AND AUXILIARY DISCS AS TO OWNERSHIP. THE PROGRAM LISTS SWAP
TRACKS FOR PROGRAMS BEING SWAPPED AND THE SYSTEM LIBRARY ENTRY POINT
TABLE. THE DISC SHOULD BE A 7900 OR 7905 DISC.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE SOURCE LISTING.
CAUTION: DO NOT RUN ON A 72 OUTPUT CHARACTER TERMINAL AS OUTPUT EXCEEDS
72 CHARACTERS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E12101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: EQTXX
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ACCESS EQT ENTRIES
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
SYSTEM TABLES LIST
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
EQTXX IS USED TO ACCESS EQT ENTRIES. SPECIFIED WORDS OF AN EQT ENTRY
CAN BE READ OR WRITTEN TO DYNAMICALLY CHANGE ASPECTS OF A DEVICE UNDER
PROGRAM CONTROL. EQT ENTRIES CAN BE ACCESSED BY EQT # OR LU #.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE NORMALLY. APPEND TO USER PROGRAM AS A SUBROUTINE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
CALL EQIOR(6,4,40000B)
THIS CALL WILL CHANGE LOGICAL UNIT 6 TO A BUFFERED UNIT. ANY OTHER
UNIT CONTROLLED BY THE SAME EQT WILL ALSO BECOME BUFFERED.
CALL EQSET(-4,15,-1)
THIS CALL WILL SET THE TIME OUT CLOCK OF EQT 4 TO -1 SO THAT THE
DEVICE WILL TIME OUT ON THE NEXT TBG INTERRUPT.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THERE ARE 5 CALLS:
I) CALL EQGET(LUEQ,IWORD,IVALU,IADR) WHERE
LUEQ = LOGICAL UNIT (+) OR EQT #, (-)
IWORD = RELATIVE WORD OF EQT ENTRY (1-15)
IVLAU = CURRENT VALUE OF THE EQT ENTRY WORD. ALSO RETURNED IN THE
A REG.
IADR = ADDRESS OF THE EQT ENTRY WORD. ALSO RETURNED IN THE B REG.
IADR AND B REG RETURNED 0 IF LUEQ IS AN ILLEGAL NUMBER.
II) CALL EQAND(LUEQ,IWORD,IMASK) WHERE
LUEQ = SAME AS ABOVE.
IWORD = SAME AS ABOVE.
IMASK = 16 BIT MASK.
THE CONTENTS OF THE EQT ENTRY WORD IS LOGICALLY "ANDED" WITH IMASK
AND STORED BACK.
III) CALL EQIOR(LUEQ,IWORD,IMADK) WHERE
SAME AS EQAND EXCEPT THE INCLUSIVE OR IS DONE.
IV) CALL EQXOR(LUEQ,IWORD,IMASK)
SAME AS EQAND EXCEPT THE EXCLUSIVE OR IS DONE.
V) CALL EQSET(LUEQ,IWORD,IMASK)
SAME AS EQAND EXCEPT THE EQT ENTRY WORD IS SET TO THE VALUE OF
IMASK.
FOR CALLS II-V, THE RESULTING VALUE IS RETURNED IN THE A REG AND THE
ADDRESS IS RETURNED IN THE B REG. IF AN ILLEGAL LU OR EQT NUMBER IS
SPECIFIED, THE B REG IS RETURNED 0.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SINCE SYSTEM MEMORY CAN BE ALTERED, BE CAREFUL !!
E12201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DFINE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
REDEFINE PARTITIONS ON-LINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
MEMORY BOOT-UP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO REDEFINE PARTITIONS IN RTE-III WHILE
ON-LINE. CHANGES MAY BE MEMORY ONLY, DISC ONLY, OR MEMORY AND DISC. THE
SYSTEM MAY BE ACTIVE WHILE PARTITIONS ARE BEING REDEFINED. THERE ARE
MINIMAL CAUTIONS (INPUT ERRORS WHICH CAN NOT BE DETECTED): THESE ARE
EXPLAINED IN THE DOCUMENTATION. PAGES WITH PARITY ERRORS MAY BE OMITTED
FROM THE REDEFINED PARTITIONS. PARTITION DEFINITION FOLLOWS THE SAME
PROCEDURE AS THE GENERATOR ITSELF (EXCEPT THE GENERATOR DOES NOT EXCLUDE
PAGES WITH PARITY ERRORS). IT STARTS BY PRINTING THE PAGE REQUIREMENTS
OF REAL-TIME AND BACKGROUND PROGRAMS AND ANY PARTITION ASSIGNMENTS.
MEMORY SIZE IS REQUESTED: THE RESPONSE MAY BE A MEMORY SIZE LESS THAN OR
GREATER THAN SPECIFIED AT GENERATION. THE EASE OF REDEFINING PARTITIONS
PERMITS THE USER TO EXPERIMENT TO FIND THE OPTIMUM FOR HIS APPLICATION
AND TO MAKE CHANGES TO ACCOMODATE OCCASIONAL UNUSUAL NEEDS. FOR EXAMPLE,
A PARTITION EQUAL TO THE MAXIMUM ADDRESSABLE (SAY 14 PAGES) MAY BE
NEEDED FOR A PROGRAM THAT IS RUN ONCE A MONTH. THE REST OF THE TIME, A
14 PAGE PARTITION WOULD BE WASTEFUL OF MEMORY. SOME OF THE QUESTIONS A
USER MIGHT HAVE ARE:
1. HOW MANY PARTITIONS DO I NEED?
2. HOW MANY SHOULD BE REAL-TIME AND HOW MANY SHOULD BE BACKGROUND?
3. SHOULD SOME OF MY PARTITIONS BE RESERVED FOR SPECIAL PROGRAMS?
WHICH PARTITIONS AND WHICH PROGRAMS?
DFINE MAKES IT EASY TO EXPERIMENT WITH THESE PARAMETERS AND CHANGE THE
PARTITIONS WITHOUT REGENERATION. THIS PLACES LESS OF A BURDEN UPON THE
USER TO THOROUGHLY ANALYZE HIS NEEDS PRIOR TO DOING THE GENERATION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DOCUMENTATION AND SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
FILE# 5: SOURCES
FILE# 6: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE DFINE
2. LOAD
NOTE: SWPIT IS A PROGRAM, NOT A SUBROUTINE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE DOCUMENTATION IN FILE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
SEE SOURCE FILE.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL ERROR MESSAGES ARE TOTALLY CONVERSATIONAL.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E12301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MEMAL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MEMORY ALLOCATION DIAGRAM
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
MEMORY STATUS SYSTEM TABLES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PRINTS OUT A DIAGRAM OF THE CPU MEMORY ALLOCATIONS
IN A CONFIGURED RTE II SYSTEM. THE OCTAL STARTING ADDRESS OF EACH
PORTION OF MEMORY (E.G., FOREGROUND COMMON, FOREGROUND DISC RESIDENT,
ETC.) IS GIVEN.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
NORMAL LOAD
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,MEMAL,LIST WHERE LIST IS THE LU DEVICE WHERE THE DIAGRAM IS
TO BE PRINTED.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE:
PAGE A-2, RTE-II SOFTWARE SYSTEM PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING MANUAL.
E12401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CNFG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CNFG
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
HP-IB STATUS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN PROGRAM DESCRIBES IN AN EASY TO READ FORMAT, THE CURRENT
CONFIGURATION AND STATUS OF HP-IB IN, RTE-M, RTE-II, RTE-III AND
RTE-IV WHEN USING DRIVER DVR37 (REV. 1840) WITH SRE PROGRAM SCHEDULING.
THE PROGRAM IS ORIENTED TO THREE CONCEPTS:
1. HP-IB EQUIPMENT TABLE INFORMATION.
2. THE HP-IB BUS LOGICAL UNIT (WHEN ON IS ASSIGNED).
3. THE HP-IB DEVICE LOGICAL UNIT (WHEN ONE OR MORE ARE ASSIGNED).
"CNFG" PRINTS OUT THE CURRENT HP-IB CONFIGURATION IN AN HP-1000
SYSTEM.
RU,CNFG - FOR ALL HP-IB EQT'S AND LUS.
RU,CNFG,INPUT,LIST,EQT - FOR A PARTICULAR EQT AND ALL ASSOCIATED LU'S.
RU,CNFG,,,,LU - FOR A PARTICULAR LU.
RU,CNFG,,,EQT,LU - FOR A MATCHING EQT AND LU.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN STATEMENT:
:RU,BS,LIST LU#, EQT#,LU#
IN A SESSION ENVIRONMENT 'LIST LU#' IS THE SESSION LIST LU.
IN A NON-SESSION ENVIR.,'LIST LU#' IS THE SYSTEM LIST LU.
- A DASH ('-') INDICATES ALL LU'S.
- A NEGATIVE LU# INDICATES A SESSION LU#
- NON-ZERO PARAMETER 4 SURPRESSES AUTO CLEANUP
EXAMPLES:
RU,BS GIVES ALL HP-IB INFORMATION
RU,BS,,,11 GIVES INFO FOR HP-IB EQT 11
RU,BS,,,11,-1 GIVES INFO FOR EQT11 AND ALL ASSOC. LUS
RU,BS,,,11,19 GIVES INFO FOR EQT11 AND LU19
RU,BS,,,,19 GIVES INFO FOR LU19
RU,BS,,,-18 GIVES INFO FOR SESSION LU18
RU,BS,,11,-18 GIVES INFO FOR EQT11 AND SESSION LU18
RU,BS,,,,1 NON-ZERO PARAMETER 4 SURPRESSES AUTO CLEANUP
BESIDES SUPPLYING THE INFORMATION DESCRIBED ABOVE, 'BS' WILL
CLEAN UP EQT INCONSISTANCIES CAUSED BY ASSIGNING A LOGICAL UNIT AN
EQT AND A DEVICE ADDRESS, MAKING A REQUEST TO THE LOGICAL UNIT,
THEN REASSIGNING THE LOGICAL UNIT WITHOUT MAKING A REQUEST TO
UNCONFIGURE THE DEVICE. THE OPERATOR AT THE INPUT TERMINAL IS INFORMED
OF THE CLEANUP.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
NOTE: *** THE SUBROUTINE 'DTACH' (RTE RELOCATABLE LIBRARY)
IS USED BY '&BS' FOR SESSION USERS. NON-SESSION USERS
SHOULD REMOVE THE SUBROUTINE CALL FROM THE SOURCE '&BS'.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE SUBROUTINE 'FTIME' IS OPTIONAL (IT'S IN THE RELOCATABLE
LIBRARY) AND MAY BE LEFT OUT BY INSERTING A 'C' IN THE
LINE CONTAINING THE CALL TO THE SUBROUTINE (IN THE SOURCE LISTING).
'FTIME' SIMPLY INCLUDES THE DATE, AND TIME ON THE OUTPUT LISTING
WHEN 'BS' IS OUTPUT OR SPOOLED TO A LINEPRINTER.
E12501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CLIST
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DISC USAGE DISPLAY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
LIST CARTRIDGE DISC
SYSTEM TABLES DIRECTORY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM DISPLAYS THE INFORMATION FOUND IN THE TRACK ASSIGNMENT
TABLE AND THE CONTENTS OF THE FILE MANAGER DIRECTORIES OF ALL
MOUNTED CARTRIDGES.
AS A RESULT OF SUMMING THE TRACK ASSIGNMENT TABLE ENTRIES BY OWNER
THE LIST IS GENERALLY SHORT, 10 TO 15 LINES.
THE CARTRIDGE LIST SECTION PRODUCES ONE LINE FOR EACH MOUNTED CARTRIDGE
CONTAINING ALL THE INFORMATION AVAILABLE BY THE USE OF THE 'CL' AND
'DL' COMMANDS. IN ADDITION, THE AMOUNT OF AVAILABLE DISC SPACE, THE
AMOUNT OF DISC SPACE CONTAINED IN PURGE FILES, AND THE NUMBER OF
DIRECTORY ENTRIES IN USE ARE DISPLAYED.
CLIST WILL EXECUTE ON ANY RTE-II, RTE-III, OR RTE-IV SYSTEM WITH
ANY COMBINATION OF 2870, 7900, 7905, 7920, OR 7925 DISC'S.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF CLIST IS TOO LARGE FOR YOUR SYSTEM, THE DIRECTORY BUFFER
IS 8K FOR A 7925. IF REDUCING THIS TO 6K IS NOT ENOUGH,
THE DIRECTORY SCAN CAN BE DONE 1 BLOCK AT A TIME.
E12601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: AUTLU
**PROGRAM TITLE:
AUTLU - HP-IB LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
HP-IB SYSTEM TABLES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE CAN OBTAIN THE HP-IB LU FOR A NEW HP-IB INSTRUMENT,
GIVEN ONLY THE MODEL NUMBER AND OPTIONALLY THE INSTRUMENT NUMBER (IF
MULTIPLE INSTRUMENTS HAVING THE SAME MODEL NUMBER ARE PRESENT).
THESE PROGRAMS AND SUBROUTINES ARE FULLY DOCUMENTED IN APPLICATION
NOTE 401-1 CHAPTER 6. THIS APPLICATION NOTE SHOULD BE READ FOR COMPLETE
DETAILS. THE SERIES OF PROGRAMS GIVEN WORK INSIDE OR OUTSIDE OF THE
SESSION ENVIRONMENT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: *MOV1
FILE# 3: &TDLU
FILE# 4: &INPRM
FILE# 5: >DLU
FILE# 6: &AUTLU
FILE# 7: *AUTOP
FILE# 8: >SLU
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
FOR COMPLETE DOCUMENTATION, SEE APPLICATION NOTE 401-1 CHAPTER 6
PART NUMBER #5953-2800
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
RTE DISC BASED SYSTEMS REQUIRED
E12701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ENTPT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LIST RTE II SYSTEM ENTRY POINTS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
LIST SYSTEM TABLES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM ENTPT PRODUCES AN ALPHABETIC LIST OF ENTRY POINTS FOR
AN RTE II SYSTEM. THE LIST INCLUDES THE NAME AND ADDRESS OF EACH ENTRY
POINT. SEE HP COMPUTER SYSTEMS COMMUNICATOR, ISSUE NO.9, 1,JULY,1976,
PAGE 422.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,ENTPT,LISTLU
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
A STOP WILL OCCUR IF THERE ARE MORE THAN 1500 ENTRY POINTS. THIS
CAN BE OVERCOME BY ALTERING THE PROGRAM TO HANDLE MORE ENTRY POINTS.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
HP COMPUTER SYSTEMS COMMUNICATOR, ISSUE NO. 9, 1 JULY 1976,
PAGE 422.
E12801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DISC
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DISC TRADE CONFIGURATION PRINTOUT
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
DISC SYSTEM TABLES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM LOCATES THE PHYSICAL DISC TRACK MAP TABLE ENTRY POINT
($TB32) ON DISC AND THEN PROCEEDS TO PRINT A COMPACT TABEL OF ALL
DEFINED DISC SUBCHANNELS ORDERED BY SUBCHANNEL NUMBER. THE PROGRAM
REQUIRES NO INTERACTIVE INPUT BUT CHECKS FOR A CORRUPT SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE LISTING
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
/DISC: DISC IS NOT A 7905, 7906, 0R 7920
/DISC: CORRUPT SYSTEM. TRACK=NNN SECTOR=NNN
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E12901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LTAPE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 1000 MAG TAPE DUMP ANALYZER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FORMATTING MAGNETIC TAPE ANALYZER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS A 9 TRACK OR 7 TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE OF ANY
DENSITY TO BE ANALYZED FOR SUCH ITEMS AS RECORD LENGTH, PARITY ERRORS,
NUMBER OF FILES, AND OTHER TAPE CONTROLLER STATUS. THE PROGRAM PERFORMS
A COMPLETE HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE CHECK AND PRINTS RESULTING TAPE
STATISTICS AS TO TOTAL NUMBER OF RECORDS AND AVERAGE RECORD LENGTH.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: <APE - SOURCE CODE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,LTAPE [,MAG-TAPE-LU [,LIST-LU [,#FILES]]]
MAG-TAPE-LU -----> LUN OF THE MAG TAPE TO BE ANALYZED.
(DEFAULT=8)
LIST-LU ---------> LUN OF THE LIST DEVICE TO RECEIVE THE OUTPUT.
(DEFAULT=TERMINAL)
#FILES ----------> MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FILES TO BE PROCESSED.
(DEFAULT=1 OR UNTIL EOT IS REACHED)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS A 9-TRACK OR 7-TRACK MAG TAPE OF ANY DENSITY TO
BE ANALYZED AS TO HOW MANY RECORDS THERE ARE ON THE TAPE AND WHAT IS
EACH RECORD LENGTH. THE PROGRAM WILL ANALYZE ANY NUMBER OF FILES OF
RECORDS WHERE THE MAXIMUM RECORD LENGTH IN ANY GIVEN FILE IS 12288
WORDS. THIS RESULTS IN A REQUIRED PROGRAM SIZE OF 17K WORDS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E13001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GFORM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
GFORM - FORMATTER AND EDITOR FOR HP 2640B TERMINAL.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROVIDES PROGRAMMING AID FOR INPUTTING AND EDITING FORMS CREATED ON
AND FOR A HP 2640B TERMINAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: GFORM
FILE# 3: COLON
FILE# 4: RDFRM
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
NORMAL PROCEDURE
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
NORMAL PROCEDURE
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
PROGRAM IS TUTORIAL
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
NOTE: RUN FROM 2640B TERMINAL
E13101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FRSEQ
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FORTRAN SOURCE RESEQUENCER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
FORTRAN EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III RTE-IV RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ACCEPTS FORTRAN SOURCE LANGUAGE STATEMENTS AND
SEQUENTIALLY RESEQUENCES ALL STATEMENT LABELS AS THEY OCCUR IN
COLUMNS 1-5. THE PROGRAM IS INTERACTIVE AND THE RESULTING OUTPUT IS
ALSO PRINTED ON THE TERMINAL. THE ONLY SYNTAX CHECK PERFORMED IN THE
AREA OF ERRORS IS TO CHECK FOR AN UNDEFINED STATEMENT LABEL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD WITH STANDARD PROGRAM SIZE WHICH SHOULD BE ENOUGH TABLE SPACE
FOR A VERY LARGE FORTRAN PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
RETRY? - RESPOND WITH YE OR NO
UNDEFINED STATEMENT NO. - NO RECOVERY BUT FILE IS CLOSED.
FRSEQ ABORTED
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E13201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TELL AND TELL ALL INTERTERMINAL MESSAGE SENDING
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
MESSAGE MULTITERMINAL TERMINAL
TEXT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
SYSTK REQUIRES 2 PAGES. SMESS REQUIRES 5 PAGES.
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE IS COMPOSED OF TWO MAIN PROGRAMS.
SYSTK ENABLES MESSAGE COMMUNICATION BETWEEN TWO TERMINALS IN A MTM
ENVIRONMENT. UP TO 10/80 CHARACTER MESSAGE LINES MAY BE SENT FROM ONE
TERMINAL TO ANOTHER. CONTROL MAY BE MAINTAINED AT ONE TERMINAL OR PASSED
ALONG WITH / OR WITHOUT A MESSAGE TO THE SECOND TERMINAL. FUNCTIONS ARE
DETERMINED THROUGH 4 COMMANDS PRECEEDED BY A PROGRAM PROMPT (?):
1. TEXT - READ THE CURRENT CONTROL TTY'S MESSAGE (?? AT THE START
OF A LINE RETURNS TO PROMPT OR 10 LINES, WHICHEVER COMES
FIRST).
2. SEND - OUTPUT THE CURRENT MESSAGE BUFFER AND RETAIN CONTROL.
3. GIVE - OUTPUT THE CURRENT MESSAGE BUFFER (IF ANY) AND PASS
CONTROL TO NEXT USER.
4. END - TERMINATE SYSTK.
SMESS ENABLES SYSTEM CONSOLE (OR INITIATOR) TO OUTPUT A MESSAGE TO ALL
TTY'S IN A MTM ENVIRONMENT.
UP TO 10/80 CHARACTER MESSAGE LINES MAY BE SENT / TEXT-SEND COMMAND. THE
FIRST MESSAGE SENT ALSO INCLUDES THE GREGORIAN DATE AND CURRENT TIME.
SMESS FUNCTIONS ARE DETERMINED THROUGH 3 COMMANDS PRECEEDED BY A PROGRAM
PROMPT (?):
1. TEXT - READ UP TO 10 LINES OF MESSAGE FROM THE SYSTEM CONSOLE
(OR INITIATOR).
(10 LINES OR A (??) AT THE START OF A LINE RETURNS
PROMPT).
2. SEND - OUTPUT THE MESSAGE TO ALL ONLINE TERMINALS.
3. END - TERMINATE SMESS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
FILE# 5: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD SYSTK AS FOREGROUND DISC OR CORE RESIDENT.
2. LOAD SMESS AS FOREGROUND DISC RESIDENT-
5 PAGES REQUIRED -(SIZE MAY BE REDUCED BY REMOVING DATE AND TIME CODE
AS IT BRINGS IN THE FORMATTER ETC.)
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
INCLUDED IN SOURCE LISTING FOR SYSTK.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SYSTK - USER MAY WISH TO MODIFY ROUTINE TO LOCK DEVICES OUT FROM OTHER
ROUTINES.
SMESS - ONLY TYPE 'O' DEVICES ARE QUALIFIED AS OUTPUT. BIT'S 14 AND 15
OF EQT WORD 5 ARE TESTED FOR DEVICE DOWN ONLY. USER MAY WISH TO
PUT MORE RESTRICTIONS ON DEVICE AVAILABILITY.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
INVALID COMMANDS PASS CONTROL TO PROMPT CHARACTER.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E13301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP-IB PERFORMANCE UTILITY
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
HP-IB PERFORMANCE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PERFORMANCE UTILITY IS A SERIES OF PROGRAMS WRITTEN TO CHARACTERIZE
THE REAL TIME MINICOMPUTER OR THE HP-IB.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SPEED SOURCE
FILE# 3: ETIME SOURCE
FILE# 4: MEMAA SOURCE
FILE# 5: CMPUT SOURCE
FILE# 6: TIMEX SOURCE
FILE# 7: COLON SOURCE
FILE# 8: FIGUR SOURCE
FILE# 9: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E13401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CAMAC
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CAMAC DRIVER PACKAGE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER CAMAC
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THE CAMAC DRIVER PACKAGE OPERATES ON A HP 2100 OR HP 21MX COMPUTER
UNDER RTE-II, RTE-III, OR RTE-IV. THE PACKAGE CONSISTS OF
1. A CAMAC DRIVER (I/O HANDLER) (DVA54). THIS IS A SYSTEM RESIDENT
ROUTINE ALLOWING USER PROGRAM ACCESS TO CAMAC COMPATIBLE
EQUIPMENT.
2. A INTERACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM (CAM2). THIS IS AN INTERACTIVE
PROGRAM USED FOR TESTING CAMAC EQUIPMENT AND THE DRIVER.
3. AN ARRAY INITIALIZATION SUBROUTINE (FILL). THIS SUBROUTINE WILL
INITIALIZE AN ARRAY TO ANY DESIRED VALUE. ALL ENTRIES IN THE ARRAY
WILL CONTAIN THE SAME VALUE. THIS SUBROUTINE IS CALLED BY CAM2.
4. THE CAMAC DRIVER PACKAGE RUNS ON THE HP 2100 OR HP 21MX COMPUTER
PLUS WITH ONE MORE OF THE FOLLOWING:
1) PHYSICAL DATA 515 DIGITAL RECORDER SYSTEM
2) CAMAC CRATE WITH BORER CRATE CONTROLLER
3) AN LSI-11 WHICH SIMULATES A BORER CRATE CONTROLLER
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: CAMAC2- USED FOR TESTING CAMAC EQUIP. AND DRIVER.
FILE# 3: CAMAC3 - SYS. RESIDENT FOR ACCESS TO CAMAC EQUIP.
FILE# 4: CAMAC4 - INITIALIZE ARRAY TO DESIRED VALUES.
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD AND RUN INSTRUCTIONS.
1. DRIVER (DVA54). THIS DRIVER OPERATES IN TWO MODES:
A. NORMAL MODE. THIS IS SELECTED BY SPECIFYING "N" ON THE "ASMB"
CONTROL STATEMENT. WHEN OPERATING IN THIS MODE, THE DRIVER IS A
STANDARD RTE DRIVER, AND MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE SYSTEM AT
GENERATION TIME. IN THE PROGRAM INPUT PHASE OF THE GENERATION
ANSWER FILE, THIS IS THE LINE "REL,%DVA54".
B. "DEBUG" MODE. THIS IS SELECTED BY SPECIFYING "Z" IN THE "ASMB"
CONTROL STATEMENT. WHEN OPERATING IN THIS MODE, THE DRIVER IS
LOADED AS A SUBROUTINE WITH THE PROGRAM THAT USES IT. THE "Z"
ENABLES THE ASSEMBLY OF FORTRAN CALLABLE SUBROUTINES WHICH WILL
ADJUST THE EQUIPMENT TABLE TO POINT TO THE VERSION OF THE DRIVER
LOADED WITH THE PROGRAM THAT CALLS IT.
W A R N I N G S !!!
1. "DEBUG" MODE IS VALID ONLY FOR RTE-II. DO NOT TRY TO USE IT
FOR RTE-III OR RTE-IV.
2. THE CALLING PROGRAM MUST BE LOCKED INTO CORE WHEN USING THE
DRIVER IN "DEBUG" MODE.
3. ONLY ONE PROGRAM AT A TIME MAY USE THE DEVICE BEING ACCESSED
BY THE DRIVER.
DEVICE SPECIFICATIONS:
THE BORER INTERFACE IS ASSUMED TO BE A TWO-CARD DEVICE. IT IS TO
BE CONFIGURED SUCH THAT SLOT "SC" IS THE COMMAND CHANNEL, AND SLOT
"SC+1" IS THE DATA CHANNEL.
THE PHYSICAL DATA 515 IS A ONE-CARD DEVICE.
IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE LSI-11 REQUIRES ONE INTERFACE CARD.
EQUIPMENT TABLE SPECIFICATION:
AN EQUIPMENT TABLE SPECIFICATION SHOULD LOOK LIKE:
SC,DVA54,D,T=TTT
WHERE
SC = SELECT CODE OF THE DEVICE. FOR THE BORER INTERFACE, THIS
IS THE SELECT CODE OF THE COMMAND CHANNEL.
TTT = TIME-OUT VALUE. THIS VALUE SHOULD DEPEND UPON THE DATA
TRANSFER RATE BETWEEN THE DEVICE AND THE COMPUTER.
SUBCHANNEL SPECIFICATION:
THE FOLLOWING SUBCHANNEL ASSIGNMENTS SHOULD BE USED:
SUBCHANNEL 0 = PHYSICAL DATA 515
SUBCHANNEL 1 = AN LSI-11 SYSTEM
SUBCHANNEL 3 = A BORER INTERFACE
FOR OTHER DEVICES THAT MAY BE INTERFACED WITH THIS DRIVER, THE
FOLLOWING RULES SHOULD BE FOLLOWED:
1. SUBCHANNELS 0 AND 1 ARE FOR 1-SLOT DEVICES.
2. SUBCHANNELS GREATER THAN 1 ARE FOR 2-SLOT DEVICES.
3. EVEN SUBCHANNELS ARE FOR DEVICES THAT RUN IN DMA "FREE-
RUN" MODE (NO STC FOR EACH WORD TRANSFERRED).
4. ODD SUBCHANNELS ARE FOR DEVICES THAT RUN IN "HANDSHAKE"
MODE (STC REQUIRED FOR EACH WORD TRANSFERRED).
INTERRUPT TABLE SPECIFICATION:
THE INTERRUPT TABLE SPECIFICATION FOR THIS DRIVER SHOULD LIKE:
SC,EQT,EEE
WHERE
SC = SELECT CODE OF THE DEVICE.
EEE = EQUIPMENT TABLE NUMBER OF THE DEVICE.
EXAMPLE: THE FOLLOWING EXAMPLE DEMONSTRATES THESE PRINCIPLES:
* PROGRAM INPUT PHASE:
REL,%DVA54 * CAMAC DRIVER
.
.
.
* EQUIPMENT TABLE ENTRIES
.
.
.
21,DVA54,D,T=500 * EQT 21 = PHYSICAL DATA 515
22,DVA54,D,T=500 * EQT 22 = AN LSI-11 SYSTEM
23,DVA54,D,T=500 * EQT 23 = A BORER INTERFACE
.
.
.
* DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE (LU) ENTRIES
.
.
.
21,0 * LU 21 = PHYSICAL DATA 515
22,1 * LU 22 = AN LSI-11 SYSTEM
23,3 * LU 23 = BORER INTERFACE
.
.
.
*INTERRUPT TABLE ENTRIES
.
.
.
21,EQT,21 * SC 21 = PHYSICAL DATA 515
22,EQT,22 * SC 22 = LSI-11 SYSTEM
23,EQT,23 * SC 23 = BORER COMMAND CHANNEL
24,EQT,23 * SC 24 = BORER DATA CHANNEL
2. CAMAC DIAGNOSTIC AND TEST PROGRAM (CAM2)
CAM2 ALSO OPERATES IN TWO MODES, CORRESPONDING TO THE MODES OF
OPERATION OF THE DRIVER:
A. NORMAL MODE. THIS MODE IS SELECTED BY NOT SPECIFYING THE "D" IN
THE "FTN4" CONTROL STATEMENT. THIS MODE IS FOR USE WITH THE
NORMAL MODE OF THE DRIVER. THE MEMORY RESIDENT VERSION OF THE
DRIVER IS USED.
B. "DEBUG" MODE. THIS MODE IS SELECTED BY SPECIFYING "D" IN THE
"FTN4" CONTROL STATEMENT. THIS MODE IS FOR USE WITH THE "DEBUG"
MODE OF THE DRIVER. THE DRIVER MUST BE INCLUDED WITH THE
PROGRAM AT LOAD TIME.
LOADING CAM2.
WHEN USING THE RTE-IV OR THE DS/1000 LOADER, THE FOLLOWING LOAD
FILE SHOULD BE USED TO LOAD CAM2:
REL,%CAM2,, LOAD MAIN PROGRAM
REL,%DVA54,, LOAD DRIVER IF DRIVER AND CAM2
IN "DEBUG" MODE
REL,%FILL,, LOAD ARRAY INITIALIZATION
SUBROUTINE
END
WHEN USING THE RTE-II LOADER, USE THE FOLLOWING FILE MANAGER
PROCEDURE FILE:
:LG,1,,, ALLOCATE SOME LOAD AND GO
TRACKS
:MR,%CAM2,,, MOVE MAIN PROGRAM CAM2
:MR,%DVA54,,, MOVE DRIVER IF DRIVER AND CAM2
IN "DEBUG" MODE
:MR,%FILL,,, MOVE ARRAY INITIALIZATION
SUBROUTINE
:RU,LOADR,99,6,,,,, RUN LOADER, SPECIFYING LOAD
AND GO AS INPUT.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN INSTRUCTIONS ARE IN THE LOAD INSTRUCTIONS SECTION.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
EXAMPLE INPUT/OUTPUT (TEST CASE)
THESE EXAMPLES WILL INVOLVE INTERACTION WITH TWO TYPES OF SYSTEMS.
1. IN THE PHYSICAL DATA 515 SYSTEM, THE "N" FIELD (BITS 13-9) OF THE
COMMAND WORD IS THE MODULE ADDRESS. THE MASTER CONTROL UNIT (MCU)
IS AT MODULE ADDRESS 1. MODULE NUMBER 1 IS AT MODULE ADDRESS 2,
MODULE NUMBER 2 IS AT MODULE ADDRESS 3, AND SO ON. THE LOGICAL
UNIT OF THE PHYSICAL DATA IS LU 10.
PHYSICAL DATA EXAMPLE
*ON,FMG01
:RU,CAM2
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
3,10,1,0,1,0,26 - ARM PHYSICAL DATA (MCU)
COMMAND SUBMITTED IS 001021
CAMAC LU IS 10
CAMAC STATUS = 026000, TRANSMISSION LOG = 1 WORDS
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
1,10,1,1,1,0,4 - READ TIME BASE AND STATUS FROM MCU
COMMAND SUBMITTED IS 10
CAMAC STATUS = 026000, TRANSMISSION LOG = 1 WORDS
1 002417
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
1,10,1,1,2,0,1 - READ ATTENUATOR SETTING AND OVERFLOW FROM MODULE
NUMBER 1
CAMAC LU IS 10
CAMAC STATUS = 026000, TRANSMISSION LOG = 1 WORDS
1 177767
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
1,10,25,2,2,0,0 - READ OUT MEMORY OF MODULE NUMBER 1 TO LIST OU ON LINE
PRINTER, TYPE 1,10,25,2,2,0,0,6
COMMAND SUBMITTED IS 102000
CAMAC LU IS 10
CAMAC STATUS = 027000, TRANSMISSION LOG = 25 WORDS
1 001454 000000 000000 000000 000000
000000 000000 000000 000000 000000
000000 000000 000000 000000 000000
000000 000000 000000 000000 000000
000000 000000 000000 000000 000000
REQUEST, LU, - WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
/E
CAM2 : STOP 0077
:EX
&END FMGR
&END FMGR
2. BORER INTERFACE
INTERACTION WILL BE WITH A CAMAC DATAWAY DISPLAY LOCATED IN CRATE.
STATION 22 ("N" = 22). THE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE BORER INTERFACE IS LU
17.
*ON, FMG01
:RU,CAM2
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
3,17,1,0,22,0,9
COMMAND SUBMITTED IS 026011
CAMAC LU IS 17
CAMAC STATUS = 026300, TRANSMISSION LOG = 1 WORDS
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
2,17,1,0,22,0,16,123456B - WRITE 123456B TO DATAWAY DISPLAY
COMMAND SUBMITTED IS 026020
CAMAC LU IS 17
CAMAC STATUS = 026300, TRANSMISSION LOG = 1 WORDS
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
1,17,1,0,22,0,0 - READ IT BACK
COMMAND SUBMITTED IS 026000
CAMAC LU IS 17
CAMAC STATUS = 026300, TRANSMISSION LOG = 1 WORDS
1 123456
REQUEST, LU, # WORDS, M, N, A, F, LIST/DATA??
1,17,25,1,22,0,0 - READ DMA FROM DATAWAY DISPLAY TO LIST ON LINE
PRINTER, TYPE IN 1,17,25,1,22,0,0,6
COMMAND SUBMITTED IS 066000
CAMAC LU IS 17
CAMAC STATUS = 026300, TRANSMISSION LOG = 25 WORDS
1 123456 123456 123456 123456 123456
123456 123456 123456 123456 123456
123456 123456 123456 123456 123456
123456 123456 123456 123456 123456
123456 123456 123456 123456 123456
/E EXIT CAM2
CAM2 : STOP 0077
:EX
&END FMGR
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
THE CAMAC DRIVER PACKAGE CONSISTS OF THREE PARTS:
1. AN RTE DRIVER (DVA54) WHICH IS USED TO HANDLE THE FOLLOWING
DEVICES:
A. PHYSICAL DATA 515 TRANSIENT RECORDERS
B. CAMAC CRATE WITH A BORER CRATE CONTROLLER
C. LSI-11, WHICH SIMULATES A BORER CRATE CONTROLLER
2. AN INTERACTIVE DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM (CAM2), WHICH THE USER USES
TO ISSUE COMMANDS TO THE DRIVER. THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES A TEST
FOR BOTH THE DRIVER AND THE PHYSICAL DATA/CAMAC/LSI-11 SYSTEMS
WHICH IT IS SUPPOSED TO HANDLE.
3. AN ARRAY INITIALIZATION SUBROUTINE, FILL, WHICH IS CALLED BY
CAM2.
THE CAMAC DRIVER (DVA54).
THIS DRIVER IS CALLED IN THE RTE SYSTEM BY USING ONE OF THE FOLLOWING
EXEC CALLS:
1. READ -
CALL EXEC(1,LU,IBUF,LENGTH,MNAF)
2. WRITE (BORER OR LSI-11 ONLY) -
CALL EXEC(2,LU,IBUF,LENGTH,MNAF)
3. CONTROL -
CALL EXEC(3,LU,NAF)
WHERE
LU = LOGICAL UNIT OF DEVICE
IBUF = BUFFER INTO WHICH DATA IS READ, OR
BUFFER FROM WHICH DATA IS WRITTEN.
LENGTH = NUMBER OF WORDS IN THAT BUFFER. NOTE THAT THIS MUST
BE THE POSITIVE NUMBER OF WORDS.
MNAF = CAMAC COMMAND IN THE FOLLOWING FORMAT:
BITS 15 - 14 = MODE (M)
BITS 13 - 9 = STATION NUMBER (N)
BITS 8 - 5 = SUBADDRESS (A)
BITS 4 - 0 = FUNCTION (F)
NAF = CAMAC COMMAND WITH M = 0.
NOTES:
1. IT IS THE CALLING PROGRAM'S RESPONSIBILITY TO SEE THAT THE COMMAND
IS IN THE RIGHT FORMAT.
2. SEE THE APPROPRIATE DOCUMENTATION FOR A MORE DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF
THE COMMANDS FOR A PARTICULAR DEVICE.
DRIVER STATUS RETURNS.
UPON RETURN FROM A CALL TO THIS DRIVER, THE REGISTERS ARE SET AS
FOLLOW:
B-REGISTER - THIS IS THE TRANSMISSION LOG. A TIME-OUT IS INDICATED BY
THE B-REGISTER BEING 0 UPON RETURN. THIS DRIVER HANDLES
ITS OWN TIME-OUT, AND THE DEVICE IS NOT SET DOWN.
A-REGISTER - THIS IS THE STATUS, AS SET IN EQUIPMENT TABLE WORD #5.
THE STATUS FIELD (BITS 7-0 IS SET AS FOLLOWS:
PHYSICAL DATA. THIS FIELD IS NOT SET. A PROGRAM WISHING TIME BASE
AND STATUS MUST USE THE FOLLOWING CALL:
CALL EXEC(1,LU,ISTAT,1,41004B)
BORER BIT 7 = "X" RESPONSE FROM MODULE
= 0 - MODULE DID NOT ACCEPT REQUEST
= 1 - MODULE ACCEPTED REQUEST
BIT 6 = "Q" RESPONSE FROM MODULE
BIT 5 = 1 - A LAM HAS OCCURED
BITS 4-0 = STATION CAUSING LAM
(LOOK-AT-ME INTERRUPT)
LSI-11 IT IS ASSUMED THAT THE "READ STATUS" COMMAND FOR AN LSI-11
IS THE SAME AS THAT FOR A BORER INTERFACE (N(0),A(1),F(0)).
BITS 14 AND 13 OF THE STATUS WORD FROM THE LSI-11 ARE
SHIFTED TO BITS 7 AND 6, RESPECTIVELY, BEFORE BEING PLACED
IN EQT WORD #5.
LOOK-AT-ME INTERRUPTS (LAM)
A LAM INTERRUPTS THE COMPUTER THROUGH THE COMMAND CHANNEL OF THE
BORER INTERFACE. WHEN THE INTERRUPT OCCURS, THE COMMAND CHANNEL IS
READ TO GET THE LAM PATTERN. FROM THE LAM PATTERN, THE BIT POSITION
OF MODULE ISSUING THE LAM IS DETERMINED, AND PLACED IN BITS 4-0 OF
EQT WORD #5.
NOTE: THE LAM CAPABILITY HAS NEVER BEEN USED OR TESTED. SEE THE
BORER INTERFACE MANUAL FOR MORE INFORMATION CONCERNING LAMS.
OTHER NOTES:
1. THIS DRIVER DOES NOT DO ITS OWN POWER-FAIL PROCESSING.
2. ALL TIME-OUTS ARE HANDLED BY THE DRIVER.
3. NO VALIDITY CHECKS ARE DONE ON THE CAMAC COMMANDS ISSUED. THIS
ALLOWS OTHER NON-CAMAC DEVICES TO BE INTERFACED WITH THIS DRIVER,
AS LONG AS THE I/O HANDSHAKE IS SIMILAR TO THAT OF THE BORER
INTERFACE.
CAMAC DIAGNOSTIC AND TEST PROGRAM (CAM2)
THIS PROGRAM IS SUPPLIED AS PART OF THE PACKAGE, AND PROVIDES FOR
THE TESTING OF THE DRIVER AND ASSOCIATED HARDWARE DEVICES. TO RUN CAM2,
ONE NEED ONLY TYPE RTE OR FILE MANAGER COMMAND "RU,CAM2". CAM2 WILL ASK
FOR THE FOLLOWING INPUT, ON ONE LINE:
REQUEST = I/O REQUEST TO BE PERFORMED:
= 1 - READ
= 2 - WRITE
= 3 - CONTROL
= 0, /E, OR EX - TERMINATE CAM2
LU = LOGICAL UNIT OF DEVICE.
# WORDS = NUMBER OF WORDS TO BE TRANSFERRED DURING A READ OR WRITE
OPERATION. THIS FIELD MAY BE ANYTHING FOR A CONTROL
REQUEST.
M = TRANSFER MODE
N = CRATE STATION NUMBER
A = SUBADDRESS
F = FUNCTION
LIST/DATA = FOR READ: LU ON WHICH TO LIST DATA READ. IF OMITTED,
OUTPUT IS TO USER'S TERMINAL. FOR WRITE: DATA WORD TO BE
WRITTEN TO DEVICE. FOR CONTROL: THIS FIELD IS IGNORED.
THIS PROGRAM WILL FORMAT THE COMMAND AND ISSUE IT, AND PRINT OUT THE
RESULTS AT THE USER'S TERMINAL. SEE THE TEST CASE (SECTION IV) FOR AN
EXAMPLE OF AN INTERACTION WITH CAM2.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
1. PHYSICAL DATA, INC., BEAVERTON, OREGON 97005, INSTRUCTION MANUAL
FOR MODIFIED 515 SYSTEM WITH DMA INTERFACE, #1595109, SEC. 515.510.
2. BORER ELECTRONICS AG, SOLOTHURN 2/SWITZERLAND, CRATE CONTROLLER/
INTERFACE TO HP 2100/-14/-15/-16/-MX TYPE 1531A, SERIES NO. 40.
3.
IEEE, NEW YORK, INSTRUMENTATION AND INTERFACE STANDARDS (1976).
E13501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DVM33
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DVM33 RTE-M DISC DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-M RTE-II RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
"DVM33" IS A RTE-M DISC DRIVER WHICH TRANSFERS DATA TO AND FROM
EXPANDED MEMORY INSTEAD OF THE 9885 FLOPPY DISC DRIVE. THIS PROVIDES
THE USER WITH THE CAPABILITY OF HAVING AN OPERATING SYSTEM COMPLETELY
MEMORY RESIDENT, INCLUDING PROGRAM DATA FILES.
"DVM33" SUPPORTS STANDARD READ AND WRITE REQUESTS (EXEC 1 OR 2) AND IS
COMPATIBLE WITH THE EXISTING RTE-M SUBSYSTEMS (FMGR, EDITM, ASMB, FTN4,
ETC).
PROGRAM "INITL" IS USED TO INITIALIZE "DVM33" AFTER BOOT-UP. IT PROMPTS
THE SYSTEM CONSOLE FOR THE NUMBER OF PAGES IN PHYSICAL MEMORY AND THE
NUMBER OF PAGES IN THE OPERATING SYSTEM (MIII ONLY).
EQUIPMENT, LU AND INTERRUPT TABLE ENTRIES ARE THE SAME AS THE FLOPPY
DISC DRIVER "DVR33" EXCEPT DMA, BUFFERING AND TIME OUT SHOULD NOT BE
SPECIFIED IN THE EQUIPMENT TABLE AND THE INTERRUPT TABLE REQUIRES ONLY
ONE (DUMMY) SELECT CODE. PROGRAM "INITL" EXPECTS THE DISC TO BE LU2.
"DVM33" DOES NOT SUPPORT EQUIPMENT SUBCHANGES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: &INITL
FILE# 3: &DVM33
FILE# 4: $MI
FILE# 5: $MII
FILE# 6: $MIII
FILE# 7: $FMGR
FILE# 8: $EDITM
FILE# 9: $FTN4
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
LOAD AND RUN INSTRUCTIONS
ASSEMBLE "&INITL" AND "&DVM33" AND SAVE THE RELOCATABLE CODE. PROGRAM
"RTMLG" (PART OF THE DS-1000 SOFTWARE PACKAGE) IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED
FOR THE RTE-M SYSTEM GENERATION (DONE ON A HARD DISC BASED RTE-III OR
IV OPERATING SYSTEM). IN ADDITION, ALL THE RELOCATABLE MODULES FOR THE
DESIRED RTE-M OPERATING SYSTEM WILL BE NEEDED.
GENERATE THE RTE-M SYSTEM USING PROGRAM "RTMLG" AND THE APPROPRIATE
ANSWER FILE. $MI, $MII, AND $MIII ARE TYPICAL RTE-M I, II, AND III SYS-
TEM ANSWER FILES. "INITL" SHOULD BE GENERATED AS THE START-UP PROGRAM
AND "DVM33" SHOULD REFERENCE THE SYSTEM DISC,LU2. FOR RTE-MIII SYSTEMS
(DON'T FORGET THE PARTITION LOAD PARAMETER WHEN SCHEDULING PROGRAM
"RTMLG". ALSO, SEGMENTED PROGRAMS LIKE "FTN4" WILL REQUIRE PROGRAM
"SGRP" FOR FIRST TIME OPERATION).
BOOT-UP THE SYSTEM AND ANSWER THE QUESTION(S) ASKED BY "INITL". LOAD
AND RUN PROGRAM "FMGR". ("FMGR" MAY ALREADY BE IN THE MI OR MII
SYSTEM). INITIALIZE THE DISC AS FOLLOWS:
:MC, -2
:IN, SC, -2, 2, LU2
:PU, FLOPLK:-32767
:LL,1 THE SYSTEM SHOULD BE READY FOR USE-
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
PLEASE SEE LOAD SECTION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
1) PROGRAM INITL
"NUMBER OF PAGES IN THE MIII SYSTEM (32-304)?" 80
"NUMBER OF PAGES IN PHYSICAL MEMORY (64-572)?" 256
THE ABOVE EXAMPLE IS FOR A RTE-MIII SYSTEM GENERATED WITH 80K OF
MEMORY AND A TOTAL PHYSICAL MEMORY SIZE OF 256K, THIS TELLS "DVM33"
THAT THERE ARE 44 GOOD TRACKS ON THE DISC.
2) DRIVER DVM33
N/A
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS--
1) "DVM33" DOES NOT SUPPORT EQUIPMENT SUBCHANNELS
2) "INITL" DOES NOT VERIFY THAT THE SPECIFIED AMOUNT OF PHYSICAL
MEMORY REALLY EXISTS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS--
21MX-M,E, OF F SERIES CPU, 64K WORDS OF MEMORY AND THE DYNAMIC MAPPING
PACKAGES ARE MINIMUM. ADDITIONAL HARDWARE AS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT THE
DESIRED OPERATING SYSTEM (RTE-MI, MII OR MIII). THE FFP MICRO-CODE
IS REQUIRED FOR GENERATION FILES $MI, $MII AND $MIII.
E13601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RATFOR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FORTRAN IV PREPROCESSOR
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FORTRAN COMPILER MACRO
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
RAT4 IS A PREPROCESSOR WHICH INPUTS RATFOR SOURCE CODE AND PRODUCES
FTN4 CODE. RATFOR IS A STRUCTURED LANGUAGE WHICH CAN BE EASILY
UNDERSTOOD BY ANYONE FAMILIAR WITH FORTRAN. IT IS DESCRIBED IN:
KERNIGHAN B., PLAUGER P., "SOFTWARE TOOLS",
ADDISON-WESLEY, 1976
THIS VERSION OF RATFOR RUNS ON AN HP 1000 UNDER RTE-IV AND REQUIRES A
22 PAGE PARTITION. IT HAS A BUILT IN MACRO PROCESSOR WHICH ALLOWS USER
EXPANSION OF THE LANGUAGE.
RTF77 IS A SET OF RAT4 MACROS AND RUN TIME SUBROUTINES WHICH ALLOW A
SUBSET OF FORTRAN 77 TO BE USED ON AN HP 1000. IT SUPPORTS IF THEN ELSE,
WHILE LOOPS AND OTHER CONTROL STRUCTURES. WITH HELP FROM RTE'S
SPOOLING SYSTEM, MACRO ARE DEFINED WHICH ALLOW FILE I/O USING OPEN,
READ AND WRITE STATEMENTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: _RAT4 -- TRANSFER FILE TO LOAD THESE FILES
FILE# 3: %RAT4 -- RELOCATABLE RAT4 PREPROCESSOR
FILE# 4: %FILL -- ASMB PACK AND UNPACK USED BY RAT4
FILE# 5: #RAT4 -- LOADR COMMAND FILE FOR RAT4
FILE# 6: RF77 -- TRANSFER FILE TO RU RAT4 AND FORTRAN
FILE# 7: MFTN77 -- MACRO FILE USED BY RF77
FILE# 8: %RFLIB -- RF77 FUN TIME LIBRARY
FILE# 9: &RFTST -- SOURCE FOR EXAMPLE TEST PROGRAM
FILE# 10: #RFTST -- LOAD COMMAND FOR RFTST
FILE# 11: &RAT4 -- SOURCE TO RAT4 WRITTEN IN RAT4
FILE# 12: CRAT4 -- COMMONBLOCKS USED BY RAT4
FILE# 13: &FILL -- PACK AND UNPACK USED BY RAT4
FILE# 14: &IQOPN -- OPEN SUBROUTINE
FILE# 15: &IQMAP -- PROGRAM TO SESSION LU MAP
FILE# 16: &IQCRT -- CREATE SUBROUTINE
FILE# 17: &IQERR -- ERROR REPORTER
FILE# 18: &IQCLS -- CLOSE SUBROUTINE
FILE# 19: &IQSTP -- CLOSE ALL FILES SUBROUTINE
FILE# 20: &CIQCOM -- RUN TIME COMMON BLOCK
FILE# 21: &LEN -- SOURCE FOR STRING LENGTH
FILE# 22: &STRUN -- SOURCE FOR STRING TRUNCATE
FILE# 23: &SCOPY -- SOURCE FOR STRING COPY
FILE# 24: &SCAT -- SOURCE FOR STRING CONCATENATION
FILE# 25: &SUBSR -- SOURCE FOR SUBSTRING
FILE# 26: &ITOS -- SOURCE FOR INTEGER TO STRING
FILE# 27: &IGETA -- SOURCE FOR GET RUN STRING ARGUMENT
FILE# 28: %ISHFT -- RELOCATABLE FOR LOGICAL SHIFT
FILE# 29: )RAT4 -- DOCUMENTATION - OUTPUT FRM RUNOFF
FILE# 30: (RAT4 -- DOCUMENTATION - INPUT TO RUNOFF
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE RATFOR MANUAL IN DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE RATFOR MANUAL
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE RATFOR MANUAL
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E13701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RELIA
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INVERSE RELOCATABLE ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INVERSE ASSEMBLER RELOCATABLE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-M RTE-III RTE-IV
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
14 PAGES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL PERFORM AN INVERSE ASSEMBLY OF A RELOCATABLE MODULE
WHICH CAN EXIST IN AN FMP FILE OR THE DISC-RESIDENT LIBRARY. THE
RELOCATABLE CODE CAN BE GENERATED BY AN ASSEMBLER OR COMPILER AND CAN
BE INPUTTED BY AN FMP TYPED FILE. THE PROGRAM USES APPROXIMATELY 9.5K
OF MEMORY AND 3.5K OF TABLE SIZE FOR EVALUATING 700 UNIQUE SYMBOLS. THE
BASE PAGE REQUIREMENTS ARE APPROXIMATELY 1000 OCTAL. THE PROGRAM CAN BE
SCHEDULED INTERACTIVELY OR FROM A PREVIOUSLY PREPARED RELIA COMMAND
FILE. INCLUDED IS A COMPREHENSIVE HELP PROCESSOR WHICH GIVES HELP ON
ALL COMMANDS AT A GLANCE OR SPECIFIC HELP ON A COMMAND BY COMMAND BASIS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: RELIA SOURCE (ASMB,R,L,C,Q)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE RELIA WITH NO SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS.
2. LOAD BY GIVING APPROPRIATE PROGRAM SIZE OVERRIDE OF AT LEAST 14
PAGES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:RU,RELIA[,LU] [,NAMR]
WHERE LU = INTERACTIVE DEVICE LU
NAME = FMP FILE NAME
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
CONTACT CONTRIBUTOR FOR EXAMPLES.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
CONVERSATIONAL AND SELF EXPLANATORY. ALL ERROR MESSAGE INTERPRETATIONS
ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E13801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LOADR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RTE-2 INTERACTIVE RELOACTING LOADER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
LOADER RELOCATABLE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-II
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
"LOADR" IS A RTE-2 INTERACTIVE RELOACTING LOADER. IT READS RELOCATABLE
CODE FROM ANY INPUT DEVICE OR FMP FILE AND PRODUCES AN ABSOLUTE LOAD
MODULE THAT IS READY FOR EXECUTION.
IN ADDITION TO ITS LINKING FUNCTIONS, THE LOADR'S COMMAND PARAMETER
OPTIONS MAY ALSO BE USED TO LIST ALL ACTIVE PROGRAMS IN THE SYSTEM,
PURGE PERMANENT PROGRAMS FROM THE SYSTEM AND ADD OR REPLACE PERMANENT
PROGRAMS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: RELOCATABLE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
RELOCATE THIS MODULE AS A PERMANENT PROGRAM. FOLLOWING RENAMING IN ID
SEGMENTS, USE THE NEW LOADER TO PURGE THE OLD (PERMANENT) LOADER.
OR, INCLUDE THIS MODULE IN A NEW SYSGEN; IT WILL BECOME THE PERMANENT
LOADER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ARE THE SAME AS THOSE FOR THE RTE-III/IV LOADERS,
WITH THE OBVIOUS RESTRICTIONS THAT LB AND SS OPS ARE MEANINGLESS IN
RTE-II, AND THE <PARTITION> AND <SIZE> PARAMETERS ARE IGNORED FOR THE
SAME REASON.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E13901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: TBPRN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CHECKS AN RTE IVA TRACK MAP ($TB32) FOR ILLOGICAL SUBCHANNEL LAYOUT.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
SYSTEM TABLES GENERATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IVA
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
ONE 8K PARTITION
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
TBPRN LOOKS AT THE TRACK MAP ($TB32) IN AN RTE IVA SYSTEM AND COMPARES
EACH SUBCHANNEL CHECKING FOR AN ILLOGICAL LAYOUT. IT WILL GIVE A
REPORT OF ALL SUPERSET, EQUIVALENT, AND BAD SUBCHANNELS AS WELL AS
NOTING WHEN ALL SUBCHANNELS ARE UNIQUE. OUTPUT MAY BE DIRECTED TO
ANY LU BY TYPING RU,TBPRN,## WHERE ## IS THE DESIRED LU. TBPRN
IS WRITTEN IN FTN4 AND ASMB. MODIFICATIONS TO THE ASMB SUBROUTINE
COULD MAKE THIS WORK ON AN RTE IVB SYSTEM. THESE MODIFICATIONS WOULD
BE NECESSARY BECAUSE OF A CHANGE IN THE TRACK MAP TABLE FORMAT IN
RTE IVB.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: &TBPRN -- SOURCE (FTN4)
FILE# 3: &TBRD -- SOURCE (ASMB)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
TBPRN MUST BE A TYPE 3 PROGRAM
TO LOAD TYPE :
RU,LOADR
RE,%TBPRN
RE,%TBRD
EN
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN TYPE:
RU,TBPRN,## (WHERE ## IS THE DESIRED OUTPUT LU, DEFAULT TO YOUR
CONSOLE)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E14001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BEEPR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ADVANCED ATTENTION-GETTING THROUGH SOPHISTICATED TERMINAL BEEPING
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DISPLAY GAMES TERMINAL
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IVB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS IS A NEAT LITTLE PROGRAM THAT I USE EXTENSIVELY, ESPECIALLY AT THE
END OF TRANSFER FILES AND THE LIKE, TO LET ME KNOW A TASK IS DONE. IT
BEEPS THE TERMINAL WITH THE OLD "SHAVE AND A HAIRCUT" PATTERN. THE
SOUND IS SO NOTICEABLE THAT I CAN START SOME PROCESS LIKE A TRANSFER
FILE, WALK AWAY FROM THE TERMINAL (CLEAR ACROSS THE ROOM), AND WHEN
THE TRANSFER FILE IS DONE, IT RUNS BEEPR TO LET ME KNOW I NEED TO RE-
TURN. THERE'S NO MISTAKING THE SOUND.
THIS PROGRAM CAN BE USED IN THIS 'ATTENTION-GETTING' MANNER, OR MAY BE
USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH GAMES OR DEMONSTRATIONS.
INCLUDED WITH BEEPR IS A PROGRAM CALLED CHYME WHICH TAKES THE IDEA ONE
STEP FURTHER BY DRAWING A PICTURE OF THE LIBERTY BELL ON A 2648 TER-
MINAL (USING ESCAPE SEQUENCES) THEN LEAVING THE PICTURE THERE WHILE IT
RUNS BEEPR. AN EXAMPLE OF A LITTLE AUDIO-VISUAL FLASHYNESS.
BEEPR USES EXEC CALLS TO RE-SCHEDULE ITSELF WITH VARYING OFFSETS TO
ATTAIN THE RHYTHM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: &BEEPR - BEEPR SOURCE
FILE# 3: &CHYME - CHYME SOURCE
FILE# 4: /CHYME - RP'S BEEPR, THEN RUNS CHYME
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,BEEPR,LU,OFFSET
WHERE: LU = LU NUMBER OF TERMINAL TO BEEP
OFFSET = DETERMINES THE SPEED OF THE BEEP PATTERN
DEFAULT IS 9
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E14101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BKUP!
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ON-LINE LOAD OF !DSKUP FROM DISC FILE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DISC FILES
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
BKUP! IS A PROGRAM THAT RUNS ON-LINE AND LOADS FROM A DISC FILE THE HP
BACKUP UTILITY NAMED !DSKUP. NEXT IT TRANSFERS TO !DSKUP IN SUCH A WAY
THAT IT (!DSKUP) COMES UP RUNNING AT THE SYSTEM CONSOLE. AT THE POINT
OF TRANSFER RTE IS ABORTED. APPROPRIATE WARNING MESSAGES ARE PRINTED
AND A CHANCE TO ABORT IS GIVEN BEFORE THE TRANSFER TO !DSKUP.
BKUP! PROVIDES USERS OF RTE A CONVENIENT WAY TO LOAD !DSKUP AND REMOVES
THE NECESSITY FOR THEM TO HAVE MINI-CARTRIDGES OR PAPER TAPE.
BKUP! COULD BE EASILY MODIFIED TO LOAD ANY ABSOLUTE PROGRAM.
!BKUP IS ONLY FOR MAPPED RTE SYSTEMS. !DSKUP MUST BE ON AN ACCESSIBLE
DISC FILE.
REFER TO THE RTE UTILITY MANUAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: !BKUP SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
COMPILE SOURCE INTO %BKUP!.
:RU,LOADR
SZ,16
RE,%BKUP!
END
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:RU,BKUP!
(WARNINGS PRINTED)
CONTINUE? (YE REQUIRED TO CONTINUE, ANY OTHER ANSWER
ABORTS BKUP!)
TASK?
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
HLT 102055 ADDRESS ERROR
HLT 102011 CHECK SUM
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E14201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DEVICE INITIALIZATION AND I/O SUBROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
I/O CASSETTE FILES
MAGNETIC TAPE PRINTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IVB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THESE ARE A GROUP OF SUBROUTINES THAT HANDLE I/O TO DISC FILES AND TO
VARIOUS DEVICES. FOUR MAIN SUBROUTINES INITIALIZE FILES OR DEVICES FOR
INPUT AND FOR OUTPUT, AND THEY PERFORM INPUT OR OUTPUT TO EITHER DISC
FILES OR TO MAG TAPE, MINICARTRIDGE, OR LINE PRINTER.
THE ROUTINES DO EXTENSIVE STATUS AND ERROR CHECKING ON EITHER THE DISC
OR THE DEVICES, AVOIDING THE PROBLEMS INVOLVED WITH HAVING A PROGRAM
ABORT BECAUSE SOMETHING WAS NOT READY.
THESE ROUTINES USE EXEC & REIO I/O, CONTROL REQUESTS, AND STATUS CHECK-
ING.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: &INITW - INITIALIZE FOR WRITE
FILE# 3: &INITR - INITIALIZE FOR READ
FILE# 4: &OUTPT - OUTPUT TO FILE OR DEVICE
FILE# 5: &INPUT - INPUT FROM FILE OR DEVICE
FILE# 6: &FILU - INPUT & PARSE FILE NAMR OR LU NUMBER
FILE# 7: &TRMRD - INPUT RESPONSE FROM TERMINAL
FILE# 8: &YESNO - INPUT YES OR NO RSPONSE FROM TERMINAL
FILE# 9: &RESET - "REWINDS" DEVICES OR FILES
FILE# 10: &ABORT - CLOSES FILES & UNLOCKS DEVICES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
INCLUDED WITH THE MAIN SUBROUTINES INITW, INITR, OUTPT, & INPUT, ARE
SUBROUTINES THAT THEY CALL. ALL ROUTINES ARE INTERNALLY DOCUMENTED, AND
MAY NEED TO BE MODIFIED FOR A PARTICULAR APPLICATION.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE LISTINGS FOR CALLING SEQUENCES.
HERE IS A BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF EACH ROUTINE:
INITW - INITIALIZE DEVICES FOR OUTPUT. CREATES A DISC FILE AND
OPENS IT; OR LOCKS A MAG TAPE, MINICARTRIDGE, OR LINE
PRINTER AND VERIFIES THE DEVICE IS ON-LINE.
INITR - INITIALIZE DEVICES FOR INPUT. OPENS A DISC FILE; OR
LOCKS A MAG TAPE OR MINICARTRIDGE, AND VERIFIES THAT
IT IS ON-LINE.
OUTPT - OUTPUTS A BUFFER OF TEXT TO A DISC FILE, MAG TAPE, MINI-
CARTRIDGE, OR LINE PRINTER. IT PUTS A BLANK IN
COLUMN ONE TO ALLOW DUMPING TO A LINE PRINTER, AND
CHECKS FOR STATUS ERRORS WHILE OUTPUTTING.
INPUT - READS A BUFFER FROM DISC FILE, MAG TAPE, OR MINICAR-
TRIDGE, CHECKING FOR STATUS ERRORS.
FILU - READS AN FMP FILE NAMR OR LU NUMBER FROM THE TERMINAL
AND PARSES IT INTO ITS SEPARATE PARTS.
TRMRD - READS AN ASCII BUFFER FROM THE TERMINAL.
YESNO - READS MOST POSSIBLE CONFIGURATIONS OF Y, YE, YES, N, NO,
INCLUDING UPPER AND LOWER CASE LETTERS.
RESET - REWINDS DEVICES OR RETURNS TO FIRST RECORD OF A DISC
FILE.
ABORT - CLOSES ALL FILES AND UNLOCKS DEVICES.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES FROM SUBROUTINES ARE SELF-EXPLANATORY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
E14301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BLKRD
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FORMAT MODE/BLOCK ENABLED TERMINAL I/O SUBROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 5 **CATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
TERMINAL I/O TEXT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-IVB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THESE ARE A SET OF THREE SUBROUTINES THAT ARE USED TO SIMPLIFY SETTING
UP AND USING THE FORMAT MODE AND BLOCK ENABLED READ ON A 2645 OR GREATER
TERMINAL.
THERE FUNCTIONS ARE:
SET - SETS THE TIME-OUT OF THE TERMINAL TO ZERO, PUTS TERMINAL
INTO LINE MODE, AND TURNS ON BLOCK MODE.
BLKRD - TURNS ON FORMAT MODE, TURNS ON PAGE MODE, AND ISSUES A
BLOCK READ FROM THE TERMINAL.
RESET - TURNS OFF FORMAT MODE, TURNS ON LINE MODE, TURNS OFF BLOCK
MODE, AND SETS THE TIME-OUT TO 20000.
BASICALLY, THE SUBROUTINES ARE USED TO SET UP FORMS ON THE TERMINAL,
ALLOW THE USER TO ENTER OR MODIFY DATA IN THE FORMS, THEN READ THE DATA
BACK IN A BUFFER.
THE ROUTINES USE REIO AND EXEC CALLS TO TALK TO THE TERMINAL. A 2645
TERMINAL, OR GREATER, IS REQUIRED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: &SET
FILE# 3: &BLKRD
FILE# 4: &RESET
FILE# 5: &EXAM - EXAMPLE FORTRAN PROGRAM USING THE ROUTINES
FILE# 6: *EXAM - LOADR COMMAND FILE FOR EXAM
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
TO LOAD THE EXAMPLE PROGRAM:
COMPILE &EXAM AND THE 3 SUBROUTINES
RU,LOADR,*EXAM
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE PROGRAM DESCRIPTION
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE CALLING SEQUENCES ARE:
CALL SET(LU) WHERE: LU = THE LU NUMBER OF THE TERMINAL
CALL BLKRD(LU,IBUFF,LEN,IERR)
WHERE: LU = THE LU NUMBER OF THE TERMINAL
IBUFF = BUFFER FOR INPUT
LEN = THE LENGTH OF IBUFF TO BE READ IN
IERR = ERROR INDICATOR
= 0 NO ERROR
=-700 ABORT REQUESTED
CALL RESET(LU) WHERE: LU = THE LU NUMBER OF THE TERMINAL
NOTE: SINCE IT IS OFTEN IMPORTANT TO GIVE THE USER THE CHANCE TO ABORT
A PROGRAM AT ANY POINT, BLKRD CHECKS THE LAST 2 CHARACTERS IN THE
INPUT BUFFER FOR A '/A'. IF IT IS FOUND, BLKRD RETURNS A -700 IN
IERR. THE EXAMPLE PROGRAM 'EXAM' SHOWS A WAY TO USE THIS.
ALSO: THE DATA FROM THE UNPROTECTED FIELDS COME BACK IN IBUFF CONCATEN-
ATED TOGETHER IN THE ORDER THEY APPEARED ON THE SCREEN.
FOLLOWING IS AN EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE THE SUBROUTINES:
FTN4,L
PROGRAM FIZZ
.
. INITIAL PART OF PROGRAM
.
CALL SET(LU)
.
. OUTPUT THE UNPROTECTED FIELDS TO THE SCREEN
.
CALL BLKRD(LU,IBUFF,LEN,IERR)
IF(IERR.NE.0) GO TO 9999
.
. PROCESS DATA
.
CALL RESET(LU)
END
SEE THE INCLUDED PROGRAM 'EXAM' FOR A REAL LIFE EXAMPLE OF HOW TO USE
THE SUBROUTINES.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
F00101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SHIP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BATTLESHIP
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 6 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4349 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (1026 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
BATTLESHIP IS A COMPUTER GAME FOR RTE IN WHICH FIVE SHIPS ARE RANDOMLY
PLACED IN A MATRIX BY THE PROGRAM. THE LOCATION OF THESE SHIPS IS FOUND
BY THE PLAYER WHO PROCEEDS BY TRIAL AND ERROR UNTIL A HIT IS ACHIEVED.
THROUGH SUCCESSIVE (HITS), HE CAN RECONSTRUCT THE RANDOM MATRIX.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IT USES A VARIABLE MATRIX (5 X 5 TO 26 X 26) AND THE TIME-BASE GENERATOR
FOR THE RANDOM NUMBER GENERATION TO PLACE 5 SHIPS WITHIN THE MATRIX.
THESE 5 SHIPS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
1.) AND AIRCRAFT CARRIER (5 ADJACENT LOCATIONS).
2.) A BATTLESHIP (4 ADJACENT LOCATIONS).
3.) A CRUISER (3 ADJACENT LOCATIONS).
4.) A DESTROYER (2 ADJACENT LOCATIONS).
5.) A SUBMARINE (1 LOCATION).
THE ADJACENT LOCATIONS CAN BE HORIZONTAL, VERTICAL, OR AT 45 DEGREE
INCREMENTS.
I/O IS CONVERSATIONAL. THERE ARE FIVE SHIPS TO BE DESTROYED. EACH SHIP
OCCUPIES A DIFFERENT NUMBER OF POSITIONS IN THE MATRIX AND THUS REQUIRES
A DIFFERENT NUMBER OF "HITS" TO SUCCESSFULLY DOWN IT.
THERE ARE FIVE SHOTS TO A ROUND. AS EACH SHIP IS SUNK, A ROUND IS
DECREASED BY ONE SHOT. AFTER EACH ROUND, A SCORE OF HITS IS PRINTED FOR
EACH SHIP. THE SCORE OF HITS IS UNRELATED TO THE SHIP'S POSITION WITHIN
THE MATRIX. A SHIP MAY BE POSITIONED HORIZONTALLY, VERTICALLY, OR ON A
DIAGONAL BY THE PROGRAM. EACH SHOT REQUIRES TWO COORDINATES (ROW,COLUMN)
TO LOCATE THE TARGET POSITION WITHIN THE MATRIX.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IN ORDER TO PLAY THE GAME CORRECTLY, THE USER SHOULD USE A SCORE SHEET.
THIS WILL GIVE HIM AN UP-TO-DATE MAP OF WHICH LOCATIONS WERE HIT IN
WHICH ROUND.
IF IT'S TIME TO GO BACK TO WORK OR THE USER GIVES UP, SET SWITCH 6 UP
AND FINISH THE ROUND; THE ANSWER MATRIX WILL BE PRINTED ON THE STANDARD
LIST DEVICE. ALL NEGATIVE NUMBERS REPRESENT THE SHIPS (-5 = AIRCRAFT
CARRIER, -4 = BATTLESHIP, ETC.).
F00201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: STAR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
STARTREK STAR VERSION D
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 6 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
APPROXIMATELY 11K DECIMAL
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS IS THE CLASSIC GAME OF STARTREK. IT IS INTENDED TO SIMULATE THE
POPULAR TELEVISION PROGRAM HAVING THE SAME NAME. THE OPERATOR IS
CONSIDERED THE CAPTAIN OF THE STARSHIP ENTERPRISE. THE MISSION IS TO RID
THE GALAXY OF INVADING KLINGONS. THE PROGRAM PROMPTS THE OPERATOR FOR
THE MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM NUMBER OF KLINGONS AND THEN DESIGNS A SCENARIO;
THE NUMBER OF KLINGONS YOU MUST DESTROY ON A GIVEN NUMBER OF STARDATES.
THE COMPUTER MAINTAINS A DISPLAY OF THE KLINGONS, THEIR LOCATIONS, AND
THE STAR BASES, AND THEIR LOCATIONS. THE PROGRAM MAKES USE OF A RANDOM
NUMBER GENERATOR TO CREATE A TRUCE, STORMS, DAMAGE, AND THE LOCATIONS
OF STARS, KLINGONS, STAR BASES, AND THE STARSHIP ENTERPRISE.
IF ANY KLINGONS REMAIN AFTER THE ALOTTED NUMBER OF STARDATES, OR IF THE
ENTERPRISE RUNS OUT OF FUEL, YOU WILL HAVE LOST, AND THE COMPUTER WILL
DISPLAY AN APPROPRIATE MESSAGE. IF YOU WIN (YOU HAVE DESTROYED THE
KLINGONS), THE COMPUTER WILL GIVE AN UNBIASED SCORE ON YOUR PERFORMANCE
AS CAPTAIN OF THE STARSHIP ENTERPRISE.
OPTIONS AVAILABLE TO THE OPERATOR INCLUDE:
1. THE ABILITY TO WARP A SECTOR OR QUADRANT.
2. FIRE TORPEDOES TO A SECTOR LOCATION.
3. FIRE PHASERS WITHIN A QUADRANT.
4. INVOKE AN AIMING AID.
5. REPAIR DAMAGE.
6. MISCELLANEOUS MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS.
HARDWARE REQUIRED: 11K DECIMAL OF BACKGROUND CORE; HP2600, 2615, 2616,
OR 2640 CRT TERMINALS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
(1) COMPILE THE MAIN PROGRAM INTO THE RTE LOAD-AND-GO AREA USING THE
FTN4 COMPILER.
(2) ASSEMBLE THE TWO ASMB ROUTINES INTO THE LG AREA.
(3) COMPILE SEGMENTS 1-6 INTO THE LG AREA.
(4) ON,LOADR,99,,,1,2 FOR AUTOMATIC SEGMENTED LOAD OF PROGRAM STAR AND
ITS SIX SEGMENTS, STAR1 THRU STAR6.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TURNON SEQUENCE:
ON,STAR,P1,P2
WHERE P1 = INPUT LU NUMBER
P2 = OUTPUT LU NUMBER
IF P1 = 0, INPUT IS FROM LU NUMBER 1
IF P2 = 0, OUTPUT IS ON INPUT LU DEVICE
I/O IS CONVERSATIONAL WITH CRT.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE LISTING
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
(1) STARTREK IS CAPABLE OF I/O TO SEVERAL TYPES OF CRT TERMINALS. IN
RESPONSE TO "ENTER TYPE OF OUTPUT TERMINAL:", THE USER SHOULD
RESPOND WITH:
00 FOR HP2600 CRT
15 FOR HP2615 MINIBEE CRT TERMINAL
16 FOR HP2616 SUPERBEE CRT
IF THE CONTROL CODES FOR THE HP2640 TERMINAL ARE THE SAME AS THOSE
FOR THE HP2616 TERMINAL, THEN STARTREK WILL ALSO WORK FOR THE
2640 TERMINAL.
(2) THE PROGRAM WILL OUTPUT SPECIAL VIDEO CONTROL CODES AND CURSOR SENSE
COMMANDS FOR THE HP2616 TERMINAL WHICH INCREASE SPEED AND IMPROVE
COSMETIC PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM.
F00301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ECART
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ECARTE CARD GAME
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 6 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K WORDS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
ECARTE IS A TWO HANDED CARD GAME IN WHICH ONE IS PITTED AGAINST THE
COMPUTER. A PLAYER RECEIVES FIVE CARDS, A CARD IS TURNED TO FIX THE
TRUMP SUIT, AND THE OBJECT IS TO WIN A SPECIFIED NUMBER OF TRICKS.
THE PROGRAM IS CONVERSATIONAL AND IT WILL OPTIONALLY PRINT OUT THE
GAME RULES AND INSTRUCTIONS FOR PLAY.
ECARTE IS RELATED TO THE CARD GAMES EUCHRE, NAPOLEON, SPOIL FIVE, AND
ITS VARIANT FORTY-FIVE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SOURCES
FILE# 4: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
PROGRAM IS COMPILED, LOADED AND RUN IN THE USUAL MANNER. NOTE THAT THE
PROGRAM IS NOT SEGMENTED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO EXECUTE ECART, ENTER THE FOLLOWING COMMAND:
RU, ECART, LUN
WHERE LUN IS THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE TERMINAL FROM WHICH THE
PROGRAM IS RUN.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
"HOYLE'S MODERN ENCYCLOPEDIA OF CARD GAMES", WALTER B. GIBSON,
DOUBLEDAY, 1974, PAGE 105.
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
A. SHUFFLING THE CARDS
THE TIME BASE GENERATOR IS USED IN CONNECTION WITH A RANDOM NUMBER
GENERATOR SO THAT WHENEVER THE PROGRAM IS RUN, DIFFERENT HANDS WILL BE
DEALT.
B. CHEATING
IT IS IMPOSSIBLE FOR THE USER TO CHEAT AS THE COMPUTER CHECKS ALL
INPUT FOR VALIDITY. IF ANY ERRORS ARE FOUND, A MESSAGE IS ISSUED, AND
THE USER MUST RE-ENTER THE DATA CORRECTLY.
ON THE OTHER HAND, ONE CAN REST ASSURED THAT THE COMPUTER ALWAYS
MAKES VALID PLAYS. FURTHER, THE DECK IS NOT STACKED IN THE COMPUTER'S
FAVOR.
SHOULD ONE WISH TO STOP THE PROGRAM DURING A GAME, TYPE IN STOP IN
ANSWER TO THE COMPUTER PROMPT.
IF ONE IS RUNNING THE PROGRAM FROM A CRT TERMINAL, IT MAY BE USEFUL TO
REDISPLAY THE CONTENTS OF ONE'S HAND. TO DO THIS, TYPE IN HAND IN ANSWER
TO THE COMPUTER'S PROMPT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE COMPUTER CHECKS ALL USER INPUT FOR ERRORS. SHOULD ANY BE FOUND,
THE COMPUTER ISSUES A SELF-EXPLANATORY ERROR MESSAGE AND ALLOWS THE
USER TO RE-ENTER THE DATA.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
F00401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BIORM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BIORHYTHM PLOTTER
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 6 **CATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PROGRAM BIORM PLOTS ONE MONTH BIO-RHYTHM CHARTS. THE PROGRAM ASKS
WHETHER A LARGE OR SMALL BIO-CHART IS WANTED. SMALL IS 28 X 43 WIDE AND
LARGE IS 55 X 75 CHAR WIDE. THEN THE NECESSARY DATES ARE PROMPTED FOR
AND THE CHART IS PRINTED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: SAMPLE BIORHYTHM PLOT
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
*RU,BIORM,LU,L1 WHERE: LU INTERACTIVE LOGICAL UNIT
L1 LIST OUTPUT LOGICAL UNIT
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SELF-EXPLANATORY
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE LIST OUTPUT DRIVER IS ASSUMED TO ACCEPT A TRAILING UNDERBAR OR BACK
ARROW (ASCII OCTAL 137) AS A COMMAND NOT TO FURNISH CARRIAGE RETURN AND
LINE FEED FOR MULTIPLE WRITE REQUESTS PER LINE.
F00501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SKI
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOWNHILL SKI GAME IN GRAPHICS/1000
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 6 **CATEGORY:
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES GRAPHIC TERMINAL
PLOTTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
M-SERIES
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
RTE-III RTE-IVA RTE-IVB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
1*19K PARTITION, LARGER IF MORE THAN ONE TYPE GRAPHICS DEVICE
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THE SKI GAME IS AN INTERACTIVE GRAPHICS PROGRAM THAT DISPLAYS A DOWN-
HILL SKI RACE COURSE ON A GRAPHICS DEVICE AND ALLOWS THE USER TO INTER-
ACTIVELY CONTROL THE MOTION OF THE SKIER THROUGH THE COURSE. THE SKI
GAME REQUIRES A 2648A GRAPHICS TERMINAL TO CONTROL THE SKIER'S MOTION
WITH THE GRAPHICS CURSOR. THE DISPLAY MAY BE ON THE SAME TERMINAL OR
ON ANY OTHER GRAPHICS OUTPUT DEVICE SUPPORTED BY GRAPHICS/1000. THE
SKI GAME REQUIRES THE HP 92840A GRAPHICS/1000 SUBSYSTEM AND A USER
WRITTEN DEVICE LINK TABLE AS DESCRIBED IN THE GRAPHICS/1000 USER MANUAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: &SKI -- COMPOSITE SOURCE FOR THE SKI GAME
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SPECIFY LARGE BACKGROUND (OP,LB)
RELOCATE THE COMPILED SOURCE CODE (RE,%SKI)
RELOCATE THE DEVICE LINK TABLE (RE,%DLTBL) AS DESCRIBED IN THE
GRAPHICS/1000 MANUAL
SEARCH THE GRAPHICS LIBRARY (SE,%GPS)
END
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RU,SKI[,TERMINAL LU]
THE SKI GAME WILL ASK IF YOU WANT THE OUTPUT ON A DEVICE OTHER THAN
THE TERMINAL, ANSWER YES OR NO
IF THE ANSWER IS YES THE GAME WILL ASK FOR THE ID,LU OF THE GRAPHICS
OUTPUT DEVICE. THE ID NUMBER IS AS DESCRIBED IN THE GRAPHICS/1000
MANUAL AND IS THE INDEX INTO THE DEVICE LINK TABLE. THE CONVENTIONS
USED IN THIS PROGRAM ARE 2648 ID = 1, AND 9872 ID = 3. OTHER GRAPHICS
DEVICE ID'S ARE DON'T CARES.
NEXT THE GAME WILL ASK FOR A COURSE CODE. THIS IS AN INTEGER WHICH
SERVES AS A RANDOMIZER SEED FOR THE COURSE GENERATOR. ENTER A POSITIVE
INTEGER BETWEEN 1 AND 63.
NEXT THE GAME WILL ASK YOU TO DIGITIZE THE LOWER LEFT AND UPPER RIGHT
CORNERS OF THE DRAWING SURFACE IF THE OUTPUT DEVICE IS NOT A 2648.
DIGITIZE THE RESPECTIVE CORNERS AS DESCRIBED IN THE GRAPHICS/1000
MANUAL UNDER THE INTERACTIVE VIEWP COMMAND.
NEXT THE GAME WILL ASK YOU FOR YOUR ABILITY FACTOR. ENTER AN INTEGER
BETWEEN 1 AND 5 WHICH CONTROLS THE RELATIVE SPEED OF THE SKIER.
NEXT THE GAME WILL SAY HIT RETURN TO START!
CONTROL THE SKIER USING THE LEFT AND RIGHT GRAPHICS CURSOR CONTROLS
ON THE 2648 TERMINAL. GUIDE THE SKIER THROUGH THE GATES IN A LEFT
AND DOWN DIRECTION. TURNING THE SKIER SLOWS HIS SPEED. THE SKIER
WILL ALWAYS ACCELERATE IN THE DOWNWARD DIRECTION AND MAINTAIN HIS
CONSTANT LEFT OR RIGHT SPEED.
PLAY THE GAME AND PRACTICE! SEE YOU IN THE WINTER OLYMPICS!
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE GRAPHICS/1000 MANUAL FOR ANY GRAPHICS ERRORS
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X00101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ISORT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ORDERING A FIXED POINT ARRAY.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT ARRAY FIXED POINT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
433 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (157 WITHOUT).
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE ARRANGES A FIXED POINT SINGLE-DIMENSION ARRAY IN
ASCENDING OR DESCENDING ORDER. THE ORIGINAL ARRANGEMENT OF DATA IS
DESTROYED.
THIS SUBROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES AND TEST DATA.
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THE ENCLOSED TEST PROGRAM READS 14 DATA POINTS ON 2 RECORDS IN A
7(6X,I4) FORMAT.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL ISORT (IBEG, NEND, IAORD, IARAY)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
IBEG INTEGER SUBSCRIPT OF NUMBER IN ARRAY WITH WHICH ORDERING
BEGINS.
NEND INTEGER SUBSCRIPT OF NUMBER IN ARRAY WITH WHICH ORDERING
ENDS.
IAORD INTEGER IF POSITIVE - ARRAY WILL BE PUT IN ASCENDING ORDER;
IF NEGATIVE OR ZERO - ARRAY WILL BE PUT IN
DESCENDING ORDER.
IARAY INTEGER NAME OF ARRAY TO BE ORDERED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X00201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: ARANK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RANKING A FLOATING POINT ARRAY.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
FLOATING POINT ARRAY SORT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
921 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (545 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE ARRANGES A FLOATING POINT SINGLE-DIMENSION ARRAY IN
ASCENDING OR DESCENDING ORDER. THE ORIGINAL ARRANGEMENT OF DATA IS NOT
DESTROYED.
THIS SUBROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES AND TEST DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THE ENCLOSED TEST PROGRAM READS 14 DATA POINTS ON TWO RECORDS IN A
7(2X,F8.2) FORMAT.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL ARANK(LAST, IAORD, ARRAY, JSML, LARGE)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
LAST INTEGER SUBSCRIPT OF LAST NUMBER IN ARRAY.
IAORD INTEGER IF POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE, ARRAY WILL BE RANKED FOR
SMALLEST TO LARGEST AND THEN FROM LARGEST TO
SMALLEST; IF ZERO, ARRAY WILL ONLY BE RANKED FROM
SMALLEST TO LARGEST.
ARRAY REAL NAME OF ARRAY TO BE RANKED.
JSML INTEGER THE OUTPUT ARRAY FOR SMALLEST TO LARGEST RANKING
SCHEME.
LARGE INTEGER OUTPUT ARRAY FOR LARGEST TO SMALLEST RANKING
SCHEME.
THE ORIGINAL ARRAY (XARAY) IS NOT DESTROYED UPON RETURNING TO THE MAIN
PROGRAM. THE VALUE OF ZERO MUST BE EXCLUDED FROM THE ORIGINAL ARRAY
UNLESS THAT ARRAY HAS BOTH POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE VALUES. IF THE USER
SETS IAORD = 0 IN THE MAIN PROGRAM, THE ARRAY JLARGE MAY BE DIMENSIONED
TO ONE (1) IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X00301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SORTM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ORDERING A FLOATING POINT ARRAY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT FLOATING POINT ARRAY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
495 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (100 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE ARRANGES A FLOATING POINT SINGLE-DIMENSION ARRAY IN
ASCENDING ORDER. THE ORIGINAL ARRANGEMENT OF DATA IS DESTROYED.
THIS SUBROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES AND TEST DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
THE ENCLOSED TEST PROGRAM READS IN 15 DATA POINTS ON THREE RECORDS IN A
F10.3 FORMAT.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL SORTM (X, NUM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL ARRAY NAME
NUM INTEGER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN THE ARRAY
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X00401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FIELD
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FIELD SORT IN ALPHABETIC/NUMERIC ORDER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT ASCII INTEGER
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS MTS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
521 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (277 WITHOUT).
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ALGOL PROCEDURE SORTS ASCII OR INTEGER DATA INTO ALPHABETIC AND/OR
NUMERIC ORDER. THE USER SPECIFIES THE NUMBER OF RECORDS TO BE SORTED,
THE RECORD LENGTH, AND THE FIELD ON WHICH THE SORT IS TO BE PERFORMED.
THE REMAINING DATA IN EACH RECORD IS CARRIED ALONG UNCHANGED BY FIELD-
SORT. SORTING IS CONDUCTED (IN PLACE), CONSEQUENTLY THE SORTED DATA
REPLACES THE UNSORTED DATA IN CORE STORAGE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE PROCEDURE IS CALLED BY USING ITS NAME:
FIELDSORT (M, N, RECORDLENGTH, SORTLENGTH, FIELDSTART);
THE PARAMETERS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
M: A TWO-DIMENSIONAL ARRAY DECLARED IN THE USER'S MAIN PROGRAM AS
FOLLOWS:
INTEGER ARRAY M [0:P, 1:RECORDLENGTH];
WHERE P IS THE NUMBER OF RECORDS AND RECORDLENGTH IS THE NUMBER OF
WORDS IN EACH RECORD. (ALL RECORDS MUST BE OF THE SAME LENGTH.)
N: THE NUMBER OF RECORDS TO BE SORTED <= P (AS DECLARED ABOVE).
RECORDLENGTH: THE NUMBER OF WORDS THAT COMPRISES EACH RECORD (EQUAL
TO RECORDLENGTH DECLARED AS ABOVE).
SORTLENGTH: THE NUMBER OF WORDS IN A GIVEN RECORD TO BE SORTED
BEGINNING WITH THE WORD DESIGNATED BY FIELDSTART.
FIELDSTART: THE RECORD NUMBER ON WHICH THE FIELD TO BE SORTED BEGINS.
* FIELDSORT TREATS ALPHA DATA AS INTEGERS. HENCE IT CANNOT SORT 2 WORD
FLOATING POINT DATA.
IT IS NECESSARY TO MAKE THE 1ST DIMENSION OF THE ARRAY FROM ZERO TO THE
NUMBER OF RECORDS TO BE SORTED (N). FIELDSORT USES THE ZEROTH RECORD
FOR ITS HOUSEKEEPING.
IF TWO ENTRIES OF THE ARRAY HAVE IDENTICAL SORTING KEYS, THEY WILL BE
ADJACENT IN THE RESULTING ARRAY.
THIS ALGORITHM IS EXTREMELY FAST. THERE ARE FASTER ALGORITHMS KNOWN
(E.E. QUICKSORT) BUT NOT MANY. THIS IS ONE OF THE BETTER ALGORITHMS
SINCE THERE ARE NO CASES WHICH ARE PATHOLOGICAL. IT IS FAR SUPERIOR TO
THE BUBBLE SORT AND HEAP SORT TECHNIQUES.
THE USER MAY USE THIS PROCEDURE AS AN EXTERNAL PROCEDURE BY MAKING THE
DECLARATION IN HIS MAIN PROGRAM:
PROCEDURE FIELSORT (M,N,RECORDLENGTH, SORTLENGTH, FIELDSTART);
VALUE N, RECORDLENGTH, SORTLENGTH, FIELDSTART;
INTEGER N, RECORDLENGTH, SORTLENGTH, FIELDSTART;
INTEGER ARRAY M;
CODE;
AND COMPILING THE ENCLOSED PROCEDURE SEPARATELY FROM THE MAIN PROGRAM
USING THE CONTROL STATEMENT ENCLOSED.
IF THE PROCEDURE IS TO BE INTERNAL TO THE PROGRAM WITH THE REST OF THE
USER'S PROCEDURES, HE SHOULD COMPILE IT AS PART OF THE PROGRAM AS USUAL
DELETING THE "HPAL" CONTROL STATEMENT ENCLOSED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X00501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FIND
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ASCII STRING SEARCH FROM DISC FILE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
ASCII DISC FILES
SEARCH CHARACTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
3837 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (1097 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM SEARCHES A SOURCE FILE ON THE DISC FOR ALL OCCURRENCES
OF A SPECIFIED STRING OF CHARACTERS AS INPUT FROM THE SYSTEM CONSOLE
OR BATCH DEVICE. THE MAXIMUM STRING LENGTH IS 72 CHARACTERS. THE
LOCATED STRINGS ARE LISTED ON THE LINE PRINTER OR SYSTEM CONSOLE BY
LINE NUMBER AND POSITION WITHIN THE LINE, AND THE LINE ITSELF IS
PRINTED. NON-PRINTING CHARACTERS ARE LISTED IN OCTAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE SOURCE LISTING.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE SOURCE LISTING.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE FOLLOWING CHARACTERS MAY NOT BE USED IN A SEARCH STRING:
RUBOUT
LEADING :
CONTROL "A" (FUNCTIONS AS A CHARACTER DELETE)
X00601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
EFMP FILE SORT ASCII/INTEGER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
SORT FILES ASCII
INTEGER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
OPERATING IN A 16K DOS-M ENVIRONMENT THIS PACKAGE SORTS INTEGER OR
ASCII EFMP FILES IN ASCENDING ORDER. UP TO NINE KEYS CAN BE SELECTED
IN ORDER OF SORTING SIGNIFICANCE. THESE KEYS ARE IDENTIFIED BY WORD
NUMBER WITHIN EACH RECORD OF THE FILE, AND CAN BE A MAXIMUM OF FORTY
WORDS LONG.
THE RESULT OF A SORT IS A TAG EFMP FILE WHICH CONSISTS OF A ONE WORD
RECORD FOR EACH RECORD IN THE SORTED FILE (MAXIMUM 32767). WHEN
ACCESSED SEQUENTIALLY, THE TAG FILE PROVIDES THE ORDER IN WHICH THE
ORIGINAL FILE MUST BE READ TO BE SORTED AS SPECIFIED. THE SORT PROGRAM
CAN BE RUN INDEPENDENTLY OR CAN BE CALLED BY A FORTRAN PROGRAM WHICH
PASSES THE NECESSARY PARAMETERS VIA THE COMMON AREA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
STANDARD PROCEDURES
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
PROVIDE ANY EFMP FILE.
PREPARE A PAPER TAPE OR PUNCHED CARD WITH THE NECESSARY PARAMETERS,
OR ENTER THE PARAMETERS AT RUN TIME. THE FORMAT IS THE SAME FOR EACH
METHOD OF INPUT: ONE STRING OF 74 CHARACTERS.
CHARACTERS CONTENTS
1-6 NAME OF FILE TO BE SORTED.
7-9 FIRST WORD OF KEY #1.
10-12 LAST WORD OF KEY #2.
.
.
.
55-57 FIRST WORD OF KEY #9.
58-60 LAST WORD OF KEY #9.
61-65 SECURITY CODE OF FILE TO BE SORTED.
66 NUMBER OF KEYS.
67-68 TOTAL NUMBER OF WORDS IN ALL KEYS
COMBINED.
69-74 OUTPUT FILE NAME.
THE FIRST AND LAST WORDS OF EACH KEY SHOULD BE SPECIFIED BY A NUMBER
FROM 1 TO THE TOTAL NUMBER OF WORDS IN A RECORD. KEY 1 MIGHT BE FROM
WORD 1 OR WORD 8 OF A RECORD. ONLY THE NUMBER OF KEYS SPECIFIED IN
CHARACTER 66 WILL BE USED, ALL OTHERS WILL BE IGNORED.
WHEN PARAMETERS ARE GIVEN BY TTY THE LAST 3 CHARACTERS WILL BE TYPED
ON TOP OF ONE ANOTHER, SINCE ONLY 72 CHARACTERS PER LINE ARE AVAILABLE
AND 74 HAVE TO BE ENTERED PLUS A CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE FEED.
EXECUTE THE PROGRAM SORT (: PR, SORT). OR SORT CAN BE CALLED FROM
ANOTHER PROGRAM PASSING THE PARAMETERS VIA COMMON.
SEE PROGRAM DESCRIPTION.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
IF NO EFMP FILE IS AVAILABLE TO TEST SORT, THE PROGRAM ALFA CAN BE
USED TO FILL A SAMPLE FILE CALLED SOFIL WITH ASCII STRINGS. THE
SECURITY CODE OF SOFIL IS 0.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
USE OF TAG FILE
THE SORT PROGRAM MIGHT HAVE OUTPUT A NEW FILE IDENTICAL TO THE
ORIGINAL FILE, EXCEPT SORTED IN THE ORDER SPECIFIED. HOWEVER, THE TAG
FILE WAS CHOSEN INSTEAD BECAUSE IT ALLOWS A USER TO HAVE VERY LARGE
FILES SORTED IN SEVERAL WAYS WITHOUT RUNNING OUT OF DISC SPACE. THE
FOLLOWING GIVES A MORE DETAILED EXPLANATION OF HOW THE TAG FILE IS
USED.
SUPPOSE THE MASTER FILE HAS FOUR RECORDS OF FOUR WORDS EACH:
5 . . . 8 . . . 4 . . . 1 . . .
IF A SORT IS PERFORMED ON THE FIRST WORD OF EACH RECORD, THE RESULTING
TAG FILE IS FOUR ONE-WORD RECORDS:
00004 00003 00001 00002
THE TAG FILE CAN NOW BE READ SEQUENTIALLY. THE CONTENTS OF EACH
RECORD OF THE TAG FILE CAN BE USED AS THE "RECORD NUMBER" TO BE
ACCESSED FROM THE MASTER FILE.
EXAMPLE:
CALL EXEC (24, 6, TAGFI, 0, NUMBRE, ERROR)
0 = SEQUENTIAL READ OF TAG FILE, LEAVING THE CONTENT OF EACH RECORD
IN "NUMBRE".
CALL EXEC (24, 6, MASTE, NUMBRE, BUFFER, ERROR)
RANDOM ACCESS OF "MASTE" FILE IN THE ORDER SPECIFIED BY THE TAG FILE.
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL EXEC (10, INAME)
INAME IS AN ARRAY OF 3 WORDS WHICH CONTAINS THE PROGRAM NAME "SORT".
THE PARAMETERS MUST BE PASSED VIA 40 WORDS IN COMMON. THE ORDER
SHOULD BE AS FOLLOWS:
WORDS CONTENTS EX. CONTENTS
1-9 BLANK
10 999 999
11-13 NAME OF FILE TO BE SORTED SOFIL
14 FIRST WORD OF KEY #1 1
15 LAST WORD OF KEY #1 8
16 FIRST WORD OF KEY#2 25
17 LAST WORD OF KEY #2 28
18 FIRST WORD OF KEY #3 9
19 LAST WORD OF KEY #3 10
.
.
.
30 FIRST WORD OF KEY #9 0
31 LAST WORD OF KEY #9 0
32 SECURITY CODE 12345
33 NUMBER OF KEYS 3
34 TOTAL NUMBER OF WORDS
IN ALL KEYS 14
35-37 NAME OF PROGRAM TO
TO RETURN TO REPOR
38-40 NAME OF OUTPUT FILE SOTAG
CALLING SORT FROM A FORTRAN PROGRAM PROVIDES ONE ADDED CAPABILITY.
THE USER CAN SPECIFY TO WHICH PROGRAM HE WANTS SORT TO RETURN.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE 3 PROGRAMS ARE INDEPENDENT, AND THEY NEVER RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS
ONE. THE COMMUNICATION IS ONLY ONE WAY: SORT TO SORT1 TO SORT2.
ANY OF THE 3 CAN FIND SITUATIONS THAT COULD ABORT THE SORT. (WRONG
PARAMETERS, NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN DOS WORK-AREA, NOT ENOUGH SPACE IN
EFMP PLATE, DUPLICATE FILE NAME, EFMP ERRORS, ETC.)
IN ALL CASES A MESSAGE IS GIVEN, AND THE SORT HAS TO BE RUN AGAIN
AFTER APPROPRIATE CORRECTIONS (TO PARAMETERS, DISC SPACE, SECURITY
CODE, DVP FILE NAME) ARE MADE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SINCE SORT USED ALL THE WORD AREA OF DOS-M WITH THE PN000 FILE, THIS
HAS TO BE PURGED WHEN THE SORT FINISHES AND A MESSAGE IS GIVEN TO
THIS RESPECT.
LEAVE ENOUGH SPACE IN THE WORK AREA AND THE EFMP PACK BEFORE SORT
STARTS TO PREVENT ABNORMAL TERMINATIONS.
IN AN ENVIRONMENT OF SEVERAL DRIVES, THE OUTPUT FILE WOULD BE PUT IN
AN EFMP PACK DIFFERENT THAN THAT OF THE INPUT FILE, SINCE THE REQUEST
FOR SPACE IS IN "ANY AVAILABLE PLATE".
SECURITY CODE FOR THE OUTPUT FILE = 0.
X00701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BYTE DATA MANIPULATION WITH MICROCODED ROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
BYTE MICROCODE COMPARE
**LANGUAGES:
MICROASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE OF SEVEN MICROCODED ROUTINES ALLOWS USERS TO:
A. MOVE WORDS FROM CORE TO CORE (NON-INTERRUPTABLE AND INTERRUPTABLE).
B. LOAD AN 8-BIT BYTE IN THE RIGHT HALF OF THE A REGISTER (BITS 7-0).
C. STORE A BYTE INTO CORE.
D. MOVE A STRING OF BYTES FROM CORE TO CORE (INTERRUPTABLE).
E. SEARCH A BYTE STRING FOR A PARTICULAR BYTE (INTERRUPTABLE).
F. COMPARE BYTE STRINGS.
THE LOCATION AND DESIGN OF THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY MAPPING TABLES AND
THE PLACEMENT OF THESE MICROPROGRAMS ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE HP12907A A
FAST FORTRAN PROCESSOR (FFP) MICROCODE OPTION. THIS PACKAGE REQUIRES
THE HP12908 A/B WCS BOARD OR BURNED PROM CHIPS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCES
FILE# 3: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE THE MICROPROGRAM. ASSEMBLE THE TEST PROGRAM. SET THE ENTRY
MODULE TO 1 IF THE FLOATING POINT PACKAGE IS PRESENT AND 2 IF FLOATING
POINT IS NOT IN THE SYSTEM. LOAD THE WCS BOARD USING THE DEBUG EDITOR
OR WCS UTILITY PROGRAM OR BY CALLING THE WCS DRIVER. LOAD THE TEST
PROGRAM TO CHECK THE MICROPROGRAMS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
ASSEMBLE AND LOAD THE TEST PROGRAM AS DESCRIBED IN LOAD INSTRUCTIONS.
RUN THE PROGRAM WITH:
:PR,CHECK
IF IT RUNS CORRECTLY IT WILL PRINT:
XXACTITX
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
LITERATURE REFERENCE
2100 COMPUTER MICROPROGRAMMING GUIDE 5951-3028
2100 COMPUTER MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE 02100-90133
2100 COMPUTER DOS MICROPROGRAMMING SOFTWARE 02100-90146
BCS DRIVER SMALL PROGRAMS MANUAL 12908-90003
DOS DRIVER SMALL PROGRAMS MANUAL 12908-90004
12908A OPERATING & SERVICE MANUAL 12908-90001
12908B OPERATING & SERVICE MANUAL 12908-90011
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
FOR 2100 CONTAINING MICROINSTRUCTION DECODER 2 CARD (A4), P/N 02100-
60022.
1. THE CJMP MICRO-ORDER DOES NOT FUNCTION IN MODULES 2 AND 3.
2. IF THE MICROCODE IS USED IN MODULES 2 OR 3 THE FOLLOWING CHANGES
MUST BE MADE:
A. REPLACE THE MICROINSTRUCTION IN LOCATIONS 1051, 1107 & 1252
(Q CJMP S3 INTRX) WITH
(NOP NOP IOR NOP NOP NOP)
B. REPLACE THE MICROINSTRUCTION IN LOCATION 1121
(B CJMP S2 MOVBI) WITH
(B NOP IOR S2 NOP NOP)
THE LOCATION AND DESIGN OF THE PRIMARY AND SECONDARY MAPPING TABLES AND
THE PLACEMENT OF THE MICROPROGRAMS ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE HP SUPPORTED
FAST FORTRAN PROCESSOR (FFP) MICROCODE OPTION.
THE BYTE DATA MANIPULATION MICROCODE FITS INTO THE UNUSED LOCATIONS IN
THE FFP OPTION; IT ALSO DUPLICATES SOME OF THE FFP CODE.
THE FOLLOWING BYTE DATA MANIPULATION CODE IS ALSO IN THE FFP OPTION:
LOCATION: 1012
1013
1020
1240 THROUGH AND INCLUDING 1261
1367 THROUGH AND INCLUDING 1377
X00801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SFRFD
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CONVERSION OF ASCII INTO ASCII AND/OR INTEGER FIELDS.
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION ASCII INTEGER
FORMATTING
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
SUBROUTINE 'SFRFD' IS A FORTRAN CALLABLE, RELOCATABLE ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
ROUTINE WHICH CAN CONVERT A STRING OF ASCII CHARACTERS INTO ASCII AND/OR
INTEGER FIELDS. OPTIONALLY IT WILL ALSO READ THE ASCII STRING VIA A
DOS-M EXEC CALL FROM A DEVICE WHOSE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER IS SPECIFIED IN
ONE OF THE ARGUMENTS. ALSO PASSED AS ARGUMENTS INTO THIS ROUTINE IS AN
ARRAY SPECIFYING THE TYPE AND LENGTH OF FIELDS BETWEEN DELIMITERS, THE
SIZE OF THE INPUT BUFFER, AND THE DELIMITER SEPARATING THE INTEGER
AND/OR ASCII FIELDS. SUBROUTINE 'SFRFD' ALSO CHECKS FOR ILLEGAL INTEGERS
AND INTEGER OVERFLOW.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SFRFD SOURCE
FILE# 3: TEST
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE FORMAT OF THE FORTRAN CALLING PROGRAM IS:
CALL SFRFD (JFUN,LUN,ITYPE,INBUF,IBSIZ,IRESL,IDLM)
JFUN - FUNCTION NUMBER
0 = READS, CONVERTS, AND PRINTS ERROR MESSAGES IF ANY.
1 = READS, CONVERTS, AND PRINTS NO ERROR MESSAGES.
2 = CONVERTS, AND PRINTS ERROR MESSAGES IF ANY.
3 = CONVERTS, AND PRINTS NO ERROR MESSAGES.
LUN - LOGICAL UNIT OF INPUT DEVICE. IF JFUN IS 2 OR 3 THE LUN IS
MEANINGLESS.
ITYPE - AN ARRAY SPECIFYING INTO WHAT FIELDS TO CONVERT THE ASCII
CHARACTERS.
-N = FOR AN ASCII FIELD THE TYPE # IS NEGATIVE THE NUMBER OF
CHARACTERS.
IF MORE THAN N CHARACTERS ARE READ IN THE GIVEN FIELD THEN ALL
CHARACTERS AFTER CHARACTER #N IS IGNORED UNTIL A DELIMITER OR END OF
BUFFER IS FOUND. IF LESS THAN N CHARACTERS ARE READ THEN BLANKS ARE
STORED FOR ALL REMAINING CHARACTERS (SEE IRESL BELOW).
+N = FOR AN INTEGER FIELD THE TYPE # IS POSITIVE.
0 = FOR END OF BUFFER THE TYPE IS ZERO.
INBUF - INPUT BUFFER CONTAINING THE ASCII CHARACTERS INPUT (JFUN = 2,3)
OR THAT WILL BE READ BY THIS ROUTINE (JFUN = 0, OR 1).
BSIZE - BUFFER CONTAINING THE RESULTS. INTEGERS USE ONLY ONE WORD IN THE
RESULTS BUFFER. IF THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ASCII CHARACTERS WAS AN
ODD NUMBER THEN A BLANK IS STORED TO FILL THE LAST WORD.
THEREFORE ALL FIELDS END ON A WORD.
IDLM - THE DELIMITER SEPARATING THE STRINGS IN THE ASCII INPUT. A BLANK
WILL END AN INTEGER STRING IN WHICH CASE THE PROGRAM WILL IGNORE
ALL FOLLOWING CHARACTERS UNTIL A DELIMITER OR END OF BUFFER IS
FOUND.
IMPORTANT: IF ANY ERRORS ARE FOUND WHEN CONVERTING AN INTEGER FIELD THEN
THE PROGRAM RETURNS IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE CALL STATEMENT. IF NO ERROR,
THEN THE RETURN ADDRESS IS INCREMENTED BY ONE. THEREFORE, IN A FORTRAN
PROGRAM THERE NEEDS TO BE A GO TO STATEMENT IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING THE
CALL STATEMENT.
IF CODING AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE THEN THERE MUST BE A JUMP STATEMENT
IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING THE JSB AND DEF STATEMENTS.
JUMP IF AN ILLEGAL INTEGER OR INTEGER OVERFLOW IS FOUND. IF THE ERROR
WAS "ILLEGAL INTEGER" THEN THE B-REGISTER IS 0. IF THE ERROR WAS
"INTEGER OVERFLOW" THEN THE B-REGISTER IS 1.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE FORTRAN FORMATTER CAN BE AVOIDED IF ONLY INTEGER AND ASCII INFOR-
MATION IS INPUT AND OUTPUT. SUBROUTINE SFRFD CAN BE USED FOR INPUT. AN
INTEGER TO ASCII CONVERTER TOGETHER WITH DOS-M EXEC CALLS CAN BE USED
TO OUTPUT.
X00901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HEWLETT-PACKARD IDEAL COMMERCIAL SUBROUTINE LIBRARY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
ACCOUNTING LIBRARY PAYROLL
INTEGER FORMATTING
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
3337 WITH EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS (1273 WITHOUT)
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SET OF 18 ASSEMBLY AND 1 FORTRAN ROUTINES PROVIDE THE MEANS
OF BUSINESS APPLICATION PROGRAMMING WITH LITTLE FORTRAN
EXPERIENCE, MAKING HP FORTRAN AN EASY AND POWERFUL COMMERCIAL
LANGUAGE. THIS SET IS EASY TO LEARN, EASY TO USE, EFFICIENT,
FAST, ACCURATE, AND PROVIDES EDITING CAPABILITIES. ERROR
DETECTION IS PROVIDED IN APPROPRIATE ROUTINES. PROGRAMS WERE
DEVELOPED USING DOS-M SYSTEM, BUT COULD RUN IN A 4K BCS
ENVIROMENT.
THERE ARE DOUBLE INTEGER ADD, SUBTRACT, MULTIPLY, AND DIVIDE
ROUTINES, MOVE INTEGER TO/FROM DOUBLE INTEGER, CONVERT DOUBLE
INTEGER TO/FROM FLOATING POINT, A1 TO/FROM A2/A3 FORMAT
CONVERSIONS, DETERMINE THE SIGN OF A DOUBLE INTEGER, AND SINGLE
AND DOUBLE INTEGER TO A1 FORMAT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1) PURGE SOURCE AND RELOCATABLE NAMES OF ROUTINES GIVEN IN THE
TABLE BELOW.
TABLE 1
PROGRAM NAME SOURCE FILE NAME RELOCATABLE NAME
AD & SD SADS RADSD
MD SMD RMD
DD SDD RDD
MIDI SMIDI RMIDI
MDII SMDII RMDII
DFLT SDFLT RDFLT
DFIX SDFIX RDFIX
MASI,MADI SASID RASID
CRAM,UNCM SA131 RA131
JINT SJINT RJINT
MSIA,MDIA SIDI RSIDI
PACK SPACK RPACK
UNPK SUNPK RUNPK
DATSW SDATA RDATA
CLEAR SCLEA RCLEA
DITST SDITS TDITS
2) COMPILE FORTRAN PROGRAMS CLEAR & DITST AND STORE UNDER
RELOCATABLE NAME GIVEN IN TABLE.
TYPICAL :JO
:JF,(SOURCE FILE NAME)
:PROG,FTN4,2,99
:ST,R,(RELOCATABLE NAME)
3) ASSEMBLE ALL OTHER ROUTINES AND STORE UNDER THEIR RELOCATABLE
NAME GIVEN IN TABLE.
TYPICAL :JO
:JF,(SOURCE FILE NAME)
:PROG,ASMB,2,99
:ST,R,(RELOCATABLE NAME)
4) :PROG,LOADR,2,,,1,1
RDITS,RADSD,RMD,RDD,RMIDI,RASID,RDFLT,RDFIX,RPACK,RUNPK
RA131,RJINT,RDATA,RCLEA,RMDII,RSIDI
/E
:ST,P
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO RUN TEST PROGRAM
:PROG,DITST
SWITCH SETTINGS CONTROL TEST ROUTINE
SEE COMMENTS IN SOURCE LISTING OF SDITS
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE HP COMMERCIAL SUBROUTINE PACKAGE
FULL EDITING CAPABILITIES ARE AVAILABLE TO THE USER.
EASY: VARIABLE FORMAT STATEMENTS ARE UNNECESSARY SINCE
WHOLE LINES ARE OUTPUTTED IN A1 FORMAT. FREE FORMAT
READING ANYWHERE WITHIN A SPECIFIED FIELD IS
PROVIDED FOR EASE OF NUMERICAL DATA INPUT AND FOR
DECREASING THE POSSIBILITIES OF MISPUNCHED DATA.
EFFICIENT: CHOICE OF BOTH SINGLE (+/-32767) OR DOUBLE (+/-2,
147,483,647) INTEGER VARIABLES USING ONE OR TWO OF
CORE STORAGE. TEN 9 COLUMN NUMBERS USE JUST 20
WORDS.
SPEED: DOUBLE INTEGER ARITHMETIC USES SPEED OF DOUBLE WORD
MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS.
ACCURATE: DOUBLE INTEGER PROVIDES PENNY ACCURACY UP TO $21,474,836.47,
IN TWO 16 BIT WORDS.
COMPACT: ALPHANUMERIC DATA CAN BE STORED UP TO 3 CHAR./WORD. A
BASIC SET OF 40 ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS ARE
ESTABLISHED IN A TABLE WITHIN "CRAM".
CONVERTIBLE: DOUBLE INTEGERS CONVERT TO FLOATING POINT & VICE
VERSA.
EDITING: EDITING FORMATS PROVIDE INTEGER AND DOUBLE INTEGER
OUTPUT NOTATION WITH LEADING ZEROS OR ZERO
SUPRESSION. NUMBERS EDITED TO HAVE A DECIMAL POINT
HAVE THE LEADING ZEROS SUPRESSED.
EASY TO
LEARN: HP IDEAL IS EASY TO LEARN AND APPLY.
ERROR
DETECTION: ERROR DETECTION IS PROVIDED IN APPROPRIATE ROUTINES.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X01001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PAYROLL PACKAGE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PAYROLL
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PAYROLL PACKAGE USES IMAGE-B FILE STRUCTURE. THE EMPLOYEE RECORD
FILE, COIN AND NOTE ANALYSIS AND PAYROLL TOTALS FILE ARE (SET-UP),
USING THE IMAGE SCHEMA APPROACH. THIS PROVIDES EASE OF ACCESS TO THE
FILES ON DISC AND ALLOWS FOR A VARIETY OF REPORTS TO BE WRITTEN USING
THE IMAGE SCHEMA APPROACH. THIS PROVIDES EASE OF ACCESS TO THE FILES
ON DISC AND ALLOWS FOR A VARIETY OF REPORTS TO BE WRITTEN USING (QUERY)
REPORT GENERATOR. NO REPORTS AS SUCH ARE INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE
BUT ANYONE FAMILIAR WITH QUERY REPORT FACILITIES CAN WRITE THESE
REPORTS USING THE SCHEMA AS SET OUT IN THIS PACKAGE.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE IMAGE 2100. HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
INCLUDE 24K CORE, HIGH SPEED READER; TTY; DMA; AND 7900 DISC.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: SOURCE
FILE# 10: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE IMAGE RELOCATABLE MODULES MUST BE LOADED ON DISCS (USING PR, LOADR)
ALL THE FTN4 SOURCE TAPES SHOULD BE COMPILED AND LOADED AS OUTLINED
ON PAGE 3.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM RUNS INTERACTIVELY. WHERE PAPERTAPE INPUT IS EXPECTED,
THE PROGRAM PAUSES AND THE USUAL :GO INSTR. ALLOWS THE PROGRAM TO
CONTINUE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PACKAGE CONSISTS OF 3 PROGRAMS, ALL WRITTEN IN FORTRAN IV SOURCE
TO ENABLE SIMPLE MODIFICATIONS WHICH WILL BE REQUIRED WHERE:
1) CHANGE OF PAYSLIP FORMAT IS NECESSARY
2) WHERE TAX CALCULATIONS DIFFER FROM NEW ZEALAND RULES
THE PROGRAMS IN THIS PACKAGE DO THE FOLLOWING:
1) HGPAY PREPRINTS BLANK STATIONARY WITH PAYSLIPS
PROGRAM HEADINGS
2) PAY1 HAS THE FOLLOWING OPTIONS:
PROGRAM
A) EDIT OF INPUT PAPERTAPE FOR USE IN AUTO PAYROLL AND
PAYSLIP WRITING.
B) MANUAL PAYROLL AND PAYSLIP WRITING. ALL DATA ARE TYPED
THROUGH THE CONSOLE (TTY) AND OPERATOR IS PROMPTED AS TO
WHAT DATA SHOULD BE INDEXED NEXT.
C) AUTO PAYROLL AND PAYSLIP WRITING UPDATES EMPLOYEE
RECORDS YTD. FIELDS ON DISC ACCUMULATES RUN TOTALS AND
NOTE/COIN ANALYSIS. RUN TOTALS ARE ACCUMULATED BY 20
DEPARTMENTS. THIS COULD BE EXTENDED TO 99 BY MODIFYING
THE CAPACITY IN THE SCHEMA. NOTE AND COIN ANALYSIS IS
ALSO BY DEPARTMENTS. FOR EACH EMPLOYEE THESE TOTALS
ARE UPDATED ON DISC. BEING PART OF THE SCHEMA THEY ARE
EASILY PRINTED OUT AT THE END OF THE PAYROLL RUN USING
"QUERY" FIND COMMAND. SEE SAMPLE PRINTOUTS IF THIS IS
NOT CLEAR.
3) TOTCL CLEARS THE DEPART TOTALS AND NOTE/COIN ANALYSIS FIGURES.
PROGRAM THIS PROGRAM SHOULD BE RUN EACH TIME BEFORE RUNNING PAY1,
OTHERWISE THIS PAY'S FIGURES ARE ADDED TO LAST WEEKS TOTALS
OR LAST MONTH TOTALS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
THE PAYSLIP HAS BEEN PLANNED TO ALLOW PRINTING ON THE TTY. IF A LINE
PRINTER IS USED, GREATER OUTPUT CAN BE EXPECTED.
X01101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RPG0
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PSEUDO REPORT GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
DATA BASE REPORTS FILES
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM, OPERATING IN A DOS-M ENVIRONMENT, ENABLES THE USER TO
DEFINE, CONSTRUCT, EDIT, AND LIST ASCII DATA FILES IN SELECTIVE OUTPUT
FORMATS. FLEXIBLE DATA BASE DEFINITION ENABLES THE USER TO SPECIFY HOW
MANY DATA FIELDS AS WELL AS THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS PER FIELD UP TO
A MAXIMUM LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH OF 256 CHARACTERS, KEY FIELDS MAY ALSO
BE SPECIFIED AND LATER USED IN SELECTED LISTINGS. CONSIDERABLE FLEXIBI-
LITY IS PROVIDED IN THE TYPE OF LISITNG THAT MAY BE PRODUCED FROM THE
DATA IN AN EXISTING DATA FILE. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS ARE PRODUCTION OF
MAILING LISTS, PERSONNEL LISTS, ETC.
NOTE THAT THE NON-EAU LIBRARY MUST BE USED FOR CORRECT OPERATION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION FILE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. RECOGNITION OF "SORT" AS A VALID COMMAND WAS IMPLEMENTED IN THE MAIN
PROGRAM (RPG0) ONLY AS A PRELIMINARY STEP TO AID ANY USER DESIRING
TO WRITE HIS OWN SORT ROUTINE. TO IMPLEMENT THIS COMMAND, THE USER
MUST WRITE HIS OWN SORT . SEE PAGE 19 FOR HELPFUL IMFORMATION ON
THE INTERNAL FORMAT OF ID FILE SECTOR.
2. THE USER FILE READ/WRITE EXEC CALL IS USED THROUGHOUT THE PROGRAM
IN EXECUTING ALL ID AND DATA FILE I/O WITHOUT CHECKING FIRST TO
DETERMINE IF THE GIVEN FILE EXISTS. THEREFORE, TO AVOID THE DOS-M
ERROR MESSAGE, FI NNNNN, MAKE SURE ONLY EXISTING FILE NAMES ARE
ENTERED IN RESPONSE TO QUESTIONS OF THE FORM:
I.D. FILE NAME?
DATA FILE NAME?
IF UNSURE AS TO THE NAMES RESERVED AT AN EARLIER DATE FOR FILE
NAMES, LIST THE USER DIRECTORY TO REFRESH YOUR MEMORY BEFORE
STARTING THIS PROGRAM. SEE FOR CORRECT EXECUTION (PAGE 3) FOR
ORIGINAL ALLOCATION OF DATA FILES.
3. WHEN THE LENGTH OF A LOGICAL RECORD IS GREATER THAN A PHYSICAL
RECORD (IE. GREATER THAN AN 80 COLUMN CARD OF A 72 CHARACTER TELE-
TYPE LINE), CONTINUE DATA INPUT ON SUCCEEDING PHYSICAL RECORDS UP TO
A MAXIMUM OF 256 CHARACTERS. END THE LOGICAL RECORD WITH THE EOR
CHARACTER DETERMINED AT DEFINE COMMAND TIME.
4. EACH FIELD WITHIN A LOGICAL RECORD MUST NOT OVERLAP PHYSICAL RECORDS
AS MAY HAPPEN WITH CARD INPUT WHERE PHYSICAL RECORD LENGTH IS FIXED.
WHEN THIS SITUATION OCCURS THE USER SHOULD DEFINE THE LENGTH OF THE
CURRENT FIELD TO FILL OUT THE 80 COLUMN CARD IN RESPONSE TO THE
NUMBER CHAR? QUERY AT DEFINE COMMAND TIME. THE NEXT FIELD BEGINS
IN COLUMN ONE OF THE NEXT CARD/PHYSICAL RECORD. OBVIOUSLY THE USER
IS RESTRICTED TO A MAXIMUM OF FIELD LENGTH OF 80 CHARACTERS WHEN
USING FIXED PHYSICAL RECORDS FOR HIS INPUT MEDIA.
5. USER HEADING LINES, ENTERED DURING EXECUTION OF FLIST COMMAND, ARE
LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM OF 72 CHARACTERS PER LINE.
6. WHEN USING SLIST COMMAND TO PRODUCE SEQUENCED LISTINGS THE FOLLOWING
FACTS MUST BE REMEMBERED.
THE # OF CHARACTERS THE PROG WILL ATTEMPT TO PRINT FOR EACH RECORD
WILL BE THE # OF CHARACTERS PER LOGICAL RECORD FOR THE FILE
CONCERNED. THIS NUMBER IS GIVEN IN A STATUS REPORT LISTING (STATUS
COMMAND) FOR THE CONCERNED FILE. IF THE TOTAL # OF CHARACTERS PER
LOGICAL RECORD EXCEEDS THE # OF COLUMNS AVAILABLE ON THE LINE-
PRINTER, TRUNCATION OR WRAPAROUND OF EACH RECORD PRINTED WILL
OCCUR.
7. WHEN USING THE FLIST COMMAND TO PRODUCE FORMATTED LISTINGS IT IS
MUCH EASIER TO PREPARE THE FLIST INPUT PARAMETER LIST ON CARDS OR
PAPER TAPE RATHER THAN ENTERING THEM VIA THE SYSTEM TELETYPE KEY-
BOARD, ESPECIALLY IF THE CONCERNED LISTING IS TO BE PRODUCED ON
MORE THAN ONE OCCASION. ONE EASY WAY TO DO THIS IS TO STORE THE
PARAMETER LIST IN A DOS-M SS TYPE FILE; EDITING MAY THEN BE DONE
USING THE SYSTEM. THE :DU,4,NAME DIRECTIVE MAY THEN BE USED TO
DUMP THIS PARAMETER LIST FILE TO THE PUNCH FOR INPUT TO PROGRAM
RPG0.
8. THE KEY FIELD LIST OPTION (DURING FLIST COMMAND EXECUTION) OPERATES
ON ALL KEY FIELDS AND KEY FIELD DATA VALUES AS AN "AND" FUNCTION.
IN OTHER WORDS WHEN MORE THAN ONE KEY FIELD IS BEING KEYED ON, A
RECORD WILL NOT BE PRINTED UNLESS ALL KEY FIELDS SPECIFIED CONTAIN
DATA EQUAL TO THE RESPECTIVE KEY FIELD VALUES SPECIFIED.
X01201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PERTH
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PERT FOR DOS/DOS-M
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
MANAGEMENT PERFORMANCE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PERT FOR DOS/DOS-M
'PERT' (PROGRAM EVALUATION AND REVIEW TECHNIQUE) CALCULATES THE MINIMUM
TIME REQUIRED TO COMPLETE A PROJECT FROM THE INITIAL EVENT TO THE FINAL
EVENT. THE PROJECT CAN BE REPRESENTED GRAPHICALLY BY A NETWORK
CONSISTING OF EVENTS AND ACTIVITIES.
AN EVENT IS DEFINED AS A POINT IN TIME INDICATING THE BEGINNING OR THE
END OF A SPECIFIC ACTIVITY, BUT NOT THE EXECUTION OF IT. AN ACTIVITY
THEN, IS A PART OF THE PROJECT WHICH DEVELOPS BETWEEN TWO SUCCESSIVE
EVENTS.
THE PROGRAM COMPUTES THE MINIMUM TIME (TE) NEEDED FOR EACH EVENT; THE
MAXIMUM TIME (TL) EACH EVENT CAN TAKE WITHOUT INCREASING THE (TE)
OF THE FINAL EVENT; AND THE DIFFERENCE (SLACK) BETWEEN THE TWO TIMES
(S = TL - TE). WITH THESE FIGURES, A CRITICAL PATH OF THE PROJECT
CAN BE IDENTIFIED, WITH S=0 FOR ALL EVENTS. ANY DELAY OF AN ACTIVITY
ON THE CRITICAL PATH CAUSES AN INCREASE IN THE TIME DURATION OF THE
ENTIRE PROJECT.
PERT WILL ACCEPT UP TO 3000 ACTIVITIES AND 2500 EVENTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE FILE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
:PR, PERTH, N1, N2, N3, N4 WHERE
N1 = NUMBER OF THE FINAL EVENT
N2 = INPUT LOGICAL UNIT
N3 = OUTPUT LOGICAL UNIT
N4 = OUTPUT OPTION AS DEFINED BELOW:
OPTION 0: LIST OF TE FOR EACH EVENT
OPTION 1: LIST OF TE AND TL FOR EACH EVENT
OPTION 2: LIST OF TE, TL AND S FOR EACH EVENT
OPTION 3: LIST OF TE, TL, AND S FOR EACH EVENT AND ONE LIST
OF EVENTS IN ASCENDING ORDER OF S
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
INPUT DATA CONSISTS OF ONE RECORD FOR EACH OF N ACTIVITIES. EACH
RECORD CONTAINS THREE INTEGERS IN FREE FIELD FORMAT:
THE FINAL EVENT OF THE ACTIVITY
THE INITIAL EVENT OF THE ACTIVITY
THE MEDIUM TIME NEEDED FOR EXECUTING THE ACTIVITY CARRIAGE RETURN,
LINE FEED
THE LAST RECORD SHOULD BE 0,0,0.
X01301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GAMMA
**PROGRAM TITLE:
GAMMA FUNCTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE GAMMA FUNCTION BY MEANS OF THE RECURSION
RELATION AND POLYNOMIAL APPROXIMATION METHOD.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE FILE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL GAMMA (XX, GX', IER)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
XX REAL THE ARGUMENT FOR THE GAMMA FUNCTION.
GX REAL THE RESULTANT GAMMA FUNCTION VALUE.
IER INTEGER RESULTANT ERROR CODE WHERE:
IER=0 NO ERROR
IER=1 XX IS WITHIN .000001 OF BEING A NEGATIVE
INTEGER
IER=2 XX GT 34, OVERFLOW, GX SET TO 1.0E3
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X01401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BESK
**PROGRAM TITLE:
K BESSEL FUNCTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS FILTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE K BESSEL FUNCTION FOR A GIVEN ARGUMENT AND
ORDER. IN THE METHOD USED, THE ROUTINE COMPUTES ZERO ORDER AND FIRST
ORDER BESSEL FUNCTIONS, USING SERIES APPROXIMATIONS. THE ROUTINE THEN
COMPUTES THE (NTH) ORDER FUNCTION BY MEANS OF RECURRENCE RELATION.
ACCURACY IS USUALLY FIVE DECIMAL PLACES; IN WORST-CASE SITUATIONS
ACCURACY IS FOUR DECIMAL PLACES.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL BESK (X, N, BK, IER)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL THE ARGUMENT OF THE K BESSEL FUNCTION DESIRED.
N INTEGER THE ORDER OF THE K BESSEL FUNCTION DESIRED.
BK REAL THE RESULTANT K BESSEL FUNCTION.
IER INTEGER RESULTANT ERROR CODE WHERE:
IER=0 NO ERROR
IER=1 N IS NEGATIVE
IER=2 X IS ZERO OR NEGATIVE
IER=3 X .GT. 80, MACHINE RANGE EXCEEDED
IER=4 BK .GT. 10**38
NOTE: N MUST BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X01501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BESI
**PROGRAM TITLE:
I BESSEL FUNCTION ROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS FILTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE (I) BESSEL FUNCTION FOR A GIVEN ARGUMENT
AND ORDER. THE ROUTINE USES EITHER SERIES OR ASYMPTOTIC APPROXIMATION,
DEPENDING ON THE RANGE OF THE ARGUMENT. ACCURACY IS USUALLY FIVE
DECIMAL PLACES; IN WORST-CASE SITUATIONS ACCURACY IS FOUR DECIMAL
PLACES.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL BESI (_X, N, BI, IER)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL THE ARGUMENT OF THE I BESSEL FUNCTION DESIRED.
N INTEGER THE ORDER OF THE I BESSEL FUNCTION DESIRED.
BI REAL THE RESULTANT I BESSEL FUNCTION.
IER INTEGER RESULTANT ERROR CODE WHERE:
IER=0 NO ERROR
IER=1 N IS NEGATIVE
IER=2 X IS NEGATIVE
IER=3 UNDERFLOW, BI .LT. 1.E-38, BI SET TO 0.0
IER=4 OVERFLOW, X .GT. 80 WHERE X .GT. N
NOTE: N AND X MUST BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X01601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: BESY
**PROGRAM TITLE:
Y BESSEL FUNCTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS FILTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE (Y) BESSEL FUNCTION FOR A GIVEN ARGUMENT
AND ORDER. THE ROUTINE USES THE RECURRENCE RELATION AND POLYNOMIAL
APPROXIMATION TECHNIQUE. ACCURACY IS USUALLY FIVE DECIMAL PLACES;
IN WORST-CASE SITUATIONS ACCURACY IS FOUR DECIMAL PLACES.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL BESY (X, N, BY, IER)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL THE ARGUMENT OF THE Y BESSEL FUNCTION DESIRED.
N INTEGER THE ORDER OF THE Y BESEL FUNCTION DESIRED.
BY REAL THE RESULTANT Y BESSEL FUNCTION.
IER INTEGER RESULTANT ERROR CODE WHERE:
IER=0 NO ERROR
IER=1 N IS NEGATIVE
IER=2 X IS NEGATIVE OR ZERO
IER=3 BY HAS EXCEEDED MAGNITUDE OF 10**70
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
NOTE: VERY SMALL VALUES OF X MAY CAUSE THE RANGE OF THE LIBRARY
FUNCTION ALOG TO BE EXCEEDED.
X MUST BE GREATER THAN ZERO.
N MUST BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO ZERO.
X01701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MXMN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LOCATE MAXIMUM-MINIMUM INTEGER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ARRAY COMPARE SEARCH
**LANGUAGES:
ASSEMBLY
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
.1K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE DETERMINES THE MAXIMUM AND MINIMUM OF VALUES IN AN
INTEGER ARRAY, AND INDICATES THE POSITIONS IN THE ARRAY OF THESE
TWO VALUES.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE ROUTINE ".ENTR" FROM THE FORTRAN ALGOL LIBRARY IS NECESSARY TO
RUN THIS ROUTINE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
FORTRAN STATEMENT: CALL MXMN (I1, I2, I3, I4, I5)
I1 IS NAME OF ARRAY TO BE EXAMINED
I2 = NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN ARRAY
+1 <= I2 <= 32767 (LIMITED BY MEMORY SIZE)
I3, I4, I5 ARE DUMMY VARIABLES FOR RESULTS
RETURNED VALUES:
I2 = POSITION IN ARRAY OF MAXIMUM
I3 = POSITION IN ARRAY OF MINIMUM
I4 = MAXIMUM VALUE
I5 = MINIMUM VALUE
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X01801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: LLSQ
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SOLUTION OF LINEAR LEAST SQUARES PROBLEMS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
LINEAR EQ.
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE SOLVES LINEAR LEAST SQUARES PROBLEMS. IN ACCOMPLISHING
THIS, THE ROUTINE MINIMIZES THE EUCLIDEAN NORM OF B-A*X, WHERE (A)
IS AN M-BY-N MATRIX WITH (M) NOT LESS THAN (N). IN THE SPECIAL CASE
WHERE M=N, SYSTEMS OF LINEAR EQUATIONS MAY BE SOLVED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL LLSQ (A, B, M, N, L, X, IPIV, EPS, IER, AUX)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
A REAL M BY N COEFFICIENT MATRIX (DESTROYED).
B REAL M BY L RIGHT HAND SIDE MATRIX (DESTROYED).
M INTEGER ROW NUMBER OF MATRICES A AND B.
N INTEGER COLUMN NUMBER OF MATRIX A, ROW NUMBER OF
MATRIX X.
L INTEGER COLUMN NUMBER OF MATRICES B AND X.
X REAL N BY L SOLUTION MATRIX.
IPIV INTEGER INTEGER OUTPUT VECTOR OF DIMENSION N WHICH
CONTAINS INFORMATION ON COLUMN INTERCHANGES
IN MATRIX A (SEE REMARK #3)
EPS REAL INPUT PARAMETER WHICH SPECIFIES A RELATIVE
TOLERANCE FOR DETERMINATION OF RANK OF MATRIX A.
IER INTEGER A RESULTING ERROR PARAMETER.
AUX REAL AUXILIARY STORAGE ARRAY OF DIMENSION MAX(2*N,L).
ON RETURN FIRST L LOCATIONS OF AUX CONTAIN THE
RESULTING LEAST SQUARES.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
(1) NO ACTION BESIDES ERROR MESSAGE IER=-2 IN CASE M LESS THAN N.
(2) NO ACTION BESIDES ERROR MESSAGE IER=-1 IN CASE OF ZERO-MATRIX A.
(3) IF RANK K OF MATRIX A IS FOUND TO BE LESS THAN N BUT GREATER THAN
0, THE PROCEDURE RETURNS WITH ERROR CODE IER=K INTO CALLING
PROGRAM. THE LAST N=K ELEMENTS OF VECTOR IPIV DENOTE THE USELESS
COLUMNS OF MATRIX A. THE REMAINING USEFUL COLUMNS FORM A BASE OF
MATRIX A.
(4) IF THE PROCEDURE WAS SUCCESSFUL, ERROR PARAMETER IER IS SET TO 0.
X01901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QTFG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TRAPEZOIDAL INTEGRATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE VECTOR INTEGRAL VALUES FOR A GIVEN GENERAL
TABLE OF ARGUMENT AND FUNCTION VALUES. BEGINNING WITH Z(1)=0, VECTOR
(Z) IS EVALUATED BY MEANS OF THE TRAPEZOIDAL RULE (SECOND ORDER
FORMULA).
THE ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL QTFG (X, Y, Z, NDIM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF ARGUMENT VALUES.
Y REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION VALUES.
Z REAL THE RESULTING VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES.
Z MAY BE IDENTICAL WITH X OR Y.
NDIM INTEGER THE DIMENSION OF VECTORS X, Y, Z.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X02001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QTFE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TRAPEZOIDAL INTEGRATION EQUAL INTERVAL ARGUMENT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES FOR A GIVEN
EQUIDISTANT TABLE OF FUNCTION VALUES. BEGINNING WITH Z(1)=0, VECTOR
(Z) IS EVALUATED BY MEANS OF THE TRAPEZOIDAL RULE (SECOND ORDER
FORMULA).
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL QTFE (H, Y, Z, NDIM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
H REAL THE INCREMENT OF ARGUMENT VALUES.
Y REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION VALUES.
Z REAL THE RESULTING VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES.
Z MAY BE IDENTICAL WITH Y.
NDIM* INTEGER THE DIMENSION OF VECTORS Y AND Z.
*NO ACTION IN CASE NDIM IS LESS THAN 1.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X02101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QSF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SIMPSON'S & NEWTON'S 3/8 INTEGRATION (EQUAL INTERVAL ARG.)
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES FOR A GIVEN
EQUIDISTANT TABLE OF FUNCTION VALUES. THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION
VALUES MUST CONSIST OF AT LEAST (3) ELEMENTS. BEGINNING WITH Z(1)=0,
VECTOR (Z) IS EVALUATED BY MEANS OF SIMPSON'S RULE, NEWTON'S 3/8 RULE,
OR A COMBINATION OF THESE TWO RULES. TRUNCATION ERROR, COMPUTED BY
THE FOURTH-ORDER METHOD, IN MOST INSTANCES IS OF THE ORDER H**5. IN
THE WORST-CASE SITUATION, HOWEVER, THE TRUNCATION ERROR OF Z(2) IS OF
THE ORDER H**4.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL QSF (H,Y,Z,NDIM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
H REAL THE INCREMENT OF ARGUMENT VALUES.
Y REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION VALUES.
Z REAL THE RESULTING VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES. Z MAY
BE IDENTICAL WITH Y.
NDIM INTEGER THE DIMENSION OF VECTORS Y AND Z.
*NO ACTION IN CASE NDIM LESS THAN 3.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X02201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QHFG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HERMITIAN FOURTH-ORDER INTEGRATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES FOR A GIVEN GENERAL
TABLE OF ARGUMENT, FUNCTION AND DERIVATIVE VALUES. USING THE HERMITIAN
FOURTH-ORDER INTEGRATION FORMULA, VECTOR Z IS EVALUATED BEGINNING WITH
Z(1)=0.
THE ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL QHFG (X, Y, DERY, Z, NDIM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF ARGUMENT VALUES.
Y REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION VALUES.
DERY REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF DERIVATIVE VALUE.
Z REAL THE RESULTING VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES. Z MAY
BE IDENTICAL WITH X, Y, OR DERY.
NDIM* INTEGER THE DIMENSION OF VECTORS X, Y, DERY, Z.
*NO ACTION IN CASE NDIM LESS THAN 1.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X02301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QHFE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HERMITIAN 4TH ORDER INTEGRATION, EQUAL INTERVAL ARGUMENT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES FOR A GIVEN
EQUIDISTANT TABLE OF FUNCTION AND DERIVATIVE VALUES. BEGINNING WITH
Z(1)=0, VECTOR Z IS EVALUATED BY MEANS OF THE HERMITIAN FOURTH-ORDER
INTEGRATION FORMULA.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL QHFE (H, Y, DERY, Z, NDIM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
H REAL THE INCREMENT OF ARGUMENT VALUES.
Y REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION VALUES.
DERY REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF DERIVATIVE VALUES.
Z REAL THE RESULTING VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES.
Z MAY BE IDENTICAL WITH Y OR DERY.
NDIM* INTEGER THE DIMENSION OF VECTORS Y, DERY, Z.
*NO ACTION IN CASE NDIM LESS THAN 1.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X02401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QHSG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HERMTIIAN 6TH ORDER INTEGRATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES FOR A GIVEN GENERAL
TABLE OF ARGUMENT, FUNCTION, FIRST DERIVATIVE, AND SECOND DERIVATIVE
VALUES. BEGINNING WITH Z(1)=0, VECTOR (Z) IS EVALUATED BY MEANS OF
THE HERMITIAN SIXTH ORDER INTEGRATION FORMULA.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL QHSG (X, Y, FDY, SDY, Z, NDIM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
X REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF ARGUMENT VALUES.
Y REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION VALUES.
FDY REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FIRST DERIVATIVE.
SDY REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF SECOND DERIVATIVE
Z REAL THE RESULTING VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES.
Z MAY BE IDENTICAL WITH X, Y, FDY OR SDY.
NDIM* INTEGER THE DIMENSION OF VECTORS X, Y, FDY, SDY, Z.
*MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 1.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S PROGRAM.
X02501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: QHSE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HERMITIAN 6TH ORDER INTEGRATION EQUAL INTERVAL ARGUMENT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE COMPUTES THE VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES FOR A GIVEN
EQUIDISTANT TABLE OF FUNCTION, FIRST DERIVATIVE, AND SECOND DERIVATIVE
VALUES. BEGINNING WITH Z(1)=0, VECTOR Z IS EVALUATED BY MEANS OF THE
HERMITIAN SIXTH-ORDER INTEGRATION FORMULA.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL QHSE (H, Y, FDY, SDY, Z, NDIM)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
H REAL THE INCREMENT OF ARGUMENT VALUES.
Y REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FUNCTION VALUES.
FDY REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF FIRST DERIVATIVE.
SDY REAL THE INPUT VECTOR OF SECOND DERIVATIVE.
Z REAL THE RESULTING VECTOR OF INTEGRAL VALUES.
Z MAY BE IDENTICAL WITH Y, FDY, OR SDY.
NDIM* INTEGER THE DIMENSION OF VECTORS Y, FDY, SDY, Z.
*MUST NOT BE LESS THAN 1.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X02601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PRQD
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ROOTS OF A REAL POLYNOMIAL
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
POLYNOMIAL
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
USING THE QUOTIENT-DIFFERENCE ALGORITHM WITH DISPLACEMENT, THIS ROUTINE
CALCULATES ALL REAL AND COMPLEX ROOTS OF A POLYNOMIAL EXPRESSION.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
IT IS POSSIBLE TO EXECUTE THIS SUBROUTINE IN A 4K COMPUTER BY MAKING
USE OF TWO OTHER CONTRIBUTED PROGRAMS:
HP 22394 CORE SAVING TELEPRINTER I/0
HP 22297 OFFLINE RELOCATING LOADER
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL PRQD (C, IC, Q, E, POL, IR, IER)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
C REAL COEFFICIENT VECTOR OF GIVEN POLYNOMIAL
COEFFICIENTS ARE ORDERED FROM LOW TO HIGH,
THE GIVEN COEFFICIENT VECTOR GETS DIVIDED
BY THE LAST NONZERO TERM.
IC INTEGER DIMENSION OF VECTOR C.
Q REAL WORKING STORAGE OF DIMENSION IC ON RETURN
Q CONTAINS COMPLEX PARTS OF ROOTS.
POL REAL WORKING STORAGE OF DIMENSION IC ON RETURN
POL CONTAINS THE COEFFICIENTS OF THE
POLYNOMIAL WITH CALCULATED ROOTS. THIS
RESULTING COEFFICIENT VECTOR HAS DIMENSION
IR+1, COEFFICIENTS ARE ORDERED FROM LOW TO
HIGH.
IR INTEGER NUMBER OF CALCULATED ROOTS. NORMALLY IR IS
EQUAL TO DIMENSION IC MINUS ONE.
IER INTEGER RESULTING ERROR PARAMETER.
NOTE:
THE REAL PART OF THE ROOTS IS STORED IN Q(1) UP TO Q(IR). CORRESPOND-
ING COMPLEX PARTS ARE STORED IN E(1) UP TO E(IR).
THE FINAL COMPARISON BETWEEN GIVEN AND CALCULATED COEFFICIENT VECTOR
IS PERFORMED ONLY IF ALL ROOTS HAVE BEEN CALCULATED. THE MAXIMAL
RELATIVE ERROR OF THE COEFFICIENT VECTOR IS RECORDED IN Q(IR+1).
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IER=0 NO ERRORS IER=1 NO CONVERGENCE WITH REASONABLE TOLERANCE
IER=2 POLYNOMIAL IF DEGENERATE
IER=3 SUBROUTINE ABANDONED DUE TO ZERO DIVISOR.
IER=4 NO S-FRACTON EXISTS
IER=-1 CALCULATED COEFFICIENT VECTOR HAS < 3 CORRECT DIGITS.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X02701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RADD
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ADD ROWS OF MATRICES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE ADDS CORRESPONDING ELEMENTS OF A ROW OF ONE MATRIX TO A
ROW OF ANOTHER MATRIX. THE OUTPUT MATRIX MUST BE A GENERAL MATRIX, AND
NOT BE STORED IN THE SAME LOCATION AS THE INPUT MATRIX UNLESS THE INPUT
MATRIX ALSO IS GENERAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL RADD (A, IRA, R, IRR, N, M, MS, L)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
A REAL NAME OF INPUT MATRIX
IRA INTEGER ROW IN MATRIX A TO BE ADDED TO ROW IRR
OF MATRIX R.
R REAL NAME OF OUTPUT MATRIX
IRR INTEGER ROW IN MATRIX R WHERE SUMMATION IS
DEVELOPED.
N INTEGER NUMBER OF ROWS IN A
M INTEGER NUMBER OF COLUMNS IN A AND R.
MS INTEGER ONE DIGIT NUMBER FOR STORAGE MODE OF
MATRIX A WHERE:
0 - GENERAL
1 - SYMMETRIC
2 - DIAGONAL
L INTEGER NUMBER OF ROWS IN R
CALL LOC (IRA, J, IA, N, M, MS)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
J INTEGER A COLUMN COUNTER RANGING FROM I TO M
IR INTEGER ELEMENT OF ARRAY R
IA INTEGER ELEMENT OF ARRAY A
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS SUBROUTINE ADDS CORRESPONDING ELEMENTS OF A ROW OF ONE MATRIX TO
A ROW OF ANOTHER MATRIX. THE OUTPUT MATRIX MUST BE A GENERAL MATRIX.
THE OUTPUT MATRIX MUST NOT BE STORED IN THE SAME LOCATION AS THE INPUT
MATRIX UNLESS THE INPUT MATRIX IS GENERAL. USES SUBROUTINE LOC TO
LOCATE AN INPUT ELEMENT FOR ANY MATRIX STORAGE MODE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS FOR A AND R TO SUIT THE USER'S
APPLICATION.
X02801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: MFGR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RANK AND BASIS OF A MATRIX
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
FOR A GIVEN (M X N) MATRIX, THE FOLLOWING CALCULATIONS ARE PERFORMED
BY THIS ROUTINE:
A. DETERMINE RANK AND LINEARLY INDEPENDENT ROWS & COLUMNS (BASIS)
B. FACTORIZE A SUBMATRIX OF MAXIMAL RANK.
C. EXPRESS NONBASIC ROWS IN TERMS OF BASIC ROWS.
D. EXPRESS BASIC VARIABLES IN TERMS OF FREE VARIABLES.
THE LEFT HAND TRIANGULAR FACTOR IS NORMALIZED SO THAT THE DIAGONAL
CONTAINS ALL 1'S, THUS ALLOWING STORAGE OF THE SUB-DIAGONAL PART.
GAUSSIAN ELIMINATION TECHNIQUE IS USED FOR CALCULATION OF THE TRIAN-
GULAR FACTORS OF A GIVEN MATRIX. COMPLETE PIVOTING IS BUILT IN. IN
THE CASE OF A SINGULAR MATRIX, ONLY THE TRIANGULAR FACTORS OF A SUB-
MATRIX OF MAXIMAL RANK ARE RETAINED. THE REMAINING PARTS OF THE
RESULTANT MATRIX GIVE THE DEPENDENCIES OF ROWS AND THE SOLUTION OF THE
HOMOGENEOUS MATRIX EQUATION A*X=0.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL MFGR (A, M, N, EPS, IRANK, IROW, ICOL)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
A REAL GIVEN MATRIX WITH M ROWS AND N COLUMNS,
ON RETURN A CONTAINS THE FIVE SUB-
MATRICES L,R,H,D,O.
M INTEGER NUMBER OF ROWS OF MATRIX A
N INTEGER NUMBER OF COLUMNS OF MATRIX A
EPS REAL TEST VALUE FOR ZERO AFFECTED BY ROUND-
OFF NOISE.
IRANK INTEGER RESULTANT RANK OF GIVEN MATRIX.
IROW INTEGER INTEGER VECTOR OF DIMENSION M CONTAINING
THE SUBSCRIPTS OF BASIC ROWS IN
IROW(1)...........IROW(IRANK)
ICOL INTEGER INTEGER VECTOR OF DIMENSION N CONTAINING
THE SUBSCRIPTS OF BASIC COLUMNS IN
ICOL(1) UP TO ICOL(IRANK)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X02901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GELG
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SOLUTION OF SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR EQUATIONS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
LINEAR EQ. MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
USING GAUSS ELIMINATION WITH COMPLETE PIVOTING, THIS ROUTINE SOLVES A
GENERAL SYSTEM OF SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR EQUATIONS.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL GELG (R,A,M,N,EPS,IER)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
R REAL THE M BY N MATRIX OF RIGHT HAND SIDES.
(DESTROYED) ON RETURN R CONTAINS THE SOLUTION
OF THE EQUATIONS.
A REAL THE M BY N COEFFICIENT MATRIX (DESTROYED).
M INTEGER THE NUMBER OF EQUATIONS IN THE SYSTEM.
N INTEGER THE NUMBER OF RIGHT HAND SIDE VECTORS.
EPS REAL AN INPUT CONSTANT WHICH IS USED AS RELATIVE
TOLERANCE FOR TEST ON LOSS OF SIGNIFICANCE.
IER INTEGER RESULTING ERROR PARAMETER CODED AS FOLLOWS:
IER=0 NO ERROR
IER=-1 NO RESULT BECAUSE OF M LESS THAN 1 OR
PIVOT ELEMENT AT ANY ELIMINATION STEP
EQUAL TO 0.
IER=K WARNING DUE TO POSSIBLE LOSS OF SIGNIFI-
CANCE INDICATED AT ELIMIMATION STEP K+1,
WHERE THE PIVOT ELEMENT WAS <= TO THE
INTERNAL TOLERANCE EPS TIMES ABSOLUTELY
GREATEST ELEMENT OF MATRIX A.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
NOTE: INPUT MATRICES R AND A ARE ASSUMED TO BE STORED COLUMNWISE IN
M*N RESP. M*M SUCCESSIVE STORAGE LOCATIONS. ON RETURN SOLUTION MATRIX
R IS STORED COLUMNWISE TOO.
THE PROCEDURE GIVES THE RESULTS IF THE NUMBER OF EQUATIONS M IS GREATER
THAN 0 AND PIVOT ELEMENTS AT ALL ELIMINATION STEPS ARE DIFFERENT FROM
0. HOWEVER WARNING IER=K - IF GIVEN - INDICATES POSSIBLE LOSS OF
SIGNIFICANCE. IN CASE OF A WELL-SCALED MATRIX A AND APPROPRIATE
TOLERANCE EPS, IER=K MAY BE INTERPRETED THAT MATRIX A HAS THE RANK K.
NO WARNING IS GIVEN IN CASE M=1.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION
X03001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GELB
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SOLUTION OF SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR EQUATIONS - BAND MATRIX
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
LINEAR EQ. MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE SOLVES A SYSTEM OF SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR EQUATIONS WITH A
COEFFICIENT MATRIX OF BAND STRUCTURES. TO PRESERVE THE BAND STRUCTURE
IN THE REMAINING COEFFICIENT MATRICES, THE SOLUTION IS OBTAINED BY
MEANS OF THE GAUSS-ELIMINATION METHOD WITH COLUMN PIVOTING ONLY.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL GELB (R,A,M,N,MUD,MLD,EPS,IER)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
R REAL M BY N RIGHT HAND SIDE MATRIX (DESTROYED). ON
RETURN R CONTAINS THE SOLUTION OF THE EQUATIONS.
A REAL M BY M COEFFICIENT MATRIX WITH BAND STRUCTURE
(DESTROYED).
M INTEGER THE NUMBER OF EQUATIONS IN THE SYSTEM.
N INTEGER THE NUMBER OF RIGHT HAND SIDE VECTORS.
MUD INTEGER THE NUMBER OF UPPER CODIAGONALS (THAT MEANS
CODIAGONALS ABOVE MAIN DIAGONAL).
MLD INTEGER THE NUMBER OF LOWER CODIAGONALS (THAT MEANS
CODIAGONALS BELOW MAIN DIAGONALS).
EPS REAL AN INPUT CONSTANT WHICH IS USED AS RELATIVE
TOLERANCE FOR TEST ON LOSS OF SIGNIFICANCE.
IER INTEGER RESULTING ERROR PARAMETER CODED AS FOLLOWS:
IER=0 NO ERROR
IER=-1 NO RESULT BECAUSE OF WRONG INPUT
PARAMETERS M, MUD, MLD OR BECAUSE OF
PIVOT ELEMENT AT ANY ELIMINATION STEP
EQUAL TO 0.
IER=K WARNING DUE TO POSSIBLE LOSS OF
SIGNIFICANCE INDICATED AT ELIMINATION
STEP K+1, WHERE PIVOT ELEMENT WAS LESS
THAN OR EQUAL TO THE INTERNAL TOLERANCE
EPS TIMES ABSOLUTELY GREATEST ELEMENT OF
MATRIX A.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
REMARKS:
BAND MATRIX A IS ASSUMED TO BE STORED ROWWISE IN THE FIRST ME
SUCCESSIVE STORAGE LOCATIONS OF TOTALLY NEEDED MA STORAGE LOCATIONS,
WHERE MA=M*MC-ML*(ML+1)/2 AND ME=MA-MU*(MU+1)/2 WITH
MC=MIN(M,1+MUD+MLD), ML=MC-1-MLD, MU=MC-1-MUD.
RIGHT HAND SIDE MATRIX R IS ASSUMED TO BE STORED COLUMNWISE IN N*M
SUCCESSIVE STORAGE LOCATIONS. ON RETURN SOLUTION MATRIX R IS STORED
COLUMNWISE TOO. INPUT PARAMETERS M, MUD, MLD SHOULD SATISFY THE
FOLLOWING RESTRICTIONS: MUD NOT LESS THAN ZERO
MLD NOT LESS THAN ZERO
MUD + MLD NOT GREATER THAN 2*M-2
NO ACTION BESIDES ERROR MESSAGE IER=-1 TAKES PLACE IF THESE RESTRICTIONS
ARE NOT SATISFIED.
THE PROCEDURE GIVES RESULTS IF THE RESTRICTIONS ON INPUT PARAMETERS ARE
SATISFIED AND IF PIVOT ELEMENTS AT ALL ELIMINATION STEPS ARE DIFFERENT
FROM 0. HOWEVER WARNING IER=K -@IF GIVEN - INDICATES POSSIBLE LOSS OF
SIGNIFICANCE. IN CASE OF A WELL SCALED MATRIX A & APPROPRIATE TOLERANCE
EPS, IER=K MAY BE INTERPRETED THAT MATRIX A HAS RANK K.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER DIMENSION STATEMENT TO SUIT USER'S APPLICATION.
X03101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GELS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SOLUTION OF SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR EQUATIONS SYMMETRIC MATRIX
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX LINEAR EQ.
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE SOLVES A SYSTEM OF SIMULTANEOUS LINEAR EQUATIONS WITH
A SYMMETRIC COEFFICIENT MATRIX WHOSE UPPER TRIANGULAR PART IS ASSUMED
TO BE STORED COLUMNWISE. TO PRESERVE SYMMETRY IN THE REMAINING
COEFFICIENT MATRICES, THE SOLUTION IS OBTAINED BY MEANS OF THE GAUSS-
ELIMINATION METHOD WITH COLUMN PIVOTING ONLY.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL GELS (R,A,M,N,EPS,IER,AUX)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
R REAL M BY N RIGHT HAND SIDE MATRIX (DESTROYED). ON
RETURN, R CONTAINS THE SOLUTION OF THE EQUATIONS.
A REAL UPPER TRIANGULAR PART OF THE SYMMETRIC M BY N
COEFFICIENT MATRIX (DESTROYED).
M INTEGER THE NUMBER OF EQUATIONS IN THE SYSTEM.
N INTEGER THE NUMBER OF RIGHT HAND SIDE VECTORS.
EPS REAL AN INPUT CONSTANT WHICH IS USED AS RELATIVE
TOLERANCE FOR TEST OF LOSS OF SIGNIFICANCE.
IER INTEGER RESULTING ERROR PARAMETER CODED AS FOLLOWS:
IER=0 NO ERROR
IER=-1 NO RESULT BECAUSE OF M LESS THAN 1 OR
PIVOT ELEMENT AT ANY ELIMINATION STEP
EQUAL TO 0.
IER=K WARNING DUE TO POSSIBLE LOSS OF
SIGNIFICANCE INDICATED AT ELIMINATION
STEP K+1 WHERE PIVOT ELEMENT WAS LESS
THAN OR EQUAL TO THE INTERNAL TOLERANCE
EPS TIMES ABSOLUTELY GREATEST MAIN
DIAGONAL ELEMENT OF MATRIX A.
AUX REAL AN AUXILIARY STORAGE ARRAY WITH DIMENSION M-1
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
REMARKS:
UPPER TRIANGULAR PART OF MATRIX A IS ASSUMED TO BE STORED COLUMNWISE
IN M*(M+1)/2 SUCCESSIVE STORAGE LOCATIONS. RIGHT HAND SIDE MATRIX R
COLUMNWISE IN M*N SUCCESSIVE STORAGE LOCATIONS. ON RETURN SOLUTION
MATRIX R IS STORED COLUMNWISE TOO.
THE PROCEDURE GIVES RESULTS IF THE NUMBER OF EQUATIONS M IS GREATER
THAN 0 AND PIVOT ELEMENTS OR ALL ELIMINATION STEPS ARE DIFFERENT FROM
0. HOWEVER WARNING IER=K - IF GIVEN - INDICATED POSSIBLE LOSS OF
SIGNIFICANCE. IN CASE OF A WELL SCALED MATRIX A AND APPROPRIATE
TOLERANCE EPS, IER=K MAY BE INTERPRETED THAT MATRIX A HAS THE RANK K.
NO WARNING IS GIVEN IN CASE M=1. ERROR PARAMETER IER=-1 DOES NOT
NECESSARILY MEAN THAT MATRIX A IS SINGULAR, AS ONLY MAIN DIAGONAL
ELEMENTS ARE USED AS PIVOT ELEMENTS. POSSIBLY SUBROUTINE GELE (WHICH
WORKS WITH TOTAL PIVOTING) WOULD BE ABLE TO FIND A SOLUTION.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X03201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RHARM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
REAL FOURIER TRANSFORM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FOURIER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN CALLABLE ROUTINE FINDS THE FOURIER COEFFICIENTS OF A
ONE-DIMENSION REAL ARRAY. USING THE COOLEY-TUKEY ALGORITHM, THE
ROUTINE GIVES THE COEFFICIENTS OF 2*(2**M) REAL POINTS WHEN GIVEN
THE INPUT OF 2*(2**M) REAL FUNCTION VALUES WHOSE ARGUMENTS ARE EQUALLY
SPACED.
CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM #22037 IS REQUIRED.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS 16K OF CORE STORAGE TO COMPILE, 8K TO EXECUTE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL RHARM (A, M, INV, S, IFERR)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
A REAL AS INPUT, CONTAINS ONE DIMENSIONAL REAL DATA.
A IS 2*N+4 CORE LOCATIONS, WHERE N=2**M, 2*N
REAL NUMBERS ARE PUT INTO THE FIRST 2*N CORE
LOCATIONS OF A.
AS OUTPUT, A CONTAINS THE FOURIER COEFFICIENTS
A0/2,B0=0,A1,B1,A2,B2,...,AN,BN=0 RESPECTIVELY
IN THE FIRST 2N+2 CORE LOCATION OF A.
M INTEGER AN INTEGER WHICH DETERMINES THE SIZE OF THE
VECTOR A. THE SIZE OF A IS 2*(2**M)+4.
INV INTEGER A VECTOR WORK AREA FOR BIT AND INDEX MANIPULATION
OF DIMENSION ONE EIGHTH THE NUMBER OF REAL INPUT,
VIZ.,(1/8)*2*(2**M)
S REAL A VECTOR WORK AREA FOR SINE TABLES WITH
DIMENSION THE SAME AS INV.
IFERR INTEGER A RETURNED VALUE OF 1 MEANS THAT M IS LESS THAN
3 OR GREATER THAN 20. OTHERWISE IFERR IS SET
= 0.
NOTE: THIS SUBROUTINE GIVES THE FOURIER COEFFICIENTS OF 2*(2**M) REAL
POINTS. SEE SUBROUTINE HARM FOR THREE DIMENSIONAL, COMPLEX
FOURIER TRANSFORMS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SUBROUTINE RHARM GIVES THE FOURIER COEFFICIENTS OF 2*(2**M) REAL POINTS
WHEN GIVEN THE INPUT OF 2*(2**M) REAL FUNCTION VALUES WHOSE ARGUMENTS
ARE EQUALLY SPACED.
THE FOURIER COEFFICIENTS A0, 80=0, A1, B1,....., AN, BN=0 ARE OBTAINED
FOR INPUT XJ, J=0,1,2,.....,2N-1 FOR THE FOLLOWING EQUATION
(PI=3.14159....)
N-1 J
XJ=(1/2)A0+SUM (AK*COS(PI*J*K/N)+BK*SIN(PI*J*K/N))+(1/2)AN(-1)
K=1
FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X03301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: HARM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COMPLEX FOURIER TRANSFORM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FOURIER TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE FUNCTION OF THIS FORTRAN CALLABLE ROUTINE IS TO PERFORM DISCRETE
COMPLEX FOURIER TRANSFORMS ON A COMPLEX 3-DIMENSION ARRAY WHERE EACH
DIMENSION IS A POWER OF 2.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS 16K OF CORE STORAGE TO COMPILE, 8K TO EXECUTE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE LOCUS LIBRARY FUNCTION MAX0 FROM THE "LOCATE MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM
INTEGER" CONTRIBUTION MUST ALSO BE LOADED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL HARM (A, M, INV, S, IFSET, IFERR)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
A REAL AS INPUT, A CONTAINS THE COMPLEX, 3-DIMENSIONAL
ARRAY TO BE TRANSFORMED. THE REAL PART OF A
(I1,I2,I3) IS STORED IN VECTOR FASHION IN A CELL
WITH INDEX 2*(/N*N1*N2+I2*N1+I1)+1 WHERE
NI=2**M(I), I=1,2,3 AND I1=0,1,...,K1-1, ETC.
THE IMAGINARY PART IS IN THE CELL IMMEDIATELY
FOLLOWING. NOTE THAT THE SUBSCRIPT I1 INCREASES
MOST RAPIDLY AND I3 INCREASES LEAST RAPIDLY. AS
OUTPUT, A CONTAINS THE COMPLEX FOURIER TRANSFORM.
THE NUMBER OF CORE LOCATIONS OF ARRAY A IS 2*
(N1*N2*N3)
M INTEGER A THREE CELL VECTOR WHICH DETERMINES THE SIZE
OF THE 3 DIMENSIONS OF THE ARRAY A. THE SIZE
NI, OF THE I DIMENSION OF A IS 2**M(I), I=1,2,3.
INV INTEGER A VECTOR WORK AREA FOR BIT AND INDEX MANIPULATION
OF DIMENSION ONE EIGHTH THE NUMBER OF CORE
LOCATIONS OF A,VIZ., (1/8)*2*N1*N2*N3.
S REAL A VECTOR WORK AREA FOR SINE TABLE WITH DIMENSION
THE SAME AS INV.
IFSET INTEGER AN OPTION PARAMETER WITH THE FOLLOWING SETTINGS:
0 SET UP SINE AND INV TABLES ONLY
1 SET UP SINE AND INV TABLES ONLY AND CALCULATE
FOURIER TRANSFORM
-1 SET UP SINE AND INV TABLES ONLY AND CALCULATE
INVERSE FOURIER TRANSFORM (FOR THE MEANING
OF INVERSE SEE THE EQUATIONS UNDER SECTION 2.0)
2 CALCULATE FOURIER TRANSFORM ONLY (ASSUME SINE
AND INV TABLES EXIST)
-2 CALCULATE INVERSE FOURIER TRANSFORM ONLY
(ASSUME SINE AND INV TABLES EXIST)
IFERR INTEGER ERROR INDICATOR. WHEN IFSET IS 0-+1,-1,IFERR 1
MEANS THE MAXIMUM M(I) IS LESS THAN THREE OR GREATER
THAN 20, I=1,2,3 WHEN IFSET IS +2,-2 IFERR=1 MEANS
THAT THE SINE AND INV TABLES ARE NOT LARGE ENOUGH
OR HAVE NOT BEEN COMPUTED ON RETURN IFERR=0 THEN
NONE OF THE ABOVE CONDITIONS ARE PRESENT.
FUNCTION MAX0 FINDS THE MAXIMUM OF THE INTEGER PARAMETERS --
MTT = MAX0(M(1),M(2),M(3))-2
MT = MAX0(M(1),M(2),M(3))-2
MT = MAX0(2,MT)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER DIMENSION STATEMENTS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X03401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CORRE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MEAN, DEVIATION, AND CORRELATION COEFFICIENTS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN CALLABLE ROUTINE COMPUTES MEANS, STANDARD DEVIATIONS,
SUMS OF CROSS-PRODUCTS OF DEVIATIONS, AND CORRELATION COEFFICIENTS
BY PRODUCT-MOMENT CORRELATION COEFFICIENTS. THE NUMBER OF VARIABLES
MUST BE GREATER THAN THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL CORRE (N,M,IO,X,XBAR,STD,RX,R,B,D,T)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
N INTEGER NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS
M INTEGER NUMBER OF VARIABLES
IO INTEGER OPTION CODE FOR INPUT DATA --
0 IF DATA ARE TO BE READ IN FROM INPUT DEVICE
IN THE SPECIAL SUBROUTINE NAMED DATA
1 IF ALL DATA ARE ALREADY IN CORE
X REAL IF IO=0, THE VALUE OF X IS 0.0
IF IO=1, X IS THE INPUT MATRIX (N BY M)
CONTAINING DATA
XBAR REAL OUTPUT VECTOR OF LENGTH M CONTAINING MEANS
STD REAL OUTPUT VECTOR OF LENGTH CONTAINING STANDARD
DEVIATIONS.
RX REAL OUTPUT MATRIX (M X M) CONTAINING SUMS OF CROSS-
PRODUCTS OF DEVIATIONS FROM MEANS.
R REAL OUTPUT MATRIX (ONLY UPPER TRIANGULAR PORTION
OF THE SYMMETRIC MATRIX OF M BY M) CONTAINING
CORRELATION COEFFICIENTS. (STORAGE MODE OF 1)
B REAL OUTPUT VECTOR OF LENGTH M CONTAINING THE DIAGONAL
OF THE MATRIX OF SUMS OF CROSS-PRODUCTS OF
DEVIATIONS FROM MEANS
D REAL WORKING VECTOR OF LENGTH M
T REAL WORKING VECTOR OF LENGTH M
CALL DATA (M,D)
THIS SUBROUTINE MUST BE PROVIDED BY THE USER.
(1) IF IO=0, THIS SUBROUTINE IS EXPECTED TO FURNISH AN OBSERVATION IN
VECTOR D FROM AN EXTERNAL INPUT DEVICE.
(2) IF IO=1, THIS SUBROUTINE IS NOT USED BY CORRE BUT MUST EXIST IN
SOURCE DECK. IF USER HAS NOT SUPPLIED A SUBROUTINE NAMED DATA,
THE FOLLOWING IS SUGGESTED: SUBROUTINE DATA
RETURN
END
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE SOURCE LISTING MAKES PROVISION FOR A DOUBLE-PRECISION VERSION OF
THIS ROUTINE, BUT THE DOUBLE-PRECISION LIBRARY ROUTINES WHICH IT
REQUIRES MUST BE USER-PROVIDED IF THIS OPTION IS CHOSEN.
X03501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGER LIBRARY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PRECISION INTEGER LIBRARY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ADDS, SUBTRACTS, MULTIPLIES, AND DIVIDES DOUBLE PRECISION
(32-BIT) NUMBERS. NUMBERS UP TO (2,147,483,648) CAN BE HANDLED.
THE PROGRAM IS FORTRAN OR ASSEMBLER CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
WHEN YOU PUSH RUN, NO MESSAGE WILL DIRECT YOUR INPUT.
ENTER SDDDDDDDDDD, WHERE S IS THE SIGN (BLANK MEANS +), AND D ARE DIGITS
OR LEADING SPACES OR 0'S FOR A TOTAL OF TEN.
CR/LF.
ENTER THE SECOND DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGER IN THE SAME FORMAT FOLLOWED
BY CR/LF.
PROGRAM TEST WILL COMPUTE AND LIST OUTPUT ON THE LINE PRINTER.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL DREAD (IU, A(1), IN)
READS FORMATTED DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGERS SDDDDDDDDDD, WHERE S IS THE
SIGN (BLANK MEANS +), D'S ARE DIGITS OR LEADING SPACES OR 0'S FOR A
TOTAL OF TEN.
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
IU INTEGER LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER
A(1) REAL BUFFER ADDRESS
IN INTEGER NUMBER OF INTEGERS TO BE INPUT.
CALL DWRIT (IU, A(1), IN)
OUTPUTS ASCII DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGERS.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
X = DIMUL (A,B)
FUNCTION WHICH PERFORMS A * B
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTON
A REAL THE TWO NUMBERS TO BE MULTIPLIED BY DIMUL.
B REAL
X = DIDIV (A,B) FUNCTION WHICH PERFORMS A : B
X = DIDIV (A,B,R) FUNCTION WHICH PERFORMS A : B, R=REMAINDER (IN
ABSOLUTE VALUE)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
FCONV PERFORMS THE FOLLOWING CONVERSIONS:
I=ISCON(A) CONVERTS TO SINGLE PRECISION.
X=DICON(I) CONVERTS TO DOUBLE PRECISION.
I=IDSIG(A) RETURNS I=1 FOR A > 0
I=0 FOR A = 0
I=-1 FOR A < 0
THE FOLLOWING SUBROUTINES ARE CALLED BY THE PREVIOUS ROUTINES AND ARE
ONLY ASSEMBLY-CALLABLE.
DMPY MULTIPLIES DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGERS.
DLD MUL1
JSB DMPY
DEF MUL2
DDIV DIVIDES DIVID BY DIVIS LEAVING THE QUOTIENT IN THE A AND B
REGISTERS AND THE REMAINDER IN REM1, REM2.
------------------------------------------------------------------------
DCMAD TWO-COMPLEMENTS THE DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGER IN THE A AND B
REGISTERS.
DLD X
JSB DCM
OR ADDS ADD1 TO ADD2
DLD ADD1
JSB DAD
DEF ADD2
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ANY OVERFLOW HALTS THE COMPUTER.
SINCE DOUBLE PRECISION INTEGERS ARE DECLARED LIKE REAL VARIABLES,
CARE MUST BE TAKEN NOT TO USE THEM WITH THE FORTRAN OPERATORS.
EXAMPLE: WRONG RIGHT
IF (A) 2,3,4 IF (IDSIG(A)) 2,3,4
C = -A C = DISUB (0.,A)
REMAINDERS FROM DIVISION OPERATIONS ARE GIVEN IN ABSOLUTE VALUE.
X03601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS21
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LIBRARY OF ALGEBRAIC TRANSFORMATIONS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
TRIGONOMETRY ALGEBRA TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN PROGRAM PERFORMS ANY OF 25 TRANSFORMATIONS ON ONE OR TWO
INPUT VARIABLES. RESULTS ARE PRINTED AND PUNCHED, IF DESIRED. THE
TRANSFORMATIONS INCLUDE COMPUTATION OF SQUARE ROOTS, LOGARITHMS,
EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS, AND COMBINATION TRIGONOMETIC AND SQUARE ROOT
FUNCTIONS, AS WELL AS VARIOUS LINEAR FUNCTIONS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE USER MUST SUPPLY AN INPUT SUBROUTINE CALLED "READ" AND THIS
SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE THE TRANSFORMATION LIBRARY.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: PRINT
NOT =0: PRINT AND PUNCH
02 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
03-05 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
(SEE RESTRICTIONS)
06-07 NCODE I2 SPECIFIED TRANSFORMATION
CODE (1 < OR =NCODE < OR =25)
08-15 CONST F8.0 SPECIFIED TRANSFORMATION
CONSTANT (IF NEEDED)
DATA -- X -- THE FIRST INPUT VARIABLE
-- Y -- THE SECOND INPUT VARIABLE
(IF NEEDED)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
LISTING OF PERMISSABLE TRANSFORMATIONS AND CORRESPONDING TRANSFORMATION
CODES
NCODE TRANSFORMATION RANGE
01 SQRT(X) => X X >/= 0
02 X + SQRT(X+1)=> X X >/= 0
03 LOG(10)X => X X > 0
04 EXP(X) => X
05 ARCSIN(SQRT(X))=> X 0 </= X < 1
06 ARCSIN(SQRT(X/(N+1)))+
ARCSIN SQRT((X+1)/(N+1)) => X 0 </=(X/N) < 1
07 1/X => X X NOT = 0
08 X + X => X
09 X * C => X
10 X ** C => X
11 X + y => X
12 X - Y => X
13 X * Y => X
14 X / Y => X Y NOT = 0
15 IF(X >/=C),1=>X;OTHERWISE,0=>X
16 IF(X >/=Y),1=>X;OTHERWISE,0=>X
17 LOG(E)X => X X > 0
18 X - XM => X
19 X/S => X
20 SIN(X) => X
21 COS(X) => X
22 ARCTAN(X) => X
23 X ** Y => X X > 0
24 C ** X => X C > 0
25 IF(X=0),X=>C,OTHERWISE X=>X
NOTE: N = NPNT
C = CONST
XM = MEAN
S = STANDARD DEVIATION WHERE S**2 = SUM(XI - XM)**2/(N-1)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF THE USER SELECTS ANY TRANSFORMATION EXCEPT NUMBERS 18 AND 19, THIS
PROGRAM WILL HANDLE UP TO 999 INDIVIDUAL DATA POINTS. IF NUMBERS 18
AND 19 ARE DESIRED, THE NUMBER OF DATA POINTS, DENOTED BY NPNT, IS
RESTRICTED TO 500 FOR THE VARIABLE X. ONLY ONE VALUE OF X AND Y ARE
PERMITTED ON A LINE. THE DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT
BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
X03701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS31
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MATRIX ARITHMETIC PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX ALGEBRA
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ADDS, SUBTRACTS, OR MULTIPLIES TWO 2-DIMENSIONAL MATRICES
WHICH ARE CONFORMABLE. MAXIMUM MATRIX SIZE IS 20 X 20.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE USER MUST SUPPLY A SUBROUTINE CALLED "READ" WHICH INPUTS DATA.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
DATA IS ENTERED ONE ROW AT A TIME, I.E.:
X X X ... X
11 12 13 1N
X X X ... X
21 22 23 2N
.
.
.
X X X ... X
M1 M2 M3 MN
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01-02 ISW2 I2 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0; BATCH RUN
=1: ADD
=2: SUBTRACT
=3: MULTIPLY
05-06 NROWA I2 NUMBER OF ROWS OF FIRST
MATRIX (NROWA < OR =20)
07-08 NCOLA I2 NUMBER OF COLUMNS OF FIRST
MATRIX (NCOLA < OR =20)
09-10 NROWB I2 NUMBER OF COLUMNS OF SECOND
MATRIX (NROWB < OR =20)
11-12 NCOLB I2 NUMBER OF COLUMNS OF SECOND
MATRIX (NCOLB < OR =20)
DATA -- X(I) -- MATRIX ELEMENTS
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X03801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: XRITH
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MATRIX ARITHMETIC LIBRARY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX LIBRARY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE ADDS, SUBTRACTS OR MULTIPLIES TWO 2-DIMENSIONAL MATRICES
WHICH ARE CONFORMABLE. DATA IS ENTERED ONE ROW AT A TIME. MAXIMUM SIZE
IS 20 X 20.
THE ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL XRITH (NCOLA, NROWA, NCOLB, NROWB, NTYPE, X, Y)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
NCOLA INTEGER THE NUMBER OF COLUMNS IN THE FIRST MATRIX
(NCOLA < OR = 20)
NROWA INTEGER THE NUMBER OF ROWS OF THE FIRST MATRIX
(NROWA < OR = 20)
NCOLB INTEGER THE NUMBER OF COLUMNS OF THE SECOND MATRIX
(NCOLB < OR = 20)
NROWB INTEGER THE NUMBER OF ROWS OF THE SECOND MATRIX
(NROWB < OR = 20)
NTYPE INTEGER IF EQUAL TO 1, ADD; IF EQUAL TO 2, SUBTRACT IF
IF EQUAL TO 3, MULTIPLY.
X REAL THE ELEMENTS OF THE FIRST MATRIX IN THE ORDER:
X X X ... X
11 12 13 1N
X X X ... X
21 22 23 2N
.
.
.
X X X ... X
M1 M2 M3 MN
Y REAL THE ELEMENTS OF THE SECOND MATRIX IN THE ORDER:
Y Y Y ... Y
11 12 13 1N
Y Y Y ... Y
21 22 23 2N
.
.
.
Y Y Y ... Y
M1 M2 M3 MN
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ALTER THE ARRAY DIMENSIONS TO SUIT THE USER'S APPLICATION.
X03901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS32
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ARRAY CROSS TABULATION PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ARRAY MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BC8
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS A CROSS-TABULATION OF TWO SINGLE-DIMENSION FIXED
POINT ARRAYS WHICH USE A CARTESIAN COORDINATE SCHEME. A MAXIMUM OF 9999
VALUES CAN BE HANDLED FOR EACH CELL OF THE ARRAY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
A SUBROUTINE "READ", TO INPUT DATA, MUST BE LOADED BEFORE GCS32.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 9999 VALUES FOR EACH
CELL OF THE CROSS-TABULATION ARRAY. THE CROSS-TAB MATRIX WILL
ACCOMMODATE 99 DISTINCT CLASSIFICATIONS ALONG THE Y-AXIS AND 25 DISTINCT
CLASSIFICATIONS ALONG THE X-AXIS. THE USER MUST SPECIFY THE MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF CLASSIFICATIONS DIFFERENT FROM ZERO FOR BOTH AXES. THIS
PROGRAM WILL ALLOW 98 DIFFERENT CLASSIFICATIONS OTHER THAN ZERO ALONG
THE X-AXIS. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT
BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
X-AXIS
LABEL 01-58 -- -- FREE TEXT WHICH APPEARS ON OUTPUT.
Y-AXIS
LABEL 01-58 -- -- FREE TEXT WHICH APPEARS ON OUTPUT.
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-05 NPRS I4 NUMBER OF DATA PAIRS TO BE INPUT
TO THE CROSS-TAB ARRAY
(NPRS < OR =9999)
06-07 LIMX I2 NUMBER OF DISTINCT CLASSIFICATIONS
OTHER THAN ZERO ALONG THE X-AXIS
(LIMX < OR =24)
08-09 LIMY I2 NUMBER OF DISTINCT CLASSIFICATIONS
OTHER THAN ZERO ALONG THE Y-AXIS
(LIMY < OR =98)
DATA -- NX -- ELEMENT FOR X-AXIS
-- NY -- ELEMENT FOR Y-AXIS
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X04001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC13B
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SIMULTANEOUS EQUATION SOLVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
LINEAR EQ. MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
USING THE GAUSSIAN ELIMINATION METHOD, THIS PROGRAM SOLVES UP TO 22
SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS WHOSE COEFFICIENTS ARE IN A SINGLE INPUT MATRIX.
A CHECK FOR MATRIX SINGULARITY IS NOT PERFORMED. THE PROGRAM CONTROLS
ITS OWN I/O OPERATIONS, USING ANY I/O DRIVER IN THE OPERATING SYSTEM
EMPLOYED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE USER MUST WRITE A "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA AND LOAD IT
BEFORE LOADING GC13B.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE OR TELETYPE INPUT FORMAT REQUIREMENTS WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE
CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS DESCRIBED HERE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-03 M I2 NUMBER OF INPUT EQUATIONS
(M < OR =22)
DATA -- A(1,J) -- 1ST COEFFICIENT OF THE JTH
EQUATION
-- A(I,J) -- ITH COEFFICIENT OF THE JTH
EQUATION
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 22 EQUATIONS. THE NUMBER OF
COEFFICIENTS PER EQUATION MUST BE EQUAL TO THE (NUMBER OF EQUATIONS
+ 1); I.E., AN AUGMENTED MATRIX. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY
FORM SUBJECT TO THE ORDERING RESTRICTION; THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE. THE ORDERING RESTRICTION IS THAT
THE INPUT COEFFICIENTS OF THE JTH EQUATION MUST (A) BE PLACED IN
ASCENDING SEQUENCE, A(1,J), A(2,J),..., A(I,J),... AND (B) THE
COEFFICIENTS FOR (J+1)TH EQUATION MUST BEGIN ON A NEW LINE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X04101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SIMEQ
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SIMULTANEOUS EQUATION SOLVER SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX LINEAR EQ.
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE IS PART OF THE STAT-PACK GROUP, AND IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
USING THE GAUSSIAN ELIMINATION METHOD, THIS ROUTINE SOLVES UP TO 22
SIMULTANEOUS EQUATIONS WHOSE COEFFICIENTS ARE IN A SINGLE INPUT MATRIX.
A CHECK FOR MATRIX SINGULARITY IS NOT PERFORMED. THIS ROUTINE DOES NOT
CONTROL ITS OWN I/O OPERATIONS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL SIMEQ (M)
WHERE M = NUMBER OF INPUT EQUATIONS (M < =22)
A = COEFFICIENT MATRIX IN COMMON WITH CALLING PROGRAM
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 22 EQUATIONS. THE NUMBER OF
COEFFICIENTS PER EQUATION MUST BE EQUAL TO THE (# OF EQUATIONS +1);
I.E. AN AUGMENTED MATRIX. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM
SUBJECT TO THE ORDERING RESTRICTION; THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE
USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE. THE ORDERING RESTRICTION IS THAT THE
INPUT COEFFICIENTS OF THE JTH EQUATION MUST (A) BE PLACED IN ASCENDING
SEQUENCE, A(1,J), ..., A(I,J),... AND (B) THE COEFFICIENTS FOR (J+1)TH
EQUATION MUST BEGIN ON A NEW LINE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X04201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC23A
**PROGRAM TITLE:
AUTOCORRELATION AND SPECTRAL DENSITY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
FOR A GIVEN SET OF DATA POINTS AND A MAXIMUM LAG (I.E., HARMONIC), THIS
PROGRAM CALCULATES AUTOCORRELATION COEFFICIENTS AND POWER SPECTRAL
DENSITY. THE INPUT DATA CAN BE NORMALIZED, IF DESIRED. THE PROGRAM
WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 300 DATA POINTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
A "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA, MUST BE LOADED BEFORE THE MAIN
PROGRAM GC23A.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 300 DATA POINTS. THE INPUT DATA
MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA
THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW1 I1 =0: PRINT
NOT =0: PRINT AND PUNCH
02 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
03-05 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
(NPNT < OR =300)
06-08 NLAGS I3 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF LAGS DESIRED
09 NORM I1 =0: NORMALIZE INPUT DATA
DATA -- X(I) -- ITH VALUE OF INPUT DATA
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X04301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC23B
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MOVING AVERAGES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN PROGRAM COMPUTES A SET OF MOVING AVERAGES OF ORDER N
FROM A TIME-SERIES OF M ELEMENTS. M - N + 1 MOVING AVERAGES ARE COM-
PUTED AND TABULATED. THE TIME SERIES MAY HAVE A MAXIMUM OF 2000 ELE-
MENTS, AND THE ORDER OF THE MOVING AVERAGE MUST BE LESS THAN THE NUMBER
OF ELEMENTS IN THE TIME SERIES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE USER SUPPLIED "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA MUST BE LOADED BEFORE
GC23B.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THE TIME SERIES MAY HAVE A MAXIMUM OF 2000 ELEMENTS AND THE ORDER OF
THE MOVING AVERAGE MUST BE LESS THAN THE NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN THE TIME
SERIES. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING
SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
---- -------- ------ -----------
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 02-05 M I4 NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN TIME
SERIES (M </= 2000)
07-10 N I4 ORDER OF MOVING AVERAGE
(N<M)
15 IS1 I1 =1: PRINT
=2: PRINT AND PUNCH
20 IS2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
ELSE: BATCH RUN
DATA -- TS(I) -- ELEMENTS OF TIME SERIES
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X04401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC23C
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CROSS CORRELATION ANALYSIS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES A SET OF CROSS-CORRELATION COEFFICIENTS FOR TWO
TIME SERIES. THE MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM LAG INPUT DETERMINES THE NUMBER
OF COEFFICIENTS COMPUTED. THE PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 900
ELEMENTS FOR EACH TIME SERIES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE USER MUST SUPPLY A SUBROUTINE "READ" TO INPUT DATA. THIS SUBROUTINE
MUST BE LOADED BEFORE GC23C.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 900 ELEMENTS FOR EACH TIME SERIES.
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY
THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
---- -------- ------ -----------
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW1 I1 =0: PRINT
ELSE: PRINT AND PUNCH
02 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
ELSE: BATCH RUN
03-05 LN I3 MINIMUM LAG IN UNITS OF TIME
06-08 LX I3 MAXIMUM LAG IN UNITS OF TIME
(LX<M)
09-11 M I3 NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN A TIME
SERIES (M </= 900)
DATA -- TS1(I) -- COEFFICIENTS OF FIRST TIME
SERIES
-- TS2(I) -- COEFFICIENTS OF SECOND TIME
SERIES
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X04501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DISCRI
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DISCRIMINANT ANALYSIS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
GIVEN TWO GROUPS OF DATA WITH UP TO 20 VARIABLES PER GROUP, THIS PROGRAM
CALCULATES A LINEAR FUNCTION OF THE VARIABLES BY WHICH THE TWO GROUPS
CAN BE DISCRIMINATED. THE LINEAR FUNCTION FOUND IS THE ONE THAT MAX-
IMIZES THE RATIO OF THE FOLLOWING TWO ELEMENTS:
A. THE DIFFERENCE BETWEEN THE GROUP MEANS.
B. THE STANDARD DEVIATIONS WITHIN THE SPECIES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE USER MAY PROVIDE HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA, OR USE
THE ONE SUPPLIED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 20 VARIABLES PER GROUP. THE
INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY
THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
---- -------- ------ -----------
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
ELSE: BATCH RUN
02-04 NVAR I3 NUMBER OF VARIABLES PER
GROUP (NVAR </= 20)
05 ISW3 I1 =1: MAKE 2ND PASS OF
DATA IN ORDER TO FIND
INDIVIDUAL DISCRIM-
INANT VALUES (RE-
ENTER DATA POINTS)
=0: DO NOT MAKE SECOND PASS
DATA -- X(1) -- OBSERVATION FOR VARIABLE 1
.
.
.
-- X(I) -- OBSERVATION FOR VARIABLE I
.
.
.
D.S.D. 01-02 LC A2 GROUP DATA SET DELIMITER
(LC=**). AFTER GROUP 1 AND
2. POSITION OF LC DEPENDENT
ON FORMAT OF READ SUBROUTINE.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE MAIN ROUTINE AND THE SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY
PROGRAMS.
X04601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS01
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LEAST SQUARES REGRESSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
LINEAR EQ. POLYNOMIAL STATISTICS
MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS THE CALCULATIONS FOR LEAST-SQUARES POLYNOMIAL
REGRESSION UP TO DEGREE THREE. THE USER HAS THE OPTION OF SPECIFYING
THE DEGREE OF FIT (LINEAR, QUADRATIC, OR CUBIC), OR OF SPECIFYING A
FIT THROUGH ALL THREE DEGREES. AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE IS PERFORMED FOR
EACH POLYNOMIAL FIT, AS WELL AS ANALYSIS OF INDIVIDUAL TERMS. IF
DESIRED, THE PREDICTED VALUES AND RESIDUALS ARE INCLUDED IN THE
ANALYSIS. THE PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 400 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE USER MAY WISH TO REPLACE THE "READ" SUBROUTINE PROVIDED WITH HIS OWN
"READ" ROUTINE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 400 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS. THE INPUT
DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER
VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPRS I3 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA PAIRS
(NPRS < OR =400)
05 MODEL I1 =1: LINEAR FIT ONLY
=2: QUADRATIC FIT ONLY
=3: CUBIC FIT ONLY
=4: ALL THREE FITS
06 NBACK I1 =0: NO BACK SOLUTIONS
NOT =0: COMPUTE BACK SOLUTIONS
DATA -- X(I) -- VALUE OF INDEPENDENT VARIABLE
FOR THE ITH (X,Y) DATA PAIR
-- Y(I) -- VALUE FOR THE DEPENDENT
VARIABLE FOR THE ITH (X,Y)
DATA PAIR
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE SUBROUTINE "READ" MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO LOADING ANY LIBRARY
PROGRAMS.
X04701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS02
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LINEAR REGRESSION CONFIDENCE INTERVALS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS LINEAR EQ. MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES THE LINEAR REGRESSION FUNCTION OF ONE INDEPEND-
ENT VARIABLE AND THE CONFIDENCE PREDICTION INTERVALS FOR PREDICTED
VALUES OF THE DEPENDENT VARIABLE, GIVEN A 0.90, 0.95, OR 0.99 CON-
FIDENCE INTERVAL. THE REGRESSION FUNCTION IS EVALUATED BY THE METHOD
OF LEAST SQUARES. AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE IS INCLUDED. THE PROGRAM
WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 750 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO LOADING ANY
LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 750 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
---- -------- ------ -----------
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
ELSE: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA
PAIRS, (NPNT </= 750)
05-08 CLVL F4.2 SPECIFIED CONFIDENCE
LEVEL (O.90, 0.95, OR 0.99)
DATA -- X(I) -- VALUE OF INDEPENDENT
VARIABLE FOR THE ITH
(X,Y) DATA PAIR.
-- Y(I) -- VALUE OF DEPENDENT
VARIABLE FOR THE ITH
(X,Y) DATA PAIR.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY USE THE "READ" SUBROUTINE PROVIDED, OR WRITE HIS OWN.
X04801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS12
**PROGRAM TITLE:
POLYNOMIAL REGRESSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS POLYNOMIAL MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
USING THE METHOD OF LEAST SQUARES, THIS PROGRAM GENERATES AN
APPROXIMATING POLYNOMIAL UP TO THE 15TH DEGREE. THE DEGREE OF
REGRESSION IS DETERMINED BY AN ITERATIVE TECHNIQUE, THE ITERATIVE
PROCESS BEING TERMINATED BY EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING:
A. WHEN THE COMPUTED STANDARD ERROR OF THE DEPENDENT VARIABLE
FOR THE (I)TH ITERATION (DEGREE I) IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ERROR SPECIFIED BY THE USER.
B. WHEN THE PROGRAM HAS FITTED THE EXPERIMENTAL DATA THROUGH A 15TH
DEGREE POLYNOMIAL.
THE PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 350 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIUM OF 350 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS. THIS
PROGRAM WILL HANDLE WEIGHTED OBSERVATIONS. FOR EACH UNWEIGHTED
OBSERVATION, THE WEIGHTING FACTOR ASSIGNED TO THAT OBSERVATION SHOULD BE
ASSIGNED A VALUE OF 1.0. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE
FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPRS I3 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA PAIR
(NPRS < OR =350)
05-06 MXDEG I2 HIGHEST POLYNOMIAL DEGREE
DESIRED (MXDEG < OR =15)
07 NBACK I1 =0: NO BACK SOLUTIONS
=1; BACK SOLUTION FOR HIGHEST
DEGREE
>1: BACK SOLUTIONS FOR ALL
DEGREES
08-19 STDER F12.0 MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE ERROR
DATA -- X(I) -- VALUE OF INDEPENDENT VARIABLE
-- Y(I) -- VALUE OF DEPENDENT VARIABLE
-- WGHT(I) -- =0.0: UNWEIGHTED OBSERVATIONS
NOT =0.0: WEIGHTED OBSERVATIONS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY REPLACE THE "READ" SUBROUTINE PROVIDED WITH HIS OWN ROUTINE
TO INPUT DATA.
X04901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS14
**PROGRAM TITLE:
POLYNOMIAL REGRESSION CONFIDENCE INTERVALS
**REVISION?
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS POLYNOMIAL MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES CONFIDENCE INTERVAL ESTIMATES AT A SPECIFIED
CONFIDENCE LEVEL FOR EACH PREDICTED POINT OF AN (I)TH DEGREE
APPROXIMATING POLYNOMIAL (I = 1,6). THE USER MAY SELECT A CONFIDENCE
LEVEL OF 0.90, 0.95, OR 0.99. ESTIMATES OF THE REGRESSION-COVARIANCE
MATRIX ALSO ARE MADE. THE PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 400 (X,Y)
DATA PAIRS. THE DEGREE OF THE INPUT POLYNOMIAL MUST BE LESS THAN, OR
EQUAL TO 6.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM AND ITS SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO LOADING OF
ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 400 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS. THE DEGREE
OF THE INPUT POLYNOMIAL MUST BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 6. THE INPUT DATA
PAIRS MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER
VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: DO NOT PUNCH
(RECORD 1) NOT =0: PUNCH OUTPUT
02 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
03-05 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA PAIRS
(NPNT < OR =400)
06 NDEG I1 DEGREE OF INPUT POLYNOMIAL
(NDEG < OR =6)
07-10 CLVL F4.2 SPECIFIED CONFIDENCE LEVEL
(0.90, 0.95, OR 0.99)
PARAMETER 01-10 BO F10.0 VALUE OF B
(RECORD 2) 0
11-20 B(1) F10.0 VALUE OF B
. 1
.
.
61-70 B(6) F10.0 VALUE OF B
6
DATA -- X(I) -- VALUE OF INDEPENDENT VARIABLE
FOR THE ITH (X,Y) DATA PAIR.
-- Y(I) -- VALUE OF DEPENDENT VARIABLE FOR
THE ITH (X,Y) DATA PAIR.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY PROVIDE A "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA IF HE DESIRES.
X05001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS18
**PROGRAM TITLE:
STEPWISE REGRESSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS POLYNOMIAL MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM USES MULTIPLE REGRESSION TO OBTAIN THE BEST FIT TO A
SET NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS CONSISTING OF ONE DEPENDENT VARIABLE AND
MULTIPLE INDEPENDENT VARIABLES. IN THE STEPWISE REGRESSION, A NUMBER
OF INTERMEDIATE REGRESSION EQUATIONS ARE OBTAINED, IN ADDITION TO THE
COMPLETE REGRESSION EQUATION. THESE INTERMEDIATE EQUATIONS ARE DERIVED
BY ADDING ONE VARIABLE AT A TIME; THE VARIABLE ADDED IS THE ONE THAT
MAKES THE GREATEST IMPROVEMENT IN THE LEAST SQUARES GOODNESS-OF-FIT.
THE INSIGNIFICANT VARIABLES ARE REMOVED FROM THE REGRESSION EQUATION
BEFORE THE ADDITION OF A NEW VARIABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT OR TTY INPUT REQUIREMENTS DESCRIBED HERE WILL BE SIMILAR TO
CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS. NO CONTROL STATEMENT ON SOURCE TAPE.
GIVEN (N X M) MATRIX OF INPUT COEFFICIENTS:
W1 X11 X12 ... X1N WHERE:
WI= WEIGHTING FACTOR ASSIGNED TO
W2 X21 X22 ... X2N ITH OBSERVATION VECTOR (I=1,M)
. XI,J= VALUE OF JTH INDEPENDENT
. VARIABLE FOR ITH OBSERVATION
. VECTOR.
WM XM,1 XM,2 ... XM,N
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS SHOULD BE OBSERVED FOR PROPER EXECUTION OF THIS
PROGRAM:
(A) THERE MUST BE AN EQUAL NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR ALL INDEPENDENT
AND DEPENDENT VARIABLES. THERE IS NO RESTRICTION ON THE NUMBER
OF OBSERVATIONS EXCEPT THAT THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER VECTOR
SHOULD BE GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO THE NUMBER OF INDEPENDENT
VARIABLES. THERE CAN BE NO MISSING VALUES.
(B) THE USER MUST SPECIFY A TOLERANCE LEVEL THAT WILL SERVE AS A
CRITERIA IN THE FORMATION OF THE INTERMEDIATE REGRESSION EQUATIONS.
THE TOLERANCE LEVEL IS THE CONTROL TO REDUCE THE POSSIBILITY OF
DEGENERACY (MATRIX SINGULARITY) WHEN AN INDEPENDENT VARIABLE IS
IS APPROXIMATELY A LINEAR COMBINATION OF THE OTHER VARIABLES. THE
VALUE OF THE TOLERANCE IS ARBITRARY, BUT GENERALLY, VALUES BETWEEN
0.001 AND 0.00001 ARE USED.
(C) A DUPLICATE SET OF INPUT DATA POINTS MUST BE PREPARED FOR EACH
RUN IN ORDER TO OBTAIN THE BACK SOLUTIONS.
(D) THE WEIGHTING FACTOR MAY BE SPECIFIED FOR EACH OBSERVATION VECTOR
AS FOLLOWS:
= 1.0: EQUAL WEIGHTS (I.E., UNWEIGHTED ITEMS)
W1 NOT EQUAL 1.0: EQUAL WEIGHTS
= 0.0: SET WEIGHT = 1.0
UNLESS THE SUM OF THE WEIGHTING FACTORS IS EQUAL TO THE NUMBER OF
OBSERVATIONS PER VARIABLE, THE STANDARD ERRORS OF THE REGRESSION
COEFFICIENTS AND THE CRITERIA OF SIGNIFICANCE WILL BE DISTORTED.
(E) THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF DEPENDENT PLUS INDEPENDENT VARIABLES MUST BE
GREATER THAN 10. THE DEPENDENT VARIABLE FOR THE ITH OBSERVATION
MUST BE PUNCHED LAST.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
---- -------- ------ -----------
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
ELSE: BATCH RUN
02-04 N I3 NUMBER OF INDEPENDENT AND
DEPENDENT VARIABLES
(N </= 10)
05-07 M I3 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS
PER VARIABLE
(N </= (N-1))
08-17 TOL F10.4 TOLERANCE LEVEL
18-27 F1 F10.4 F LEVEL FOR ENTERING A
VARIABLE INTO THE RE-
GRESSION EQUATIONS.
28-37 F2 F10.4 F LEVEL FOR REMOVING A
VARIABLE FROM THE RE-
GRESSION EQUATION.
DATA -- W(I) -- THE WEIGHTING FACTOR
ASSIGNED TO THE ITH
OBSERVATION VECTOR.
-- X(I,J) -- OBSERVATIONS (J=1,N) FOR
THE ITH OBSERVATION
VECTOR.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY WRITE HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA IF HE WISHES.
X05101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS41
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BIOASSAY
**REVISION?
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS LINEAR EQ. MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES PREDICTED X VALUES FOR GIVEN Y VALUES, AND THE
LINEAR REGRESSION DATA FOR Y ON X. IF THE REGRESSION DATA IS NOT
IMMEDIATELY AVAILABLE, THE PROGRAM ACCEPTS X AND Y VALUES, AND
COMPUTES THE PREDICTED X VALUES FROM THE GIVEN Y VALUES. FOR EACH
PREDICTED X VALUE, THE OUTPUT CONSISTS OF THE GIVEN Y VALUES FOR
THE POINT, THE AVERAGE OF THESE Y VALUES, THE PREDICTED X VALUE ITSELF,
AND THE UPPER AND LOWER BOUNDS OF THE 95-PERCENT CONFIDENCE INTERVAL
FOR THE PREDICTED X VALUES. THE PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM
OF 600 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 600 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 05 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0 BATCH RUN
10 ISW3 I1 =0: NO INVERSE PREDICTION OF
X'S DESIRED
NOT =0: INVERSE PREDICTION OF
X'S USED IN REGRESSION
CALCULATION
13-15 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA PAIRS
(NPNT < =600)
20 ISW I1 =1: REGRESSION TO BE PERFORMED
FROM THE (X,Y) DATA PAIRS
=2: PRE-COMPUTED REGRESSION
PARAMETERS ARE INPUT TO
PROGRAM
23-25 NX I3 NUMBER OF SETS OF X VALUES TO
BE PREDICTED (NX < OR =999)
DATA -- X(I) -- ITH VALUE OF X
(FOR ISW=1) -- Y(I) -- ITH VALUE OF Y
(FOR ISW=2) 01-04 N I4 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS FROM
WHICH REGRESSION WAS CALCULATED
(N < OR =600)
05-18 BO E14.8 Y-INTERCEPT ESTIMATE
19-32 B1 E14.8 SLOPE INTERCEPT
33-46 SXXB2 E14.8 SUM OF SQUARES OF INTECEPTION
47-6- SE2 E14.8 STANDARD ERROR OF ESTIMATE
61-74 YBAR E14.8 AVERAGE Y VALUES
NEW RECORD 01-14 XBAR E14.8 AVERAGE X VALUES
PREDICTION
RECORD (USED ONLY
IF ISW3 > 0)-- Y(I) -- Y VALUE USED IN PREDICTION.
MUST USE SAME FORMAT AS WHEN
READING DATA RECORDS. THERE
MUST BE NX VALUES IF INVERSE
PREDICTION IS DESIRED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA IF HE
WISHES.
X05201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS43
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ORTHOGONAL REGRESSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
POLYNOMIAL STATISTICS MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
BY MEANS OF ORTHOGONAL POLYNOMIALS, THIS PROGRAM GENERATES A REGRESSION
POLYNOMIAL IN ONE INDEPENDENT VARIABLE UP TO THE FIFTH DEGREE. A
GENERAL STATISTICAL ANALYSIS IS INCLUDED (INCLUDING THE MEAN,
VARIANCE, ETC.), AND CONFIDENCE LIMITS ARE GENERATED FOR THE SAMPLE
MEAN AT 0.90, 0.95, AND 0.99 CONFIDENCE LEVELS. THE REGRESSION
ANALYSIS IS THEN COMPUTED, YIELDING UNCORRELATED ESTIMATORS. THE
POLYNOMIAL IS REWRITTEN IN TERMS OF THE ORIGINAL VARIABLE X, AND AN
ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE IS PERFORMED TERM BY TERM. BACK SOLUTIONS ARE
INCLUDED IN THE ANALYSIS. THE PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM
OF 26 DATA POINTS AT EQUALLY SPACED DISTANCES ALONG THE ORDINATE. THE
MAXIMUM POLYNOMIAL GENERATED IS OF DEGREE 5.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 26 DATA POINTS AT
EQUALLY SPACED DISTANCES ALONG THE ORDINATE. THE MAXIMUM POLYNOMIAL
GENERATED IS OF DEGREE 5.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-03 NPNT I2 NUMBER OF INPUT DATA POINTS
(NPNT </=26)
04-15 DIST F12.4 EQUI-DISTANT SPACING BETWEEN
DATA POINTS (DIST>0)
16-27 XSTART F12.4 INITIAL VALUE OF ORDINATE
28-35 FDIS1 F12.4 USER-SPECIFIED VALUE OF F -
DISTRIBUTION
36-47 FDIS2 F12.4 USER-SPECIFIED VALUE OF F -
DISTRIBUTION
DATA 01-12 X(1) F12.4 VALUE OF 1ST OBSERVATION
13-24 X(2) F12.4 VALUE OF 2ND OBSERVATION
.
.
.
61-72 X(6) F12.4 VALUE OF 6TH OBSERVATION
NOTE: FOR MORE THAN 6 OBSERVATIONS, REPEAT FORMAT ON A
NEW RECORD.
MULTIPLIER
RECORD 1 01-12 L(0)* F12.4 REDUCTION MULTIPLIER CORRES-
PONDING TO B(0)
13-24 L(1)* F12.4 REDUCTION MULTIPLIER CORRES-
PONDING TO B(1)
.
.
.
61-72 L(5)* F12.4 REDUCTION MULTIPLIER CORRES-
PONDING TO B(5)
RECORD 2 01-12 L(0) F12.4 REDUCTION MULTIPLIER CORRES-
PONDING TO B(0)
13-24 L(1) F12.4 REDUCTION MULTIPLIER CORRES-
. PONDING TO B(1)
.
.
61-72 L(5) F12.4 REDUCTION MULTIPLIER CORRES-
PONDING TO B(5)
NOTE: ORTHOGONAL COEFFICENTS ARE USUALLY CHOSEN SO THAT THE TABULATED
VALUES ARE INTEGERS REDUCED TO THEIR LOWEST TERMS. THIS AMOUNTS
TO DEFINING A NEW SET OF POLYNOMIALS.
X(R) (X,N) = L(R) . X(R) (X,N)
GIVEN: R = POLYNOMIAL DEGREE
X = INDEPENDENT INDEX
N = NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
L(R) = THE REDUCTION CONSTANT
THE VALUES OF THE REDUCTION MULTIPLIERS CAN BE FOUND IN ANY
STANDARD TABLE OF ORTHOGONAL POLYNOMIAL COEFFICIENTS AND ARE
TABULATED BY POLYNOMIAL DEGREE GIVEN THE NUMBER OF DATA POINTS.
THIS PROGRAM REQUIRES, IN ADDITION TO THE STANDARD SET OF
MULTIPLIERS, A "MODIFIED" SET DEFINED AS:
L(R)* = 1/L(R) (R = 0,...,5)
(E.G., FOR N=10, R=2, THEN L(R) = 1/2 AND L(R)* = 2).
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X05301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS49
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LINEAR REGRESSION WITH REPLICATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX LINEAR EQ. STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES A LINEAR REGRESSION AND ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE ON
DATA WITH AN EQUAL OR UNEQUAL NUMBER OF REPLICATIONS (IE. MULTIPLE Y
VALUES FOR A GIVEN X VALUE). THE PROGRAM HANDLES A MAXIMUM OF 150
UNWEIGHTED (X,Y) DATA PAIRS. THE VALUES OF THE INDEPENDENT VARIABLE
X MUST BE IN ASCENDING SEQUENCE IN ORDER TO ESTABLISH THE NUMBER OF
REPLICATES PER VALUE OF X.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 150 UNWEIGHTED (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
THE VALUES OF THE INDEPENDENT VARIABLE X MUST BE IN ASCENDING SEQUENCE
IN ORDER TO ESTABLISH THE NUMBER OF REPLICATES PER VALUE OF X. THE
INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY
THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTON
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF INPUT DATA
PAIRS (NPNT </=150)
DATA -- X(I) -- VALUE OF INDEPENDENT VARIABLE
FOR THE ITH (X,Y) DATA PAIR
-- Y(I) -- VALUE OF DEPENDENT VARIABLE FOR
THE ITH (X,Y) DATA PAIR. THE
VALUES OF X MUST BE IN ASCENDING
SEQUENCE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY A "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA IF HE DESIRES.
X05401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC55A
**PROGRAM TITLE:
NON-LINEAR REGRESSION (GAUSS-NEWTON METHOD)
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS NON-LINEAR REGRESSION CALCULATIONS TO FIT A SET
OF DATA TO A FUNCTION SPECIFIED BY THE USER. CORRECTIONS TO A STARTING
VALUE OF THE PARAMETER VALUES ARE COMPUTED BY ITERATION CYCLES UNTIL THE
CORRECTIONS MAKE NO CHANGE (WITHIN A SPECIFIED TOLERANCE) IN THE ERROR
SUM OF SQUARES . IT MUST BE NOTED THAT THE FINAL ERROR SUM OF SQUARES
MAY BE QUITE LARGE IF THE DATA DOES NOT FIT THE DESIRED MODEL WELL. THE
PROGRAM IS SET UP TO HANDLE 10 PARAMETERS, AND THE MODEL USED MUST HAVE
ONLY ONE X VALUE FOR EACH Y VALUE. THE PROCEDURE IS DIMENSIONED TO
ESTIMATE UP TO 10 PARAMETERS FROM 150 PAIRS OF X AND Y VALUES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS NON-LINEAR REGRESSION CALCULATIONS TO FIT A SET
OF DATA TO A FUNCTION SPECIFIED BY THE USER.
MODEL: Y = F(X; Q(1), Q(2),...,Q(K) + E), K</= 10.
CORRECTIONS TO A STARTING VALUE OF THE PARAMETER VALUES ARE COMPUTED BY
ITERATION CYCLES UNTIL THE CORRECTIONS MAKE LITTLE OR NO CHANGE (WITHIN
A SPECIFIED TOLERANCE) IN THE ERROR SUM OF SQUARES. IT SHOULD BE
POINTED OUT THAT EVEN THE FINAL ERROR SUM OF SQUARES MAY BE QUITE LARGE
IF THE DATA DOES NOT FIT THE DESIRED MODEL WELL.
THE PROGRAM IS SET UP TO HANDLE 10 PARAMETERS AND THE MODEL USED MUST
HAVE ONLY ONE X VALUE FOR EACH Y VALUE. IF THE NUMBER OF DATA PAIRS
IS LARGE WITH RESPECT TO THE NUMBER OF PARAMETERS TO BE ESTIMATED, AN
AVERAGING OPTION, CONTROLLED BY THE VARIABLE ISW3, IS AVAILABLE. IF
THIS OPTION IS USED, THE NUMBER OF DATA PAIRS MUST BE AN EVEN MULTIPLE
OF THE NUMBER OF PARAMETERS TO BE ESTIMATED. THE PROGRAM WILL FORM AS
MANY AVERAGES AS THERE ARE PARAMETERS, FIND SOLUTIONS FOR THE PARA-
METERS, THEN RECYCLE USING THIS SOLUTION AS THE STARTING VECTOR AND
USING THE INDIVIDUAL DATA POINTS INSTEAD OF THE AVERAGES.
IF THIS PROGRAM HAS PERFORMED THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ITERATIONS INDICATED
AND HAS FOUND NO SOLUTION FOR THE PARAMETERS, THEN MESSAGE "MAXIMUM
NUMBER OF ITERATIONS HAS BEEN PERFORMED" WILL APPEAR ON THE OUTPUT
LISTING AND PROGRAM EXECUTION WILL TERMINATE. SEVERAL ALTERNATIVES ARE
AVAILABLE FOR THE USER:
1. INCREASE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ITERATIONS AND RUN AGAIN.
2. PICK CLOSER STARTING VALUES FOR THE PARAMETERS AND RUN AGAIN.
3. SET TOLERANCE FOR ACCEPTABLE ERROR SUM OF SQUARES LARGER AND
RUN AGAIN.
A COMBINATION OF THESE THREE POSSIBILITIES WOULD PROBABLY OFFER THE
BEST SOLUTION.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THE PROGRAM IS DIMENSIONED TO ESTIMATE UP TO TEN PARAMETERS FROM 150
PAIRS OF X AND Y VALUES. STARTING VALUES OF THE PARAMETERS ARE INCLUDED
AS INPUT DATA.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTON
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02 ISW3 I1 NOT =1: USE INDIVIDUAL VALUES
=1: AVERAGE DATA POINTS
03-05 NOBS I3 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA PAIRS
(NOBS </=150)
06-07 NP I2 NUMBER OF INITIAL PARAMETER
ESTIMATES (NP </= 10)
08-10 IT I3 MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ITERATIONS TO
BE PERFORMED (0 </= IT </= 999)*
11-18 TOL F8.0 TOLERANCE VALUE - IF THE CHANGE
BETWEEN TWO ITERATIONS IS LESS
THAN TOL, ITERATION WILL TERMI-
NATE.
ESTIMATE 01-08 GUESS(1) F8.0 ESTIMATE OF 1ST PARAMETER
09-16 GUESS(2) F8.0 ESTIMATE OF 2ND PARAMETER
.
.
.
73-80 GUESS(10) F8.0 ESTIMATE OF 10TH PARAMETER
DATA 01-08 Y(I) F8.0 INPUT DATA CARDS (1 CARD PER
09-16 X(I) F8.0 (X,Y) DATA PAIR).
*NOTE: IF IT = 0, ONE ITERATION WILL BE PERFORMED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF POSSIBLE, LARGE AMOUNTS OF DATA SHOULD NOT BE RUN DUE TO THE TIME
REQUIRED BY THE ITERATION CYCLES. ON THE TEST RUNS, SIX DATA PAIRS WERE
USED AND THREE PARAMETERS WERE ESTIMATED. THE TIME REQUIRED FOR ONE
ITERATION CYCLE UNDER THESE CIRCUMSTANCES WAS ABOUT ONE MINUTE. CYCLE
TIME SHOULD INCREASE LINEARLY WITH THE NUMBER OF DATA PAIRS; THUS, THE
TIME COULD EASILY BECOME PROHIBITIVE FOR LARGE SETS OF DATA.
X05501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS52
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CUMULATIVE DISTRIBUTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES A FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION FOR A SINGLE DATASET
CONSISTING OF 1500 POINTS OR LESS. THE MEAN, MEDIAN, STANDARD DEVIATION
AND INTERQUARTILES ARE INCLUDED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM AND ITS SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY
ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 1500 DATA POINTS. THE
DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER
VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 --
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-05 NPNT I4 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
(NPNT </= 1500)
DATA -- X(I) -- INPUT DATA POINTS
(X(I), I=1, NPNT)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY PROVIDE HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO ENTER DATA IF HE
WISHES.
X05601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC44A
**PROGRAM TITLE:
KENDALL'S COEFFICIENT OF CONCORDANCE W
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES KENDALL'S COEFFICIENT OF CONCORDANCE: W.
THIS IS A MEASURE OF THE RELATION AMONG SEVERAL RANKINGS. TIES ARE
CHECKED, AND THE DEGREE OF ASSOCIATION, W, IS ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY SUBROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 31 SETS OF RANKINGS
WITH UP TO 20 OBJECTS BEING RANKED PER SET. EACH SET MUST HAVE THE
SAME NUMBER OF OBJECTS. ALL OBJECTS FOR THE ITH RANKING MUST BE READ
BEFORE THE OBJECTS FOR JTH RANKING (I < J). THE INPUT DATA MAY BE
ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE
READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
--- -------- ------ -----------
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 03 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIST
ELSE: BATCH RUN
04-05 NSETS I2 NUMBER OF SETS OF RANKINGS
(NSETS </= 31)
07-08 NPNT I2 NUMBER OF OBJECTS PER SET
BEING RANKED (NPNT </= 20)
DATA
FIRST -- X(1,1) -- 1ST RANKING, VALUE OF 1ST
OBJECT
-- X(1,2) -- 1ST RANKING, VALUE OF 2ND
OBJECT
.
.
.
-- X(1,J) -- 1ST RANKING, VALUE OF JTH
RANKING
ITH -- X(I,1) -- ITH RANKING, VALUE OF 1ST
OBJECT
-- X(I,2) -- ITH RANKING, VALUE OF 2ND
OBJECT
.
.
.
-- X(I,J) -- ITH RANKING, VALUE OF JTH
OBJECT
NOTE: 1 < I < NSETS
1 < J < NPNT
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE IF HE WISHES.
X05701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC44B
**PROGRAM TITLE:
KENDALL'S COEFFICIENT OF CONCORDANCE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES KENDALL'S COEFFICIENT OF CONCORDANCE. NO CHECK
IS MADE FOR TIES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY SUBROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE AN UNLIMITED NUMBER OF SETS OF
RANKINGS WITH A MAXIMUM OF 900 OBJECTS OVER ALL SETS. EACH SET MUST
HAVE THE SAME NUMBER OF OBJECTS. ALL OBJECTS FOR THE ITH RANKING MUST
BE READ BEFORE THE OBJECTS FOR THE JTH RANKING (I<J). THE INPUT DATA
MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA
THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 03 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
04-06 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF OBJECTS FOR ALL SETS
(NPNT </= 900)
DATA -- X(1) -- 1ST RANKING, VALUE OF 1ST OBJECT
FIRST -- X(2) -- 1ST RANKING, VALUE OF 2ND OBJECT
.
.
.
-- X(K) -- 1ST RANKING, VALUE OF KTH OBJECT
JTH -- X(1) -- JTH RANKING, VALUE OF 1ST OBJECT
-- X(2) -- JTH RANKING, VALUE OF 2ND OBJECT
.
.
.
-- X(K) -- JTH RANKING, VALUE OF KTH OBJECT
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY WRITE HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE IF HE WISHES.
X05801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS47
**PROGRAM TITLE:
KENDALL'S TAU CORRELATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES KENDALL'S TAU, A RANK CORRELATION COEFFICIENT,
FOR A GIVEN SET OF ORDERED (X,Y) PAIRS. ASSOCIATED STATISTICS ARE
ALSO PRODUCED, AND THE PROGRAM DETERMINES THE PRESENCE OR ABSENCE OF
TIES IN THE DATASET AND ADJUSTS TAU ACCORDINGLY. THE PROGRAM HANDLES
A MAXIMUM OF 300 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS, WHICH MUST BE SORTED IN ASCENDING
ALGEBRAIC SEQUENCE OF THE X VARIABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "REAL" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 300 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS. THE DATA
PAIRS MUST BE SORTED INTO ASCENDING ALGEBRAIC SEQUENCE OF THE X
VARIABLE. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING
SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW0 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPRS I3 NUMBER OF DATA PAIRS (X,Y)
(NPRS </= 300)
DATA -- X(I) -- VALUE OF THE FIRST VARIABLE FOR
THE ITH (X,Y) DATA PAIR
-- Y(I) -- VALUE FOR THE SECOND VARIABLE
FOR THE ITH (X,Y) DATA PAIR
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY PROVIDE HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA IF HE
WISHES.
X05901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC15A
**PROGRAM TITLE:
GENERAL STATISTICS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM CHARACTERIZES A PARTICULAR SET OF DATA BY PERFORMING
ELEMENTARY STATISTICAL CALCULATIONS (POINT ESTIMATES), DETERMINING
THE 0.95 AND 0.99 CONFIDENCE INTERVALS FOR THE SAMPLE MEAN (ASSUMING
NORMAL DISTRIBUTION OF THE DATA), AND GENERATING A HISTOGRAM OF THE
DATA POINTS. A MAXIMUM OF 900 UNWEIGHTED AND UNGROUPED DATA POINTS
CAN BE HANDLED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE THE LIBRARY ROUTINE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 900 UNWEIGHTED AND UNGROUPED DATA
POINTS. NOTHING IS ASSUMED ABOUT THE UNDERLYING DISTRIBUTION EXCEPT
WHERE NORMALITY IS HYPOTHESIZED FOR THE CONFIDENCE INTERVALS FOR THE
SAMPLE MEAN. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT
BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
(NPNT </= 900)
05-06 NTRVL I2 =0: PROGRAM SETS 11 INTERVALS
FOR HISTOGRAM
NOT=0: NUMBER OF INTERVALS FOR
HISTOGRAM (2</= NTRVL
</= 25)
DATA -- X(I) -- ITH INPUT DATA POINT
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X06001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC15B
**PROGRAM TITLE:
GENERAL STATISTICS FOR MULTIPLE GROUPS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES POINT ESTIMATES (MEAN, VARIANCE, STANDARD
DEVIATION, AND STANDARD ERROR) AND CONFIDENCE INTERVAL ESTIMATES FOR
THE SAMPLE MEAN. THE ANALYSIS MAY BE PERFORMED FOR A MAXIMUM OF 99
SETS OR GROUPS OF DATA IN A SINGLE EXECUTION. THE USER CAN ELECT TO
DETERMINE CONFIDENCE INTERVALS FOR THE SAMPLE MEAN AT THE 0.90, 0.95
OR 0.99 LEVEL OF CONFIDENCE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY
ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO PROCESS A MAXIMUM OF 99 GROUPS OF DATA AT
ONE TIME. EACH GROUP MAY HAVE A MAXIMUM OF 9999 OBSERVATIONS AND THE
SAMPLE SIZE NEED NOT BE CONSTANT OVER ALL GROUPS. FOR THE CASE OF
UNEQUAL SAMPLE SIZES, THE "SAMPLE SIZE" INPUT DATA WILL INDICATE THE
NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS IN EACH GROUP. THE DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY
FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-03 NGRUP I2 NUMBER OF GROUPS OF DATA
(1</=NGRUP</=99)
04-07 NSIZE I4 =0: UNEQUAL SAMPLE SIZES
NOT=0: CONSTANT SAMPLE SIZE
OVER ALL GROUPS
08-11 CLVL F4.2 =0: NO CONFIDENCE LIMITS ON
SAMPLE MEAN DESIRED
NOT=0: CONFIDENCE LEVEL (0.90,
0.95, 0.99)
SAMPLE SIZE
(ONLY IF
NSIZE=0) 01-04 NPNT(1) I4 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR
GROUP 1
05-08 NPNT(2) I4 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR
GROUP 2
.
.
.
77-80 NPNT(20) I4 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR
GROUP 20
NOTE: FOR NGRUP > 20 AND NSIZE = 0, CONTINUE TO SAME FORMAT ON
ANOTHER RECORD.
DATA (ONE OR MORE
RECORD FOR THE ITH
OBSERVATION OVER ALL GROUPS)
RECORD(I) = -- NLAST -- A D.S.D. INDICATOR
-- X(1) -- THE ITH OBSERVATION FOR THE
1ST GROUP
-- X(2) -- THE ITH OBSERVATION FOR THE
2ND GROUP
.
.
.
-- X(J) -- THE ITH OBSRVATION FOR THE
JTH GROUP
NOTE: THE D.S.D. INDICATOR (USED TO TERMINATE READING OF A PARTICULAR
DATASET) MUST BE SET TO 9999 ON THE RECORD WITH THE LAST OBSER-
VATION OVER ALL GROUPS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X06101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PROBABILITY SUBPROGRAMS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SOFTWARE PRODUCT CONSISTS OF TEN ROUTINES WHICH CALCULATE THE
FOLLOWING PROBABILITY FUNCTIONS: NORMAL CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY
FUNCTION, CUMULATIVE BINOMIAL FUNCTION, CUMULATIVE POISSON FUNCTION, F
CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY FUNCTION, CHI-SQUARE CUMULATIVE DISTRIBUTION
FUNCTION, CHI-SQUARE AREA FOR CRITICAL VALUES, INVERSE F DISTRIBUTION
FUNCTION, STUDENT'S T DISTRIBUTION, NORMAL PROBABILITY FUNCTION, AND
STUDENT'S T CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY FUNCTION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. NORMAL CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY FUNCTION
IABLE = ANORM(Z,TOL)
X IS AN N(O,1) VARIATE, Z IS MEASURED IN UNITS OF STANDARD DEVIATION
FROM THE MEAN, ABS(Z) </=6, TOL > 0.
2. CUMULATIVE BINOMIAL FUNCTION
VARIABLE = BINOM(X,EN,P)
0 </= X </= EN AND 0 < P < 1 WHERE X AND EN ARE FLOATING POINT
INTEGERS. UNDERFLOW OCCURS IF P**EN OR (1-P)**EN IS LESS THAN
10**(-100)
3. CUMULATIVE POISSON FUNCTION
VARIABLE = POIS(ENP,X)
ENP </= 230, X MAY BE ANY NON-NEGATIVE INTEGRAL VALUE.
4. CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY FUNCTION
VARIABLE = FPROB(R1,R2,EF)
1 < R1 < R2, R1 AND R2 ARE INTEGERS, AND EF > 0. UNDERFLOW OCCURS
IF EF IS VERY LARGE OR NEARLY ZERO.
5. CHI-SQUARE CUMULATIVE DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION
VARIABLE = CHIFN(R,EF,TOL)
R > 1 AND R IS AN INTEGER. EF > 0 BUT IF EF IS UNREASONABLE, THE
PROBABILITY VALUE WILL BE CORRECTED TO 0 OR 1. TOL SHOULD NOT BE
SMALLER THAN 10**(-10).
6. CHI-SQUARE SUBROUTINE
CALL CHISQ(N,XUPR,XLWR)
7. INVERSE F DISTRIBUTION FUNCTION
VARIABLE = FDIST(M1, M2, P)
M1 NOT=1, MS NOT=1.
8. STUDENT'S T DISTRIBUTION SUBROUTINE
CALL TDIST(DF,CLVL,TVAL)
THE ARGUMENT CLVL IS RESTRICTED TO THE VALUES OF 0.90, 0.95 OR 0.99.
9. NORMAL PROBABILITY FUNCTION
VARIABLE = XAREA(YNORM)
0</=YNORM
10. STUDENT'S T CUMULATIVE PROBABILITY FUNCTION
VARIABLE = TPROB(T,R)
R > 1 AND R MUST BE A FLOATING POINT INTEGER. USE NORMAL DISTRIBU-
TION FOR LARGE R.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X06201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: INTG1
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTEGRATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGRATION
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE EVALUATES THE DEFINITE INTEGRAL FOR A FUNCTION WITH VALUES
OF EQUIDISTANT DISCRETE POINTS. THE INTEGRAL IS COMPUTED BY SIMPSON'S
METHOD, GIVING THE EXACT VALUE OF THE INTEGRAL IF THE FUNCTION IS A
POLYNOMIAL OF DEGREE NOT GREATER THAN 3. THERE MUST BE AN ODD NUMBER
OF DATA POINTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL INTG1(N, H, Y, RES)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
N INTEGER N IS THE NUMBER OF DATA POINTS AND MUST BE ODD
H REAL THE STEP SIZE BETWEEN TWO CONSECUTIVE DATA POINTS
Y REAL Y(I), I=1, N ARE THE VALUES OF THE INTEGRAND
RES REAL THE VALUE OF THE DEFINITE INTEGRAL
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THERE MUST BE AN ODD NUMBER OF DATA POINTS.
X06301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS37
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CONFIDENCE INTERVAL FOR MEAN AND VARIANCE OF NORMAL A DISTRIBUTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM CALCULATES THE UPPER AND LOWER CONFIDENCE LIMITS FOR THE
MEAN AND VARIANCE OF A SAMPLE ASSUMING THE DATA TO BE NORMALLY DISTRI-
BUTED. THE USER MAY SPECIFY A CONFIDENCE LEVEL OF 0.90, 0.95 OR 0.99
FOR THE CONFIDENCE LIMITS OF THE SAMPLE MEAN. THE PROGRAM GENERATES
0.95 CONFIDENCE LIMITS FOR THE SAMPLE VARIANCE AND HANDLES A MAXIMUM
OF 900 DATA POINTS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 900 DATA POINTS. THE INPUT DATA
MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA
THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF INPUT DATA POINTS
(NPNT </= 900)
05-08 CLVL F4.2 CONFIDENCE LEVEL FOR MEAN
(0.90, 0.95 OR 0.99)
DATA -- X(I) -- ITH INPUT DATA POINT
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY WRITE HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA.
X06401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC40A
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SAMPLE SIZE DETERMINATION ON SAMPLE VARIANCE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM UTILIZES AN ESTIMATE OF THE SAMPLE VARIANCE, BASED ON
(M) DEGREES OF FREEDOM AND A SPECIFIED MAXIMUM CONFIDENCE INTERVAL
LENGTH, TO DETERMINE THE SAMPLE SIZE REQUIRED TO GIVE ANY TEST LEVEL
ESTIMATE OF THE POPULATION MEAN. THE PROGRAM USES A TRIAL AND ERROR
METHOD, WITH THE INITIAL SAMPLE SIZE SPECIFIED BY THE USER. THE SAMPLE
SIZE IS DETERMINED FOR CONFIDENCE LEVELS OF 0.90, 0.95 AND 0.99.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-05 NPNT I4 INITIAL ESTIMATE OF THE SAMPLE
SIZE (NPNT </= 2)
06-13 SS F8.0 SAMPLE VARIANCE
14-17 M2 I4 DEGREE OF FREEDOM ASSOCIATED
WITH SAMPLE VARIANCE
1821 CIL I4 MAXIMUM LENGTH OF THE
CONFIDENCE INTERVAL
22-25 BETA F4.2 PROBABILITY OF A TYPE II ERROR
DATA NOT APPLICABLE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X06501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CORR1
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MULTIPLE CORRELATION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
USING A MAXIMUM OF 20 VARIABLES, WITH UP TO 999 OBSERVATIONS PER
VARIABLE THIS ROUTINE CALCULATES THE MEANS AND STANDARD DEVIATIONS OF
EACH VARIABLE. THE RAW SUM OF SQUARES, CROSS-PRODUCT MATRIX, THE
VARIANCE-COVARIANCE MATRIX, AND THE CORRELATION MATRIX, ALSO ARE
DETERMINED.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS SUBROUTINE IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 20 VARIABLES AND A
MAXIMUM OF 999 OBSERVATIONS PER VARIABLE. THE DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN
ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUB-
ROUTINE.
CALL CORR1(M, NPNT)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
M INTEGER NUMBER OF VARIABLES (M </= 20)
NPNT INTEGER NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER VARIABLE (NPNT </=999)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE FOR DATA INPUT IF DESIRED.
X06601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS04
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COMPLETELY RANDOMIZED DESIGN
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE ON A COMPLETELY RANDOMIZED
EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN. A MAXIMUM OF 400 TREATMENTS CAN BE HANDLED, WITH
NO RESTRICTIONS ON THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER TREATMENT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "REAL" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES THE NECESSARY INFORMATION TO PERFORM AN ANALYSIS
OF VARIANCE ON A COMPLETELY RANDOMIZED EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN.
MODEL: Y(IJ) = M + T(I) + E(IJ) ; I = 1,..., K; J = 1,...,N(I)
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-05 K I4 NUMBER OF TREATMENTS
(K </= 400)
DATA --- ISET --- TREATMENT NUMBER
--- Y --- OBSERVATION
D.S.D --- ISET --- DATA SET DELIMITER (ISET=9999)
USED TO TERMINATE A PARTICULAR
DATASET.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 400 TREATMENTS AND AN
UNEQUAL NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER TREATMENT WITH NO RESTRICTION ON
THIS NUMBER. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT
BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE. HOWEVER, ONLY ONE
TREATMENT NUMBER AND ITS CORRESPONDING OBSERVATION ARE PERMITTED IN ONE
RECORD. THERE MAY BE AN ARBITRARY ARRANGEMENT OF DATA; THE TREATMENT-
OBSERVATION VALUES NEED NOT BE IN ANY SPECIFIC ORDER.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY WRITE HIS OWN "READ" SUBPROGRAM FOR DATA INPUT IF HE
DESIRES.
X06701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS06
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RANDOMIZED COMPLETE BLOCK DESIGN
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE ON A RANDOMIZED COMPLETE
BLOCK EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN. A MAXIMUM OF 100 TREATMENTS AND BLOCKS CAN
BE HANDLED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY SUBROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES THE NECESSARY INFORMATION TO PERFORM AN ANALYSIS
OF VARIANCE ON A RANDOMIZED COMPLETE BLOCK EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN.
MODEL: Y(IJ) = M + T(I) + B(J) + E(IJ); I=1,...,IT; J=1,...,IB
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 100 TREATMENTS AND A MAXIMUM OF
100 BLOCKS. THERE MAY BE AN UNLIMITED NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS BUT ONLY
ONE OBSERVATION PER EXPERIMENTAL UNIT (I.E., TREATMENT-BLOCK
COMBINATION). MISSING OBSERVATIONS ARE NOT PERMITTED. THE INPUT DATA
MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA
THE READ SUBROUTINE. HOWEVER, ONLY ONE TREATMENT-BLOCK OBSERVATION UNIT
IS ALLOWED ON EACH DATA RECORD. THERE MAY BE AN ARBITRARY ARRANGEMENT
OF DATA; THE INPUT NEED NOT BE IN ANY SPECIFIC ORDER.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTON
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01-03 ISW2 I3 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
04-06 IT I3 NUMBER OF TREATMENTS
(IT < OR =100)
07-09 IB I3 NUMBER OF BLOCKS
(IB < OR =100)
DATA -- I -- TREATMENT NUMBER
-- J -- BLOCK NUMBER
-- X -- OBSERVATION
D.S.D. -- I -- DATA SET DELIMITER (I=9999)
USED TO TERMINATE READING OF
A PARTICULAR DATA SET - SAME
COLUMN AS I IN DATA.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE IF HE DESIRES.
X06801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS07
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RANDOMIZED COMPLETE BLOCK DESIGN WITH SUB-SAMPLING
**REVISION?
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE ON A RANDOMIZED COMPLETE
BLOCK DESIGN AND SUBSAMPLING. A MAXIMUM OF 30 TREATMENTS AND 30 BLOCKS
CAN BE HANDLED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES THE NECESSARY INFORMATION TO PERFORM AN ANALYSIS
OF VARIANCE FOR A RANDOMIZED COMPLETE BLOCK DESIGN WITH SUBSAMPLING.
MODEL:
Y(I,J,K)= M + G(I) + B(J) + E(IJ) + H(IJK); I=1,...,IT; J=1,...,IB;
K=1,...,N
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 30 TREATMENTS AND 30
BLOCKS. MISSING OBSERVATIONS ARE NOT PERMITTED. IF THE PROGRAM
ENCOUNTERS A MISSING OBSERVATION, THE MESSAGE "MISSING DATA - JOB
ABORTED" WILL INFORM THE USER OF AN UNBALANCED DESIGN AND EXECUTION
WILL TERMINATE. THE DESIGN MUST BE "BALANCED",I.E., THERE MUST BE AN
EQUAL NUMBER OF READINGS FOR EACH SUBSAMPLE. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE
ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE
READ SUBROUTINE. HOWEVER, ONLY ONE EXPERIMENTAL UNIT IS PERMITTED ON
EACH DATA RECORD. THERE MAY BE AN ARBITRARY ARRANGEMENT OF DATA; THE
INPUT NEED NOT BE IN ANY SPECIFIC ORDER.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-03 IT I2 # OF TREATMENTS (IT < OR =30)
04-05 IB I2 NUMBER OF BLOCKS (IB < OR =30)
06-07 N I2 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS IN EACH
SUBSAMPLE
TITLE 01-12 IEFF 6A2 FREE TEXT ID OF TREATMENTS
13-24 IBLK 6A2 FREE TEXT ID OF BLOCKS
DATA -- I -- TREATMENT NUMBER
-- J -- BLOCK NUMBER
-- X -- OBSERVATION
D.S.D. -- I -- DATA SET DELIMITER (I=9999)
USED TO TERMINATE READING OF
A PARTICULAR DATA SET - SAME
COLUMN AS I IN DATA RECORD.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" ROUTINE IF HE DESIRES.
X06901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS08
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TWO-WAY FACTORIAL DESIGN
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE PROGRAM PERFORMS AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE FOR A TWO-WAY FACTORIAL
IN A RANDOMIZED COMPLETE BLOCK DESIGN. THE F TEST IS FOR A FIXED MODEL.
EACH REPLICATE MUST BE BALANCED (I.E., THE SAME NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS
IS REQUIRED FOR EACH LEVEL OF EACH FACTOR.) A MAXIMUM OF 20 LEVELS PER
FACTOR AND 8 REPLICATES PER LEVEL, CAN BE HANDLED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 20 LEVELS PER FACTOR AND 8
REPLICATES PER LEVEL. THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM,
SUBJECT TO AN ORDERING RESTRICTION, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE
USER VIA THE SUBROUTINE READ.
THE ORDERING RESTRICTION TAKES THE FOLLOWING FORM: IRA IS THE REPLICATE
#; I AND J ARE THE LEVELS OF FACTORS A AND B RESPECTIVELY. THE DATA
MUST BE ORDERED SO THAT J VARIES FIRST, THEN I, THEN IRA. FOR EXAMPLE,
A SET OF DATA WITH REPLICATES AND TWO LEVELS OF EACH FACTOR WOULD BE
ORDERED AS FOLLOWS:
111, 112, 121, 122, 211, 212, 221, 222
IF THE INPUT DATA IS NOT IN CORRECT ORDER, AN ERROR MESSAGE IS PRINTED
AND EXECUTION IS TERMINATED.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01-04 IRAP I4 NUMBER OF REPLICATES
(1 < OR = IRAP < OR =8)
05-08 IFACT I4 NUMBER OF LEVELS FOR FACTOR A
(1 < OR = IFACT < OR =20)
09-12 JFACT I4 NUMBER OF LEVELS FOR FACTOR B
(1 < OR = JFACT < OR =20)
13 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
DATA 01-03 IRA I3 REPLICATE NUMBER
04-06 I I3 LEVEL OF FACTOR A
07-09 J I3 LEVEL OF FACTOR B
-- X -- OBSERVATION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE IF HE WISHES.
X07001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS09
**PROGRAM TITLE:
THREE-WAY FACTORIAL DESIGN
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS A 3-FACTOR FACTORIAL ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE FOR A
RANDOMIZED COMPLETE BLOCK DESIGN WITH REPLICATIONS. THE F STATISTIC
COMPUTATION ASSUMES A (FIXED EFFECT) MODEL. A MAXIMUM OF 8 LEVELS
OF FACTOR A, 8 LEVELS OF FACTOR B, 5 LEVELS OF FACTOR C, AND 8
REPLICATIONS, CAN BE HANDLED. MISSING OBSERVATIONS ARE NOT PERMITTED,
AND THE DESIGN MUST BE BALANCED (I.E., THE SAME NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS
IS REQUIRED FOR ALL TREATMENT COMBINATIONS OVER ALL REPLICATES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO LOADING OF ANY LIBRARY
ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES THE NECESSARY INFORMATION TO PERFORM A THREE-
FACTOR FACTORIAL ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE FOR A RANDOMIZED COMPLETE BLOCK
DESIGN WITH REPLICATIONS. THE COMPUTED F STATISTIC ASSUMES A "FIXED
EFFECT" MODEL.
MODEL:
Y(I,J,K,L) = MU + RHO(I) + ALPHA(J) + BETA(K) + (ALPHA*BETA(JK)) +
UPSILON(1) + (ALPHA*UPSILON(JL)) + (BETA*UPSILON(KL)) +
(ALPHA*BETA*UPSILON(IJKL)) + EPSILON(IJKL);
I = L,...,R
J = L,...,A
K = L,...,B
L = L,...,C
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 8 LEVELS OF FACTOR A, 8
LEVELS OF FACTOR B, 5 LEVELS OF FACTOR C, AND 8 REPLICATIONS. MISSING
OBSERVATIONS ARE NOT PERMITTED. THE DESIGN MUST BE BALANCED ( THE SAME
# OF OBSERVATIONS FOR ALL TREATMENT COMBINATIONS OVER ALL REPLICATES).
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY
THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE. ONLY ONE TREATMENT COMBINATION FOR ONE
REPLICATE IS PERMITTED ON A LINE. THE INPUT DATA MUST ALSO CORRESPOND
WITH THE FOLLOWING ORDERING RESTRICTION. LET IRAP = THE REPLICATE
NUMBER, WHERE IFACT = THE LEVELS OF FACTOR A, JFACT = THE LEVELS OF
FACTOR B, AND LFACT = THE LEVELS OF FACTOR C.
THEN THE DATA MUST BE ENTERED SUCH THAT
LFACT VARIES FIRST, THEN JFACT, IFACT, AND FINALLY LRAP. THE FOLLOWING
SCHEMATIC ILLUSTRATES THE ORDERING OF SUBSCRIPTS:
1111,1112,1113,...1121,1122,1123,...
IF THE INPUT DATA IS NOT IN THE CORRECT ORDER, THE MESSAGE "DATA OUT
OF ORDER - JOB ABORTED" IS PRINTED AND EXECUTION IS TERMINATED.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01-04 IRAP I4 NUMBER OF REPLICATES
(1 < OR = IRAP < OR =8)
05-08 IFACT I4 NUMBER OF LEVELS OF FACTOR A
(1 < OR = IFACT < OR =8)
09-12 JFACT I4 NUMBER OF LEVELS OF FACTOR B
(1 < OR = JFACT < OR =8)
13-16 LFACT I4 NUMBER OF LEVELS OF FACTOR C
(1 < OR = LFACT < OR =8)
17 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
DATA -- IRAP -- REPLICATE NUMBER
-- IFACT -- LEVEL OF FACTOR A
-- JFACT -- LEVEL OF FACTOR B
-- LFACT -- LEVEL OF FACTOR C
-- X -- OBSERVATION
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE.
X07101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS53
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE INFORMATION GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN WITH SUBSAMPLING. THERE MAY BE AN EQUAL OR UNEQUAL
NUMBER OF SUBSAMPLES PER EXPERIMENTAL UNIT (TREATMENT-BLOCK
COMBINATION). COMPUTATION OF THE NONCENTRALITY PARAMETER IS INCLUDED
IN THE ANALYSIS. INTERACTION BETWEEN TREATMENTS AND BLOCKS IS NOT
ASSUMED. THE PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 7 TREATMENTS
AND 7 BLOCKS AND A MAXIMUM OF 99 SUBSAMPLES PER TREATMENT-BLOCK
COMBINATION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM GENERATES THE NECESSARY INFORMATION TO PERFORM AN ANALYSIS
OF VARIANCE ON A RANDOMIZED BLOCK EXPERIMENTAL DESIGN WITH SUBSAMPLING.
THERE MAY BE AN EQUAL OR UNEQUAL NUMBER OF SUBSAMPLES PER EXPERIMENTAL
UNIT (TREATMENT-BLOCK COMBINATION). COMPUTATION OF THE NONCENTRALITY
PARAMETER IS ALSO INCLUDED IN THE ANALYSIS. INTERACTION BETWEEN
TREATMENTS AND BLOCKS IS NOT ASSUMED IN THE ANALYSIS.
MODEL: Y(I,J,K)=MU + BETA(I) + ALPHA(J) + EPSILON(I,J,K); I=1,2,...,IT
J=1,2,...,IB
K=0,1,...N(I,J)
THE MATRIX SYSTEM A*BETA = Q IS SET UP, AUGMENTED BY THE CONDITION
SUM(BETA(I)) = 0 AND SOLVED FOR THE BETA(I). THE ADJUSTED SUMS OF
SQUARES FOR THE TREATMENTS IS COMPUTED USING THE DOOLITTLE REDUCTION
ON THE SYSTEM
(C11 C12 . G1)
(C21 C22 . G2)
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 7 TREATMENTS, 7 BLOCKS,
AND A MAXIMUM OF 99 SUBSAMPLES PER TREATMENT-BLOCK COMBINATION. THE
DATA POINTS MUST BE ENTERED, ONE POINT PER RECORD, AS SPECIFIED BELOW:
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02 IT I1 NUMBER OF TREATMENTS
(IT < OR =7)
03 IB I1 NUMBER OF BLOCKS (IB NOT =7)
DATA (ONE SET
FOR EACH TREATMENT-
BLOCK CELL)
FIRST 01-02 N(I,J) I2 NUMBER OF SUBSAMPLES IN THE
RECORD CELL (I,J) [THE ITH TREATMENT
AND THE JTH BLOCK]
NEXT N 01-08 ZI F8.0 OBSERVATIONS (1 PER RECORD
(I,J) CARDS PUNCH DECIMAL, MUST HAVE 99
OR LESS FOR CELL (I,J))
NOTE: STARTING WITH THE FIRST TREATMENT, THE SETS OF DATA SHOULD BE
READ IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER: CELL (1,1) CELL (1,2),...., CELL
(1,IB), THUS, ALL THE CELLS FOR TRETMENT 1 ARE READ IN, THEN
ALL THE CELLS FOR TREATMENT 2, ETC.. THEREFORE, THE ORDER IS:
N(1,1)
CELL(1,1)
.
.
.
CELL(1,IB)
N(2,1)
CELL(2,1)
CELL(2,2)
.
.
.
CELL(2,IB)
N(3,1)
CELL(3,1)
.
.
.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X07201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS03
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DUNCAN'S MULTIPLE RANGE TEST
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES ALL STATISTICS AND TESTS INVOLVED IN DUNCAN'S
MULTIPLE RANGE TEST WITH EQUAL OR UNEQUAL READINGS PER GROUP. THE
INPUT DATA CAN EITHER BE THE MEANS AND THE MEAN SQUARE ERROR, OR THE
OBSERVATIONS THEMSELVES. IN THE LATER CASE, AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE
FOR A COMPLETELY RANDOMIZED DESIGN IS PERFORMED. SIGNIFICANCE LEVELS
OF EITHER 0.05 OR 0.01 CAN BE SELECTED. A MAXIMUM OF 100 TREATMENTS
CAN BE HANDLED, WITH AN EQUAL OR UNEQUAL NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER
TREATMENT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY LIBRARY SUBROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 100 TREATMENTS WITH AN
EQUAL OR UNEQUAL NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER TREATMENT. RAW DATA MUST
BE ENTERED AS A COMPLETELY RANDOMIZED DESIGN. IT IS ASSUMED THAT NONE
OF THE TREATMENT MEANS ARE NUMERICALLY EQUAL.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
---- -------- ------ -----------
DUNCAN'S TABLE SEE XT(I,J) F5.2 TABULAR VALUES OF
TABLE DUNCAN'S TABLE AT THE
0.05 AND 0.01 LEVEL OF
SIGNIFICANCE
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
ELSE: BATCH RUN
02-04 NSETS I3 NUMBER OF TREATMENTS OR
SETS OF DATA (NSETS </=
99)
05-09 SLVL F5.3 SIGNIFICANCE LEVEL DE-
SIRED (0.05 OR 0.01)
10 NTYPE I1 =0: INPUT I DATA POINTS
ELSE: INPUT IS PRE-
COMPUTED TREATMENT MEANS
11-20 DFSUM F10.4 =0: NTYPE=0
ELSE; ERROR MEAN SQUARE
DATA (USED ONLY WHEN
NTYPE = 0
RECORD 1 01 BLANK
02-21 FREE TEXT FOR TREATMENT
NAME
RECORD 2 01-03 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
FOR THIS TREATMENT
(NPNT </= 999)
RECORD 3 -- X -- OBSERVATION FOR THE JTH
TREATMENT
.
.
.
REPEAT FOR ALL TREATMENT SETS
DATA (USED ONLY WHEN
NTYPE NOT EQUAL TO 0)
-- PNTS -- SAMPLE SIZE USED IN
COMPUTING MEANS
(PNTS </= 999)
-- XMEAN (I) -- VALUE OF THE ITH
TREATMENT MEAN
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X07301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS27
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PAIRED T-TEST
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE STUDENT'S T-TEST FOR PAIRED OBSERVATIONS APPLIES TO THE CASE OF TWO
SAMPLES IN WHICH THE OBSERVATIONS OF ONE SAMPLE MAY BE LOGICALLY
RELATED OR PAIRED (IN TIME OR SPACE), ITEM BY ITEM, WITH THE OBSERVA-
TIONS OF THE SECOND SAMPLE. THE PROGRAM CALCULATES POINT ESTIMATES
(MEAN, STANDARD DEVIATION, STANDARD ERROR OF THE MEAN) FOR BOTH SAMPLES,
THEN CALCULATES THE POINT ESTIMATES AND VALUE OF STUDENT'S (T) ON THE
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN SAMPLES. THE VALUE OF STUDENT'S (T) IS COMPUTED FOR
A SPECIFIED LEVEL OF CONFIDENCE, 0.90, 0.95, OR 0.99. A MAXIMUM OF
600 UNWEIGHTED (X,Y) DATA PAIRS CAN BE HANDLED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 600 UNWEIGHTED (X,Y) DATA PAIRS.
THE VALUE OF THE STUDENT'S T AT A SPECIFIED LEVEL OF CONFIDENCE DEPENDS
ON THE ASSUMPTION OF NORMALITY. THE USER MAY ENTER THE INPUT DATA IN
ANY FORM, SUBJECT TO AN ORDERING RESTRICTION, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE. THE USER MUST ENTER HIS INPUT DATA
PAIRS IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER:
(X1(1),X2(1)), (X1(2),X2(2)),..., (X1(I),X2(I)),...
WHERE: X1(I) = THE ITH VALUE OF SAMPLE A
X2(I) = THE ITH VALUE OF SAMPLE B
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPRS I3 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA PAIRS,
(NPRS </= 600)
05-08 CLVL F4.2 SPECIFIED CONFIDENCE LEVEL
(0.90, 0.95 OR 0.99)
DATA -- X1(I) -- ITH VALUE OF FIRST SAMPLE IN A
(X,Y) DATA PAIR.
-- X2(I) -- ITH VALUE OF SECOND SAMPLE IN A
(X,Y) DATA PAIR.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE IF DESIRED.
X07401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS28
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BARTLETT'S HOMOGENEITY OF VARIANCE TEST
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM TESTS THE HYPOTHESIS THAT THE ESTIMATE VARIANCE FROM (K)
SAMPLES IS HOMOGENEOUS. A ONE-SIDED ALTERNATIVE AT THE 0.95 CONFIDENCE
LEVEL IS USED AS THE TEST STATISTIC; THAT IS, IF THE CALCULATED CHI-
SQUARE VALUE EXCEEDS THE TABULAR VALUE OF CHI-SQUARE AT THE DESIGNATED
PROBABILITY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY
ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM WILL TEST THE HYPOTHESIS THAT THE ESTIMATED VARIANCE FROM
K SAMPLES ARE HOMOGENOUS. A ONE-SIDED ALTERNATIVE AT THE 0.95 CONFI-
DENCE LEVEL IS USED AS THE TEST STATISTIC; THAT IS, IF THE CALCULATED
CHI-SQUARE VALUE EXCEEDS THE TABUALR VALUE OF CHI-SQUARE AT THE
DESIGNATED PROBABILITY OF A TYPE I ERROR, 0.05, THE ASSUMPTION OF
HOMOGENEOUS OR CONSTANT VARIANCES OVER THE K SAMPLES IS REJECTED.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 10 SAMPLES. SAMPLE
SIZES NEED NOT BE BALANCED; I.E., THE USER MAY SPECIFY AN UNEQUAL
NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR EACH SAMPLE. THE TOTAL NUMBER OF OBSERVA-
TIONS OVER ALL SAMPLES MUST BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 900. THE INPUT
DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER
VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 10 SAMPLES. SAMPLE
SIZES NEED NOT BE BALANCED; I.E., THE USER MAY SPECIFY AN UNEQUAL
NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR EACH SAMPLE. THE TOTAL NUMBER OF OBSERVA-
TIONS OVER ALL SAMPLES MUST BE LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 900. THE INPUT
DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER
VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-03 K I2 NUMBER OF SAMPLES (K<10)
04-07 N(1) I4 SIZE OF THE FIRST SAMPLE
.
.
.
20-23 N(K) I4 SIZE OF THE KTH SAMPLE
DATA -- X(I) -- OBSERVATIONS CORRESPONDING TO
1,....,J THE FIRST SAMPLE OF SIZE N(1)
(I = 1,....,N(1))
J+1,....,K -- X(I) -- OBSERVATIONS CORRESPONDING TO
. THE SECOND SAMPLE OF SIZE N(2)
./R (I=N(1)+1,....,N(2))
.
1,....,M -- X(I) -- OBSERVATIONS CORRESPONDING TO
THE KTH SAMPLE OF SIZE N(K)
(I=N(K)-1,....,N(K))
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY CHOOSE TO SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE.
X07501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS35
**PROGRAM TITLE:
KOLMOGOROV - SMIRNOV GOODNESS OF FIT TEST
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
FOR A MAXIMUM OF 999 DATA POINTS, THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS THE KOLMOGOROV-
SMIRNOV GOODNESS-OF-FIT TEST FOR A SPECIFIED PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION.
THE SOURCE DATA CAN BE TESTED FOR FIT AGAINST ANY OF THE FOLLOWING
FUNCTIONS: BINOMIAL, CHI-SQUARE, F, NORMAL, POISSON, OR STUDENT'S (T)
(SEE HP22143 FOR ANY OF THESE FUNCTIONS). THE USER HAS THE OPTION OF
(A) SPECIFYING THE NUMBER OF CLASS INTERVALS, (B) LETTING THE PROGRAM
GENERATE CLASS INTERVALS BY USE OF STURGE'S RULE, OR (C) SPECIFYING THE
NUMBER OF INTERVALS AND UPPER BOUNDS OF EACH INTERVAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 999 DATA POINTS. THE INPUT DATA
MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA
THE READ SUBROUTINE.
ONCE A PARTICULAR PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION HAS BEEN CHOSEN, THE
FOLLOWING "POPULATION PARAMETER" ESTIMATES ARE REQUIRED:
(1) BINOMIAL DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = PROBABILITY OF SUCCESS FOR EACH TRIAL
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
(2) CHI-SQUARE DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = DEGREES OF FREEDOM
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
(3) F DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = DEGREES OF FREEDOM FOR THE NUMERATOR
PARM2 = DEGREES OF FREEDOM FOR THE DENOMINATOR
PARM3 = 0.0
(4) NORMAL DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = SAMPLE MEAN
PARM2 = SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION
PARM3 = TOLERANCE FOR CORRECT PROBABILITY VALUES (0.001 OR 0.0001)
(5) POISSON DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = (NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS)X(PROBABILITY OF SUCCESS ON ANY
ONE TRIAL)
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
(6) STUDENT'S T DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = DEGREES OF FREEDOM
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NPNT I3 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
(NPNT </= 999)
05-06 NTRVL I2 =0: NUMBER OF INTERVALS SET BY
STURGES' RULE
=1: NUMBER OF INTERVALS AND
UPPER BONDS ARE READ IN
1: DESIRED NUMBER OF INTERVALS
(NTRVL </= 99)
07-14 CV* F8.4 =0: NPNT >/= 35
NOT=0: NPNT < 35
15-22 SLVL F8.4 SIGNIFICANCE LEVEL CORRESPOND-
ING TO VALUE OF CV
*CV = CRITICAL VALUE FROM PUBLISHED TABLES. SEE OSTLE, B., STATISTICS
IN RESEARCH, 2ND ED., P. 560.
DISTRIBUTION 01 -- -- BLANK
02-21 NCOMT 10A2 IDENTIFICATION
22-33 PARM1 F12.4 POPULATION PARAMETER
34-45 PARM2 F12.4 ESTIMATES - SEE ABOVE
46-57 PARM3 F12.4
DATA -- X(I) -- INPUT DATA POINTS
*INTERVAL 01-02 NTRVL I2 DESIRED NUMBER OF INTERVALS
(NTRVL </= 99)
**UPPER
BOUND -- XU(I) -- UPPER BOUND FOR THE INTERVALS
(I = 1, NTRVL). FORMAT SET IN
READ SUBROUTINE.
*USED ONLY WHEN NTRVL = 1
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MUST SUPPLY A "READ" SUBROUTINE TO ENTER DATA, AND A TEST FOR
FIT VIA THE SUBROUTINE "EXPEC". EXPEC MAY BE BINOMIAL, CHI-SQUARE, F,
NORMAL, POISSON OR STUDENT'S T SUBROUTINE.
X07601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS36
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CHI-SQUARE GOODNESS OF FIT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS THE CHI-SQUARE GOODNESS-OF-FIT TEST, AND COMPUTES
THE CHI-SQUARE VALUE OF THE TEST, FOR ANY OF THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
BINOMIAL, CHI-SQUARE, F, NORMAL, POISSON, STUDENT'S (T). THE USER HAS
THE OPTION OF SPECIFYING THE UPPER AND LOWER BOUNDS FOR A GIVEN NUMBER
OF INTERVALS, OR OF READING IN THE END POINTS OF EACH INTERVAL. A
MAXIMUM OF 1,000 DATA POINTS CAN BE HANDLED. HP PROGRAM 22143, CLASSI-
FICATION CODE A408, CAN BE USED TO FURNISH THE SOURCE DATA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENT WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 1000 DATA POINTS. THE
INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY
THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
ONCE A PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION HAS BEEN SELECTED, "POPULATION
PARAMETER" ESTIMATES ARE REQUIRED (SEE ENCLOSURE). NOTE THAT IF THE
NORMAL DISTRIBUTION IS SPECIFIED AS THE "TEST PDF" AND A STANDARD NORMAL
TRANSFORM OF AN INDIVIDUAL DATA POINT EXCEEDS +/-6 FROM THE SAMPLE MEAN,
THE STABILITY OF CONVERGENCE IN FUNCTION ANORM (A40-22143) IS NOT
GUARANTEED.
GIVEN A SPECIFIED PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION, THE APPROPRIATE FORM OF
SUBROUTINE CDF SHOULD BE SELECTED. SUBROUTINE CDF SUBSEQUENTLY CALLS A
SUBPROGRAM FROM A408-22143 AND RESTRICTIONS INVOLVING THE VARIOUS
PARAMETERS FOR THE PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION SUBPROGRAM CAN BE FOUND IN
THE DOCUMENTATION OF A408-22143.
(1) BINOMIAL DISTRIBUTION
SUBROUTINE CDF (NTRVL, P1, P2, ENDPT, EF)
DIMENSION ENPDT(1),EF(1)
XL=ENDPT(1)
PL=BINOM(XL,NTRVL,P1)
DO 100 I=1, NTRVL
XU=ENDPT(I+1)
PU=BINOM(XU,NTRVL,P1)
EF(I)=PU-PL
100 PL=PU
RETURN
END
(2) CHI SQUARE DISTRIBUTION
SUBROUTINE CDF (NTRVL,P1,P2,ENDPT,EF)
DIMENSION ENDPT(1),EF(1)
TOL=0.0001
XL=ENDPT(1)
PL=CHIFN (P1,XL,TOL)
DO100 I=1, NTRVL
XU=ENDPT(I+1)
PU=CHIFN (P1,XU,TOL)
EF(I)=PU-PL
100 PL=PU
RETURN
END
(3) F DISTRIBUTION
SUBROUTINE CDF (NTRVL,P1,P2,ENDPT,EF)
DIMENSION ENDPT(1),EF(1)
XL=ENDPT(1)
PL=FPROB (P2,P1,XL)
DO 100 I=1, NTRVL
XU=ENDPT(I+1)
EF(I)=PU-PL
100 PL=PU
RETURN
END
(4) NORMAL DISTRIBUTION
SUBROUTINE CDF (NTRVL,P1,P2, ENDPT,EF)
DIMENSION ENDPT(1),EF(1)
TOL=0.0001
XL=(ENDPT(1)-P1)/P2
PL=ANORM (XL,TOL)
DO 100 I=1, NTRVL
XU=(ENDPT(I+1)-P1)/P2
PU=ANORM (XU,TOL)
EF(I)=PU-PL
100 PL=PU
RETURN
END
POPULATION PARAMETERS
1. BINOMIAL DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = PROBABILITY OF SUCCESS FOR EACH TRIAL
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
2. CHI-SQUARE DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = DEGREES OF FREEDOM
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
3. F DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = DEGREES OF FREDOM FOR THE NUMERATOR
PARM2 = DEGREES OF FREEDOM FOR THE DENOMINATOR
PARM3 = 0.0
4. NORMAL DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = SAMPLE MEAN
PARM2 = SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION
PARM3 = TOLERANCE FOR CORRECT PROBABILITY VALUES (0.001 OR 0.0001)
5. POISSON DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = (NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS)X(PROBABILITY OF SUCCESS ON ANY ONE
TRIAL)
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
6. STUDENT'S T DISTRIBUTION
PARM1 = DEGREES OF FREEDOM
PARM2 = 0.0
PARM3 = 0.0
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-05 NPNT I4 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
(1 </= NPNT </= 1000)
06-09 NTRVL I4 NUMBER OF INTERVALS DESIRED
(2 </= NTRVL </= 50)
10-17 FBND F8.0 LOWER BOUND FOR INTERVALS
(OPTIONAL)
18-25 UBND F8.0 UPPER BOUND FOR INTERVALS
(OPTIONAL)
26-33 P1 F8.0 PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION PARA-
METERS (SEE SPECIAL SECTION
"POPULATION PARAMETERS"
ENCLOSURE)
DATA -- X(I) -- INPUT DATA POINTS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY DEFINE AN INPUT SUBROUTINE READ AND MUST DEFINE A PROBABI-
LITY DISTRIBUTION SUBROUTINE CDF (CDF MAY BE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
(1) BINOMIAL, (2) CHI-SQUARE, (3) F, (4) NORMAL, (5) POISSON, OR
(6) STUDENT'S T.)
X07701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS38
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TESTS OF HYPOTHESIS FOR VARIANCES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE PROGRAM TESTS FOR ONE OF THE FOLLOWING:
A. WHETHER THE VARIANCE OF A NORMAL POPULATION EQUALS A SPECIFIED
VARIANCE.
B. WHETHER THE VARIANCES ARE EQUAL, PROVIDING BOTH COME FROM A NORMAL
POPULATION.
RESULTS ARE DETERMINED WITH A 95-PERCENT CONFIDENCE INTERVAL. A
MAXIMUM OF 500 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS OR 1,000 DATA POINTS CAN BE HANDLED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY
ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
IN ORDER TO TEST S**2=S(0)**2, SET NX = NUMBER OF DATA POINTS AND
NY = 0. IF TWO SETS OF DATA ARE REQUIRED (E.G., TO TEST S(1)**2 =
S(2)**2) THE DATA POINTS MUST BE READ IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER:
X(1),X(2),...,X(I),...X(NX),Y(1),Y(2),...,Y(J),...Y(NY).
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02 NTEST I1 =0: TEST IS S**2=S(0)**2
NOT=0: TEST IS S**2=S(2)**2
03-05 NX I3 NUMBER OF 'X' DATA POINTS
(NX </= 500 IF NTEST NOT=0,
OTHERWISE, NX </= 1000)
06-08 NY I3 NUMBER OF 'Y' DATA POINTS
(NY </=500 IF NTEST NOT=0,
OTHERWISE, NY = 0)
09-16 P F8.3 =0: NTEST NOT=0
NOT=0: VALUE OF S(0)**2
DATA --- X(I) --- INPUT DATA POINTS - THE SECOND
AND/OR SET OF INPUT DATA POINTS (WHEN
Y(I) TESTING S(1)**2 = S(2)**2
FOLLOWS THE FIRST SET.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA.
X07801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS39
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TESTS OF HYPOTAESIS FOR MEANS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM TESTS (A), WHETHER A MEAN OF A NORMAL POPULATION EQUALS
A SPECIFIED VALUE OR (B), WHETHER THE MEANS ARE EQUAL (PROVIDING BOTH
COME FROM A NORMAL POPULATION). RESULTS ARE DETERMINED WITH A
CONFIDENCE INTERVAL OF 0.90, 0.95 OR 0.99.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
TO TEST M = M(O), SET NX = NUMBER OF DATA POINTS (NX </= 1600) AND
NY = 0. TO TEST M(1) = M(2), SET NX = NUMBER OF DATA POINTS OF THE
FIRST SET (NX </= 800) AND NY = NUMBER OF DATA POINTS OF THE SECOND
SET (NY</=800). THIS PROGRAM WILL THEN READ THE DATA POINTS IN THE
FOLLOWING ORDER:
X(1), X(2), ..., X(NX), Y(1), Y(2), ..., Y(NY)
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT=0: BATCH RUN
02-04 NX I3 NUMBER OF 'X' DATA POINTS
(NX </= 1600 IF NTEST NOT=0)
05-07 NY I3 NUMBER OF 'Y' DATA POINTS
(NY = 0) IF NTEST NOT=0,
OTHERWISE, NY </= 800)
08 NTEST I1 =0: TEST IS M(1) = M(2)
NOT=0: TEST IS M = M(0)
09-13 CLVL F5.2 CONFIDENCE INTERVAL (0.90,
0.95 OR 0.99)
14-21 XMEAN F8.0 =0: NTEST = 0
NOT=0: VALUE OF M(O)
DATA -- X(I) &/OR -- X(I) = THE FIRST SET OF DATA
Y(I) POINTS AND Y(I) = THE SECOND
SET OF DATA POINTS, FOLLOWS THE
FIRST SET WHEN TESTING M(1) =
M(2)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY ELECT TO SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA.
X07901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS16
**PROGRAM TITLE:
X-Y PLOTTER ON PRINTER
**REVISION?
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GRAPHIC PLOTTER PRINTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
THIS ROUTINE PRODUCES GRAPHS ON A TELEPRINTER. AN X ARRAY IS SCALED
TO SUIT THE PRINTED GRAPH, AND IS PLOTTED AGAINST EITHER THE ELEMENT
NUMBERS IN THE ARRAY OR AGAINST ANOTHER ARRAY, Y. EACH DATA POINT IS
MARKED ON THE GRAPH AS A LETTER (X) AND THE COORDINATES OF THE POINT
ALSO ARE PRINTED. THE ROUTINE CAN START AT ANY POINT IN THE ARRAY,
AND THE OUTPUT CAN BE EITHER A PRINT PLOT OR A BAR PLOT. A MAXIMUM
OF 200 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS CAN BE ACCEPTED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINE MUST BE LOADED WITH ANY LIBRARY ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
THIS ROUTINE WILL ACCEPT A MAX OF 200 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS. THE INPUT
DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE
USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
COL VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01 ISW1 I1 =0: POINT OUTPUT
=1: BAR OUTPUT
02 ISW2 I1 =0: 2 LINES PER ELEMENT
=1: 1 LINE PER ELEMENT
03 ISW3 I1 =0: X PLOTTED VS. ELEMENT
NUMBER
=1: X PLOTTED VS. Y
04 ISW4 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
05 ISW5 I1 DEFINED AS 0
06-09 N I4 NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN X ARRAY
10 CHARA A1 PLOTTING CHARACTER (MAY BE +,
*, ETC.)
DATA (ONE RECORD
FOR EACH (X,Y) PAIR)
-- X(I) -- X VALUE TO BE PLOTTED
-- Y(I) -- Y VALUE TO BE PLOTTED
NOTE:A SUBROUTINE VERSION OF THE X,Y PLOTTER IS EXECUTED BY THE
CALL STATEMENT:
CALL PTSCL (X,Y,N,NAME,ISW,CHARA,MIN)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL X ARRAY TO BE PLOTTED
Y REAL Y ARRAY TO BE PLOTTED
N INTEGER NUMBER OF ELEMENTS IN X ARRAY
NAME INTEGER TABLE HEADING
ISW(1-5) INTEGER SWITCHES
CHARA REAL PLOTTING CHARACTER
MIN INTEGER STARTING POINT IN PLOTTING X ARRAY
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY CHOOSE TO SUPPLY HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE TO INPUT DATA.
X08001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SPLTR
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TIME SERIES PLOTTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GRAPHIC PLOTTER PRINTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
AVAILABLE IN FUNCTION FORM, THIS SUBPROGRAM PLOTS FIXED-POINTS INTEGERS
ON THE TELEPRINTER. IF THE VALUE OF THE INTEGER IS FROM 0 TO 50, THE
POINT APPEARS AS AN ASTERISK, THE DISTANCE FROM THE LEFT MARGIN OF THE
PAGE BEING PROPORTIONATE TO THE VALUE OF THE POINT. IF THE VALUE IS
OVER 50, THE INTEGER ITSELF IS PRINTED IN NUMERICAL FORM AT THE RIGHT
HAND EDGE OF THE PAGE. SUCCESSIVE DATA POINTS ARE PLOTTED ON SUCCESSIVE
LINES DOWN THE PAGE.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
(VARIABLE) - SPLTR(N) WHERE N IS RETURNED TO THE MAINLINE PROGRAM
UNCHANGED.
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
N INTEGER IF 0 < OR = N < OR = 100, N WILL BE REPRESENTED
AS AN ASTERISK.
IF N > 100, THE VALUE OF THE INTEGER WILL BE
PRINTED IN THE EXTREME RIGHT HAND SIDE OF THE
OUTPUT.
IF N=-999, A HEADER ARRAY IS PRINTED AND THIS
SHOULD EITHER BE DONE ON THE FIRST OR A LAST
CALL.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X08101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS19
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HISTOGRAM PLOTTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GRAPHIC PLOTTER PRINTER
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM SORTS A SINGLE DIMENSION FLOATING POINT ARRAY INTO
ASCENDING SEQUENCE, AND (A) PRODUCES A HISTOGRAM OF THE DATA POINTS
ON THE TELEPRINTER OR LINE PRINTER, OR (B) FURNISHES THE FREQUENCY
DISTRIBUTION OF DATA POINTS, OR (C) PRODUCES BOTH A HISTOGRAM AND A
FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE MAIN PROGRAM AND SUBROUTINES MUST BE LOADED PRIOR TO ANY LIBRARY
ROUTINES.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPES
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
HEADER 01-72 -- 36A2 FREE TEXT
PARAMETER 01-04 N I4 NUMBER OF DATA POINTS
(N < OR =400)
05 ISW1 I1 =0: FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION
=1: HISTOGRAM
=2: FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION AND
HISTOGRAM
DATA -- X(I) -- DATA POINTS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY CHOOSE TO PROVIDE HIS OWN "READ" SUBROUTINE FOR DATA INPUT.
X08201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: UNREF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FORTRAN UNIT REFERENCE NUMBER EDITOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
I/O
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO CHANGE THE UNIT REFERENCE NUMBER OF AN
INPUT/OUTPUT STATEMENT IN A FORTRAN PROGRAM WRITTEN IN HEWLETT-PACKARD
FORTRAN II.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
NO CONTROL STATEMENT IS ON THE SOURCE TAPE. USUAL COMPILE, LOAD AND
RUN PROCEDURES ARE USED. THE INPUT IS A FORTRAN PROGRAM ON PAPER TAPE
WHICH IS READ BY THE PHOTOREADER (UNIT REFERENCE NO. 5). THE NECESSARY
INFORMATION IS REQUESTED BY THE TELEPRINTER (UNIT REFERENCE NO. 2)
AND THE ANSWERS ARE ENTERED ON THE KEYBOARD (UNIT REFERENCE NO. 1)
IN A CONVERSATIONAL MODE. THE OUTPUT IS THE MODIFIED FORTRAN PROGRAM
WHICH IS PUNCHED ON A HIGH-SPEED PUNCH (UNIT REFERENCE 4).
WHEN AN END STATEMENT IS REACHED ON THE TAPE, A MESSAGE IS PRINTED
ON THE TELEPRINTER, TEN FEED FRAMES ARE PUNCHED AND THE PROGRAM PAUSES.
IF SWITCH 1 IS SWITCHED UP, THE PROGRAM WILL HALT UPON PUSHING RUN.
IF SWITCH 2 IS PUSHED UP, UPON PUSHING RUN, THE PROGRAM WILL BE
STARTED AND THE INTIAL EDIT QUESTIONS WILL BE REQUESTED AGAIN. IF
SWITCHES 1 AND 2 ARE DOWN, WHEN THE RUN BUTTON IS PUSHED, THE NEXT
PROGRAM SUBPROGRAM WILL BE EDITED ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS FOR
THE LAST PROGRAM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IN POSITIONING THE INPUT TAPE IN THE PHOTOREADER, PUT THE LAST FEED
FRAME BEFORE THE FIRST NON-NULL CHARACTER ON THE TAPE UNDER THE READ
HEAD IN ORDER TO INSURE THAT ALL THE CHARACTERS OF THE FIRST LINE ARE
READ IF THE FIRST LINE OF THE PROGRAM IS 72 CHARACTERS LONG.
THE FIRST 72 CHARACTERS (INCLUDING FEED FRAMES) READ BY THE READER ARE
CONSIDERED TO BE THE FIRST LINE. IF THE NUMBER OF FEED FRAMES AND THE
NUMBER OF CHARACTERS READ ARE MORE THAN 72, THE LAST PART OF THE FIRST
LINE WILL BE OMITTED.
IF THE FIRST STATEMENT OF THE PROG IS SHORT (SAY A PROGRAM STATEMENT
OR A CONTROL STATEMENT), THIS CRITICAL POSITIONING IS NOT NECESSARY.
FOR EXAMPLE, IF THERE ARE ONLY 10 CHARS IN THE FIRST LINE, UP TO 62
FEED FRAMES CAN BE READ WITH NO ERRORS.
X08301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: HSTPL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HISTOGRAM PLOTTER SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GRAPHIC PLOTTER STATISTICS
PRINTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
THIS ROUTINE SORTS A SINGLE-DIMENSION FLOATING POINT ARRAY INTO
ASCENDING SEQUENCE, AND (A) PRODUCES A HISTOGRAM OF THE DATA POINTS
ON THE TELEPRINTER, OR (B) FURNISHES THE FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION OF THE
DATA POINTS, OR (C) PRODUCES BOTH A HISTOGRAM AND A FREQUENCY
DISTRIBUTION. A MAXIMUM OF 400 DATA POINTS CAN BE HANDLED; ANY NUMBER
OF DUPLICATIONS IS ALLOWED. (WITH A SLIGHT CHANGE IN THE ROUTINE, MORE
THAN 400 POINTS CAN BE PROCESSED.)
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DATA IS SUPPLIED TO THE SUBROUTINE THROUGH PARAMETERS IN THE
SUBROUTINE CALL FROM THE MAIN PROGRAM.
THIS SUBROUTINE IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 400 DIFFERENT VALUES
OF THE VARIABLE X (ANY NUMBER OF DUPLICATIONS IS ALLOWED). IF MORE
THAN THIS IS REQUIRED, CHANGE THE DIMENSION OF HIST FROM HIST(400) IN
SUBROUTINE HSTPL.
THE CALLING SEQUENCE FOR THE SUBROUTINE VERSION OF THIS PROGRAM IS:
CALL HSTPL (NAME, N,X,ISW1)
WHERE: NAME = HEADER IDENTIFICATION (36A2)
N = NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS IN ARRAY
X = NAME OF ARRAY
ISW1 = 0, FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION
= 1, HISTOGRAM PLOTTER
>/= 2, FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION AND HISTOGRAM PLOTTER
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X08401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SAMPLE SIZE DETERMINATION TO TEST H(O)
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES THE SAMPLE SIZE, N, TO TEST EITHER H(O): M=M(1)
OR H(O): U(1)=U(2) SO THAT THE PROBABILITY OF DETECTING THE SIGNIFICANT
DIFFERENCE, A, IS EQUAL TO B. A PREVIOUS REQUIREMENT IS AN ESTIMATE OF
THE POPULATION VARIANCE (FOR U=U(1)) OR FOR THE COMMON VARIANCE
(FOR U(1)=U(2)), S**2, BASED ON M DEGREES OF FREEDOM. THE TABLE USED
IN DETERMINING THE SAMPLE SIZE IS READ IN AS DATA. THE VALUE OF
K = A**2/S**2 IS COMPUTED, LOCATED IN THE TABLE, AND THE VALUE OF N CAN
THEN BE DETERMINED. THE VALUE OF A, THE PROBABILITY OF REJECTING H(O)
WHEN IT IS TRUE, IS 0.10 FOR A TWO-TAILED TEST AND 0.05 FOR A ONE-
TAILED TEST. THE VALUES DETERMINED FOR B ARE 0.80 AND 0.95.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TABLES USED TO DETERMINE THE REQUIRED SAMPLE SIZE MUST BE INCLUDED
WITHIN THE INPUT DATA. THE USER MUST SPECIFY THE APPROPRIATE DEGREES
OF FREEDOM FOR THE ESTIMATE OF VARIANCE. THIS CHOICE IS RESTRICTED
TO THE VALUES 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 12, 16, 24, OR 32 IF THE DEGREES
OF FREEDOM FOR THE SAMPLE VARIANCE IS LESS THAN 35.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL RESEMBLE THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
INPUT REQUIRMENTS COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
(1)HEADER 01-72 FREE TEXT
(2)INPUT TABLES * STAB(I,J) F4.2 SAMPLE SIZE TABLES FOR PR.
TYPE II ERROR = 0.80
* STAB(I,J) F4.2 SAMPLE SIZE TABLES FOR PR.
TYPE II ERROR = 0.95
(3)PARAMETERS 01 ISW2 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-04 M I3 DEGREES OF FREEDOM FOR THE
ESTIMATE OF VARIANCE (SEE
RESTRICTIONS IF M < 35)
05-14 A F10.3 SIGNIFICANT DIFFERENCE
BETWEEN U AND U(1) OR U(1)
AND U(2) TO BE DETECTED.
15-24 STDEV F10.3 SAMPLE STANDARD DEVIATION
(4)DATA(NOT APPLICABLE)
*THE INPUT TABLES ARE READ USING FORMAT (12(F4.2, 2X))
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X08501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
POOLING OF GROUPS IN REGRESSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS LINEAR EQ.
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 15 GROUPS, THIS PROGRAM DETERMINES
WHETHER SEVERAL GROUPS OF DATA CAN BE POOLED INTO ONE LINEAR REGRESSION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF 15 GROUPS. THE NUMBER
OF OBSERVATIONS PER GROUP IS NOT RESTRICTED AND NEED NOT BE EQUAL. ALL
(X,Y) DATA PAIRS FOR THE ITH GROUP MUST BE READ BEFORE THE DATA FOR THE
JTH GROUP (I<J). ONE (X,Y) PAIR MAY APPEAR ON ONE RECORD. THE INPUT
DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER
VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
INPUT REQUIREMENTS COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTON
(1)HEADER 01-72 FREE TEXT
(2)PARAMETERS 01 ISW1 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-04 K I3 NUMBER OF GROUPS (K< OR=15)
05-08 N(1) I4 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR
GROUP 1
09-12 N(2) I4 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR
. GROUP 2
.
.
61-64 N(15) I4 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS FOR
GROUP 15
(3)DATA --- X --- THE ITH X VALUE FOR THE JTH
GROUP
(1 RECORD/(X,Y)PAIR)--- Y --- THE ITH Y VALUE FOR THE JTH
GROUP
(GROUP 1 FOLLOWED BY GROUP 2,
ETC.)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X08601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS45
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MULTIPLE REGRESSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES AN EXTREMELY COMPLETE STATISTICAL ANALYSIS,
INCLUDING AN ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE TABLE, FOR ESTIMATING THE COEFFICIENTS
IN THE FOLLOWING MODEL:
Y(I) = B(0) + B1X(1I) + B(2)X(2I) + ... + B(K)X(KI)+E(I)(K< OR =9)
OUTPUT IS IN PRINTED FORM, AND ONLY A SINGLE SET OF DATA CAN BE
PROCESSED IN ONE RUN.
THERE CAN BE NO MORE THAN NINE INDEPENDENT AND ONE DEPENDENT VARIABLE.
THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS IS RESTRICTED ONLY WHEN THE ONE-PASS OPTION
IS EXERCISED, AND THEN TO 2,400 OBSERVATION VECTORS FOR 10 VARIABLES.
FOR N VARIABLES THERE MUST BE AT LEAST (N+1) OBSERVATION VECTORS. THE
ONLY INPUT CONSTRAINT IS THAT THE ITH OBSERVATION VECTOR (Y(I),X(1I),
X(2I),...,X(KI)) MUST BE FURNISHED BEFORE THE ITH + 1 VECTOR. THE
DEPENDENT VARIABLE CAN BE IN ANY FIELD.
THERE CAN BE NO MORE THAN NINE INDEPENDENT AND ONE DEPENDENT VARIABLE.
THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS IS RESTRICTED ONLY WHEN THE ONE-PASS OPTION
IS EXERCISED, AND THEN TO 2,400 OBSERVATION VECTORS FOR 10 VARIABLES.
FOR N VARIABLES THERE MUST BE AT LEAST (N+1) OBSERVATION VECTORS. THE
ONLY INPUT CONSTRAINT IS THAT THE ITH OBSERVATION VECTOR (Y(I),X(1I),
X(2I),...,X(KI)) MUST BE FURNISHED BEFORE THE ITH + 1 VECTOR. THE
DEPENDENT VARIABLE CAN BE IN ANY FIELD.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS 8K OF CORE STORAGE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THERE CAN BE NO MORE THAN NINE INDEPENDENT AND ONE DEPENDENT VARIABLE.
THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS IS RESTRICTED ONLY WHEN THE ONE PASS OPTION
IS EXERCISED, AND THEN, TO 2,400 OBSERVATION VECTORS FOR TEN VARIABLES.
FOR N VARIABLES THERE MUST BE AT LEAST (N+1) OBSERVATION VECTORS. THE
INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE
USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE. THE ONLY INPUT CONSTRAINT IS THAT THE
ITH OBSERVATION VECTOR (Y(I), X(1I), X(2I),..., X(KI) MUST BE INPUT
BEFORE THE ITH + 1 VECTOR. THE DEPENDENT VARIABLE CAN BE IN ANY FIELD.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
INPUT REQUIREMENTS COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
(1)HEADER 01-72 36A2 HEADER IDENTIFICATION
FREE FIELD
(2)PARAMETERS 01-03 N I3 NUMBER OF VARIABLES
(INCLUDE DEPENDENT
VARIABLE).
04-06 M I3 NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS
07-09 IY I3 SUBSCRIPT(POSITION ON CARD)
OF DEPENDENT VARIABLE
10-12 IWT I3 =0: NO WEIGHTING FACTOR
=1: WEIGHTING FACTOR
INCLUDED
13-22 PROB I5 PROBLEM NUMBER
23 INPUT I1 =1: ONE PASS OF DATA
=2: TWO PASSES OF DATA
(DATA IS THEN READ IN AGAIN
AFTER ANALYSIS OF VARIANCE
TABLE IS PRINTED). THIS
OPTION YIELDS A BACK
SOLUTION.
(3)DATA
A. IWT=1 (FOR EACH OBSERVATIONAL VECTOR, THERE MUST BE A RECORD WITH
THE WEIGHTING FACTOR AND ONE WITH THE VARIABLES)
FIRST CARD --- W --- WEIGHTING FACTOR FOR EACH
OBSERVATION OF THE KTH
OBSERVATION VECTOR (PUNCH
DECIMAL)
SECOND CARD --- X(1) --- VALUE OF 1ST VARIABLE OF
KTH OBSERVATION VECTOR
(PUNCH DECIMAL)
--- X(2) --- VALUE OF 2ND VARIABLE OF
KTH OBSERVATION VECTOR
(PUNCH DECIMAL)
.
.
.
--- X(N) --- VALUE OF LAST VARIABLE FOR
KTH OBSERVATION VECTOR
(PUNCH DECIMAL)
B. IWT=0 (ONE RECORD FOR EACH OBSERVATION, PUNCH DECIMAL)
--- X(1) --- VALUE FOR 1ST VARIABLE FOR
KTH OBSERVATION VECTOR
--- X(2) --- VALUE FOR 2ND VARIABLE FOR
KTH OBSERVATION VECTOR
.
.
.
--- X(N) --- VALUE OF LAST VARIABLE FOR
KTH OBSERVATION VECTOR
NOTE: IF INPUT = 2, THE OBSERVATION VECTOR DATA TAPE MUST BE READ
AGAIN IN ORDER TO COMPUTE BACK SOLUTIONS. A SIMPLE METHOD IS TO
DUPLICATE THE X(I) DATA AND APPEND THE COPY TO THE ORIGINAL
DATA TAPE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X08701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GCS48
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MULTIPLE CORRELATION MATRIX
**REVISION?
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES THE MEAN, STANDARD DEVIATION, AND PEARSON'S
CORRELATION COEFFICIENT (R) FOR 2 TO 52 VARIABLES. THERE IS NO LIMIT
ON THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER VARIABLE. THE DISTINGUISHING FEATURE
OF THE PROGRAM IS THAT THE COMPUTED CORRELATIONS ARE FURNISHED IN
MATRIX FORM WITH VARIABLE NUMBERS LISTED, MAKING IT EASY TO IDENTIFY
VALUES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM IS DESIGNED TO HANDLE FROM 2 TO 52 VARIABLES WITH NO LIMIT
ON THE NUMBER OF OBSERVATIONS PER VARIABLE. THE INPUT DATA MAY
BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED BY THE USER VIA THE
READ SUBROUTINE.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
INPUT REQUIREMENTS COL. VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
)HEADER 01-72 FREE TEXT
)PARAMETERS 01 ISW1 I1 =0: CALL EXIT
NOT =0: BATCH RUN
02-04 N I3 NUMBER OF VARIABLES
(2 < OR = n < OR = 52)
05-06 MX1 A2 LAST CARD INDICATOR (=**).
USED TO TERMINATE READING OF
A PARTICULAR DATA SET.
(3)DATA (ONE SET OF RECORDS FOR THE ITH OBSERVATION OVER ALL VARIABLES)
CARDS 1, ..., I --- V(I) --- 1ST VALUES FOR VARIABLES.
1, ..., N
CARDS I+1, ..., J --- V(I) --- 2ND VALUES FOR VARIABLES.
1, ..., N
.
.
.
CARDS 1, .., M --- V(I) --- NTH VALUES FOR VARIABLES.
1, ..., N
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X08801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC55B
**PROGRAM TITLE:
NONLINEAR REGRESSION OF A SINGLE-VARIABLE FUNCTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS NONLINEAR LEAST SQUARES REGRESSION ON A SINGLE
VARIABLE FUNCTION. THE PROGRAM CAN OPERATE ON ANY REGRESSION MODEL
WHICH FORTRAN FUNCTIONS CAN BE WRITTEN FOR EVALUATION OF THE PARTIALS
OF THE REGRESSION MODEL WITH RESPECT TO ITS REGRESSION COEFFICIENTS.
A USER-WRITTEN PROGRAM IS REQUIRED FOR EVALUATION OF THE FUNCTION AND
FIRST PARTIALS. A MAXIMUM OF THREE INDEPENDENT VARIABLES AND ONE
DEPENDENT VARIABLE CAN BE HANDLED, AND A MAXIMUM OF 150 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS
MAY BE ENTERED PER RUN.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF THREE INDEPENDENT VARIABLES,
ONE DEPENDENT VARIABLE, AND WILL ESTIMATE A MAXIMUM OF SIX REGRESSION
PARAMETERS. A MAXIMUM OF 150(X,Y) DATA PAIRS MAY BE ENTERED PER RUN.
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
THE PROGRAM REQUIRES A USER-WRITTEN SUBPROGRAM TO EVALUATE THE FUNCTION
AND ITS FIRST PARTIALS. THE SUBPROGRAM FUNCTION F (INDEX, IH) EVALUATES
THE FUNCTION INVOLVED IN THE PROGRAM OR ITS PARTIALS WITH RESPECT TO THE
VARIOUS PARAMETERS. FOR EXAMPLE, IF THE FUNCTION INVOLVED IS
F(Y) = A*EXP(B*T) + C*EXP(D*T)
WHERE: A,B,C, AND D ARE PARAMETERS TO BE ESTIMATED
FOR INDEX=0, THE FUNCTION EVALUATES THE REGRESSION MODEL WITH RESPECT
TO A, B, C, AND D RESPECTIVELY. IH INDICATES WHICH SET OF X'S TO USE
IN THE EVALUATION.
INPUT REQUIREMENTS C C VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
(1)HEADER CARD 01-72 FREE TEXT
(2)PARAMETER CARD #1 01-05 NSD 15 TOTAL NUMBER OF SETS OF
06-10 NRTH 15 DATA NUMBER OF PARAMETERS
TO BE ESTIMATED IN
REGRESSION MODEL
(NRTH < OR =6)
(3)I.D. CARD 01-72 FREE TEXT (MAY DENOTE
NAME OF FUNCTION BEING
EVALUATED)
(4)PARAMETER CARD #2 01-05 NRX 15 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA
PAIRS IN THE SET (NRX <
OR =150)
(5)TOLERANCE CARD 01-14 TOL E14.8 ACCURACY REQUIREMENT FOR
ITERATIONS
NOTE: .10000000E-04 IS USED, ITERATION WILL STOP AS SOON AS 2
SUCCESSIVE ITERATIONS HAVE IDENTICAL VALUES FOR THE FIRST FOUR
SIGNIFICANT NUMBERS.
(6)ESTIMATE CARDS (ONE CARD FOR EACH PARAMETER)
01-14 PARAMETERS
TO BE E14.8 INITIAL ESTIMATE OF THE
ESTIMATED ITH REGRESSION PARAMETER
(7)DATA CARDS (ONE CARD PER (X,Y) DATA PAIR)
--- Y(J) --- JTH VALUE OF Y
--- X(I,J) --- VALUES OF X(I=1,...,3)
FOR THE JTH INDEPENDENT
VARIABLE.
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER TAPE
AND TELETYPE REQUIREMENTS WILL BE SIMILAR TO THE CARD INPUT REQUIRE-
MENTS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE "READ" SUBROUTINE AND FUNCTION "F" MAY BE MODIFIED TO SUIT THE
USER.
CORRECTIONS TO A STARTING VECTOR OF THE PARAMETER VALUES ARE COMPUTED
BY ITERATION CYCLES UNTIL THE CORRECTIONS MAKE LITTLE OR NO CHANGE
(WITHIN A SPECIFIED TOLERANCE) IN THE ERROR SUM OF SQUARES. IT SHOULD
BE POINTED OUT THAT EVEN THE FINAL ERROR SUM OF SQUARES MAY BE QUITE
LARGE IF THE DATA DOES NOT FIT THE DESIRED MODEL WELL.
IF THE ITERATION DOES NOT CONVERGE TO AN ACCEPTABLE SOLUTION:
1. PICK CLOSER STARTING VALUES FOR THE PARAMETERS AND RUN AGAIN.
2. SET TOLERANCE FOR ACCEPTABLE ERROR SUM OF SQUARES LARGER AND RUN
AGAIN.
A COMBINATION OF THESE 2 POSSIBILITIES WOULD PROBABLY OFFER THE BEST
SOLUTION.
X08901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GC55C
**PROGRAM TITLE:
NONLINEAR REGRESSION OF AN ARBITRARY FUNCTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PERFORMS NONLINEAR LEAST SQUARES REGRESSION ON AN
ARBITRARY FUNCTION. THE PROGRAM CAN OPERATE ON ANY REGRESSION MODEL
FOR WHICH FORTRAN FUNCTIONS CAN BE WRITTEN FOR EVALUATION OF THE
PARTIALS OF THE REGRESSION MODEL WITH RESPECT TO ITS REGRESSION
COEFFICIENTS. (A USER-WRITTEN PROGRAM IS REQUIRED FOR EVALUATION
OF THE FUNCTION AND ITS FIRST PARTIALS.) A MAXIMUM OF THREE
INDEPENDENT VARIABLES AND ONE DEPENDENT VARIABLE CAN BE HANDLED, AND
A MAXIMUM OF 150 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS MAY BE ENTERED PER RUN.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM WILL HANDLE A MAXIMUM OF THREE INDEPENDENT VARIABLES, ONE
DEPENDENT VARIABLE, AND WILL ESTIMATE A MAXIMUM OF SIX REGRESSION
PARAMETERS. A MAXIMUM OF 150 (X,Y) DATA PAIRS MAY BE ENTERED PER RUN.
THE INPUT DATA MAY BE ENTERED IN ANY FORM, THE FORMAT BEING SPECIFIED
BY THE USER VIA THE READ SUBROUTINE.
THE PROG REQUIRES A USER-WRITTEN SUBPROGRAM TO EVALUATE THE FUNCTION
F(Y) = A*EXP(B*T) + C*EXP(D*T)
WHERE: A,B,C,D = PARAMETERS TO BE ESTIMATED
FOR INDEX=0, THE FUNCTION EVALUATES THE REGRESSION MODEL. FOR INDEX=1,
2, 3, OR 4, THE FUNCTION EVALUATES THE PARTIAL OF THE REGRESSION MODEL
WITH RESPECT TO A, B, C, AND D RESPECTIVELY. IH INDICATES WHICH SET
TO USE IN THE EVALUATION.
INPUT REQUIREMENTS C C VARIABLE FORMAT DESCRIPTION
(1)HEADER CARD 01-72 FREE TEXT
(2)PARAMETER CARD #1 01-05 NSD 15 TOTAL NUMBER OF SETS
06-10 15 OF DATA NUMBER OF
PARAMETERS TO BE
ESTIMATED IN
REGRESSION MODEL
(NRTH < OR =6)
(3)I.D. CARD 01-72 FREE TEXT (MAY DENOTE
NAME OF FUNCTION
BEING EVALUATED)
(4)PARAMETER CARD #2 01-05 NRX 15 NUMBER OF (X,Y) DATA
PAIRS IN THE SET(NRX
< OR =150)
(5)TOLERANCE CARD 01-14 TOL E14.8 ACCURACY REQUIREMENT
FOR ITERATIONS
NOTE: IF .10000000E-04 IS USED, ITERATION WILL STOP AS SOON AS 2
SUCCESSIVE ITERATIONS HAVE IDENTICAL VALUES FOR THE FIRST FOUR
SIGNIFICANT NUMBERS.
(6)ESTIMATE CARD (ONE CARD FOR EACH PARAMETER)
01-14 PARAMETER E14.8 INITIAL ESTIMATES OF
TO BE THE ITH REGRESSION
ESTIMATED PARAMETER.
(7)DATA CARDS (ONE CARD PER (X,Y) DATA PAIR)
--- Y(J) --- JTH VALUE OF Y
--- X(I,J) --- VALUES OF X(I=1,...,3)
FOR THE JTH INDEPEN-
DENT VARIABLE
SINCE THIS PROGRAM WAS ADAPTED FROM A CARD INPUT FORMAT, THE PAPER
TAPE INPUT REQUIREMENTS ARE SIMILAR TO THE CARD INPUT REQUIREMENTS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
READ SUBROUTINE WHICH IS SUPPLIED WITH SOURCE TAPE AND MAY BE USER
MODIFIED TO CONFORM TO AVAILABLE DATA.
FUNCTION F WHICH HAS A SAMPLE VERSION SUPPLIED WITH SOURCE TAPE AND
CAN BE DEFINED ACCORDING TO USER'S REQUIREMENTS.
CORRECTIONS TO A STARTING VECTOR OF THE PARAMETER VALUES ARE COMPUTED
BY ITERATION CYCLES UNTIL THE CORRECTIONS MAKE LITTLE OR NO CHANGE
WITHIN A SPECIFIED TOLERANCE) IN THE ERROR SUM OF SQUARES. IT SHOULD
BE POINTED OUT THAT EVEN THE FINAL ERROR SUM OF SQUARES MAY BE QUITE
LARGE IF THE DATA DOES NOT FIT THE DESIRED MODEL WELL.
IF THE ITERATION DOES NOT CONVERGE TO AN ACCEPTABLE SOLUTION:
1. PICK CLOSER STARTING VALUES FOR THE PARAMETERS AND RUN AGAIN.
2. SET TOLERANCE FOR ACCEPTABLE ERROR SUM OF SQUARES LARGER AND RUN
AGAIN.
A COMBINATION OF THESE 2 POSSIBILITIES WOULD PROBABLY OFFER THE BEST
SOLUTION.
X09001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FRIER
**PROGRAM TITLE:
GENERAL FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FOURIER TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE EMPLOYS AN EFFICIENT ALGORITHM FOR FINDING THE FOURIER
TRANSFORM OF A FUNCTION. THE EXPRESSION EVALUATED IS:
N-1 -JIN 2(PI)/N
F(N) = 1/N SUM F(I)E
I=0
WHERE THE F(I) ARE IN GENERAL COMPLEX. THE COOLEY-TURKEY ALGORITHM
IS USED, OFFERING LARGE SAVINGS IN TIME AND STORAGE OVER OTHER
METHODS. THE NUMBER OF INPUT DATA MUST BE AN INTEGER POWER OF TWO,
AND THE DATA MUST BE COMPLEX.
INVERSE TRANSFORMS CAN ALSO BE TAKEN WITH THIS ROUTINE. THE INVERSE
TRANSFORM IS:
N-1 JIN 2(PI)/N
F(I) = SUM F(N)E
N=0
THE ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL FRIER (X,Y,IG)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
X REAL THE REAL PART OF THE FIRST COMPLEX NUMBER IN THE
ARRAY X (DIMENSIONED APPROPRIATELY IN THE CALLING
PROGRAM).
Y REAL THE IMAGINARY PART OF THE FIRST COMPLEX NUMBER
IN THE ARRAY Y (DIMENSIONED APPROPRIATELY IN
THE CALLING PROGRAM).
IG INTEGER IG=LOG(2) (NUMBER OF COMPLEX DATA INPUT VALUES),
IE, LETTING IG=3 IMPLIES THERE ARE 8 COMPLEX
INPUT VALUES. THERE MUST BE AN INTEGER POWER
OF 2 INPUT VALUES.
NOTE: THE TRANSFORM IS THEN TAKEN AND PRINTED OUT AS:
HARMONIC NUMBER REAL PART IMAGINARY PART
CALL IMAGE IS AUTOMATICALLY REFERENCED BY FRIER.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
FRIER DOES NO I/O. THE USER MUST MAKE HIS OWN ALTERATIONS TO THE
PROGRAM TO FIND THE INVERSE TRANSFORM.
X09101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
EIGENVALUES OF A SYMMETRIC REAL MATRIX
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
DEPENDENT ON MATRIX SIZE
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE USES HOUSEHOLDER'S METHOD AND THE QR ALGORITHM TO FIND
ALL EIGENVALUES OF A SYMMETRIC MATRIX.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SYMQR3
PARAMETER DESCRIPTION
N INTEGER, ORDER (SIZE) OF THE MATRIX.
G REAL ARRAY, THE MATRIX OF ORDER N WHOSE EIGENVALUES
ARE TO BE FOUND. THE EIGENVALUES WILL REPLACE THE
DIAGONAL ELEMENTS.
DECLARATION REQUIRED IN CALLING PROGRAM:
PROCEDURE SYMQR3(N, G);
VALUE N; INTEGER N; REAL ARRAY G; CODE;
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ACCURACY: THE EIGENVALUE OF LARGEST MAGNITUDE IS USUALLY GOOD TO SIX
SIGNIFICANT DIGITS WITH ACCURACY DECREASING FOR SMALERLER
EIGENVALUES. EIGENVALUES SMALLER THAN 10**-6 TIMES THE
LARGEST WILL CONTAIN NO CORRECT DIGITS.
TIME: ABOUT 2 SECONDS FOR N = 10 (HP2116B).
X09201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RANDM
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PSEUDO RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
RANDOM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FORTRAN CALLABLE ROUTINE PRODUCES 32-BIT RANDOM NUMBERS BETWEEN
0.000000 AND 0.999999. IF THE ROUTINE IS REPEATED, THE SAME NUMBERS
ARE PRODUCED IN THE SAME SEQUENCE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
A FORTRAN SAMPLE CALLING PROGRAM IS PROVIDED. IT REQUIRES A TELETYPE
TO COMMUNICATE WITH THE OPERATOR. THE FORTRAN CALLING PROGRAM ASKS THE
OPERATOR "HOW MANY RANDOM NUMBERS?" THE OPERATOR SHOULD RESPOND BY
TYPING IN ANY POSITIVE NUMBER, FREE FIELD INPUT. THE FORTRAN PROGRAM
CALLS THE RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR, PRINTS THE RESULT AND LOOPS THROUGH
THIS SEQUENCE UNTIL THE SPECIFIED NUMBER HAS BEEN PRINTED. THE
OPERATION MAY THEN BE REPEATED. THE RANDOM NUMBERS WILL BE DIFFERENT
UNTIL THE PROGRAM IS RELOADED, OR LOCATIONS "XL" AND "XH" ARE MANUALLY
RESET TO OCT 1 AND 0 RESPECTIVELY. THEN THE SAME RANDOM NUMBER SEQUENCE
WILL APPEAR.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
FORTRAN: CALL RANDM(X)
ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE:
EXT RANDM
X BSS 2
.
.
.
JSB RANDM
DEF *+2 RETURN ADDRESS
DEF X RESULT ADDRESS
X IS A FLOATING POINT NUMBER.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A, B, E, AND POSSIBLY THE O REGISTERS ARE ALL USED AND THEIR CONTENTS
NOT RESTORED.
X09301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: FOURT
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FOURIER TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE FINDS THE FOURIER TRANSFORM OF COMPLEX, MULTI-DIMENSIONAL,
COMPLEX DATA.
TRANSFORM (K1, K2,...)=SUM(DATAJ1,J2...)
*EXP(ISIGN*2* PI*
SQRT(-1)*((J1-1)*
(K1-1)/NN(1)+(J2-1)
(K2-1)/NN(2)+...)))
THIS QUANTITY IS SUMMED FOR ALL J1, K1 BETWEEN 1 AND NN(1), J2K2
BETWEEN 1 AND NN(2), ETC. THERE IS NO LIMIT TO THE NUMBER OF K'S
(I.E., NO LIMIT ON THE NUMBER OF DIMENSIONS). ALSO, THERE IS NO
RESTRICTION ON THE LENGTH OF THE DIMENSIONS, ALTHOUGH THE PROGRAM
RUNS FASTER WHEN THE LENGTHS ARE COMPOSITE INTEGERS, AND ESPECIALLY
FAST WHEN THE LENGTHS ARE POWERS OF TWO.
BOTH FORWARD (ISIGN=-1) AND INVERSE (ISIGN=+1) TRANSFORMS CAN BE
CALCULATED. IF A -1 TRANSFORM IS FOLLOWED BY A +1 TRANSFORM, THE
ORIGINAL DATA WILL REAPPEAR MULTIPLIED BY NTOT=(NN(1)*NN(2)*...).
THE ROUTINE PLACES THE FOLLOWING RESTRICTIONS ON INPUT DATA AND
TRANSFORM VALUES:
A. THE NUMBER OF INPUT DATA AND THE NUMBER OF TRANSFORM VALUES MUST
BE THE SAME.
B. BOTH THE INPUT DATA AND THE TRANSFORM VALUES MUST REPRESENT
EQUISPACED POINTS IN THEIR RESPECTIVE DOMAINS OF TIME AND
FREQUENCY, CALLING THESE SPACINGS DELTAT AND DETAF, IT MUST BE
TRUE THAT DELTAF = 2*P1/[NN(I)*DELTAT]. OF COURSE, DELTAT NEED NOT
BE THE SAME FOR EVERY DIMENSION.
C. CONCEPTUALLY, AT LEAST, THE INPUT DATA AND THE TRANSFORMER OUTPUT
REPRESENT SINGLE CYCLES OF PERIODIC FUNCTIONS.
THE ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
CALL FOURT (DATA,NN,NDIM,ISIGN,IFORM,WORK)
DATA...AS INPUT, DATA IS A MULTIDIMENSIONAL COMPLEX ARRAY (NUMBER OF
DIMENSIONS=NDIM) CONTAINING THE COMPLEX DATA TO BE
TRANSFORMED. (THE REAL PART OF EACH COMPLEX POINT IS FOLLOWED
IMMEDIATELY IN THE ARRAY BY ITS IMAGINARY PART.) AS OUTPUT
DATA RETURNS THE MULTIDIMENSIONAL, COMPLEX FOURIER TRANSFORM.
NN.....AN ARRAY OF DIMENSION NDIM. THE LENGTHS OF THE DIMENSIONS
ARE STORED IN NN. THESE LENGTHS MUST BE POSITIVE INTEGERS.
NDIM...THE NUMBER OF DIMENSIONS OF ARRAY DATA.
ISIGN..AN INTEGER PARAMETER WITH THE FOLLOWING VALUES AND MEANINGS:
-1 THE FORWARD TRANSFORM IS CALCULATED
+1 THE INVERSE TRANSFORM IS CALCULATED
IFORM..AN INTEGER PARAMETER WITH THE FOLLOWING VALUES AND MEANINGS:
0 ALL IMAGINARY PARTS OF DATA ARE ZERO
+1 OTHERWISE
WORK...A COMPLEX ARRAY TO BE MADE AVAILABLE BY THE USER IF ALL
DIMENSIONS OF ARRAY DATA ARE NOT POWERS OF TWO. THE LENGTH
OF ARRAY WORK IS EQUAL TO THE LENGTH OF THE LARGEST DIMENSION
WHICH IS NOT A POWER OF TWO. IF ALL DIMENSIONS ARE POWERS OF
TWO, REPLACE WORK BY ZERO IN THE CALLING SEQUENCE.
NOTE: TO FORM A COMPLEX ARRAY OF LENGTH M FROM A REAL ARRAY OF LENGTH
2M, PLACE THE REAL PARTS OF THE DATA IN THE ODD-NUMBERED
LOCATIONS AND THE IMAGINARY PARTS IN THE EVEN-NUMBERED LOCATIONS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
RUNNING TIME IS MUCH SHORTER THAN THE NAIVE NTOT**2, BEING GIVEN BY THE
FOLLOWING FORMULA, DECOMPOSE NTOT INTO 2**K2 * 3**K3 * 5**K5 * ....
LET SUM2 = 2*K2, SUMF = 3*K3 + 5*K5 +... AND NF = K3 + K5+ .... THE
TIME TAKEN BY A MULTIDIMENSIONAL TRANSFORM ON THESE NTOT DATA IS T=TO
+ NTOT*(T1+T2*SUM2+T3*SUMF+T4*NF). ON THE CDC 3300 (FLOATING POINT ADD
TIME OF SIX MICROSECONDS), T = 3000 + NTOT*(500+43*SUM2+68*SUMF+320*NF)
MICROSECONDS ON COMPLEX DATA. IN ADDITION, THE ACCURACY IS GREATLY
IMPROVED. AS THE RMS RELATIVE ERROR IS BOUNDED BY 3*0**(-B)*SUM(FACTOR
(J)**1.5), WHERE B IS THE NUMBER OF BITS IN THE FLOATING POINT FRACTION
AND FACTOR (J) ARE THE PRIME FACTORS OF NTOT.
X09401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LINEAR LEAST SQUARES PROBLEM SOLVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
LINEAR EQ. MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2114
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
ALGOL CALLABLE, THIS PROCEDURE SOLVES THE LINEAR LEAST SQUARES PROBLEM:
||A(X) - B||(2) = MINIMUM
WHERE || ||(2) INDICATES THE EUCLIDEAN NORM AND A IS AN M BY N
(M > OR = H) REAL MATRIX OR RANK N. A MATRIX DECOMPOSITION BASED ON
ORTHOGONAL HOUSEHOLDER TRANSFORMATIONS IS USED, RATHER THAN SOLVING
THE NORMAL EQUATIONS A(TRANSPOSED)A(X) = A(TRANSPOSED) B.
MANY VECTORS, B, MAY BE GIVEN FOR SOLUTION WITH INCREASED EFFICIENCY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL: LSQ1 (MODE, A, X, B, M, N, AXBNRM, SING);
PARAMETERS TYPE DESCRIPTION
MODE INTEGER SEE BELOW
A REAL TWO DIMENSION ARRAY CONTAINING THE
ARRAY COEFFICIENTS OF THE OVERDETERMINED
SYSTEM.
X REAL A VECTOR WHERE THE SOLUTION WILL BE
ARRAY STORED.
B REAL THE RIGHT HAND SIDE VECTOR.
ARRAY
M,N INTEGER THE NUMBER OF ROWS (EQUATIONS) AND THE
NUMBER OF COLUMNS (UNKNOWNS) OF A.
AXBNRM REAL THE CONDITION NUMBER OR THE MINIMUM
NORM (SEE BELOW).
SING LABEL AN ERROR RETURN TAKEN IF THE COLUMNS
OF A ARE DEPENDENT.
PROGRAM DESCRIPTION: THE GENERAL LINEAR LEAST SQUARE PROBLEM MAY BE
STATED AS FINDING THAT LINEAR COMBINATION OF FIXED VECTORS WHICH BEST
APPROXIMATES A GIVEN VECTOR; THAT IS, TO MINIMIZE THE DISTANCE
(MEASURED BY A NORM) BETWEEN; N AND THE VECTOR B, WHERE THE
SUM X(J)*ALPHA(J)
J=1
ALPHA(J) ARE THE FIXED VECTORS. IN LEAST SQUARES APPROXIMATION THE
NORM IS THE EUCLIDEAN VECTOR NORM
2 M 2
NORM(Y) = SUM Y
2 I=1 I
LET THE ALPH(J) AND B VECTORS BE IN M-SPACE AND LET THE ELEMENTS OF
ALPHA(J) BE A(1J), A(2J),...,A(MJ), THEN THE LINEAR COMBINATION
MENTIONED ABOVE CAN BE WRITTEN AS AN MXN MATRIX "A" TIMES A VECTOR OF
UNKNOWNS "X" AND THE LEAST SQUARES PROBLEM IS SIMPLY
NORM(AX - B) = MINIMUM
2
WHEN THE VECTORS ALPHA(J) ARE LINEARLY INDEPENDENT THE RANK OF A IS N.
LEAST SQUARES MAY BE APPLIED TO SOLVING SYSTEMS OF M LINEAR EQUATIONS
WITH N UNKNOWNS M > OR =N, AN OVERDETERMINED SYSTEM, BY FINDING A
SOLUTION WHICH MINIMIZES THE ERROR AX -B, SINCE THE EQUATIONS HAVE NO
UNIQUE SOLUTION AND POSSIBLY HAVE NO SOLUTION.
MODE = 0: THE MATRIX STORED IN A IS DECOMPOSED AND ITS APPROXIMATE
CONDITION NUMBER IS STORED IN AXBNRM. THE ARRAYS A AND X
ARE DISTURBED, B IS IGNORED.
MODE = 1: THE LEAST SQUARES PROBLEM IS SOLVED USING THE DECOMPOSED
MATRIX FROM MODE =0. THE VECTOR X CONTAINS THE SOLUTION
AND AXBNRM CONTAINS THE ERROR NORM (AX -B). B IS
IGNORED. 2
THE PROCEDURE MAY BE CALLED ANY NUMBER OF TIMES WITH MODE =1 (FOR
DIFFERENT B'S) AFTER ONE CALL WITH MODE =0.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR CONDITIONS AND MESSAGES: IF AT ANY STAGE OF THE DECOMPOSITION
OF A THE NORM OF THE NEXT COLUMN TO BE REDUCED IS EXACTLY ZERO
INDICATING THAT THE MATRIX A APPARENTLY HAS RANK <N, THEN AXBNRM IS
SET TO -1 AND CONTROL TRANSFERRED TO LABEL CORRESPONDING TO SING.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THERE ARE MORE EFFICIENT METHODS THAN LSSQ1 TO DO POLYNOMIAL LEAST
SQUARES FITTING. AS AN EXAMPLE OF A MORE GENERAL PROBLEM, SUPPOSE
THAT THE 10 DATA POINTS (F(I), T(I)) ARE TO BE APPROXIMATED BY THE
FUNCTION:
F(T) = P + QE**LT + R SINOT, WHERE L AND O ARE KNOWN (IT WOULD
NOT BE LINEAR LEAST SQUARES OTHERWISE) AND P, Q AND R ARE TO BE
FOUND. THE PROBLEM SET UP IS:
A * X B
. T . . . . .
. 1, E 1, SIN T(1). .P. .F(1) .
. . . . . .
. T . . . . .
. 1, E 2, SIN T(2). .Q. = .F(2) .
. . . . . .
. . .R. . .
. T . . . . .
. 1, E 10,SIN T(10. . . .F(10).
WITH M = 10. AND N = 3. AFTER TWO CALLS TO LSSQ1 (MODE = 0 AND 1),
P IS X(1), Q IS X(2), AND R IS X(3).
IN THE PROCEDURE LSSQ1, M, N < OR =15, BUT IF MEMORY SIZE PERMITS MAY
BE CHANGED IN THE DECLARATION OF ALPHA, Y AND PIVOT.
X09501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: EXPRE
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BCS EXTENDED PRECISION ARITHMETIC
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PRECISION LIBRARY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS GROUP OF BCS ROUTINES PROVIDES THE CAPABILITY FOR EXTENDED-
PRECISION ADDITION, SUBTRACTION, MULTIPLICATION, AND DIVISION. ALSO
PROVIDED ARE FACILITIES FOR EXTENDED-PRECISION I/O OPERATIONS.
THE ROUTINES ARE FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DP
1) DP IS CALLED IMMEDIATELY BEFORE EACH WRITE- OR READ- STATEMENT TO
MODIFY THE FORTRAN-CALLING-SEQUENCE FROM INTEGER ARRAY TO EXT.
PREC.-ARRAY.
EXAMPLE:
DIMENSION IA (3), IX (6)
.
.
.
CALL DP (IA,1) IA,IX=NAME OF EXT.PREC.ARRAY
READ (1,10) IA 1,2=LENGTH " " " "
.
.
.
CALL DP (IX,2)
WRITE (2,20) IX
.
.
10 FORMAT (D15.9)
20 FORMAT (2G15.9)
.
.
2) DA (ADDITION)
3) DS (SUBTRACTION)
4) DM (MULTIPLICATION)
5) DD (DIVISION)
EXAMPLE:
DIMENSION IZ (3),IX (3), IY (3)
.
.
.
CALL DA (IZ,IX,IY) ADD
CALL DS (IZ,IX,IY) SUB IZ = RESULT
CALL DM (IZ,IX,IY) MPY
CALL DD (IZ,IX,IY) DIV
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X09601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COMPLEX MATH PACKAGE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
COMPLEX STORAGE CONVERSION
FLOATING POINT
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM OFFERS FUNDAMENTAL COMPLEX-MATHEMATICS CAPABILITIES FOR
FLOATING POINT NUMBERS AND FOR NUMBERS IN A SPECIAL PACKED FORMAT WHICH
MAKES EFFICIENT USE OF STORAGE SPACE. THE RESOLUTION OF THE PACKED
NUMBER IS APPROXIMATELY 0.025 PERCENT (12 SIGNIFICANT BITS).
IN FLOATING POINT FORMAT, ADDITION, SUBTRACTION, MULTIPLICATION, AND
DIVISION CAN BE PERFORMED, REFERENCING DIRECTLY THE PACKED NUMBERS
AS ARGUMENTS. THE CAPABILITY TO CONVERT TO POLAR FORM, AND TO CONVERT
TO AND FROM PACKED FORMAT, ARE INCLUDED.
THIS PROGRAM IS FORTRAN AND ALGOL CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SAVE3 IS USED TO PACK AND UNPACK COMPLEX NUMBERS INTO AND FROM A
CONVENIENT TWO-WORD FORMAT FOR EFFICIENT USE OF STORAGE AREA. THE
RESOLUTION OF THE MAGNITUDE OF THE COMPLEX NUMBER IS 12 BITS, OR .025%.
THE FORMAT IS:
15 14 3 2 1
+ M MANTISSA L + M
P - S OF S - S
B REAL PART B B
MANTISSA OF L M L
P+1 IMAGINARY S S EXP S +
PART B B B -
BITS 15 6 5 1 0
THE SINGLE EXPONENT SCALES BOTH MANTISSAS. FOR THE LARGER OF THE TWO
MANTISSAS, THE MSB IS 2**-1 (BEFORE SCALING) AND THE SMALLER MANTISSA
IS RIGHT SHIFTED SUCH THAT THE MSB IS 2**-1 (BEFORE SCALING). THEREFORE
THE SINGLE EXPONENT CORRECTLY SCALES BOTH MANTISSAS WHEN UNPACKING THIS
SPECIAL FORMAT.
A COMPLEX NUMBER IS PACKED INTO THE SPECIAL FORMAT BY MEANS OF A FTOP3
CALL WITH THREE ARGUMENTS. THE REAL AND IMAGINARY PARTS (FLOATING
POINT) ARE SPECIFIED BY THE FIRST TWO ARGUMENTS AND THE STORAGE LOCATION
(TWO WORDS) FOR THE PACKED NUMBER IS SPECIFIED BY THE THIRD ARGUMENT.
IN A SIMILAR MANNER, A PACKED NUMBER MAY BE UNPACKED BY MEANS OF A
PTOF3 CALL WHERE THE FIRST ARGUMENT SPECIFIES THE PACKED NUMBER AND THE
SECOND AND THIRD ARGUMENTS SPECIFY THE REAL AND IMAGINARY PARTS
RESPECTIVELY.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
1. FORTRAN
CALL FTOP3(XR,XI,C1) (FLOATING POINT TO PACKED)
CALL PTOF3(C1,ZR,ZI) (PACKED TO FLOATING POINT)
(XR=ZR & XI=ZI)
2. ASSEMBLY
EXT PTOF3, FTOP3
JSB FTOP3
DEF *+4
DEF XR
DEF XI
DEF CI
.
.
.
XR BSS2
X1 BSS2
C1 BSS2.
PARAMETER DEFINITION:
1. FTOP3 (XR,XI,C1)
XR: FLOATING POINT, REAL PART OF THE COMPLEX NO. RX=XR+JXI.
XI: FLOATING POINT, IMAGINARY PART OF THE COMPLEX NO. RX=XR+JXI.
CI: ADDRESS OF TWO WORD STORAGE AREA FOR THE PACKED FORMAT
REPRESENTATION OF THE COMPLEX NUMBER XR+JXI.
2. PTOF3(C1,XR,XI)
C1: SAME AS C1 ABOVE.
XR: SAME AS XR ABOVE, THE "UNPACKED" REAL PART OF C1.
XI: SAME AS X1 ABOVE, THE "UNPACKED" IMAGINARY PART OF C1.
NOTE: 1) THIS SUBROUTINE IS THE FUNDAMENTAL SUBROUTINE OF THE COMPLEX
MATH PACKAGE WHICH INCLUDES: CPLX3, PSFT3, SHYZ3, AND SAVF3.
2) IN FTOP3, C1 MAY BE THE SAME AS XR, OR XI; ALSO IN PTOF3, XR
OR XI MAY BE THE SAME AS C1.
THE ALGORITHMS USED TO CALCULATE THE COMPLEX RESULTS FOR BOTH PACKED
AND FULL FLOATING POINT FORMATS ARE THE SAME, THE DIFFERENCE BEING
FOUND IN THAT THE ARGUMENTS IN THE PACKED FORMAT ARE UNPACKED INTO
FLOATING POINT, THE OPERATION CARRIED OUT, AND THE RESULT REPACKED INTO
PACKED FORMAT WHEREAS THE ARGUMENTS IN FULL FLOATING POINT CAN BE
OPERATED ON DIRECTLY USING THE ALGORITHMS BELOW.
THE ALGORITHMS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
1. ADDITION:
[R1+JX1] + [R2+JX2] = (R1+R2) + (X1+X2)J = R3+JX3
2. SUBTRACTION:
[R1+JX2] - (R2+JX2) = (R1-R2) + J(X1-X2) = R3+JX3
3. MULTIPLICATION:
[R1+JX1] * [R2+JX2] = [R1*R2+X1*X2] + J[R1*X2+R2*X1] = R3+JX3
4. DIVISION:
[R1+JX1] [R1+JX1] [R2-JX2] [R1*R2+X1*X2] [R2*X1-R1*X2]
-------- ----------------- ------------- -------------
[R2+JX2] [R2+JX2] [R2-JX2] [R2**2+X2**2] [R2**2+X2**2]
= R3+JX3
PACK AND UNPACK ALGORITHMS:
1. CPAK3: C1, C2 [IN FULL FLOATING POINT FORMAT] ARE THE REAL AND
IMAGINARY PARTS RESPECTIVELY, AND THEY ARE CONVERTED TO PACKED
FORMAT AND STORED IN C3 [EG. CALL CPAK3 [C1,C2,C3]].
2. CUPK3: C1 IS IN PACKED FORMAT AND IS UNPACKED INTO C2,C3 WHICH
ARE THE REAL AND IMAGINARY PARTS RESPECTIVELY, [EG. CALL CUPK3
[C1,C2,C3]]. [THE ALGORITHMS FOR CPAK3 AND CUPK3 CAN BE FOUND
IN SAVE3 DOCUMENTATION].
3. CPAK1: C1,C2 ARE REAL AND IMAGINARY PARTS RESPECTIVELY EACH OF
WHICH ARE IN FULL FLOATING POINT FORMAL. THEY ARE STORED CONSECU-
TIVELY IN C3 WHICH MUST BE DIMENSIONED AS 2 FLOATING POINT LOCATIONS
[4 WORDS] [EG. CALL CPAK1 (C1,C2,C3)].
4. CUPK1: C1 CONTAINS IN 4 CONSECUTIVE LOCATIONS THE REAL AND
IMAGINARY PARTS OF THE COMPLEX NUMBER. THESE ARE UNPACKED
RESPECTIVELY INTO C2 AND C3 [EG. CALL CUPK1 (C1,C2,C3)].
POLAR CONVERSION:
1. CPOL3: C1 (IN PACKED FORMAT) IS UNPACKED INTO REAL AND IMAGINARY
COMPONENTS X2 AND Y2 AND THEN CONVERTED INTO POLAR FORM WHERE V
IS MAGNITUDE AND A IS ANGLE IN DEGREES [EG. CALL CPOL3 (C1,V,A)].
2. CPOL1: [IN CPAK1 FORMAT] IS UNPACKED INTO REAL AND IMAGINARY
COMPONENTS X2 AND Y2 AND THEN CONVERTED INTO POLAR FORM WHERE
AGAIN V IS MAGNITUDE AND A IS ANGLE IN DEGREES.
BOTH POLAR ROUTINES USED THE FOLLOWING MATHEMATICAL ALGORITHM ONCE C1
HAS BEEN PROPERLY UNPACKED INTO ITS REAL AND IMAGINARY COMPONENTS
[X2 AND Y2].
V = [X2*X2+Y2*Y2]**1/2
T1 = 57.2957 * ATAN (X2/Y2)
IF X2>0 THEN A=T1
IF [Y2<0] THEN A = T1-180.0
IF [Y2>0] THEN A = T1+180.0
STORE V AND A.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
1. FORTRAN
PACKED FORMAT:
CALL CADD3 [C1,C2,C3] (C3=C1+C2)
FULL FLOATING POINT FORMAT:
.
.
.
DIMENSION C1(2), C2(2), C3(2)
.
.
.
CALL CADD1 [C1,C2,C3] (C3 = C1+C2)
2. ASSEMBLY:
PACKED FORMAT:
.
.
EXT. CADD3, SAVE3
JSB CADD3
JMP * +4
DEF C1
DEF C2
DEF C3
.
.
.
C1 BSS 2
C2 BSS 2
C3 BSS 2
.
.
FULL FLOATING POINT FORMAT
.
.
.
EXT. CADD1
JSB CADD1
JMP * +1
DEF C1
DEF C2
DEF C3
.
.
.
C1 BSS 4
C2 BSS 4
C3 BSS 4
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
RESOLUTION AND RANGE:
PACKED FORMAT:
MANTISSA RESOLUTION: 12 BIT MANTISSA
RESOLUTION = 1/2**+12 = .00024 FOR ALL X WHERE 1< OR = X < OR = -1
WHEN -1<X<1 THE LARGEST COMPONENT OF THE COMPLEX NUMBER RETAINS
THE RESOLUTION ABOVE, BUT THE SMALLER COMPONENT LOSES RESOLUTION
DEPENDING ON THE NUMBER OF ZEROES PRECEEDING THE FIRST 1 [EG.
.1(10) = [.000110. . .](2); 3 ZEROES]. THE RESOLUTION OF THE
SMALLER COMPONENT IS NOW EQUAL TO [1/(2**(+12-Y))] WHERE Y IS THE
NUMBER OF LEADING ZEROES.
DYNAMIC RANGE:
5 BIT EXPONENT (PLUS SIGN BIT) ALLOWS A DYNAMIC RESOLUTION OF
2**-31 < OR = X < OR = 2**31
FULL FLOATING POINT FORMAT:
MANTISSA RESOLUTION: 23 BIT MATISSA
RESOLUTION = 1/2**23 ~= .0000001192... FOR ALL X WHERE 1 </= X </= -1
WHEN -1 < X < 1 THE LARGEST COMPONENT OF THE COMPLEX NUMBER RETAINS THE
RESOLUTION ABOVE, BUT THE SMALLER COMPONENT LOSES RESOLUTION DEPENDING
ON THE NUMBER OF ZEROES PRECEEDING THE FIRST 1. THE RESOLUTION OF THE
SMALLER COMPONENT IS NOW EQUAL TO [1/(2**(+23-Y))] WHERE Y IS THE NUMBER
OF LEADING ZEROES.
DYNAMIC RANGE:
7 BIT EXPONENT (PLUS SIGN BIT) ALLOWS A DYNAMIC RESOLUTION OF
2**-127 < OR = X < OR = 2**127.
X09701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INVERSE ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ACCEPTS AN ABSOLUTE BINARY PROGRAM TAPE AND CREATES FROM
IT AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE LISTING. WHEN THE INVERSE ASSEMBLER IS USED,
THE NORMAL PHOTOREADER DRIVER IS REPLACED BY AN EQUIVALENT OF THE
BASIC BINARY LOADER.
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS: 8K RELOCATABLE LOADER I/O CONTROL, TELETYPE
DRIVER, BCS TAPE READER DRIVER.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: EAU.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE
2. LOAD WITH BCS
3. POSITION USER'S ABSOLUTE BINARY TAPE IN PHOTOREADER
4. PUSH RUN
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE PROGRAM ACCEPTS AN ABSOLUTE-BINARY TAPE AND RECREATES A PSEUDO-
ASSEMBLER SOURCE LISTING FROM IT. IT OPERATES WITH THE INTERRUPT
SYSTEM ENABLED, UNDER BCS, BUT WITH THE NORMAL PHOTOREADER INPUT
ROUTINE REPLACED BY AN EQUIVALENT OF THE BASIC-BINARY LOADER.
NO ATTEMPT IS MADE TO TRACE THE INSTRUCTION TREE; ALL LOCATIONS ARE
LISTED BY LOCATION, CONTENTS (OCTAL), ASSEMBLER SOURCE STATEMENT
(WHETHER VALID OR NOT), AND, IF A VALID ASCII CHARACTER PAIR IS
FORMED (A-Z, 0-9, CR, LF, OR BLANK), THIS IS ALSO PRINTED. IN THE
CASE OF MEMORY-REFERENCE INSTRUCTIONS, THE OPERAND ADDRESS IS PRINTED
(OCTAL).
OUTPUT IS BLOCKED INTO 11" PAGES. THE BEGINNING OF AN ABSOLUTE-
BINARY BLOCK IS INDICATED BY "B", ALL SKIP AND JUMP INSTRUCTIONS ARE
IDENTIFIED BY "S" OR "J" IN A SPECIAL COLUMN TO FACILITATE FOLLOWING
THE LISTING. ALL ERROR CONDITIONS RESULT IN A PRINTED MESSAGE ONLY
(EXCEPT END-OF-TAPE).
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
NOTE: EDIT STATEMENT #5, "GENL EQU 21B", TO CONFIGURE PROGRAM TO
YOUR PHOTOREADER'S SELECT CODE; EDIT #11 AND #87 TO USE THE ADDRESS
OF THE PHOTOREADER LINK WORD.
X09801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RAND
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FLOATING POINT RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
RANDOM FLOATING POINT
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS FUNCTION GENERATES RANDOM NUMBERS BETWEEN (0) AND (1) IN FLOATING
POINT AND RETURNS THE VALUES IN THE A AND B REGISTERS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ASSEMBLY - CALLING SEQUENCE
EXT RAND
.
JSB RAND
WITH A + B-REGISTER CONTAINING THE RANDOM NUMBER (FLOATING-
POINT)
FORTRAN:
R = RAND (0)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X09901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: GAUSS
**PROGRAM TITLE:
GAUSSIAN RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
RANDOM STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS MTS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ALGOL REAL PROCEDURE GAUSS(I) GENERATES GAUSSIAN (NORMAL)
DISTRIBUTED RANDOM NUMBERS WITH MEAN (MY=0) AND VARIANCE SIGMA 2=1.
THE PROCEDURE REQUIRES TWO RANDOM NUMBERS X1 AND X2 CALLED FROM THE
ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE FUNCTION RANDM2 WHICH GENERATES RANDOM NUMBERS IN THE
INTERVAL (O,1). THE TEST CASE (GAUT) PLOTS THE DISTRIBUTION IN THE
FORM OF A HISTOGRAM WITH MEAN ZERO AND VARIANCE ONE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
FORTRAN ALGOL
CALL GAUSS(I) GAUSS(I)
I = POSITIVE: RANDOM NUMBERS OF PRECEEDING CALL ARE USED FOR THE
COMPUTATION OF THE PRESENT.
I = NEGATIVE: DEFINITE START.
RANDM(I) COMPUTES A RANDOM NUMBER
FROM THE FORMULAS:
X(N)=A*X(N1)+C(MOD 2**30) (A=5**11,C=2**30(1/2-1/SQRT(12)))
RANDM = X/2**30 MIN (1-2**-23)
I = POSITIVE USE PREVIOUS VALUE,
I = NEGATIVE MAKE A NEW SEED.
THE RANDOM NUMBERS ARE UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED IN THE INTEVAL 0 < X < 1.
GAUT ALGOL MAIN PROGRAM
GAUSS ALGOL REAL PROCEDURE
RANDM ASMB REAL FUNCTION
THE PROGRAM GAUT GENERATES GAUSSIAN DISTRIBUTED RANDOM NUMBERS AND TESTS
THEM AGAINST A COMPUTED GAUSSIAN DISTRIBUTION. THE X-RANGE FROM -3.5 TO
+3.5 IS DIVIDED INTO 2XAI INTERVALS. THE DISTRIBUTION IS GENERATED
BY N RANDOM NUMBERS. FINALLY, THE DISTRIBUTION OF THE NUMBERS IS PLOTTED
IN FORM OF A HISTOGRAM.
THERE ARE PRINTED THE FOLLOWING PARAMETERS:
I = THE NUMBR OF THE INTERVAL,
Y = THE FREQUENCY OF THE RANDOM NUMBERS IN THE SPECIAL INTERVAL,
X = THE CORRESPONDING ABSZISSA,
YN = THE CORRESPONDING VALUE TO Y, BUT NORMALIZED TO ONE,
GAUSS = THE COMPUTED GAUSSIAN DISTRIBUTION,
DELTA = THE DIFFERENCE YN = GAUSS.
FINALLY: S MEANS THE SUM OF THE QUADRATIC DEVIATIONS DELTA.
SWITCH-OPTION:
ALL SWITCHES = 0: DEFINITE START OF RANDOM GENERATOR,
ANY SWITCH NOT =0: IF NEW START, PREVIOUS RANDOM NUMBERS ARE
USED FOR THE COMPUTATION OF THE PRESENT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X10001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: IMCP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTEGRATED MATH CALCULATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
CALCULATOR
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE (IMCP) PROGRAM ALLOWS THE ENTRY OF PROGRAMS INTO THE COMPUTER
WITHOUT THE NECESSITY FOR A FORMAL WRITTEN PROGRAM. TO ACCOMPLISH
THIS THE COMPUTER AND TELEPRINTER ARE EMPLOYED IN A MANNER SIMILAR
TO THAT USED FOR OPERATING MANY DESK-TOP CALCULATORS. THE TELEPRINTER
KEYBOARD SERVES TO ENTER INTEGER OR FLOATING POINT DECIMAL NUMBERS,
AND TO COMMAND 54 DIFFERENT ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS AND FUNCTIONS. THIS
CALCULATOR SYSTEM MAY BE USED (IN PROGRAM MODE) FOR COMPUTATION OF LONG
FORMULAS CONSISTING OF MANY DISSIMILAR STEPS. SIX DECIMAL PLACES OF
ACCURACY ARE GUARANTEED.
THE BCS FORTRAN IV LIBRARY, 24149 IS REQUIRED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. USUAL ASSEMBLY AND LOAD PROCEDURES FOR IMCP AND ITS SUBROUTINES
TTYIO, ACOS, ASIN.
2. SET THE SELECT CODE FOR YOUR TELETYPE INTO THE SWITCH REGISTER,
BITS 0 - 5, AND PRESS "RUN". PROGRAM IMCP IS SELF-CONFIGURING
AND I/O IS CONVERSATIONAL.
3. AT PROGRAM START, ALL REGISTERS ARE RESET AND THE PROGRAM TITLE
IS PRINTED:
INTEGRATED MATH CALCULATOR PROGRAM
TYPE # OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS YOU WANT:
6
READY
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
INPUT OF A SINGLE DECIMAL DIGIT IS USED TO SELECT THE NUMBER OF
DECIMAL PLACES TO THE RIGHT OF THE DECIMAL POINT TO BE DISPLAYED
IN RESULTS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ARITHMETIC FUNCTIONS:
ALL FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED UPON THE CURRENT VALUE IN ACC:
A FOLLOWED BY S = ARCSIN(ACC)
" " T = ARCTAN(ACC)
" " C = ARCCOS(ACC)
B = CLEAR ALL REGISTERS + LOOPCOUNTER
C = COS(ACC)
D = ACC * 2.0 (DOUBLE-UP ACC)
E = EXP(ACC)
G FOLLOWED BY X = RECALL X INTO ACC
Y = " Y " "
Z = " Z " "
U = " U " "
V = " V " "
W = " W " "
# = LOOPCOUNTER INTO ACC
P = ("PI") = 3.141592... INTO ACC
E = ("EXP")= 2.718281... INTO ACC
H = PROGRAM HALT, PRESS "RUN" TO CONTINUE, REGISTERS
REMAIN UNALTERED.
I = 1.0/ACC (ACC RECIPROCAL)
L = LOG(ACC)
M = ABS(ACC)
N = -ACC
O = ACC<=X<=Y<=Z<=ACC (ROTATE REGISTERS)
R = SQRT(ACC)
S = SIN(ACC)
T = TAN(ACC)
U = STORE ACC IN U
V = STORE ACC IN V
W = STORE ACC IN W
X = STORE ACC IN X
Y = STORE ACC IN Y
Z = STORE ACC IN Z
(SPACE) = CLEAR ACC TO 0.0
. = DECIMAL POINT IN VARIABLES
= OR CHANGE OF DECIMAL PLACES IN DISPLAY
? = DISPLAY ACC
= = DISPLAY ACC, X, Y AND Z
CR = CR (NO OPERATION)
LF = LF (NO OPERATION)
0 - 9 = VALID DECIMAL DIGITS
$ = SUM-UP N(VAR) IN ACC UNTIL ZERO IS ENTERED
& = FOLLOWED BY X, Y OR Z
SAME AS "$" AND THE SQUARES OF N(VAR) ARE ACCUMULATED
IN X, Y OR Z
THE "IMCP"-PROGRAM ALLOWS TO USE THE HP-COMPUTER AND THE TELETYPE PERI-
PHERAL AS A CALCULATOR-CONFIGURATION, WHICH IS SIMILAR TO OPERATE TO
MANY DESK-TOP CALCULATORS PRESENTLY ON THE MARKET. THE KEYBOARD OF THE
TELETYPE SERVES TO COMMAND UP TO 54 DIFFERENT ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS AND
FUNCTIONS AND TO ENTER DECIMAL VARIABLES.
THE PROGRAM MAY BE USED IN "PROGRAM-MODE" FOR REPEATED COMPUTATION OF
LONG FORMULAS CONSISTING OF MANY DIFFERENT OPERATING STEPS.
THE PROGRAM CONSISTS OF ONE ACCUMULATOR (ACC)
3 STORAGE REGISTERS X, Y AND Z AND
3 DATA-BUFFERS U, V AND W.
THE ACC AND X, Y AND Z ARE DISPLAYED ON TELETYPE.
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS:
P = RAISE ACC TO THE POWER OF VAR
* = MULTIPLY ACC BY VAR
/ = DIVIDE ACC BY VAR
+ = ADD VAR TO ACC
- = SUBTRACT VAR FROM ACC
= NEGATIVE SIGN FOR DECIMAL VARIABLES
% = ACC IN % OF VAR (VAR=100%)
AFTER ENTRY OF SUCH AN OPERATOR-CODE, A DECIMAL VARIABLE MUST BE EN-
TERED TO EXECUTE THE OPERATION. EVERY VARIABLE ENTERED, MUST TERMI-
NATE WITH CR/LF. IF DECIMAL ZERO IS ENTERED, THE VARIABLE IS ASSUMED
TO BE SYMBOLIC. A NAME OF A REGISTER OF "E" (I.E., 2.71828...) OR
"PI"(I.E.,3.1415...) CAN THEN BE TYPED IN.
FOR USE IN "PROGRAM-MODE":
( = START ENTERING PROGRAM STEPS
# = STORE ACC INTO LOOPTERMINATOR
= OR TO REPRESENT THE LOOPCOUNTER AS A SYMBOLIC VARIABLE,
WHICH IS INCREASED BY +1.0 EACH LOOP. ENTER ONLY INTEGER
VARIABLES INTO LOOP TERMINATOR TO ENSURE SUCCESSFUL COM-
PLETION OF LOOP. NOTE THAT A SINGLE LOOP ONLY IS PERMIT-
TED IN A PROGRAM.
: = ENTER LOOP STATE
< = REPEAT LOOP, IF NOT FINISHED
_ = DELETES STEP PREVIOUSLY ENTERED (UNDERLINE OR LEFT ARROW)
) = STOP PROGRAM ENTERING MODE
> = START EXECUTING PROGRAM IN STORE
CTRL/TAPE = LISTS(PUNCHES) THE STORED PROGRAM WITH TRAILERS.
HALT 77 OCCURS; PRESS "RUN" TO CONTINUE OPERATIONS.
(MAXIMUM STORAGE SPACE FOR PROGRAM STEPS IS 200. ONE PROGRAM ONLY CAN
BE LOADED INTO PROGRAM STORAGE AT ANY GIVEN TIME.)
" " 2 QUOTATION MARKS SERVE TO INCLUDE ANY COMMENT DURING
CALCULATIONS.
THIS SYSTEM PRINTS "ILLEGAL!" SHOULD ANY UNLISTED COMMAND-CODE BE
ENTERED.
OPTIONS:
SWITCHREGISTER SWITCH 0 UP SUPPRESSES DISPLAY OF Z
1 UP Y
2 UP X
3 UP ACC
12 UP CANCELS ANY EXECUTION MODE
15 UP VALUES IN DEGREES
15 DN VALUES IN RADIANS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF ANY COMMAND-CODE, NOT CONTAINED IN THE ATTACHED LIST IS ENTERED, THE
TELETYPE PRINTS "ILLEGAL?". NO ERROR-HALT OCCURS AND NONE OF THE REGI-
STER VALUES IS LOST.
IF THE TELEPRINTER WRITES OVERFLOW, THE CURRENT VALUE IN THE ACCUMULATOR
IS LOST DUE TO EXCEEDING REGISTER CAPACITY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE TWO FUNCTIONS "$" AND "&" ARE AVAILABLE ONLY FOR NORMAL-MODE-OPERA-
TION AND NOT FOR PROGRAM-MODE-OPERATION BECAUSE OF 4K STORAGE CONSIDERA-
TIONS. THE CTRL/TAPE FUNCTION IS NOT AVAILABLE ON THE 2752A TTY.
X10101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: XCAL
**PROGRAM TITLE:
EXTENDED PRECISION CALCULATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
CALCULATOR PRECISION
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE (XCAL) PROGRAM ALLOWS THE ENTRY OF PROGRAMS INTO THE COMPUTER
WITHOUT THE NECESSITY FOR A FORMAL WRITTEN PROGRAM. TO ACCOMPLISH
THIS THE COMPUTER AND TELEPRINTER ARE EMPLOYED IN A MANNER SIMILAR
TO THAT USED FOR OPERATING MANY DESK-TOP CALCULATORS. THE TELEPRINTER
KEYBOARD SERVES TO ENTER INTEGER OR FLOATING POINT DECIMAL NUMBERS,
AND COMMAND 48 DIFFERENT ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS AND FUNCTIONS. THIS
CALCULATOR SYSTEM MAY BE USED IN (PROGRAM MODE) FOR REPEATED COMPUTATION
OF LONG FORMULAS CONSISTING OF MANY DISSIMILAR STEPS. TEN DECIMAL
PLACES OF ACCURACY ARE GUARANTEED.
THE BCS FORTRAN IV LIBRARY (24149) IS REQUIRED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. USUAL ASSEMBLY AND LOAD PROCEDURES FOR XCAL AND ITS SUBROUTINES TTX
AND XTAN. THE BCS FORTRAN IV LIBRARY 24149 AND THE REGULAR LIBRARY
MUST BE LOADED.
2. SET SELECT CODE FOR TELETYPE INTO SWITCH REGISTER, BITS 0 - 5.
PRESS "RUN". PROGRAM XCAL IS SELF-CONFIGURING AND I/O IS
CONVERSATIONAL.
3. AT PROGRAM-START ALL REGISTERS ARE RESET, AND THE PROGRAM TITLE IS
PRINTED:
EXTENDED PRECISION CALCULATOR
TYPE # OF FRACTIONAL DIGITS YOU WANT:
8
READY
0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000 0.00000000
INPUT OF A SINGLE DECIMAL DIGIT IS USED TO SELECT THE NUMBER OF
DECIMAL PLACES TO THE RIGHT OF THE DECIMAL POINT TO BE DISPLAYED IN
RESULTS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE "XCAL"-PROGRAM ALLOWS TO USE THE HP-COMPUTER AND THE TELETYPE
PERIPHERAL AS A CALCULATOR-CONFIGURATION, WHICH IS SIMILAR TO OPERATE
TO MANY DESK-TOP CALCULATORS PRESENTLY ON THE MARKET. THE KEYBOARD
OF THE TELETYPE SERVES TO COMMAND UP TO 48 DIFFERENT ARITHMETIC
OPERATIONS AND FUNCTIONS AND TO ENTER DECIMAL VARIABLES.
THE PROGRAM MAY BE USED IN "PROGRAM-MODE" FOR REPEATED COMPUTATION OF
LONG FORMULAS CONSISTING OF MANY DIFFERENT OPERATING STEPS.
THE PROGRAM CONSISTS OF ONE ACCUMULATOR (ACC)
3 STORAGE REGISTERS X, Y AND Z AND
3 DATA-BUFFERS U, V AND W.
THE ACC AND X, Y AND Z ARE DISPLAYED ON TELETYPE.
ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS:
* = MULTIPLY ACC BY VAR
/ = DIVIDE ACC BY VAR
+ = ADD VAR TO ACC
- = SUBTRACT VAR FROM ACC
= NEGATIVE SIGN FOR DECIMAL VARIABLES
% = ACC IN % OF VAR (VAR=100%)
AFTER ENTRY OF SUCH AN OPERATOR-CODE, A DECIMAL VARIABLE MUST BE ENTERED
TO EXECUTE THE OPERATION. EVERY VARIABLE ENTERED, MUST TERMINATE WITH
CR/LF. IF DECIMAL ZERO IS ENTERED, THE VARIABLE IS ASSUMED TO BE
SYMBOLIC. A NAME OF A REGISTER OR "E"(I.E., 2.71828...) OR "PI"
(I.E., 3.1415...) CAN THEN BE TYPED.
ARITHMETIC FUNCTIONS:
ALL FUNCTIONS ARE PERFORMED UPON THE CURRENT VALUE IN ACC:
B = CLEAR ALL REGISTERS + LOOPCOUNTER
C = COS(ACC)
D = ACC * 2.0 (DOUBLE-UP ACC)
G = FOLLOWED BY X = RECALL X INTO ACC
Y = " Y " "
Z = " Z " "
U = " U " "
V = " V " "
W = " W " "
# = LOOPCOUNTER INTO ACC
P = "PI" = 3.141592... INTO ACC
E = "EXP" = 2.718281... INTO ACC
H = PROGRAM HALT, PRESS "RUN" TO CONTINUE, REGISTERS REMAIN
UNALTERED.
I = 1.0 / ACC (ACC RECIPROCAL)
M = ABS(ACC)
N = -ACC
O = ACC<=X<=Y<=Z<=ACC (ROTATE REGISTERS)
R = SQRT(ACC)
S = SIN(ACC)
T = TAN(ACC)
U = STORE ACC IN U
V = " " " V
W = " " " W
X = " " " X
Y = " " " Y
Z = " " " Z
(SPACE)= CLEAR ACC TO 0.0
. = DECIMAL POINT IN VARIABLES
= OR CHANGE OF DECIMAL PLACES IN DISPLAY
? = DISPLAY ACC
= = DISPLAY ACC, X, Y AND Z
CR = CR (NO OPERATION)
LF = LF (NO OPERATION)
0 - 9 = VALID DECIMAL DIGITS
$ = SUM-UP N(VAR) IN ACC
UNTIL ZERO IS ENTERED
& = FOLLOWED BY X, Y OR Z
SAME AS "$" AND THE SQUARES OF N(VAR) ARE ACCUMULATED IN
X, Y OR Z
FOR USE IN "PROGRAM-MODE":
( = START ENTERING PROGRAM STEPS
# = STORE ACC INTO LOOPTERMINATOR
= OR TO REPRESENT THE LOOPCOUNTER
IS INCREASED BY +1.0 EACH LOOP. ENTER ONLY INTEGER VARIABLES
INTO LOOPTERMINATOR TO ENSURE SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF LOOP.
NOTE THAT A SINGLE LOOP ONLY IS PERMITTED IN A PROGRAM.
: = ENTER LOOP STATE
< = REPEAT LOOP, IF NOT FINISHED
_ = DELETES STEP PREVIOUSLY ENTERED (UNDERLINE OR LEFT ARROW)
) = STOP PROGRAM ENTERING MODE
> = START EXECUTING PROGRAM IN STORE
CTRL/TAPE = LISTS(PUNCHES) THE STORED PROGRAM WITH TRAILERS.
HALT 77 OCCURS; PRESS "RUN" TO CONTINUE OPERATIONS.
(MAXIMUM STORAGE SPACE FOR PROGRAM STEPS IS 200. ONE PROGRAM ONLY
CAN BE LOADED INTO PROGRAM STORAGE AT ANY GIVEN TIME.)
" " 2 QUOTATION MARKS SERVE TO INCLUDE ANY COMMENT DURING
CALCULATIONS.
THIS SYSTEM PRINTS "ILLEGAL!" SHOULD ANY UNLISTED COMMAND CODE BE
ENTERED.
OPTIONS:
SWITCHREGISTER SWITCH 0 UP SUPPRESSES DISPLAY OF Z
1 UP Y
2 UP X
3 UP ACC
12 UP CANCELS ANY EXECUTION MODE
15 UP VALUES IN DEGREES
15 DN VALUES IN RADIANS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF ANY COMMAND CODE, NOT CONTAINED IN THE ATTACHED LIST, IS ENTERED, THE
TELETYPE PRINTS "ILLEGAL!". NO ERROR-HALT OCCURS AND NONE OF THE REGI-
STER VALUES IS LOST.
IF THE TELETYPE WRITES "OVERFLOW", THE CURRENT VALUE IN THE ACCUMULATOR
IS LOST DUE TO EXCEEDING REGISTER CAPACITY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE TWO FUNCTIONS "$" AND "&" ARE AVAILABLE ONLY FOR NORMAL-MODE-
OPERATION AND NOT FOR PROGRAM-MODE-OPERATION BECAUSE OF 4K STORAGE
CONSIDERATIONS. THE CTRL/TAPE FUNCTION IS NOT AVAILABLE ON THE
2752A TTY.
X10201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP BASIC TO FORTRAN TRANSLATOR FOR DOS/DOS-M
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
BASIC FORTRAN TRANSLATOR
**LANGUAGES:
SNOBOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM TRANSLATES AN HP BASIC PROGRAM INTO A FORTRAN PROGRAM.
IT TRANSLATES THE FOLLOWING STATEMENTS: DATA, LET, GO TO, INPUT,
DIM, END, IF...THEN, READ, PRINT, GOSUB, RETURN, FOR, NEXT, RESTORE,
DEF, AND STOP. LIMITATIONS ARE STATEMENTS CONSTRAINING MAT AND STRING
CHARACTERS SUCH AS A$.
THE TRANSLATOR OPERATES IN A DOS OR DOS-M ENVIRONMENT WITH AT LEAST
24K OF CORE. IT IS WRITTEN IN SNOBOL AND REQUIRES THE SNOBOL TRANSLATOR
FROM THE CONTRIBUTED LIBRARY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
THIS TRANSLATION REQUIRES TWO PASSES:
*CALL BASIC/FORTRAN TRANSLATOR BY USUAL PROCEDURE:
(SUPPOSING THE SOURCE FILE OF BASIC/FORTRAN TRANSLATOR HAS BEEN STORED
WITH THE NAME: BASF)
TYPE: :JF,BASF
:PR,SNOB,2,99
OR (SUPPOSING THE RELOCATABLE FILE OF BASIC/FORTRAN TRANSLATOR HAS BEEN
STORED WITH THE NAME: RBF)
TYPE: :PR,SNOB,,,,2
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE IS PRINTED ON TELEPRINTER:
ENTER FILE NAME
TYPE: RBF
* WAIT UNTIL THE MESSAGE "NOM DU PROGRAMME" IS PRINTED ON TELEPRINTER.
* TYPE THE NAME YOU WANT THE FORTRAN PROGRAM TO BE GIVEN. (THIS NAME
MUST HAVE UP TO FIVE CHARACTERS.)
THE FOLLOWING QUESTIONS WILL APPEAR ON THE TELEPRINTER:
LU DU PERIF. DE SORTIE ?
GIVE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE OUTPUT DEVICE FOR THE FORTRAN TRANSLATION.
(4 FOR TAPE PUNCH, 8 FOR MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT.) SWITCH ON THE DEVICE.
LU DU PERIF, D'ENTREE?
GIVE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE INPUT DEVICE FROM WHICH THE BASIC PROGRAM WILL
BE READ. (5 FOR TAPE READER, 8 FOR MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT, 2 FOR DISC.)
SWITCH ON THE DEVICE. IF YOU HAVE ANSWERED : 2, TO THE LAST QUESTION,
THE FOLLOWING QUESTION APPEARS:
NOM DE VOTRE FILE?
GIVE THE NAME OF THE FILE IN WHICH THE BASIC PROGRAM IS.
THE FIRST PASS BEGINS. A LISTING OF THE BASIC PROGRAM IS PROVIDED.
AT THE END OF THE FIRST PASS, IF THE LOGICAL UNIT OF THE INPUT DEVICE
IS 5, THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE IS PRINTED ON TELEPRINTER:
I/O ERR ET EQT ## N
REPLACER LA BANDE SUR LE LECTEUR
ET TAPEZ : GO
* MAKE THE LINE PRINTER EJECT ONE PAGE
* PLACE THE BASIC TAPE ON TAPE READER AGAIN
* TYPE:
GO
THE RESULT OF THE FIRST PASS IS PRINTED ON LINE PRINTER AND PUNCHED.
* WHEN ALL STOPS :
TYPE:
: UP,N
: GO
THE SECOND PASS BEGINS, PROVIDING A LISTING AND A TAPE OF THE
TRANSLATED PROGRAM.
AT THE END, THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE IS PRINTED ON TELEPRINTER:
I/O ERR ET EQT ## N
SNOBOL HP FRANCE - FIN DE L'INTERPRETATION
XXXX GARBAGE COLLECTION
* BEFORE GETTING THE TRANSLATED TAPE, PUNCH ABOUT FOUR INCHES OF FEED-
HOLES BY PRESSING THE SWITCH "FEED-HOLES" ON TAPE PUNCH.
----
DURING THE TRANSLATION, THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES MAY BE PRINTED:
* ORDRE NON TRADIUT, IF AN ATTEMPT IS MADE TO TRANSLATE A STATEMENT
NOT YET TREATED, TRANSLATION GOES ON BUT THE TRANSLATED TAPE IS
UNUSABLE.
TRADUCTION IMPOSSIBLE TASSEZ LES NOS DE LIGNE
IF THE STATEMENT-NUMBERS USED IN THE BASIC PROGRAM ARE TOO BIG:
BASIC/FORTRAN TRANSLATOR NEEDS TO CREATE NEW STATEMENT-NUMBERS.
THESE NUMBERS DECREASE FROM 9900, AND WHEN THEY HAPPEN TO MEET THE
NUMBERS OF THE BASIC PROGRAM, TRANSLATION IS STOPPED.
NOTE: THE LAST INSTRUCTION IN A BASIC PROGRAM IS OFTEN: 9999 END.
THIS INSTRUCTION, OF COURSE, CAUSES THE PRECEDING MESSAGE TO BE
WRITTEN.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X10301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SUPER BASIC FOR DOS-M
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
BASIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
SUPER BASIC FOR DOS-M IS ESSENTIALLY EQUIVALENT TO HP'S SINGLE TERMINAL
BASIC SYSTEM HP20392A. SOME IMPORTANT DIFFERENCES INCLUDE THREE (3)
ADDITIONAL COMMANDS: PUNCH FOR HIGH-SPEED PUNCH TAPE OUTPUT, PLIST FOR
LINE PRINTER OUTPUT, AND LOAD FOR INPUTTING USER PROGRAMS FROM DOS-M
SOURCE FILES. THIS PROGRAM USES THE DISC WORK AREA FOR TEMPORARY
STORAGE ALLOWING A TOTAL USER PROGRAM AND ARRAY STORAGE OF 32K WORDS.
SWITCH REGISTER CONTROL OUTPUT, TERMINATE EXECUTION, AND DELETE (REMARK)
STATEMENTS. STATEMENT NUMBERS RANGE FROM 1 TO 32767. 'GOTO' AND 'GOSUB'
STATEMENTS MAY BE FOLLOWED BY ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS OR LINE NUMBERS.
REQUIRES 16K DOS-M WITH EAU.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: RELOCATABLE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: SOURCE
FILE# 10: SOURCE
FILE# 11: SOURCE
FILE# 12: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE FOLLOWING DIFFERENCES BETWEEN SINGLE TERMINAL BASIC AND SUPER BASIC
EXIST:
1. IN RUN MODE, HITTING A KEY RETURNS YOU TO DOS-M "@" RATHER THAN TO
BASIC.
2. INTERRUPT ON ESC HAS BEEN DELETED.
3. THE EDITING FEATURES OF DOS-M HAVE BEEN RETAINED.
CNTL-A DELETES THE PREVIOUS CHARACTER
RUBOUT DELETES THE CURRENT LINE
CR LF MUST BE USED INSTEAD OF CR
4. WHEN THE SYSTEM HAS ACCEPTED THE PREVIOUS INPUT LINE IT SIGNALS THE
USER BY PRINTING "!" AND A SPACE " ". THE NEXT STATEMENT OR
COMMAND CAN THEN BE TYPED IN BY THE USER.
5. THE FOLLOWING THREE (3) SYSTEM COMMANDS HAVE BEEN ADDED:
A. PUNCH UTILIZES THE HIGH SPEED PUNCH FOR OUTPUT.
B. PLIST UTILIZES THE LINE PRINTER FOR OUTPUT.
THE SYNTAX FOR THE PUNCH, PLIST, AND LIST COMMANDS IS AS FOLLOWS:
COMMAND M,N
WHERE M IS STARTING LINE NUMBER
N IS ENDING LINE NUMBER
IF N IS ABSENT ALL STATEMENTS STARTING WITH M WILL BE LISTED.
IF BOTH M AND N ARE ABSENT ALL STATEMENTS WILL BE LISTED.
C. LOAD ALLOWS BASIC SOURCE STATEMENTS PREVIOUSLY STORED IN DOS-M
FILES TO BE ENTERED INTO THE PROGRAM. NO PROVISION IS MADE TO
SAVE FILES.
EXAMPLE: LOAD XXXXX
WHERE XXXXX IS ANY ACCEPTABLE DOS-M FILE NAME
NO CHECK IS MADE ON THE FILE TYPE BEFORE LOADING.
NOTE: IT IS SUGGESTED THAT $EX18 BE CORE RESIDENT IN THE DOS-M
SYSTEM AS IT GREATLY REDUCES LOAD TIME FROM DISK FILES.
6. SEVERAL SPECIAL SWITCH REGISTER FUNCTIONS HAVE BEEN INCORPORATED.
SW15=1 ALL PROGRAM OUTPUT GOES TO LINE PRINTER
SW15-0 ALL PROGRAM OUTPUT GOES TO SYSTEM TTY OR CRT
SW14=1 TERMINATE EXECUTION OR LISTING AND RETURN TO READY.
SWITCH 14 MUST BE RESET TO 0 AFTER READY IS PRINTED.
SW13=1 DELETE ALL REM STATEMENTS FROM PROGRAM. IF SWITCH 13 IS
SET TO 1 ALL SUCCEEDING REM STATEMENTS WILL BE IGNORED UNTIL
SWITCH 13 IS SET TO 0.
7. THE SYNTAX HAS BEEN MODIFIED TO ALLOW CONDITIONAL EXECUTION OF
STATEMENTS OF THE FORM.
XXX IF (EXP) THEN (ANY EXECUTABLE STATEMENT)
WHERE XXX = LINE NUMBER
(EXP) = VALID BASIC EXPRESSION
IF THEN STATEMENTS FROM CURRENT SINGLE TERMINAL BASIC PROGRAMS ARE
ACCEPTABLE BUT WILL LIST AS IF THEN GOTO STATEMENTS.
EXAMPLE:
10 IF I=1 THEN LET J=10
20 IF I=1 THEN GOTO 5
30 IF I=1 THEN PRINT I
40 IF J=0 THEN RETURN
THE GOTO AND GOSUB STATEMENT SYNTAX HAS BEEN MODIFIED TO ALLOW
ARITHMETIC EXPRESSIONS OR LINE NUMBERS AS THE BRANCH POINT. THE
EXPRESSIONS WILL BE EVALUATED AND TRUNCATED TO AN INTEGER BEFORE
EXECUTION OF THE PROGRAM BRANCH.
EXAMPLE:
5 GOTO 5
10 GOTO I WILL GO TO THE LINE NUMBER SPECIFIED BY
CURRENT VALUE OF I
20 GOSUB (J*100+5) FOR J=1 THIS STATEMENT IS THE SAME
AS 20 GOSUB 105
8. VARIABLE NAMES HAVE BEEN RESTRICTED TO AX WHERE X=BLANK,1,0.
EXAMPLE: A1,AO,A
ARRAY VARIABLES REMAIN UNCHANGED
9. 32K OF PROGRAM AND ARRAY STORAGE IS AVAILABLE FOR USER PROGRAMS.
THIS IS SUFFICIENT FOR A 2000 TO 3000 STATEMENT PROGRAM.
10. SEVERAL ERROR MESSAGES HAVE BEEN ADDED.
ERROR # DEFINITION
72 OUT OF CORE DURING BUFFER ALLOCATION (AT LEAST 256
WORDS OF FREE CORE IS REQUIRED FOR BUFFERS. THE SYSTEM
MUST BE REGENERATED WITH FEWER CORE RESIDENT MODULES)
73 BASIC SYSTEM PROGRAM ERROR (BASIC IS TRYING TO WRITE TO
AN INVALID VIRTUAL ADDRESS. THIS SHOULD NEVER OCCUR BUT
IF IT DOES THE SYSTEM PROGRAM HAS A BUG IN IT.)
74 INVALID CONDITIONAL EXECUTABLE STATEMENT (STATEMENT
TYPE FOLLOWING IF THEN PAIR IS NOT RECOGNIZABLE.)
75 FILE NOT ON DISC (LOAD STATEMENT WITH FILE NAME NOT IN
DISC DIRECTORY).
11. ACCEPTABLE STATEMENT NUMBERS NOW RANGE FROM 1-32767.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
DVR12 MUST BE MODIFIED TO INCLUDE BASIC IN ITS NAME TABLE OF SPECIAL
PROGRAMS FOR PROPER OPERATION OF THIS PROGRAM.
DOS-M BASE PAGE CONSTANTS ARE UTILIZED FOR BASIC. CALL STATEMENTS HAVE
BEEN RETAINED SO THE USER COULD IMPLEMENT HIS OWN SUBROUTINES.
X10401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M RELOCATABLE REVERSE ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER INVERSE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL REVERSE ASSEMBLE (PRODUCE AN ASSEMBLY TYPE LISTING)
FROM RELOCATABLE OBJECT CODE LOCATED IN DISC FILES, THE 'JBIN' AREA OF
THE DISC, THE DISC-RESIDENT LIBRARY, MAGNETIC TAPE, OR PAPER TAPE. THE
RELOCATABLE OBJECT CODE MAY HAVE BEEN PRODUCED BY EITHER THE ASSEMBLER
OR A COMPILER USING A DOS-M SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
TO START THE PROGRAM EXECUTING, GIVE THE COMMAND:
:PROG,RBMSA,P1,P2,P3
WHERE P1 = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF INPUT DEVICE
0 (OR NOT GIVEN): JBIN AREA
2: USER FILE--PROGRAM WILL REQUEST FILE NAME
3: DISC-RESIDENT LIBRARY
OTHER: LUN P1
P2 = LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF LIST DEVICE (6 ASSUMED IF NOT GIVEN)
P3 = LINES/PAGE ON LISTING (56 ASSUMED IF NOT GIVEN)
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
PAGE 0001 RBMSA PROGRAM NAME IS PUT IN THE PAGE HEADER.
PARAMETERS PRINTED IN OCTAL (IF PRESENT)
0001 NAM RBMSA,3,143,0,0,0,0,0,0
0002* A 03625R 00000B 00000C
ASSEMBLED ! ! !--------COMMON LENGTH(OCTAL)
! !----------------BASE PAGE LENGTH(OCTAL)
!------------------------MAIN PROGRAM LENGTH(OCTAL) ASSEMBLED
PROGRAMS ONLY
0002* C 00000B 00000C
COMPILED ! !----------------COMMON LENGTH(OCTAL)
!------------------------BASE PAGE LENGTH(OCTAL)
ENT AND EXT RECORDS ARE PRINTED ONE ENTRY PER LINE. THESE ENTRIES ARE
USED FOR OPERANDS, AND THE ENT ENTRIES ARE USED FOR LABELS (SEE EXAMPLE
OUTPUT).
END STATEMENTS WILL INCLUDE THE TRANSFER ADDRESS IF PRESENT. IT MAY BE
EITHER A RELOCATABLE ADDRESS OR A SYMBOLIC OPERAND (FROM ENT ENTRIES).
:PR,RBMSA,2
INPUT FILENAME OR /E FILE NAMES ARE INPUT FROM THE BATCH DEVICE.
REDEX IF THE BATCH DEVICE IS NOT THE SYSTEM TTY,
INPUT FILENAME OR /E THE PROGRAM DOES NOT ASK FOR THE FILE NAME
/E BUT READS THE FILE NAME FROM THE BATCH DEVICE.
X10501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
8K SIO RELOCATABLE REVERSE ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER INVERSE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
MTS SIO
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K + MAG TAPE FOR MTS; 4K FOR SIO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL REVERSE ASSEMBLE (PRODUCE AN ASSEMBLY TYPE LISTING)
FROM RELOCATABLE OBJECT CODE LOCATED ON PAPER TAPE. THE RELOCATABLE
OBJECT CODE MAY HAVE BEEN PRODUCED BY EITHER THE ASSEMBLER OR A
COMPILER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1: ASSEMBLE THE SOURCE TAPES TO PRODUCE AN OBJECT ABSOLUTE BINARY
TAPE. ASSEMBLE WITH THE Z OPTION IF THE LIST DEVICE IS A LINE-
PRINTER. ASSEMBLE WITH THE N OPTION IF THE LIST DEVICE IS NOT A
LINEPRINTER.
2: LOAD THE BINARY TAPE USING THE BASIC BINARY LOADER.
3: LOAD AND CONFIGURE THE DESIRED SIO LIST AND INPUT DRIVERS.
4: IF A CONFIGURED TAPE IS DESIRED, LOAD AND EXECUTE THE SIO SYSTEM
DUMP.
5: SET STARTING ADDRESS TO 100B.
6: LOAD THE RELOCATABE TAPE IN THE INPUT DEVICE.
7: RUN (THE TAPE WILL BE REVERSE ASSEMBLED)
HLT 11B CHECKSUM ERROR.
HLT 75B ERROR: ILLEGAL RECORD TYPE OR ORDER.
HLT 76B END-OF-TAPE ON OTHER THAN END RECORDS.
HLT 77B END-OF-TAPE AFTER END RECORDS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE PROGRAM NAME IS PUT IN THE PAGE HEADER.
IN NAM RECORDS, THE OPTIONAL PARAMETERS ARE PRINTED IN OCTAL (IF
PRESENT ON THE TAPE). THE LINE IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING THE NAM STATEMENT
IS IN THE FORM OF A COMMENT. THE FIRST LETTER DESIGNATES WHETHER THE
PROGRAM WAS ASSEMBLED ("A"), OR COMPILED ("C"). THE TWO OR THREE
NUMBERS FOLLOWING THE LETTER DESIGNATE THE PROGRAM LENGTHS. AN "R"
FOLLOWING THE NUMBER SIGNIFIES THE MAIN PROGRAM LENGTH (NOT AVAILABLE
FOR COMPILED PROGRAMS), A "B" FOR BASE PAGE LENGTH, AND "C" FOR COMMON
LENGTH. ALL OF THESE NUMBERS ARE OCTAL.
ENT AND EXT RECORDS ARE PRINTED ONE ENTRY PER LINE. THESE ENTRIES ARE
USED FOR LABELS AND OPERANDS.
END STATEMENTS WILL INCLUDE THE TRANSFER ADDRESS IF PRESENT.
THE OPERANDS MAY BE EITHER SYMBOLIC (FROM THE ENT/EXT ENTRIES) OR A
RELOCATABLE ADDRESS. THE ADDRESSES ARE IN OCTAL FOLLOWED BY A LETTER
DESIGNATING THE TYPE OF ADDRESS: "R"-MAIN PROGRAM, "B"-BASE PAGE
RELOCATABLE, "C"-COMMON, "X"-EXTERNAL REFERENCE, OR NO LETTER-ABSOLUTE
BASE PAGE.
WHEN LISTING ON A LINEPRINTER, THE PROGRAM ASSUMES 60 LINES/PAGE AND
THAT THE PRINTER IS IN THE AUTO-PAGE-EJECT MODE OF OPERATION.
X10601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
8K SIO ABSOLUTE REVERSE ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER INVERSE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SIO MTS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K - SIO; 8K & MAG TAPE FOR MTS
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL REVERSE ASSEMBLE (PRODUCE AN ASSEMBLY TYPE LISTING)
FROM ABSOLUTE OBJECT CODE LOCATED ON PAPER TAPE. THE ABSOLUTE OBJECT
CODE MAY HAVE BEEN PRODUCED BY EITHER THE ASSEMBLER OR THE BCS RELOCAT-
ING LOADER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. ASSEMBLE THE SOURCE TAPE TO PRODUCE AN OBJECT ABSOLUTE BINARY TAPE.
ASSEMBLE WITH THE Z OPTION IF THE LIST DEVICE IS A LINEPRINTER.
ASSEMBLE WITH THE N OPTION IF THE LIST DEVICE IS NOT A LINEPRINTER.
2. LOAD THE BINARY TAPE USING THE BASIC BINARY LOADER.
3. SET ADDRESS 2.
4. LOAD THE SWITCH REGISTER WITH THE SELECT CODE OF THE INPUT DEVICE.
5. RUN
6. THE COMPUTER WILL HALT WITH 102077(8) IN THE T-REGISTER.
7. LOAD AND CONFIGURE THE DESIRED SIO LIST DRIVER.
8. IF A CONFIGURED TAPE IS DESIRED, LOAD AND EXECUTE THE SIO SYSTEM
DUMP.
9. SET STARTING ADDRESS TO 100B.
10. LOAD THE ABSOLUTE TAPE IN THE INPUT DEVICE.
11. RUN (THE TAPE WILL BE REVERSE ASSEMBLED).
HALTS: HLT 11B CHECKSUM ERROR
HLT 77B END-OF-TAPE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE OPERAND ADDRESSES ARE IN OCTAL.
WHEN LISTING ON A LINEPRINTER, THE PROGRAM ASSUMES 60 LINES/PAGE AND
THAT THE PRINTER IS IN THE AUTO-PAGE-EJECT MODE OF OPERATION.
X10701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
EXTENDED PRECISION ARITHMETIC ROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PRECISION LIBRARY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE OF FIVE SUBROUTINES ALLOWS A USER TO PERFORM THREE-WORD
EXTENDED PRECISION ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS. THE EXTENDED REAL NUMBERS
HAVE A 38-BIT MANTISSA PLUS A SIGN BIT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINT(S)
DTE - CONVERSION OF REAL NUMBER (A 23-BIT MANTISSA) TO "EXTEND"
(A 38-BIT MANTISSA)
EDT - CONVERSION OF "EXTEND" TO REAL
EAD - ADDITION OF TWO "EXTEND" NUMBERS
EMP - MULTIPLICATION OF TWO "EXTEND" NUMBERS
EDV - DIVISION OF TWO "EXTEND" NUMBERS
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT DTE
JSB DTE
DEF *+5
DEF D ADDRESS OF 1ST WORD
DEF IE1)
)
DEF IE2> REPRESENTATION OF D (REAL) IN THREE WORDS OF "EXTEND"
) (19(DECIMAL) WORDS)
DEF IE3)
EXT ETD
JSB ETD
DEF *+5
DEF IE1)
)
DEF IE2> "EXTEND" - TYPE NUMBER
)
DEF IE3)
DEF D REPRESENTATION OF AN "EXTEND" NUMBER IN REAL (22(10) WORDS)
EXT EAD
JSB EAD
DEF *+10
DEF IA1)
)
DEF IA2> FIRST ADDEND OF THE "EXTEND" NUMBER
)
DEF IA3)
DEF IB1)
)
DEF IB2> SECOND ADDEND OF THE "EXTEND" NUMBER
)
DEF IB3)
DEF IAD1
DEF IAD2 ADDITION OF THE "EXTEND" (225(10) WORDS)
DEF IAD3
EXT EMP
JSB EMP
DEF *+10
DEF IA1)
)
DEF IA2> 1ST MULTIPLICAND OF THE "EXTEND" TYPE
)
DEF IA3)
DEF IB1)
)
DEF IB2> 2 MULTIPLICAND OF THE "EXTEND" TYPE
)
DEF IB3)
DEF IMP1)
)
DEF IMP2> PRODUCT OF THE "EXTEND" TYPE (339(10) WORDS)
)
DEF IMP3)
EXT EDV
JSB EDV
DEF *+10
DEF IA1)
)
DEF IA2> DIVIDEND OF THE "EXTEND" TYPE
)
DEF IA3)
DEF IB1)
)
DEF IB2> DIVISOR OF THE "EXTEND" TYPE
)
DEF IB3)
DEF IDV1)
)
DEF IDV2> QUOTIENT OF THE "EXTEND" TYPE (261(10) WORDS)
)
DEF IDV3)
DECLARATIONS AND CALLING SEQUENCE - ALGOL
PROCEDURE DTE (D,IE1,EI2,EI3);
VALUE D: REAL D; INTEGER IE1, IE2, IE3; CODE;
.
.
.
DTE (. . .);
.
.
.
.
PROCEDURE ETD (IE1,IE2,IE3,D);
INTEGER IE1,IE2,IE3; REAL D; CODE;
.
.
.
ETD (. . .);
.
.
.
PROCEDURE EAD(IA1,IA2,IA3,IB1,IB2,IB3,IAD1,ADP2,ADP3);
INTEGER IA1,IA2,IA3,IB1,IB2,IB3,IAD1,IAD2,IAD3;CODE
.
.
.
EAD (. . .);
.
.
PROCEDURE EMP(IA1,IA2,IA3,IB1,IB2,IB3,IMP1,IMP2,IMP3);
INTEGER IA1,IA2,IA3,IB1,IB2,IB3,IMP1,IMP2,IMP3;CODE
.
.
.
EMP (. . .);
.
.
.
PROCEDURE EDV (IA1, IA2, IA3, IB1, IB2, IB3, IDV1, IDV2, IDV3);
INTEGER IA1,IA2,IA3,IB1,IB2,IB3,IDV1,IDV2,IDV3; CODE;
.
.
.
EDV (. . .);
.
.
.
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
DTE(...)
.
.
.
ETD(...)
.
.
.
EAD(...)
.
.
.
EMP(...)
.
.
.
EDV(...)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE RESULT OF EACH AND EVERY ARITHMETICAL OPERATION IS TESTED FOR
OVERFLOW BY ONE AND THE SAME METHOD. IN CASE THAT THE EXPONENT OF THE
RESULT EXCEEDS 177(8), THE RESULT IS ASSUMED TO BE THE MAX. NUMBER
PERMITTED, WITH REGARD TO SIGN (I.E., EITHER 077777(8) 177777(8)
177776(8) OR 100000(8) 000000(8) 000376(8)).
X10801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FIVE WORD EXTENDED PRECISION ARITHMETIC ROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PRECISION LIBRARY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE OF SIX SUBROUTINES ALLOWS A USER TO PERFORM FIVE-WORD
EXTENDED PRECISION ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS. EACH REAL NUMBER HAS A
63 BIT MANTISSA PLUS SIGN AND AN EXPONENT OF 7 BITS PLUS SIGN AND AN
EXPONENT OF 7 BITS PLUS SIGN. ARITHMETIC OPERATIONS ARE ROUNDED.
THESE ROUTINES ARE CALLABLE FROM ALGOL, FORTRAN, AND ASSEMBLER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINTS:
HAD - ADDITION OF TWO "HIGH" NUMBERS
HMP - MULTIPLICATION OF TWO "HIGH" NUMBERS
HDV - DIVISION OF TWO "HIGH" NUMBERS
HCM - CHANGE OF SIGN OF A "HIGH" - TYPE NUMBER
DTH - CONVERSION OF REAL-TYPE NUMBER TO "HIGH" - TYPE
HTD - CONVERSION OF "HIGH" - TYPE NUMBER TO REAL TYPE
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT HAD
JSB HAD
DEF *+16
DEF IA1
DEF IA3 ADDEND IN HIGH
DEF IA4
DEF IA5
DEF IB1
DEF IB2
DEF IB3 ADDEND IN HIGH
DEF IB4
DEF IB5
DEF IC1
DEF IC2
DEF IC3 PRODUCT IN HIGH
DEF IC4
DEF IC5 (306(10) WORDS)
EXT HMP
JSB HMP
DEF *+16
DEF IA1
DEF IA2
DEF IA3 1. MULTIPLICAND IN HIGH
DEF IA4
DEF IA5
DEF IB1
DEF IB2
DEF IB3 2. MULTIPLICAND IN HIGH
DEF IB4
DEF IB5
DEF IC1
DEF IC2
DEF IC3 PRODUCT IN HIGH
DEF IC4
DEF IC5 (598(10) WORDS)
EXT HDV
JSB HDV
DEF *+16
DEF IA1
DEF IA2
DEF IA3 DIVIDEND IN HIGH
DEF IA4
DEF IA5
DEF IB1
DEF IB2
DEF IB3 DIVISOR IN HIGH
DEF IB4
DEF IB5
DEF IC1
DEF IC2
DEF IC3 RESULT IN HIGH
DEF IC4
DEF IC5 (463(10) WORDS)
EXT HCM
JSB HCM
DEF *+11
DEF IA1
DEF IA2
DEF IA3 THE NUMBER THE SIGN OF WHICH IS TO BE CHANGED
HIGH-TYPE
DEF IA4
DEF IA5
DEF IC1
DEF IC2
DEF IC3 RESULT, AGAIN IN HIGH
DEF IC4
DEF IC5 (40(10) WORDS)
DEF DTH
JSB DTH
DEF *+7 ADDRESS OF 1. WORD, REAL-TYPE
DEF D
DEF IH1
DEF IH2
DEF IH3 REPRESENTATION OF D IN 5 WORDS, HIGH-TYPE
DEF IH4
DEF IH5 (57(10) WORDS)
EXT HTD
JSB HTD
DEF *+5
DEF IH1 1.,2.,5., WORD OF THE HIGH-TYPE REPRESENTATION OF A NUMBER
DEF IH2
DEF IH5
DEF D (23(10) WORDS) RESULT, REAL-TYPE
DECLARATION AND CALLING SEQUENCE - ALGOL
PROCEDURE HAD (IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IB1,IB2,IB3,IB4,IB5,IC1,IC2,IC3,
IC4,IC5);
INTEGER IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IB1,IB2,IB3,IB4,IB5,IC1,IC2,IC3,IC4,IC5;
CODE:
HAD(....);
PROCEDURE HMP (IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IB1,IB2,IB3,IB4,B5,IC1,IC2,IC3,
IC4,IC5);
INTEGER IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IB1,IB2,IB3,IB4,IB5,IC1,IC2,C3,IC4,IC5,
CODE:
HMP(....);
PROCDURE HDV (IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IB1,IB2,IB3,IB4,IB5,IC1,IC2,IC3,
IC4,IC5);
INTEGER IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IB1,IB2,IB3,IB4,IB5,IC1,IC2,IC3,IC4,IC5;
CODE:
HDV(...);
PROCEDURE HCM (IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IC1,IC2,IC3,IC4,IC5);
INTEGER IA1,IA2,IA3,IA4,IA5,IC1,IC2,IC3,IC4,IC5;
CODE:
HCM(...);
PROCEDURE DTH (D,IH1,IH2,IH3,IH4,IH5);
VALUE D; REAL D; INTEGER IH1,IH2,IH3,IH4,IH5: CODE;
DTH(....);
PROCEDURE HTD (IH1,IH2,IH3,IH4)
PROCEDURE HTD (IH1,IH2,IH5,D);
INTEGER IH1,IH2,IH5;REAL D;
CODE:
HTD(...);
CALLING SEQUENCE-FORTRAN
HAD(.....)
HMP(.....)
HDV(.....)
HCM(.....)
DTH(.....)
HTD(.....)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE RESULT OF EVERY ARITHMETICAL OPERATION ON HIGH-TYPE NUMBERS IS
TESTED FOR OVERFLOW. IN CASE THAT THE EXPONENT OF THE RESULT EXCEEDS
177, THE RESULT OF THE ARITHMETICAL OPERATION IN QUESTION IS ASSUMED
TO EQUAL THE MAXIMUM NUMBER THAT CAN BE REPRESENTED, I.E., EITHER
07777(8)........, OR 10000......WITH AN EXPONENT OF 177(8). NO OVERFLOW
INDICATION IS PROVIDED.
X10901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: IRND
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RANDOM INTEGER NUMBER GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
RANDOM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
IRND(M) IS A FUNCTION SUBPROGRAM WHICH GENERATES PSEUDO RANDOM NUMBER
INTEGERS IN THE RANGE 0 < X < M - 1. THE GENERATING RANDOM NUMBER
STRING IS NOT AUTOMATICALLY RESTARTED WHEN THE PROGRAM IS RESTARTED.
THIS CAN BE ACHIEVED BY THE FORTRAN CALLABLE SUBROUTINE (STRND).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IRND - CALCULATE RANDOM NUMBER
STRND- RETURN TO THE START POINT OF THE FILE OF PSEUDO RANDOM NUMBERS.
SAMPLE CALL IN FORTRAN LANGUAGE:
N = IRND (5)
(ON RETURN N = NBR. IN RANGE 0 .. 4.)
CALL STRND
(THE RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR WILL PRODUCE THE SAME FILE OF NUMBERS
AGAIN.)
SAMPLE CALLS IN ASSEMBLER LANGUAGE:
JSB IRND IRND DECLARED AS EXTERNAL
DEF * + 2
DEF DEC5 LABEL OF DECIMAL 5
(RETURN; (A) = NBR. IN RANGE 0 .. 4)
JSB STRND STRND DECLARED AS EXTERNAL
DEF * + 1
(RETURN; RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR RESET TO START POINT)
FOR MORE INFORMATION SEE SAMPLE PROGRAM "RNTST".
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE ARGUMENT M OR IRND(M) SHOULD BE A POSITIVE INTEGER. HOWEVER, IF A
NEGATIVE ARGUMENT IS USED, NO ERROR MESSAGE IS ISSUED; THE PROGRAM WILL
USE THE ABSOLUTE VALUE OF THE ARGUMENT.
X11001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: RNDAF
**PROGRAM TITLE:
UNIFORMLY DISTRIBUTED PSUEDO-RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
RANDOM RANDOM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
TWO SUBROUTINES USING THE SAME ALGORITHM TO COMPUTE UNIFORMLY
DISTRIBUTED PSEUDO-RANDOM NUMBERS AT THE INTERVAL (0,1) ARE INCLUDED
IN THIS PACKAGE. ONE IS FORTRAN OR ALGOL CALLABLE. THE OTHER IS
STRICTLY FOR USE WITH ASSEMBLER MAIN PROGRAMS AND IS MUCH FASTER.
THE METHOD EMPLOYED IS DESCRIBED IN: 'APPLIED NUMERICAL METHODS',
BY CARNAHAN, LUTHER, AND WILKES, P. 545.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DECLARATIONS AND CALLING SEQUENCE IN ALGOL
REAL PROCEDURE RNDAF(AF); REAL AF; CODE;
.
.
.
... RNDAF(A) ...
.
.
.
CALLING SEQUENCE IN FORTRAN
.
.
.
... RNDAF(A) ...
.
.
.
RNDAS
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT RNDAS ...
.
.
.
JSB RNDAS
.
.
.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X11101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CSMP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CONTINUOUS SYSTEM MODELING PROGRAM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
SIMULATOR
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
(CSMP) IS A SET OF ROUTINES WHICH PROVIDE THE ENGINEER AND SCIENTIST
WITH A SIMPLE YET VERSATILE MEANS FOR SIMULATING CONTINUOUS PROCESSES.
IT PROVIDES A BLOCK-ORIENTED LANGUAGE HAVING A LARGE COMPLEMENT OF FUNC-
TIONAL ELEMENTS FOR SPECIFYING THEIR INTERCONNECTION.
IT IS OPERABLE UNDER A DOS-M ENVIRONMENT ON A 16K MINIMUM MACHINE. INPUT
IS ON CARDS, INITIALLY, AND THEN CAN BE TRANSFERRED TO PAPER TAPE
THROUGH THE USES OF THE PROGRAM. OUTPUT IS 120 CHARACTERS WIDE AND
SHOULD BE ON A LINE PRINTER.
REFERENCE IBM-1130 APPLICATION PROGRAM OPERATIONS MANUAL "1130 CSMP",
PART #GH20-0282-2.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
BEFORE CSMP IS USED FOR THE FIRST TIME, THE MAIN PROGRAM, SEGMENTS, AND
ASSOCIATED SUBROUTINES (IN SOURCE) MUST BE COMPILED OR ASSEMBLED AND THE
ENSUING RELOCATABLES LOADED. THIS PROCEDURE MUST BE FOLLOWED ONLY WHEN
A NEW SYSTEM IS BEING USED , WHEN A NEW SPECIAL SUBROUTINE IS BEING
IMPLEMENTED, OR WHEN A CHANGE HAS BEEN MADE TO ONE OF THE MAIN ROUTINES.
STEP 0: TPYE - :PU,CSMP,CSM0,CSM1,CSM2,CSM3,CSM4,CSM5,CSM6,CSM7,CSMPF
STEP 1: CREATE 3 SOURCE FILES THUSLY,
A) LOAD TAPE 1 INTO PAPER TAPED READER AND STORE INTO A SOURCE
FILE UNDER NAME (SORC1). TTY OR CRT WILL ASK: DONE?
B) LOAD TAPE 2 INTO PAPER TAPE READER (PTR), TYPE NO ON THE
KEYBD. PTR WILL THEN READ TAPE 2 AND TTY OR CRT WILL ASK
ONCE AGAIN IF DONE.
C) LOAD TAPE 3 INTO PRT AND TYPE NO ON KEYBD. PTR WILL THEN
READ TAPE 3 AND TTY OR CRT WILL ASK DONE? TYPE "YES" AND
D) LOAD TAPE 4 INTO PTR AND STORE IN SOURCE THE FIRST PART
INTO ANY NAMED FILE (SORC2). WHEN TTY OR CRT ASKS IF DONE,
TYPED YES. STORE IN THE SAME MANNER THE NEXT PART OF THE
TAPE INTO ANOTHER SOURCE FILE (SORC3).
STEP 2: AT THIS POINT ANY MODIFICATON CAN BE MADE TO SORC1 IF DESIRED
IE. SUB1, SUB2, SUB3, SUB4, OR SUB5 CAN BE ADDED. SORC2 AND
SORC3 MUST NOT BE MODIFIED.
STEP 3: TYPE A) :JO
B) :JF,SORC1
C) :PR,FTN4,2,99
:ST,R,RSOR1
:JO
D) :JF,SORC2
E) :PR,ASMB,2,99
:ST,R,RSOR2
:JO
F) :JF,SORC3
G) :PR,ASMB,2,99
:ST,R,RSOR3
:JO
H) :PR,LOADR,2,,,1,1
RSOR1,RSOR2,RSOR3,/E
I) :ST,P
STEP 4: STORE A BINARY DATA FILE NAMED CSMPF HAVING A SIZE OF
TWO SECTORS.
:ST,B,CSMPF,2
AT THIS POINT CSMP IS READY FOR EXECUTION.
1. :PR,CSMP
2. PUT CARDS IN THE CARD READER AND PRESS READY OR PUT THE
PAPER TAPE IN THE PHOTO READER AND PRESS LOAD IF INPUT
IS ON TAPE.
RIGHT NOW INITIAL RUN MUST BE FROM CARDS. THIS INITIAL RUN
CAN BE USED TO MAKE A PAPER TAPE (LIKE THE ENCLOSED SAMPLE
TAPE) FOR FUTURE RUNS.
H-P CSMP WORKS WITH LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS ASSIGNED THUSLY:
LU EQUIPMENT
---- -----------
1 TTY OR CRT
4 PAPER TAPE PUNCH UNIT
5 PAPER TAPE READER
6 LINE PRINTER
8 CARD READER
AT DISK GEN TIME, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO EXCLUDE EFMP FROM THE DISC PACK
AND ALSO TO PUT THE FOLLOWING ROUTINES IN CORE:
$SRCH
$EX05
$EX10
$EX11
$EX18
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SEE ALSO IBM 1130 APPLICATION PROGRAM OPERATIONS MANUAL "1130 CSMP"
PART NUMBER GH20-0282-2
X11201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CIVIL ENGINEERING COORDINATE GEOMETRY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
GEOMETRY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K WITHOUT EFMP
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
HP (COGO) PROVIDES CIVIL ENGINEERS WITH AN EASY-TO-LEARN PROGRAMMING
TOOL FOR SOLVING COORDINATE GEOMETRY PROBLEMS. ENGINEERS CAN STATE
PROBLEMS IN FAMILIAR TERMINOLOGY SUCH AS AZIMUTH,
DEFLECTION, AND TRAVERSE AJUSTMENT, THUS NO PROGRAMMING IN THE USUAL
SENSE, IS NECESSARY. THE PROGRAMMING SYSTEM IS DESIGNED SPECIFICALLY
FOR COMPUTATION PROBLEMS IN AREAS SUCH AS CONTROL SURVEYS, HIGHWAY
DESIGNS, SUBDIVISION WORK, LAND SURVEYING, RIGHT-OF-WAY SURVEYS, INTER-
CHANGE DESIGN, BRIDGE GEOMETRY AND CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT. HOWEVER, (COGO)
MAY BE USED IN OTHER APPLICATION AREAS.
REFERENCE IBM-1130 APPLICATION PROGRAM MANUAL, PART #GH20-0301-2
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
STORE ALL OF COGO IN ONE SOURCE FILE. COMPILE. STORE THE ASSEMBLER
ROUTINE IN A SEPERATE SOURCE FILE. ASSEMBLE. USUAL LOAD PROCEDURES.
CREATE A DISC FILE COGOF HAVING 60 SECTORS;
:ST,B,COGOF,60
FOR MORE DETAILED INSTRUCTIONS SEE "STORING THE COGO PROGRAM ON DISK"
IN THE USERS MANUAL.
RUN PROCEDURES AND DATA REQUIREMENTS ARE ALSO FOUND IN THE USER
MANUAL.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. IT MAY BE NECESSARY FOR A USER TO CHANGE CERTAIN LU NUMBERS WITHIN
THE SOURCE LISTING BY USING THE FOLLOWING EDIT CMNDS.
:EDIT,SCOGO,INPUT LU
/R,64
MOUT= LU OF PRINCIPLE OUTPUT DEVICE FOR COGO
/R,65
IN= LU OF PRINCIPAL INPUT DEVICE FOR COGO
/R,66
MTYPE= LU OF TTY OR CRT IF DIFFERENT THAN THE NORMAL LU OF 1
/E
PRESENTLY, MOUT=6
IN= 8 (CARD)
MTYPE= 1
IF A PUNCH UNIT OTHER THAN THE STANDARD PUNCH UNIT (LU=4) IS DESIRED
FOR PUNCHED TAPE OUTPUT, THE FOLLOWING EDIT PROCEDURE IS RECOMMENDED
BEFORE LOADING COGO:
:EDIT,SCOGO,1
/R,2508
300 MPCH= LU OF PUNCH DEVICE
/R,2520
301 IF (MOUT - LU OF PUNCH DEVICE)) 304,310,304
/R,2537
315 IF (MOUT - (LU OF PUNCH DEVICE)) 316,317,316
/E
IF THE LU NUMBER OF THE PAPER TAPE READER IS NOT EQUAL TO 5, THE FOLLOW-
ING EDIT PROCEDURE IS RECOMMENDED BEFORE LOADING COGO:
:EDIT,SCOGO,1
/R,375
IN= (LU OF PAPER TAPE READER)
/E
THE PROCEDURE FOR LOADING COGO IS FOUND IN THE COGO USER'S MANUAL.
2. FOR A FASTER EXECUTION OF COGO IT IS RECOMMMENDED THAT AT GEN TIME
(DISC) THE FOLLOWING MODULES BE MADE CORE RESIDENT:
PRINTER DRIVER, DISC DRIVER, $EX05, $EX10, $EX11, $EX18,
AND $SRCH
WITH THESE MODULES CORE RESIDENT AN MP ERROR IS ENCOUNTERED; HOWEVER
IT IS WORTH WHILE TO RESOLVE THIS PROBLEM, ALLOWING COGO TO EXECUTE
MUCH FASTER THAN WITH THESE MODULES DISC RESIDENT.
X11301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PROBN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
NORMAL DISTRIBUTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
STATISTICS
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE FUNCTION RETURNS THE PROBABILITY OF EXCEEDING THE ABSOLUTE VALUE
OF AN ARGUMENT, WHICH IS NORMALLY DISTRIBUTED WITH MEAN 0 AND VARIANCE
1. THE FUNCTION IS BASED ON A POLYNOMIAL TYPE APPROXIMATION WHICH GIVES
A MAXIMUM ERROR OF 3*10**-7 (BETTER THAN MACHINE ACCURACY). UNLIKE THE
NORMAL DISTRIBUTION INCLUDED IN THE HP22143 PACKAGE, WHICH LIMITS THE
ARGUMENT TO LESS THAN 6.0, THIS FUNCTION ALLOWS ALL VALUES OF THE ARGU-
MENT. IT OPERATES IN A DOS OR DOS-M ENVIRONMENT AND IS CALLABLE FROM
FORTRAN AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
PROBN
CALLING SEQUENCE: P=PROBN(X)
OR: JSB PROBN
EXT PROBN
DEF *+2
DEF X
(PROBABILITY RETURNED IN A AND B)
NO ERROR CONDITIONS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X11401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COMPLEX ARITHMETIC FOR HP BASIC
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
COMPLEX BASIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
HP BASIC
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS BASIC CALLABLE SUBROUTINE ALLOWS ADDITION, SUBTRACTION, MULTIPLICA-
TION AND DIVISION OF COMPLEX NUMBERS. IT ALSO ALLOWS A NUMBER OF THE
FORM X1 + IX2 TO BE CONVERTED TO THE FORM L1 * E**(IF1) AND VICE VERSA.
THE CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM HP22078, HIGH SPEED PUNCH DRIVER - BASIC
CALLABLE, CAN BE USED WITH THIS SUBROUTINE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE SUBROUTINE CONSISTS OF TWO CALL-ROUTINES:
CALL (8, T, X1, X2, Y1, Y2, Z1, Z2)
CALL (9, T, X1, X2, L1, F1)
WHERE T IS A SWITCH AND (X1, X2) = (X1 + IX2), (Y1, Y2) = (Y1 + IY2),
(Z1, Z2) - (Z1 + IZ2) AND (L1, F1) = L1* E**(IF1) ARE COMPLEX NUMBERS.
IN CALL (8...) T, (X1, X2), (Y1, Y2) ARE INPUT VALUES AND (Z1, Z2) ARE
OUTPUT VALUES.
THE VALUE OF T DEFINES THE ARITHMETIC OPERATION:
T=1 (Z1, Z2) <= (X1, X2) + (Y1, Y2)
T=2 (Z1, Z2) <= (X1, X2) - (Y1, Y2)
T=3 (Z1, Z2) <= (X1, X2) * (Y1, Y2)
T=4 (Z1, Z2) <= (X1, X2) / (Y1, Y2)
IN CALL (9...) CONVERSION TAKES PLACE. THE VALUE OF T DETERMINES THE
DIRECTION OF CONVERSION:
T=1 (X1, X2) => (L1, F1), (X1, X2) INPUT
T=2 (X1, X2) <= (L1, F1), (L1, F1) INPUT
(-PI < F1 </= PI)
AN ERROR MESSAGE IS PRINTED IF T IS GIVEN AN ILLEGAL VALUE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1.THE FOLLOWING LINES IN THE SUBROUTINE MAY BE ALTERED TO SUIT ANOTHER
BASIC COMPILER:
LINE:
294 LDA 264B
300 STA 264B
307 STA 264B
318 TTY EQU 102B
319 .BACK OCT 2027
328 IFIX EQU 1364B
329 FMP OCT 7416
330 FDV OCT 7463
331 FAD OCT 7343
332 FSB OCT 7347
333 SIN OCT 10647
334 ATN OCT 10532
335 SQRT OCT 10765
343 PIBY2 OCT 10611
(384* M2 EQU 432B)
2. THE SUBROUTINE EXPECTS AN ENTRY-ROUTINE, .ENTR, ON BASE PAGE. IF
THE CONTRIBUTED DRIVER HP 22078 IS NOT USED, THE FOLLOWING ENTRY
ROUTINE MUST BE COMPILED WITH THIS SUBROUTINE:
ORG 30B
.ENTR NOP
STA SORCE
LDB .ENTR,I
STB DEST
CMB,INB
ADB .ENTR
ADB M2
CMB,INB
ISZ .ENTR
.ENT1 LDA SORCE,I
STA DEST,I
CCA
ADA SORCE
STA SORCE
ISZ DEST
INB,SZB
JMP .ENT1
JMP .ENTR,I
M2 EQU 432B
SORCE NOP
DEST NOP
END
X11501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
64 BIT INTEGER LIBRARY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
INTEGER PRECISION LIBRARY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS LIBRARY PROVIDES THE CAPABILITY OF HANDLING INTEGER NUMBERS OF UP
TO TWENTY DIGITS IN FORTRAN PROGRAMS. IT IS ESPECIALLY USEFUL IN
PROGRAMS WHICH DEAL WITH LARGE NUMBERS AND REQUIRE PRECISION EVEN ON
THE LEAST SIGNIFICANT DIGITS, SUCH AS BOOKKEEPING PROGRAMS. IT WAS
DESIGNED TO OPERATE ON ANY DOS OR DOS-M SYSTEM WITH A FORTRAN COMPILER.
THE USER NEEDS ONLY TO DECLARE THE APPROPRIATE VARIABLES IN HIS FORTRAN
PROGRAM AS COMPLEX VARIABLES. FOUR CONSECUTIVE WORDS WILL GENERATE
CALLS TO THE DIFFERENT SUBROUTINES OF THE 64-BIT INTEGER LIBRARY.
THESE LIBRARY SUBROUTINES HAVE THE SAME NAMES AS THE STANDARD COMPLEX
SUBROUTINES.
THIS LIBRARY ALSO INCLUDES TWO ROUTINES TO CONVERT NUMBERS IN ASCII
FORMAT TO FOUR-WORD BINARY FORMAT AND VICE VERSA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ASSEMBLE ALL SUBROUTINES, STORING RELOCATABLE BINARY IN JBIN USING 99
OPTION. THEN BUILD RELOCATABLE FILE TYPING:
:ST,R,RCLIB
EACH 64-BIT INTEGER IS STORED IN 4 CONSECUTIVE WORDS, WITH BIT 15
OF THE FOURTH WORD BEING THE SIGN BIT.
SO, EACH 64-BIT INTEGER MUST BE DECLARED AS A COMPLEX VARIABLE.
EXAMPLE: IF Z = X + Y IS TO BE COMPUTED, WHERE X, Y AND Z ARE 64-BIT
INTEGERS, THE PROGRAM WILL BE:
FTN4
COMPLEX X, Y, Z
-------
-------
Z = X + Y
TO CHANGE A NUMBER IN ASCII FORMAT INTO A FOUR-WORD BINARY FORMAT, THE
SUBROUTINE BIN4 MUST BE USED (SEE SECTION 4.3).
ON THE OTHER HAND, TO CHANGE A FOUR-WORD BINARY NUMBER INTO ASCII
FORMAT, THE SUBROUTINE ALPHA MUST BE USED (SEE SECTION 4.3):
EXAMPLE: FTN4
DIMENSION IX(7), IY(7), IZ(Z)
COMPLEX X,Y,Z
READ (1,2) IX
READ (1,2) IY
CALL BIN4 (IX,14,0,X)
CALL BIN4 (IY,14,0,Y)
----
Z = X + Y
----
CALL ALPHA (Z, 14, 0, IZ)
WRITE (1,2) IZ
----
----
2 FORMAT (7A2)
AT COMPILATION TIME, ANY OPERATION ON COMPLEX VARIABLES GENERATES CALLS
TO SOME OF THE FOLLOWING COMPLEX STANDARD SUBROUTINES.
.CADD
.CSUB
.CMPY
.CDIV
..CCM
.ICPX
.CIWP
CMPLX
REAL
THE 64-BIT SUBROUTINES HAVE BEEN GIVEN THE SAME NAMES. AT LOADING TIME,
THEY ARE GIVEN FIRST SO AS TO BE LOADED INSTEAD OF THE STANDARD SUBROU-
TINES.
PROCEDURE ON DOS-M:
:JO
:PR,LOAD,2
ENTER FILE NAMES OR /E
RPROG, RCLIB, /E
| |_________________NAME OF THE 64-BIT LIBRARY
| RELOCATABLE FILE |
| |
|________________________NAME OF THE USER |
PROGRAM RELOCATABLE |
FILE | |
WHERE: | |
RPROG = NAME...<-------------| |
RCLIB = NAME___<------------------------|
64-BIT LIBRARY COMPOSITION:
BIN4 FOUR-WORD
ALPHA FORMATTER
.CADD
.CSUB FOUR-WORD
.CMPY GENERATIONS
.CDIV
QDIV CALLED BY .CDIV
..CCM 2 COMPLEMENT
.ICPX CHANGES A 1-WORD INTEGER INTO A 4-WORD INTEGER
.CINT CHANGES A 4-WORD INTEGER INTO A 1-WORD INTEGER
CMPLX CHANGES A REAL NUMBER INTO A 4-WORD INTEGER
REAL CHANGES A 4-WORD INTEGER INTO A REAL NUMBER
PARAMETERS OF SUBROUTINE BIN4
CALL BIN4 (IASCI, NBDIG, IPOW, IBIN)
IASCI IS THE BUFFER CONTAINING THE NUMBER IN ASCII FORMAT, 2 DIGITS
PER WORD. THE SIGN CAN BE AT THE BEGINNING OR AT THE END OF
THE NUMBER.
NBDIG IS THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS THAT WILL BE TAKEN IN CONSIDERATION
IN IASCI BUFFER. (NBDIG = DIMENSION OF IASCI BUFFER)
(USUALLY NBDIG IS LARGE ENOUGH NOT TO CUT DOWN THE ASCII
NUMBER!)
IPOW MULTIPLIES THE VALUE OF IBIN BY 10 TO THE POWER OF IPOW.
IBIN IS A FOUR-WORD BUFFER WHERE THE 64-BIT BINARY NUMBER WILL BE
RETURNED.
NOTE: THE NUMBER LOCATED IN IASCI BUFFER MAY CONTAIN A DECIMAL
POINT. DEPENDING ON THE VALUE OF IPOW, IBIN TAKES
DIFFERENT VALUES.
THIS DECIMAL POINT CAN BE USEFUL TO ENTER AMOUNTS OF MONEY, WITH
OR WITHOUT CENTS!..
EXAMPLE:
TO ENTER THE AMOUNT $350 ONE WILL TYPE: 350
(IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO TYPE: 350.00)
TO ENTER THE AMOUNT $350 AND 50 CENTS, ONE WILL
TYPE: 350.50
IF IPOW = 2 IBIN = 35000 IN THE FIRST CASE
IBIN = 35050 IN THE SECOND CASE
AND THEN ALL CALCULATIONS WILL BE MADE IN CENTS.
PARAMETERS OF SUBROUTINE ALPHA
CALL ALPHA (IBIN, NBDIG, IPOW, IASCI)
IBIN IS A 64-BIT BINARY NUMBER
NBDIG IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF CHARACTERS IN WHICH THE
ASCII NUMBER WILL BE RETURNED (DIMENSION OF IASCI
BUFFER).
IPOW MULTIPLIES IBIN BY 10 TO THE POWER OF IPOW
IASCI IS THE BUFFER WHERE THE ASCII NUMBER WILL BE RETURNED
EXAMPLE:
IBIN = 12325
CALL ALPHA (IBIN, 10, -2, IASCI) => IASCI 1 2 3 . 2 5
CALL ALPHA (IBIN, 10, 0 IASCI) => IASCI 1 2 3 2 5
CALL ALPHA (IBIN, 10, 2, IASCI) => IASCI 1 2 3 2 5 0 0
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X11601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM WITH RESCALING UPON OVERFLOW
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FOURIER TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS MICROCODED INTEGER SUBROUTINE PERFORMS A FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM ON
EITHER REAL OR COMPLEX INPUT DATA IN A BCS OR DOS-M ENVIRONMENT. THE
TRANSFORM IS PERFORMED IN PLACE, DESTROYING THE INPUT DATA. THE ARRAY
LENGTHS OF THE INPUT DATA MUST BE A POWER OF .2. AUTOMATIC RESCALING
OCCURS IF AN OVERFLOW IS DETECTED.
THE SUBROUTINE IS CALLABLE FROM ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE OR FORTRAN.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED INCLUDES 8K CORE AND WCS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
LOAD AND RUN INSTRUCTIONS
1. ASSEMBLE THE MICROCODED FFT SUBROUTINE USING THE DOS-M OR BCS
MICROPROCESSOR.
2. LOAD THE WCS BOARD USING THE DOS-M OR BCS MICRO DEBUG EDITOR.
3. COMPILE/ASSEMBLE THE CALLING PROGRAM.
4. IF THE CALLING PROGRAM IS WRITTEN IN FORTRAN, ASSEMBLE THE LINKING
PROGRAM MFFT.
5. ASSEMBLE THE BINVERSION (BIT INVERSION, END TO END) SUBROUTINE.
6. LOAD THE CALLING PROGRAM, THE BINVERSION SUBROUTINE, AND (IF
NECESSARY) THE LINKING SUBROUTINE.
7. EXECUTE THE CALLING PROGRAM.
NOTE: THE BINVERSION LINK PROGRAM, BINV, MAY BE USED IF DESIRED TO
GENERATE THE COMPLEX WEIGHT TABLE.
SUBROUTINES OR MICROPROGRAMS
1. MICROCODED FFET SUBROUTINE
A. ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CALLING SEQUENCE
OCT 105160 MACRO INSTRUCTION TO JUMP TO WCS LOCATION 1007
DEF *+5 ADDRESS OF RETURN POINT
DEF LEN ADDRESS OF ARRAY LENGTH
DEF IMAG ADDRESS OF THE FIRST ELEMENT OF THE IMAGINARY ARRAY
DEF IREAL ADDRESS OF THE FIRST ELEMENT OF THE REAL ARRAY.
DEF TABLE ADDRESS OF THE FIRST ELEMENT OF THE COMPLEX WEIGHT
TABLE.
B. FORTRAN CALLING SEQUENCE
CALL MFFT(LEN,IMAG,IREAL,TABLE)
WHERE MFFT IS AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE LINK TO THE MICROCODE
2. BINVERSION SUBROUTINE. THIS ROUTINE DOES A BIT INVERSION, FROM END
TO END OF A FIELD.
A. ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CALLING SEQUENCE.
JSB BIN JUMP TO THE SUBROUTINE
DEF *+4 ADDRESS OF THE RETURN POINT
DEF LEN ADDRESS OF THE FIRST ELEMENT OF THE IMAGINARY ARRAY
DEF IMAG ADDRESS OF THE FIRST ELEMENT OF THE IMAGINARY ARRAY
DEF IREAL ADDRESS OF THE FIRST ELEMENT OF THE REAL ARRAY
B. FORTRAN CALLING SEQUENCE
3. BINVERSION LINK SUBROUTINE FOR GENERATING WEIGHT TABLE.
ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CALLING SEQUENCE
LDA I ADDRESS OF THE NUMBER TO BE BINVERTED
LDB NBITS ADDRESS OF THE NUMBER OF BITS TO BINVERT
OCT 105140 MACRO INSTRUCTION TO JUMP TO WCS LOCATION 1006
STB J RESULT OF THE BINVERSION IS RETURNED IN THE B
REGISTER
B. FORTRAN CALLING SEQUENCE
CALL BINV(NBITS,I,J)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
AUTOMATIC RESCALING IS PERFORMED IF OVERFLOW IS DETECTED DURING ANY
CALCULATION STEP.
THE TRANSFORM IS PERFORMED IN PLACE, DESTROYING THE INPUT DATA.
THE FENCE REGISTER IS RESTORED IN MICRCODE TO 10000. IF A DIFFERENT
FENCE IS APPLICABLE TO YOUR SYSTEM, CHANGE THE CORRESPONDING LINE IN
MICROCODE.
THE CONTROL CARD OF THE MICRO FFT IS $ORIGIN=1000. IF USING A MODULE
OTHER THAN WCS MODULE 2, CHANGE THIS CONTROL STATEMENT.
EXECUTION TIME IS APPROXIMATELY 0.2 SECONDS FOR A 1024-POINT TRANSFORM.
X11701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TRIPLE PRECISION ROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PRECISION ASCII CONVERSION
CHARACTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M BCS DOS3
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE OF EIGHT ROUTINES ALLOWS TRIPLE WORD FUNCTIONS TO BE
EXECUTED IN A DOS-M, DOS III, OR BCS ENVIRONMENT. A USER CAN CONVERT
FROM 3 CHARACTERS PER WORD TO 2 CHARACTERS PER WORD, AND VICE VERSA;
CONVERT A TRIPLE WORD INTEGER VALUE TO ASCII FORMAT, AND VICE VERSA;
ADD AND SUBTRACT TRIPLE WORD INTEGERS; AND DIVIDE AND MULTIPLY A TRIPLE
WORD INTEGER BY A SINGLE WORD INTEGER. THESE ROUTINES REQUIRE 16K
OF CORE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
A3 TO ASCII FORMATTING ROUTINE
1. NAME FJ
2. FUNCTION - TO CONVERT AN A3 ALPHANUMERIC STRING TO ASCII (THAT IS,
FROM 3 CHARACTERS PER WORD TO 2 CHARACTERS PER WORD).
3. CALLING SEQUENCE
3.1 FORTRAN
CALL FJ (SRCE, DEST, CHRS)
SRCE = A3 SOURCE DATA ADDRESS
DEST = ASCII RESULT ADDRESS
CHRS = THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS TO BE CONVERTED.
3.2 ASSEMBLER
JSB FJ
DEF *+4
DEF SRCE
DEF DEST
DEF CHRS
4. GENERAL
ALL REGISTERS UNDEFINED ON EXIT.
ASCII TO A3 FORMATTING ROUTINE
1. NAME FG
2. FUNCTION - TO CONVERT ASCII ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS TO A3 FORMAT
(THAT IS, FROM 2 CHARACTERS PER WORD TO 3 CHARACTERS PER WORD).
3. CALLING SEQUENCE
3.1 FORTRAN
CALL FG (SRCE, DEST, CHRS)
SRCE = ASCII SOURCE DATA ADDRESS
DEST = A3 RESULT ADDRESS
CHRS = THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS TO BE CONVERTED
3.2 ASSEMBLER
JSB FG
DEF *+4
DEF SRCE
DEF DEST
DEF CHRS
4. GENERAL
ALL REGISTERS UNDEFINED ON EXIT.
A3 FORMAT (PACKED ASCII CODE FOR CONVERSION)
ASCII CODE FOR CONVERSION
SPACE 40B 0
' 56B 1
; 54B 2
/ 57B 3
0 60B 4
1 61B 5
2 62B 6
3 63B 7
4 64B 8
5 65B 9
6 66B 10
7 67B 11
8 70B 12
9 71B 13
A 101B 14
B 102B 15
C 103B 16
D 104B 17
E 105B 18
F 106B 19
G 107B 20
H 110B 21
I 111B 22
J 112B 23
K 113B 24
L 114B 25
M 115B 26
N 116B 27
O 117B 28
P 120B 29
Q 121B 30
R 122B 31
S 123B 32
T 124B 33
U 125B 34
V 126B 35
W 127B 36
X 130B 37
Y 131B 38
Z 132B 39
TRIPLE WORD INTEGER TO ASCII
1. NAME ATC
N. FUNCTION - TO CONVERT A TRIPLE WORD INTEGER VALUE TO ASCII FORMAT
(15 DIGITS EXCLUDING A DECIMAL POINT). THE CONVERTED ASCII STRING
IS PLACED IN THE OUTPUT BUFFER (RIGHT JUSTIFIED) WITH LEADING ZEROES
SET TO BLANKS, A DECIMAL POINT INSERTED WHERE REQUESTED.
NOTE 1:
WHERE N IS THE REQUIRED NUMBER OF DECIMAL DIGITS, IF THE TRIPLE
WORD INTEGER IS LESS THAN 10 TO THE NTH POWER, THE RESULT IS
FORMATTED AS:
0.X(1)X(2)....X(N) WHERE SOME OR ALL OF THE X(I) ARE ZERO.
NOTE 2
WHERE N = 0, ALL NUMBERS WILL HAVE A TRAILING DECIMAL POINT, THUS:
123456.
3. CALLING SEQUENCES
3.1 FORTRAN
CALL ATC (IAD, IAR, N, IE)
IAD = SOURCE ADDRESS (3 WORDS)
N = NUMBER OF DECIMAL DIGITS AFTER THE DECIMAL POINT(1 WORD)
IAR = OUTPUT BUFFER ADDRESS (8 WORDS)
IE = STATUS FLAG
BIT 0 IS SET TO 1 IF THE OUTPUT ASCII STRING CONTAINS
MORE THAN 7 DECIMAL DIGITS.
BIT 15 IS SET TO 1 IF THE SOURCE STRING WAS NEGATIVE.
3.2 ASSEMBLER
JSB ATC
DEF RETURN (DEF *+4)
DEF SOURCE DATA
DEF BUFFER ADDRESS
DEF N
DEF IE
4. GENERAL
ALL REGISTERS UNDEFINED ON EXIT.
CALL THE TRIPLE WORD 2'S COMPLEMENTER ROUTINE, .TWC.
ASCII TO TRIPLE WORD INTEGER
1. NAME ATF
2. FUNCTION - TO CONVERT AN ASCII NUMBER (MAX OF 15 CHARACTERS) TO
THREE WORD INTEGER FORMAT. TERMINATE ON ASCII SPACE OR CR.
3. CALLING SEQUENCE
3.1 FORTRAN
CALL ATF (IAD, IUL, IAR, IE)
IAD = SOURCE DATA ADDRESS
IUL = 0 FIRST CHARACTER IN MOST SIGNIFICANT HALF OF FIRST WORD
= 1 FIRST CHARACTER IN LEAST SIGNIFICANT HALF OF FIRST WORD
IAR = RESULT DATA ADDRESS
IE = 1 ERROR ON RETURN (MORE THAN 14 CHARACTERS OR NON-NUMERIC
CHARACTERS EXCEPT DECIMAL POINT)
= 0 NO ERROR
3.2 ASSEMBLER
JSB ATF
DEF RETURN (DEF *+5)
DEF SOURCE BUFFER
DEF UPPER/LOWER FLAG
DEF RESULT BUFFER
DEF ERROR FLAG
RETURN
4. GENERAL
ALL REGISTERS UNDEFINED ON EXIT.
CALL ROUTINE ATM.
DIVIDE/MULTIPLY TRIPLE WORD INTEGER
1. NAME ATD AND ATM
2. FUNCTION - DIVIDE (ATD) OR MULTIPLY (ATM) A TRIPLE WORD INTEGER
NUMBER BY A SINGLE WORD INTEGER NUMBER.
3. CALLING SEQUENCES
3.1 FORTRAN
CALL ATD (IAD, N, IAR, IE)
ATM
IAD = TRIPLE WORD INTEGER
N = SINGLE WORD INTEGER
IAR = TRIPLE WORD INTEGER RESULT
IE = REMAINDER (OR 100000 IF OVERFLOW)
= 0 NO REMAINDER (NO OVERFLOW)
3.2 ASSEMBLER
JSB ATD/ATM
DEF RETURN (DEF *+5)
DEF TRIPLE WORD INTEGER
DEF SINGLE WORD INTEGER
DEF TRIPLE WORD RESULT
DEF REMAINDER (SET TO 100000 IF OVERFLOW)
4. GENERAL
ALL REGISTERS UNDEFINED ON EXIT.
ADD/SUBTRACT TRIPLE WORD INTEGER
1. NAME ATA AND ATS
2. FUNCTION - ADD (ATA) OR SUBTRACT (ATS) TRIPLE WORD INTEGERS -
RESULT IS HELD IN FIRST TRIPLE WORD INTEGER LOCATIONS.
3. CALLING SEQUENCE
3.1 FORTRAN
CALL ATA (IA1, IA2, IE)
(ATS)
IA1 = TRIPLE WORD INTEGER 1
IA2 = TRIPLE WORD INTEGER 2
IE = 1 ERROR (OVERFLOW)
= 0 NO ERROR
3.2 ASSEMBLER
JSB ATA/ATS
DEF RETURN (DEF *+4)
DEF TRIPLE WORD 1
DEF TRIPLE WORD 2
DEF ERROR FLAG
RETURN
4. GENERAL
ALL REGISTERS UNDEFINED ON EXIT.
ROUTINE ATS CALLS ATA.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X11801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CURVE FITTING WEIGHTED AVERAGING
**REVISION? YES
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
PLOTTER GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'FOCUS' MERITS CONSIDERATION AS A CURVE FITTING METHOD, WHEN WORKING
WITH DATA THAT DOES NOT APPROXIMATE A RECOGNIZABLE FUNCTION. AS LONG
AS THERE IS SUFFICIENT DATA, 'FOCUS' WILL WORK, UNCHANGED, ON A VARIETY
OF DATA PATTERNS. IT WILL QUICKLY FIT DATA WITHOUT EITHER CONVERGENCE
OR ACCURACY PROBLEMS. 'FOCUS' TAKES THE WRINKLES OUT OF OTHERWISE
ERRATIC DATA BY USING A WEIGHTED AVERAGE. WEIGHTS USED ARE W1=1,
W2=2, AND W3=1.
P(N)= W1*P(N-1) + W2*P(N) + W3*P(N+1)/(W1 + W2 + W3)
LACKING ENOUGH NEIGHBORS, END POINTS REQUIRE SPECIAL ATTENTION. FOR
THE FIRST POINT, W1 IS SET TO 0, AND THE LAST POINT USES W3=0. THE
AVERAGING IS REPEATED FOR EACH POINT A SPECIFIED NUMBER OF TIMES. THE
USER OF 'FOCUS' SHOULD ADJUST THAT NUMBER TO HIS/HER APPLICATION.
THE DATA BEGINS TO LOSE SIGNIFICANCE AS THE AVERAGING CONTINUES.
ULTIMATELY, A STRAIGHT LINE ON THE ABSOLUTE AVERAGE WOULD RESULT.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENT INCLUDE 4K AND A TELETYPE. HE 7210A IS OPTIONAL.
BCS OPERATING SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
FIT2 (AVE1, DELT1, DELT2)
OUTPUT - AVE1 IS THE AVERAGE RESIDUAL* FROM THE FIRST WEIGHTED
AVERAGING.
OUTPUT - AVE IS THE AVERAGE RESIDUAL FROM A SECOND WEIGHTED AVERAGING
AFTER DATA HAS BEEN SELECTIVELY REMOVED.
OUTPUT - DELT1 IS THE WORST RESIDUAL FROM THE FIRST PASS.
OUTPUT - DELT2 IS THE WORST RESIDUAL FROM THE SECOND PASS.
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL FIT2(AVE1, AVE, DELT1, DELT2)
------------------------------------------------------------------------
FOCUS(NDATA, DATA, NFOC, AVE, ORIG, DELT1)
INPUT - NDATA IS THE NUMBER OF DATA POINTS TO BE FIT
INPUT - DATA IS THE DATA ARRAY, OUTPUT CONTAINS FIT DATA
INPUT - NFOC IS THE NUMBER OF TIMES THE AVERAGING IS TO BE REPEATED
OUTPUT - AVE IS THE AVERAGE RESIDUAL
OUTPUT - ORIG IS THE ORIGINAL DATA
OUTPUT - DELT1 IS THE WORST RESIDUAL
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL FOCUS(NDATA, DATA, NFOC, AVE, ORIG, DELT1)
*DIFFERENCE BETWEEN ORIGINAL DATA AND AVERAGED DATA.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
BEFORE FIT2 WAS CALLED, AB (INDEPENDENT AXIS) AND ER (DEPENDENT AXIS)
WERE STORED, THE COORDINATE PAIRS WERE ORDERED IN INCREASING VALUES
OF AB, AND OBVIOUSLY BAD VALUES OF ER WERE REMOVED. FIT2 FOLLOWS THESE
STEPS:
1. A CALL TO FOCUS AVERAGES ER TEN TIMES (IT=10).
2. ER VALUES THAT ARE 2.5 TIMES THE RESIDUAL (AVERAGE DIFFERENCE
BETWEEN ORIGINAL AND FINAL POINTS) ARE REMOVED.
3. WITH THIS "BAD" DATA REMOVED, FOCUS IS CALLED AGAIN.
4. THE RESULTS ARE PLOTTED AND KEY FIT VALUES ARE PRINTED.
FOCUS FOLLOWS THESE STEPS:
1. DATA TO BE AVERAGED ARE STORED IN ORIG TO DETERMINE RESIDUALS.
2. DATA POINTS ARE AVERAGED NFOC TIMES.
3. THE AVERAGE RESIDUAL IS CALCULATED.
X11901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
EXOR RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
RANDOM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
MTS BASIC ED BASIC
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE PROVIDES SINGLE-TERMINAL BASIC WITH A HIGH-QUALITY
RANDOM NUMBER GENERATOR BY COMBINING FIBONACCI AND TWO DIFFERENT
MULTIPLICATIVE RANDOM NUMBER GENERATORS.
AN 8K OR 16K EDUCATIONAL BASIC SYSTEM (SINGLE-TERMINAL) IS REQUIRED.
THE ROUTINE USES EAU INSTRUCTIONS.
THE ROUTINE CALLS INTERNAL BASIC ROUTINE .PACK AT LOCATION 1020.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
BASIC CALL:
NN CALL (1,X(K),Y1)
WHERE
NN IS THE STATEMENT NUMBER
1 IS THE SUBROUTINE IDENTIFICATION
X(K) IS AN ARRAY ELEMENT; X MUST HAVE DIMENSION K+1 OR HIGHER.
X MUST NOT BE COMMON. X(K) AND X(K+1) ARE THE SEED OF THE
GENERATOR AND MUST BE INITIALIZED BY THE USER. NOTE: AN
INITIAL VALUE OF ZERO DECREASES THE GENERATOR PERFORMANCE*).
X(K) AND X(K+1) ARE UPDATED BY THE GENERATOR AND SHOULD
NOT BE MANIPULATED BY THE USER EXCEPT WHEN RESTARTING THE
GENERATOR (OF: 5.0).
Y1 IS A SIMPLE VARIABLE. UPON RETURN, IT CONTAINS THE RANDOM
NUMBER.
MIN(Y1) = 2^(-17)
MAX(Y1) = 1 - 2^(-17)
Y1 - RESOLUTION = 2^(-16)
*)
X(1) = 0 WILL DISABLE THE FIBONACCI-GENERATOR
X(2) = 0 WILL GIVE THE MULT-1 GENERATOR THE SEED 000001(8), AND
THE MULT-2 GENERATOR THE SEED 000000(8).
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERR IN CALL ARGM X
THE SEED GIVEN IS NOT A PROPER ARRAY.
ERR IN CALL ARGM Y
THE RETURN VARIABLE IS NOT SIMPLE.
ERROR ACTION:
AFTER PRINTING ERROR MESSAGE, THE PARAMETER TYPE CHECK CONTINUES, AND
A RETURN TO THE BASIC PROGRAM IS MADE WITH UNCHANGED VALUES OF THE
PARAMETERS.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1) THE ELEMENT X(K) AND X(K+1) GENERALLY HAVE UNNORMALIZED CONTENTS,
AND NORMALIZATION SHOULD BE AVOIDED. OPERATIONS WHICH DO NOT
NORMALIZE ARE:
MAT A = B
LET Y2=Y1
NAMELY THOSE WHICH REPRESENT SIMPLE COPYING.
2) LOCATIONS 1020(6) AND 154(8) OF BASIC ARE REFERRED DIRECTLY. SEE
SECTION 3.2.
3) THE EXECUTION TIME ON A 2100A WITH EAU FOR THE STATEMENT CALL
(1,X(1),Y) IS 1.95 MSECS; THE STATEMENT LET Y = RND(1) EXECUTES
IN 0.87 MSECS.
X12001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: SMPLX
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SIMPLEX LINEAR PROGRAMMING FOR DOS-3
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
LINEAR EQ. MATRIX
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-3
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM SOLVES LINEAR PROGRAMMING PROBLEMS BY USING THE SIMPLEX
OR DANTZIG METHOD. THE PROGRAM MINIMIZES AN OBJECTIVE FUNCTION SUBJECT
UP TO 100 CONSTRAINTS WITH NO MORE THAN 1000 VARIABLES (REAL +
ARTIFICIAL + SLACK); THE PROGRAM NEEDS AS DATA THE FIRST TABLEAU OF
THE SIMPLEX METHOD, AND THEN ELABORATES THE FOLLOWING TABLEAUS OF THE
METHOD GETTING TO THE OPTIMAL SOLUTION.
THE PROGRAM CAN MAXIMIZE PROBLEMS IF THE OBJECTIVE FUNCTION OF THE
MATHEMATICAL MODEL IS MULTIPLIED BY -1.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
5
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DATA FORMAT (LU#5)
N,M REGISTER #1 N = NUMBER OF CONSTRAINTS
M = NUMBER OF VARIABLES
(C(I),I=1,M) REGISTER #2 C(I) = COEFFICIENTS OF THE
OBJECTIVE FUNCTION
(A(I),I=1,N) REGISTER #3 A(I) = COLUMN NO. 1 OF THE -
MATRIX OF CONSTRAINTS
COEFFICIENT
(A(I),I=1,N) REGISTER #M+2 A(I) = COLUMN NO. M
(B(I),I=1,N) REGISTER #M+3 B(I) = CONSTRAINTS LIMITS
(IBASE(I),I=1,N) REGISTER #M+4 IBASE(I) = NUMBER OF THE VECTOR
THAT IS IN ORIGINAL
BASE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X12101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM WITH DATA STORAGE ON DISC
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
FOURIER TRANSFORM
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM FINDS THE FORWARD FOURIER TRANSFORM OF A LARGE COMPLEX
DATA ARRAY STORED ON DISC, USING THE COOLEY-TUKEY ALGORITHM. THE
PROGRAM IS WRITTEN FOR A BLOCK SIZE OF 4096 BUT THIS LENGTH (AN INTEGER
POWER OF 2) CAN EASILY BE CHANGED. THE TRANSFORM IS EXECUTED IN PLACE,
SO THE ORIGINAL DATA ARE LOST. THE RESULT IS LEFT IN BIT REVERSE ORDER,
BUT A SEPARATE PROGRAM FOR PRINTOUT IN THE RIGHT ORDER IS PROVIDED.
THE TRANSFORM PROGRAM USES A SECOND ARRAY ON DISC FOR STORAGE OF SINE -
AND COSINE VALUES NEEDED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
RESERVE SPACE ON DISK FOR THE DATA ARRAY IN THE FILE DIFFT :
:ST,B,DIFFT,128 (SPACE FOR 4096 COMPLEX NUMBERS).
RESERVE SPACE ON DISK FOR THE SINE-COSINE ARRAY IN THE FILE CEXPO :
:ST,B,CEXPO,64 (SPACE FOR 2048 COMPLEX NUMBERS).
RUN A PROGRAM TO STORE DATA ON DISK. COMPILE AND LOAD THE TRANSFORM
PROGRAM FTD. RUN THE PROGRAM : PR, FTD. COMPILE AND LOAD THE PRINTOUT
PROGRAM FTDO. RUN THE PROGRAM : PR, FTDO.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IN ORDER TO PROCESS LARGER DATA ARRAYS ONLY THE VARIABLES N AND N2,
WHERE N = 2**N2, NEED TO BE CHANGED IN THE PROGRAM FTD. (N IS MINIMUM
128). FOR THE PRINTOUT PROGRAM FTDO THESE VARIABLES ARE NAMED N AND M.
THE NUMBER OF LINES PRINTED IS SET BY NH.
X12201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
3 DIMENSIONAL PLOT SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
GRAPHIC PLOTTER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE PROJECTS A THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECT IN PERSPECTIVE ON A
SIMPLE X-Y PLOTTING SYSTEM OR GRAPHIC DISPLAY TERMINAL. IT TRANSFORMS
AN (X,Y,Z) COORDINATE IN THREE SPACE TO AN ORTHOGRAPHIC PROJECTION
IN TWO SPACE, USING FOUR CALLS. THE FIRST CALL DEFINES THE ANGLES
OF THE COORDINATE AXES X,Y,Z ALLOWING DISPLAY OF VARIOUS ROTATIONS OF
AN OBJECT. THE SECOND AND THIRD CALLS SET MINIMUM AND MAXIMUM (X,Y,Z)
VALUES, WHILE THE FOURTH CALL TRANSFORMS AN (X,Y,Z) COORDINATE IN THREE
SPACE TO AN (IX,IY) COORDINATE REPRESENTATION IN TWO SPACE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
A. COMPILE PLOT 3 SUBROUTINE IN ACCORDANCE WITH OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
GIVEN IN HP FORTRAN PROGRAMMER'S REFERENCE MANUAL.
B. LOAD CALLING PROGRAM AND PLOT 3 SUBROUTINE USING THE BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM.
C. SET ANGLES FOR AXES, MINIMUM VALUES TO BE PLOTTED, AND MAXIMUM
VALUES TO BE PLOTTED USING THE APPROPRIATE CALLS. (SEE ENTRY POINTS
FOR DESCRIPTION OF CALL STATEMENTS.)
D. THE SUBROUTINE MAY NOW BE CALLED TO PERFORM COORDINATE TRANSFORMA-
TIONS.
ENTRY POINT(S)
A. CALL (1,X,Y,Z,IX,IY)
THIS CALL SETS THE ANGLES FOR THE PLOT PROCESSOR. X IS THE NUMBER
OF DEGREES THE X-AXIS IS TO BE ROTATED FROM THE HORIZONTAL. LIKE-
WISE, Y AND Z SPECIFY THE ROTATIONS OF THE Y AND Z-AXIS RESPECTIVELY
FROM THE HORIZONTAL. IX AND IY ARE MEANINGLESS IN THIS CALL.
B. CALL (2,X,Y,Z,IX,IY)
X, Y AND Z SPECIFY THE MINIMUM (X,Y,Z) COORDINATE TO BE DISPLAYED.
IX AND IY ARE MEANINGLESS.
C. CALL(3,X,Y,Z,IX,IY)
X, Y AND Z SPECIFY THE MAXIMUM (X,Y,Z) COORDINATE TO BE DISPLAYED.
IX AND IY ARE MEANINGLESS.
D. CALL (4,X,Y,Z,IX,IY)
X, Y AND Z DEFINE THE COORDINATE OF A POINT IN THREE-DIMENSIONAL
SPACE. UPON RETURN IX AND IY ARE THE SCALED, TWO-DIMENSIONAL
(X,Y) COORDINATE REPRESENTING THE DESIRED THREE-DIMENSIONAL
PROJECTION. IX AND IY GENERALLY RETURN AS INTEGERS IN THE 0 TO
255 RANGE. THE ACTUAL VALUES OF IX AND IY WILL VARY, HOWEVER, WITH
DIFFERENT ANGLE SETTINGS. SEE SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS
PLOT 3 IS WRITTEN TO NORMALIZE ALL (X,Y) COORDINATES TO RETURN AS
INTEGERS IN THE RANGE OF 0 TO 255. HOWEVER, THE ACTUAL COORDINATE
VALUES RETURNED DOES DEPEND ON WHAT ANGLES HAVE BEEN INPUT AND WHAT
MAXIMUM AND MINIMUMS HAVE BEEN ENTERED. OBVIOUSLY, IF AN (X,Y,Z)
COORDINATE GIVEN EXCEEDS THE MAXIMUM VALUES OR IS SMALLER THAN THE
MINIMUM VALUES, THEN THE (IX,IY) VALUE RETURNED WILL MOST LIKELY BE OUT
OF THE 0 TO 255 RANGE. SINCE THERE IS NO RULE OR ALGORITHM WHICH WILL
READILY GIVE AN ESTIMATE OF THE RANGE TO BE EXPECTED WITH VARYING THE
ANGLES OF THE AXES, THE MOST PRACTICAL PROCEDURE IS JUST TRIAL AND
ERROR.
X12301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TEKTRONIX 4010 DRIVER AND GRAPH PACKAGE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 2 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
TEKTRONIX GRAPHIC LIBRARY
DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE CONSISTS OF THREE PARTS:
1. DVR00, A DOS-M SYSTEM DEVICE DRIVER FOR THE TEKTRONIX 4010 KEYBOARD
DISPLAY. IN ADDITION TO ALL THE ASCII INPUT/OUTPUT FACILITIES OF
THE DOS-M SYSTEM TELETYPE DRIVER, THIS DRIVER FULLY EXPLOITS THE
GRAPHICS AND CURSOR-POSITION INPUT FACILITIES OF THE 4010 BY THE USE
OF BINARY READ/WRITE EXEC CALLS. DATA PAIRS SPECIFYING THE X AND Y
COORDINATES BETWEEN WHICH LINES ARE TO BE DRAWN CAN BE PACKED IN
SINGLE WORDS OR UNPACKED IN 2 WORDS, EITHER LEFT OR RIGHT JUSTIFIED.
THE X COORDINATE CAN BE SUPPLIED, OR IMPLIED VALUES STARTING FROM
ZERO AND INCREMENTED BY ONE CAN BE USED. CONTROL CALLS ARE USED TO
ERASE THE SCREEN; RESET THE ASCII SCREEN POSITION TO THE TOP LEFT;
OUTPUT A SERIES OF LINE FEEDS, LINE BACKUPS, SPACES FORWARD AND
BACKWARDS; UNDERLINE; AND ACTIVATE THE HARD COPY UNIT AND ALTER-
NATIVE CHARACTER SETS.
2. TWO FORTRAN PROGRAMS AND SUBROUTINES TO TEST THE FACILITIES OF
DVR00.
3. A SET OF FORTRAN SUBROUTINES, BASED ON CALCOMP ROUTINES, EXPLOITING
DVR00. THESE ROUTINES ALLOW THE USER TO SORT AND SCALE DATA,
PRODUCE GRAPHS AND DRAW HISTOGRAMS ON THE 4010.
THE DRIVER AND SUBROUTINES WILL OPERATE IN A MINIMUM DOS-M ENVIRONMENT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEE EXTENDED DOCUMENTATION.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X12401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
COPPER - CONSTANTAN THERMOCOUPLE VOLTAGE TO DEGREES CELSIUS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 3 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION MEASUREMENT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SUBROUTINE ACCEPTS A VALUE OF THE VOLTAGE READ FROM A COPPER-
CONSTANTAN THERMOCOUPLE IN MICROVOLTS AND RETURNS A TEMPERATURE VALUE
IN DEGREES CENTIGRADE. THIS VALUE IS CORRECT TO .1 OF A CELSIUS DEGREE.
THE METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE TEMPERATURE IS INTERPOLATION OF STANDARD
THERMOCOUPLE TABLES AT 10 DEGREE INTERVALS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE SUBROUTINE ACCEPTS A VALUE OF THE VOLTAGE READ FROM A COPPER-
CONSTANTAN THERMOCOUPLE IN MICROVOLTS. IT RETURNS TO THE CALLING
PROGRAM A VALUE FOR THE TEMPERATURE IN CENTIGRADE DEGREES. THIS VALUE
IS CORRECT TO .1 OF A CELSIUS DEGREE. THE METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE
TEMPERATURE IS INTERPOLATION OF STANDARD THERMOCOUPLE TABLES AT 10
DEGREE INTERVALS.
THE SUBROUTINE MAY BE CONVERTED TO USE WITH OTHER TYPES OF THERMO-
COUPLES BY CHANGING VALUES OF NEMF AND IEMF.
IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT THE DIMENSION OF TEMP AND ITC ARE 1 IN THE
SUBROUTINE. THEIR CORRESPONDING VARIABLES MAY BE DIMENSIONED TO ANY
SIZE IN THE CALLING PROGRAM WITHOUT CHANGING THE DIMENSION STATEMENT IN
THE SUBROUTINE.
CALL CONVT (ITS,N,TEMP)
WHERE ITC - VALUE OF THERMOCOUPLE READING IN MICROVOLTS
N - NUMBER OF POINTS TO BE CONVERTED
TEMP - CENTIGRADE TEMPERATURE RETURNED TO CALLING PROGRAM
NOTE THAT THE TEMPERATURE RANGE IS -199 TO +399 DEGREES
CELSIUS. VALUES OUTSIDE THIS RANGE SHOULD NOT BE ENTERED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MAY WISH TO MODIFY THE SUBROUTINE TO NARROW THE TEMPERATURE
RANGE TO ONE IN WHICH HE IS MOST INTERESTED. THIS WILL RESULT IN SOME
SAVING OF MEMORY.
SYMBOLIC EDIT INSTRUCTIONS FOR THREE EXAMPLES ARE SHOWN BELOW.
1) RANGE - 199 TO 0
/CD,14,40,48
/D,36,76
/D,78
/D,90,99
2) RANGE 0 TO 399
/CD,14,32,30
/D,15,35
/D,78,89
3) RANGE -99 TO 99
/R,14
DIMENSION ITS(1),TEMP(1),IEMF(11),NEMF(11)
/D,36,35
/D,47,76
/CR,79,17,17
10
/CR,90,17,18
10
X12501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: DBIN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SCIENTIFIC PROGRAMMER BCD BINARY CONVERSION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 3 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
BCD CONVERSION
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS BCD BINARY CONVERSION SUBROUTINE CONVERTS A FOUR DIGIT BCD NUMBER
TO BINARY USING ONLY TWO MULTIPLES. THE ROUTINE RETURNS ANSWER IN THE
SAME ARGUMENT. EACH DIGIT IS CONSIDERED TO BE FOUR BITS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALL DBIN(NUMBR)
NUMBR - A FOUR DIGIT BCD INTEGER NUMBER
- CONVERTED NUMBER RETURNED HERE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
TO TEST BCD NUMBERS GREATER THAN 7999, YOU WILL HAVE TO MANUALLY STORE
NUMBER IN A-REGISTER BEFORE ROUTINE EXECUTES. THE REASON FOR THIS IS
THAT ANY NUMBER GREATER THAN 32767(10) IN FORTRAN IS CONSIDERED
NEGATIVE.
X12601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BCS ASYNCHRONOUS DATA SET INTERFACE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 4 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER ASYNCHRONOUS DATA COMM
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DRIVER ESTABLISHES DATA COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN HP2100 SERIES
COMPUTERS AND THE TC-380 OLIVETTI BUFFERED TERMINAL. IT ALLOWS THE HP
COMPUTER TO INPUT OR OUTPUT CONTROL SIGNALS WITH THE FOLLOWING FEATURES;
HALF-DUPLEX TRANSMISSION, 1200 BITS/SEC., EVEN PARITY, 8-BIT CHARACTERS,
1 START BIT, AND 1 STOP BIT. THE DRIVER ALSO INITIATES, CONTINUES,
AND COMPLETES ALL DATA TRANSMISSION OR RECEPTION COMMANDS VIA AN
HP12587A INTERFACE BOARD. ON READ REQUESTS, THE DRIVER RECEIVES
CHARACTER PER CHARACTER ONE OLIVETTI FORMATTED BUFFER WITH A MAXIMUM OF
230 ISO CODE CHARACTERS. IT TRANSLATES THESE CHARACTERS INTO AN ASCII
PACKED BUFFER OR AN XS-3 BUFFER PROPERLY FROMATTED FOR COMMUNICATION
WITH A UNIVAC 1108 COMPUTER. ON WRITE REQUESTS, THE DRIVER TRANSLATES
INTO ISO CODE AND SENDS ONE ASCII PACKED BUFFER OR ONE FORMATTED XS-3
BUFFER CHARACTER TO THE OLIVETTI TERMINAL.
THE COMMUNICATION PROCEDURES ARE SELECTING AND POLLING. ONE USEFUL
APPLICATION OF THIS DRIVER IS IN THE ENVIRONMENT WHERE AN HP MINI-
COMPUTER HANDLES I/O FOR A UNIVAC 1108 COMPUTER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE (CONTINUED)
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DRIVER MUST BE CONFIGURED INTO SYSTEM AT PCS TIME. THE COMMUNICATION
PROCEDURES ARE:
SELECTING:
COMPUTER: EOT+ADR EOT+ADR STX+ADR+TEXT+ETB/ETX+LRC
DEVICE: EOT ACK NACK
COMPUTER: STX+ADR+TEXT+ETB/ETX+LRC
DEVICE: ACK
POLLING:
COMPUTER: EOT+ADR EOT+ADR NACK
DEVICE: EOT STX+ADR+TEXT+ETB/ETX+LRC
COMPUTER: ACK
DEVICE: STX+ADR+TEXT+ETB/ETX+LRC
WHERE:
EOT, STX, EB, ETX, ACK, NACK ARE CONVERSATION CHARACTERS,
TEXT IS THE BUFFER TO BE TRANSMITTED OR RECEIVED,
LRC IS THE CALCULATED CHARACTER FOR PARITY CHECK
ADR IS THE ADDRESS OF THE PERIPHERAL DEVICE PERFORMED BY THE DRIVER
FOLLOWING THE FUNCTION WORD OF THE IOC REQUEST.
THE .IOC. CALL IS:
- JSB .IOC.
- FUNCTION CODE
- REJECT INSTRUCTION
- DEF BUFFER ADDRESS
- NB OF CHARACTERS IF < 0
- NB OF WORDS IF > 0
THE FUNCTION WORD MAY BE:
B15-12=1 READ B11=0 XS3/ASCII UNPACKED B10=0 ETB B9-6=DEV.ADD.
B5-0=S.C.
= 1 ASCII PACKED =1 ETX
=2 WRITE
=0 CLEAR
=4 STATUS
THE DRIVER ACCEPTS AND PROCESSES A READ OR WRITE REQUEST IN EITHER
PACKED ASCII OR XS3 MODES (Z VERSION) AND PACKED ASCII OR UNPACKED
ASCII MODES (N VERSION).
FOR A READ REQUEST, THE DRIVER RECEIVES AND TRANSLATES CHARACTER PER
CHARACTER ONE OLIVETTI FORMATTED BUFFER OF MAXIMUM 230 ISO CODED
CHARACTERS, INTO ASCII PACKED BUFFER OR UNIVAC BUFFER WITH A PROPER
FORMAT FOR COMMUNICATION WITH A 1108 UNIVAC COMPUTER (IN THE Z VERSION).
FOR A WRITE REQUEST, THE DRIVER TRANSLATES INTO ISO MODE AND SENDS
CHARACTER PER CHARACTER ONE ASCII PACKED BUFFER OR ONE FORMATTED XS3
BUFFER TO THE PERIPHERAL DEVICE (Z VERSION).
AFTER THE REINITIALIZATION ATTEMPTS THE DRIVER RETURNS WITH AN ERROR
INDICATION IN CASE OF:
POLLING SEQUENCE:
-MORE OF 30 PARASITES, OR 600 EOT IN BEGINNNG OF PROCEDURE
-EXCEEDED TIME-OUT IN DATASET SWITCHING
-MORE OF 4 NACK FOR A LINE RECEPTION
SELECTING SEQUENCE:
- EXCEEDED TIME-OUT IN DATASET SWITCHING
- MORE OF 500 NACK IN BEGINNING OF PROCEDURE
- MORE OF 5 NACK AFTER RETRANSMISSION OF A LINE
THE DRIVER WILL REJECT A REQUEST IF:
- FUNCTION CODE IS ILLEGAL
- DATASET IS NOT READY
- DEVICE IS NOT READY
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X12701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 2100 REMOTE JOB ENTRY TO IBM HOST CPU
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 4 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DATA COMM IBM BATCH
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS MTS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
(HPRJE) IS A PROGRAM DESIGNED TO ALLOW MEDIUM-TO-HIGH-SPEED REMOTE
JOB ENTRY FUNCTIONS TO BE CARRIED OUT BETWEEN AN IBM (HOST) COMPUTER
AND AN HP2100 SERIES COMPUTER. THE PROGRAM SIMULATES THE FUNCTION OF
AN IBM 2780 TERMINAL WHICH IS ONE OF IBM'S POPULAR MEDIUM-SPEED RJE
TERMINALS.
IN PARTICULAR, THE FUNCTIONS AVAILABLE WITH (HPRJE) ARE AS FOLLOWS:
1. JOB ENTRY. A FILE OF DATA, AS A COBOL SOURCE COMPILE, IS TRANS-
MITTED TO THE IBM (HOST) CPU FOR PROCESSING.
2. JOB RETRIEVAL. OUTPUT FILES FROM ENTERED JOBS ARE RECEIVED FROM THE
IBM (HOST) CPU AND SPOOLED TO TAPE IN LINE PRINTER
FORMAT.
3. JOB STATUS & CONTROL. STATISTICS ON ENTERED JOBS, AS PROCESSING
QUEUES, AND JOB CONTROL FUNCTIONS, AS JOB CANCELLA-
TION, ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST FROM THE HP2100
SYSTEM'S CONSOLE.
4. CARD TO TAPE. (HPRJE) WILL READ CARDS AND WRITE TO MAG TAPE, THUS
GENERATING AN INPUT FILE FOR TRANSMISSION TO THE (HOST)
CPU.
5. FILE PRINT (HPRJE) WILL PRINT JOB FILES RECEIVED FROM THE (HOST)
CPU.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE FOLLOWING IS A STEP-BY-STEP DESCRIPTION OF PROCEDURES REQUIRED TO
BRING HPRJE INTO OPERATION:
1. OBTAIN HP HARDWARE REQUIRED AS SPECIFIED (AND AS DESIRED) IN
SECTION 3.5 RUN HARDWARE DIAGNOSTIC ROUTINES ON RECEIVED HARDWARE.
2. OBTAIN A MODEM COMPATIBLE WITH "HOST" CPU'S MODEM(S). (BELL 201'S
ARE USUALLY STANDARD FOR DIAL-UP TRANSMISSIONS AT 2000 BPS). IF
THE MODEM IS NON-BELL, OBTAIN A DATA ACCESS ARRANGEMENT "DAA"
FOR IT.
(WITH AUTO-ANSWER FEATURE! D.50'C' EXPECTS IT!)
3. PREPARE A CONTROL SYSTEM USING PCS FOR EITHER A BCS BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM) OR MTS (MAG. TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM). INCLUDE DRIVERS FOR
ALL DEVICES DESCRIBED IN SECTION 3.5. INCLUDING TELECOMMUNICATION
DRIVER D.50'C' (CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM 22328) AND ITS REQUIRED
MODIFIED TIME BASE GENERATOR DRIVER D.43. (NOTE: D.50'C' MUST BE
LOADED AT RUN TIME BECAUSE OF ITS SIZE.)
4. COMPILE HPRJE AND REQUIRED SUBROUTINES CONVT, B2ASC, & AS2BI PRO-
DUCING RELOCATABLE PAPER TAPE OUTPUT. LINK THESE PROGRAMS AND
D.50'C' TOGETHER USING THE BCS LOADER GENERATED IN STEP #3. THE
ABSOLUTE OUTPUT TAPE MAY BE LOADED WITH THE BBL AND IS THE FINAL
PRODUCT, I.E. HPRJE.
5. INFORM YOUR "HOST" COMPUTER'S SYSTEM ANALYST OF YOUR FEATURES, AS
CODE (EBCDIC), TRAILING BLANK SUPPRESSION, MULTIPLE RECORDS, ETC.
SO HE MAY DO A SYSGEN ON HIS SYSTEM TO INCLUDE YOU AS A REMOTE.
NOTE ANY "SIGNON" REQUIREMENTS HE MAY ASSIGN YOU.
6. YOU'RE ON THE AIR!!
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD HPRJE EITHER FROM MAGNETIC TAPE BY TYPING ":PROG,HPRJE" TO THE
"NEXT?" COMMAND OF MTS OR FROM PAPER TAPE USING THE BBL.
2. HPRJE TYPES A HEADER MESSAGE FOLLOWED BY THE FUNCTION LIST:
1.= PRINT FUNCTION LIST
2 = TRANSMIT JOB FILE
3 = RECEIVE JOB OUTPUT
4 = STATUS REQUEST
5 = ADVANCE MAG. TAPE
6 = CARD TO MAG. TAPE
7 = PRINT FILE
8 = RETURN TO MTS
(SETTING OF SWITCH ZERO IN THE SWITCH REGISTER ELIMINATES THE
WRITING OF THE FUNCTION LIST TO THE CONSOLE WHEN THE PROGRAM IS
INITIALLY STARTED.)
ENTER DESIRED FUNCTION:
3. TYPE A ONE-DIGIT RESPONSE CORRESPONDING TO THE FUNCTION DESIRED FOR
EXECUTION. HPRJE WILL CARRY OUT THAT FUNCTION AND UPON COMPLETION,
ALLOW ANOTHER FUNCTION TO BE SELECTED.
4. JOB SUBMITTAL
TO PREPARE AND SUBMIT A JOB(S) FOR PROCESSING, CARRY OUT THE
FOLLOWING STEPS:
A. RUN CARD TO TAPE ON ALL JOBS FOR SUBMITTAL (TO GENERATE AN INPUT
FILE FOR TRANSMISSION). USE FUNCTION #6 OF HPRJE OR ANY OTHER
STANDARD CARD TO TAPE ROUTINE. CREATE ONE FILE ONLY. MULTIPLE
JOBS MAY BE APPENDED TOGETHER ON INPUT. MOUNT TAPE.
B. SELECT THE TRANSMIT JOB FILE FUNCTION (#2) OR RESPOND "/S" TO
"COMMAND?" IF EXECUTING THE STATISTICS FUNCTION (#4).
C. HPRJE WILL ASK "INPUT CODE?". RESPOND "AS" FOR ASCII CODE, IF
HPRJE'S OWN CARD TO TAPE ROUTINE WAS USED TO GENERATE THE INPUT
FILE. RESPOND "EB" FOR EBCDIC CODE IF SOME OTHER CARD TO TAPE
ROUTINE WAS USED THAT GENERATED AN EBCDIC DATA FILE.
D. HPRJE WILL TYPE "DIAL REMOTE". DIAL THE "HOST" CPU, WAIT FOR THE
ECHO SUPRESSOR TONE TO DIE (HIGH PITCHED TONE) AND PRESS DATA.
THE INPUT FILE WILL THEN BE TRANSMITTED TO THE "HOST" CPU FOR
PROCESSING.
E. UPON COMPLETION, HPRJE WILL DISPLAY JOB ID STATISTICS
FOLLOWED BY A RECORD COUNT CORRESPONDING TO THE NUMBER OF CARD
IMAGES READ FROM TAPE AND THEN WAIT FOR ANY OUTPUT THE HOST MAY
HAVE WITHOUT REQUIRING A NEW PHONE CONNECTION.
F. CONTROL IS THEN RETURNED TO ALLOW A NEW FUNCTION TO BE SELECTED.
5. JOB RETRIEVAL
TO RECEIVE THE OUTPUT FROM SUBMITTED JOBS, CARRY OUT THE FOLLOWING
STEPS:
A. MOUNT AND ADVANCE TO, IF NECESSARY, THE CORRECT MAG. TAPE
POSITION.
B. SELECT THE "RECEIVE JOB OUTPUT" FUNCTION (#3) OR RESPOND "/R"
TO "COMMAND?" IF EXECUTING THE STATISTICS FUNCTION (#4). (NOTE:
IF YOU ARE NOT SURE IF OUTPUT IS READY, IT IS BEST TO EXECUTE THE
APPROPRIATE STAT COMMAND TO DETERMINE SUCH INFORMATION, THUS PRE-
VENTING A PHONE CONNECTION IN WHICH THERE IS NO DATA TO BE SENT
BY EITHER CPU.)
C. HPRJE WILL ASK "OUTPUT CODE?". RESPOND "AS" FOR ASCII IF HPRJE'S
OWN PRINT ROUTINE IS TO BE USED. RESPOND "EB" FOR EBCDIC IF
SOME OTHER PRINT ROUTINE IS TO BE USED THAT EXPECTS EBCDIC
SPOOLED DATA.
D. HPRJE WILL TYPE "DIAL REMOTE". DIAL THE "HOST" CPU AS IN "4.D."
ABOVE. THE DATA FILE WILL THEN BE RECEIVED AND SPOOLED TO MAG.
TAPE.
E. UPON COMPLETION, HPRJE WILL PRINT A COUNT OF RECORDS WRITTEN TO
MAG. TAPE, SHUT DOWN THE PHONE LINE, AND ALLOW A NEW FUNCTION TO
BE SELECTED.
F. MULTIPLE JOBS WILL AUTOMATICALLY BE BROUGHT BACK. A RECORD
COUNT IS DISPLAYED ON THE CONSOLE FOR EACH JOB BROUGHT BACK AND
ONE EOF IS WRITTEN TO MAG TAPE FOR EACH JOB.
G. SETTING OF SWITCH 15 IN THE SWITCH REGISTER WILL CAUSE THE 2100
TO STOP WAITING FOR OUTPUT JOBS FROM THE HOST CPU AND SIGN-OFF
WITH HIM. ONE ADDITIONAL EOF IS WRITTEN TO TAPE AT THIS TIME.
6. JOB STATISTICS
TO OBTAIN JOB STATISTICS INITIATE FUNCTION #4.
A. HPRJE WILL TYPE "COMMAND?". SELECT A VALID "HOST" CPU'S STAT
COMMAND (SEE ATTACHED SHEET FOR VALID HASP COMMANDS) AND TYPE IT
ON THE CONSOLE FOLLOWED BY CR,LF.
B. IF A PRIOR CONNECTION HAS NOT BEEN ESTABLISHED, HPRJE WILL
DIRECT YOU TO "DIAL REMOTE". ESTABLISH A DATA LINK AS DESCRIBED
IN "4.D.".
C. AFTER APPROXIMATELY A 3-SECOND DELAY, YOUR REQUESTED STATISTICS
WILL BE TYPED ON THE CONSOLE AND THE "COMMAND?" QUESTION RE-
INITIATED (GO TO STEP A.)
D. TO TERMINATE THE JOB STATISTICS FUNCTION, TYPE:
1. "/E" - THIS DISCONNECTS THE PHONE LINE AND ALLOWS A NEW
FUNCTION TO BE INITIATED.
2. "/S" - THIS INITIATES FUNCTION #2.
3. "/R" - THIS INITIATES FUNCTION #3.
E. SOME USEFUL "COMMAND" RESPONSES WHEN COMMUNICATING WITH A
"HASP" SYSTEM ARE:
COMMAND DESCRIPTION
------- -----------
/E EXIT THE STAT ROUTINE
/S EXIT THE STAT ROUTINE AND BEGIN SENDING
INPUT FILE
/R EXIT THE STAT ROUTINE, BEGIN RECEPTION
OF OUTPUT FROM "HOST" CPU.
$DA DISPLAY ACTIVE JOBS
$DN DISPLAY INFORMATION ON QUEUED JOBS
$DQ DISPLAY NUMBER OF QUEUED JOBS
$DF DISPLAY NUMBER OF QUEUED JOBS AWAITING
FORMS.
$CJXXX CANCEL JOB "XXX". ("XXX" IS JOB NUMBER)
$D'JOB NAME' DISPLAY INFORMATION ON SPECIFIC JOB (NOTE
NAME MUST BE 8 CHARACTERS LONG, I.E., PAD
WITH BLANKS)
$PJXXX STOP SPECIFIC JOB "XXX" AFTER CURRENT
ACTIVITY
7. CARD TO TAPE
A. PLACE YOUR JOB DECK(S) IN THE CARD READER, MOUNT AND POSITION,
IF NECESSARY, A MAG. TAPE (WITH A WRITE RING) AND ENTER 6 ON
THE CONSOLE.
B. YOUR SOURCE DECK WILL BE READ AND WRITTEN TO MAG. TAPE IN
ASCII CODE, ONE CARD PER MAG. TAPE RECORD.
C. A BLANK CARD WILL TERMINATE THE FUNCTION. TWO TAPE MARKS ARE
WRITTEN ON MAG. TAPE UPON TERMINATION.
8. PRINT FILE
A. MOUNT THE MAG. TAPE CONTAINING RECEIVED JOB OUTPUT FILES.
POSITION TO THE DESIRED FILE.
B. PREPARE THE LINE PRINTER AND ENTER 7 ON THE CONSOLE.
C. ONE FILE OF DATA WILL BE PRINTED ON THE LINE PRINTER.
9. ADVANCE MAG TAPE
A. ENTER 5 ON THE CONSOLE. HPRJE WILL RESPOND "HOW MANY 'FILES,
RECORDS'?". ENTER THE DESIRED AMOUNT YOU WISH TO ADVANCE THE
MAG. TAPE. THE FORMAT IS FREE FIELD. VALID EXAMPLES ARE:
1. 3,125 = 3 FILES, THEN 125 RECORDS
2. ,27 = JUST 27 RECORDS
3. 1 = 1 FILE ONLY
B. THE MAG. TAPE WILL BE ADVANCED THE GIVEN NUMBER OF FILES AND/
OR RECORDS.
10. RETURN TO MTS
ENTE 8 ON THE CONSOLE. THE SUBROUTINE ".STOP" WILL BE CALLED AND
CONTROL RETURNED TO THE MAGNETIC TAPE OPERATING SYSTEM.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DESCRIPTION OF INPUT AND OUTPUT
HPRJE'S, OR ANY OTHER STANDARD CARD TO MAGNETIC TAPE ROUTINE MUST BE
RUN TO GENERATE AN INPUT FILE FOR TRANSMISSION. HPRJE WILL HANDLE
EITHER ASCII OR EBCDIC DATA FILES. BLOCKING FACTOR MUST BE ONE CARD
IMAGE PER BLOCK. HPRJE GENERATES ONE OUTPUT FILE ON MAGNETIC TAPE UPON
RECEPTION FROM THE "HOST" CPU. RECORDS CAN BE SPOOLED IN EITHER ASCII
OR EBCDIC CODE AND ARE CONFIGURED FOR LINE PRINTING, I.E., 1ST
CHARACTER DEFINES LINE PRINTER CARRIAGE CONTROL.* RECORDS ARE SPOOLED
ONE RECORD PER PRINT LIEN.
* EBCDIC CODE GENERATES EBCDIC MACHINE CODE CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARS.
ASCII CODE GENERATES STANDARD HP 2778 LINE PRINTER CARRIAGE CONTROL
CHARACTERS.
ON-LINE FEATURES OF HPRJE
1. DATA COMPRESSION
COMPILATION OF HPRJE WITH "Z" IN THE "ASMB" STATEMENT CAUSES TRAIL-
ING BLANKS TO BE REMOVED FROM CARD IMAGES AND REPLACED BY AN "EM" -
END OF MEDIA CHARACTER. COMPILATION WITH "N" DOES NOT CAUSE THIS
TO HAPPEN.
2. MULTIPLE RECORDS
HPRJE FILLS A 400 CHARACTER BUFFER WITH AS MANY CARD IMAGES AS
POSSIBLE BEFORE TRANSMITTING THE BLOCK. ("IUS" - INNER-UNIT
SEPARATOR CHARACTERS AND 2 BCC CHARACTERS ARE APPENDED ON TO EACH
CARD IMAGE). THIS FEATURE ELIMINATES LINE TURN-AROUNDS AND HELPS
INCREASE THRU-PUT. THE NET EFFECT OF FEATURE #1 & #2 (&D.50 ACTION)
IS A BLOCK OF DATA IN THE FOLLOWING FORMAT.
(SYN) (SYN) (SYN) (STX) (BLOCK #1) (EM) (IUS) (BCC) (BCC)
(BLOCK #2) (EM) (IUS) (BCC) (BCC)....(BLOCK N) (ETX) (BCC) (BCC)
3. RECORD UNBLOCKING OF OUTPUT
HPRJE ACCEPTS UP TO 400 CHAR. BLOCKS FROM THE "HOST" CPU CONTAIN-
ING PRINT LINES. PRINT LINES ARE DELINEATED AND UNBLOCKED IN THE
FOLLOWING FASHION:
A. "ESC" - DATA LINK ESCAPE CHARACTERS ARE SCANNED. WHEN FOUND,
THE FOLLOWING CHARACTER IS TREATED AS A PRINTER CARRIAGE
CONTROL CHARACTER.
B. THE CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARACTER IS CONVERTED TO ITS APPROPRIATE
HP OR IBM COMPATIBLE CONTROL CHARACTER. IT IS APPENDED TO THE
FOLLOWING PRINT LINE CHARACTERS AND THE ENTIRE PRINT LINE SET IS
WRITTEN TO MAGNETIC TAPE. CONVERSION OF CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARAC-
TERS IS AS FOLLOWS:
RECEIVED EBCDIC ASCII PRINTER
CHARACTER* SPOOL** SPOOL** ACTION
---------- ------- ------- -------
/ 11 40 SINGLE SPACE
S 21 60 DOUBLE SPACE
T 31 56 TRIPLE SPACE
A 211 61 SKIP TO CHANNEL 1
B 221 62 " " " 2
C 231 63 " " " 3
D 241 64 " " " 4
E 251 65 " " " 5
F 261 66 " " " 6
G 271 67 " " " 7
H 301 70 " " " 8
(IBM MACHINE (HP2778A)
CODE)
* - EBCDIC
** - OCTAL (BASE 8)
3. C. "IUS" - INTER UNIT SEPARATOR AND THE NEXT 2 SUCCEEDING 'BCC'
CHARACTERS ARE STRIPPED FROM THE INPUT WITH NO OPERATION.
4. CODE INTERCHANGE
HPRJE WILL HANDLE EITHER ASCII OR EBCDIC CODE ON BOTH INPUT AND
OUTPUT. EBCDIC CODE IS ALWAYS USED AS THE TRANSMISSION CODE.
THEREFORE, IF ASCII CARD IMAGES ARE READ, THEY ARE CONVERTED TO
EBCDIC BEFORE TRANSMISSION. SIMILARLY, IF ASCII PRINT LINES ARE
REQUESTED, RECEIVED EBCDIC PRINT LINES ARE CONVERTED TO ASCII BE-
FORE SPOOLING TO TAPE.
5. I/O OVERLAP
HPRJE EMPLOYS DOUBLE BUFFERING TECHNIQUES ON ALL OPERATIONS
(EXCEPT THE OFF-LINE CARD TO TAPE FUNCTION). THUS DATA TRANSMISSIONS
ARE DONE IN PARALLEL WITH THE ABOVE MENTIONED FEATURES. THIS
OPTIMIZES PHONE LINE THRU-PUT.
6. 'HOST' CPU STATUS
HPRJE ALLOWS JOB STATISTICS AND SYSTEM QUEUES TO BE RECEIVED FROM THE
'HOST' CPU AND DISPLAYED ON THE HP 2100'S SYSTEM CONSOLE. THIS AS-
SUMES, OF COURSE, THAT THE 'HOST' CPU HAS JOB STAT FEATURES. AN
OPERATOR MAY ENTER AS MANY STAT REQUESTS AS DESIRED, WITH A CORRES-
PONDING RESPONSE FOR EACH, AND THEN FURTHER INITIATE TRANSMISSION OR
RECEPTION OF DATA FILES ALL WHILE 'ON-LINE' TO THE 'HOST' CPU. THIS
MAY PROVE QUITE HELPFUL IN DETERMINING WHEN OUTPUT IS READY FOR RE-
CEPTION AND THUS ELIMINATE 'TYING-UP' THE 2100 SYSTEM WAITING FOR
OUTPUT WHEN LARGE PROCESSING QUEUES DEVELOP AT THE 'HOST' LOCATION.
UPON COMPLETION OF JOB ENTRY, HPRJE WILL WAIT FOR A JOB ID
MESSAGE FROM THE 'HOST' CPU WITHOUT REQUIRING A NEW PHONE CONNECTION.
UPON RECEPTION, THIS MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED ON THE 2100'S CONSOLE. THE
MESSAGE SHOULD CONTAIN INFORMATION AS ASSIGNED JOB NUMBER, PRIORITY,
ETC. (NOTE: THIS FEATURE SHOULD BE COMPILED OUT OF HPRJE IF NOT EM-
PLOYED BY THE 'HOST' SYSTEM. OTHERWISE, IT WILL CAUSE AN ERROR
CONDITION AT THE 2100 END UPON JOB INPUT COMPLETION.)
7. HPEJW "SIGNS ON" AND "OFF" WITH THE HOST CPU AUTOMATICALLY. (REMOTE
NUMBER IN THE CONTRIBUTED SOURCE IS "REMOTE8")
OFF-LINE FEATURES
1. CARD TO TAPE
HPRJE WILL EXECUTE CARD TO TAPE ON JOB DECKS TO GENERATE A CARD FILE
ON MAG. TAPE FOR INPUT TO THE ON-LINE DATA TRANSMISSION FUNCTION. AN
ASCII FILE WITH BLOCKING FACTOR = IS GENERATED. A BLANK CARD IS
TREATED AS THE END OF INPUT INDICATOR.
2. PRINT ROUTINE
HPRJE WILL PRINT ONE FILE OF DATA FROM MAG. TAPE AS THE ON-LINE
RECEIVE OUTPUT FUNCTION GENERATES. THE DATA ON MAG. TAPE IS EXPECTED
TO BE IN ASCII CODE, ONE PRINT LINE PER BLOCK, AND THE 1ST CHARACTER
OF EACH LINE DEFINING PRINTER CARRIAGE CONTROL.(NOTE: THE CARD TO
TAPE FUNCTION DOES NOT GENERATE CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARS.. THEREFORE,
PRINTING OF IT WITH THIS ROUTINE WILL GENERATE A LISTING WITH THE 1ST
CHAR. MISSING AND RANDOM PAGE SPACING DEPENDING ON THE ACTUAL 1ST
CHARCTER FOUND ON THE CARD IMAGES.)
3. MAG. TAPE POSITIONING
HPRJE ALLOWS ADVANCING OF A MAG. TAPE TO ANY FILE OR RECORD POSITION.
THIS IS HELPFUL WHEN THE SAME MAG. TAPE IS TO BE USED FOR INPUT AND
OUTPUT FEATURES. FILE 1 COULD CONTAIN CARD IMAGES OF A JOB AND FILE 2
ITS CORRESPONDING PRINT OUTPUT. THE POSITIONING FEATURE WOULD ENABLE
ADVANCING TO FILE 2 FOR PRINTING. (NOTE: AFTER TRANSMISSION OF INPUT,
THE MAG. TAPE IS POSITIONED JUST AFTER THE 'TM' OF FILE 1. THIS
OUTPUT CAN BE RECEIVED WITHOUT FURTHER POSITIONING.)
FEATURES NOT EMPLOYED:
1. DATA TRANSMISSION OF ASCII CODE. EBCDIC IS ALWAYS SENT TO AND
EXPECTED FROM THE 'HOST' CPU.
2. DATA COMPRESSION OF IMBEDED BLANKS, REPEATING CHARACTERS, OR TABBING
FEATURES.
3. TRANSPARENT TEXT (TRANSMISSION/RECEPTION OF BINARY DATA). (NOTE:
EMPLOYED DRIVER D.50'C' DOES ALLOW THIS FEATURE, THUS ONLY HPRJE
NEED BE MODIFIED TO EMPLOY TRANSPARENT TEXT CAPABILITIES.)
4. POLLING FEATURES BY 'HOST' CPU FOR MULTIDROP LINES.
5. ON-LINE CARD READING OR LINE PRINTING. HPRJE USES MAG. TAPE FOR ITS
ON-LINE I/O DEVICE. THIS WAS EMPLOYED TO BYPASS TRADITIONAL CARD
READER PROBLEMS (PICK FAILURES, CARD MOTION, AND MISREADS) AND LINE
PRINTER PROBLEMS, AS PAPER JAM, DURING ON-LINE OPERATION. IF DESIRED,
ON-LINE CARD READING AND LINE PRINTING CAN BE EMPLOYED BY MERELY
CHANGING MAG. TAPE I/O CALLS TO CARD READER OR LINE PRINTER CALLS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR RECOVERY PROCEDURES
THERE ARE ONLY TWO ABORT CONDITIONS WHICH MAY OCCUR. SHOULD A MAG. TAPE
ERROR OCCUR, AS A PARITY ERROR, END-OF-TAPE, ETC., HPRJE WILL TYPE
"ABORT-MAG TAPE ERROR" AND ALLOW A NEW FUNCTION TO BE SELECTED. THE
ONLY RECOVERY IS TO CORRECT THE ERROR CONDITION (RECREATION OF THE TAPE
MAY BE NECESSARY) AND RESTART HPRJE.
IRRECOVERABLE PHONE LINE CONDITIONS ARE IDENTIFIED BY THE STATEMENT
"ABORT-PHONE LINE PROBLEMS". RECOVERY IS AS FOLLOWS:
1. IF SUBMITTING A JOB(S):
A. RELOAD HPRJE
B. OBTAIN A STATUS OF "$DA" TO FIND OUT WHAT JOB NUMBER WAS
ASSIGNED TO THE PARTIAL INPUT FILE.
C. CANCEL THAT JOB WITH STAT COMMAND OF $CJXXX WHERE "XXX" = JOB #.
D. RESUBMIT ENTIRE JOB FILE.
2. IF RECEIVING OUTPUT:
A. RESTART HPRJE
B. INITIALIZE A READ FUNCTION: #3
C. ESTABLISH DATA LINK AND RECEIV REMAINDER OF DATA FILE. DO NOT
REWIND OR REPOSITION MAG. TAPE, JUST LEAVE AS IS.
3. DURING A STAT COMMAND:
A. MERELY RESTART HPRJE AND OBTAIN A NEW DATA LINK.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
HASP COMMANDS FROM REMOTE TERMINALS
COMMAND COMMENTS
------- --------
JOB QUEUE
$DA DISPLAY ACTIVE JOBS
$DF DISPLAY NUMBER OF QUEUED JOBS AWAITING FORMS
$DN DISPLAY JOB INFORMATION ON QUEUED JOBS
$DQ DISPLAY NUMBER OF QUEUED JOBS
JOB LIST
$C 'JOB LIST' CANCEL SPECIFIED JOB(S)
$D 'JOB LIST' DISPLAY JOB INFORMATION ON SPECIFIED JOB(S)
$P 'JOB LIST' STOP SPECIFIED JOB(S) AFTER CURRENT ACTIVITY
MISCELLANEOUS JOB
$D 'JOB NAME' DISPLAY JOB INFO ON JOB(S) WITH OS JOB NAME
DEVICE LIST
$B DEVICE LIST BACKSPACE DEVICE (S)
$D DEVICE LIST CANCEL CURRENT FUNCTION ON DEVICES(S)
$E DEVICE LIST RESTART CURRENT FUNCTION ON DEVICE(S)
$F DEVICE LIST FORWARD SPACE DEVICE(S)
$I DEVICE LIST INTERRUPT THE CURRENT FUNCTION ON DEVICES(S)
$N DEVICE LIST REPEAT CURRENT FUNCTION ON DEVICES(S)
$P DEVICE LIST STOP THE DEVICES(S)
$T DEVICE LIST SET DEVICE
$Z DEVICE LIST HALT DEVICES(S) (SUSPEND OPERATION)
$S DEVICE LIST START THE DEVICE(S)
REMOTE JOB ENTRY
$DM DISPLAY MESSAGE
$R ROUTE OUTPUT FOR SPECIFIED JOB OR DEVICE
GROUP TO ANOTHER DEVICE GROUP
IF CARDS ARE USED FOR COMMAND INPUT THEN A"/*" MUST BE IN CARD
COLUMN 1 & 2 FOLLOWED BY THE COMMAND. E.G., "/*$DN".
X12801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CHARACTER CODE TRANSLATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 4 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
ASCII EBCDIC TRANSLATOR
CHARACTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
MTS 3030
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS MTS PROGRAM TRANSLATES FROM ASCII TO EBCDIC, AND FROM EBCDIC TO
ASCII. EACH TRANSLATED CHARACTER CAN BE PLACED IN THE CORE STORAGE
LOCATION FROM WHICH THE CORRESPONDING UNTRANSLATED CHARACTER WAS
ACQUIRED. ALTERNATIVELY, THE TRANSLATED CHARACTER CAN BE PLACED IN A
DIFFERENT CORE STORAGE LOCATION. THE ORIGINAL CHARACTERS AND THE
TRANSLATED CHARACTERS ARE PACKED TWO CHARACTERS PER 16-BIT WORD.
BY PREPARING DIFFERENT CONVERSION TABLES FOR THE PROGRAM, A USER CAN
CONVERT ANY 8-BIT (OR LESS) CODE TO ANY OTHER 8-BIT (OR LESS) CODE.
MAGNETIC TAPE (9-TRACK) I/O NOT REQUIRED, BUT THE BIGGEST USE FOR THIS
PROGRAM WILL PROBABLY BE TRANSLATING BETWEEN ASCII AND EBCDIC ON
MAGNETIC TAPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. USUAL ASSEMBLY, LOAD AND RUN PROCEDURES.
2. THE TRANSLATE TAPE AND TWO TABLE LOOK-UP DATA TAPES MUST BE READ
IN BY THE CALLING PROGRAM UNDER K6 FORMAT, OCTAL INTEGER. THE
TABLES INCLUDED HERE ARE:
EBCDIC TO ASCII AND
ASCII TO EBCDIC
CALL TLATE (I,J,K,L) WHERE...
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
I INTEGER NAME OF THE SOURCE STRING TO BE TRANSLATED
J INTEGER THE TRANSLATED STRING
K INTEGER ADDRESS OF THE LOOK-UP TALE
L INTEGER POSITIVE INDICATES LENGTH OF BUFFER IN WORDS
NEGATIVE INDICATES LENGTH OF BUFFER IN CHARACTERS
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X12901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MAG TAPE TO PRINT UTILITY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
MAGNETIC TAPE PRINTER DUMP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS MTS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
UNDER TELEPRINTER KEYBOARD CONTROL, THIS PROGRAM DUMPS MAGNETIC TAPE
FILES ONTO A LINE PRINTER. THE TAPE RECORDS MAY HAVE ANY OF A VARIETY
OF FORMATS, AND EITHER ASCII OR EBCDIC FILES CAN BE ACCOMMODATED.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS THE DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS OPTION FOR THE COMPUTER,
ONE HP3030 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT WITH INTERFACE KIT, AND ONE LINE PRINTER
WITH INTERFACE KIT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE THE SUPPLIED SOURCE TAPE USING THE EXTENDED ASSEMBLER RESULTING
IN A RELOCATABLE OBJECT TAPE. (THE SUPPLIED SOURCE TAPE HAS THE
ASSEMBLY CONTROL STATEMENT.)
CONFIGURE A BCS FOR THE HARDWARE ON WHICH THIS UTILITY IS TO RUN. THE
TAPE I/O MUST BE ASSIGNED UNIT REFERENCE NUMBER 10B. THE BCS CONFIGURA-
TION MUST ALSO CONTAIN A TTY AND A LINE PRINTER.
LOAD THE CONFIGURED BCS FROM STEP II, AND USING THE BCS RELOCATING
LOADER, LOAD THE RELOCATABLE OBJECT TAPE PRODUCED AS A RESULT FROM
STEP I. SET SW 14 ON SO AS TO PRODUCE AN ABSOLUTE OUTPUT TAPE. NEXT,
LOAD THE RELOCATABLE PROGRAM LIBRARY AND COMPLETE LOADING OPERATIONS.
LOAD THE ABSOLUTE BINARY TAPE PRODUCED BY STEP III, USING THE BASIC
BINARY LOADER.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
PLACE A REEL OF MAGNETIC TAPE ON THE TAPE UNIT AND MAKE IT READY, I.E.,
LOAD POINT AND AUTO MODE.
CHECK TO SEE THAT THE LINE PRINTER IS READY AND ON LINE.
ENTER 2B IN THE SWITCH REGISTER AND PRESS "LOAD ADDRESS".
AT THIS POINT, A DECISION MUST BE MADE AS TO WHETHER OR NOT DEFAULT
PARAMETERS ARE DESIRED. DEFAULT PARAMETERS ARE AS FOLLOWS:
LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH = 80 CHARACTERS
TAPE RECORD LENGTH (BLOCKSIZE) = 800 CHARACTERS
TAPE CODE = EBCDIC
TO ASSUME THESE PARAMETERS, TURN OFF ALL SWITCH REGISTER SWITCHES AND
PRESS "PRESET" AND "RUN". TO ASSUME ANY OTHER PARAMETERS, SET SW 0 ON
AND PRESS "PRESET" AND "RUN". MESSAGES WILL BE LOGGED ON THE TTY
REQUESTING THE LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH, BLOCKSIZE, AND TAPE CODE. TYPE
ANSWERS ON TTY AND FOLLOW BY RETURN AND LINEFEED CHARACTERS.
WHENEVER AN EOF MARK IS DETECTED ON THE TAPE, A MESSAGE IS PRINTED ON
THE TTY, AND THE COMPUTER HALTS (T REGISTER = 102077B). TO DUMP NEXT
FILE, SET SW 15 OFF AND PRESS "RUN". THE TAPE WILL BE REWOUND TO LOCAL.
A PAGE NUMBER, FILE COUNT, AND RECORD COUNT IS MAINTAINED BY THE PROGRAM
AND LISTED ON THE OUTPUT.
IF THE COMPUTER HALTS WITH THE T-REGISTER EQUAL TO 102011B, A TAPE ERROR
HAS BEEN DETECTED. PRESS "RUN" TO RETRY.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X13001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DRUM BASED MAGNETIC TAPE DUPLICATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP
**LANGUAGES:
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
USING SOURCE MAGNETIC TAPES WITH THE FORMAT PRODUCED BY PROGRAM 22198
(CLASSIFICATION CODE 102), THIS INDEPENDENT PROGRAM PERFORMS ANY OF THE
FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS:
A. THE PROGRAM MAKES COPIES OF A MAG TAPE USING A SINGLE MAG TAPE UNIT.
THE DRUM IS USED FOR INTERMEDIATE STORAGE.
B. THE PROGRAM ALLOWS MANY MAG TAPES TO BE COMBINED ON THE DRUM. A
SINGLE MAG TAPE CAN THEN BE PREPARED FROM THE DRUM FILES.
C. THE PROGRAM CAN PURGE ANY SPECIFIED FILE FROM THE DRUM.
D. MAG TAPE FILES ON THE DRUM CAN BE SORTED BY ID NUMBER.
E. SELECTED FILES ON THE DRUM CAN BE RECORDED ON MAG TAPE.
F. A DIRECTORY OF PROGRAM RECORDED ON MAG TAPE CAN BE LISTED ON LINE
PRINTER OR TELEPRINTER.
BECAUSE THIS IS AN INDEPENDENT PROGRAM, THE MAG TAPE FORMAT AND DRUM
FORMAT ARE NOT COMPATIBLE WITH THE FORMATS USED IN STANDARD HP OPERATING
SYSTEMS. THEREFORE, THE MAG TAPES PRODUCED MUST BE TRANSFERRED TO
PUNCHED TAPE, USING PROGRAM 22198, BEFORE USE IN AN OPERATING SYSTEM.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS 16K OF CORE STORAGE, AND THE DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS
AND EXTENDED ARITHMETIC UNIT OPTIONS FOR THE COMPUTER. ALSO REQUIRED
IS AN HP2773/4/5 DRUM MEMORY WITH POWER SUPPLY AND INTERFACE KIT, AND AN
HP3030 MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT WITH INTERFACE KIT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TO PUT A MAG TAPE ONTO A DRUM:
1. LOAD ADDRESS 2, PRESS PRESET AND RUN
HLT 0 DRUM NOT READY, WARM UP, PUSH RUN
HLT 11B OUT OF DRUM SPACE, LOAD ADDRESS 3 AND PUSH RUN TO WRITE
EOF ON DRUM
HLT 13B MAG TAPE PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN OR TERMINATE AT 3
HLT 44B TAPE IN LOCAL, FIX, PUSH RUN
HLT 77B TAPE ON DRUM
A-REG = MAXIMUM DRUM ADDRESS
B-REG = CURRENT DRUM ADDRESS
TO DUMP A MAG TAPE FROM DRUM:
1. LOAD MAG TAPE WITH WRITE RING
2. PRESS "PRESET" AND "RUN"
HLT 0 DRUM NOT READY, WARM UP, PUSH RUN
HLT 6 DRUM PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN
HLT 13B MAG TAPE PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN AND RESTART
HLT 14B BAD SPOT ON TAPE, RUN TERMINATED
HLT 44B TAPE IN LOCAL, FIX, PUSH RUN
HLT 77B NEW TAPE CREATED
TO APPEND A TAPE TO THE DRUM FILE:
1. MOUNT NEXT TAPE, PUT IN "AUTO", "LOAD POINT"
2. LOAD ADDRESS 5, PUSH PRESET AND RUN
HALTS AS IN "TO PUT A MAG TAPE ONTO THE DRUM"
TO SORT DRUM ONTO TAPE:
1. LOAD ADDRESS 40B, PUSH RUN
THE CONTENTS OF THE DRUM WILL NOT BE CHANGED. HOWEVER, THE FILES
ON THE DRUM WILL BE DUMPED TO MAG TAPE IN ASCENDING ORDER.
TO GET AN IMAGE OF THE SORTED FILE ONTO THE DRUM, FOLLOW THE STEPS
UNDER "TO PUT A MAG TAPE ONTO THE DRUM"
HLT 0 DRUM NOT READY, WARM UP, PUSH RUN
HLT 6 DRUM PARITY ERROR, PUSH IN
HLT 13B MAG TAPE PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN
HLT 40B DONE
HLT 44B MAG TAPE IN LOCAL, FIX, PUSH RUN
HLT 45B WRITE NOT ENABLED, FIX, PUSH RUN
00037 ORG 37B
00037 102040 HLT 40B
00040 024554 JMP SORTD
TO PURGE FILES FROM DRUM:
1. LOAD ADDRESS 50B
2. TYPE ID CODE
HLT 0 DRUM NOT READY, WARM UP, PUSH RUN
HLT 1 ID CODE NOT FOUND ON DRUM
HLT 6 DRUM PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN
HLT 50B FILE PURGED
00047 ORG 47B
00047 102050 HLT 50B
00050 024500 JMP PURGE
NOTE: THE PURGE WILL WORK BEST IF ROUTINES ARE REMOVED FROM THE
END OF THE LIST FIRST, AS UNWANTED ROUTINES WILL BE REMOVED
AND TIME NEED NOT BE WASTED MAINTAINING THEM.
TO DUMP SELECTED FILES ONTO MAG TAPE:
1. LOAD ADDRESS 70B
2. TYPE ID CODE
HLT 0 DRUM NOT READY, WARM UP, PUSH RUN
HLT 1 ID CODE NOT FOUND ON DRUM
HLT 6 DRUM PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN
HLT 44B TAPE UNIT IN LOCAL, FIX PUSH RUN
HLT 45B WRITE NOT ENABLED, FIX, PUSH RUN
HLT 70B FILE DUMPED ONTO MAGNETIC TAPE
TO DUMP A TAPE DIRECTORY ON LINE PRINTER:
LOAD ADDRESS 102B, PUSH "PRESET" AND "RUN"
HLT 13B MAG TAPE PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN
HLT 44B MAG TAPE IN LOCAL, FIX, PUSH RUN
HLT 77B DONE
TO CONFIGURE THIS TAPE FOR YOUR SYSTEM, EDIT THE FOLLOWING STATEMENTS:
#14 .DRUM EQU 14B VRC 12-MB DRUM
#17 .DATA EQU 17B HP3030 9-TRACK MAG TAPE
#23 LP EQU 23B HP2778A LP
#12 TTY EQU 12B BUFFERED TTY CHANNEL
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IT WOULD BE POSSIBLE TO MODIFY THIS SCHEME TO MAKE A COMPLETELY DRUM
BASED TAPE DUPLICATOR, OR TO WORK OUT A DRUM BASED EDITOR FOR CD-II
FORMATTED MAG TAPES.
IN ORDER TO MAKE MANY COPIES OF THE SORTED TAPE, IT SHOULD BE LOADED
BACK ONTO THE DRUM IN SORTED FORM, SINCE THE DRUM DUMP IS MUCH FASTER
THAN THE "SORT & DUMP" OPTION.
X13101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MTS/BCS SYSTEM ABSOLUTE DUMP
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DUMP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS MTS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM DUMPS AN ABSOLUTE TAPE UNDER BCS. WHEN USED AS INPUT
TO PREPARE TAPE SYSTEM, IT GENERATES ONLY THREE DATA RECORDS ON FILE
INSTEAD OF THE USUAL SEVERAL HUNDRED. FASTER ACCESS TIME UNDER MTS
AND A SIGNIFICANT SAVINGS IN MAGNETIC TAPE ARE THE BENEFITS OF THIS
PROGRAM. IT CAN BE USED ALONG WITH OR INSTEAD OF THE BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM ABSOLUTE DUMP OPTION.
WHEN USED AS A GENERAL ROUTINE, IT CAN DUMP AN ENTIRE BCS SYSTEM OR
SELECTED CORE SECTIONS ENABLING SYSTEM MODIFICATION WITHOUT REASSEMBLY
AND GENERATION OF A NEW ABSOLUTE TAPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TO DUMP:
1. THE COMPLETE BCS SYSTEM FROM CORE (NORMAL LOAD COMPLETED IN-
CLUDING SYSDM)
A. CONSULT LOADER LIST FOR ENTRY POINT "STRDM".
PRESET AND RUN.
B. COMPUTER WILL HALT 10B. THE A REGISTER SHOULD CONTAIN THE
MAIN PROGRAM STARTING ADDRESS (SEE 6.0). IF IT DOES NOT, LOAD
THE A REGISTER WITH THE PROPER ADDRESS, PRESS PRESET AND RUN.
C. THE ENTIRE SYSTEM WILL BE DUMPED INCLUDING LEADER AND TRAILER
FOLLOWED BY A HALT 77B. TO OBTAIN ADDITIONAL COPIES, PRESS
RUN.
2. THE COMPLETE SYSTEM WITH ABSOLUTE OPTION, SW14=1
A. CONSULT LOADER LIST FOR ENTRY POINT "STRDM".
PRESET AND RUN.
B. AN ABSOLUTE LOAD ALREADY CONTAINS THE PROPER LINKAGE TO THE
PROGRAM STARTING ADDRESS AT LOCATIONS 2 AND 3. THERE WILL
BE NO HALT 10B OTHERSWISE PROCEED AS IN STEP 1-B.
C. THE ENTIRE SYSTEM WILL BE DUMPED INCLUDING LEADER AND TRAILER
FOLLOWED BY A HALT 77B. TO OBTAIN ADDITIONAL COPIES, PRESS
RUN.
3. ANY SECTION OF MEMORY --
A. CONSULT LOADER LIST FOR ENTRY POINT "MANDM" AND LOAD THAT
ADDRESS.
B. LOAD THE A REGISTER WITH THE ADDRESS OF THE FIRST WORD OF
CORE TO BE DUMPED AND THE B REGISTER WITH THE ADDRESS OF
THE LAST WORD OF CORE TO BE DUMPED.
C. PRESS PRESET AND RUN TO OBTAIN AN OBSOLUTE COPY OF THE DE-
SIRED CORE SECTION.
NOTE: NO LEADER OR TRAILER ARE PROVIDED.
D. HALT 76B INDICATES SECTION IS DUMPED. TO DUMP ADDITIONAL
SECTIONS, REPEAT FROM STEP 3-B.
THE PROGRAM WAS WRITTEN SPECIFICALLY TO ELIMINATE THE MANY RECORDS
CREATED WHEN A BCS ABSOLUTE OUTPUT IS LOADED WITH PTS TO FILE 1 OF
MTOS. IF SYSDM IS USED TO DUMP THE ABSOLUTE COPY, ONLY 3 RECORDS PER
SYSDM DUMP WILL BE PUT ON FILE 1. (THE DUMPED TAPE IS COMPATIBLE WITH
THE BBL.)
NOTE: SYSDM IS COMPATIBLE WITH E VERSION RELOCATING LOADER AND AS
RELOCATABLE ONLY WORKS PROPERLY WITH MULTIPLES OF 8K CORE.
(IF 4K IS USED, EDIT RELATIVE LOCATION 40 TO: "IOR =B7700".)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
HALTS:
HALT 10B WILL OCCUR IF THE LOAD WAS DONE BY A NORMAL BCS LOAD TO
CORE. SYSDM TRIES TO OBTAIN THE MAIN STARTING ADDRESS AND PLACE IT
IN LOCATION 3B ALONG WITH A "JMP 3,I" IN LOCATION 2B. IT IS
POSSIBLE THAT THE STARTING ADDRESS MAY NOT BE PRESENT AT THE TIME
THE DUMP IS REQUESTED. JUST PRIOR TO PLACING THE ADDRESS IN LOCATION
3B, THE PROGRAM HALTS WITH A HALT 10B TO ALLOW THE USER TO VIEW THE
A REGISTER WHICH SHOULD CONTAIN THE MAIN STARTING ADDRESS. IF IT
DOES NOT, THE USER CAN SET THE A REGISTER TO THE PROPER ADDRESS
AND PRESS RUN.
HALT 66B INDICATES A "TAPE LOW" CONDITION. RESTORE TAPE SUPPLY AND:
1. TO RESTART A SYSTEM DUMP, PRESS RUN - COMPLETE SYSTEM WILL BE
DUMPED ON NEW TAPE.
2. TO RESTART A CORE SECTION DUMP, GO TO 4.0, D.3.A.
X13201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS TO MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DUMP MAGNETIC TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ABSOLUTE PROGRAM DUMPS SELECTED SOURCE FILES OF LENGTH LESS THAN
237 SECTORS, FROM DOS TO A NINE-TRACK 7970/3030 IN A FORMAT COMPATIBLE
WITH THE MAGNETIC TAPE STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL PROGRAM 22198. IT IS
LOADED OVER A (HALTED) DOS AND USES BASE PAGE CONSTANTS TO FIND THE
SYSTEM DIRECTORY TRACK AND HANDLE THE 90/128 SECTOR PER TRACK DISCS.
HARDWARE REQUIRED: FIXED HEAD DISC, 3030/7970 9-TRACK TAPE DECK
TELEPRINTER WITH BUFFERED INTERFACE, DMA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE SS FILE MUST BE LESS THAN 237 SECTORS LONG, AND A 16K COMPUTER IS
REQUIRED. THE PROGRAM MUST BE CONFIGURED AFTER LOADING FOR THE MAG TAPE
AND DISC SELECT CODE, BUT IT WILL USE DOS BASE PAGE CONSTANTS TO FIND
THE SYSTEM DIRECTORY TRACK AND TO HANDLE THE 90/128 SECTOR PER TRACK
DISCS.
THE PROGRAM MAY BE CONFIGURED AFTER LOADING FOR THE HP-3030 OR HP-7970
9-TRACK TAPE DECK.
THE PROGRAM MUST BE LOADED OVER A "HALTED" DOS SINCE DOS BASE PAGE
CONSTANTS ARE USED.
CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD BINARY TAPE
THE CONFIGURATION SECTION IS IN THE DATA BUFFER, AND THUS THE RAW
BINARY TAPE MUST BE LOADED TO CONFIGURE IT.
2. LOAD ADDRESS 2, PUSH RUN
HLT 00B PUT TTY SC IN SW-REG, PUSH RUN
HLT 20B PUT MAG TAPE DATA SC IN SW-REG
TURN ON BIT 15 OF SW-REG IF A 7970 PUSH RUN
HLT 30B PUT DISC DATA SC IN SW-REG, PUSH RUN
HLT 55B GO TO STEP #1
HLT 77B CONFIGURATION COMPLETE
TO DUMP AN SS FILE FROM DOS TO MAG TAPE:
1. IF THIS IS A NEW TAPE, SET AT LOAD POINT, WRITE ENABLED, AND GO TO
STEP #3.
2. TO APPEND TO AN EXISTING TAPE, LOAD ADDRESS 12, PUSH RUN. THE TAPE
WILL BE SPACED TO THE END-OF-FILE. (DO NOT APPEND A TAPE GENERATED
ON A 7970 USING THE 3030, OR VICE VERSA).
3. LOAD ADDRESS 100B, PUSH RUN
THE COMPUTER WILL TYPE: ENTER FILE NAME
4. ENTER THE NAME OF A DOS SS FILE
HLT 00B DISC NOT READY, WARM UP, PUSH IN
HLT 06B DISC PARITY ERROR
HLT 13B FILE NOT FOUND ON DOS
HLT 17B GARBAGE ON DISC FILE
COMPUTER WILL (ERROR) HALT AS ABOVE, OR TYPE:
ENTER ID CODE -OR- FILE NOT TYPE SS
ENTER FILE NAME
IN THE CASE OF THE LATTER, GO BACK TO STEP #4
5. ENTER A 1-20 CHARACTER ID CODE
THE FILE WILL BE WRITTEN ONTO MAGNETIC TAPE, IN CD-II FORMAT.
HLT 14B MAG PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN
HLT 15B RUN TERMINATED, BAD SPOT ON TAPE
HLT 44B WRITE NOT ENABLED ON MAG TAPE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. IF AN SS FILE IS DUMPED FROM DOS ONTO PAPER TAPE, IT WILL COMPARE
EXACTLY WITH THE SS FILE AS DUMPED ONTO THE MAG TAPE. THE MTSAR
PROGRAM SHOULD THUS VERIFY AN SS PAPER TAPE FILE DUMPED FROM DOS
WITH THE MAG TAPE FILE DUMPED WITH THIS PROGRAM.
HOWEVER, IF AN SS PAPER TAPE FILE IS LOADED ONTO DOS, AND HAS AN
ODD NUMBER OF CHARACTERS PER LINE, THE DOS WILL CHANGE THE FORMAT
TO AN EVEN NUMBER OF CHARACTERS PER LINE, AND THE DOS DUMP (ON
PAPER TAPE OR ON MAG TAPE) OF THAT FILE WILL BE DIFFERENT FROM THE
ORIGINAL.
2. IF THE MAG TAPE IS NOT SET TO ACCEPT A WRITE REQUEST (I.E., LOCAL,
WRITE NOT ENABLED, OFF/ON, ETC.), THE PROGRAM MAY HANG UP.
SEE THE FAMILY OF MTSAR PROGRAMS, WHICH INCLUDES THE MTSAR, THE DRUM
DUPLICATOR AND A PROGRAM WHICH ALLOWS MTSAR COMPATIBLE TAPES TO BE
LOADED DIRECTLY ONTO DOS AS SS FILES.
MTSAR -- MAGNETIC TAPE STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL, HP102-22198
X13301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MAGNETIC TAPE TO DOS DUMP
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ABSOLUTE PROGRAM LOADS SOURCE FILES OVER A (HALTED) 16K DOS FROM
A NONE-TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE WHICH HAS BEEN PREVIOUSLY PREPARED BY THE
MAGNETIC TAPE STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL PROGRAM, 22198. ANY NUMBER OF TAPE
RECORDS MAY BE CONCATENATED TO FORM A SINGLE SOURCE FILE ON DOS. THE
16K DOS MAY HAVE A 90 OR 128 DISC/DRUM WITH AN HP7970 OR 3030 MAGNETIC
TAPE UNIT.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: 16K DOS 7970 OR 3030 MAGNETIC TAPE DECK, 90 OR
128 DISC/DRUM, DMA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IT MAY BE CONFIGURED AFTER LOADING FOR THE HP-3030 OR HP-7970 9-TRACK
TAPE DECK.
THE PROGRAM MUST BE LOADED OVER A "HALTED" DOS SINCE DOS BASE PAGE
CONSTANTS ARE USED.
TO USE THIS PROGRAM, DO AN :EJOB ON DOS, HALT THE COMPUTER, AND LOAD
THIS PROGRAM INTO CORE.
ANY NUMBER OF FILES FROM MAG TAPE MAY BE CONCATENATED TO FORM A SINGLE
SS FILE ON DOS.
CONFIGURATION INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD BINARY TAPE
THE CONFIGURATION SECTION IS IN THE DATA BUFFER, AND THUS THE RAW
BINARY TAPE MUST BE LOADED TO CONFIGURE IT.
2. LOAD ADDRESS 2, PUSH RUN
HLT 00B PUT TTY SC IN SW-REG, PUSH RUN
HLT 20B PUT MAG TAPE DATA SC IN SW-REG
TURN ON BIT 15 OF SW-REG IF A 7970
HLT 30B PUT DISC DAA SC IN SW-REG, PUSH RUN
HLT 77B DONE
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD ADDRESS 100B
2. TURN ON SW #15 FOR READ-FORWARD ONLY ON MAG TAPE
3. PUSH RUN
HLT 00B DISC NOT READY, ARM, UP, PUSH RUN
HLT 06B DISC PARITY ERROR, PUSH RUN
4. ENTER ID CODE OF FILE ON MAG TAPE
THE COMPUTER WILL TYPE: ENTER FILE NAME
HLT 03B MAG TAPE FILE > CORE BUFFER SIZE, GIVE UP
5. ENTER 1-5 CHARACTER NAME FOR THE SS FILE
HLT 05B DISC WRITE PROTECT ON, CLEAR, PUSH RUN
HLT 178 MAG TAPE BUFFER UNDECIPHERABLE, IS IT SS?
THE COMPUTER WILL TYPE "ENTER ID CODE OR /E"
GO TO STEP #6 OR STEP #7
6. TO WRITE THE CURRENT FILE ONTO DISC, ENTER /E
THE FILE WILL BE WRITTEN ONTO DISC, AND THE COMPUTER WILL TYPE
"ENTER ID CODE".
IF YOU ARE DONE, PUSH HALT AND BRING UP DOS, ELSE GO TO STEP #4 TO
CREATE A NEW SS FILE ON DISC.
7. TO CONCATENATE ANOTHER MAG TAPE RECORD TO THE FILE BEING CREATED ON
DISC. ENTER THE NAME OF THE NEXT MAG TAPE RECORD. THE FIRST TWO
CHARACTERS OF THE NAME OF THE RECORD MUST NOT BE "/E".
IF THE RECORD IS NOT FOUND ON TAPE, YOU MAY RE-ENTER THE RECORD NAME
WITHOUT LOSS OF CONTINUITY.
LOOP BACK TO STEP #6 OR #7.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. THE PROGRAM WILL HANG UP IF THE MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT IS NOT IN THE
"AUTO" "ON LINE" STATE.
2. THE PROGRAM DOES NOT CHECK FOR END OF DISC, AND WILL HANG UP SHOULD
YOU ATTEMPT TO LOAD TOO MANY SS FILES ONTO YOUR DOS.
X13401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ABSOLUTE CORE DUMP ROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DUMP MEMORY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE ALLOWS DUMPING SELECTED AREAS OF CORE ONTO TAPE IN A FORMAT
COMPATIBLE FOR LOADING WITH THE BASIC BINARY LOADER. TWO VERSIONS ARE
SUPPLIED TO THE USER; ONE ABSOLUTE FOR LOADING THROUGH THE BASIC BINARY
LOADER, AND ONE RELOCATABLE FOR LOADING THROUGH THE BASIC CONTROL
SYSTEM. NO EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAMS ARE CALLED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
USUAL ASSEMBLE PROCEDURES:
1. SELECT WHETHER THE ABSOLUTE OR RELOCATABLE VERSION IS DESIRED.
2. IF THE ABSOLUTE VERSION IS SELECTED, MODIFY ORG STATEMENT IF A
STARTING ADDRESS OF 12000(8) IS NOT DESIRED.
3. ASSEMBLE THE PROGRAM.
4. IF THE ABSOLUTE VERSION HAS BEEN ASSEMBLED, LOAD THE OBJECT TAPE
THROUGH THE BASIC BINARY LOADER.
5. IF THE RELOCATABLE VERSION HAS BEEN ASSEMBLED, LOAD THE OBJECT TAPE
THROUGH THE BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM.
6. TO ENTER THE PROGRAM, SET SWITCH REGISTER TO STARTING ADDRESS OF
'CDUMP' ROUTINE, PRESS 'LOAD ADDRESS', SET SWITCH REGISTER TO OCTAL
ADDRESS OF IO LOCATION OF PUNCH DEVICE, PRESS 'PRESET' AND 'RUN'.
A LEADER WILL BE PUNCHED.
7. THE PROGRAM WILL HLT 1 (102001B). SET SWITCH REGISTER TO STARTING
ADDRESS TO BE PUNCHED AND PRESS 'RUN'.
8. THE PROGRAM WILL HLT 2 (102002B). SET SWITCH REGISTER TO ENDING
ADDRESS TO BE PUNCHED AND PRESS 'RUN'.
9. AFTER TAPE HAS BEEN PUNCHED, THE PROGRAM WILL HLT 1 (102001B).
A. TO PUNCH ANOTHER BLOCK, REPEAT ABOVE PROCEDURE.
B. TO TERMINATE, SET SWITCH REGISTER TO 0 OR 1 AND PRESS 'RUN'.
A TRAILER WILL BE PUNCHED AND THE PROGRAM WILL HLT 77B
(102077B).
C. TO PUNCH ANOTHER TAPE, PRESS 'RUN' TO PUNCH A LEADER AND REPEAT
ABOVE PROCEDURE.
10. IF ENDING ADDRESS IS LESS THAN STARTING ADDRESS, THE PROGRAM WILL
HLT 0 (102000B). SET SWITCH REGISTER TO CORRECT STARTING ADDRESS
AND CONTINUE ABOVE PROCEDURE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X13501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MEDIA CONVERSION
**REVISION?
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
CONVERSION DUMP
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM CONVERTS ASCII CODE FROM ONE TYPE OF STORAGE MEDIA TO
ANOTHER. CONVERSION MODES ALLOWED ARE: CARD TO MAG TAPE, CARD TO
LIST AND CARD TO PAPER TAPE; MAG TAPE TO LIST AND MAG TAPE TO PAPER
TAPE; PAPER TAPE TO LIST, PAPER TAPE TO MAG TAPE, AND PAPER TAPE TO
PAPER TAPE. THE PROGRAM RESPONDS TO USER COMMANDS UNDER DOS-M AND IS
COMPATIBLE WITH THE :STORE AND :DUMP DIRECTIVES.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
USUAL ASSEMBLY, LOADS AND RUN PROCEDURES
THE PROGRAM OPERATES IN RESPONSE TO 4-LETTER COMMANDS.
1. CARD TO MAG TAPE (/CTM)
2. CARD TO PAPER TAPE (/CTP)
3. CARD TO LIST (/CTL)
4. MAG TAPE TO LIST (/MTL)
5. MAG TAPE TO PAPER TAPE (/MTP)
6. PAPER TAPE TO LIST (/PTL)
7. PAPER TAPE TO MAG TAPE (/PTM)
THE LAST COMMAND SHOULD ALWAYS BE /END
THE FOLLOWING LOGICAL UNITS ARE ASSUMED:
1 -SYSTEM CONSOLE
4 -PAPER TAPE PUNCH
5 -PAPER TAPE READER
6 -LIST DEVICE
7 -CARD READER
8 -MAG TAPE
IF A DEVICE DOES NOT EXIST IN THE PARTICULAR SYSTEM, THE PROGRAM MAY
STILL BE USED BUT ALL REFERENCES TO THE NON-EXISTENT DEVICE SHOULD BE
AVOIDED. THE L.U. FOR A PARTICULAR DEVICE MAY BE PERMANENTLY ALTERED
BY RE-ASSEMBLING THE PROGRAM:
D4 SHOULD CONTAIN PUNCH L.U.
D5 SHOULD CONTAIN PAPER TAPE READER L.U.
D6 SHOULD CONTAIN LIST L.U.
D7 SHOULD CONTAIN CARD READER L.U.
D8 SHOULD CONTAIN MAG TAPE L.U.
THE INPUT DATA SHOULD CONFORM TO THE STANDARD ASCII FORMAT, EXCEPT FOR
CARD WHERE EBCDIC FORMAT IS USED.
THE LAST GIVEN COMMAND SHOULD ALWAYS BE /END.
AT THE END OF THE INPUT DATA STREAM, MEDIA IS SUSPENDED. THE USER HAS
THE OPTION OF TERMINATING THE PROCESS BY TYPING :GO,0 OR TO CARRYING ON
BY :GO,N WHERE N IS THE INPUT DEVICE. IN THIS WAY IT IS POSSIBLE
TO FORM ONE DATA SET OF SEVERAL (I.E. TO CREATE A MAG TAPE FROM BOTH
PAPER TAPE AND CARDS.)
THE END OF THE INPUT DATA STREAMS IS CAUSED BY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING
CONDITIONS:
- END-OF-TAPE (PAPER TAPE, MAG TAPE)
- INPUT HOPPER EMPTY (CARD READER)
- OUTPUT STACKER FULL (CARD READER)
- END-OF-FILE (MAG TAPE)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X13601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 7900 DISC TO DISC DUMP
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DUMP DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SET OF PROGRAMS WILL ALLOW THE OPERATOR TO TRANSFER DATA BETWEEN
THE FIXED AND REMOVEABLE PLATTERS OF AN HP7900A MOVING HEAD DISC.
PROTECTED AND DEFECTIVE CYLINDER FLAGS ARE TRANSFERRED TO THE
DESTINATION DISC. ANY CONTIGUOUS BLOCK OF TRACKS CAN BE TRANSFERRED
OR VERIFIED. ALL DATA WRITTEN ON A DISC TRACK IS READ AND COMPARED
WITH ORIGINAL DATA DURING A COPY OPERATION. THE OPERATOR CAN CHOOSE
TO PATCH UP TO TWENTY RANDOM LOCATIONS DURING A TRANSFER.
IT OPERATES UNDER BCS AND REQUIRES 16K WITH DMA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. EDIT ASSEMBLY PROGRAM (IDISK) TO INDICATE LOWER DISC INTERFACE
SELECT CODE AS FOLLOWS:
/R,543
DISC1 EQU XXB
/E
NOTE: PRESENT SOURCE TAPE CONFIGURED FOR S.C. 14B.
2. ASSEMBLE "IDISK", COMPILE FORTRAN PROGRAM "DCOPY" AND FUNCTIONS
"ISTAT" AND "IERR". (TAPES STRUNG IN THIS ORDER).
3. LOAD A CONFIGURED BCS OPERATING SYSTEM.
4. USING THE BCS LOADER LOAD DCOPY, ISTAT, IERR, IDISK AND THE BCS
RELOCATABLE LIBRARY.
5. ANSWER QUESTIONS DISPLAYED ON LU #2. (SEE EXAMPLE SECTION 7.0)
NOTE: PLACE DISC PROTECT SWITCH IN "OVERRIDE" POSITION WHEN
COPYING.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE DISC DRIVER (IDISK) NEEDS ACCESS TO THE DMA CONTROL WORDS (DMAC1
AND DMAC2) IN THE BCS SYSTEM. SINCE THESE LOCATIONS ARE NOT AVAILABLE
AS EXT'S AT LOAD TIME, THEY ARE ASSUMED TO BE LOCATED 221(8) LOCATIONS
AFTER EXT LABEL .IOC. AS THE CASE WITH I/O CONTROL 24173-60001 REV A.
THE USER MUST INSURE HIS CONFIGURED BCS TAPE CONTAINS THIS REVISION
OF IOC. ALSO, THE BCS SYSTEM MUST HAVE DMA ALLOCATED AT GENERATION
TIME.
X13701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 2870/7900 DISC/MAGNETIC TAPE UTILITY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
DISC MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP
COPY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SIO
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ABSOLUTE ASSEMBLY PROGRAM USES THE MAGNETIC TAPE AND TELEPRINTER
SIO DRIVERS TO PERFORM DISC TO DISC, DISC TO MAGNETIC TAPE, AND MAGNETIC
TAPE TO DISC COPIES. IT IS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH AT LEAST 16K CORE,
DMA, AND AN HP2870 OR HP7900 DISC. UP TO FOUR DISC DRIVERS (SUBCHANNEL
0 THROUGH 7) CAN BE USED, AND THE MAGNETIC TAPE CAN HAVE UP TO 7 FILES
WITH AUTOMATIC FILE POSITIONING.
THE OPERATOR COMMUNICATES WITH THE PROGRAM BY ANSWERING QUESTIONS ON THE
TELETYPE. THE OPTIONS AVAILABLE ARE:
DU - DUMP DISC
LO - LOAD DISC FROM MAGNETIC TAPE WITH AUTOMATIC VERIFY
VE - VERIFY DISC WITH MAGNETIC TAPE
CO - COPY DISC TO DISC WITH AUTOMATIC VERIFY
TE - TERMINATE
DISCS WITH CYLINDER FLAGGED DEFECTIVE CANNOT BE COPIED OR DUMPED.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENT: HP 7970/2020/3030 MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVE, HP 7900 OR
2870 DISC SYSTEM TELETYPE OR CRT, DMA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS ABSOLUTE ASSEMBLY PROGRAM USES THE MAGNETIC TAPE AND TELEPRINTER
SIO DRIVERS TO PERFORM DISC TO DISC, DISC TO MAGNETIC TAPE, AND
MAGNETIC TAPE TO DISC COPIES. IT IS DESIGNED TO WORK WITH AT LEAST
16K CORE, DMA, AND AN HP 2870 OR HP 7900 DISC. UP TO FOUR DISC DRIVERS
(SUBCHANNEL 0 THROUGH 7) CAN BE USED, AND THE MAGNETIC TAPE CAN HAVE
UP TO 7 FILES WITH AUTOMATIC FILE POSITIONING.
THE OPERATOR COMMUNICATES WITH THE PROGRAM BY ANSWERING QUESTIONS ON THE
TELETYPE. THE OPTIONS AVAILABLE ARE:
DU - DUMP DISC TO MAGNETIC TAPE
LO - LOAD DISC FROM MAGNETIC TAPE WITH AUTOMATIC VERIFY
VE - VERIFY DISC WITH MAGNETIC TAPE
CO - COPY DISC TO DISC WITH AUTOMATIC VERIFY
TE - TERMINATE
SEVERAL ERROR HALTS ARE INCLUDED IN THIS PROGRAM TO INSURE PROPER HARD-
WARE OPERATION. DISCS WITH CYLINDERS FLAGGED DEFECTIVE CANNOT BE
COPIED OR DUMPED. PROTECTED CYCLINDERS ARE COPIED AS PROTECTED.
THERE HAS BEEN A NEED FOR A PROGRAM, NOT DEPENDENT ON A PARTICULAR
OPERATION SOFTWARE SYSTEM, WHICH WILL ALLOW DUMPING, LOADING AND
COPYING OF DISC PLATTERS TO MAGNETIC TAPE, FROM MAGNETIC TAPE OR TO
OTHER DISC PLATTERS. SOME PROGRAMS EXIST FOR SPECIFIC DISCS, SPECIFIC
OPERATING SYSTEMS OR SPECIFIC DISC FORMATS. OTHER PROGRAMS EXIST WHICH
WILL DO PART OF THE JOB BUT DO NOT HAVE VERIFICATION OR ARE SLOW, ETC.
MADIU (MAGNETIC TAPE DISC UTILITY) COMBINES ALL OF THE DESIRED CHARAC-
TERISTICS OF THE ABOVE PROGRAMS INTO ONE PROGRAM. CHARACTERISTICS OF
MADIU ARE:
1. COPIES FROM MAGNETIC TAPE TO DISC, DISC TO MAGNETIC TAPE, AND
DISC TO DISC.
2. MULTIPLE DISC DRIVERS POSSIBLE.
3. HP 7900 SERIES OR HP 2870 SERIES DISCS ALLOWED.
4. HP 7970 (9 TRACK OR 7 TRACK), HP 2020, HP 3030 MAGNETIC TAPE
DRIVES ALLOWED.
5. MULTIPLE TAPE FILES POSSIBLE UP TO 7 PER TAPE.
6. MANY ERROR HALTS TO INSURE PROPER HARDWARE OPERATION.
7. VERIFICATION (VERY IMPORTANT).
8. DISC TIME OUT LOOPS (IF NO FLAG RETURNED IN SET TIME PERIOD, A
HALT OCCURS).
9. DISCS WITH CYLINDERS FLAGGED DEFECTIVE CANNOT BE COPIED OR
DUMPED. REV B (FUTURE) WILL ALLOW COPIES AND DUMPS OF THESE
DISCS.
10. PROTECTED CYLINDERS ARE COPIED AS PROTECTED.
11. ALL 203 CYLINDERS ARE COPIED.
12. CONFIGURATION IS SAME AS FOR AN SIO DRIVER.
13. THE ONLY OTHER SOFTWARE REQUIRED IS THE 16K SIO TELETYPE DRIVER
AND THE APPROPRIATE 16K SIO MAGNETIC TAPE DRIVER.
14. AUTOMATIC MAGNETIC TAPE FORMAT CHECKING (EXCEPT DENSITY).
15. DURING DISC LOAD OR COPY, THE DESTINATION DISC IS ALWAYS INITIAL-
IZED.
16. ON THE HP 2100, THE SWITCH REGISTER DISPLAYS THE OCTAL TRACK NUMBER
OF THE PRESENT DISC TRACK BEING READ.
CONFIGURING MADIU
IT IS IMPORTANT THAT THE TAPES BE LOADED IN THE FOLLOWING ORDER:
1. LOAD THE MADIU BINARY TAPE USING BBL (16K OR LARGER CORE IS
REQUIRED).
2. LOAD ADDRESS 2 (OCTAL).
3. SET SWITCH REGISTER BITS 0-5 TO THE DISC HIGHER PRIORITY I/O SLOT
CHANNEL NUMBER.
4. FOR THE HP 7900 DISC, SET SWITCH REGISTER BIT 15 "OFF".
5. FOR THE HP 2870 DISC, SET SWITCH REGISTER BIT 15 "ON".
6. PUSH PRESET.
7. PUSH RUN.
8. HALT 77B INDICATES GOOD CONFIGURATION.
9. LOAD AND CONFIGURE THE 16K SIO TTY DRIVER; THE 16K SIO PUNCH DRIVER
(OPTIONAL); THE 16K SIO MAG TAPE DRIVER.
10. DUMP A CONFIGURED TAPE WITH THE 16K SIO DUMP (OPTIONAL).
TO RUN MADIU
1. READY ALL EQUIPMENT. TURN THE PROTECT OVERRIDE SWITCH TO "OVERRIDE"
("ON" ON THE 2870).
2. STARTING MADIU - LOAD THE CONFIGURED MADIU TAPE (OR LOAD AND CON-
FIGURE MADIU AND SIO DRIVERS). SET THE STARTING ADDRESS EQUAL TO
100 (OCTAL), CLEAR THE SWITCH REGISTER - PRESS PRESET AND RUN.
NOTE: IF A MAG TAPE IS NOT TO BE USED (I.E., DISC-TO-DISC COPY
ONLY) USE STARTING ADDRESS 120B. THIS WILL BYPASS THE
REWIND AND AVOID A HALT 44B (SIO DRIVER HALT FOR UNIT NOT
READY).
3. MESSAGES AND RESPONSES - MADIU HAS SEVERAL MESSAGES REQUIRING
RESPONSES.
**MESSAGE
(FOR 7900) TYPE "LO" "DU" "VE" "CO" OR "TE"
*MEANING - SYSTEM IS CONFIGURED FOR HP 7900 DISC. SPECIFY DESIRED
OPERATION.
*RESPONSES POSSIBLE:
LO - LOAD MAG TAPE TO DISC (WITH AUTOMATIC VERIFY)
DU - DUMP DISC TO MAG TAPE
VE - VERIFY MAG TAPE AND DISC
CO - COPY DISC TO DISC (WITH AUTOMATIC VERIFY)
TE - TERMINATE (HALT 77B)
**MESSAGE
(FOR 2870) TYPE "LO" "DU" "VE" OR "TE"
*MEANING - CONFIGURED FOR 2870 DISC - SPECIFY DESIRED OPERATION
*RESPONSE - SAME AS FOR 7900
**MESSAGE
SUBCHANNEL # ? SOURCE SUBCHANNEL # ?
*MEANING - IF DUMP, LOAD OR VERIFY - MEANS WHAT DISC SUBCHANNEL IS
TO BE USED.
- IF COPY - MEANS WHAT DISC SUBCHANNEL IS THE SOURCE DISC
*RESPONSE - ANY SUBCHANNEL FROM 0 TO 7 (ONE ASCII NUMBER, CR, LF).
SEE 4 BELOW.
**MESSAGE
DESTINATION SUBCHANNEL # ?
*MEANING - WHAT IS THE DESTINATION CHANNEL FOR THE DISC TO DISC
COPY (COPY ONLY)
*RESPONSE - ANY SUBCHANNEL FROM 0 TO 7 (ONE ASCII NUMBER, CR, LF.)
**MESSAGE
TAPE FILE # ?
*MEANING - WHICH FILE IS TO BE USED ON THE MAG TAPE
*RESPONSE - ANY NUMBER FROM 1 TO 7. THE FIRST PHYSICAL FILE ON MAG
TAPE IS FILE #1. THE PROGRAM ASSUMES THAT THERE ARE
N-1 FILES ALREADY ON THE TAPE FOR AN ENTRY OF N DURING
A DUMP. DURING A LOAD, THE PROGRAM ASSUMES THAT THERE
ARE N FILES (AT LEAST) ON THE TAPE. OF COURSE, DUMPING
TO FILE N WILL DESTROY ALL FILES GREATER THAN N.
NOTE: ALWAYS RESTART AT 100B IF A NEW TAPE IS LOADED OR THE TAPE IS
MANUALLY MOVED. THIS WILL INSURE PROPER FILE COUNT.
4. DISC UNIT NUMBERS AND SUBCHANNEL NUMBERS TABLE:
FIXED DISC REMOVEABLE DISC
PHYSICAL DRIVE DRIVE # SUBCHANNEL # SUBCHANNEL #
1ST 0 0 1
2ND 1 2 3
3RD 2 4 5
4TH 3 6 7
USE THESE NUMBERS IN RESPONSE TO "SUBCHANNEL # ?"
5. AFTER MADIU IS RUN
*BE SURE TO LABEL YOUR DISC AND MAGNIFY TAPES.
*MAGNETIC TAPES SHOULD BE IDENTIFIED BY (1) SOURCE DISK TYPE, (2)
DENSITY, (3) 7 OR 9 TRACK TAPE, (4) NUMBER OF FILES, AND (5)
CONTENT OF EACH FILE.
*BE SURE TO RETURN THE DISC PROTECT OVERRIDE SWITCH BACK TO
"PROTECT" ("OFF" ON 2870).
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
HLT 00B - DISC NOT READY (BITS 2 OR 6 SET)
HLT O3B - TIME OUT ON DISC DATA FLAG. PUSH RUN TO GET STATUS IN "A"
REGISTER. STATUS 31B= DEFECTIVE CYLINDER.
HLT 04B - POWER FAIL
HLT 05B - TIME OUT ON DISC COMMAND FLAG. PUSH RUN TO GET DISC STATUS
IN "A" REGISTER.
HLT 07B - DISC SEEK ERROR OR DATA PROTECT (BITS 8, 9 OR 10 SET). PUSH
RUN TO GET DISC STATUS IN "A" REGISTER.
HLT 10B - ANY DISC STATUS BIT SET EXCEPT 3 AND 4 AFTER A READ OR WRITE
(CHECK OVERRIDE/PROTECT SWITCH). PUSH RUN TO GET STATUS IN
"A" REGISTER.
HLT 11B - SIO MAG TAPE DRIVER HLT (NO WRITE RING).
HLT 13B - ILLEGAL CYLINDER STATUS (2ND WORD ON MAG TAPE) OR DURING
COPY.
HLT 16B - BAD CYLINDER STATUS DURING LOAD VERIFY (MAG TAPE STATUS
(WORD 2) AND DISC READBACK STATUS DISAGREE).
HLT 17B - EOF OR EOT ON MAG TAPE
HLT 20B - MAG TAPE ERROR
HLT 21B - BAD DATA VERIFY
HLT 33B - MAG TAPE RECORD LENGTH WRONG, I.E., WRONG FORMAT FOR A LOAD.
HLT 35B - CYLINDER COUNT UNEQUAL TO 203
HLT 36B - INCOMPLETE DATA TRANSFER FOR DISC CURRENT CYLINDER
HLT 40B - MAG TAPE SIO DRIVER NOT LOADED
HLT 44B - MAG TAPE SIO DRIVER HLT (7970)
HLT 55B - THE CURRENT CYLINDER IS DEFECTIVE
HLT 77B - ORDERLY HALT, PUSH RUN TO CONTINUE
**MISCELLANEOUS:
A. TO INSURE PROPER TAPE POSITIONING A REWIND IS INITIATED WHEN
STARTING AT ADDRESS = 100B.
B. ANY BACKWARD POSITIONING OF THE MAG TAPE RESULTS IN A REWIND THEN A
FORWARD POSITION TO THE PROPER FILE #.
C. UNLOADING, LOADING DISCS OR OPENING DISC DOORS MAY CAUSE STATUS TO
THE CONTROLLER WHICH WILL HALT THE COMPUTER. AVOID SUCH CHANGES
EXCEPT WHILE THE PROGRAM IS WAITING FOR THE RESPONSE TO THE
OPERATION DESIRED MESSAGE. "DATA PROTECTED" PLATTERS CANNOT BE
ACCESSED.
D. VERIFICATION IS ACCOMPLISHED DURING THE LOAD AS FOLLOWS:
* READ MAG TAPE RECORD (BUFFER 1)
* WRITE ON DISC (FROM BUFFER 1)
* READ DISC BACK (BUFFER 2)
*COMPARE BUFFERS (1 AND 2)
CYLINDER STATUS (PROTECTED, ETC.) IS ALSO VERIFIED.
E. VERIFICATION DURING VERIFY IS AS FOLLOWS:
* READ MAG TAPE RECORD (BUFFER 1)
* READ DISC TRACK (BUFFER 2)
* COMPARE BUFFERS (1 AND 2)
CYLINDER STATUS IS COMPARED ALSO.
F. NO VERIFICATION IS ACCOMPLISHED DURING A DUMP. A VERIFY IS
RECOMMENDED FOLLOWING A DUMP.
G. DISC TO DISC COPY IS VERIFIED AS IN THE LOAD FUNCTION.
H. HALT 55 INDICATES A DEFECTIVE TRACK. THE TRACK NUMBER (OCTAL) IS
IN THE "A" REGISTER.
I. HALT 77B IS AN ORDERLY GOOD HALT. TO RESTART MADIU, PUSH RUN.
J. ANY OTHER HALT OTHER THAN HLT 77B INDICATES A MALFUNCTION, FIX THE
PROBLEM THEN RESTART AT P = 100B (OR 120B IF DISC COPY ONLY).
K. MAG TAPE FORMAT (2 CHARACTERS/WORD (3 FOR 7 TRACK)
1ST WORD = NUMBER OF WORDS IN THE RECORD (SIO CHARACTERISTIC)
2ND WORD = 16 BIT DISC STATUS AFTER READING TRACK
REST OF RECORD = DISC TRACK DATA
X13801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: UTDMP
**PROGRAM TITLE:
UNIVERSAL MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 3
**KEYWORDS:
MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES A FORMATTED DUMP OF MAG TAPE DATA. THE DATA MAY
BE IN ANY FORMAT AND THE BLOCK SIZE MAY BE OF ANY PRACTICAL LENGTH.
THE PROGRAM IS CONVERSATIONAL IN OBTAINING THE INFORMATION NEEDED FOR
A JOB. (DUMPS ARE ON A PER-FILE BASIS). THE PROGRAM GIVES BOTH AN
OCTAL AND AN ALPHANUMERIC REPRESENTATION OF THE DATA IN A CONVENIENT
FORM.
HARDWARE REQUIRED: 2100 CPU, 7900 DISC DRIVE, 7908B MAG TAPE DRIVE,
TTY, AND LINE PRINTER DESIRABLE FOR OUTPUT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. LOAD
:STORE, S, XXXXX, 5 (STORE TAPE IN A SOURCE FILE)
:JFILE, XXXXX
:PR,FTN4,2,99 (COMPILE)
:PR, LOADR (LOAD)
:STORE, P (STORE)
2. RUN
:PR, UTDMP
PROGRAM REQUESTS TAPE TO BE DUMPED AND PAUSES.
OPERATOR MUST MOUNT TAPE.
:GO
PROGRAM REQUESTS FILE TO BE DUMPED. FIRST FILE ON TAPE IS
NUMBER 1, ETC.
PROGRAM PAUSES.
:GO FOR NEXT FILE :STOP IF FINISHED
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X13901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
TIME OF DAY CLOCK
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
TIME
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
AFTER INITIALLY BEING SET TO THE CORRECT TIME, THIS ROUTINE FURNISHES
THE TIME OF DAY ON DEMAND. UNITS ARE HOURS, MINUTES AND SECONDS. AN
ADDITIONAL FEATURE, ELAPSED TIME CAN BE MEASURED WITHOUT INTERFERENCE
WITH THE TIME-OF-DAY FUNCTION. THE CLOCK STOPS WHEN THE COMPUTER HALTS.
ONE HP12539 TIME BASE GENERATOR IS REQUIRED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CLOCK IS ALWAYS TO BE LOADED BEFORE THE RELOCATABLE LIBRARY. TO
INITIALIZE THE TIME OF DAY CLOCK, THE USER PROGRAM MUST:
CALL SETUP
WHEN THIS INSTRUCTION IS EXECUTED, THE CLOCK ROUTINE WILL PRINT:
ENTER TIME (HRS:MIN:SEC:)
AND THE OPERATOR WILL THEN ENTER THE TIME OF DAY PLUS A HALF MINUTE OR
SO. THE OPERATOR THEN TYPES THE KEYS CR,LF, AND THE COMPUTER WILL HALT
WITH: 102077 IN THE T REGISTER.
WHEN THE USER PRESSES RUN, THE REAL TIME OF DAY WILL BE MAINTAINED BY
THE CLOCK ENTRY POINT (NOT CALLABLE FROM THE USER PROGRAM).
HALT OR PAUSE CEASES INCREMENTATION OF THE CLOCK. WHEN PROGRAM
OPERATION IS RESUMED, CLOCK IS INCREMENTED FROM THE EXISTING VALUE.
.CLOK MAINTAINS AN INTEGER CLOCK AT THIS ENTRY POINT NOT CALLABLE BY A
USER PROGRAM. IT MAY BE SET OR CHECKED THROUGH THE USE OF STCLK AND
RDCLK ENTRY POINTS.
SEE SECTION 4.2.1 FOR OTHER POSSIBLE ENTRY POINTS.
ENTRY POINT(S)
CALL DATIM (IH,IM,IS) READS THE REAL TIME OF DAY.
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
IH INTEGER SUBROUTINE ASSIGNS HOURS WHERE 0</=IH</=23
IM INTEGER SUBROUTINE ASSIGNS MINUTES WHERE 0</=IM</=59
IS INTEGER SUBROUTINE ASSIGNS SECONDS 0</=IS</=59
CALL HALT CEASES INCREMENTATION OF THE CLOCK AND RESETS IT TO ZERO. IT
IS SIMILAR TO THE PAUSE STATEMENT IN THAT IT WAITS FOR THE COMPLETION OF
ALL I/O OPERATIONS BEFORE HALTING THE COMPUTER. IN ADDITION, HOWEVER,
IT CLEARS THE TIME OF DAY CLOCK AND INHIBITS INCREMENTATION OF THE
BINARY CLOCK. NO MESSAGE IS WRITTEN ON THE TELEPRINTER WHEN THE HALT
OCCURS.
CALL STCLK (N) SETS THE CLOCK TO ZERO AND CAUSES IT TO BE INCREMENTED
BY ONE EVERY (N*10) MILLISECONDS.
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
N INTEGER N MUST BE AN INTEGER CONSTANT WHERE 1</=N</=32767
CALL RDCLK (M) ASSIGNS THE VALUE OF THE CLOCK TO THE INTEGER VARIABLE M.
THE CLOCK CONTINUES TO BE INCREMENTED AT THE MOST RECENTLY SPECIFIED
INTERVAL UNTIL RESET BY ANOTHER CALL TO STCLK.
THE TIME OF DAY CLOCK LIBRARY
CUSTOMERS WHO HAVE A TIME BASE GENERATOR HAVE CONTINUALLY REQUESTED A
TIME OF DAY CLOCK ROUTINE FOR USE OUTSIDE THE WORLD OF THE 2018
EXECUTIVE SYSTEM. HEREIN IS CONTAINED DOCUMENTATION FOR THE BAILEY
CLOCK ROUTINE.
SINCE THIS IS A LIBRARY SUBROUTINE, IT SHOULD BE LOADED AFTER THE MAIN
PROGRAM BUT BEFORE THE FORTRAN/ALGOL LIBRARY.
THE SUB-PROGRAM IS CALLED CLOCK AND HAS ENTRY POINTS
SETUP
CLOCK
.CLOK
STCLK
RDCLK
DATIM
HALT
WHICH MAY BE CALLED FROM THE SOURCE PROGRAM.
TO INITIALIZE THE TIME OF DAY CLOCK, THE USER PROGRAM MUST
(FORTRAN) CALL SETUP
OR
(ASSEMBLY) JSB SETUP
DEF (RETURN ADDRESS)
WHEN THIS INSTRUCTION IS EXECUTED THE CLOCK ROUTINE WILL PRINT
ENTER TIME (HRS: MIN: SEC:)
AND THE OPERATOR WILL THEN ENTER THE TIME OF DAY PLUS A HALF MINUTE OR
SO. THE OPERATOR THEN TYPES THE KEYS CR, LF, AND THE COMPUTER WILL
HALT WITH 102077 IN THE T REGISTER. WHEN THE OPERATOR PRESSES
THE RETURN BUTTON, THE REAL TIME OF DAY WILL BE MAINTAINED BY THE CLOCK
ENTRY POINT (NOT CALLABLE FROM USER PROGRAM).
AFTER THE CLOCK HAS BEEN INITIALIZED, REAL TIME OF DAY MAY BE READ BY
MEANS OF A
(FORTRAN) CALL DATIM (IH, IM, IS)
OR
(ASSEMBLY) JSB DATIM
DEF (RETURN ADDRESS)
DEF IH
DEF IM
DEF IS
.
.
.
THE ACTUAL ARGUMENTS ARE THREE INTEGER VARIABLES TO WHICH THE SUBROUTINE
ASSIGNS VALUES OF THE TIME IN HOURS (0 TO 23), MINUTES (0 TO 59), AND
SECONDS (0 TO 59). THE CLOCK IS INITIALLY SET BY MEANS OF A CALL SETUP.
THE CLOCK CEASES TO BE INCREMENTED WHEN A HALT OPERATION IS EXECUTED.
IF THE HALT OPERATION WAS A RESULT OF A CALL TO THE HALT SUBROUTINE,
THE CLOCK IS RESET TO ZERO. ITS VALUE WILL REMAIN AT ZERO UNTIL SET
THROUGH A CALL TO SETUP.
IF THE HALT WAS DUE TO A PAUSE STATEMENT OR PRESSING OF THE HALT
BUTTON ON THE CONSOLE, THE TIME IS UNCHANGED. WHEN PROGRAM OPERATION
IS RESUMED, THE CLOCK IS INCREMENTED FROM THE EXISTING VALUE.
THE BAILEY CLOCK ROUTINE MAINTAINS AN INTEGER CLOCK AT ENTRY POINT
.CLOK (NOT CALLABLE BY A USER PROGRAM). IT MAY BE SET OR CHECKED
THROUGH THE USE OF STCLK AND RDCLK SUBROUTINES. A
(FORTRAN) CALL STCLK (N)
OR
(ASSEMBLY) JSB STCLK
DEF (RETURN ADDRESS)
DEF N
.
.
.
SETS THE CLOCK TO ZERO AND CAUSES IT TO BE INCREMENTED BY ONE EVERY
(N*10) MILLISECONDS. THE N MUST BE AN INTEGER CONSTANT (1-32, = 767).
(FORTRAN) CALL RDCLK (M)
OR
(ASSEMBLY) JSB RDCLK
DEF (RETURN ADDRESS)
DEF M
ASSIGNS THE VALUE OF THE CLOCK TO THE INTEGER VARIABLE M. THE CLOCK
CONTINUES TO BE INCREMENTED AT THE MOST RECENTLY SPECIFIED INTERVAL
UNTIL RESET BY ANOTHER CALL TO STCLK.
THE SUBROUTINE HALT IS USED TO HALT THE COMPUTER. IT IS SIMILAR TO THE
PAUSE STATEMENT IN THAT IT WAITS FOR THE COMPLETION OF ALL INPUT/OUTPUT
OPERATIONS BEFORE HALTING THE COMPUTER. IN ADDITION, HOWEVER, IT CLEARS
THE TIME OF DAY CLOCK AND INHIBITS INCREMENTATION OF THE BINARY CLOCK.
NO MESSAGE IS WRITTEN ON THE TELEPRINTER WHEN THE HALT OCCURS. THE
FORMAT OF THE CALL IS:
(FORTRAN) CALL HALT
OR
(ASSEMBLY) JSB HALT
DEF (RETURN ADDRESS)
IF THE HALT SUBROUTINE IS USED, THE TIME OF DAY CLOCK REMAINS SET TO
ZERO (MIDNIGHT) UNTIL RESET THROUGH A CALL SET UP.
IF THE PAUSE STATEMENT IS USED, OR IF THE HALT BUTTON ON THE COMPUTER
CONSOLE IS PRESSED, THE TIME OF DAY CLOCK IS INCREMENTED WHEN THE
PROGRAM OPERATION IS RESTARTED, BUT THE TIME WILL BE INCORRECT.
INCREMENTATION CONTINUES WITH THE TIME WHEN THE HALT OCCURRED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X14001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
SYMBOLIC ALPHANUMERIC GENERATOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PAPER TAPE LABEL
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
FURNISHING A MEANS OF LABELING A PROGRAM OR ROUTINE, THIS PROGRAM
GENERATES A BLOCK-LETTERING LEADER OR TRAILER FOR A PUNCHED TAPE.
A BUF-ASR-33/HIGH SPEED PUNCH OR BUF-ASR-35 IS REQUIRED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TO CONFIGURE THE GENERATOR:
PUT THE ADDRESS OF THE BUFFERED TELEPRINTER IN THE A-REG
PUT THE ADDRESS OF THE PUNCH (OR BUF-ASR-35) IN THE B-REG
LOAD ADDRESS 2 AND PUSH RUN
TO USE THE GENERATOR:
SET THE TELEPRINTER ON LINE
TURN ON THE PUNCH (ASR-35 ON KT)
LOAD ADDRESS 100B, PUSH RUN, AND TYPE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X14101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
RUN-TIME DATA INPUT FOR BASIC
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DATA MGMT PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
HP BASIC
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE TERMED SCANR, ALLOWS A PROGRAMMER TO FURNISH FREE-FIELD
DATA TO A RUNNING BASIC PROGRAM THROUGH A PHOTOREADER OR TELEPRINTER,
EMPLOYING THE NORMAL BASIC I/O DRIVERS. ANY NUMBER OF DATA ITEMS ARE
TRANSFERRED INTO AN ARRAY SPECIFIED BY THE USER PROGRAM.
THE SCANR ROUTINE, AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE MODIFICATION OF THE 20392A
BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM, CHANGES THE ROUTINE NORMALLY USED TO SCAN A DATA
STATEMENT SO THAT THE VALUES ARE READ FROM THE PHOTOREADER OR TELE-
PRINTER.
AFTER THE VALUES ARE PASSED TO THE USER PROGRAM, SCANR RESTORES THE
BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM TO ITS ORIGINAL STATE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ASSEMBLE, CONFIGURE WITH PBS AND BASIC COMPILER. INPUT IS FREE-FIELD.
ANY NUMBER OF DATA ITEMS ON A TAPE WILL BE ACCEPTED WHEN SEPARATED
BY COMMAS AND TERMINATED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN. MAXIMUM RECORD LENGTH
IS 72 CHARACTERS PER RECORD.
ENTRY POINT(S):
CALL (1,X,1,D)
-
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
1 INTEGER SUBROUTINE REFERENCE NUMBER
X REAL DATA VALUE PASSED TO HP BASIC THROUGH PHOTOREADER
OR TELEPRINTER IN A RUNNING PROGRAM.
1 INTEGER SPECIFIES ONE INPUT VALUE
-
D REAL IF D>=0, THEN INPUT IS VIA THE TELEPRINTER.
IF D<0, THEN INPUT IS VIA THE PHOTOREADER.
CALL (1, A(1), N, D)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
A(1) REAL THE FIRST ELEMENT (INPUT VALUE) OF ARRAY "A"
WHERE "A" IS DIMENSIONED "N".
N INTEGER 0<N<3276
THIS CALL EXPECTS "N" INPUT VALUES.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF A SYNTAX ERROR EXISTS IN THE DATA, OR IF A PARAMETER IS OUT OF RANGE,
OR IF THE INPUT DEVICE IS NOT READER, AN "ERROR 18 IN LINE XX" IS
PRINTED, AND BASIC RETURNS TO THE SYNTAX MODE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X14201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BASIC PHOTOREADER DATA INPUT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DATA MGMT PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
HP BASIC
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE ALLOWS A PROGRAMMER TO FURNISH FREE-FIELD DATA TO A
RUNNING BASIC PROGRAM BY MEANS OF A PHOTOREADER. THE USER REQUESTS
INPUT DATA BY MEANS OF AN INPUT STATEMENT. IF THE PHOTOREADER IS
READY WHEN THE STATEMENT IS EXECUTED, DATA IS FURNISHED TO THE PROGRAM
FROM THE PUNCHED TAPE IN THE PHOTOREADER. IF THE PHOTOREADER IS NOT
READY (I.E., NO TAPE INSTALLED OR GATE DOWN), THE TELEPRINTER TYPES A
QUESTION MARK AND DATA IS THEN ENTERED IN THE NORMAL MANNER FROM THE
KEYBOARD. THE ROUTINE IS AN ABSOLUTE-ADDRESS MODIFICATION OF THE 20392A
BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED INCLUDES AT LEAST 8K OF CORE STORAGE, AND A PHOTO-
READER WITH INTERFACE KIT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE ABSOLUTE OBJECT PROGRAM, THEN LOAD PBS, BASIC HP20392A AND THE
ABSOLUTE OBJECT PROGRAM IN THAT ORDER WITH BASIC BINARY LOADER AND
CONFIGURE BY RUNNING PBS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO ENTER DATA TO A RUNNING BASIC PROGRAM
BY MEANS OF THE HIGH SPEED PHOTOREADER. THE USER REQUESTS INPUT DATA
WITH AN INPUT STATEMENT. IF THE PHOTOREADER IS READY WHEN THE INPUT
STATEMENT IS EXECUTED, DATA IS READ INTO THE PROGRAM FROM PAPER TAPE
BY THE PHOTOREADER. IF THE PHOTOREADER IS NOT READY (I.E. NO TAPE OR
GATE DOWN), A QUESTION MARK IS PRINTED ON THE TELETYPE, AND DATA IS
ENTERED IN THE NORMAL MANNER FROM THE KEYBOARD.
FORMAT OF THE DATA ON PAPER TAPE IS FREE-FIELD, WITH THE NUMBER OF DATA
ITEMS PER RECORD DETERMINED BY THE NUMBER OF ARGUMENTS OF THE INPUT
STATEMENT. MAXIMUM RECORD LENGTH IS 72 CHARACTERS. SPACES MAY BE USED
TO SEPARATE DATA ITEMS WITHIN A RECORD, AND COMMENTS MAY APPEAR BETWEEN
DATA ITEMS, PROVIDED THAT THE FIRST CHARACTER OF A RECORD IS NOT S.
(S AS THE FIRST CHARACTER OF THE RECORD CAUSES TERMINATION OF
EXECUTION.) THE COMMENTS MUST NOT THEMSELVES CONTAIN NUMBERS. DATA
GENERATED BY A BASIC PRINT STATEMENT IS IN A FORMAT SUITABLE FOR
READING BY AN INPUT STATEMENT.
THIS SUBROUTINE CONSISTS OF THREE BASIC PARTS. THE FIRST PART MODIFIES
THAT PART OF THE BASIC INTERPRETER USED TO EXECUTE ON INPUT STATEMENT SO
THAT IT READS DATA FROM THE PHOTOREADER IF IT IS READY. THE
SECOND PART MODIFIES THE RECORD PROCESSING SECTION OF THE BASIC INTER-
PRETER SO THAT SPACES ARE COUNTED AS SIGNIFICANT WHEN AN INPUT RECORD IS
BEING PROCESSED. THE THIRD PART IS A BASIC CALL SUBROUTINE WHICH
ALLOWS THE USER TO EFFECTIVELY DELETE OR RESTORE THIS MODIFICATION BY
A CALL FROM A BASIC PROGRAM. THE CALL STATEMENT DELETES THE MODIFICA-
TION IF IT IS PRESENT OR RESTORES IT IF IT HAS BEEN DELETED.
CALL (1)
AFTER THE PROCEDURE GIVEN IN 4.1, THE MODIFICATIONS DESCRIBED IN 2.0
WILL BE IMPLEMENTED. THESE MODIFICATIONS MAY BE EFFECTIVELY DELETED
AT ANY TIME BY THE CALL STATEMENT GIVEN ABOVE. A SUBSEQUENT CALL (1)
RESTORES THE MODIFICATIONS. THE NEXT CALL (1) DELETES THEM AGAIN, ETC.
USE OF THIS CALL PERMITS THE USER TO INPUT ISOLATED DATA ITEMS FROM THE
KEYBOARD WHILE OBTAINING MOST OF THE DATA FROM A TAPE IN THE PHOTO-
READER. THE INPUT STATEMENTS FOR KEYBOARD INPUT DATA ARE BRACKETED
BY CALL (1) STATEMENTS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE DELAY THAT OCCURS BEFORE THE PRINTING OF THE QUESTION MARK ON THE
TTY IS DUE TO THE TIME REQUIRED TO DETERMINE THE STATUS OF THE
PHOTOREADER. IF THE USER DOES NOT WISH TO USE THE PHOTOREADER FOR
DATA INPUT, THIS DELAY MAY BE ELIMINATED BY DELETING THE MODIFICATIONS
WITH A CALL (1) STATEMENT.
THIS SUBROUTINE REQUIRES A PARTICULAR VERSION OF THE BASIC INTERPRETER,
BASIC HP20392A. WITH SOME MODIFICATIONS, IT COULD PROBABLY BE MADE TO
WORK WITH OTHER VERSIONS OF BASIC.
X14301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FORTRAN POWER FAIL LINK
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
FORTRAN SCHEDULING
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS MTS DACE
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE IS A RELOCATABLE FUNCTION WHICH, WHEN CALLED LINKS THE
POWER-FAIL RESTART INTERRUPT TO A FORTRAN PROGRAM. THIS PERMITS
THE PROGRAM TO BE RESTARTED WITHOUT MANIPULATION OF PANEL CONTROLS.
SIMPLIFIED RESTART IS EXTREMELY USEFUL WHEN A COMPUTER WITHOUT HIGH-
SPEED I/O DEVICES IS USED BY UNTRAINED PERSONNEL.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IN THE POWER FAILURE AUTO-RESTART OPTION FOR THE
COMPUTER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINT(S)
PWRFL
CALL ROUTINE
ASMB,R,B,L
JSB PWRFL
DEF *+1
SSA
JMP CONT LINK ACCOMPLISHED
. (RESTART RETURN)
.
.
FTN,B,L
IF (PWRFL)100,200
100 (RETURN AFTER LINKING)
200 (RETURN AFTER RESTART)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE POWER FAIL LINK POINT MAY BE MOVED DURING PROGRAM EXECUTION BY
REPEATED CALLING OF THE POWER FAIL ROUTINE.
X14401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CORE PUNCH IN BBL FORMAT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PAPER TAPE DUMP MEMORY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SELF-CON
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PUNCHES SELECTED AREAS OF CORE IN A FORMAT WHICH CAN BE
RELOADED BY THE BASIC BINARY LOADER. THE USER INPUTS THE NECESSARY
PARAMETERS THROUGH THE SWITCH REGISTER AT RUN TIME. PROVISIONS EXIST
TO ALLOW PUNCHING AN ABSOLUTE TAPE WHICH WILL RELOAD TO ANOTHER PART
OF THE CORE.
THIS FEATURE IS USEFUL FOR MOVING DATA.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM PUNCHES CORE IN BBL-FORMAT. IT IS DRIVEN BY AN INTERNAL
TABLE. EACH 32-BIT TABLE ENTRY DEFINES ONE AREA TO BE PUNCHED. THE
TABLE MAY CONTAIN AN ARBITRARY NUMBER OF ENTRIES AND IS RECONFIGURABLE
WITHOUT RE-ASSEMBLY.
PROVISIONS EXIST TO ALLOW PUNCHING AN ABSOLUTE TAPE WHICH WILL LOAD
ANYWHERE. THE FEATURE IS USEFUL FOR MOVING DATA AREAS AND, IN FACT,
FOR CREATING NEW PNCH-PROGRAM-TAPES WHICH LOAD ANYWHERE.
PNCH, PUNCHES CORE IN 128 WORD BBL FORMAT RECORDS. IT IS DRIVEN BY
THE PNCHX TABLE TO ALLOW MULTI-BLOCK OUTPUT. PROVISIONS EXIST TO
ALLOW PUNCHING AN ABSOLUTE TAPE WHICH WILL LOAD ANYWHERE. THIS FEATURE
IS USEFUL FOR MOVING DATA AREAS AND, IN FACT, FOR CREATING NEW PNCH-
PROGRAM-TAPES WHICH LOAD ANYWHERE.
CONFIGURATION:
THE PNCH-PROGRAM ORG THE BBL-RECORD SIZE, THE I/O CHANNEL, AND THE
PNCHX TABLE ARE DEFINED AT ASSEMBLY TIME. THESE MAY BE ARBITRARILY
REDEFINED IN CORE AND A NEW PNCH-PROGRAM-TAPE PUNCHED BY PNCH ITSELF
(SEE SPECIAL USAGE #2 DESCRIBED BELOW).
EDIT LINE #8 PNCH EQU 12B I/O CHANNEL OF PUNCH TO CONFIGURE TO YOUR
SYSTEM.
INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD PNCH-PROGRAM-TAPE WITH BBL
2. SETUP PNCHX TABLE WITH ENTRIES IN ONE OF THE FOLLOWING FORMATS
(SEE EXAMPLE BELOW):
DEF FIRST (PUNCHES FIRST THROUGH LAST AND
DEF LAST+1 GOES TO NEXT TABLE ENTRY).
DEF XXXXX (CAUSES JMP TO ADDR).
DEF ADDR,I
DEF BBBBB,I (CAUSES HLT 77B. IF RUN IS PUSHED, THE
DEF AAAAA BA-REG IS INTERPRETED AS 32-BIT ENTRY).
3. LOAD P-REGISTER WITH PNCH STARTING ADDRESS (I.E., THE LOCATION OF
THE SYMBOL "PNCH", THEN PUSH RUN. THE PNCHX TABLE WILL BE PROCESSED
ENTRY BY ENTRY.
NORMAL USAGE (PUNCHING DATA & PROGRAMS):
ASSUME PNCH IS LOADED AT 2000 (SO PNCHX STARTS AT 2074), THEN TO PUNCH
BASEPGE (2-1777) EXCEPT SIO AREA (100-107),
LOAD SWREG: THEN PUSH:
2074 LOAD ADDR (PNCHX=PNCH+74)
2 LOAD MEM (PUNCH 2-77)
100 "
110 " (PUNCH 110-1777)
2000 "
100000 " (HLT, THEN JMP TO 2000)
102000 "
NOW LOAD ADDRESS 2000 AND PUSH RUN. MULTIPLE COPIES OF THE PUNCHED TAPE
ARE OBTAINED BY MANUALLY GENERATING FEEDER AND PUSHING RUN WHEN THE HLT
77 IS ENCOUNTERED.
SPECIAL USAGE #1 (MOVING DATA):
PNCH MAY BE USED SO THAT THE ABSOLUTE TAPE PUNCHED WILL BBL-LOAD INTO
AN ARBITRARY LOCATION. TO DO THIS, SET PNCHO TO THE DESIRED ADDRESS
INCREMENT BEFORE STEP 3 ABOVE.
EG, ASSUME PNCH IS LOADED AT 2000 (SO PNCHO IS AT 2072 AND PNCHX IS AT
2074), THEN TO PUNCH CORE FROM 3000-4600 SO IT WILL LOAD BACK INTO
4000-5600, LOAD ADDRESS 2072 WITH:
ABS 1000B TARGET MINUS SOURCE ADDRESS
AND ADDRESSES 2074-2076 WITH THE FOLLOWING:
OCT 2000,3061 PUNCH 2000-3600
OCT 100000 THEN HALT
SPECIAL USAGE #2 (MOVING PROGRAMS):
PNCH MAY BE USED TO BOOTSTRAP ITSELF TO ANOTHER PAGE. LOCATION PNCHX-1
IN THE TARGET TAPE MUST BE MODIFIED, HOWEVER, TO POINT TO THE NEW PNCHX
TABLE. IN THIS CASE, AND IN GENERAL WHEN PROGRAMS ARE "RELOCATED",
PNCHO IS AN INTEGRAL NUMBER OF PAGES (I.E., BITS 9-0 ARE ZERO) SO THAT
10-BIT ADDRESS INSTRUCTIONS WILL WORK. ANY 16-BIT ADDRESS (I.E., DEF'S
LIKE PNCHX-1) MUST BE MODIFIED MANUALLY.
EG, ASSUME PNCH (AT 2000) IS TO BE MOVED TO HIGHCORE (AT 16000).
LOAD ADDRESS 2072 WITH
OCT 14000 TARGET MINUS SOURCE ADDRESS
AND ADDRESS 2074-2100
OCT 102000,2100 HLT, THEN PUNCH 2000-2077
OCT 116000,16100 HLT, THEN PUNCH 16000-16077
OCT 100000 HLT, ALL DONE.
WHEN FIRST HLT OCCURS, PUSH RUN. USE BBL TO LOAD TAPE JUST PUNCHED.
LOAD ADDRESS 16072-16073 WITH
OCT 00000,16074
AND, IF DESIRED, SET THE PNCHX TABLE AT 16074 WITH ANYTHING DESIRED.
RESTART PNCH AT 20000. WHEN FIRST HLT OCCURS, CLEAR BA AND PUSH RUN
TWICE. THE PNCH-PROGRAM-TAPE WILL BE PUNCHED.
ENTRY POINTS(S)
ADDRESS SYMBOL
PNCH STARTING ADDRESS (TYPICALLY 2000B)
PNCH+74 PNCHX BEGINNING OF PNCH TABLE
PNCH+73 ----- DEF TO PNCHX
PNCH+72 PNCHO OFFSET, TARGET ADDRESS MINUS SOURCE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SINCE THE PROGRAM TAPE IS ONLY ABUT ONE FOOT LONG, IT IS CONVENIENT TO
HAVE SEVERAL VERSIONS ON ONE TAPE, FOR EXAMPLE, ONE WHICH LOADS AT
100B, 2000B, 17600B, ETC., OR ONE WHICH SPRINGLOADS (VIA PNCHX TABLE)
TO PUNCH VARIOUS SEGMENTS OF CORE.
X14501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
OCTAL ASSEMBLY PROCESSOR AND UTILITY SYSTEM
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SELF-CON
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
OCTAPUS IS A TROUBLESHOOTING AID WHICH ELIMINATES TIME CONSUMING
TOGGLING FROM THE SWITCH REGISTER. IT IS A SELF-CONFIGURING, SELF-
CONTAINED PROGRAM RESIDING WITHIN THE BOUNDS OF A SINGLE PAGE IN CORE.
COMMUNICATION IS CONVERSATIONAL THROUGH THE TELEPRINTER. THE FOLLOWING
FUNCTIONS CAN BE PERFORMED: ASSEMBLY INTO CORE, PUNCH ABSOLUTE TAPE
FROM CORE, LOAD ABSOLUTE TAPE TO CORE, VERIFY ABSOLUTE TAPE TO CORE,
LIST MEMORY BOUNDS OF ABSOLUTE TAPE, DUMP CORE TO TELEPRINTER (OCTAL
AND INVERSE ASSEMBLY), JUMP TO ANY LOCATION IN CORE, AND SEARCH CORE
FOR ANY OCTAL VALUE.
IN ADDITION, IT PROVIDES THE CAPABILITY OF HANDLING EAU INSTRUCTIONS, TO
REVERSE THE SKIP SENSE OF ASG INSTRUCTIONS, TO DO AN INVERSE ASB. OF A
BINARY TAPE WITHOUT LOADING IT, AND TO RELOCATE SECTIONS OF CORE EITHER
ONLINE OR BY THE PRODUCTION OF A BINARY TAPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ASSEMBLE AND LOAD OCTAPUS-C: SET THE TTY SELECT CODE IN THE S-REGISTER,
2 IN P-REGISTER AND PRESS RUN. IN RESPONSE TO QUESTIONS SUPPLY THE
SELECT CODES FOR PAPER-TAPE READER, PUNCH AND LINE PRINTER IF AVAILABLE
(FORMAT 3). TTY WILL PRINT
"*** OCTAPUS-C ***
?"
AND WAIT FOR CONTROL COMMANDS.
AT THIS STAGE A CONFIGURED TAPE MAY BE PUNCHED OR THE PROGRAM CAN BE
SELF-RELOCATED TO ANOTHER PAGE (SEE EX 1: 14000 IS COMPATIBLE WITH 8K
BASIC). THE SUBSEQUENT ENTRY POINT TO THE PROGRAM IS ITS HEAD (4000B
OR NEW RELOCATED ORIGIN).
THE FOLLOWING CONTROL COMMANDS MAY BE USED TO PERFORM THE FUNCTIONS
DESCRIBED.
CONTROL + A ASSEMBLY
THE TTY ASKS FOR A STARTING ADDRESS (FORMAT 3), REPRINTS IT AND WAITS
FOR MNEUMONIC CODE AND OPERAND TO BE ASSEMBLED INTO THAT LOCATION. THE
INSTRUCTIONS ARE TYPED IN FORMAT 1 AND ARE SUBJECT TO THE FOLLOWING
RESTRICTIONS:
1. ONLY MACHINE INSTRUCTIONS AND THE PSEUDO-INSTRUCTION OCT (FOR OCTAL
CONSTANTS) MAY BE GIVEN. ANY OTHER WILL PRODUCE AN "OPCODE ERROR"
MESSAGE.
2. ONLY ONE INSTRUCTION IS ALLOWED PER LINE, EXCEPT ,RSS WHICH MAY BE
APPENDED TO ANY ASG INSTRUCTION.
3. THE INSTRUCTION CODE MUST BE FOLLOWED BY EITHER A CR IF NO OPERAND
EXISTS, OR BY A SINGLE SPACE FOLLOWED BY THE OPERAND WHICH MUST BE
OCTAL (1 TO 6 DIGITS - NO B).
4. ,I AND ,C MAY BE APPENDED TO THE OPERANDS OF MGR + 10G INSTRUCTIONS
RESPECTIVELY.
5. SINGLE WORD EAU INSTRUCTIONS WITH 16 SHIFTS SHOULD BE INPUT AS
HAVING ZERO SHIFTS (AND WILL BE SIMILARLY INVERSELY ASSEMBLED). SWP
IS NOT RECOGNIZED.
6. TWO-WORD EAU INSTRUCTIONS MUST BE INPUT AS TWO WORDS, THE FIRST
BEING AN INSTRUCTION MNEUMONIC, AND THE SECOND, THE ADDRESS.
THE ASSEMBLY ADDRESS MAY BE CHANGED AT ANY TIME BY INPUTTING AN OBLIQUE
FOLLOWED BY THE NEW ADDRESS.
THE ESCAPE KEY WILL RECOMMENCE ANY LINE. THE RUBOUT KEY WILL ABORT
ASSEMBLY AND RETURN TO THE COMMAND REQUEST STATE.
PRESSING CONTROL + C WILL CAUSE THE PRINTING OF THE CONTENTS OF THE
CURRENT ADDRESS IN OCTAL AND IN MNEUMONIC FORM IF INTERPRETABLE AS SUCH.
CONTROL + D OCTAL DUMP + INVERSE
CAUSES TTY TO PRINT "DUMP RANGE?" AND THE OPERATOR RESPONDS WITH A
STARTING AND ENDING LOCATION IN FORMAT 2. THE CONTENTS OF ALL LOCATIONS
INCLUSIVE OF THE SPECIFIED ADDRESS ARE THEN PRINTED IN OCTAL TOGETHER
WITH THEIR INSTRUCTION MNEUMONICS IF INTERPRETABLE.
CONTROL + P PUNCH
CAUSES TTY TO PRINT PUNCH? THE OPERATOR SPECIFIES A RANGE OF MEMORY
IN FORMAT 2, AND A BINARY (BBL COMPATIBLE) TAPE OF THE CONTENTS OF
THOSE LOCATIONS IS PUNCHED.
CONTROL + T LOAD TAPE
LOADS TAPE IN READER INTO CORE
PRINTS "*EOT" IF SUCCESSFUL
"CHECKSUM" FOR CHECKSUM FAILURE
"ADDRESS=XXX" IF ATTEMPT MADE TO OVERLAY OCTAPUS-C
CONTROL + V VERIFY
COMPARES TAPE IN READER & CORE, & PRINTS OUT ANY LOCATIONS AND THEIR
CONTENTS WHERE THE TAPE IS DIFFERENT.
CONTROL + B BOUND
PRINTS LOADING ADDRESS DESTINATION OF EACH BINARY TAPE SECTION.
CONTROL + I INVERSE OF TAPES
PRINTS DUMP + INVERSE (AS FOR DUMP ROUTINE) OF BINARY TAPE WITHOUT
LOADING IT.
CONTROL + R RUN
TTY ASKS FOR ADDRESS (FORMAT 3), AND WILL TRANSFER CONTROL AND START
RUNNING PROGRAM AT THE SPECIFIED ADDRESS.
CONTROL + S SEARCH
IN REPLY TO "SEARCH FOR?", GIVE OCTAL CODE (FORMAT 3)
IN REPLY TO "RANGE?" , GIVE RANGE (FORMAT 2)
THE ADDRESSES OF ALL LOCATIONS CONTAINING THE CODE IN THE SPECIFIED
RANGE WILL BE PRINTED.
CONTROL + L RELOCATE
IN REPLY TO "RELOCATE?", THE USER GIVES THE SECTION TO BE RELOCATED
(FORMAT 2).
THE MESSAGE "NEW ORIGIN?" CALLS FOR THE NEW STARTING ADDRESS FOR THE
SECTION (FORMAT 3).
THE MESSAGE "ADDRESSES OF POINTERS?" (TERM.BY 0)" CALLS FOR THE ADDRESS
OR ADDRESSES OF ANY LOCATIONS IN THE SECTION THAT ARE USED FOR INDIRECT
ADDRESSING: THE PROGRAM EVALUATES WHETHER THESE NEED ALTERING (IF
LOCATION POINTED TO IS IN SECTION BEING RELOCATED) OR NOT. THESE
ADDRESSES MAY BE INPUT EITHER SINGLY, (FORMAT 3) OR IN BLOCKS, USING
FORMAT 2 (SEE EXAMPLES). THE LIST MUST BE TERMINATED (OR IF NULL LIST)
BY ZERO.
IF THE SECTION IS BEING RELOCATED TO A DIFFERENT PART OF A PAGE, SO THAT
MEMORY REFERENCE INSTRUCTIONS NEED ALTERATION, THE PROGRAM ASKS
"CONSTANTS?". REPLY BY INPUTTING THE ADDRESSES OF ANY CONSTANTS, IN
PARTICULAR ANY THAT MIGHT APPEAR TO BE A MRG OR EAG INSTRUCTION,
SINGLY OR IN BLOCKS AS FOR THE POINTERS. THE CONSTANT BLOCKS MAY (BUT
NEED NOT) INCLUDE THE POINTER ADDRESS.
AGAIN TERMINATE BY ZERO.
A BINARY TAPE WILL THEN BE PUNCHED, THE MESSAGE "LAST WORD = XXX" GIVEN
AND THE PROGRAM RETURNS TO THE "?" INPUT REQUEST MODE.
OPTION: IF SWITCH REGISTER BIT ZERO IS SET ON, THE RELOCATION WILL BE
DONE ON-LINE AND THE MESSAGE "LAST WORD=XXX" GIVEN WHEN
FINISHED.
CAUTION: THIS SHOULD NOT BE USED TO MOVE A SECTION OF PROGRAM DOWN
WHERE IT WILL OVERLAY ITSELF BEFORE ALL OF IT HAS BEEN
RELOCATED. PUNCH A TAPE, OR MOVE TO A DIFFERENT PAGE AND THEN
BACK.
NOTES ON RELOCATING
1. THE PROGRAM DOES NOT GENERATE INDIRECT ADDRESSING IF RELOCATION
CAUSES AN ADDRESSED LOCATION TO RESIDE IN CORE ON A DIFFERENT PAGE
FROM THE INSTRUCTION. A "PAGE ERROR, LINE NUMBER" MESSAGE IS GIVEN,
THE PROGRAM BEING LEFT IN THE ASSEMBLY MODE.
2. THE WORD EAU INSTRUCTIONS ARE HANDLED AUTOMATICALLY: IT IS NOT
NECESSARY TO DESIGNATE THE SECOND WORD AS A POINTER.
3. WHENEVER A SECTION OF MEMORY IS RELOCATED, ALL JUMPS AND REFERENCES
TO IT FROM OUTSIDE THE SECTION BECOME INVALID. THESE MAY BE
ADJUSTED MANUALLY (SEE EX 2A) OR THE RELOCATION CAN OFTEN BE DONE
IN TWO STAGES (SEE EX 2B).
FIRST SHIFT ALL THE PROGRAM INVOLVED. THIS WILL UPDATE THE REFERENCING
INSTRUCTIONS. THEN SHIFT BACK ALL THE PROGRAM EXCEPT THE SECTION
DESIRED TO BE RELOCATED.
4. WHEN MOVING A SECTION OF THE PROGRAM TO ANOTHER PAGE, INSTRUCTIONS
WHICH REFERENCE OTHER UNMOVED LOCATIONS BECOME INVALID. THIS MAY
BE DELIBERATE IF A TWO-STAGE RELOCATION IS BEING PERFORMED. AS A
WARNING OF THIS CONDITION, BITS 12-14 OF THE SWITCH REGISTER ARE
SET ON.
GENERAL
OCTAPUS-C DOES NOT USE THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM. ANY PROCESS MAY BE ABORTED
BY SETTING SWITCH REGISTER BIT 15 ON IF PRINTING IS OCCURRING OR BY
PRESSING THE RUBOUT KEY IF THE KEYBOARD IS LIVE.
TTY LIST OUTPUT MAY BE DIVERTED TO THE LINE PRINTER BY SETTING SWITCH
REGISTER BIT 1 ON. OUTPUT RETURNS AUTOMATICALLY TO THE TTY WHEN THE
LISTING PROCESS IS COMPLETE.
THE POINTER AND CONSTANT TABLE IS BUILT UP FROM LOCATION 6161B(+N000B,
N EVEN, FOR DIFFERENT ORIGIN). ONE WORD IS REQUIRED FOR EACH CONSTANT
OR POINTER.
ALTHOUGH OCTAPUS-C WILL HANDLE EAU INSTRUCTIONS, IT DOES NOT REQUIRE
AN EAU FOR ITS OPERATION.
FORMATS
CR REPRESENTS CARRIAGE RETURN KEY
FORMAT I CLA CR
SZA,RSS CR
LDA 7233 CR
LDB 7234,I CR
FORMAT II XXXX,YYYY CR
IMPLIES ALL LOCATIONS FROM XXXX TO YYYY INCLUSIVE.
FORMAT III XXXX CR
A SINGLE OCTAL VALUE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X14601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP UTILITY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
MAGNETIC TAPE DUMP PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS MTS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM ACCEPTS ASCII PAPER TAPE OR IBM 029 PUNCHED CARDS AS INPUT
AND DUMPS IMAGES TO AN OS/360 COMPATIBLE 9-TRACK MAG TAPE. OUTPUT MAY
BE ASCII OR EBCDIC CODE, STANDARD LABELED OR UNLABELED MAG TAPES WITH
FIXED OR VARIABLE BLOCKED RECORDS. IT OPERATES UNDER CONTROL OF BCS.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED INCLUDES 16K CORE, ANY HP PHOTOREADER OR HP2761
CARD READER, AND AN HP7970 NINE TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE MAIN PURPOSE OF THE ROUTINE IS TO WRITE MAGNETIC TAPE FILES WHICH
ARE COMPATIBLE WITH THE IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEMS.
LABELS:
- THE TAPES CREATED WOULD NORMALLY HAVE IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING
SYSTEM (OS/360) STANDARD LABELS (DOWNWARD COMPATIBLE), ALTHOUGH
UNLABELED TAPES CAN BE CREATED.
- MULTIPLE FILES PER REEL ARE SUPPORTED. MULTIPLE REEL FILES ARE
NOT SUPPORTED.
- ASCII LABELS SUPPORTED IN OS/360 (RELEASE 20 AND ABOVE) ARE NOT
SUPPORTED.
RECORD FORMATS:
- FIXED BLOCKED (FB) AND VARIABLE BLOCKED (VB) RECORD FORMATS ARE
SUPPORTED.
- THE BLOCKING FACTOR MAY BE ONE, ALTHOUGH THE LABELS WILL STILL
INDICATE BLOCKED RECORDS.
DATA FORMATS:
- THE PROGRAM ASSUMES THAT THE INPUT DATA IS CODED IN HP
COMPATIBLE ASCII CODE (ASCII) OR IBM COMPATIBLE 029 KEYPUNCH CODE.
- THE OUTPUT DATA CODE WILL EITHER BE THE INTERNAL FORMAT (ASCII)
OR WILL BE TRANSLATED TO THE IBM EXTENDED BINARY-CODED-DECIMAL
INTERCHANGE CODE (EBCDIC) EQUIVALENT OF THE INTERNAL REPRESEN-
TATION.
FEATURES AND RESTRICTIONS:
- PROGRAM ASSUMES NINE TRACK MAGNETIC TAPE WITH DENSITY OF 800 BPI.
- NO EDITING OF THE INPUT DATA RECORDS IS PERFORMED.
- MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDS SHORTER THAN EIGHTEEN BYTES (NINE HP WORDS)
CAN BE PRODUCED BUT ARE NOT SUPPORTED BY IBM HARDWARE/OS.
- THE INPUT RECORDS MUST BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE STANDARD HP BASIC
CONTROL SYSTEM (BCS) UNIT RECORD INPUT DRIVERS.
- THIS VERSION HAS THE RESTRICTION THAT THE LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH
MUST BE AN EVEN NUMBER OF BYTES.
- VARIABLE BUFFER ALLOCATION IS MADE AND THEREFORE BLOCK SIZES ARE
RESTRICTED ONLY BY THE AMOUNT OF CORE STORAGE AVAILABLE
(APPROXIMATELY 7500 BYTES ON A 16K WORD COMPUTER DEPENDENT UPON
THE CONFIGURATION OF THE OPERATING ENVIRONMENT).
OPERATING PROCEDURES:
- USE STANDARD ALGOL AND ASSEMBLER COMPILATION METHODS, AND PRODUCE
A BCS CONFIGURED ABSOLUTE MODULE.
- LOAD THE ABSOLUTE MODULE (STARTING ADDRESS 000002 OCTAL).
- THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES WILL APPEAR ON THE CONSOLE TELEPRINTER:
RECFM - F OR V ? (REPLY: F FOR FB RECORDS
V FOR VB RECORDS)
LRECL = ? (REPLY: N WHERE N IS THE MAXIMUM
LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH OF THE
INPUT (OUTPUT) RECORDS)
BLKSIZE = ? (REPLY: M WHERE M IS THE DESIRED BLOCK
SIZE OF THE OUTPUT RECORDS)
NOTE:
FOR FB RECORDS THE LOGICAL RECORD LENGTH SPECIFIED MUST BE AN EVEN
MULTIPLE OF THE BLOCK SIZE SPECIFIED. FOR VB RECORDS THE LOGICAL
RECORD LENGTH INCLUDES A FOUR-BYTE RECORD DESCRIPTOR WORD (RDW).
THE MINIMUM BLOCK SIZE IS FOUR BYTES GREATER THAN THE LOGICAL RECORD
LENGTH.
I/O UNIT REF. #=IN,OUT ? (REPLY: I,J WHERE I AND J ARE THE UNIT
REFERENCE NUMBERS (BASE TEN)
OF THE INPUT AND OUTPUT UNITS
RESPECTIVELY)
OS/360 LABELS ? (REPLY: YES IF OS/360 STANDARD LABELS
ARE DESIRED
NO IF AN UNLABELED TAPE IS DESIRED
FILE # = (REPLY: I WHERE I IS THE NUMBER OF
THE FILE TO BE CREATED)
NOTE:
WHEN POSITIONING THE MAGNETIC TAPE VOLUME TO THE SPECIFIED FILE, THE
PROGRAM ASSUMES THAT ALL FILES OF THE VOLUME HAVE OS/360 STANDARD
LABELS OR THAT ALL FILES ARE UNLABELED AS SPECIFIED IN A REPLY ABOVE.
IF STANDARD OS/360 LABELS HAVE BEEN SPECIFIED THEN THE FOLLOWING
MESSAGES WILL APPEAR ON THE CONSOLE TELEPRINTER:
VOLUME=SER-XXXXXX ? (REPLY: THE SIX CHARACTER IDENTIFICATION
CODE ASSIGNED TO THE VOLUME)
DSNAME = ? (REPLY: THE RIGHTMOST SEVENTEEN CHARAC-
TERS OF THE DATA SET NAME)
CREATION DATE - YYDDD ? (REPLY: THE YEAR AND DAY OF THE YEAR WHERE
YY=YEAR (00-99) AND DAY (001-366))
EXPIRATION DATE = YYDDD ? (REPLY: THE YEAR AND DAY OF THE YEAR WHEN
THE DATA SET MAY BE SCRATCHED OR
OVERWRITTEN AS ABOVE)
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE WILL APPEAR ON THE CONSOLE TELEPRINTER:
TRANSLATE ASCII TO EBCDIC ? (REPLY: YES IF TRANSLATION IS DESIRED
NO IF NO TRANSLATION DESIRED)
- THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE MAY APPEAR ON THE CONSOLE TELEPRINTER:
**UNRECOGNIZED (RESPONSE: RE-ENTER THE CORRECTED REPLY)
**LRECL MUST BE AN EVEN
NUMBER OF BYTES (RESPONSE: RE-ENTER THE CORRECTED REPLY)
**MUST BE <- XXX (RESPONSE: RE-ENTER THE CORRECTED REPLY)
**INVALID BLOCKING FOR (RESPONSE: RE-ENTER THE CORRECTED LRECL AND
(F OR V) FORMAT RECORDS BLKSIZE PARAMETERS)
**INVALID INPUT DEVICE (RESPONSE: THE UTILITY EXPECTS A DEVICE
WHOSE EQT EQUIPMENT TYPE CODE
IS @17 OR LESS)
**INVALID OUTPUT DEVICE (RESPONSE: THE UTILITY EXPECTS A NINE TRACK
800 BPI MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT WHOSE
EQT EQUIPMENT TYPE CODE IS @21,
@22, OR @23)
**LOAD MAGNETIC TAPE
PAUSE (RESPONSE: READY THE MAGNETIC TAPE UNIT AND
PUSH RUN ON COMPUTER)
UNIT PUSH RUN ON COMPUTER)
**END OF MAGNETIC TAPE** (RESPONSE: THE FILE HAS BEEN TRUNCATED THE
LAST FULL BLOCK AND THE VOLUME
CLOSED.)
- THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE WILL APPEAR ON THE CONSOLE TELEPRINTER TO
INDICATE THAT AN END-OF-FILE CONDITION EXISTS ON THE INPUT UNIT:
*EOT (REPLY: /C TO INDICATE THAT THIS IS NOT THE
END OF THE INPUT DATA FILE AND
THAT THE DEVICE IS READY
/E TO INDICATE THAT THIS IS THE
END OF THE INPUT DATA FILE)
- THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE WILL APPEAR ON THE CONSOLE TELEPRINTER WHEN
THE MAGNETIC TAPE FILE HAS BEEN CLOSED:
**XXXX BLOCKS WERE WRITTEN**
STOP
ENTRY POINT(S)
"GET" - INITIATES THE TRANSFER OF ASCII CHARACTERS INTO A BUFFER
FROM A UNIT RECORD INPUT DEVICE DEFINED BY A BCS DRIVER IN
.IOC.
"STATG" - CHECKS THE STATUS OF THE PREVIOUS DATA TRANSFER INITIATED
WITH "GET"
"TRANS" - TRANSLATES BOTH 7-BIT CHARACTERS OF EACH WORD OF A BUFFER
ACCORDING TO A USER SUPPLIED TRANSLATE TABLE NAMED "TRTAB"
"PUT" - INITIATES THE TRANSFER OF DATA FROM A BUFFER TO A MAGNETIC
TAPE UNIT DEFINED BY A BCS DRIVER IN .IOC.
"STATP" - CHECKS THE STATUS OF THE PREVIOUS DATA TRANSFER INITIATED
WITH "PUT"
"ALOC" - ALLOCATES THE MAXIMUM BUFFER SIZE AVAILABLE IN MEMORY FOR
THE INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATIONS
"IEQT" - ISOLATES THE EQUIPMENT TYPE CODE OF A SPECIFIED UNIT
REFERENCE NUMBER
"LOCAL" - DETERMINES WHETHER A SPECIFIED UNIT IS IN LOCAL MODE
INTERNAL PROCEDURES
"ENDBLOCK" - HANDLES THE TRANSFER OF A BLOCK OF DATA TO MAG TAPE.
"CLOSE" - CLOSES THE MAGNETIC TAPE FILE.
"OUTLAB" - TRANSLATES AND WRITES TO MAGNETIC TAPE THE 80 BYTE OS/360
LABEL INFORMATION
"HDREOF" - FORMATS THE 80 BYTE OS/360 HEADER AND TRAILER LABELS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
MODIFICATION HINTS:
- DIFFERENT INPUT/OUTPUT CODES CAN BE SUPPORTED BY CHANGING ONLY THE
TRANSLATE TABLE ("TRTAB") ASSUMING THAT THE BCS INPUT DRIVER WILL
SUPPLY A UNIQUE MAPPING FUNCTION OF THE INPUT DATA.
- WITH VB RECORDS OS/360 WILL ACCEPT PHYSICAL RECORDS THAT ARE LONGER
THAN THE BLOCK SIZE SPECIFIED IN THE BLOCK DESCRIPTOR WORD (BOW) THE
REMAINDER OF THE BLOCK WILL BE IGNORED. BY MINOR MODS IT IS
POSSIBLE TO ACCEPT LOGICAL RECORDS HAVING FEWER THAN EIGHTEEN BYTES.
THIS IS NOT TRUE FOR FB RECORDS.
- TO ACCEPT LOGICAL RECORDS HAVING AN ODD NUMBER OF BYTES WOULD ENTAIL
A MAJOR RE-WRITE OF THE PROGRAMS.
LABELS -IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM TAPE LABELS
FORM C28-6680
RECORD FORMATS -IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM SUPERVISOR
AND DATA MANAGEMENT SERVICES
FORM C28-6646
DATA FORMATS -IBM SYSTEM/360 OPERATING SYSTEM PRINCIPLES OF
OPERATION
FORM A22-6821
-HEWLETT PACKARD BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM
REFERENCE MANUAL
FORM 02116-9017
OPERATING PROCEDURES -HEWLETT PACKARD HP ALGOL
FORM 02116-9072
-HEWLETT PACKARD HP ASSEMBLER
FORM 02116-9014
-HEWLETT PACKARD BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM
REFERENCE MANUAL
FORM 02116-9017
-HEWLETT PACKARD A POCKET GUIDE TO INTERFACING
HP COMPUTERS
FORM 5950-8718
-HEWLETT PACKARD MAGNETIC TAPE SYSTEM
FORM 02116-91752
-HEWLETT PACKARD RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINES
FORM 02116-91780
X14701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
STACK ROUTINES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
STACK
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SET OF SUBROUTINES ALLOWS AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE PROGRAM TO PERFORM
STACK OPERATIONS. THE PACKAGE CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING ROUTINES: CLRST,
PUSH, PULL AND RMOVE. CLRST CLEARS THE STACK BY SETTING THE UPPER LIMIT
FOR THE NUMBER OF ITEMS IN THE STACK IN THE FIRST LOCATION OF THE STACK.
IT ALSO SETS THE POINTER IN THE SECOND POSITION TO POINT TO THE FIRST
FREE LOCATION IN THE STACK (WHICH IS THE THIRD WORD OF THE STACK). THE
UPPER LIMIT MUST BE STACK LENGTH-2. PUSH STORES AN ITEM ONTO THE STACK
AND INCREMENTS THE POINTER. PULL TAKES AN ITEM FROM THE TOP OF THE
STACK AND DECREMENTS THE POINTER. RMOVE REMOVES THE TOP ITEM FROM THE
STACK BY DECREMENTING THE POINTER. THE PACKAGE SERVES AS A TOOL FOR
RECURSIVE CALLS OF PROGRAMS.
THESE SUBROUTINES MAYBE CONFIGURED INTO THE USER'S SYSTEM LIBRARY UNDER
DOS OR DOS-M. ERROR EXITS RESULT IN CALLS TO THE EXEC.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
ENTRY POINT(S)
CLRST
PUSH
PULL
RMOVE
CALLING SEQUENCE
EXT CLRST
JSB CLRST
DEF L1 DEFINES RETURN ADDRESS
DEF PTRAD DEFINES ADDRESS OF POINTER ADDRESS
DEF UPBND DEFINES UPPER LIMIT
STACK BSS N
PTRAD DEF STACK+1
UPBND DEC N-2
L1 CONTINUE
EXT PUSH (OR PULL)
JSB PUSH (OR PULL)
DEF L2 DEFINES RETURN ADDRESS.
DEF PTRAD DEFINES ADDRESS OF POINTER ADDRESS.
DEF THING DEFINES THING TO BE STORED INTO STACK (OR TO
L2 CONTINUE BE OBTAINED FROM STACK IN PULL)
EXT RMOVE
JSB RMOVE
DEF L3 DEFINES RETURN ADDRESS.
DEF PTRAD DEFINES ADDRESS OF POINTER ADDRESS.
L3 CONTINUE
ON CERTAIN ERRORS, CALL TO EXEC ARE MADE:
1. STACK IS FULL AND AN ELEMENT IS TRIED TO INSERT INTO THE STACK
"OUT OF RANGE OF STACK, PUSH" IS PRINTED AND RETURN TO CALLING
PROGRAM IS MADE.
2. STACK IS EMPTY AND A TRY TO PULL OR REMOVE AN ELEMENT FROM THE
STACK:
"OUT OF RANGE OF STACK, PULL (OR RMOVE)"
IS PRINTED AND RETURN TO CALLING PROGRAM IS MADE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X14801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
FLOATING POINT OVERLAY FOR HP BASIC
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
FLOATING POINT BASIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS) HP BASIC
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERLAY FOR BASIC (HP20392) WHICH TAKES
ADVANTAGE OF THE FLOATING POINT HARDWARE OPTION ON THE HP2100 COMPUTER.
THE OVERLAY RESULTS IN FLOATING POINT MACHINE CODE REPLACING BASIC
ARITHMETIC SUBROUTINES. THE IMPROVEMENT IN RUNNING TIME IS ON THE
ORDER OF FIVE AS COMPARED TO THE NON-FLOATING POINT VERSION OF BASIC.
THIS OVERLAY IS COMPATIBLE WITH PREVIOUSLY WRITTEN USER ASSEMBLY
ROUTINES BECAUSE BASE PAGE LINKAGE ADDRESSES ARE NOT ALTERED.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENT: HP 2100A WITH FLOATING POINT OPTION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE THE FIRST PROGRAM ON THE TAPE. FLOATING POINT ASSEMBLER
NOT REQUIRED. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ASSEMBLE BASIC SOURCE PROGRAM. WHEN
CONFIGURING BASIC, LOAD THE OVERLAY AFTER THE BASIC SYSTEM TAPE IF A
COMPOSITE TAPE IS DESIRED. OTHERWISE OVERLAY MAY BE LOADED ANYTIME
AFTER CONFIGURED BASIC HAS BEEN LOADED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE DIVIDE BY ZERO WARNING IS DISABLED. DIVIDING BY ZERO WILL RESULT
IN BASIC RETURNING 1.70141E+38, FOR EITHER A POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE
DIVIDEND.
X14901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M ABSOLUTE BINARY TAPE LOADER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
PAPER TAPE ABSOLUTE LOADER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS SET OF PROGRAMS, OPERATING AS A USER PROGRAM UNDER DOS-M, ENABLES
THE USER TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS: STORE ABSOLUTE BINARY
TAPE IN DOS-M USER FILES OF TYPE B AND LOAD PROGRAMS FROM THESE FILES
INTO CORE.
THIS PACKAGE REQUIRES AN HP7900 DISC.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMPILE THE FIRST PROGRAM ON TAPE USING DOS-M FORTRAN COMPILER.
STORE RELOCATABLE BINARY IN JOB BINARY AREA OF DISC BY USING
OPTION 99 PARAMETER.
2. ASSEMBLE THE NEXT TWO PROGRAMS ON TAPE USING DOS-M ASSEMBLER.
STORE RELOCATABLE BINARY IN JOB BINARY AREA OF DISC BY USING
OPTION 99 PARAMETER.
3. LOAD FROM JOB BINARY AREA OF DISC WITH:
:PROG, LOADR DIRECTIVE
THEN MAKE PERMANENT WITH:
:STOR,P DIRECTIVE
4. CLEAR THE JOB BINARY AREA.
5. START AGAIN 1-2 AND 3 FOR THE OTHER PROGRAMS ON THE TAPE.
NOTE: LOADING SHOULD BE DONE WITH THE CURRENT USER DISC SUBCHANNEL
ON THE SYSTEM DISC SUBCHANNEL FOR THESE PROGRAMS TO SUBSEQUENTLY
WORK PROPERLY WHEN EXECUTED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS SET OF PROGRAMS, OPERATING AS A USER PROGRAM UNDER DOS-M, ENABLES
THE USER TO PERFORM THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS:
1. STORE ABSOLUTE BINARY TAPE ON DOS-M USER FILE, RESERVED BY A :ST,B..
2. LOAD THESE PROGRAMS INTO CORE. THESE PROGRAMS SHOULD BE PRODUCED
BY BCS OR BY ANY SYSTEM LIKE THE PREPARE BASIC.
NEVERTHELESS, THE ABSOLUTE PROGRAM DESTROYS THE DOS-M SYSTEM AND
WE HAVE TO BOOTSTRAP ONE MORE TIME AFTER THE EXECUTION OF THIS
ABSOLUTE PROGRAM.
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
1. CREATE A USER FILE TYPE-B BY THE FOLLOWING DIRECTIVE:
: STORE, B, NAME, XXX
XXX MUST BE ONE OF THE FOLLOWING NUMBERS:
65 IF THE ABSOLUTE PROGRAM TO BE LOADED OCCUPIES LESS THAN 8K
WORDS MEMORY
130 IF THE ABSOLUTE PROGRAM TO BE LOADED OCCUPIES LESS THAN 16K
WORDS MEMORY
195 IF THE ABSOLUTE PROGRAM TO BE LOADED OCCUPIES LESS THAN 24K
WORDS MEMORY
2. STORE THE ABSOLUTE TAPE IN THE RESERVED FILE BY ENTERING THE
FOLLOWING DIRECTIVE:
: PROG, BBL, XX
WHERE XX IS:
8 IF XXX WAS 65
16 IF XXX WAS 130
24 IF XXX WAS 195
32 IF XXX WAS 260
3. THE PROGRAM WILL OUTPUT THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE:
FILE NAME ?
4. RESPOND BY ENTERING THE NAME OF THE FILE.
IF THE SIZE OF THE FILE DOESN'T MATCH WITH THE
CORE SIZE IN K WORDS SPECIFIED IN THE DIRECTIVE
:PROG, BBL, XX
THE PROGRAM WILL OUTPUT THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE:
NAME: ILLEGAL LENGTH
AND THEN ABORTS
5. IN NORMAL CASE, THE PROGRAM OUTPUTS THE MESSAGE:
LOAD ABSOLUTE TAPE
BBL SUSP
@
6. LOAD ABSOLUTE TAPE ON THE DEVICE LU = 5, AND RESPOND BY ENTERING
:GO
7. THE TAPE IS READ AND STORED IN THE FILE :NAME. AT THE END OF THE
TAPE, THE PROGRAM TYPES:
DONE?
8. IF THERE ARE MORE ABSOLUTE TAPES TO BE LOADED (LIKE CONFIGURED SIO
FOR EXAMPLE), PLACE THESE TAPES ON THE DEVICE AND REPLY:
NO
OTHERWISE, REPLY:
YES
9. IF SW 15 IS SET DURING THE EXECUTION OF THIS PROGRAM, THE ABSOLUTE
TAPE IS ALSO LISTED ON THE DEVICE LU NOT=6.
THE FORMAT OF THE LISTING IS AS FOLLOWS:
ADDRESSE : 0002 NB. DE MOTS : 121
00000 0000
'
'
'
(SEE ATTACHED EXAMPLE)
ADRESSE MEANS ABSOLUTE LOAD ADDRESS OF THE BLOCK AND NB. DE MOTS IS
THE DECIMAL LENGTH OF THE BLOCK IN WORDS.
10. IF SW 14 IS SET, THE PROGRAM WILL OUTPUT THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE:
FIRST INSTRUCTION TO EXECUTE ?
THE PROGRAM ASKS FOR THE FIRST INSRUCTION TO BE EXECUTED WHEN THE
ABSOLUTE BINARY IS LOADED INTO CORE.
FOR EXAMPLE:
- FOR BASIC, YOU CAN RESPOND: 24100 (JMP 100B)
- FOR A BCS PROGRAM 24002 (JMP 2)
IN ANY CASE, YOU MUST RESPOND BY A JMP INSTRUCTION ONLY IN THE BASE
PAGE. THIS INSTRUCTION WILL BE EXECUTED AFTER THE HLT 77 (SEE STEP
17) WHEN YOU PRESS RUN.
11. THEN THE PROGRAM TYPES:
MESSAGE TO OPERATOR ?
AT LOADING TIME, YOU HAVE ONE LINE FOR AN EVENTUAL COMMENT TO
THE OPERATOR. THIS LINE WILL BE REPRODUCED WHEN THE PROGRAM IS
LOADED INTO CORE.
12. THEN, THE PROGRAM STOPS.
13. TO LOAD THESE ABSOLUTE PROGRAMS INTO CORE, YOU MUST NOW TYPE:
:PROG, LOAD
14. THE PROGRAM ASKS:
FILE NAME?
ANSWER WITH THE FILE NAME. IF THE SIZE OF THE FILE IS NOT 65-130 -
195 OR 260, THE PROGRAM WILL OUTPUT:
NAME: ILLEGAL LENGTH
AND THEN ABORTS.
15. IF SW 15 IS SET, THE PROGRAM TYPES:
FIRST INSTRUCTION TO EXECUTE ?
IT IS EXACTLY THE SAME AS THAT IN BBL PROGRAM, SO IT'S POSSIBLE,
AT ANY TIME, TO CHANGE THIS FIRST INSTRUCTION, JUST BEFORE LOADING
THE PROGRAM.
16. THEN, THE PROGRAM TYPES THE OPERATOR'S MESSAGE AND LOADS THE
PROGRAM INTO CORE.
17. AT THE END OF LOADING OPERATION, THE COMPUTER STOPS WITH DISPLAY
102077.
(IF PARITY ERRORS OCCUR DURING THE LOADING TIME, THE COMPUTER STOPS
WITH 102055).
AT THIS POINT, THE PROGRAM IS IN CORE EXACTLY LIKE WITH THE HARDWARE
PROTECTED BBL, AND YOU CAN START THE EXECUTION.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF THE COMPUTER IS AN HP 2100, BEFORE TOUCHING ANY SWITCH YOU MUST
PRESS MEMORY DATA. IF YOU GAVE A "FIRST INSTRUCTION TO EXECUTE", YOU
CAN PRESS RUN ONLY. IF YOU DID NOT GIVE THE "FIRST INSTRUCTION", YOU
HAVE TO LOAD PROGRAM COUNTER WITH THE CORRECT VALUE AND THEN, PRESS RUN.
WHEN THE BBL PROGRAM IS RUNNING, THE TWO FOLLOWING MESSAGES MAY APPEAR
ON THE TELEPRINTER SYSTEM:
ILLEGAL ADDRESS
IF THE ABSOLUTE TAPE TAKES MORE THAN XX K WORDS DECLARED PREVIOUSLY
(LIKE HLT 55B IN HARDWARE BBL):
CHECKSUM ERROR
IF A CHECKSUM ERROR IS DETECTED WHEN READING THE TAPE (LIKE HLT 11B IN
HARDWARE BBL).
X15001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
VIRTUAL ARRAY HANDLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
ARRAY
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE FOUR SUBROUTINES CONTAINED IN THIS PACKAGE HANDLE DATA SETS WHICH
ARE TOO LARGE TO FIT INTO CORE. THIS IS ACCOMPLISHED BY MEANS OF A
VIRTUAL ARRAY WHICH EXTENDS 'OUT OF CORE' INTO THE DISC. A SMALL (1K)
CORE AREA ACTS AS A WINDOW WHICH AUTOMATICALLY MOVES ALONG THE DISC
FILE (IN INCREMENTS OF 1K).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
A SOURCE COPY OF THE ROUTINE IS KEPT ON THE DISC FILE .VIRT AND HAS TO
BE COMPILED TOGETHER WITH THE CALLING PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
USING VIRTUAL ARRAY ROUTINES ON INTEGER OR MIXED FILES, LET DATAF BE
A DISK FILE ORGANIZED AS FOLLOWS:
WORDS 1 - 100 (VIRAR (1) - VIRAR (50)): INTEGER (ASCII CHARACTERS)
WORDS 101 + 102, 103 + 104...(VIRAR (51) ....): REAL
THIS FILE CAN BE READ WITH THE FOLLOWING PROGRAM:
FTN,L
INTEGER FILE(3)
DIMENSION REAR(50)
COMMON VIRTL(1026),INTAR(100)
EQUIVALENCE (REAR(1),INTAR(1))
DATA FILE(1),FILE(2),FILE(3)/2HDA,2HTA,2HF /
CALL VIROP (FILE)
DO 1000 I=1,50
1000 REAR(I)=VIRAR(I)
WRITE (1,100) (INTAR(I),I=1,100)
100 FORMAT (100A1)
.
.
.
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
VIRTUAL ARRAYS
A SET OF VIRTUAL ARRAY HANDLING ROUTINES HAS BEEN DEVELOPED FOR DEALING
WITH DATA SETS THAT ARE TOO LARGE TO FIT INTO CORE.
A VIRTUAL ARRAY EXTENDS OUT OF CORE INTO THE DISK. A SMALL (1K) CORE
AREA ACTS AS A WINDOW WHICH AUTOMATICALLY MOVES ALONG THE DISK FILE
(IN INCREMENTS OF 1 K). A VIRTUAL ARRAY IS ALWAYS A TYPE REAL ARRAY.
ANY DISK FILE FULFILLING THE LENGTH REQUIREMENTS (SEE: RESTRICTIONS)
CAN BE DECLARED A VIRTUAL ARRAY BY OPENING IT
CALL VIROP (NAME)
NAME IS THE NAME OF THE DISK FILE. IT MUST HAVE AN ASCII CHARACTER
STRING ASSIGNED TO IT IN THE USUAL WAY. AFTER OPENING IT THE DISK FILE
CAN BE CONSIDERED AN ARRAY WITH A SUBSCRIPT RUNNING BETWEEN 1 AND (64 X
FILE LENGTH).
WRITING INTO THE VIRTUAL ARRAY IS DONE BY
CALL VIRIN (IX,VALUE)
WHERE IX IS THE VIRTUAL ARRAY SUBSCRIPT (INTEGER) AND VALUE IS ANY LEGAL
FORTRAN SUBROUTINE PARAMETER (REAL). VALUE IS BEING PLACED INTO
POSITION IX OF THE VIRTUAL ARRAY.
READING FROM A VIRTUAL ARRAY IS DONE BY
VAR = VIRAR (IX)
WHERE VAR IS A FORTRAN VARIABLE (REAL) AND IX IS THE SUBSCRIPT OF THE
VIRTUAL ARRAY (INTEGER).
VIRAR IS THE NAME OF THE VIRTUAL ARRAY FOR READING OPERATIONS. VIRAR
CAN BE PART OF ANY LEGAL FORTRAN MATHEMATICAL EXPRESSION AND MAY BE
USED MORE THAN ONCE IN A STATEMENT, SUCH AS:
AVER = (VIRAR (I) + VIRAR (I+1))/2.
CLOSING THE VIRTUAL ARRAY
CALL VIRCL
THIS CAUSES VIRTUAL ARRAY OPERATIONS TO BE TERMINATED. ALWAYS CLOSE
A VIRTUAL ARRAY: A WRITE OPERATION ON THE VIRTUAL ARRAY DOES NOT
NECESSARILY CAUSE A PHYSICAL WRITE ON THE DISK. THE ROUTINE VIRCL
EXECUTES ANY PENDING DISK OPERATIONS, THEREBY UPDATING THE DISK FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE VIRTUAL ARRAY HANDLER DOES NOT CHECK THE NAME AND THE SIZE OF THE
SPECIFIED FILE. ATTEMPTS TO REFERENCE A NONEXISTING FILE OR TO WRITE
BEYOND FILE BOUNDARIES WILL RESULT IN SYSTEM RUN TIME ERROR MESSAGES
(IT XXXXX AND FI XXXXX).
**MISCELLANEOUS:
RESTRICTIONS
THE STATEMENT: COMMON VIRTL (1028)
MUST APPEAR IN THE SPECIFICATION PART OF THE MAIN LINE. IT MUST
PRECEDE ANY OF THE USER'S COMMONS.
LENGTH
LENGTH OF A VIRTUAL ARRAY DISK FILE:
L (SECTORS) = N * 16
WHERE N = 1,2....32 (16 SECTORS HOLD 1 K OF DATA)
DUE TO THE RANGE OF THE INTEGER VARIABLES VIRTUAL ARRAYS ARE LIMITED
TO 512 DISK SECTORS (32 K REAL ELEMENTS).
VIRAR (IX) MUST NOT APPEAR ON THE LEFT SIDE OF AN ASSIGNMENT STATEMENT.
VIRAR (IX) MUST NOT BE USED IN AN IMPLIED DO. SEE SAMPLE PROGRAM
APPENDIX A.
A VIRTUAL ARRAY IS ALWAYS REAL AND ONE-DIMENSIONAL. FOR USING IT WITH
INTEGER AND MIXED FILES SEE APP. B.
RECOMMENDATIONS
MOVING THE SCANNING WINDOW UP AND DOWN THE VIRTUAL ARRAY REQUIRES DISK
OPERATIONS AND IS THEREFORE TIME CONSUMING. ALWAYS TRY TO KEEP WITHIN
THE PRESENT 1 K WINDOW. FOR EXAMPLE:
DO 1000 I = 1, 1000
1000 SUM = SUM + VIRAR (I) + VIRAR (I+1000)
WILL TAKE FOREVER.
BETTER:
DIMENSION HELP (1000)
.
.
.
DO 1000 I = 1,1000
1000 HELP (I) = VIRAR (I)
DO 2000 I = 1,1000
2000 SUM = SUM + HELP (I) + VIRAR (I+1000)
X15101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MPY FAST MICROCODED MULIPLY INSTRUCTION
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
MICROCODE WCS
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS MICROCODED MULTIPLY INSTRUCTION IS LIKE THE STANDARD HP2100
MULTIPLY INSTRUCTION (OPCODE 100200) EXCEPT THAT IT IS TWICE AS FAST
(I.E., 5.9 MICROSECONDS INSTEAD OF 10.8 MICROSECONDS). BOTH
INSTRUCTIONS MULTIPLY TWO 16 BIT SIGNED OPERANDS AND PRODUCE IDENTICAL
32 BIT RESULTS.
THIS INSTRUCTION IS USEFUL WHEN INTEGER MULTIPLIES FORM AN APPRECIABLE
FRACTION OF A PROGRAM'S EXECUTION TIMING.
THIS PROGRAM REQUIRES AN HP2100 WITH WRITABLE CONTROL STORE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. USE BCS TO PRODUCE AN ABSOLUTE TAPE CONTAINING THE TEST1 PROGRAM
AND THE STANDARD MICRO-DEBUG-EDITOR.
2. LOAD THE ABSOLUTE TAPE AND START AT ADDRESS P=2.
3. RESPOND TO THE "COMMAND?" DIRECTIVE WITH REQUEST TO
A. LOAD AND MPY MICROCODE PAPER TAPE
B. WRITE THE MICROCODE TO WCS
C. EXECUTE THE TEST1 TEST PROGRAM (IT WILL HALT IF THE ANSWER IS
COMPUTED INCORRECTLY)
D. IF DESIRED, THE USER CAN MODIFY THE PARAMETERS AGR1 AND ARG2
WITHIN TEST1 AND RE-EXECUTE THE TEST.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
ABS 105140B THIS INSTRUCTION MULTIPLIES THE A BY THE B REGISTER AND
LEAVES THE DOUBLE LENGTH RESULT IN BA (B=MSB, A=LSB).
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
WCS MUST BE LOADED WITH THIS MICROPROGRAM BEFORE THE 105140 OPCODE IS
USED.
THE USER MAY REASSIGN THE OPCODE TO ANY OTHER VALUE BY SIMPLY MODIFYING
THE SOURCE PROGRAM AND RE-MASSEMBLING.
THIS INSTRUCTION REQUIRES 5.5 USEC PLUS WHATEVER IS REQUIRED FOR JUMP-
TABLE CONVENTIONS. THIS OVERHEAD WILL RANGE BETWEEN 0.0 USEC (IF WCS
IS THE ENTRY MODULE) AND 1.2 USEC (IF THE FLOATING POINT MODULE 1 IS
THE ENTRY MODULE AND WCS UTILIZES BOTH A PRIMARY AND A SECONDARY JUMP-
TABLE FOR THIS OPCODE.
X15201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING PROBLEM SOLVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ENGINEERING
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SYSTEM SOLVER (STRESS) GIVES STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS
COMPUTER PROBLEM SOLVING ADVANTAGES WITHOUT REQUIRING COMPUTER
PROGRAMMING IN THE USUAL SENSE. IT IS A PROGRAMMING SYSTEM COMPOSED OF
TWO PARTS: A LANGUAGE FOR DESCRIBING A PROBLEM TO THE COMPUTER AND A
PROGRAM FOR INTERPRETING THIS LANGUAGE AND SOLVING THE PROBLEM. THE
LANGUAGE USES A VOCABULARY FAMILIAR TO STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS, ALLOWING
THEM TO INPUT PROBLEMS BY SPECIFYING THE TYPE AND SIZE, THE PHYSICAL
DIMENSIONS, AND THE LOADS OF A STRUCTURE. STRESS WILL OUTPUT INFORMATION
ON STRUCTURES WITH PRISMATIC MEMBERS IN TWO OR THREE DIMENSIONS AND WITH
EITHER PINNED OR RIGID JOINTS. THE EFFECTS OF CONCENTRATED OR
DISTRIBUTED LOADS, DISPLACEMENT, AND TEMPERATURE ARE ALSO ANALYZED.
STRESS CONSISTS OF FORTRAN AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE ROUTINES WHICH ARE
OPERABLE UNDER A DOS-M ENVIRONMENT ON A 16K (MINIMUM) MACHINE. INPUT IS
ON CARDS AND OUTPUT IS ON A 120 COLUMN LINE PRINTER.
REQUIRED MANUAL: STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING SYSTEM SOLVER (STRESS) FOR THE
IBM 1130 VERSION 2, USER'S MANUAL; PROGRAM NUMBER 1130-EC-03X.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: FORTRAN SOURCE
FILE# 3: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 4: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 5: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 6: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 7: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 8: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 9: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 10: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 11: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 12: ASMB SOURCE
FILE# 13: SAMPLE INPUT DECK
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
EACH OF THE 11 SOURCE FILES SHOULD BE STORED UNDER A DIFFERENT NAME ON
THE DISC. BELOW IS AN EXAMPLE PRINTOUT ON THE CRT OR TTY:
:PU,SSTRE,SSPA1,SSPA2,SSPA4,SSA1A,SDATA,SPACK,SUNPK,SMCHR,SSLOC,SDPAC
(6496 LINES) :ST,S,SSTRE,(LU OF MAG TAPE UNIT)
DONE?
YES
(88 LINES) :ST,S,SSPA1,(LU OF MAG TAPE UNIT)
.
.
.
STRESS IS NOW ON DISC IN 11 SOURCE FILES. IN ORDER TO OBTAIN THE
RELOCATABLES FOR LOADING STRESS, THE FOLLOWING LIST OF INSTRUCTIONS
SHOULD BE FOLLOWED BY TYPING THEM ON THE CRT OR BY MAKING A TAPE OR
DECK OF CARDS FOR BATCH OPERATION OF THE COMPUTER.
:JOB
:PU,STRES,SPH1A,START,S001A,S002A,SOJTS,SOMEM,SEXT1,SOLDS,SOREL,SPH1B,
SLNK2,SLNK3,SLNK5,SLNK6,SLNK7,SLNK8,SPTIF,SLNK9,SLN10,STRF1,RFTN4,RASMB
:JF,SSTRE
:PROG,FTN4,2,1,99
:ST,R,RFTN4
:JOB
:JF,SSPA1
:PROG,ASMB,2,1,99
:JF,SSPA2
:PROGR,ASMB,2,1,99
.
.
.
:TY (IF IN BATCH MODE)
STRESS IS NOW READY FOR EXECUTION. TO START STRESS THE FOLLOWING
COMMAND SHOULD BE TYPED ON THE CRT OR TTY:
:PR,START
THE DATA DECK SHOULD BE IN THE CARD READER AT THIS TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
MODIFICATIONS TO IBM STRESS MANUAL
1. DISREGARD SWITCH SETTINGS AND MEANINGS IN MANUAL (PAGE 45)
SW 3 ON IMPLIES - PRINT OUTPUT
SW 4 ON IMPLIES - ALL FORCES ON EACH MEMBER FOR ALL LOADINGS
WILL BE GROUPED AND PRINTED TOGETHER
SW 5 ON IMPLIES - INTERNAL MEMBER FORCES ARE TO BE PRINTED
2. IF SW 5 IS ON, INTERNAL MEMBER FORCES ARE REQUIRED. CARDS TELLING THE
NUMBER OF SECTIONS AND THE MEMBERS FOR WHICH INTERNAL FORCES ARE TO
BE CALCULATED MUST BE PLACED AFTER THE 'SOLVE' CARD. THE CARD FORMAT
IS FREE FIELD AND IS AS FOLLOWS:
LENGTHS N MEMBERS L (OR L THRU M) END
THE 'LENGTHS' IS THE NUMBER OF LENGTHS (MAX OF 20) THE BEAM IS TO BE
BROKEN INTO FOR INTERNAL FORCE SUMMATION, I.E., N=3 WOULD GIVE FORCES
AT THIRD POINTS. 'MEMBERS' TELLS FOR WHICH MEMBERS INTERNAL FORCES
ARE TO BE TABULATED. ALL LOADING CASES WILL BE GIVEN FOR A MEMBER.
THE USER IS LIMITED TO A MAXIMUM OF 20 SECTIONS ALONG A MEMBER. THE
PROGRAM CAN HANDLE COMBINATION LOADS UP TO THE SECOND LEVEL OF
EMBEDDED COMBINATIONS BUT NOT BEYOND. I.E., A COMBINATION LOADING
WHICH CONTAINS ANOTHER COMBINATION LOADING CAN BE HANDLED, UNLESS THE
SECOND COMBINATION ALSO CALLS ON A COMBINATION LOAD. IF THIS HAPPENS
THE PROGRAM PRINTS "LOADING N HAS TOO MANY EMBEDDED COMBINATIONS",
AND CALLS STRESS BACK INTO CORE TO CONTINUE WITH A NEW PROBLEM.
DO NOT USE COLUMN 72.
INPUT- OUTPUT DESCRIPTION: INTERNAL FORCES ARE PRINTED FOR ALL
LOADING CASES ON A MEMBER. THE SIGN - CONVENTION IS STRESS MEMBER
(LOCAL) COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR THE 'END' END OF A MEMBER.
FOR EXAMPLE, IF MEMBER 25 IS SPECIFIED UNDER 'MEMBER INCIDENCES' AS
25 50 51, THE FORCES AT ANY POINT X ALONG THE MEMBER WOULD BE SUMMED
FROM JOINT 50 AS THOUGH THE POINT AT X WAS THE MEMBER END POINT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
1. HP STRESS WORKS WITH THE FOLLOWING UNIT MEMBERS:
LU EQUIPMENT
1 CRT OR TTY
6 LINE PRINTER
8 CARD READER
2. AT SYSTEM GENERATION TIME, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO EXCLUDE EFMP FROM THE
DISC PACK AND ALSO TO PUT THE FOLLOWING ROUTINES IN CORE FOR MORE
EFFICIENT OPERATION OF STRESS:
$SRCH
$EX05
$EX11
$EX18
3. THE SAME PROBLEM WAS RUN ON THE IBM 1130 AND HP 2100, WITH THE IBM
1130 TAKING 4 HOURS AND THE HP 2100 TAKING 45 MINUTES.
X15301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 2000F BASIC FOR DOS-M/DOS III
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
BASIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DOS-M/DOS III BASIC IS ESSENTIALLY A SINGLE TERMINAL VERSION OF HP 2000F
TIME-SHARED BASIC. IT RUNS UNDER THE DOS-M OR DOS III OPERATING SYSTEM,
GIVING THE USERS OF THESE SYSTEMS A POWERFUL, YET EASY TO USE COMPUTING
FACILITY. FEATURES OF DOS-M/DOS III BASIC NOT FOUND IN OTHER DOS-M
BASIC'S INCLUDE: STRING VARIABLES, FORMATTED OUTPUT, USER PROGRAM DISC
STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL, USER DATA FILES, PROGRAM CHAINING, ERROR MESSAGES
INSTEAD OF ERROR NUMBERS, LINE PRINTER SUPPORT, BETTER PROGRAM EDITING
FACILITIES, HIGH-SPEED PAPER TAPE INPUT AND OUTPUT OF PROGRAMS, MIN AND
MAX OPERATORS, MORE FLEXIBLE INPUT WITH ENTER STATEMENT, MULTI-BRANCH
GOTO AND GOSUB STATEMENTS, ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, SOURCE INPUT FROM ANY
INPUT DEVICE VIA "LOAD" COMMAND, ETC.
ANOTHER IMPORTANT CONSIDERATION IS THE PROVISION FOR RETRIEVING BASIC
PROGRAMS FROM 2000F TIME-SHARED SYSTEM DUMP TAPES. THIS GIVES THE DOS-M
/DOS III USER ACCESS TO THE GREAT NUMBER OF USEFUL HP BASIC LIBRARY
PROGRAMS AND ALLOWS EASY TRANSFER OF OTHER USER-DEVELOPED PROGRAMS FROM
A TIME-SHARED SYSTEM TO A DOS ENVIRONMENT. USER DATA FILES MAY ALSO
BE TRANSFERRED FROM SYSTEM TO SYSTEM. TO MAKE THESE CONVERSIONS THE
DOS-M/2000C TSB FILE HANDLER, HP 24228, MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION
WITH SPECIAL ROUTINES INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE.
CURRENTLY, DOS-M/DOS III BASIC REQUIRES AT LEAST 14K WORDS OF MEMORY
IN ADDITION TO SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. THEREFORE, A CPU WITH AT LEAST
24K WILL BE NECESSARY. (A 32K CPU GIVES THE USER MORE PROGRAM SPACE
THAN IS AVAILABLE ON THE 2000F.)
A TIME BASE GENERATOR IS NECESSARY IF THE TIME COMMAND, TIM( ) FUNCTION,
OR TIMED ENTER WILL BE USED.
SEE "2000F: A GUIDE TO TIME-SHARED BASIC", HP ORDER NUMBER 02000-90044
FOR DETAILED INFORMATION ABOUT THE LANGUAGE AND PROGRAM EXECUTION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE(CONTINUED)
FILE# 4: SOURCE(CONTINUED)
FILE# 5: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
AN ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO DUPLICATE 2000F TIME-SHARED BASIC AS
CLOSELY AS POSSIBLE. THEREFORE, THE USER IS REFERRED TO "2000F: A
GUIDE TO TIME-SHARED BASIC" (HP ORDER NUMBER 02000-90044) FOR DETAILED
INFORMATION ABOUT THE LANGUAGE AND PROGRAM EXECUTION. ONLY DIFFERENCES
BETWEEN 2000F AND DOS-M/DOS III BASIC WILL BE NOTED HERE.
TO RUN DOS-M/DOS III BASIC WITH THE SYSTEM CONSOLE AS THE USER TERMINAL
TYPE:
:PR,BASIC
TO RUN WITH ANOTHER CONSOLE AS THE USER TERMINAL TYPE:
:PR,BASIC,(LU # OF CONSOLE)
IN EITHER CASE, BASIC RESPONDS WITH "READY", AND THE USER MAY TYPE
PROGRAM STATEMENTS AND COMMANDS AS DESCRIBED IN "2000F: A GUIDE TO
TIME-SHARED BASIC" WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTIONS:
1. THE "LOG IN" PROCEDURE IS NOT USED.
2. THE "BREAK" KEY IS NOT USED WITH DOS-M/DOS III BASIC. TO STOP
A LISTING, RUNNING PROGRAM, OR OTHER LENGTHY OPERATION, SET
BIT 15 OF THE SWITCH REGISTER ON. THIS WILL TERMINATE THE
CURRENT OPERATION (EXCEPT FOR A RUNNING PROGRAM IF THE "BRK( )"
FUNCTION HAS DISABLED "BREAK").
3. THE "ECHO" COMMAND IS NOT USED.
4. THE "PUNCH" AND "XPUNCH" COMMANDS PUNCH THE CURRENT PROGRAM ON
THE PAPER TAPE PUNCH (MUST BE LU #4).
5. THE "TAPE" COMMAND READS A PROGRAM TAPE FROM THE PHOTO-READER
(MUST BE LU # 5). IT EXPECTS A SPECIAL CHARACTER, CNTL-Z
(Z TYPED WHILE HOLDING DOWN THE CNTL KEY), AT THE END OF THE
TAPE. "PUNCH" AND "XPUNCH" PROVIDE THIS TERMINAL CHARACTER
AUTOMATICALLY. A TAPE PUNCHED ON A 2000 TIME-SHARED SYSTEM
SHOULD HAVE THIS CHARACTER PUNCHED AFTER THE TRAILER AND
ANOTHER TRAILER PRODUCED FOLLOWING IT BEFORE THE TAPE IS
REMOVED FROM THE TERMINAL.
6. NO MESSAGES ARE ISSUED ON THE STATUS OF THE LINE PRINTER
EXCEPT "LP FREE" WHEN A LISTING OR PROGRAM COMPLETES.
7. THE "TIME" COMMAND WORKS ONLY IF A TIME-BASE GENERATOR IS IN
THE SYSTEM.
8. THE "MESSAGE" COMMAND IS NOT USED.
9. THERE IS NO DISTINCTION BETWEEN USER LIBRARY, GROUP LIBRARY,
AND SYSTEM LIBRARY. ALL PROGRAM AND DATA FILES ARE USER
LIBRARY FILES. THE "LIBRARY" AND "GROUP" COMMANDS ARE NOT
USED.
10. FOR THE "TIM( )" FUNCTION TO WORK PROPERLY, TWO THINGS ARE
REQUIRED.
A. A TIME-BASE GENERATOR MUST BE IN THE SYSTEM IF HOURS AND
MINUTES ARE DESIRED.
B. A SPECIALLY FORMATTED ":DATE" DIRECTIVE MUST BE GIVEN TO
THE DOS-M OR DOS III SYSTEM IF THE DAY AND YEAR ARE
DESIRED.
:DA,XXX/YY,M,N
WHERE XXX IS A THREE-DIGIT NUMBER GIVING THE CURRENT DAY
OF THE YEAR, AND YY IS THE YEAR OF THE CENTURY. M IS THE
CURRENT HOUR AND N THE CURRENT MINUTE OF THE DAY.
:DA032/73,9,30 FOR FEB. 1, 1973 AT 9:30 AM
11. CURRENTLY A MAXIMUM OF 31 PROGRAMS AND DATA FILES ALLOWED.
12. A CNTL-L (L TYPED WHILE HOLDING DOWN THE CNTL KEY) IN AN OUTPUT
STRING CAUSES A PAGE EJECT WHEN IT IS PRINTED ON THE LINE-
PRINTER.
13. A NEW COMMAND, "LOAD-8", ALLOWS SOURCE STATEMENTS TO BE INPUT
FROM A DEVICE OTHER THAN THE TTY. FOR EXAMPLE, "LOAD-8" WOULD
INPUT SOURCE FROM LU #8. "LOAD" ALONE DEFAULTS TO LU#5.
LOADING STOPS WHEN AN END-OF-FILE OR VALID COMMAND IS
ENCOUNTERED IN THE SOURCE STREAM.
BFILE
BFILE INITIALIZES A DOS-M OR DOS III FILE FOR USE BY BASIC. THE USER
MUST RESERVE SPACE ON THE DISC FOR THIS FILE BY CREATING A FILE WITH THE
":ST,B,$FILS,N" DIRECTIVE. ("$FILES" MUST BE ON THE SAME DISC SUB-
CHANNEL AS BASIC AND ITS SEGMENTS, BFILE, AND CFILE). N IS THE NUMBER
OF SECTORS THAT THE USER WISHES TO RESERVE FOR BASIC PROGRAM AND DATA
FILE STORAGE. THE FILE IS THEN INITIALIZED BY RUNNING BFILE:
:PR,BFILE
THIS BUILDS AN EMPTY DIRECTORY IN THE FIRST TWO SECTORS OF "$FILS".
(TWO SECTORS OF DIRECTORY ALLOW SPACE FOR UP TO 31 PROGRAMS OR DATA
FILE ENTRIES.)
BFILE ISSUES AN ERROR MESSAGE IF A FILE NAMED "$FILS" DOES NOT EXIST
OR IF IT IS LESS THAN THREE SECTORS LONG. IF BFILE IS RUN AND IT FINDS
A DIRECTORY ALREADY IN "$FILS", IT ASKS "OK TO PURGE BASIC FILES?" AND
WAITS FOR A RESPONSE FROM THE USER. A RESPONSE OF "Y" INFORMS BFILE
THAT IS SHOULD DESTROY THE OLD DIRECTORY AND CREATE A NEW ONE. A
RESPONSE OF "N" TERMINATES BFILE WITHOUT FURTHER ACTION.
CFILE
CFILE, USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE DOS-M/2000C FILE HANDLER, GIVES THE
USER THE CAPABILITY OF TRANSFERRING PROGRAMS AND DATA FILES BETWEEN A
2000C/F TSB SYSTEM AND A DOS-/DOS III SYSTEM. THE FILE HANDLER CONVERTS
PROGRAM AND DATA FILES FROM 2000C/F DUMP TAPES TO DOS-M/DOS III DISC
FILES. IT ALSO TRANSFERS PROPERLY FORMATTED DOS-M/DOS III DATA FILES
TO MAGNETIC TAPE FOR SUBSEQUENT LOADING ON A 2000C/F TSB SYSTEM. CFILE
CONVERTS THE DOS-M/DOS III FILES CREATED BY THE FILE HANDLER TO BASIC
FILES WITHIN "$FILS". CFILE ALSO CONVERTS BASIC FILES WITHIN "$FILS"
TO DOS-M/DOS III FILES THAT ARE FORMATTED FOR THE TSB FILE HANDLER.
CFILE IS RUN BY TYPING:
:PR,CFILE
CHECK IS FIRST MADE TO SEE THAT A FILE NAMED "$FILS" EXISTS AND HAS
BEEN INITIALIZED BY BFILE. IF NOT, AN ERROR MESSAGE IS PRINTED AND
CFILE TERMINATES. IF "$FILS" IS READY, CFILE REQUESTS WHICH OPTION
IS DESIRED:
SELECT OPTION:
1 = DOS FILE TO BASIC
2 = BASIC FILE TO DOS
THE USER RESPONDS WITH "1" OR "2", FOLLOWED BY CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE-
FEED. IF A RESPONSE OTHER THAN "1" OR "2" IS GIVEN, CFILE REPEATS THE
OPTION REQUEST.
IF OPTION "1" IS SELECTED:
CFILE TYPES "FILENAME?" AND WAITS FOR THE USER TO TYPE THE NAME
OF THE DOS FILE THAT IS TO BE CONVERTED TO A BASIC FILE WITHIN
"$FILS". THE USER TYPES THE FILENAME OR "/E". "/E" TERMINATES
CFILE. IF A FILENAME IS TYPED, CFILE CHECKS TO SEE THAT IT EXISTS.
ITS SIZE IS CHECKED AND THE DIRECTORY IN "$FILS" IS EXAMINED TO SEE
IF THERE IS SPACE FOR ANOTHER ENTRY. IF SO, AN ENTRY IS BUILT FOR
THE NAMED FILE AND IT IS COPIED TO "$FILS". OTHERWISE, AN ERROR
MESSAGE IS PRINTED AND CFILE TERMINATES. AFTER A SUCCESSFUL FILE
COPY, CFILE REPEATS THE QUESTION "FILENAME?" AND THE PROCESS
CONTINUES AS ABOVE.
IF OPTION "2" IS SELECTED:
BEFORE RUNNING CFILE, THE USER SHOULD CREATE AN ASCII DOS DATA
FILE LARGE ENOUGH TO HOLD THE BASIC DATA FILE TO BE CONVERTED.
TO CALCULATE THE NUMBER OF SECTORS NEEDED, DOUBLE THE NUMBER OF
RECORDS IN THE BASIC FILE AND ADD ONE. (E.G. IF THE BASIC FILE
HAS 5 RECORDS, :ST,A,FILENAME,11) THE NAME OF THE DOS FILE MUST BE
THE SAME AS THE FIRST FIVE CHARACTERS OF THE BASIC FILENAME.
CFILE TYPES "FLENAME?" AND WAITS FOR THE USER TO TYPE THE NAME OF
THE BASIC FILE THAT IS TO BE CONVERTED TO A DOS FILE. THE USER
TYPES A FILENAME OR "/E". "/E" TERMINATES CFILE. IF A FILENAME
IS TYPED, CFILE CHECKS TO SEE THAT IT EXISTS WITHIN "$FILS", THAT
IT IS NOT A PROGRAM FILE, AND THAT A DOS FILE OF THE APPROPRIATE
NAME AND SIZE ALSO EXISTS. ERROR MESSAGES ARE PRINTED IF ANY OF
THESE CONDITIONS ARE NOT MET AND CFILE TERMINATES. IF ALL IS WELL,
CFILE PRINTS "ENTER USER ID" AND WAITS FOR THE USER'S RESPONSE.
THE USER MUST ENTER THE TSB USER ID INTO WHICH HE WANTS THE FILE
TO BE TRANSFERRED. THE FILE IS THEN CONVERTED TO A DOS FILE AND
FORMATTED FOR THE FILE HANDLER. THEN THE QUESTION "FILENAME?" IS
REPEATED AND PROCESSING CONTINUES AS DESCRIBED ABOVE.
TO USE BASIC:
1. LOAD BASIC AS DESCRIBED IN OPERATING PROCEDURES BELOW.
2. RUN BASIC:
:PR,BASIC
3. AFTER "READY" IS PRINTED, TYPE YOUR PROGRAM.
4. TYPE "RUN".
5. TYPE: BYE
6. BASIC WILL TERMINATE WITH THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE:
XXX MINUTES OF TERMINAL TIME WHERE XXX IS THE NUMBER OF WHOLE
MINUTES THAT BASIC HAS BEEN
RUNNING OR "000" IF NO TIME-BASE
GENERATOR IS IN THE SYSTEM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR MESSAGES ARE CONTAINED IN THE REFERENCES LISTED IN THE SECTION
ON LITERATURE REFERENCE UNDER "MISCELLANEOUS".
IF A COMMAND IS GIVEN TO DOS-M/DOS III BASIC THAT REQUIRES DISC STORAGE,
A CHECK IS MADE TO SEE THAT A DOS FILE NAMED "$FILS" EXISTS AND HAS BEEN
INITIALIZED WITH BFILE. IF NOT, THE MESSAGE "$FILS NOT INITIALIZED"
IS PRINTED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
"CSAVE"'D PROGRAMS MAY NOT BE TRANSFERRED FROM A 2000 SYSTEM TO DOS-M/
DOS III BASIC.
VDR00 (MP 20985) MUST BE USED AS THE TELETYPE DRIVER, NOT DVR05.
(BASIC REQUIRES THE "BINARY" I/O CAPABILITIES OF DVR00, WHICH ARE NOT
INCLUDED IN DVR05.) BASIC (AND ITS SEGMENTS), BFILE, CFILE, AND $FILS
MUST ALL RESIDE ON THE SAME DISC SUBCHANNEL.
NOTE:SOME VERSIONS OF THE STANDARD DOS III RELOCATING LOADER WILL NOT
LOAD BASIC PROPERLY, EVEN THOUGH THEY SUPPORT CURRENT PAGE LINKING.
USE THE LOADER INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE IF YOU HAVE BASE PAGE OVER-
FLOW PROBLEMS.
LITERATURE REFERENCE:
2000F: A GUIDE TO TIME-SHARED BASIC, HP 02000-90044
DOS-M/2000C TSB FILE HANDLER, HP SMALL PROGRAMS MANUAL 5951-1381
X15401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DYNAMIC LOAD OF FAST FORTRAN PROCESSOR TO WCS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
MICROCODE FORTRAN WCS
**LANGUAGES:
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS-3
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
12K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE ALLOWS THE DOS-M/DOS-III USER TO DYNAMICALLY LOAD THE FAST
FORTRAN PROCESSOR (FFP) TO WCS. THE PACKAGE CONSISTS OF TWO I/O UTILITY
PROGRAMS, THE DOS WCS I/O UTILITY ROUTINE (HP 2433), THE FFP SOURCE FOR
CONTROL STORE MODULES #2 AND #3, AND AN FFP OVERLAY ROUTINE.
ONE UTILITY PROGRAM READS A BINARY PAPER TAPE OF FFP AND STORES IT INTO
A DISC FILE. FFP FOR MODULES #2 AND #3 ARE STORED IN TWO SEPARATE
FILES. WHEN FFP IS REQUIRED, THE USER NEEDS ONLY TO EXECUTE THE SECOND
UTILITY PROGRAM AND THE FFP FILES WILL BE WRITTEN TO WCS. THIS SECOND
UTILITY MUST BE LOADED WITH THE WCS I/O ROUTINE.
THE OVERLAY ROUTINE CONSISTS OF PSEUDO ENTRY POINTS OF THE RELOCATABLE
LIBRARY AND IS TO BE LOADED WITH THE FORTRAN PROGRAM USING FFP.
THIS PACKAGE REQUIRES THE FOLLOWING HARDWARE: A MINIMUM OF 12K CORE,
A DISC, PAPER TAPE READER AND PUNCH, LINE PRINTER, CONSOLE TERMINAL, THE
FLOATING POINT FIRMWARE (HP 12901A), AND TWO WRITABLE CONTROL STORES
(HP12908B).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. CREATE TWO BINARY FILES ON DISC WITH AT LEAST 5 SECTORS EACH:
FFP1 AND FFP2.
2. MOUNT 2 WCS CARDS.
3. ASSEMBLE THE SOURCE OF FFP FOR BOTH MODULES #2 AND #3.
4. COMPILE THE PROGRAM A, SETP1 AND SETP2 SEPARATELY. LOAD WITH THE
LOADR AND STORE THE PROGRAMS. EXECUTE. SETP1 LOADS THE FFP BINARY
TAPE FOR MODULE #2 IN THE FILE FFP1. SETP2 LOADS THE FFP BINARY
TAPE FOR MODULE #3 IN THE FILE FFP2.
5. COMPILE THE PROGRAM B, RUN THE LOADR WITH THE WCS I/O UTILITY
ROUTINE, AND STORE THE PROGRAM. EXECUTE AND FFP WILL BE LOADED
TO WCS.
NOW YOU ARE READY TO EXECUTE A FORTRAN PROGRAM REQUIRING FFP. COMPILE
THE FORTRAN PROGRAM AND INSERT OR ENTER THE OVERLAY ROUTINE DURING THE
EXECUTION OF LOADR.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
AT THE END OF EXECUTION PROGRAM A DISPLAYS THE FOLLOWING MESSAGES:
A. I/O ERR ET EQT #03 - INDICATES END OF PAPER TAPE
B. WORD COUNT = XXX - INDICATES THE NUMBER OF WORDS WRITTEN ON
DISC
PROGRAM B USES THE NUMBER OF WORDS XXX TO READ A DISC FILE INTO A CORE
BUFFER AND THE NUMBER OF WORDS XXX/2 TO WRITE THE MICROPROGRAM FROM A
CORE BUFFER TO WCS.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
MAKE SURE THAT THE WCS JUMPER BOARD IS CONNECTED PROPERLY. MAY RUN INTO
MEMORY PROTECT PROBLEMS IF THE MAIN CPU DOES NOT PUT OUT 4.85 VOLTS OF
POWER SUPPLY.
X15501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
OCTAPUS FOR CASSETTE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DUMP ASSEMBLER ABSOLUTE
MEMORY
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SELF-CON
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
1K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
'OCTASET' IS A TROUBLESHOOTING AID FOR COMPUTER SERVICE ENGINEERS AND
PROGRAMMERS. IT ELIMINATES TIME CONSUMING SWITCH REGISTER TOGGLING
BY PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ON-LINE IN REAL TIME:
ASSEMBLY INTO CORE
WRITE ABSOLUTE TAPE FROM CORE
LOAD ABSOLUTE TAPE TO CORE
VERIFY ABSOLUTE TAPE TO CORE
LIST MEMORY BOUND OF ABSOLUTE TAPE
DUMP CORE TO TELEPRINTER (OCTAL & INVERSE ASSEMBLY)
JUMP TO ANY LOCATION IN CORE
SEARCH CORE FOR ANY OCTAL VALUE
'OCTASET' IS CONFIGURED, SELF-CONTAINED, AND NEEDS NO OTHER DRIVERS OR
ROUTINES. IT RESIDES WITHIN THE BOUNDS OF A SINGLE PAGE IN CORE.
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION WAS A PRIME CONSIDERATION IN ITS DESIGN AND
ANYONE FAMILIAR WITH HP ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CAN MASTER ITS USE IN A VERY
SHORT TIME.
MINIMUM CONFIGURATION IS AN 8500 CONSOLE (MIN.) ALTHOUGH A TAPE UNIT
EXTENDS ITS USEFULNESS CONSIDERABLY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
OCTASET IS A TROUBLESHOOTING AID FOR COMPUTER SERVICE ENGINEERS AND
PROGRAMMERS. IT ELIMINATES TIME CONSUMING SWITCH REGISTER TOGGLING BY
PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING FUNCTIONS ON LINE IN REAL TIME:
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS:
1. LOAD OBJECT TAPE USING PBCL.
2. PRESS PRESET AND PRESS RUN.
THEREAFTER, ALL COMMUNICATION IS THROUGH THE PRINTER KEYBOARD.
OPERATION:
OCTASET PRINTS "?(BELL)". THIS IS THE FUNCTION REQUEST STATE. OCTASET
EXPECTS ONE OF THE FOLLOWING CONTROL CHARACTERS:
CHARACTER FUNCTION
CONTROL A ASSEMBLY
CONTROL B MEMORY BOUNDS OF ABS TAPE (TAPE IS NOT
LOADED INTO CORE)
CONTROL D DUMP CORE TO TELEPRINTER
CONTROL P WRITE ABSOLUTE TAPE FROM CORE
CONTROL R RUN FROM GIVEN ADDRESS
CONTROL S SEARCH CORE FOR GIVEN VALUE
CONTROL T LOAD ABSOLUTE TAPE INTO CORE
CONTROL V VERIFY ABSOLUTE TAPE WITH CORE
ANY OTHER RESPONSE IS AN ERROR AND OCTASET REPEATS THE QUESTION MARK.
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION WITH THE VARIOUS FUNCTIONS IS DISCUSSED BELOW.
CR SIGNIFIES THE "CARRIAGE RETURN" KEY.
ALL NUMERICS ARE OCTAL. NO SUFFIX B SHOULD BE TYPED AFTER NUMERICS.
LEADING ZEROES ARE IGNORED ON INPUT.
PRINTOUT OPERATOR RESPONSE ACTION
LOAD NONE TAPE IN DECK 3 IS LOADED INTO CORE
*EOT NONE LOAD OR VERIFY OPERATION WAS SUCCESS-
FUL. END OF TAPE.
CHECKSUM NONE THE TAPE BEING LOADED HAS A CHECKSUM
ERROR.
ADDRESS=XXX NONE THE TAPE BEING LOADED TRIED TO OVER-
LAY OCTASET. XXX=OFFENDING ADDRESS.
WRITE? XXX,YYY CR CORE LOCATIONS XXX TO YYY INCLUSIVE
ARE WRITTEN IN ABSOLUTE FORMAT.
DUMP RANGE? XXX,YYY CR THE ADDRESSES AND CONTENTS OF ALL
LOCATIONS FROM XXX TO YYY ARE PRINTED
ADDR CORE TAPE
---- ---- ---- NONE THE TAPE BEING READ DOES NOT COMPARE
XXXX YYYY ZZZZ WITH CORE.
SEARCH FOR? VVV CR CORE IS SEARCHED FOR THE VALUE VVV
FROM XXX TO YYY. ADDRESSES ARE
RANGE? XXX,YYY CR LISTED WHERE VVV IS FOUND.
ADDRESS= XXX CR IN RESPONSE TO CONTROL R, OCTAPUS
WILL JUMP TO XXX.
ASSEMBLY
000123 ___________________ CURRENT ADDRESS(LEFT OVER FROM PRECEEDING
ASSEMBLY)
FOLLOWING THE PRINTOUT OF THE CURRENT ADDRESS, THE OPERATOR MAY RESPOND
IN ONE OF THREE WAYS:
1. TYPE /XXX CR THIS IS EQUIVALENT TO ORG XXX. THE
ADDRESS IS CHANGED TO XXX.
2. HOLD DOWN CONTROL KEY THE CONTENTS OF THE CURRENT ADDRESS
AND PRESS C. ARE PRINTED. ADDRESS IS NOT
INCREMENTED.
3. TYPE AN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SOURCE STATEMENT IN THE FOLLOWING FORMAT:
LDA 567,I CR
A. ASSEMBLY MODE
1. NOP AND OCT 0 ARE EQUIVALENT
2. OCTASET WAS NOT MADE TO RECOGNIZE MACRO-INSTRUCTIONS (E.G.,
ALF,ALF). THEY MAY BE ENTERED USING THE OCT INSTRUCTION
(E.G., OCT 1727). ALTERNATELY, CERTAIN MICROS MAY BE FORCED:
IF A SPACE IS DETECTED FOLLOWING THE 3 CHARACTER OPCODE, OCTASET
ASSUMES THAT IT IS A MEMORY REFERENCE OR I/O INSTRUCTIO. THE
OCTAL OPERAND FOLLOWING THE SPACE IS CONVERTED TO BINARY AND
INCLUSIVELY OR'ED WITH THE OPCODE. IT IS THEREFORE POSSIBLE TO
TRICK OCTASET INTO OR'ING BITS INTO A REGISTER REFERENCE
INSTRUCTION.
EXAMPLES: ALF 27 PRODUCES ALF,ALF(001727)
SZA 1 PRODUCES SZA,RSS(002003)
SLA 1 DOES NOT PRODUCE SLA,RSS
B. CORE DUMP
1.OCCASIONALLY AN "OPEN ENDED" DUMP IS DESIRED (NO ENDING ADDRESS).
GIVE OCTASET 0 AS AN ENDING ADDRESS AND IT WILL DUMP FOREVER. IT
MAY BE STOPPED USING SWITCH 15.
EXAMPLE: TO DUMP FROM LOCATION 100, TYPE IN RESPONSE
DUMP RANGE? 100, CR . THE MISSING PARAMETER
FOLLOWING THE COMMA IS EQUIVALENT TO 0.
*****CAUTION*****
DON'T TRY THIS WITH DICOM. DICOM DOES NOT
LOOK AT SWITCH 15.
C. THE FOLLOWING INSTRUCTIONS ARE NOT RECOGNIZED:
1. EQU 6. ENT
2. DEF (USE "OCT") 7. EXT
3. ASC 8. ORG (USE "/")
4. * IN OPERAND (E.G., JMP*-1) 9. ORR
5. RSS (RSS ALONE IS REDUNDANT 10. ORB
SINCE JMP MAY BE USED IN ITS 11. DEC (CONVERT DECIMAL TO
PLACE) OCTAL AND USE OCT)
NOTE: REWINDING AND POSITIONING OF TAPE MUST BE DONE MANUALLY. MAG
TAPE I/O IS ALWAYS PERFORMED WITH DECK #3.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
"OPCODE ERROR" - OPCODE ILLEGAL
"PAGE ERROR" - A MEMORY REFERENCE WAS MADE TO A PAGE OTHER THAN THE
CURRENT PAGE OR THE BASE PAGE.
"ILLEGAL SPACE" - ILLEGAL USE OF A SPACE.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
OCTASET DOES NOT USE THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM. DURING PRINTING OPERATIONS
THE OPERATION MAY BE ABORTED BY SETTING BIT 15 OF THE SWITCH REGISTER.
X15601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HIGH-SPEED DISC INPUT OUTPUT
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
DISC I/O
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS-3
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
'HSDIO' ENABLES THE DOS-M/DOS-III USER TO HAVE THE FOLLOWING IMPROVE-
MENTS FOR FILE ACCESSING AS COMPARED TO THE STANDARD SYSTEM EXEC 14 AND
EXEC 15 DISC I/O REQUESTS.
1. DIRECT ACCESS OF A FILE INSTEAD OF SEARCHING THE FILE DIRECTORY EACH
TIME FOR THE FILE ADDRESS, THEN ACCESSING THE FILE. (INCREASES
ACCESS SPEED APPROXIMATELY 10 TO 20 TIMES.)
2. ALLOWS THE USER TO ACCESS THE SCRATCH AREA OF THE CURRENT USER DISC
AS ANOTHER DATA FILE IDENTIFIED BY THE NAME '$USER'.
3. ALLOWS THE USER TO ACCESS THE SCRATCH AREA OF THE SYSTEM DISC AS
ANOTHER DATA FILE IDENTIFIED BY THE NAME '$SYSM'.
4. ALLOWS THE USER TO READ OR WRITE TO ANY DISC FILE ON THE CURRENT
DISC.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE 8K COMPUTER AND 7900A DISC DRIVE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. ASSEMBLE THE HIGH SPEED DISK INPUT/OUTPUT ROUTINE.
2. COMPILE/ASSEMBLE THE CALLING PROGRAM.
3. LOAD THE CALLING PROGRAM, 'HSDIC' ROUTINE, AND THE RELOCATABLE
PROGRAM LIBRARY.
4. EXECUTE THE PROGRAM USING THE ':RU' OR ':PR' DIRECTIVE.
USIZE - RETURNS THE NUMBER OF SECTORS AVAILABLE IN THE SCRATCH AREA
OF THE CURRENT USER DISK.
SSIZE - RETURNS THE NUMBER OF SECTORS AVAILABLE IN THE SCRATCH AREA
OF THE SYSTEM DISK (JBIN AREA).
CLRTB - REMOVES UNUSED FILES FROM THE SUBROUTINE'S FILE ADDRESS TABLE.
IT IS USEFUL WHEN MORE THAN 10 FILES MUST BE USED, BUT AT
DIFFERENT TIMES IN THE MAIN PROGRAM.
HSDIO - FILE INPUT/OUTPUT ROUTINE.
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT USIZE
.
.
.
JSB USIZE ENTER THE ROUTINE TO RETURN THE NUMBER OF SECTORS
DEF *+2 AVAILABLE ON THE CURRENT USER DISK. LENGTH OF SCRATCH
DEF SIZE AREA RETURNED IN SIZE.
.
.
.
SIZE BSS 1
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL USIZE ( ISIZE )
ISIZE CONTAINS THE NUMBER OF SECTORS IN THE CURRENT USER DISK SCRATCH
AREA, UPON RETURN.
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT SSIZE
.
.
.
JSB SSIZE ENTER THE ROUTINE TO RETURN THE NUMBER OF SECTORS
DEF *+2 AVAILABLE ON THE SYSTEM DISK. LENGTH OF SCRATCH
DEF SIZE AREA RETURNED IN SIZE.
.
.
.
SIZE BSS 1
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL SSIZE ( ISIZE )
ISIZE CONTAINS THE NUMBER OF SECTORS IN THE SYSTEM DISK SCRATCH AREA
(JBIN), UPON RETURN.
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT CLRTB
.
.
.
JSB CLRTB CLEAR THE FILE ADDRESS TABLE (IE., SET THE NUMBER
DEF *+1 OF OPEN FILES TO ZERO.)
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL CLRTB
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT HSDIO
.
.
.
JSB HSDIO
DEF *+6
DEF RCODE (14=READ 15=WRITE)
DEF BUFAD BUFFER INPUT/OUTPUT ADDRESS
DEF WDCNT NUMBER OF WORDS TO BE TRANSFERRED
DEF SECTR STARTING SECTOR NUMBER IN FILE
DEF FNAME ADDRESS OF FILE NAME
.
.
.
RCODE DEC 14 OR 15
BUFAD BSS 128
WDCNT DEC 128
SECTR DEC 0
FNAME ASC 3,FNAME
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL HSDIO ( ICODE, IBUFR, IBUFL, ISECT, FNAME )
ICODE - INPUT/OUTPUT REQUEST CODE. (14=READ 15=WRITE)
IBUFR - NAME OF ARRAY IN WHICH DATA IS TRANSFERRED.
IBUFL - NUMBER OF WORDS TO BE TRANSFERRED TO/FROM ARRAY/DISK FILE.
ISECT - STARTING SECTOR NUMBER WITHIN THE DISK FILE.
FNAME - NAME OF ARRAY CONTAINING THE NAME OF THE DISK FILE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ALL ERROR MESSAGES APPEAR ON LOGICAL UNIT #6 IN THE FOLLOWING FORM:
XXXXX : HS YY
NNNNN
WHERE:
XXXXX - NAME OF THE PROGRAM THAT THE ERROR OCCURRED IN.
YY - NUMERIC ERROR CODE.
NNNNN - NAME OF THE FILE BEING ACCESSED (ON UNIT #1)
YY PROBLEM
01 I/O REQUEST ERROR (VALUE IS NOT 14 OR 15)
02 WORD COUNT ERROR (VALUE IS ZERO OR NEGATIVE)
03 FILE NAME ERROR (MISSING FILE OR TOO MANY FILES ACCESSED
AT ONE TIME)
04 SECTOR ADDRESS ERROR (FILE OVERWRITE ATTEMPTED OR NEGATIVE SECTOR
NUMBER)
**MISCELLANEOUS:
IF THE USER ACCESSES MORE THAN TEN FILES AT ONE TIME, IT IS NECESSARY
TO MODIFY THE PROGRAM TO ACCOMMODATE THE ADDITIONAL OPENED FILES.
CHANGE LABEL
D10 DEC XXX
TAB5 BSS XXX
TAB4 BSS XXX
TAB3 BSS XXX
TAB2 BSS XXX
TAB1 BSS XXX
WHERE: XXX IS THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF FILES TO BE OPENED AT ONE TIME
X15701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
"LOAD ON CALL" (LOCAL) PACKAGE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 4
**KEYWORDS:
SEGMENTATION FORTRAN
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE ALLOWS EACH SUBROUTINE CALLED BY A FORTRAN MAIN PROGRAM,
TO BE PLACED IN A SEGMENT. SEGMENTS ARE LOADED AT RUN TIME. THE FIRST
PROGRAM RUNS AFTER COMPILATIONS AND BEFORE THE RELOCATING LOADER. IT
ASKS FOR THE MAIN AND SUBROUTINE NAMES AND AFTER SEVERAL VERIFICATIONS
CREATES SEGMENTS IN JOB BINARY AREA. THE SECOND PROGRAM IS A SUB-
ROUTINE CALLED BY THE MAIN PROGRAM. IT VERIFIES AND ASSUMES ARGUMENT
TRANSFER TO THE PROPER SUBROUTINE BY LOADING THE APPROPRIATE SEGMENT
IF NON-PRECEDING IN CORE. THIS PACKAGE ALLOWS APPRECIABLE CORE SPACE
AND THE STORAGE TOTAL REQUIRED IS EQUIVALENT TO THE MAIN, THE LARGEST
SUBROUTINE, PLUS 150/10 WORDS FOR THE (LOAD CALL) ROUTINE. A TEST
PROGRAM IS INCLUDED.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: A MINIMUM DOS-M CONFIGURATION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. COMPILE THE MAIN PROGRAM "DEFLC" AND ASSEMBLE THE ASSEMBLY ROUTINES
2. LOAD THE MAIN PROGRAM AND MAKE IT PERMANENT FILE BY TYPING THE
DIRECTIVE : ST, P
3. CLEAR THE JOB BINARY AREA.
4. ASSEMBLE THE "LOCAL" ASSEMBLY ROUTINE AND MAKE IT PERMANENT FILE BY
TYPING THE DIRECTIVE : ST, R, LOCAL.
5. CLEAR THE JOB BINARY AREA.
6. MODIFY THE MAIN PROGRAM IN THIS WAY :
- REPLACE THE FIRST SUBROUTINE CALL BY
CALL LOCAL (1, ARG 1, ARG 2 ...)
1 IDENTIFY THE SUBROUTINE NAME
ARG 1, ARG 2, ARE ARGUMENTS OF THIS SUBROUTINE
NOTE: THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF ARGUMENTS IS LIMITED TO 16
- REPLACE THE SECOND SUBROUTINE CALL BY
CALL LOCAL (2, ARG 1,...)
AND SO ON FOR OTHER SUBROUTINES, BUT THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF
SUBROUTINES IS LIMITED TO 10.
7. COMPILE THE MAIN PROGRAM AND THE SUBROUTINES
8. RUN THE PROGRAM "DEFLC" BY THE DIRECTIVE : PR, DEFLC
IF THE SYSTEM IS NOT IN BATCH MODE, THE PROGRAM ASKS
ENTER MAIN NAME, SUBROUTINE NAMES AND /E
TYPE OR READ ON THE BATCH UNIT THE MAIN PROG NAME AND THE SUBROUTINE
NAMES, USING COMMA AS SEPARATOR AND /E TO CLOSE THE INPUT. THE FIRST
SUBROUTINE NAME WILL BE ASSOCIATED WITH THE NUMBER ONE, (WHICH IDENTI-
FIES THE SUBROUTINE NAME IN THE CALL LOCAL (1, ...)
THE SECOND SUBROUTINE NAME WILL BE ASSOCIATED TO THE NUMBER TWO, ETC.
THE PROGRAM VERIFIES THE NUMBER OF SUBROUTINE NAMES ENTERED, THEN
EXAMINES THE JOB BINARY AREA AND THE USER DIRECTORY FOR DUPLICATE FILE
NAMES. IF NO ERROR IS DETECTED, HE PLACES RELOCATABLE SEGMENTS IN JOB
BINARY AREA AND WRITES THE MESSAGE LOCAL COMPLETE ON THE SYSTEM CONSOL
9. RUN THE RELOCATING LOADER BY THE DIRECTIVE
: PR, LOADER, 2
AND TYPE THE NAME OF THE RELOCATABLE FILE CONTAINING THE SUBROUTINE
"LOCAL". AT THE END OF THE LOADING, EACH SUBROUTINE CALLED BY THE
INSTRUCTION CALL LOCAL IS IN A USER SEGMENT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF ERRORS OCCUR DURING EXECUTION OF THE USER PROGRAM THE FOLLOWING
MESSAGE
LC XXX
LOCAL TERMINATED
IS TYPED ON THE SYSTEM CONSOLE, AND CONTROL RETURNS TO DOS-M.
LC 01 THE NUMBER IDENTIFYING THE SUBROUTINE IN CALL LOCAL IS GREATER
THAN THE NUMBER OF SUBROUTINES SPECIFIED DURING CREATION OF
SEGMENTS.
LC 02 THE NUMBER IDENTIFYING THE SUBROUTINE IS LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO
ZERO OR MISSING (INSTRUCTION CALL LOCAL WITHOUT ARGMENT LIST).
IF ERROR OCCURS DURING CREATION OF SEGMENTS, THE FOLLOWING
MESSAGE IS TYPED AND CONTROL RETURNS TO DOS-M.
NNNNN NNNN
PROGRAM NAMES
MMMMM MMMM
-----
-----
LC XX
LOCAL TERMINATED XX = 03 TO 13
LC 03 TWO COMMAS CONSECUTIVELY ARE DETECTED IN THE RECORD IN THE
OF SUBROUTINES NAME
LC 04 NO SUBROUTINE NAME FOUND IN THE RECORD
LC 05 THE JOB BINARY AREA IS EMPTY
LC 06 INVALID LENGTH FOR RELOCATABLE RECORD IN JOB BINARY AREA
LC 07 THE MAIN PROGRAM NAME IS FOUND TWICE IN JOB BINARY AREA
LC 08 THE MAIN PROGRAM ENTRY POINT IS FOUND TWICE IN JOB
BINARY AREA
LC 09 THE MAIN PROGRAM ENTRY POINT IS NOT FOUND IN JOB BINARY
AREA
LC 10 THE NAME = SEGM APPEARS IN JOB BINARY (OCCURS IF DEFLC IS
RUN TWICE A JOB
NNNNN
LC 11 THE SEGMENT NAME NNNNN IS ALREADY IN JOB BINARY AREA
NNNNN
LC 12 THE SEGMENT ENTRY POINT NNNNN IS ALREADY IN JOB BINARY AREA
MMMMM
LC 13 PROGRAM OR SEGMENT NAME DUPLICATION
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE SEGMENT NAME IS MADE BY ADDING TO THE FIRST 3 CHARACTERS OF THE
MAIN NAME, THE STRING.0 FOR THE FIRST SEGMENT, .1 FOR THE SECOND, AND
.9 FOR THE 10, TO AVOID DUPLICATE SEGMENT NAME IT IS NECESSARY TO NOT
USE LOCAL TECHNIQUE ON TWO OR SEVERAL PROGRAMS WHOSE NAME BEGINS BY
THE SAME FIRST THREE CHARACTERS.
DURING PROGRAM EXECUTION IF 2 CALL LOCAL CONSECUTIVE REFER TO THE SAME
SUBROUTINE, THE APPROPRIATE SEGMENT IS LOADED ONCE ON THE FIRST CALL.
HOWEVER, IT'S POSSIBLE TO CHANGE THE ARGUMENT NUMBER. IF IT'S IN THE
SCOPE OF SUBROUTINE.
EXAMPLE: IF THE FOLLOWING CALLS ARE POSSIBLE
CALL SUBR 1 (ARG 1, ARG 2, ARG 3, ARG 4...)
CALL SUBR 1 (ARG 1, ARG 2, ARG 3)
THE LOCAL CALLS
CALL LOCAL (1, ARG 1, ... ARG 4)
CALL LOCAL (1, ARG 1, ... ARG 3)
ASSUME PROPER ARGUMENTS TRANSFERRED.
X15801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BASIC LINE NUMBER RESEQUENCER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
BASIC SORT
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SIO
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE BASIC LINE RESEQUENCER PROGRAM PROVIDES A MEANS OF CHANGING THE LINE
NUMBERS OF A BASIC PROGRAM. ANY STATEMENT IN THE BASIC PROGRAM WHICH
REFERENCES A CHANGED LINE NUMBER IS ALTERED TO CORRESPOND. THE ORIGINAL
EXECUTION SEQUENCE OF THE BASIC PROGRAM IS RETAINED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
A. LOAD THE BASIC RESEQUENCE PROGRAM USING THE BASIC BINARY LOADER.
B. SET THE SWITCH REGISTER TO 000100.
C. PRESS LOAD ADDRESS.
D. PRESS PRESET
E. PRESS RUN
1. SWITCH 0 DOWN
TYPE THE NUMBER AT WHICH THE BASIC PROGRAM SHOULD START, A COMMA,
THE INCREMENT BETWEEN SUCCEEDING STATEMENTS, AND AN END OF RECORD
MARK (CR/LF).
2. SWITCH 0 UP
THIS OPTION ADDS A CONSTANT TO THE LINE NUMBERS OF THE BASIC PROG.
TYPE THIS NUMBER FOLLOWED BY AN END OF RECORD MARK (CR/LF).
IF THE COMPUTER TYPES "FORMAT ERROR", RECHECK THE OPTION SWITCH AND
TYPE THE INFORMATION AGAIN.
WHEN THIS PHASE IS COMPLETED, THE COMPUTER WILL TYPE "RUN" AND HALT
(T REGISTER CONTAINS 102000).
A. PLACE THE BASIC LANGUAGE SOURCE TAPE IN THE SYSTEM INPUT DEVICE.
B. PRESS "RUN".
WHEN COMPUTER HALTS (T REGISTER CONTAINS 102055), PASS 1 IS COMPLETED.
C. TO EXECUTE PASS 2, REPLACE THE SOURCE TAPE IN THE SYSTEM INPUT
DEVICE, TURN ON THE SYSTEM TAPE PUNCH AND PRESS "RUN".
WHEN THE COMPUTER HALTS (T REGISTER CONTAINS 102077) THE RESEQUENCED
PROGRAM WILL HAVE BEEN PUNCHED ALONG WITH A 10 INCH LEADER AND
TRAILER. TO RESEQUENCE ANOTHER PROGRAM PRESS RUN.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
HALTS AND ERROR CONDITIONS
T REGISTER MESSAGE EXPLANATION
102000 RUN READY FOR PASS 1. GO TO STEP F.
102011 --- UNDEFINED LABEL. PRESS RUN TO CONTINUE
PROCESSING, THE NUMBER PRINTED WILL BE
UNPREDICTABLE.
102012 --- OUT OF MEMORY. IRRECOVERABLE ERROR.
REVISE TAPE AND START FROM STEP B.
------ FORMAT ERROR DATA NOT IN CORRECT FORMAT, TYPE AGAIN.
102055 --- READY FOR PASS 2. GO TO STEP H.
102077 --- PROCESSING COMPLETE. TO PROCESS ANOTHER
TAPE, PRESS RUN.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X15901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ON-LINE EDITOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB(ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SELF-CON
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS EDITOR PROGRAM ALLOWS THE USER TO PREPARE A SYMBOLIC FILE BY
ENTERING IT DIRECTLY INTO AVAILABLE MEMORY FROM THE TTY. ALTERNATIVELY,
A FILE MAY BE PREPARED OFF-LINE ON PAPER TAPE AND LOADED INTO MEMORY
WITH A TAPE READER. EDITING OPERATIONS ARE CONVERSATIONAL, AND ARE
PERFORMED ON-LINE USING THE TTY. THE PROCEDURES ARE SIMILAR TO THOSE
USED IN CONSTRUCTING A (BASIC) PROGRAM. AVAILABLE EDITING OPERATIONS
INCLUDE; DELETING, REPLACING, AND INSERTING LINES OR SERIES OF LINES.
A LIMITED DEGREE OF CHARACTER EDITING IS POSSIBLE. THE FILE OR PORTIONS
OF IT MAY BE LISTED ON THE TTY (WITH OR WITHOUT LINE NUMBERS), OR
PUNCHED OUT ON EITHER THE TTY OR A HIGH-SPEED PUNCH. THE PROGRAM IS
CODED IN ABSOLUTE ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE, RESIDES ENTIRELY ON BASE PAGE, AND
USES ITS OWN I/O DRIVERS. ONE PAGE OF MEMORY IS RESERVED FOR ADDRESS
STORAGE. THE REMAINING AVAILABLE MEMORY IS USED TO STORE THE SYMBOLIC
FILE, TWO ASCII CHARACTERS PER WORD.
HARDWARE: 4K, EAU, TTY, TAPE READER AND PUNCH.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
#885 PUNCH EQU 11B
886 RDR EQU 10B
(TTY IS INPUT THROUGH THE SWITCH REGISTER)
THE EDITOR PROGRAM, AND TTY I/O DRIVERS MUST BE ASSEMBLED SEPARATELY.
THE ORDER OF LOADING IS NOT IMPORTANT. THE USER MUST CONFIGURE THE
PROGRAMS TO HIS SYSTEM BY APPROPRIATELY ALTERING THE "PUNCH", "RDR", AND
"TTY" SYMBOLS. ALSO THE VALUE OF "UPLIM" MUST BE SET SOMEWHAT BELOW
(2-8 LOCATIONS) THE UPPER LIMIT OF AVAILABLE CORE.
THE STARTING ADDRESS OF THE PROGRAM IS 100B. AFTER PRESSING THE RUN
BUTTON, A "?" WILL BE PRINTED ON THE TTY INDICATING THAT THE PROGRAM
IS WAITING FOR AN INSTRUCTION TO PERFORM AN OPERATION. THE AVAILABLE
OPERATIONS ARE LISTED IN THE TABLE BELOW. AFTER THE DESIRED OPERATION
HAS BEEN SELECTED, TYPE THE APPROPRIATE ONE-LETTER OPERATION CODE
(COLUMN ONE OF THE TABLE) FOLLOWED BY WHATEVER PARAMETERS ARE REQUIRED.
THE PARAMETERS N1 AND N2 ARE NON-NEGATIVE DECIMAL INTEGERS OF FROM ONE
TO FOUR DIGITS. A DELIMETER FOR A NUMERICAL INPUT MAY BE A SPACE,
COMMA, OR CARRIAGE RETURN. IF EITHER N1 OR N2 IS A LINE NUMBER, IT MUST
NOT BE GREATER THAN 1023. THE "ESC" KEY MAY BE USED TO CANCEL THE
OPERATION PROVIDED THE LAST PARAMETER HAS NOT BEEN TERMINATED.
IF THE "E", "R", OR "K" OPERATION IS SELECTED, AN ASCII RECORD
(REFERRED TO FROM NOW ON AS A "LINE") OR SERIES OF RECORDS IS TO BE
ENTERED ON THE TTY. A LINE CONSISTS OF A STRING OF ANY NUMBER OF ASCII
CHARACTERS TERMINATED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN. THE PROGRAM SUPPLIES THE
LINE FEED. A LINE THAT HAS NOT BEEN TERMINATED MAY BE DELETED WITH THE
"RUBOUT" KEY. INDIVIDUAL CHARACTERS MAY BE DELETED IN A NON-TERMINATED
LINE BY HOLDING DOWN THE "CTRL" KEY AND HITTING THE "E" KEY. CHARACTERS
ARE SUCCESSIVELY DELETED STARTING FROM THE LAST ONE ENTERED. A "<-" IS
PRINTED FOR EACH DELETION. THE USER MAY SELECT HIS OWN CHARACTER
DELETION CODE BY ALTERING THE VALUE OF "CDELT".
IF THE "I" OPERATION IS SELECTED, A SERIES OF LINES ON PUNCHED PAPER
TAPE IS TO BE READ IN FROM THE TAPE READER. A LINE ON PAPER TAPE MUST
BE TERMINATED BY BOTH A CARRIAGE RETURN AND A LINE FEED. ANY LINE
CONTAINING A "RUBOUT" WILL BE DELETED.
THE PRINT OPERATIONS ("P", "L", AND"M") ALLOW SELECTED SECTIONS OF THE
SYMBOLIC FILE TO BE PRINTED OUT ON THE TTY. PRINTING MAY BE TERMINATED
AT ANY TIME BY HITTING THE SPACE BAR.
THE ENTIRE FILE MAY BE SCRATCHED BY TYPING "D" FOLLOWED BY A DELIMITER
(SPACE, CARRIAGE RETURN, OR COMMA). THE PROGRAM WILL THEN PRINT
"??????" ALERTING THE USER TO THE FACT THAT HE HAS SELECTED THIS
OPERATION. TYPING "S" WILL THEN SCRATCH THE FILE. TYPING ANY OTHER
CHARACTER WILL CANCEL THE OPERATION.
THE "H" OPERATION IS USED TO HALT THE COMPUTER IN SUCH A WAY THAT THE
SYMBOLIC FILE WILL NOT BE ACCIDENTLY DESTROYED.
WHILE USING THE EDITOR THE FOLLOWING HALTS MAY OCCUR:
T-REGISTER REASON FOR HALT
102000 SELECTED "H" OPERATION
102011 EXCEEDED AVAILABLE MEMORY
102022 ASSIGNED LINE NUMBER IS
GREATER THAN 1023
TABLE OF OPERATIONS
B = SPACE, COMMA, OR CARRIAGE RETURN
OPERATION INPUT FORMAT FUNCTION
E E N1 B ENTER LINE N1 ON THE TTY. RUBOUT
BEFORE CARRIAGE RETURN DELETES THE
LINE.
K K N1 B N2 B INPUT SERIES OF LINES ON THE TTY.
LINE NUMBERS ASSIGNED STARTING WITH
N1 AND INCREMENT N2. TERMINATE
THE SERIES WITH THE "ESC" KEY,
HITTING RUBOUT BEFORE CARRIAGE
RETURN DELETES THE LINE.
R R N1 B REPLACE LINE N1 WITH LINE TO BE
ENTERED ON THE TTY, HITTING RUBOUT
BEFORE CARRIAGE RETURN DELETES THE
LINE.
D D N1 B N2 B DELETE LINES N1 THROUGH N2
D D N1 B B DELETES LINE N1
D D B PREPARATION TO SCRATCH ENTIRE FILE
S S SCRATCH THE ENTIRE FILE. MUST
FOLLOW THE ABOVE OPERATION.
P P N1 B N2 B PRINT LINES N1 THROUGH N2 ON THE
TTY WITH LINE NUMBERS.
P P N1 B B PRINT LINE N1 WITH LINE NUMBERS
P P B PRINT ENTIRE FILE WITH LINE NUMBERS
M SAME AS "P" SAME AS "P" EXCEPT THAT THE LINE
NUMBERS ARE DELETED.
L SAME AS "P" SAME AS "M" EXCEPT THAT LEADING
AND TRAILING FEED FRAMES ARE
PROVIDED.
T SAME AS "P" PUNCH OUT THE ENTIRE FILE OR
PORTIONS OF IT ON THE HIGH-SPEED
PUNCH. LINE NUMBERS ARE OMITTED
AND NO FEED FRAMES ARE PROVIDED.
F F PRODUCE FEED FRAMES ON THE HIGH
SPEED PUNCH.
I I N1 B N2 B FILE ON PAPER TAPE TO BE READ IN
FROM THE TAPE READER. LINE NUMBERS
ASSIGNED STARTING WITH N1.
SUCCEEDING LINES EQUALLY SPACED
WITH INCREMENT N2. LINES CON-
TAINING RUBOUTS ARE DELETED.
O O N1 B N2 B STARTING WITH LINE N1 INCREASE
SPACING BETWEEN EACH LINE
ACCORDING TO THE FORMULA: NEW LINE
NO. = OLD LINE NO. + (OLD LINE NO.
-N1)*N2
G G N1 B N2 B STARTING WITH LINE N1 INCREASE EACH
LINE NUMBER BY N2
C C ASSIGN LINE NO 0 TO THE FIRST LINE.
SUCCEEDING LINES ARE EQUALLY
SPACED WITH INCREMENT 1.
H H HALT THE COMPUTER. TO RESUME
OPERATION, PUNCH THE RUN BUTTON.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X16001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M DISC EDITOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM IS A DOS-M BASED CONVERSATIONAL DISC EDITOR WHICH HAS
COMPLETE FREEDOM TO EXAMINE OR ALTER ANY PORTION OF A DOS-M DISC ON A
TRACK-SECTOR BASIS. LIST OR CHANGE OPERATIONS CAN BE DONE IN ASCII,
INTEGER, OCTAL, OR FLOATING-POINT (EVEN OR ODD WORD) FORMAT.
A MINIMAL DOS-M, WITH AN HP2116 OR HP2100 CPU, CRT OR TELETYPE, AND A
7900 DISC CONSTITUTE THE REQUIRED EQUIPMENT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS UTILITY PROVIDES EDITING FREEDOM TO EXAMINE OR ALTER ANY PORTION
OF A DOS-M DISC. OPERATIONS ARE PERFORMED ON A TRACK-SECTOR BASIS.
LIST OR CHANGE OPERATIONS CAN BE DONE IN ASCII, INTEGER, OCTAL, OR
FLOATING POINT (EVEN OR ODD WORD) FORMAT. TAPE OUTPUT AND INPUT
COMMANDS ALLOW SELECTIVE DATA DUMPING AND INPUTTING FOR BULK EDIT
TRANSFERS. LIST OUTPUT CAN BE CHANGED TO ANY LOGICAL UNIT. EDIT
OPERATIONS CAN BE PERFORMED ON THE OPPOSITE PLATTER WITH EDIT TERMINA-
TION RETURNING CONTROL TO THE ORIGINAL PLATTER.
A "?" COMMAND WILL DISPLAY THE AVAILABLE EDIT COMMANDS. THE 'LIMITS?'
REQUEST HAS A STANDARD FORMAT. IF AN IMPROPER INPUT IS GIVEN THE
REQUEST WILL BE REPEATED. IF A SINGLE LIMIT IS GIVEN OR THE FIRST
IS GREATER THAN THE LAST THE FIRST IS TAKEN FOR BOTH THE FIRST AND THE
LAST. IF NO INPUT IS GIVEN (I.E., A BLANK, 'CR-LF') THEN THE LIMIT WILL
BE TAKEN AS PROGRAM DEFINED (I.E., MAXIMUM AVAILABLE). AN ENTRY PASS-
WORD (SEE SOURCE LISTING) IS REQUIRED FOR OPERATING SYSTEM SAFETY
PURPOSES. THIS PROG IN GENERAL FUNCTIONS INTERACTIVELY WITH THE USER.
THE SOURCE OF THE FORTRAN PROGRAM LISTS ALL AVAILABLE EDITOR COMMANDS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
INVALID OPERATOR INPUTS WILL USUALLY CAUSE THE PROGRAM TO REPEAT THE
INPUT REQUEST.
"MOVING-HEAD DISC OPERATING SYSTEM" HP #02116-91779 OF MACH 1971.
USE PROGRAM WITH CAUTION SINCE THE OPERATING SYSTEM CAN BE DESTROYED.
SUGGEST FOR ANY OPERATION OF AN EXPERIMENTAL NATURE THAT THE DISC
FIRST BE DUPLICATED.
X16101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-3 B INTERACTIVE EDITOR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 5
**KEYWORDS:
EDITOR
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-3B
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
EDITR IS A DOS VERSION OF THE RTE INTERACTIVE EDITOR. IT ALLOWS A USER
TO EDIT TYPE-S (SOURCE) FILES CONVERSATIONALLY THROUGH A TELEPRINTER
CONSOLE. BOTH LINE AND CHARACTER EDITS ARE SUPPORTED. THE USER ENTERS
A SERIES OF CONTROL COMMANDS TO EDIT THE ORIGINAL FILE. LINES CAN BE
INSERTED OR DELETED, AND TEXT EXCHANGES CAN BE MADE. UNLIKE THE
STANDARD DOS EDITOR (:ED), EDITR WILL ALLOW THE FILE TO BE RESCANNED
FOR FURTHER EDITING. A DOS-IIIB OPERATING SYSTEM MUST BE USED BECAUSE
EDITR USES THE FILE CREATE, FILE PURGE, AND FILE RENAME EXEC CALLS
(EXEC 32, 33, 34). DOS-IIIA AND DOS-M WILL NOT WORK UNLESS THIS PROG.
IS MODIFIED TO HANDLE ITS OWN DIRECTORY CHANGES. EDITR USES ALL
AVAILABLE CORE (EXCLUSIVE OF ITSELF) FOR BUFFERING THE DISC. THEREFORE,
PROGRAM EFFICIENCY INCREASES IF MORE THAN THE MINIMUM MEMORY REQUIREMENT
IS AVAILABLE. FOR COMPLETE OPERATING PROCEDURES, THE USER IS REFERRED
TO EITHER OF THE FOLLOWING TEXTS:
RTE-II PROGRAMMING AND OPERATING MANUAL (92001-93001), SEC. 4, PART 2.
RTE INTERACTIVE EDITOR (92060-90014).
MINIMAL DOS-III, I.E. 16K COMPUTER, MOVING HEAD DISC AND A TELEPRINTER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THE SOURCE IS ENCLOSED ON THREE TAPES. ASSEMBLE THESE TAPES BY PLACING
THE FIRST IN THE TAPE READER AND RUNNING THE ASSEMBLER
:PR,ASMB,99
WHEN THE ASSEMBLER SUSPENDS, PLACE THE 2ND TAPE IN THE READER AND TYPE
--
:UP,5
:GO,ASMB
REPEAT THE ABOVE PROCEDURE FOR THE LAST TAPE. LOAD THE PROG. WITH THE
DOS LOADR
:PR,LOADR
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN THE EDITOR WITH THE FOLLOWING DIRECTIVE
:PR,EDITR (,TTYLU(,LINE LENGTH))
WHERE: TTYLU IS THE L.U. OF THE TELEPRINTER USED FOR COMMAND
INPUT. DEFAULT IS LOGICAL UNIT 1.
LINE LENGTH IS THE MAXIMUM OUTPUT RECORD LENGTH IN CHARACTERS.
DEFAULT IS 150 CHARACTERS.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DOS=IIIB INTERACTIVE EDITOR
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
THE DOS-IIIB INTERACTIVE EDITOR ENABLES THE USER
TO SELECTIVELY ALTER THE CONTENTS OF DOS TYPE-S (SOURCE) FILES. SOURCE
FILES TO BE EDITED MAY BE RESIDENT IN THE USER AREA OF A DISC, OR
THEY MAY BE ENTERED THROUGH THE KB. (ALLOWING THE USER TO INTERACTIVELY
CREATE NEW SOURCE FILES). THE USER CAN MONITOR THE PROGRESSION OF THE
EDITING BY LISTING THE CURRENT SOURCE FILE LINE NUMBER OF THE CURRENT
SOURCE FILE LINE ON THE CONSOLE.
THE USER IS ABLE TO SEARCH FOR OCCURRENCES OF CHAR. STRINGS AND SELEC-
TIVELY ALTER THEM. FULL CHARACTER EDITING IS SUPPORTED, AND CHARS. MAY
BE REPLACED, INSERTED, OR DELETED. TEXT EXCHANGES CAN BE MADE THROUGH-
OUT ALL OR PART OF THE SOURCE FILE.
THE USER IS STRONGLY RECOMMENDED TO OBTAIN A COPY OF EITHER OF THE TWO
MANUALS LISTED IN SECTION 5.0. THE SECOND OF THE TWO MANUALS (RTE
INTERACTIVE MANUAL) IS PERHAPS MORE INSTRUCTIVE.
ONLY THE DEVIANCIES FROM THE RTE-II EDITOR WILL BE COVERED BELOW.
DIFFERENCES FROM THE RTE-II EDITR:
1.THERE IS NO LS AREA. THEREFORE, A SPACE IN RESPONSE TO THE QUESTION
SOURCE FILE? WILL ASSUME INPUT IS FROM THE KEYBOARD, AND EOF WILL BE
PRINTED IMMEDIATELY. EDITR WILL NOT ALLOW A FILE TO BE REPLACED IF
IT WAS CREATED FROM THE KEYBOARD.
2.THE L OPTION (PLACE INPUT IN LS AREA) IN THE END COMMAND IS DISABLED.
3.SECURITY CODES AND CARTRIDGE REFERENCE NUMBERS ARE NOT USED.
4.THERE ARE NO FMGR ERROR MESSAGES. INSTEAD, IF A FILENAME ISNT FOUND,
ONE OF THREE ACTIONS WILL BE TAKEN: IF THE FILENAME IS IN RESPONSE TO
SOURCE FILE?, THE QUESTION WILL REPEAT. IF THE FILENAME IS PART OF
A MERGE COMMAND, THE MESSAGE SOURCE UNDEFINED WILL BE PRINTED, AND THE
NEXT LINE WILL BECOME THE PENDING LINE. IF THE FILENAME IS PART OF AN
EC OR ER COMMAND, THE STANDARD EDITR ERROR MESSAGE (??) IS PRINTED.
5.IF AN ILLEGAL FILENAME IS ENCOUNTERED (I.E. A FILENAME BEGINNING WITH
A DIGIT), EDITR RESPONDS WITH ILLEGAL FILENAME. IN THE CASE OF THE M
COMMAND, THE PENDING LINE IS UNCHANGED (NO TRANSFER TAKES PLACE).
6.THERE ARE NO ZERO-LENGTH LINES. IF ONE IS CREATED, IT WILL BE REMOVED
ON THE NEXT PASS OF THE EDITOR. THEREFORE, IF CNTL @ IS ENTERED AS A
FIND FIELD, THE END OF THE FILE WILL NOT BE FOUND, AND EOF WILL PRINT.
7.THE ALTERNATE ESCAPE KEY HAS BEEN CHANGED TO A BACKSLASH (\).
8.THE DELETE OPTION FOR THE CHARACTER EDIT OPTIONS (P, C AND O) HAS
BEEN CHANGED TO A CNTL D (CNTL C FORCES AND END-OF-LINE WHEN USING
DVR00).
9.IF THE FILENAME IN AN ECNAME OR ERNAME ALREADY EXISTS, THE MESSAGE
DUPLICATE FILENAME IS ISSUED, AND THE USER MUST REISSUE THE END CMND.
10.EDITR USES A TEMPORARY FILE CALLED /\/\/ WHEN REPLACING A FILE (I.E.
AFTER AN ER OR ERNAME COMMAND). THIS FILENAME MUST NOT EXIST IN THE
USER AREA WHEN EDITR IS RUN. IF IT DOES, THE MESSAGE MUST :PU,/\/\/
IS PRINTED. THE ONLY OPTION TO THE USER IS TO CREATE A NEW FILE WITH
THE ECNAME COMMAND AND THEN PURGE /\/\/ AS SOON AS POSSIBLE.
11. WHEN THE ALTERNATE ESCAPE CODE IS ENCOUNTERED IN A LINE OF TEXT TO
BE INSERTED, IT IS NO LONGER REPLACED BY THE REGULAR ESCAPE CODE.
12. THE H COMMAND IS ILLEGAL AT THE END-OF-FILE WHERE IT HAS NO MEANING.
13. IF DISC SPACE IS NOT AVAILABLE, THE MSG. DISC OVERFLOW IS
PRINTED AND EDITR WILL ABORT. EDITR WILL USE ALL DISC SPACE BETWEEN
THE END OF THE USER AREA (AFTER THE LAST FILE) AND THE START OF THE
JBIN AREA.
EDITR WILL NOT WRITE OVER RELOCATABLE IN THE JBIN AREA.
14. LU'S FOR LIST (THE L COMMAND) ARE RESTRICTED TO EITHER 1 OR 6.
15. IF SYSTEM SEARCH IS IN EFFECT WHEN EDITR IS RUN, THE MESSAGE ISSUE
:SS,99 WILL BE PRINTED, AND EDITR WILL ABORT.
16. TRAILING BLANKS ARE NOT DELETED FROM THE SOURCE FILE WHEN IT IS READ
IN THE ONLY WAY TO REMOVE TRAILING BLANKS IS WITH THE K COMMAND.
NOTE: IF EDITR IS :RUNNED INSTEAD OF :PROGED, THE POSITION OF THE
JBIN AREA WILL BE INCORRECTLY INTERPRETED AND THE EDITOR WILL
ABORT AS UNDER NOTE 13 ABOVE. ONLY RUN EDITR WITH A :PR CMND.
THE FULL CAPABILITIES OF EDITR ARE APPRECIATED BY EXPERIMENTATION.
THE TEST CASE ONLY SAMPLES A SMALL PORTION OF THE EDITING CMNDS.
HOWEVER, IT SHOULD TEST TO SEE THAT THE BASIC ROUTINES OF THE EDITOR
ARE FUNCTIONAL.
@
:PR,EDITR DIRECTIVE TO START EDITING
SOURCE FILE? REQUEST FOR SOURCE FILENAME
/FRED1 FILENAME GIVEN
SOURCE FILE? FILE WAS EITHER NOT FOUND OR NOT A SOURCE FILE
/FRED TRY ANOTHER FILE
ASMB,R,L FILE FOUND AND FIRST LINE PRINTED
/L5 LIST 5 LINES
ASMB,R,L
NAM WALDO,3 EDITR COMPLIES
ENT ENTRY
SPC 2
EXT .DEL,..FCM,EXEC
SPC 3 EDITOR DISPLAYS PENDING LINE
/1 GO BACK TO LINE 1
ASMB,R,L EDITOR COMPLIES
/EC1STFL CREATE THE FILE 1STFL
ILLEGAL FILENAME CAN'T HAVE A NUMBER AS FIRST CHAR.
/ECFERD GIVE IT A GOOD NAME
END OF EDIT WE'RE ALL DONE
@
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SYSTEM SEARCH MUST BE DISABLED BEFORE RUNNING EDITR (:SS,99). IF
THIS IS NOT DONE, EDITR WILL PRINT "MUST ISSUE :SS,99" AND ABORT.
X16201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MODIFIED DOS-M WITH FORTRAN READ/WRITE OF DISC FILES
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FORTRAN I/O FILES
DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PACKAGE PROVIDES SEVERAL MODIFICATIONS TO THE DOS-M SYSTEM,
REVISION F. THE MAIN FEATURE OF THE REVISED SYSTEM IS THE ABILITY TO
READ AND WRITE DISC FILES USING FORTRAN I/O STATEMENTS. THE FILES
CREATED OR USED IN THIS WAY ARE (SS) TYPE FILES AND CAN BE LISTED AND
EDITED USING THE DOS-M DIRECTIVES (:LI,S AND :ED). TO ACHIEVE THESE
CAPABILITIES, THE USER FILES ARE TREATED AS A SEPARATE PERIPHERAL, WITH
THEIR OWN DRIVER, DVR37, AND THEIR OWN EQT ENTRY. IN OPERATION THE
FILES ARE EQUATED TO LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS AND CAN THEN BE TREATED IN AN
ANALOGOUS WAY TO MAGNETIC TAPE, WITH REWIND, END FILE, AND BACKSPACE
AVAILABLE. OTHER MODIFICATIONS TO THE DOS-M SYSTEM PROVIDE A CONSIDER-
ABLE INCREASE IN CONVENIENCE TO THE AVERAGE USER. THEY INCLUDE THE
CAPABILITY TO REPLACE RUN TIME ERROR MESSAGES FROM THE LIBRARY WITH
EXPLICIT DESCRIPTIONS OF THE FAULT AND ASSIGN LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER 6 TO
THE SYSTEM TELETYPE AT THE START OF THE JOB.
THE ONLY REQUIRED EQUIPMENT IS THE NORMAL 16K DOS-M WITH EAU.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE (REL)
FILE# 3: SOURCE (REL)
FILE# 4: SOURCE (REL)
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SEVERAL MODIFICATIONS HAVE BEEN MADE TO THE DOS-M SYSTEM, REV. F, WITH
ASSOCIATED DRIVERS, ETC. AS AT THE TIME OF RELEASE OF REV. F.
THE MAIN FEATURE OF THE SYSTEM IS THE ABILITY TO READ/WRITE FROM/TO DISC
FILES WITH NORMAL FORTRAN I/O STATEMENTS. THE FILES CREATED OR USED IN
THIS WAY ARE SS TYPE FILES, AND CAN BE INSPECTED OR EDITED IN THE NORMAL
WAY WITH :LI,S OR :ED DIRECTIVES. THIS HAS BEEN ACHIEVED BY THE
ADDITION OF A "DRIVER" FOR HANDLING THIS I/O. THESE USER FILES ARE THUS
TREATED AS SEPARATE PERIPHERALS, WITH THEIR OWN DRIVER AND EQT ENTRY.
THIS IS MADE POSSIBLE BY THE CREATION OF FILE LINKAGE TABLES (FLT'S)
AT THE TOP OF BASE PAGE, IMMEDIATELY BELOW DISCM. THESE OCCUPY FOUR
WORDS PER FILE IN CURRENT USE AND, IN A 16K SYSTEM, DO NOT CAUSE ANY
RESTRICTIONS EVEN WITH LONG PROGRAMS. ONLY ONE 17 WORD EQT ENTRY IS
NEEDED IRRESPECTIVE OF HOW MANY FILES ARE IN USE.
THE OTHER MODIFICATIONS ARE OF A RELATIVELY MINOR NATURE, BUT RESULT
IN A CONSIDERABLE INCREASE IN CONVENIENCE TO THE AVERAGE USER. THE RUN
TIME ERROR MESSAGES FROM THE LIBRARY HAVE BEEN REPLACED BY EXPLICIT
DESCRIPTIONS OF THE FAULT, WITH THE OPTION OF REVERTING TO THE ORIGINAL
FORMAT.
SYSTEM GENERATION IS CARRIED OUT EXACTLY AS IN THE ORIGINAL HP
INSTRUCTIONS, EXCEPT FOR THE LOADING OF ADDITIONAL TAPES. DISCM, JOBPR
AND LOADR REPLACE THE SUPPORTED VERSIONS. $EX12 AND $EX25 MUST BE
LOADED AFTER THE SUPPORTED EXEC MODULES. "ERROR" MESSAGES WILL BE
GENERATED WHEN $EX12 IS LOADED; THESE ARE SHOWN BELOW AND SHOULD BE
IGNORED. SIMILARLY, ERR0 MUST BE LOADED AFTER THE RELOCATABLE
LIBRARIES; AGAIN, IGNORE ERROR MESSAGES. DVR37 AND $ERRM ARE ADDITIONAL
TAPES AND MAY BE LOADED AT ANY CONVENIENT TIME. DVR37 MAY BE CORE OR
DISC RESIDENT AND DOES NOT REQUIRE DMA (IT USES DVR31 FOR THE ACTUAL
DISC I/O). IT SHOULD BE ASSIGNED AN UNUSED I/O SLOT IN THE EQUIPMENT
TABLE, AND OMITTED FROM THE INTERRUPT TABLE. ALSO LOGICAL UNIT NUMBERS
(LUN'S) MUST NOT BE ASSIGNED THE "EQUIPMENT" NUMBER CORRESPONDING TO
DVR37 DURING SYSTEM GENERATION.
IN OPERATION, THE REQUIRED FILE IS EQUATED TO A LOGICAL UNIT, AND CAN
THEN BE TREATED IN AN ANALOGOUS WAY TO MAGNETIC TAPE, WITH REWIND, END
FILE AND BACKSPACE AVAILABLE. ASCII RECORDS OF LENGTH 1 TO 160 CHARAC-
TERS CAN BE MANIPULATED AS DESIRED. READ/WRITE "WITHOUT WAIT" IS
TREATED AS "WITH WAIT". REQUESTS FOR BINARY READ/WRITE MAY BE POSSIBLE
-- THIS HAS NOT BEEN TRIED. DETAILS OF USE OF THE SYSTEM ARE COVERED
UNDER "NEW DIRECTIVES" BELOW.
AS EACH FILE LINKAGE TABLE (FLT) IS SET UP BY JOBPR, THE LAST WORD
ADDRESS OF USER BASE PAGE AREA (UBLWA) IS ADJUSTED ACCORDINGLY, SO THAT
ANY NUMBER OF LUN'S CAN BE EQUATED TO SS FILES. NOTE THAT LUN'S 1 TO
CANNOT BE USED IN THIS WAY THROUGH THE I/O STATUS EXEC CALL, STATUS IS
AVAILABLE FOR ANY LUN AFTER AN OPERATION OF THAT LUN AND BEFORE ANOTHER
OPERATION ON ANOTHER USER FILE LUN -- THAT IS, THE STATUS GIVEN IS THAT
OF THE LAST FLT OPERATION. STATUS BITS ARE:
BIT 7: END OF FILE HAS BEEN READ.
BIT 6: START OF FILE (LOAD POINT ON MAGNETIC TAPE).
BIT 5: 1. FOLLOWING READ -- END OF DOCUMENT, I.E., NO RECORDS
AFTER THIS END OF FILE MARK.
2. FOLLOWING WRITE -- LAST SECTOR HAS BEEN STARTED,
HENCE FURTHER WRITING DISALLOWED.
BIT 3: LAST OPERATION WAS WRITE.
BIT 2: READ ONLY FILE, WRITE NOT ALLOWED.
THROUGH THE I/O CONTROL EXEC CALL, CERTAIN CONTROL REQUESTS, WHICH
LEAVE STATUS APPROPRIATE TO THE LUN ACCESSED CAN BE MADE. THE FUNCTION
CODES AVAILABLE ARE:
CODE 0: NO ACTION OTHER THAN TO SET STATUS.
CODE 1: 1. FOLLOWING WRITE -- WRITE END OF FILE, I.E., RECORD OF
ZERO LENGTH.
2. FOLLOWING READ -- CLEAR END OF FILE BIT UNLESS BIT 5
IS ALSO SET.
CODE 2: BACKSPACE ONE RECORD (EOF IS REGARDED AS A RECORD).
CODE 4: REWIND TO "LOAD POINT".
_____________________
| |
| ERR 08 ERR0 |
| $EX12 ERR 05 |
| ERR 85 ERR0 | <-------ERROR MESSAGES
| $EX12 | (REFERRED TO ON PREVIOUS PAGE)
| ERR 08 |
|_____________________|
IT CAN BE SEEN FROM THESE THAT A FILE MAY BE BROKEN INTO SUBFILES BY EOF
MARKS EXACTLY AS ON MAGNETIC TAPE. IF AN END OF FILE IS READ, APPRO-
PRIATE STATUS IS SET AND LENGTH ZERO IS RETURNED. FURTHER READING IS
INHIBITED UNTIL THE EOF STATUS BIT IS CLEARED (IF THIS IS POSSIBLE,
I.E., NOT AT END OF DOCUMENT).
AS THE FILE NAME IS NOT SAVED IN THE FLT ENTRY, ANY RELOCATION OF USED
FILES WOULD WRECK THE FLT ENTRIES. FOR THIS REASON, ANY :PU, :DD OR
OTHER OPERATION WHICH WOULD CAUSE THIS TROUBLE WILL RESULT IN THE
AFFECTED LUN'S BEING RELEASED, WITH ZERO PLACED IN THE LUN TABLE. IT IS
HOPED THAT THIS PROCEDURE IS "IDIOT PROOF" (BUT NOT GUARANTEED). ALSO,
ALL FILES MUST BE ON THE SAME SUBCHANNEL, AND THIS SUBCHANNEL MUST BE
THE CURRENT SUBCHANNEL WHEN ANY OPERATIONS ARE REQUESTED. EIGHT MONTHS
OPERATION BY SEVERAL USERS HAS NOT PRODUCED ANY LOST FILES OR OTHER
DIFFICULTIES.
NEW DIRECTIVES
1. :LU,N,FNAME
THIS EQUATES LUN N TO AN EXISTING FILE FNAME, WHICH MUST BE TYPE SS. IT
IS NOT POSSIBLE TO WRITE ON THIS FILE. AFTER THE LAST RECORD IS READ,
A FURTHER READ WILL RETURN ZERO LENGTH (I.E., EOF) AND STATUS BITS 5
AND 7 SET. ANOTHER READ GIVES RQ ERROR. THE FILE MAY HAVE BEEN WRITTEN
BY A PREVIOUS JOB OR STORED (:ST,S) IN THE NORMAL WAY, OR RESULT FROM AN
EDIT RUN.
2. :LU,N,FNAME,M
THIS EQUATES LUN N TO A NEW FILE FNAME, OF LENGTH M SECTORS (PROVIDED
ONE DOES NOT EXIST). THIS FILE IS CREATED, TYPE SS, AND A ZERO LENGTH
RECORD IS WRITTEN (I.E., EOF) AND BACKSPACED OVER. THE FILE HAS ITS P
BIT SET, SO UNLESS AN ST,P DIRECTIVE IS GIVEN IT IS NOT SAVED AT END OF
JOB. THE FILE IN THIS CASE IS WRITE ENABLE SO THAT RECORDS CAN BE
WRITTEN AND SUBSEQUENTLY READ AFTER REWIND OR BACKSPACE. AS EACH RECORD
IS WRITTEN, A ZERO LENGTH RECORD (EOF) IS WRITTEN AFTER IT AND BACK-
SPACED OVER READY FOR THE NEXT WRITE. READ FOLLOWING WRITE (WITHOUT
REWIND OR BACKSPACE) IS ILLEGAL.
3. :LU,N,M
WHERE M IS THE "EQUIPMENT" TYPE FOR THE SS FILE DRIVE DVR37. IN THIS
CASE, LUN N IS EQUATED TO A SCRATCH FILE IN THE WORK AREA, AND IS WRITE
ENABLED.
4. :JO,NAME,C
WHERE C IS ANY CHARACTER. THIS RESULTS IN LUN6 BEING ASSIGNED TO THE
SYSTEM TTY AS THE JOB IS COMMENCED, ALLOWING CONVENIENT USE OF THE
SYSTEM IF THE LINE PRINTER IS DOWN OR NOT WANTED. ALTERNATIVELY, ANY
BIT SET IN THE S REGISTER BEFORE :JO HAS THE SAME EFFECT.
5. :LI,N,N,C,D,ETC.
THIS CAUSES A LISTING ON LUN N OF PART OF THE USER DIRECTORY, COMPRISING
THOSE FILES WHOSE NAMES START WITH C, D, ETC. ONE OR MORE LETTERS CAN
BE USED. THUS VARIOUS USERS OF THE SYSTEM MAY BE ALLOCATED AN INITIAL
LETTER FOR THEIR FILE NAMES.
6. :SD
THIS SETS SHORT FORMAT FOR RUN TIME DIAGNOSTICS ON LUN 6, I.E., THE
SAME FORMAT AS THE SUPPORTED VERSION. DIAGNOSTICS APPEAR ON LUN 1
AS WELL.
7. :LD
THIS SETS LONG FORMAT FOR RUN TIME DIAGNOSTICS ON LUN 6, THE DEFAULT
FORM. THESE DIAGNOSTICS CONSIST OF ONE OR MORE INFORMATIVE LINES. THE
SHORT FORMAT APPEARS ALSO ON LUN 1. THE LONG FORMAT IS SET AT START OF
JOB.
OTHER MODIFICATIONS
1. IF THE FIRST TWO CHARACTERS OF THE DATE ARE ENTERED AS NUMERALS,
(I.E., DAY OF MONTH) THEY ARE UPDATED AT THE START OF THE FIRST JOB
AFTER MIDNIGHT (I.E., ENTER DATE AS :DA,07-MAY-74,H,M).
2. AT JOB HEADING, TIME IS PRINTED OUT IN THE NORMAL FORMAT.
3. AT START OF JOB, ALL FLT'S ARE CLEARED, AND DVR37 AND ANY OTHER
DRIVERS AS NEEDED ARE SET TO A STANDARD CONDITION (E.G., AUTO-EJECT
MODE FOR LINE PRINTER, STANDARD CODE FOR A TRANSLATING TAPE READER
DRIVER).
4. THE :DU DIRECTIVE HAS BEEN MODIFIED SO THAT REQUESTS FOR ASCII PAPER
TAPE OUTPUT ARE EXECUTED AS ASCII MODE INSTEAD OF BINARY.
5. A :RU DIRECTIVE MOVES LINE PRINTER TO HEAD OF A NEW PAGE.
6. ALL DIRECTIVES ARE LISTED ON LUN 7 AS WELL AS THE SYSTEM TTY. :EJ
IS LISTED ON A NEW PAGE, ENABLING A JOB LISTING TO BE REMOVED FROM
THE PRINTER (WITHOUT THE EJ MESSAGE) AS SOON AS COMPLETED.
7. LOADR DOES NOT NOW CALL FOR A NEW PAGE ON LUN 6.
8. THE FUNCTION OF THE LOADR MEMORY MAP PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN REVERSED.
(I.E., :PR,LOADR DOES NOT PRODUCE A MAP.)
9. THE *IGNORED MESSAGE LISTS APPROPRIATE DIRECTIVES WHICH MAY BE
ENTERED.
10. THE REQUEST FOR THE :DATE DIRECTIVE HAS BEEN MADE MORE EXPLICIT.
11. :ST,S :LI,S AND :ED ALLOW MANIPULATION OF RECORDS UP TO 160
CHARACTERS IN LENGTH.
12. :LI,S LISTS END OF FILE RECORDS IN SS FILES.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
THE TEXT OF THE EXTENDED RUN TIME ERROR MESSAGES IS KEPT ON THE DISC IN
A DUMMY USER PROGRAM $ERRM. THE MESSAGES HAVE BEEN WRITTEN ON THE BASIS
OF A 132 COLUMN LINE PRINTER, AND MAY BE ALTERED IF AND AS NECESSARY BY
APPROPRIATE CHANGES TO $ERRM. THE FORMAT OF EACH MESSAGE IS:
OCT N*400B
ASC N,TEXT FOR EACH LINE
NOP
BSS -- SUFFICIENT TO FILL A SECTOR (I.E., 128 WORDS TOTAL FOR
MESSAGE).
$ERRM MAY BE OMITTED IF THE LONG FORMAT DIAGNOSTICS ARE NOT WANTED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THIS SYSTEM IS A MODIFICATION OF DOS-M REV F AND MAY NEED MODIFICATION
TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH FURTHER DOS-M REVISIONS. IT IS NOT COMPATIBLE
WITH REV E OR EARLIER VERSIONS.
THE NUMBER OF LUNS WHICH CAN BE EQUATED TO DISC FILES IS LIMITED ONLY
BY THE AVAILABILITY OF BASE PAGE LOCATIONS, FOUR WORDS OF WHICH ARE
REQUIRED FOR EACH LUN FOR THE FLT. NOTE THAT IF LUNS ARE REDEFINED
DURING A JOB, THE SPACE FOR THE UNUSED FLT IS NOT RELEASED UNTIL END
OF JOB.
X16301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-III FILE SAVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES SAVE/RESTORE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM IS CAPABLE OF SAVING PURGED FILES WHOSE BOUNDARIES ARE NOT
THE SAME IN THE USER DIRECTORY AS THEY ARE ACTUALLY ON THE DISC.
THIS IS A FLEXIBLE FILE SAVING PROGRAM WHICH RESIDES ON DISC WITHIN THE
HP DOS-III SYSTEM. THE PROGRAM WHEN CALLED INTO CORE IS ABLE TO (SAVE)
PURGED FILES OR FILES WHOSE BOUNDARIES ARE NOT THE SAME IN THE USER
DIRECTORY AS THEY ARE ACTUALLY ON THE DISC. FOR ADDED PROTECTION OF
THE USER FILES, A SECURITY CODE IS INCORPORATED INTO THE PROGRAM ALONG
WITH A NO ECHO INPUT FEATURE AFTER THE PROGRAM HAS BEEN CALLED INTO
CORE.
HARDWARE REQUIRED: DISC, TELETYPE AND A MINIMUM DOS-III SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TO CALL THE PROGRAM
:PROG,SAVER,P1,P2,P3,P4
THIS CALLS DOWN FROM THE DISC, THE DISC FILE AND RUNS THE PROGRAM FOR
THE USER (SEE DOS-III MANUAL).
PARAMETERS
P1 = CURRENT SECURITY CODE (INITIALLY 32767). THE SECURITY CODE IS
CHANGED EACH TIME THE PROGRAM IS EXECUTED SUCCESSFULLY.
P2 = CURRENT FILE STATUS
WHERE: 1 = THE DISC BOUNDARIES OF THE FILE IN USER DIRECTORY
DO NOT CORRESPOND WITH THE PHYSICAL BOUNDARIES OF
THE FILE ON THE DISC
2 = A PURGED FILE (AS LONG AS THE DISC HAS NOT BEEN
REPACKED)
P3 = CORRECT TRACK NUMBER OF FILE
P4 = CORRECT SECTOR NUMBER OF FILE
PROGRAM EXECUTION
UPON ENTERING THE PROGRAM, IF THE SECURITY CODE ENTERED IN THE :PROG
DIRECTIVE DOES NOT CORRESPOND WITH THE SECURITY CODE RECOGNIZED BY
PROGRAM CONTROL, PROGRAM CONTROL RESPONDS WITH:
ILLEGAL SECURITY CODE! (AND THE PROGRAM IS ABORTED!)
@
BUT IF THE SECURITY CODE ENTERED IS THE SAME AS THE ONE RECOGNIZED BY
PROGRAM CONTROL, PROGRAM CONTROL RESPONDS WITH:
ENTER FILENAME
AT THIS TIME, THE NAME OF THE FILE THAT IS TO BE SAVED IS ENTERED
THROUGH THE BATCH INPUT DEVICE (OR SYSTEM TELETYPE).
P2 = 1
THIS ROUTINE IS DESIGNED TO ENTER THE USER DIRECTORY, FIND THE ENTRY
CORRESPONDING WITH THE NAME OF THE FILE THAT WAS ENTERED BY THE USER
AND CHANGE THE TRACK/SECTOR ADDRESS OF THE FILE ON THE USER DISC WITH
THE PROVIDED TRACK AND SECTOR ADDRESS.
IF THE NAME OF THE FILE IS NOT FOUND IN THE USER DIRECTORY, THE PROGRAM
OUTPUTS:
NO SUCH FILE
AND THEN PROCEEDS TO GET A NEW SECURITY CODE. BUT IF THE FILE ENTRY IS
FOUND IN THE USER DIRECTORY, THE PROGRAM COMPARES THE TRACK/SECTOR
ADDRESSES. IF THE TWO ADDRESSES ARE THE SAME, THE PROGRAM OUTPUTS:
NO CHANGES OCCURRED!
AND PROCEEDS TO GET A NEW SECURITY CODE. IF THE TWO ADDRESSES ARE NOT
THE SAME, THE PROGRAM EXCHANGES THE TRACK/SECTOR ADDRESS IN THE ENTRY
WITH THE ONE PROVIDED BY THE USER AND THEN PROCEEDS TO GET A NEW
SECURITY CODE.
P2 = 2
THIS ROUTINE IS SUPPOSED TO RESTORE PURGED FILE ENTRIES IN THE USER
DIRECTORY AS SPECIFIED BY THE USER.
THE PROGRAM FIRST SEARCHES THE DIRECTORY TO SEE IF THE FILE SPECIFIED
BY THE USER STILL EXISTS OR IF THE FILE NAME SPECIFIED BY THE USER HAS
BEEN USED BY ANOTHER USER. IF A FILE IS FOUND TO HAVE THE SAME NAME,
THE PROGRAM OUTPUTS:
DUPLICATE FILE
AND PROCEEDS TO GET A NEW SECURITY CODE. IF NO DUPLICATE FILE CAN BE
FOUND, THE PROGRAM SEARCHES FOR THE PURGED FILE NAME IN THE USER
DIRECTORY. IF A FILE NAME IS FOUND THAT RESEMBLES THAT WHICH WAS
SPECIFIED, THE TRACK/SECTOR ADDRESS IN THE ENTRY AND THE ADDRESS
SPECIFIED BY THE USER IN THE :PROG DIRECTIVE IS CHECKED TO SEE IF THE
ENTRY IS INDEED THE ENTRY OF THE CORRESPONDING FILE. IF THE ADDRESS
IN THE ENTRY IS CORRECT, THE FILE ENTRY IS RESTORED. BUT IF THE
ADDRESSES ARE NOT THE SAME, THE SEARCH IS CONTINUED UNTIL ANOTHER FILE
ENTRY IS THE SAME OR UNTIL THE END OF THE USER DIRECTORY IS SENSED,
WHERE-UPON THE PROGRAM RESPONDS WITH:
NO SUCH FILE
MEANING THAT THE DISC HAS BEEN REPACKED OR THE TRACK AND SECTOR ADDRESS
PROVIDED IN THE :PROG DIRECTIVE IS INCORRECT.
SECURITY CODE CHANGE
WHEN THE PROGRAM TRANSFERS CONTROL TO THE SECURITY CODE CHANGE ROUTINE,
THE PROGRAM RESPONDS WITH:
ENTER NEW SECURITY CODE
AND THE NEW SECURITY CODE IS ENTERED THROUGH THE BATCH INPUT DEVICE (OR
THE SYSTEM TELETYPE). THEN THE NEW SECURITY CODE IS CHANGED WITHIN
THE FILE ON DISC.
BATCH OPERATION
IF DOS-III IS IN THE BATCH MODE, THEN THE FILE NAME AND NEW SECURITY
CODE ARE ENTERED THROUGH THE BATCH INPUT DEVICE. "ENTER FILENAME" AND
"ENTER NEW SECURITY CODE" ARE NOT PRINTED ON THE SYSTEM TELETYPE.
A NOTE TO THE USER:
1. IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT THE USER OF THIS PROGRAM, WHEN USING P2 = 1,
KNOWS THE ACTUAL FILE BOUNDARY ON THE USER DISC. YOU AS THE USER
MUST BE CAPABLE OF FINDING AND ISOLATING THE PHYSICAL BOUNDARY OF
THE FILE IF THIS ROUTINE OF THE PROGRAM IS TO BE SUCCESSFUL.
EXAMPLE 1.)
2. IF THE PROGRAM, WHEN USING P2 = 2, OUTPUTS "DUPLICATE FILENAME", DO
NOT GIVE UP! IF YOU ARE SURE THAT THE DISC HAS NOT BEEN REPACKED,
AND ANOTHER FILE HAS BEEN ESTABLISHED USING THE FILE NAME OF THE
PURGED FILE, CHANGE THE SECOND LETTER OF THE PURGED FILE NAME AND
RE-EXECUTE THE PROGRAM. (SEE EXAMPLE 3.)
WARNING!!
THIS PROGRAM SHOULD NOT BE ALLOWED TO BE USED BY IRRESPONSIBLE PERSONS
WHO WOULD LIKE TO "SABOTAGE" ANOTHER USERS FILE BY CHANGING THE TRACK
AND SECTOR ADDRESS OF THE FILE WITHIN THE USER DIRECTORY (P2 = 1). IT
IS FOR THIS REASON THAT THE SECURITY CODE AND NO ECHO FEATURES WERE
INCORPORATED INTO THE PROGRAM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
MESSAGES AND MEANINGS
@ THE PROGRAM HAS TERMINATED NATURALLY AND
CONTROL IS NOW WITH DOS-III.
DUPLICATE FILE ENCOUNTERED WHEN P2 = 2 AND ANOTHER FILE USES
THE FILE NAME SPECIFIED BY THE USER OR THAT THE
FILE SPECIFIED BY THE USER HAS NOT BEEN PURGED.
ENTER FILENAME THE PROGRAM WISHES THE USER TO INPUT THE NAME
OF THE FILE THAT HE WISHES TO SAVE.
ENTER NEW SECURITY CODE THE PROGRAM WISHES THE USER TO INPUT THE NEW
SECURITY CODE FOR THE NEXT TIME THE PROGRAM IS
EXECUTED.
ILLEGAL SECURITY CODE! THE SECURITY CODE, THAT WAS ENTERED BY THE USER
THROUGH THE :PROG DIRECTIVE, DOES NOT CORRES-
@ POND WITH THAT WHICH IS RECOGNIZED BY PROGRAM
CONTROL. THE NEXT ACTION OF PROGRAM CONTROL IS
TO ABORT THE PROGRAM.
NO CHANGES OCCURRED! ENCOUNTERED WHEN P2=1 AND THE TRACK AND SECTOR
ADDRESS, THAT WAS SPECIFIED BY THE USER IN THE
:PROG DIRECTIVE, IS THE SAME AS THE TRACK AND
SECTOR ADDRESS IN THE USER DIRECTORY ENTRY FOR
THE FILE THAT WAS SPECIFIED BY THE USER.
BECAUSE THE ADDRESSES ARE THE SAME, THERE IS NO
NEED TO ALTER THE USER DIRECTORY ENTRY.
NO SUCH FILE THE NAME OF THE FILE SPECIFIED BY THE USER IS
NOT IN THE USER DIRECTORY.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE USER MUST KNOW THE PHYSICAL TRACK/SECTOR BOUNDARIES OF FILE WHEN
P2=1 FOR THE PROGRAM TO WORK AS INTENDED.
X16401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ASCII SOURCE FILE WRITE SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
ASCII FILES
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE ASCII SOURCE FILE WRITE SUBROUTINE ENABLES THE USER TO HAVE THE
FOLLOWING CAPABILITIES:
1. SOURCE FILE WRITE CAPABILITY
THE USER MAY CONCURRENTLY WRITE TO A MAXIMUM OF TEN DISC FILES.
THESE DISC FILES NEED NOT BE ASCII DISC FILES, BUT IF THEY ARE, THE
FILE WRITE FORMAT IS COMPATIBLE WITH DOS SOURCE FILE STRUCTURE.
EACH OPENED FILE IS ASSIGNED A BUFFER, I/O EFFICIENCY MAY BE GREATLY
INCREASED SINCE THE ROUTINE PERFORMS BOTH LOGICAL AND PHYSICAL
WRITES.
2. SEQUENTIAL WRITE CAPABILITY
AS MENTIONED ABOVE THE DESTINATION FILE DOES NOT HAVE TO BE A
SOURCE FILE, THUS THE USER MAY USE THIS SUBROUTINE SIMPLY AS A
POWERFUL HIGH SPEED SEQUENTIAL FILE WRITE SUBROUTINE.
SINCE THE HIGH SPEED DISC INPUT/OUTPUT SUBROUTINE IS REQUIRED
(HP# 22681-18981), THE USER MAY WRITE ON THE SCRATCH AREAS OF BOTH
THE CURRENT USER DISC AND THE SYSTEM DISC BY USING THE FILE NAMES $USER
AND $SYSTM.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: MINIMAL DOS WITH A 7900A DISC DRIVE. DOS-III
OPERATING SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
FOPEN - OPENS A FILE AND MAKES IT READY FOR ACCESS BY THE OTHER ENTRY
POINTS.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL FOPEN (FNAME,BUFFER,NSECT,IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB FOPEN
DEF *+5
DEF FNAME
DEF BUFR
DEF NSECT
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
BUFFER - BUFFER ALLOCATED FOR I/O WORK. MUST BE AT LENGTH
128 WORDS LONG OR A MULTIPLE OF 128.
NSECT - LENGTH OF BUFFER IN SECTORS - INT (BUFFER LENGTH/
128)
IERR - ERROR INDICATOR
THE 'BUFFER' MUST NOT BE USED WHILE THE FILE IS OPEN. ONCE
THE FILE IS CLOSED BY THE 'FWEOF', THE BUFFER MAY BE USED
BY ANOTHER FILE.
THE FILE MUST NOT BE OPENED MORE THAN ONCE, OTHERWISE I/O
ERRORS MAY RESULT.
FWRTE - WRITES ONE RECORD TO THE FILE.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL FWRTE (FNAME,RECORD,IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB FWRTE
DEF *+4
DEF FNAME
DEF RECRD
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
RECORD - RECORD(1) EQUALS THE NUMBER OF WORDS TO BE WRITTEN
RECORD (2 THROUGH N) CONTAIN THE WORDS/CHARACTERS
TO BE WRITTEN.
IERR - ERROR INDICATOR
FWEOF - WRITES A PHYSICAL END OF FILE AND ANY LOGICAL RECORDS THAT
HAVEN'T BEEN WRITTEN. IT ALSO REMOVES THE FILE FROM THE FOPEN
FILE TABLE AND RELEASES THE FILE AND ITS BUFFER.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL FWEOF (FNAME,IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB FWEOF
DEF *+3
DEF FNAME
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
IERR - ERROR INDICATOR
FLEN - RETURNS THE LOGICAL NUMBER OF SECTORS WRITTEN. IT IS USEFUL IN
CREATING A FILE UNDER PROGRAM CONTROL AND COPING TO IT FROM THE
SCRATCH AREA.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL FLEN (FNAME, NSECTS, IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB FLEN
DEF *+4
DEF FNAME
DEF NSECTS
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
NSECTS - # LOGICAL SECTORS USED
IERR - ERROR INDICATOR
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
EACH CAN RETURNS A STATUS VALUE 'IERR'. THE POSSIBLE VALUES ARE AS
FOLLOWS:
IERR ROUTINE
VALUE MEANING CALLED
0 NORMAL RETURN - NO ERRORS (ALL)
1 REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST FOPEN
2 MORE THAN 10 FILES OPEN AT ONE TIME FOPEN
3 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST FWRTE
4 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST FWEOF
5 ATTEMPTED TO WRITE BEYOND PHYSICAL END OF FILE FWRTE
6 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST FLEN
WHEN AN ERROR IS ENCOUNTERED, THE ROUTINE DOES NOT TERMINATE THE
PROGRAM, THUS AN ERROR CHECK SHOULD BE PERFORMED AFTER EACH CALL TO
INSURE PROPER PROGRAM EXECUTION.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN WRITING IN EITHER THE SYSTEM OR USER AREA OF
THE DISK. IF A FILE IS CREATED WHILE THE SCRATCH AREA OF THE DISK IS
BEING USED, THE INFORMATION STORED IN THE SCRATCH AREA MAY BE LOST.
CARE ALSO SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN READING AND WRITING IN BOTH USER AND
SYSTEM AREAS ($USER AND $SYSM). IF THE CURRENT USER DISK IS THE SYSTEM
DISK, THE $USER FILE IS THE SAME AS THE $SYSTM.
X16501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
ASCII SOURCE FILE READ SUBROUTINE
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
ASCII FILES
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE ASCII SOURCE FILE READ SUBROUTINE ENABLES THE USER TO HAVE THE
FOLLOWING CAPABILITIES:
1. SOURCE FILE READ CAPABILITY:
THE USER MAY CONCURRENTLY READ TO A MAXIMUM OF TEN DISC FILES.
THESE DISC FILES NEED NOT BE AN ASCII DISC FILE, BUT THE FILE BEING
READ MUST BE STRUCTURED THE SAME AS AN ASCII DISC FILE. EACH
OPENED FILE IS ASSIGNED A BUFFER (128 WORD MINIMUM). DEPENDING
UPON THE SIZE OF THE BUFFER I/O EFFICIENCY MAY BE GREATLY INCREASED
SINCE THE ROUTINE PERFORMS BOTH LOGICAL AND PHYSICAL READS.
2. SEQUENTIAL READ CAPABILITY:
AS MENTIONED ABOVE THE INPUT FILE DOES NOT HAVE TO BE A SOURCE
FILE, BUT THE FILE STRUCTURE MUST BE IDENTICAL TO A SOURCE FILE.
THE USER MAY USE THIS SUBROUTINE SIMPLY AS A POWERFUL HIGH-SPEED
SEQUENTIAL FILE READ SUBROUTINE.
SINCE THE HIGH-SPEED DISC INPUT/OUTPUT SUBROUTINE IS REQUIRED (HP#22681-
18981) THE USER MAY READ THE SCRATCH AREAS OF BOTH THE CURRENT USER DISC
AND THE SYSTEM DISC BY USING THE FILE NAMES $USER AND $SYSM. (THESE
FILES MUST COMPLY WITH THE ASCII FILE STRUCTURE ALSO).
HARDWARE REQUIRED: MINIMAL DOS-M OR DOS-III OPERATING SYSTEM INCLUDING
A 7900A DISC DRIVE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
OPENF - OPENS A FILE AND MAKES IT READY FOR ACCESS BY THE OTHER ENTRY
POINTS.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL OPENF (FNAME,BUFR,NSECT,IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB OPENF
DEF *+5
DEF FNAME
DEF BUFR
DEF NSECT
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
BUFR - BUFFER ALLOCATED FOR I/O WORK. MUST BE AT LEAST
128 WORDS LONG OR A MULTIPLE OF 128.
NSECT - LENGTH OF THE BUFFER IN SECTORS INT(BUFFER LENGTH/
128)
IERR - ERROR INDICATOR
THE 'BUFR' MUST NOT BE USED WHILE THE FILE IS OPEN. ONCE THE FILE
IS CLOSED BY THE 'FEND', THE BUFR MAY BE USED BY ANOTHER FILE.
THE FILE MUST NOT BE OPENED MORE THAN ONCE, OTHERWISE I/O ERRORS
WILL RESULT.
FREAD - READS ONE RECORD FROM THE FILE.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL FREAD (FNAME,RECORD,IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB FREAD
DEF *+4
DEF FNAME
DEF RECRD
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
RECRD - BUFFER IN WHICH THE RECORD IS STORED RECRD(1)
CONTAINS THE NUMBER OF WORDS (RECORD LENGTH IN
WORDS). RECRD(2) THROUGH RECRD(RECRD(1)+1) CONTAINS
THE ACTUAL INFORMATION READ
IERR: - ERROR INDICATOR
FRSET - RESETS THE POINTER TO THE BEGINNING OF THE FILE. SIMILAR TO
THE MAG TAPE 'REWIND' STATEMENT.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL FRSET (FNAME,IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB FRSET
DEF *+3
DEF FNAME
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
IERR - ERROR INDICATOR
FEND - CLOSES THE FILE AND RELEASES THE BUFFER FOR OTHER REASSIGNMENT.
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL FEND (FNAME,IERR)
CALLING SEQUENCE: ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
JSB FEND
DEF *+3
DEF FNAME
DEF IERR
WHERE: FNAME - 3 WORD ARRAY CONTAINING THE FILE NAME
IERR - ERROR INDICATOR
NOTE: ALL VARIABLES USED IN THE FORTRAN AND ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE CALLS
ARE INTEGER.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
EACH CALL RETURNS A STATUS VALUE 'IERR'. THE POSSIBLE VALUES ARE AS
FOLLOWS:
IERR ROUTINE
VALUE MEANING CALLED
0 NORMAL RETURN - NO ERRORS (ALL)
1 REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST OPENF
2 MORE THAN 10 FILES OPENED AT ONE TIME OPENF
3 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST FRSET
4 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST FEND
5 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST FREAD
6 END OF FILE ENCOUNTERED FREAD
WHEN AN ERROR IS ENCOUNTERED, THE ROUTINE DOES NOT TERMINATE THE
PROGRAM, THUS AN ERROR CHECK SHOULD BE PROVIDED AFTER EACH CALL TO
INSURE PROPER PROGRAM EXECUTION.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN WRITING IN EITHER THE SYSTEM OR USER AREA
OF THE DISK. IF A FILE IS CREATED WHILE THE SCRATCH AREA OF THE DISK
IS BEING USED, THE INFORMATION STORED IN THE SCRATCH AREA MAY BE LOST.
CARE ALSO SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN READING AND WRITING IN BOTH USER AND
SYSTEM AREAS ($USER & $SYSM). IF THE CURRENT USER DISK IS THE SYSTEM
DISK, THE $USER FILE IS THE SAME AS THE $SYSTM.
X16601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
R/W TO DISC FILES USING FORTRAN READ/WRITE STATEMENTS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 6
**KEYWORDS:
FILES FORTRAN I/O
DISC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-IIIB
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM IS SIMILAR TO THE 'CODE' PROGRAM IN THE FORTRAN LIBRARY.
WHEN A CALL DISK (FNAME,ISTAT) IS MADE BEFORE THE FORMATTED READ OR
WRITE STATEMENT, THE DATA IS TRANSFERRED TO/FROM THE SPECIFIED FILE.
THIS GIVES THE ABILITY TO FORMAT DATA USED ON THE DISC. (ASCII SOURCE
FILES MAY BE EITHER WRITTEN OR READ). THE CALL DISK AND THE READ/WRITE
FOLLOWING ARE TREATED AS IF THEY WERE ONE STATEMENT. IF THE READ WRITE
IS EXECUTED WITHOUT EXECUTING THE CALL DISK, THEN IT FUNCTIONS NORMALLY.
WHEN EXECUTING THE CALL DISK, THE UNIT NUMBER IS IGNORED. THE TRANFER
IS DIRECTED TOWARDS THE FILE NAMED IN FNAME. 'DISK' IS INTENDED FOR USE
WITH ONLY ASCII RECORDS.
A MINIMAL DOS-III SYSTEM IS REQUIRED.
SOFTWARE REQUIRED: 22682-18940 ASCII SOURCE FILE WRITE SUBROUTINE ASCII
SOURCE FILE READ SUBROUTINE. 22681-18981 HIGH-SPEED DISC INPUT/OUTPUT.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
CALLING SEQUENCE: FORTRAN
CALL DISK (FNAME,ISTAT)
(READ OR WRITE STATEMENT IMMEDIATELY FOLLOWING)
WHERE: FNAME CONTAINS THE NAME OF THE FILE. (3 ELEMENT INTEGER ARRAY)
ISTAT IS THE INTEGER VARIABLE FOR STATUS RETURN AFTER EXECUTION
OF THE TWO STATEMENTS.
GENERAL PROGRAM STRUCTURE:
OPEN THE FILE: FOPEN-WRITE OPENF-READ
.
.
.
.
.
CALL DISK (FNAME,ISTAT)
(READ OR WRITE STATEMENT)
.
.
.
.
.
CLOSE THE FILE: FWRTE-WRITE FEND-READ
IT IS NOT NECESSARY TO CLOSE A READ FILE UNLESS THE "TOO MANY FILES
OPENED" ERROR OCCURS. IT IS IMPERATIVE THAT A WRITE FILE IS CLOSED
BEFORE PROGRAM TERMINATION TO INSURE ALL THE BUFFERED DATA IS TRANS-
FERRED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERRORS WHEN USED WITH THE READ STATEMENT
CALL DISK (FNAME,ISTAT)
ISTAT MEANING
0 NO ERRORS, NORMAL RETURN
1 REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST
2 MORE THAN 10 FILES OPEN FOR READING AT ONE TIME
3 REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST OR IS NOT OPEN
4 REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST OR IS NOT OPEN
5 REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST OR IS NOT OPEN
6 END OF FILE ENCOUNTERED
(SEE ASCII FILE READ SUBROUTINE FOR FURTHER EXPLANATION)
ERRORS WHEN USED WITH THE WRITE STATEMENT
CALL DISK (FNAME,ISTAT)
ISTAT MEANING
0 NO ERRORS, NORMAL RETURN
1 REQUESTED FILE DOES NOT EXIST
2 MORE THAN 10 FILES OPEN AT ONE TIME (FOR WRITING)
3 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST
4 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST
5 ATTEMPTED TO WRITE BEYOND THE PHYSICAL END OF FILE
6 REQUESTED FILE IS NOT OPEN OR DOES NOT EXIST
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE FILE MUST BE OPEN USING EITHER THE 'FOPEN' OR 'OPENF' SUBROUTINES
FOR WRITE OR READ RESPECTIVELY BEFORE USING THE CALL DISK.
THE END OF FILE MUST BE WRITTEN BEFORE THE TERMINATION OF THE PROGRAM
IF THE PROGRAM HAS WRITTEN TO A FILE.
BE SURE YOU UNDERSTAND THE OTHER CONTRIBUTED PROGRAMS BEFORE USING THE
DISK SUBROUTINES. THIS WILL AID YOU IN UNDERSTANDING HOW TO STRUCTURE
YOUR PROGRAMS USING THESE ROUTINES.
X16701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CHESS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 6 **SUBCATEGORY:
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL PLAY CHESS BY GENERATING A (BEST MOVE) FROM A MINIMAX
GAME TREE. IT IS DIVIDED INTO TWO DISTINCT PHASES - POSITIONAL ANALYSIS
AND TACTICAL ANALYSIS.
THE POSITIONAL ANALYSIS SECTION CONTAINS ALL OF THE CHESS SPECIFIC
HEURISTICS. IT ASSIGNS POINTS TO EACH MOVE BASED ON A SERIES OF
PROGRAMMED GUIDELINES (SUCH AS ASSIGN 50 POINTS TO P-K4 DURING OPENING).
THE GUIDELINES ALSO INCLUDE POINT AWARDS FOR CENTER CONTROL, ATTACKING
THE OPPONENT'S KING, ETC. AFTER EACH POSSIBLE MOVE IS ASSIGNED A TOTAL
POINT VALUE, THE MOVES ARE SORTED SO THAT THE HIGHEST POINT VALUE MOVES
ARE CONSIDERED FIRST BY THE TACTICAL ANALYSIS PHASE.
THE TACTICAL ANALYSIS PHASE THEN BUILDS A MOVE TREE WHICH LOOKS THREE
HALF MOVES AHEAD. AT EACH BOTTOM OF THE MOVE TREE (AT DEPTH = 3), THE
MATERIAL (VALUE OF CHESS PIECES) GAINED OR LOST DURING THE THREE HALF
MOVES IS CALCULATED. THE MINIMAX ALGORITHM WITH ALPHA-BETA PRUNING IS
APPLIED ONLY ON THAT MATERIAL GAIN OR LOSS. EACH MOVE IS EVALUATED IN
TURN UNTIL A BEST MOVE IS FOUND AND EXECUTED.
THE PROGRAM FALLS IN THE (BRUTE-FORCE) CLASS OF CHESS PLAYING PROGRAMS.
BY LOOKING AT EACH MOVE THREE HALF MOVES AHEAD, IT MAY CONSIDER AS MANY
AS TEN THOUSAND TO A HUNDRED THOUSAND COMBINATIONS IN ITS SEARCH. THE
HP2100 COMPUTER DOES THIS IN AN AVERAGE TIME OF ONE TO THREE MINUTES.
THE PROGRAM WAS DESIGNED FOR A DOS-M SYSTEM WITH 16K CORE MEMORY. HOW-
EVER, WITH SLIGHT MODIFICATIONS, IT WILL RUN ON BCS TODS SYSTEMS ALSO.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLY AND COMPILATION OF SOURCE TAPES:
A. LOAD ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE SUBROUTINES ONTO DISK.
:JOB, SUBR
:STORE,S,ECUTS,5
YES
:STORE,S,CHS2S,5
YES
:STORE,S,SBITS,5
YES
:STORE,S,CBITS,5
YES
:STORE,S,ZERO,5
YES
B. ASSEMBLE EACH ROUTINE AND STORE RELOCATABLE CODE.
:JFILE,ECUTS
:PR,ASMB,2,,,99
:JFILE,CHS2S
:PR,ASMB,2,,,99
:JFILE,SBITS
:PR,ASMB,2,,,99
:JFILE,CBITS
:PR,ASMB,2,,,99
:JFILE,ZERO
:PR,ASMB,2,,,99
:ST,R,CHESL
C. COMPILE THE MAIN PROGRAM, LOAD, AND EXECUTE.
:JOB, MAIN
:STORE,S,GCHES,5
:JFILE,GCHES
:PR,ALGOL,2,,,99
:PR,LOADR,2
CHESL, /E
:ST,P
:PR,CHESS
SEE SECTION 7.0 FOR SAMPLE RUNS OF THE PROGRAM.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
SUBROUTINES INTERNAL TO ALGOL MAIN PROGRAM:
TRY - PRINTS MATERIAL DUMPED IN "FULL DUMP" OPTION (SW2 UP)
BUMP - INCREMENTS TREEPTR (INDEX TO MOVE TREE STACK) AND CHECKS FOR
OVERFLOW.
TYPEB - PRINTS OUT CHESS BOARD WITH PIECES
PUSHM - MAIN PROCEDURE TO PUSH ALL POSSIBLE MOVES ONTO MOVE TREE STACK
FOR A GIVEN BOARD CONFIGURATION.
PROCEDURES IN PUSHM:
CHECK - DETERMINES WHETHER CASTLING IS ALLOWED OR NOT
CAS - PLACES CASTLING MOVES ON MOVE TREE STACK
CASTL - IF CASTLING IS ALLOWED IT CALLS PROCEDURE CAS
KINGN - PLACES KING OR KNIGHT MOVES ON MOVE TREE STACK
BPRKQN - PLACES BISHOP, ROOK, OR QUEEN MOVES ON STACK
PAWNC - DETERMINES IF A CAPTURE BY A PAWN IS ALLOWED
PROMO - DETERMINES IF A PAWN CAN BE PROMOTED OR NOT.
READM - READS AN OPPONENT'S MOVE, VERIFIES IT, AND EXECUTES IT
POSIT - MAIN PROCEDURE TO EXECUTE POSITIONAL ANALYSIS SECTION.
PROCEDURES USED IN POSIT:
CENCON - ASSIGNS CENTER CONTROL BONUS POINTS TO A MOVE
SORT - SORTS MOVES AFTER BONUS POINTS ASSIGNED TO EACH
MDGAME - CALCULATES TOTAL PIECE WORTH OF EACH SIDE AND ASSIGNS
IT TO WHITEPOINTS & BLACKPOINTS.
MOBILE - CALCULATES MOBILITY FACTOR FOR A MOVE
KINGCH - AWARDS BONUS POINTS FOR HARASSING OPPONENT'S KING
OPENB - DURING OPENING, ASSIGNS BONUS POINTS TO EACH MOVE
MDBON - DURING MIDGAME, ASSIGNS BONUS POINTS TO EACH MOVE
GENMOV - PROCEDURE WHICH EXECUTES TACTICAL ANALYSIS SECTION - BY MINIMAX
ALGORITHM WITH ALPHA-BETA PRUNING
SETBOARD - PROCEDURE TO INPUT AN OLD BOARD CONFIGURATION AND PARAMETERS.
SUBROUTINES IMPLEMENTED IN ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE:
BLANK(A) - WRITES BLANKS (ASCII CHARACTER CODE OCTAL 40)
INTO INTEGER ARRAY A.
IZERO(A) - WRITES ZERO INTO INTEGER ARRAY A.
CBITF(A,B,C) - EXTRACTS AND RIGHT-JUSTIFIES A BIT FIELD FROM BIT
POSITION B OF LENGTH C BITS IN THE DOUBLE WORD
LOCATED AT ADDRESS A.
SBITF(A,B,C,D) - SETS A BIT FIELD FROM BIT POSITION B OF LENGTH C
BITS IN THE DOUBLE WORD LOCATED AT ADDRESS A TO
THE QUANTITY D.
SAVE(A,B,C,D) - SAVES THE VALUE OF THE LAST MOVE A, THE BOARD
CONFIGURATION B, AND THE MATERIAL C IN AN
INTERNAL STORAGE ARRAY BUFF AT POSITION INDEXED
BY DEPTH D.
RETRO(A,B,C,D,E) - RETRACTS THE VALUE OF THE LAST MOVE A, THE BOARD
CONFIGURATION B, AND THE MATERIAL D FROM ARRAY
BUFF AT A POSITION INDEXED BY DEPTH D. ALSO
TOGGLES THE VALUE OF THE CONTROL VARIABLE F AT
ADDRESS C.
ECUTE(A,B,C,D,E,F,G) - EXECUTES THE MOVE GIVEN IN THE ADDRESS A. IT
UPDATES THE VALUE OF THE LAST MOVE B, THE BOARD
CONFIGURATION C, THE CONTROL VARIABLE F AT
ADDRESS F, AND THE MATERIAL G.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
SEVERAL SWITCH OPTIONS ARE AVAILABLE TO HELP DEBUG THE PROGRAM:
SW0 - DUMPS RESULT OF POSITIONAL ANALYSIS ROUTINE POSIT
SW1 - DUMPS THE BOTTOM NODES OF THE MOVE TREE DURING ITS GENERATION.
IT IS USEFUL TO DETERMINE WHY A PARTICULAR MOVE WAS CHOSEN.
SW2 - DUMPS A VERY LENGTHY DUMP USEFUL FOR TRACING SUBTLE BUGS IN THE
PROGRAM.
NOTE: THESE DUMPS ARE NOT NORMALLY USED DURING CONVENTIONAL PROGRAM
PLAY BUT ARE USEFUL FOR TRACKING DOWN BUGS.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
ONE SHOULD NOT EXPECT THIS PROGRAM TO PLAY "GRAND MASTER" STYLE CHESS.
IF THE PROGRAM WAS A HUMAN PLAYER, IT WOULD BE CLASSIFIED AS A "FISH" -
AN OPPONENT WITH LITTLE OR NO TALENT. HOWEVER, IT IS CAPABLE OF SOME-
TIMES VERY INTERESTING SEQUENCES, AND IS UNMERCIFUL IF ITS HUMAN
OPPONENT BLUNDERS BADLY.
THERE IS MUCH ROOM FOR IMPROVEMENT IN THE DEVELOPMENT OF THE PROGRAM.
SEVERAL IMPORTANT FEATURES CAN BE ADDED IN A "VERSION B". AMONG THESE
ARE "QUIESCENCE" - THAT IS CONTINUING THE EVALUATION OF A MOVE SEQUENCE
IN PROCEDURE GENMV PAST THE DEPTH OF THREE LIMITATION IF IT ENDS IN A
CAPTURE. THIS WOULD PREVENT HUMAN OPPONENTS FROM SUCKERING THE PROGRAM
BY PRESENTING UNFAVORABLE EXCHANGES LONGER THAN THREE HALF MOVES. ALSO
SEVERAL IMPORTANT END-GAME CHESS HEURISTICS CAN BE COMBINED TO FORM AN
END GAME SECTION IN THE POSITIONAL ANALYSIS PROCEDURE POSIT.
HOPEFULLY, ENTRY OF THIS PROGRAM INTO THE CONTRIBUTOR'S LIBRARY WILL
SPARK ENOUGH INTEREST SO THAT HEWLETT-PACKARD MIGHT BE A SERIOUS
CONTENDER IN THE NEXT ACM COMPUTER CHESS TOURNAMENT.
X16801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: CALEN
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PERPETUAL CALENDAR
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 6 **SUBCATEGORY:
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES TIME
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM WILL PRODUCE, ON THE TELETYPE, LINE PRINTER OR OTHER I/O
DEVICE, A CALENDAR FOR THE YEAR SPECIFIED BY THE USER. THIS PROGRAM
ASKS FOR RESPONSES BY THE USER ON THE TELETYPE AND THESE RESPONSES ARE
THEN USED TO PRODUCE THE DESIRED CALENDAR.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR PERPETUAL CALENDAR ARE 4K AND TELETYPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. COMPILE THE SOURCE USING THE FORTRAN COMPILER.
2. PROCESS THROUGH BCS - PREPARE AN ABSOLUTE TAPE OR LOAD DIRECT,
INCLUDING THE RELOCATABLE PROGRAM LIBRARY.
3. PRESS RUN.
THE TELETYPE WILL THEN RESPOND WITH:
ENTER THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE OUTPUT DEVICE.
THE USER SHOULD THEN TYPE THE LOGICAL UNIT NUMBER OF THE DESIRED
OUTPUT DEVICE, CR/LF.
THE TELETYPE WILL THEN RESPOND WITH:
ENTER YEAR NUMBER
THE USER THEN ENTERS THE YEAR NUMBER FOR THE CALENDAR DESIRED,
CR/LF.
THE TELETYPE WILL THEN RESPOND WITH:
ENTER NUMBER OF COPIES DESIRED
THE TELETYPE WILL THEN RESPOND WITH:
ENTER STARTING DAY FOR JAN 1; (SUN = 1, MON = 2, TUE = 3, ETC.)
THE USER THEN ENTERS THE APPROPRIATE NUMBER, CR/LF.
THE TELETYPE THEN RESPONDS WITH:
IS THIS A LEAP YEAR? ANSWER YES OR NO
THE USER PROVIDES THE APPROPRIATE RESPONSE, CR/LF
THE CALENDAR IS THEN PRODUCED AS REQUESTED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X16901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PING PONG
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 6 **SUBCATEGORY:
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4 ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PLAYS PING-PONG USING THE 2100 SWITCH REGISTER TO DISPLAY THE BALL PATH
AND USING BITS (0) AND (15) AS PADDLE POSITIONS. THE (BALL) SPEEDS UP
OR SLOWS DOWN, DEPENDING ON WHETHER IT WAS MISSED OR RETURNED, AND THE
SCORE IS KEPT ON THE SYSTEM CONSOLE.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE DOS-M SYSTEM AND A BCS LOAD AS OPTIONAL,
ALLOWING THIS PROGRAM TO BE RUN IN 4K WITH A TTY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X17001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
31 - ODD GAME
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 6 **SUBCATEGORY:
**KEYWORDS:
GAMES
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS IS A GAME IN WHICH THE PLAYER IS PITTED AGAINST THE COMPUTER. TO
WIN, THE PLAYER MUST END WITH AN ODD TOTAL OF COUNTERS WHEN THE KITTY IS
EXHAUSTED. THE KITTY STARTS WITH 31 COUNTERS. THE PLAYER CHOOSES
WHETHER TO GO FIRST OR TO HAVE THE COMPUTER GO FIRST, THEN THE COMPUTER
AND THE PLAYER ALTERNATE CHOOSING BETWEEN 1 AND 5 COUNTERS TO BE ADDED
TO THEIR TOTALS. THE COMPUTER PLAYS AN OPTIMUM GAME WITH ONLY 3125
WAYS TO LOSE. THE PLAYER, HOWEVER, HAS ALMOST 10 MILLION WAYS TO LOSE
SO THAT COMPLETELY RANDOM CHOICES WILL RARELY LEAD TO A WIN.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: 4K AND TTY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM USES .IOC. FOR INPUT/OUTPUT OPERATION.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
HALT FROM IRRECOVERABLE INPUT ERROR MEMORY = 102001
HALT FROM IRRECOVERABLE OUTPUT ERROR MEMORY = 102002
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THIS PROGRAM OPERATES IN A COMPLETELY CONVERSATIONAL MODE.
X17101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME: PERT0
**PROGRAM TITLE:
PERT PACKAGE FOR DOS-III
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 1 **SUBCATEGORY: 7
**KEYWORDS:
MANAGEMENT PERFORMANCE
**LANGUAGES:
FTN4
**COMPUTER TYPE:
2100
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-III
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
PERT (PROGRAM EVALUATION AND REVIEW TECHNIQUE) PACKAGE IS A PROGRAM
SET. THIS SET IS DIVIDED INTO TWO SUBSETS: SUBSET 1 FOR COMPUTATION
BEFORE THE PROJECT STARTS, AND SUBSET 2 FOR COMPUTATION OF ACTUALIZA-
TION DURING THE PROJECT EXECUTION. THE PROJECT CAN BE REPRESENTED
GRAPHICALLY BY A NETWORK CONSISTING OF EVENTS AND ACTIVITIES; THE
PROJECT CAN BE DETERMINISTIC OR INDETERMINISTIC.
AN EVENT (NODE) IS DEFINED AS A POINT IN TIME INDICATING THE BEGINNING
OR THE END OF SPECIFIC ACTIVITY, BUT NOT THE EXECUTION OF IT. AN
ACTIVITY THEN, IS A PART OF THE PROJECT WHICH DEVELOPS BETWEEN TWO
SUCCESSIVE EVENTS.
SUBSET 1 PROGRAMS:
LOGIC PERT NETWORK REVISION (PERT0)
FILE CREATION AND PERT COMPUTATION (PERT1)
ORIGINAL AND ACTUAL BAR DIAGRAM OF PERT (PERT2)
PERT COMPUTATION AND COST REPORT (PERT3)
SUBSET 2 PROGRAMS:
ACTUAL PERT COMPUTATION (PERT4)
ACTUAL COSTS AND PERT COMPUTATION (PERT5)
PERT1,2,3,4,5 REQUIRE AN EFMP AREA
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: RELOCATABLE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: DATA
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: DATA
FILE# 10: SOURCE
FILE# 11: DATA
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
RUN INSTRUCTIONS - PERT0:
DATA FORMAT FOR PERT0:
FIELD DESCRIPTION
A TOTAL NUMBER OF ACTIVITIES
B NAME OF TIME UNITS OF THE PROJECT
C INITIAL PROJECT DATE DAY: XX
MONTH: XXXX
YEAR: XX
RECORD 1 FORMAT = I4, 2(1X,4R2)
D PROJECT TITLE (26R2)
RECORD 2 FORMAT = 26R2
E START NODE (I4)
F FINISH NODE (I4)
G OPTIMISTIC TIME (F4.1)
H MOST LIKELY TIME (F4.1)
I PESSIMISTIC TIME (F4.1)
J ACTIVITY COST (F7.2)
K ACTIVITY DESCRIPTION (10R2)
FROM INPUT RECORD #3 TO N THERE IS ONE RECORD PER ACTIVITY.
RECORD 3 - N FORMATS = 2I4, 3F4.1, F7.2, 10R2
RUN INSTRUCTIONS - PERT1:
STORE THE SOURCE PROGRAM, THEN STORE THE RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINE WITH
THE NAME RHC00 WITH THESE DIRECTIVES.
:ST, S, FPER1, 5
:ST, R, RHC00, 5
COMPILE PERT1 WITH THE FORTRAN IV COMPILER AND LOAD WITH THE RHC00 SUB-
ROUTINE. IF A BAR DIAGRAM IS DESIRED, COMPILE PERT2 ALSO.
CALL PERT1 WITH THIS DIRECTIVE:
:PR, PERT1
THE PROGRAM WILL ASK THROUGH THE CRT CONSOLE (LU#1) THE RUN DATE AND
THE NAME OF THE EFMP FILE FOR THE PROJECT.
THE REPORTS WILL BE PRINTED ON THE LINE PRINTER.
RUN INSTRUCTIONS - PERT2:
PERT2 NEEDS A RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINE CALLED BY THE LOADER AS RHC00.
PERT2 IS CALLED BY PERT1 AND TAKES INFORMATION FROM THE EFMP FILE.
RUN INSTRUCTIONS - PERT3:
COMPILE THE SOURCE CODED SUBROUTINE WITH FORTRAN IV COMPILER AND STORE
IT IN RELOCATABLE FORM, THEN COMPILE THE PROGRAM PERT3 WITH THE SAME
COMPILER AND LOAD IT WITH THE RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINE JUST STORED, AND
THE PREVIOUS RHC00 SUBROUTINE.
CALL THE PROGRAM PERT3 WITH THE DIRECTIVE:
:PR,PERT3
THE PROGRAM WILL ASK THE OPERATOR TO WRITE ON CONSOLE THE RUN DATE AND
THE EFMP FILE NAME OF THE PROJECT TO BE PRINTED.
THEN THE PROGRAM WILL READ THE FIRST RECORD OF THE PAPER TAPE.
WHEN YOU LOAD THE COMPILED PROGRAM YOU HAVE TO LOAD THE TWO PREVIOUS
SUBROUTINES FALLA AND SJC03.
RUN INSTRUCTIONS - PERT4:
COMPILE PERT4 WITH THE FORTRAN IV COMPILER AND LOAD IT WITH TWO RE-
LOCATABLE SUBROUTINES (FALLA AND SJC03) THAT HAD BEEN PREVIOUSLY STORED
IN RELOCATABLE FORM.
THEN CALL PERT 4 WITH THE DIRECTIVE :PR,PERT4.
THE PROGRAM WILL ASK FOR THE RUN DATE AND THE EFMP PROJECT FILE ON
LOGICAL UNIT #1, THEN THE REPORTS WILL BE PRINTED ON THE LINE
PRINTER.
THE DATA FORMAT FOR THIS PROGRAM IS AS FOLLOWS:
RECORD #1 - A B C D
RECORD #2 - E F
RECORD #3 - G H I
. .
. .
RECORD #N - G H I
WHERE: N = F-2
FIELD DESCRIPTION
A TOTAL NUMBER OF ACTIVITIES (I4)
B NAME OF TIME UNITS (4R2)
C INITIAL DATE PROJECT (R2,2R2,R2)
D COST INDICATOR:
0 - THERE IS NO COST DATA
1 - THERE IS COST DATA
E ACTUALIZATION TIME (I4)
F NUMBER OF ACTIVITIES TO BE ACTUALIZED (I3)
G NUMBER OF THE ACTIVITY (I4)
H PERCENTAGE OF ADVANCE OF THE ACTIVITY (I3)
I ACTUALIZED COST OF THE ACTIVITY (F10.2)
RUN INSTRUCTIONS - PERT5:
COMPILE PERT5 WITH THE FORTRAN IV COMPILER AND LOAD IT WITH THE
RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINE FALLA STORED AS RHC00.
CALL PERT4 WITH A SET OF DATA. PERT4 WILL CALL PERT5.
THE DATA FORMAT FOR PERT5 IS THE SAME AS FOR PERT4, THE ONLY
DIFFERENCE IS THAT THE COST INDICATOR SHOULD BE SET TO (1).
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
PERT0:
THIS PROGRAM OF THE PERT PACKAGE CHECKS THE LOGIC OF THE ACTIVITIES
NETWORK, LOOKING FOR ANY CLOSE LOOP IN IT, IF THERE ARE ANY, THE PRO-
GRAM WRITES ON WHAT NODES IS THE LOOP.
PERT0 WILL ACCEPT UP TO 490 EVENTS (NODES) AND 450 ACTIVITIES. IT
REQUIRES 24K DOS-III SYSTEM.
PERT1:
PERT1 CREATES AN EFMP FILE WITH THE PROJECT INFORMATION THAT HAS JUST
BEEN TESTED WITH PERT0.
THIS PROGRAM COMPUTES THE EXPECTED VALUE, THE STANDARD DEVIATION AND
THE VARIANCE WITH THE ASSUMPTION THAT THE VARIABLE DURATION OF THE
ACTIVITY, FOLLOWS A NORMAL PROBABILITY DISTRIBUTION, THEN CALCULATES
THE EARLY START, EARLY FINISH, LATE START, LATE FINISH, TOTAL FLOAT
AND FREE FLOAT OF EVERY ACTIVITY.
THE PROGRAM MAKES A CALL TO THE PROGRAM PERT2.
PERT1 WILL ACCEPT UP TO 490 EVENTS AND 450 ACTIVITIES.
IT REQUIRES A 24K DOS-III SYSTEM.
PERT2:
PERT2 PRINTS THE BAR DIAGRAM OF A PROJECT, THIS PROGRAM GETS THE
INFORMATION OF THE EFMP FILE THAT PERT1 HAS CREATED.
PERT2 PRINTS A SPECIAL SYMBOL FOR EVERY ACTIVITY DEPENDING ON ITS
STATUS, FOR CRITICAL ACTIVITIES PRINTS AN ASTERISK ON A PROPORTION
WITH ITS AVERAGE TIME, AN X FOR NON-CRITICAL AND FOR THE FLOAT TIME.
THE PROGRAM IS CALLED BY PERT1.
PERT2 WILL ACCEPT UP TO 490 EVENTS AND 450 ACTIVITIES. IT REQUIRES
A 24K DOS-III SYSTEM.
PERT3:
PERT3 PRINTS THE PERT TIMES OF THE PROJECT COMPUTED BY PERT1 AND ALSO
PRINTS THE COST OF EACH ACTIVITY AS SUPPLIED ON THE DATA SET.
THE PERT TIMES CONSIST OF AN EXPECTED TIME, EARLY START, EARLY FINISH,
LATE START, LATE FINISH, TOTAL FLOAT AND FREE FLOAT FOR EACH ACTIVITY,
ALSO THE PROGRAM POINTS OUT THE CRITICAL ACTIVITIES PRINTING ITS STATUS.
THE PROGRAM TAKES THE INFORMATION OF THE EFMP FILE FOR THE PROJECT
CREATED BY PERT1.
PERT4:
PERT4 REALIZES THE PERT COMPUTATION WHEN AN ACTUALIZATION ON THE
PROJECT NETWORK IS DESIRED, THIS PROGRAM PRINTS THE REPORT IF NO COST
ARE GOING TO BE ACTUALIZED, THEN IT CALLS TO PERT2 TO PRINT THE
ACTUALIZED BAR DIAGRAM.
IF THERE IS GOING TO BE SOME CHANGE IN COSTS AND THE COST INDICATOR IS
ON (1) PERT4 CALLS PERT5 TO PRINT THE DESIRED REPORT.
THE TIME REPORT GENERATED BY PERT4 HAS THE PERT TIMES INDICATED ON
PERT1 AND THE PERCENTAGE OF ADVANCE OF THE ACTIVITIES.
PERT5:
PERT5 PRINTS THE ACTUALIZED COST AND TIME REPORT THAT PERT4 HAS JUST
CALCULATED, AND THEN CALLS PERT2 TO PRINT THE ACTUALIZED PERT BAR
DIAGRAM.
PERT5 PRINTS, BESIDE THE PERT TIMES, THE EXPECTED COST AND THE ACTUAL-
IZED COSTS, THE EXPECTED TIME AND THE ACTUALIZED TIME, AND THE STATUS
OF EVERY ACTIVITY.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X17201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 2000F BASIC FOR DOS-M/DOS III
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
BASIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS-3
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
24K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
DOS-M/DOS III BASIC IS ESSENTIALLY A SINGLE TERMINAL VERSION OF HP 2000F
TIME-SHARED BASIC. IT RUNS UNDER THE DOS-M OR DOS III OPERATING SYSTEM,
GIVING THE USERS OF THESE SYSTEMS A POWERFUL, YET EASY TO USE COMPUTING
FACILITY. FEATURES OF DOS-M/DOS III BASIC NOT FOUND IN OTHER DOS-M
BASIC'S INCLUDE: STRING VARIABLES, FORMATTED OUTPUT, USER PROGRAM DISC
STORAGE AND RETRIEVAL, USER DATA FILES, PROGRAM CHAINING, ERROR MESSAGES
INSTEAD OF ERROR NUMBERS; LINE PRINTER SUPPORT, BETTER PROGRAM EDITING
FACILITIES, HIGH-SPEED PAPER TAPE INPUT AND OUTPUT OF PROGRAMS, MIN AND
MAX OPERATORS, MORE FLEXIBLE INPUT WITH ENTER STATEMENT, MULTI-BRANCH
GOTO AND GOSUB STATEMENTS, ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS, SOURCE INPUT FROM ANY
INPUT DEVICE VIA "LOAD" COMMAND, ETC.
ANOTHER IMPORTANT CONSIDERATION IS THE PROVISION FOR RETRIEVING BASIC
PROGRAMS FROM 2000F TIME-SHARED SYSTEM DUMP TAPES. THIS GIVES THE
DOS-M/DOS III USER ACCESS TO THE GREAT NUMBER OF USEFUL HP BASIC LIBRARY
PROGRAMS AND ALLOWS EASY TRANSFER OF OTHER USER-DEVELOPED PROGRAMS FROM
A TIME-SHARED SYSTEM TO A DOS ENVIRONMENT. USER DATA FILES MAY ALSO
BE TRANSFERRED FROM SYSTEM TO SYSTEM. TO MAKE THESE CONVERSIONS THE
DOS-M/2000C TSB FILE HANDLER, HP 24228, MUST BE USED IN CONJUNCTION
WITH SPECIAL ROUTINES INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE.
CURRENTLY, DOS-M/DOS III BASIC REQUIRES AT LEAST 14K WORDS OF MEMORY
IN ADDITION TO SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS. THEREFORE, A CPU WITH AT LEAST
24K WILL BE NECESSARY. (A 32K CPU GIVES THE USER MORE PROGRAM SPACE
THAN IS AVAILABLE ON THE 2000F.)
A TIME BASE GENERATOR IS NECESSARY IF THE TIME COMMAND, TIM( ) FUNCTION,
OR TIMED ENTER WILL BE USED.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: DOS-M/DOS III BASIC RELOCATABLE MODULES
FILE# 3: BFILE RELOC. MODULE
FILE# 4: CFILE RELOC. MODULE
FILE# 5: LOADR RELOC. MODULE
FILE# 6: DOS-M/DOS III BASIC MAIN SOURCE
FILE# 7: DOS-M/DOS III BASIC SUBROUTINES SOURCES
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: SOURCE
FILE# 10: SOURCE
FILE# 11: SOURCE
FILE# 12: SOURCE
FILE# 13: SOURCE
FILE# 14: SOURCE
FILE# 15: SOURCE
FILE# 16: SOURCE
FILE# 17: SOURCE
FILE# 18: SOURCE
FILE# 19: SOURCE
FILE# 20: SOURCE
FILE# 21: SOURCE
FILE# 22: SOURCE
FILE# 23: SOURCE
FILE# 24: SOURCE
FILE# 25: SOURCE
FILE# 26: SOURCE
FILE# 27: SOURCE
FILE# 28: SOURCE
FILE# 29: SOURCE
FILE# 30: SOURCE
FILE# 31: SOURCE
FILE# 32: SOURCE
FILE# 33: SOURCE
FILE# 34: SOURCE
FILE# 35: SOURCE
FILE# 36: DOS-M/DOS III BASIC SEGMENTS SOURCES
FILE# 37: SOURCE
FILE# 38: SOURCE
FILE# 39: SOURCE
FILE# 40: SOURCE
FILE# 41: SOURCE
FILE# 42: SOURCE
FILE# 43: SOURCE
FILE# 44: SOURCE
FILE# 45: SOURCE
FILE# 46: SOURCE
FILE# 47: SOURCE
FILE# 48: SOURCE
FILE# 49: SOURCE
FILE# 50: SOURCE
FILE# 51: SOURCE
FILE# 52: SOURCE
FILE# 53: BFILE SOURCE
FILE# 54: CFILE SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
AN ATTEMPT HAS BEEN MADE TO DUPLICATE 2000F TIME-SHARED BASIC AS
CLOSELY AS POSSIBLE. THEREFORE, THE USER IS REFERRED TO "2000F: A
GUIDE TO TIME-SHARED BASIC" (HP ORDER NUMBER 02000-90044) FOR DETAILED
INFORMATION ABOUT THE LANGUAGE AND PROGRAM EXECUTION. ONLY DIFFERENCES
BETWEEN 2000F AND DOS-M/DOS III BASIC WILL BE NOTED HERE.
TO RUN DOS-M/DOS III BASIC WITH THE SYSTEM CONSOLE AS THE USER TERMINAL
TYPE:
:PR,BASIC
TO RUN WITH ANOTHER CONSOLE AS THE USER TERMINAL TYPE:
:PR,BASIC,(LU # OF CONSOLE)
IN EITHER CASE, BASIC RESPONDS WITH "READY", AND THE USER MAY TYPE
PROGRAM STATEMENTS AND COMMANDS AS DESCRIBED IN "2000F: A GUIDE TO
TIME-SHARED BASIC" WITH THE FOLLOWING EXCEPTIONS:
1. THE "LOG IN" PROCEDURE IS NOT USED.
2. THE "BREAK" KEY IS NOT USED WITH DOS-M/DOS III BASIC. TO STOP
A LISTING, RUNNING PROGRAM, OR OTHER LENGTHY OPERATION, SET
BIT 15 OF THE SWITCH REGISTER ON. THIS WILL TERMINATE THE
CURRENT OPERATION (EXCEPT FOR A RUNNING PROGRAM IF THE "BRK( )"
FUNCTION HAS DISABLED "BREAK").
3. THE "ECHO" COMMAND IS NOT USED.
4. THE "PUNCH" AND "XPUNCH" COMMANDS PUNCH THE CURRENT PROGRAM ON
THE PAPER TAPE PUNCH (MUST BE LU #4).
5. THE "TAPE" COMMAND READS A PROGRAM TAPE FROM THE PHOTO-READER
(MUST BE LU # 5). IT EXPECTS A SPECIAL CHARACTER, CNTL-Z
(Z TYPED WHILE HOLDING DOWN THE CNTL KEY), AT THE END OF THE
TAPE. "PUNCH" AND "XPUNCH" PROVIDE THIS TERMINAL CHARACTER
AUTOMATICALLY. A TAPE PUNCHED ON A 2000 TIME-SHARED SYSTEM
SHOULD HAVE THIS CHARACTER PUNCHED AFTER THE TRAILER AND
ANOTHER TRAILER PRODUCED FOLLOWING IT BEFORE THE TAPE IS
REMOVED FROM THE TERMINAL.
6. NO MESSAGES ARE ISSUED ON THE STATUS OF THE LINE PRINTER
EXCEPT "LP FREE" WHEN A LISTING OR PROGRAM COMPLETES.
7. THE "TIME" COMMAND WORKS ONLY IF A TIME-BASE GENERATOR IS IN
THE SYSTEM.
8. THE "MESSAGE" COMMAND IS NOT USED.
9. THERE IS NO DISTINCTION BETWEEN USER LIBRARY, GROUP LIBRARY,
AND SYSTEM LIBRARY. ALL PROGRAM AND DATA FILES ARE USER
LIBRARY FILES. THE "LIBRARY" AND "GROUP" COMMANDS ARE NOT
USED.
10. FOR THE "TIM( )" FUNCTION TO WORK PROPERLY, TWO THINGS ARE
REQUIRED.
A. A TIME-BASE GENERATOR MUST BE IN THE SYSTEM IF HOURS AND
MINUTES ARE DESIRED.
B. A SPECIALLY FORMATTED ":DATE" DIRECTIVE MUST BE GIVEN TO
THE DOS-M OR DOS III SYSTEM IF THE DAY AND YEAR ARE
DESIRED.
:DA,XXX/YY,M,N
WHERE XXX IS A THREE-DIGIT NUMBER GIVING THE CURRENT DAY
OF THE YEAR, AND YY IS THE YEAR OF THE CENTURY. M IS THE
CURRENT HOUR AND N THE CURRENT MINUTE OF THE DAY.
:DA,032/73,9,30 FOR FEB. 1, 1973 AT 9:30 AM
11. CURRENTLY A MAXIMUM OF 31 PROGRAMS AND DATA FILES ALLOWED.
12. A CNTL-L (L TYPED WHILE HOLDING DOWN THE CNTL KEY) IN AN OUTPUT
STRING CAUSES A PAGE EJECT WHEN IT IS PRINTED ON THE LINE-
PRINTER.
13. A NEW COMMAND, "LOAD-8", ALLOWS SOURCE STATEMENTS TO BE INPUT
FROM A DEVICE OTHER THAN THE TTY. FOR EXAMPLE, "LOAD-8" WOULD
INPUT SOURCE FROM LU #8. "LOAD" ALONE DEFAULTS TO LU#5.
LOADING STOPS WHEN AN END-OF-FILE OR VALID COMMAND IS
ENCOUNTERED IN THE SOURCE STREAM.
BFILE
BFILE INITIALIZES A DOS-M OR DOS III FILE FOR USE BY BASIC. THE USER
MUST RESERVE SPACE ON THE DISC FOR THIS FILE BY CREATING A FILE WITH THE
":ST,B,$FILS,N" DIRECTIVE. ("$FILES" MUST BE ON THE SAME DISC SUB-
CHANNEL AS BASIC AND ITS SEGMENTS, BFILE, AND CFILE). N IS THE NUMBER
OF SECTORS THAT THE USER WISHES TO RESERVE FOR BASIC PROGRAM AND DATA
FILE STORAGE. THE FILE IS THEN INITIALIZED BY RUNNING BFILE:
:PR,BFILE
THIS BUILDS AN EMPTY DIRECTORY IN THE FIRST TWO SECTORS OF "$FILS".
(TWO SECTORS OF DIRECTORY ALLOW SPACE FOR UP TO 31 PROGRAMS OR DATA
FILE ENTRIES.)
BFILE ISSUES AN ERROR MESSAGE IF A FILE NAMED "$FILS" DOES NOT EXIST
OR IF IT IS LESS THAN THREE SECTORS LONG. IF BFILE IS RUN AND IT FINDS
A DIRECTORY ALREADY IN "$FILS", IT ASKS "OK TO PURGE BASIC FILES?" AND
WAITS FOR A RESPONSE FROM THE USER. A RESPONSE OF "Y" INFORMS BFILE
THAT IT SHOULD DESTROY THE OLD DIRECTORY AND CREATE A NEW ONE. A
RESPONSE OF "N" TERMINATES BFILE WITHOUT FURTHER ACTION.
CFILE
CFILE, USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE DOS-M/2000C FILE HANDLER, GIVES THE
USER THE CAPABILITY OF TRANSFERRING PROGRAMS AND DATA FILES BETWEEN A
2000C/F TSB SYSTEM AND A DOS-/DOS III SYSTEM. THE FILE HANDLER CONVERTS
PROGRAM AND DATA FILES FROM 2000C/F DUMP TAPES TO DOS-M/DOS III DISC
FILES. IT ALSO TRANSFERS PROPERLY FORMATTED DOS-M/DOS III DATA FILES
TO MAGNETIC TAPE FOR SUBSEQUENT LOADING ON A 2000C/F TSB SYSTEM. CFILE
CONVERTS THE DOS-M/DOS III FILES CREATED BY THE FILE HANDLER TO BASIC
FILES WITHIN "$FILS". CFILE ALSO CONVERTS BASIC FILES WITHIN "$FILS"
TO DOS-M/DOS III FILES THAT ARE FORMATTED FOR THE TSB FILE HANDLER.
CFILE IS RUN BY TYPING:
:PR,CFILE
A CHECK IS FIRST MADE TO SEE THAT A FILE NAMED "$FILS" EXISTS AND HAS
BEEN INITIALIZED BY BFILE. IF NOT, AN ERROR MESSAGE IS PRINTED AND
CFILE TERMINATES. IF "$FILS" IS READY, CFILE REQUESTS WHICH OPTION
IS DESIRED:
SELECT OPTION:
1 = DOS FILE TO BASIC
2 = BASIC FILE TO DOS
THE USER RESPONDS WITH "1" OR "2", FOLLOWED BY CARRIAGE RETURN, LINE-
FEED. IF A RESPONSE OTHER THAN "1" OR "2" IS GIVEN, CFILE REPEATS THE
OPTION REQUEST.
IF OPTION "1" IS SELECTED:
CFILE TYPES "FILENAME?" AND WAITS FOR THE USER TO TYPE THE NAME
OF THE DOS FILE THAT IS TO BE CONVERTED TO A BASIC FILE WITHIN
"$FILS". THE USER TYPES THE FILENAME OR "/E". "/E" TERMINATES
CFILE. IF A FILENAME IS TYPED, CFILE CHECKS TO SEE THAT IT EXISTS.
ITS SIZE IS CHECKED AND THE DIRECTORY IN "$FILS" IS EXAMINED TO SEE
IF THERE IS SPACE FOR ANOTHER ENTRY. IF SO, AN ENTRY IS BUILT FOR
THE NAMED FILE AND IT IS COPIED TO "$FILS". OTHERWISE, AN ERROR
MESSAGE IS PRINTED AND CFILE TERMINATES. AFTER A SUCCESSFUL FILE
COPY, CFILE REPEATS THE QUESTION "FILENAME?" AND THE PROCESS
CONTINUES AS ABOVE.
IF OPTION "2" IS SELECTED:
BEFORE RUNNING CFILE, THE USER SHOULD CREATE AN ASCII DOS DATA
FILE LARGE ENOUGH TO HOLD THE BASIC DATA FILE TO BE CONVERTED. TO
CALCULATE THE NUMBER OF SECTORS NEEDED, DOUBLE THE NUMBER OF
RECORDS IN THE BASIC FILE AND ADD ONE. (E.G. IF THE BASIC FILE
HAS 5 RECORDS, :ST,A,FILENAME,11) THE NAME OF THE DOS FILE MUST BE
THE SAME AS THE FIRST FIVE CHARACTERS OF THE BASIC FILENAME.
CFILE TYPES "FLENAME?" AND WAITS FOR THE USER TO TYPE THE NAME OF
THE BASIC FILE THAT IS TO BE CONVERTED TO A DOS FILE. THE USER
TYPES A FILENAME OR "/E". "/E" TERMINATES CFILE. IF A FILENAME
IS TYPED, CFILE CHECKS TO SEE THAT IT EXISTS WITHIN "$FILS", THAT
IT IS NOT A PROGRAM FILE, AND THAT A DOS FILE OF THE APPROPRIATE
NAME AND SIZE ALSO EXISTS. ERROR MESSAGES ARE PRINTED IF ANY OF
THESE CONDITIONS ARE NOT MET AND CFILE TERMINATES. IF ALL IS WELL,
CFILE PRINTS "ENTER USER ID" AND WAITS FOR THE USER'S RESPONSE.
THE USER MUST ENTER THE TSB USER ID INTO WHICH HE WANTS THE FILE
TO BE TRANSFERRED. THE FILE IS THEN CONVERTED TO A DOS FILE AND
FORMATTED FOR THE FILE HANDLER. THEN THE QUESTION "FILENAME?" IS
REPEATED AND PROCESSING CONTINUES AS DESCRIBED ABOVE.
1. LOAD BASIC AS DESCRIBED IN OPERATING PROCEDURES BELOW.
2. RUN BASIC:
:PR,BASIC
3. AFTER "READY" IS PRINTED, TYPE YOUR PROGRAM.
4. TYPE "RUN".
5. TYPE: BYE
6. BASIC WILL TERMINATE WITH THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE:
XXX MINUTES OF TERMINAL TIME WHERE XXX IS THE NUMBER OF WHOLE
MINUTES THAT BASIC HAS BEEN
RUNNING OR "000" IF NO TIME-BASE
GENERATOR IS IN THE SYSTEM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
ERROR MESSAGES ARE CONTAINED IN THE REFERENCES LISTED IN THE SECTION
ON LITERATURE REFERENCE UNDER 'MISCELLANEOUS'.
IF A COMMAND IS GIVEN TO DOS-M/DOS III BASIC THAT REQUIRES DISC STORAGE,
A CHECK IS MADE TO SEE THAT A DOS FILE NAMED "$FILS" EXISTS AND HAS BEEN
INITIALIZED WITH BFILE. IF NOT, THE MESSAGE "$FILS NOT INITIALIZED"
IS PRINTED.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
"CSAVE"'D PROGRAMS MAY NOT BE TRANSFERRED FROM A 2000 SYSTEM TO DOS-M/
DOS III BASIC.
VDR00 (HP 20985) MUST BE USED AS THE TELETYPE DRIVER, NOT DVR05.
(BASIC REQUIRES THE "BINARY" I/O CAPABILITIES OF DVR00, WHICH ARE NOT
INCLUDED IN DVR05.) BASIC (AND ITS SEGMENTS), BFILE, CFILE, AND $FILS
MUST ALL RESIDE ON THE SAME DISC SUBCHANNEL.
NOTE: SOME VERSIONS OF THE STANDARD DOS III RELOCATING LOADER WILL NOT
LOAD BASIC PROPERLY, EVEN THOUGH THEY SUPPORT CURRENT PAGE LINKING.
USE THE LOADER INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE IF YOU HAVE BASE PAGE OVER-
FLOW PROBLEMS.
LITERATURE REFERENCE:
2000F: A GUIDE TO TIME-SHARED BASIC, HP02000-90044.
DOS-M/2000C TSB FILE HANDLER, HP SMALL PROGRAMS MANUAL, 5951-1381.
X17301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
LANGUAGE PARSING
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
CHARACTER SORT
**LANGUAGES:
FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS PROGRAM READS A GRAMMAR, EXPRESSED IN PRODUCTION NOTATION, THEN
READS ONE OR MORE STRINGS OF 1-60 CHARACTERS, TESTING EACH STRING TO
DETERMINE IF IT IS IN THE LANGUAGE GENERATED BY THE GRAMMER. IF IT IS,
A SYNTAX TREE IS PRODUCED. THE PROGRAM IS OPERABLE IN BCS. EQUIPMENT
REQUIRED IS 8K OF CORE STORAGE, A PHOTOREADER AND TELETYPE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
1. COMPILE AND ASSEMBLE THE FORTRAN II SOURCE TAPE.
2. LOAD THE ABSOLUTE TAPE.
3. SET S.R. TO 2.
4. PLACE DATA TAPE IN PHOTOREADER.
5. PRESS RUN.
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
PROGRAM PARSE
THIS PROGRAM READS A GRAMMAR, EXPRESSED IN PRODUCTION NOTATION, THEN
READS ONE OR MORE STRINGS OF 1-60 CHARACTERS, TESTING EACH STRING TO
DETERMINE IF IT IS IN THE LANGUAGE GENERATED BY THE GRAMMAR. IF IT IS,
A SYNTAX TREE IS PRODUCED.
METHOD:
THIS PROGRAM USES THE METHOD OF TOP-DOWN SYNTAX ANALYSIS TO ATTEMPT
TO BUILD A SYNTAX TREE FOR THE INPUT STRING. DESCRIPTIONS OF THIS
METHOD MAY BE FOUND IN THE PAPER BY CHEATHAM AND SATTLEY AND THE BOOK
BY KELLER AND WRIGHT. SOME OF THE PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUES CAN BE FOUND
IN BARRON'S BOOK.
INPUT:
THE FIRST INPUT STATEMENT MUST BE A $ / IN A 3A1 FORMAT TO SATISFY
THE PROGRAM LITERAL CONSTANT REQUIREMENTS.
INPUT TO THIS PROGRAM IS SOME GRAMMAR, G, FOLLOWED BY ONE OR MORE
STRINGS WHICH WILL BE TESTED TO DETERMINE WHETHER OR NOT THEY ARE IN
THE LANGUAGE L(G).
THERE IS ONE INPUT STATEMENT FOR EACH PRODUCTION. COLUMN ONE CONTAINS
THE NONTERMINAL SYMBOL WHICH IS THE LEFT PART OF THE PRODUCTION.
COLUMN FIVE CONTAINS THE LENGTH OF THE RIGHT PART OF THE PRODUCTION.
COLUMNS 7-12 CONTAIN THE RIGHT PART OF THE PRODUCTION IN A 5A1 FORMAT.
COLUMNS 15-24 CONTAIN THE NUMERICAL REPRESENTATION OF THE RIGHT PART IN
A 5I2 FORMAT. THE LAST PRODUCTION IS A NULL PRODUCTION FOR LATER
TESTING PURPOSES.
A STATEMENT PRECEDING THE GRAMMAR IS REQUIRED. IT CONTAINS THE NUMBER
OF PRODUCTIONS IN THE GRAMMAR IN COLUMNS 1-2. THIS STATEMENT IS ALSO
USED TO REQUEST A PROGRAM TRACE. A TRACE IS REQUESTED BY PLACING A 1
IN COLUMN 21.
AN EXAMPLE OF THE INPUT FOR ONE TEST CASE FOLLOWS:
COLUMNS 11111111112222222222333333333344444444445
12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890
$ /
8 0
Q 2 E; 0200
E 3 T+E 040002
E 1 T 04
T 3 P*T 060004
T 1 P 06
P 3 (E) 000200
P 1 V 00
?
V;
V+V;
V+V+V;
V+V+V+V+V+V+V+V+V+V;
V*(V+V)*(V+V);
(V+V)*(V+V)*V+(V*V+V)
(V+V)*V+V)*V+(V*V+V);
(V);
((V));
(((V)));
((((V))));
(((((V)))));
/
STATEMENT ONE INDICATES THAT THERE ARE EIGHT PRODUCTIONS IN THE GRAMMAR
WHICH FOLLOWS. STATEMENTS 2-8 DESCRIBE THE GRAMMAR. STATEMENT 9 IS THE
REQUIRED NULL PRODUCTION. STATEMENTS 10-16 ARE THE STRINGS TO BE
EXAMINED. STATEMENT 17 (/ IN COLUMN 1) INDICATES THAT THERE ARE NO
MORE INPUT STRINGS. IF A TRACE WAS DESIRED A ONE WOULD HAVE BEEN
PLACED IN COLUMN 21 OF STATEMENT ONE. EACH INPUT STRING IS LIMITED
TO 60 CHARACTERS, MUST START IN COLUMN ONE AND MUST NOT CONTAIN
EMBEDDED BLANKS.
OUTPUT:
THE FIRST SECTION OF OUTPUT IN ANY RUN OF THIS PROGRAM IS A COPY OF THE
GRAMMAR, G, IN TABULAR FORM. THERE ARE AT LEAST TWO LINES OF OUTPUT
FOR EACH INPUT STRING. THE FIRST OF THESE LINES IS A COPY OF THE INPUT
STRING AND THE SECOND INDICATES WHETHER OR NOT IT IS VALID IN L(G). IN
ADDITION, A DESCRIPTION OF THE SYNTAX TREE IS PRINTED FOR VALID STRINGS.
TEST DATA AND (PARTIAL) VERIFICATION:
THIS PROGRAM HAS BEEN TESTED WITH THE INPUT DESCRIBED ABOVE AND FOUND
TO BE WORKING. IT HAS ALSO BEEN TESTED WITH THE DATA BELOW.
IN THE ABOVE CASE THE P IN PARENTHESIS IS A WORST CASE SEARCH. THE
ADDITIONAL TIME REQUIRED FOR THE SEARCH IS PROPORTIONAL TO N! WHERE N
IS THE NUMBER OF PARENTHESIS PAIRS. THE TIME REQUIRED FOR THE WORST
CASE SEARCH CAN BE DECREASED SIGNIFICANTLY BY REWRITING THE GRAMMAR.
THE GRAMMAR REMAINS IN THIS FORM FOR DEMONSTRATION PURPOSES.
TO PERFORM A TRACE, THE FOLLOWING MAY BE USED:
$ /
8 1
Q 2 E 0200
E 3 T+E 040002
E 1 T 04
T 3 P*T 060004
T 1 P 06
P 3 (E) 000200
P 1 V 00
?
V+V
/
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
REFERENCES:
CHEATHAM, T.E. AND SATTLEY, KIRK. SYNTAX DIRECTED COMPILING.
PROCEEDINGS, 1964 SJCC.
BARRON, D.W. RECURSIVE TECHNIQUES IN PROGRAMMING.
NEW YORK. AMERICAN ELSEVIER PUBLISHING CO. C1968.
KELLER, ROY F. AND WRIGHT, CHARLES T. ALGEBRAIC LANGUAGES
AND THEIR TRANSLATORS. NEW YORK. HOLT RINEHART AND WINSTON. C1970.
GRIES, DAVID. COMPILER CONSTRUCTION FOR DIGITAL COMPUTERS. JOHN
WILEY AND SONS INC. NEW YORK. C1971.
LEE, JOHN A.N. COMPUTER SEMANTICS. VAN NOSTRAND REINHOLD COMPANY,
NEW YORK. C1972.
X17401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 2IMX PAPER TAPE ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB (ABS)
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
SIO
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS IS A PAPER TAPE BASED ASSEMBLER FOR THE HP 21MX COMPUTER SERIES.
IT IS A USABLE SUBSET OF THE DOS 21MX ASSEMBLER. ALL INSTRUCTIONS FROM
THE 21MX COMPUTER REFERENCE MANUAL HAVE BEEN IMPLEMENTED. THE ASSEMBLER
WILL GENERATE BOTH RELOCATABLE AND ABSOLUTE CODE. THE ASSEMBLER OPER-
ATES WITH STANDARD SIO DRIVERS IN ANY 2100 SERIES COMPUTER WITH A MINI-
MUM OF 8K MEMORY AND A TELETYPE.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS ARE AN 8K 2100 SERIES COMPUTER AND TELETYPE.
ALTHOUGH ASSEMBLER WILL RUN ON ANY 2100 SERIES COMPUTER, IT SHOULD BE
USED ONLY TO GENERATE CODE FOR USE ON THE 21MX SERIES. FLOATING POINT
INSTRUCTIONS WILL ALWAYS BE GENERATED AND MANY 21MX CODES ARE ILLEGAL
ON OTHER 2100'S.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
FILE# 4: SOURCE
FILE# 5: SOURCE
FILE# 6: SOURCE
FILE# 7: SOURCE
FILE# 8: SOURCE
FILE# 9: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. ASSEMBLE THE HP 21MX PAPER TAPE ASSEMBLER SOURCE IN FILE 1.
THIS WILL PRODUCE A LISTING ABOUT 1 INCH THICK; CHANGE THE
THE CONTROL STATEMENT IF DESIRED. AN ABSOLUTE PAPER TAPE IS
PRODUCED.
2. WITH THE BBL, LOAD AND CONFIGURE ANY DESIRED STANDARD SIO DRIVERS.
LOAD THE 21MX PAPER TAPER ASSEMBLER. IF DESIRED, USE THE SIO DUMP
TO DUMP THE SIO DRIVERS OR CONFIGURED 21MX ASSEMBLER.
3. LOAD ADDRESS 100B (120B IF THE CONTROL STATEMENT IS TO BE ENTERED
THROUGH THE TTY). PLACE A TEST TAPE IN THE READER. CLEAR THE
SWITCH REGISTER, PRESS PRESET AND RUN.
4. WHEN A HLT 11B OCCURS, RELOAD A TEST TAPE IN THE READER AND PRESS
RUN.
5. FOR ANY QUESTIONS; CONSULT AN HP ASSEMBLER MANUAL, THE 21MX COMPUTER
MANUAL, THE SIO SUBSYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL, OR THE ASSEMBLER,
FORTRAN, AND ALGOL ERROR MESSAGES.
USER PROGRAMMING INSTRUCTIONS
1. THE MIC PSEUDO INSTRUCTION HAS NOT BEEN IMPLEMENTED; RAM IS STILL
VALID.
2. THE PRESENCE OR ABSENCE OF THE F OPTION IN THE CONTROL STATEMENT
HAS NO AFFECT ON THE CODE PRODUCED.
3. A BIT INSTRUCTION MUST BE CODED AS FOLLOWS:
CBS MASK
DEF WORD
4. ANY INSTRUCTION REQUIRING AN ADDRESS IS CODED AS FOLLOWS:
LAX ADDR
5. THE INTERRUPTABLE INSTRUCTIONS AUTOMATICALLY GENERATE THE REQUIRED
THIRD WORD NOP WITHOUT ANY PROGRAMMING EFFORT.
LDA ADDR1
LDB ADDR2
MBT CNT
6. ALL INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE 21MX COMPUTER REFERENCE MANUAL HAVE BEEN
IMPLEMENTED AT THIS TIME. THE MEMORY MANAGEMENT INSTRUCTIONS HAVE
NOT BEEN IMPLEMENTED AT THIS TIME.
7. THE ASSEMBLER OCCUPIES 4500 WORDS BASE 10 PLUS ANY SIO DRIVERS.
THE REMAINING MEMORY SPACE IS USED FOR THE SYMBOL TABLE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
FOR ERROR MESSAGES, CONSULT THE ERROR SECTIONS OF THE FOLLOWING MANUALS:
HP ASSEMBLER MANUAL (02116-9014)
A POCKET GUIDE TO THE 2100 COMPUTER (5951-4923)
ASSEMBLER, FORTRAN, AND ALGOL ERROR MESSAGES (5951-1377)
**MISCELLANEOUS:
21MX COMPUTER REFERENCE MANUAL (02108-90002)
A POCKET GUIDE TO THE 2100 COMPUTER (5951-4423)
HP ASSEMBLER MANUAL (02116-9014)
SIO SUBSYSTEM OPERATION MANUAL (5951-1390)
ASSEMBLER, FORTRAN, AND ALGOL ERROR MESSAGES (5951-1377)
X17501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
INTEL 8080 ASSEMBLER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 1
**KEYWORDS:
ASSEMBLER INTEL
**LANGUAGES:
ALGOL ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
INTEL 8080 MICROPROCESSOR CROSS ASSEMBLER.
INPUT: SOURCE LANGUAGE IN 8080 MNEMONICS.
OUTPUT: DEPENDING ON CONTROL STATEMENT.
1. LIST - PROGRAM LIST WITH CHIP ADDRESS, RELATIVE ADDRESS,
CODE, REMARKS.
2. TABLE - LIST OF SYMBOLS USED AND THEIR VALUES (LOCATION).
3. BINARY - PAPER TAPE (ASCII).
4. SORT - SAME AS TABLE BUT ALPHANUMERIC.
FORM: VERY CLOSE TO HP ASSEMBLY.
SYSTEM: DESIGNED FOR DOS-M, BUT EASILY ALTERABLE TO ANY SYSTEM
SUPPORTING ALGOL.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS: DOS SYSTEM WITH LP AND TTY.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
REFER TO COMMENTS IN SOURCE CODE.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X17601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 12539A TIME BASE GENERATOR DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE PROVIDES A MEANS FOR MEASURING THE TIME OF DAY. ELAPSED
TIME CAN ALSO BE MEASURED. THE TIME-OF-DAY AND ELAPSED TIME FUNCTIONS
MAY BE USED SIMULTANEOUSLY WITHOUT RESTRICTIONS. WHEN THE TIME-OF-DAY
IS READ OUT, THE UNITS ARE HOURS, MINUTES, AND SECONDS, EACH EXPRESSED
AS A FLOATING POINT NUMBER.
FOR TIME-OF-DAY USE, THE ROUTINE MUST BE INITIATED WITH THE CURRENT
TIME. IN EITHER USE, THE ROUTINE CAUSES A PROGRAM INTERRUPT EVERY 10
MILLISECONDS; THE TIME-OF-DAY AND ELAPSED TIME COUNTS ARE THEN
INCREMENTED IF NECESSARY. WHEN THE PROGRAM HALTS THE TIME-OF-DAY AND
ELAPSED TIME COUNTS STOP.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS ONE HP 12539A TIME BASE GENERATOR INTERFACE KIT.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
TO UTILIZE THE "TBGDR" IT MUST BE CALLED TO EITHER SET THE TIME OF DAY
OR SET THE INTERVAL TIMER. WHEN CALLED TO SET THE TIME OF DAY, THE
DRIVER FIRST SETS ITS INTERNAL HOURS, MINUTES, AND SECONDS COUNTERS TO
THE DESIRED VALUES. IT WILL THEN INITIALIZE THE TIME BASE GENERATOR
AND RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. WHEN CALLED TO SET THE INTERVAL
TIMER, THE DRIVER FIRST SETS UP A COUNTER, WHICH WILL BE INCREMENTED
AT THE DESIRED INTERVAL. IT WILL THEN INITIALIZE THE TIME BASE
GENERATOR AND RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
WHEN CALLED TO OBTAIN THE TIME OF DAY, THE DRIVER WILL GET THE VALUES,
AT THE CURRENT TIME, OF THE HOURS, MINUTES AND SECONDS COUNTERS AND
THEN RETURN THESE VALUES, IN THE FORM OF THREE INTEGER NUMBERS, TO THE
CALLING PROGRAM. IT WILL THEN RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. WHEN
CALLED TO OBTAIN THE ELAPSED TIME, THE DRIVER WILL GET THE CURRENT
VALUE OF THE INTERVAL COUNTER AND RETURN THIS VALUE TO THE CALLING
PROGRAM IN THE FORM OF AN INTEGER NUMBER. IT THEN RETURNS TO THE
CALLING PROGRAM.
ONCE THE TIME BASE GENERATOR HAS BEEN INITIALIZED, IT WILL INTERRUPT
EVERY 10 MILLISECONDS. WHEN AN INTERRUPT OCCURS, THE INTERRUPT SERVICE
ROUTINE IN THE DRIVER IS EXECUTED. THIS ROUTINE WILL INCREMENT, AND
RESET WHEN NECESSARY, THE HOURS, MINUTES AND SECONDS COUNTERS. IT WILL
ALSO INCREMENT THE INTERVAL COUNTER AT THE DESIRED INTERVAL. WHEN ALL
THE CONTERS HAVE BEEN INCREMENTED, THE ROUTINE RESETS THE TBG AND
RETURNS EXECUTION TO THE PROGRAM IN PROGRESS.
IT IS IMPORTANT TO NOTE THAT BOTH THE TIME OF DAY ROUTINE AND INTERVAL
TIMER ROUTINE MAY BE USED SIMULTANEOUSLY OR INDEPENDENTLY WITHOUT ANY
RESTRICTIONS.
USE USUAL ASSEMBLY, LOAD, AND RUN PROCEDURES. NO CONTROL STATEMENT ON
SOURCE TAPE.
THIS RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINE MAY BE CONFIGURED FOR THE I/O CHANNEL USED
BY THE PERTINENT INTERFACE CARD BY ALTERING STATEMENT:
#133 TBG EQU 11B ASSIGN I/O CHANNEL ADDRESS
THE MEMORY LOCATION ASSOCIATED WITH THE CHANNEL SHOULD BE LEFT EMPTY
AT BCS CONFIGURATION TIME.
ENTRY POINT(S)
TO SET THE TIME OF DAY:
CALL SETUP (IHRS, IMINS, ISECS)
TO OBTAIN THE TIME OF DAY:
CALL DATIM (IHRS, IMINS, ISECS)
TO SET THE INTERVAL TIMER:
CALL STCLK (INTER)
TO OBTAIN THE ELAPSED TIME SINCE THE INTERVAL TIMER WAS SET:
CALL RDCLK (ITIME)
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
IHRS INTEGER A VARIABLE REPRESENTING THE TIME IN HOURS (0-23).
IMINS INTEGER A VARIABLE REPRESENTING THE TIME IN MINUTES
(0-59).
INTER INTEGER A POSITIVE INTEGER VARIABLE OR CONSTANT
SPECIFYING THE DESIRED INTERVAL. (THE INTERVAL
WILL BE EQUAL TO: INTER X 10 MS.)
ISECS INTEGER A VARIABLE REPRESENTING THE TIME IN SECONDS
(0-59).
ITIME INTEGER A VARIABLE WHICH IS SET TO THE NUMBER OF ELAPSED
INTERVALS UPON RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X17701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP 2331A X-Y DISPLAY SUBSYSTEM DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PLOTTER GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DRIVER SETS UP CRT DISPLAYS ON AN HP1300A LARGE SCREEN DISPLAY.
THE X AND Y AXES ARE PLOTTED, IF DESIRED.
EQUIPMENT REQURED INCLUDES AN HP2331A X-Y DISPLAY SUBSYSTEM, CONSISTING
OF AN HP1300 X-Y LARGE SCREEN DISPLAY AND A DUAL D/A CONVERTER INTERFACE
KIT.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
IN ORDER TO UTILIZE THE X-Y DISPLAY SUBSYSTEM DRIVER, IT MUST FIRST
BE CALLED TO SET UP THE PLOT BUFFER, IN WHICH CASE, IT WILL PROCESS THE
BUFFER ADDRESS AND LENGTH AND SAVE THEM FOR USE BY THE INTERRUPT SERVICE
ROUTINE. THE DRIVER THEN RETURNS TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
ONCE THE PLOT BUFFER HAS BEEN SET UP, THE DRIVER MAY THEN BE CALLED TO
ENTER POINTS TO BE DISPLAYED. IN THIS CASE, IT WILL PROCESS THE X AND Y
VALUES, DETERMINING IF THEY ARE IN THE CORRECT RANGE AND MERGING THEM
INTO A SINGLE WORD. IT WILL THEN STORE THIS WORD IN THE PLOT BUFFER
AND RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. IN THE EVENT THAT EITHER THE X OR Y
VALUE IS OUTSIDE THE PROPER RANGE, THE DRIVER RETURNS TO THE CALLING
PROGRAM WITHOUT STORING THE POINT IN THE PLOT BUFFER.
WHEN THE DRIVER IS CALLED TO DISPLAY A SET OF X-Y AXIS, IT WILL FIRST
DETERMINE IF THE PLOT BUFFER HAS BEEN SET UP. IF IT HAS, IT WILL THEN
PROCESS THE X AND Y POSITION VALUES, DETERMINING A SET OF CORRESPONDING
CONSTANTS AND SAVING THEM FOR USE BY THE INTERRUPT SERVICE ROUTINE. IT
WILL THEN RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. IF THE DRIVER IS CALLED TO
DISPLAY THE AXIS BEFORE THE PLOT BUFFER IS SET UP, IT WILL IGNORE THE
REQUEST AND RETURN IMMEDIATELY TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
THE DRIVER MAY ALSO BE CALLED TO CLEAR THE PLOT BUFFER, IN WHICH CASE,
IT WILL FIRST DETERMINE IF THE PLOT BUFFER HAS BEEN SET UP. IF IT HAS,
THE DRIVER THEN CLEARS IT BY SETTING EACH LOCATION TO A 0 AND IT WILL
THEN RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. IF THE DRIVER IS CALLED TO CLEAR
THE PLOT BUFFER BEFORE IT HAS BEEN SET UP, IT WILL IGNORE THE REQUEST
AND RETURN IMMEDIATELY TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
THE KEY SEGMENT OF THIS DRIVER IS THE INTERRUPT SERVICE SUBROUTINE,
WHICH IS EXECUTED EACH TIME THE D/A CONVERTER INTERRUPTS (ABOUT EVERY
TWENTY MILLISECONDS). WHEN THIS INTERRUPT OCCURS, THIS SUBROUTINE WILL
FIRST DISPLAY THE X AND Y AXIS, IF THIS OPTION IS REQUESTED. NEXT IT
WILL DISPLAY THE CONTENTS OF THE PLOT BUFFER, INITIALIZE THE D/A
CONVERTER AND RETURN TO THE PROGRAM IN PROGRESS.
USE USUAL ASSEMBLY, LOAD AND RUN PROCEDURES.
THIS RELOCATABLE SUBROUTINE MAY BE CONFIGURED FOR THE I/O CHANNEL USED
BY THE PERTINENT INTERFACE CARD BY ALTERING STATEMENT:
#198 DACON EQU 23B ASSIGN I/O ADDRESS
THE MEMORY LOCATION ASSOCIATED WITH THIS CHANNEL SHOULD BE LEFT EMPTY
AT BCS CONFIGURATION TIME.
TO DISPLAY THE CONTENTS OF THE PLOT BUFFER USING DIRECT MEMORY ACCESS,
THE N OPTION MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTROL STATEMENT DURING ASSEMBLY
OF THIS PROGRAM.
TO SET UP THE PLOT BUFFER:
CALL PLOTB(IARRY,NUMBR)
TO TURN OFF THE X-Y DISPLAY:
CALL PLOTB(IARRY,0)
TO STORE A POINT IN THE PLOT BUFFER:
CALL DISPT(IXVAL,IYVAL)
TO DISPLAY A SET OF X AND Y AXIS:
CALL GRPAH(IXAXS,IYAXS)
TO TERMINATE DISPLAY OF THE AXIS:
CALL GRAPH(-1,0)
TO CLEAR THE PLOT BUFFER:
CALL ERASE
PARAMETER TYPE DESCRIPTION
--------- ---- -----------
IARRY INTEGER NAME OF ARRAY USED TO STORE THE POINTS TO BE
DISPLAYED.
IXAXS INTEGER VARIABLE OR CONSTANT SPECIFYING THE POSITION OF
THE X-AXIS, AS SHOWN BELOW:
NO. POSITION
0 BOTTOM
1 CENTER
2 TOP
IXVAL INTEGER VARIABLE OR CONSTANT IN THE RANGE OF 0 TO 255
REPRESENTING THE X-COORDINATE VALUE.
IYAXS INTEGER VARIABLE OR CONSTANT SPECIFYING THE POSITION
OF THE Y-AXIS, AS SHOWN BELOW:
NO. POSITION
0 LEFT
1 CENTER
2 RIGHT
IYVAL INTEGER VARIABLE OR CONSTANT IN THE RANGE 0 TO 255,
REPRESENTING THE Y-COORDINATE VALUE.
NUMBR INTEGER VARIABLE OR CONSTANT WHICH SPECIFIES THE
NUMBER OF POINTS TO BE DISPLAYED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X17801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP2911A/B CROSSBAR SCANNER DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER SCANNER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
HP BASIC
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE CONTROLS AN HP2911 GUARDED CROSSBAR SCANNER. THE SCANNER
SAMPLES THE DATA CHANNEL DESIGNATED, AND FORWARDS THE SAMPLE TO A
METER OR EXTERNAL RECORDING DEVICE. CONTROL WORDS FROM THE CALLING
PROGRAM SPECIFY THE DATA CHANNEL, DELAY, AND TYPE OF MEASUREMENT
(DC VOLTS, AC VOLTS, RESISTANCE, OR FREQUENCY). THE ROUTINE OPERATES
UNDER THE 20392A BASIC OPERATING SYSTEM.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS ONE HP2911 GUARDED CROSSBAR SCANNER, WITH
PROGRAMMING INTERFACE KIT.
THIS ROUTINE IS BASIC CALLABLE AND SHOULD BE USED ONLY IN CONJUNCTION
WITH THE HP20392A BASIC INTERPRETER.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
TO CONFIGURE THIS PROGRAM FOR USE WITH DIFFERENT I/O CHANNELS, FOLLOW
THE PROCEDURE BELOW -
LOAD THE BASIC INTERPRETER, USING THE BBL.
B. LOAD THE HP2911A/B CROSSBAR SCANNER DRIVER, USING THE BBL.
C. LOAD ADDRESS TO 77B.
D. LOAD THE A-REGISTER WITH THE SELECT CODE OF THE SCANNER
PROGRAMMING INTERFACE CARD.
E. PRESS PRESET.
F. PRESS RUN.
THE COMPUTER WILL NOW HALT WITH A 102077 IN THE T-REGISTER AND THE
DRIVER IS READY FOR USE.
TO CONFIGURE THE HP2911A/B CROSSBAR SCANNER DRIVER FOR A PARTICULAR
I/O CHANNEL MODIFY STATEMENT #0149 (XBAR EQU 15B ASSIGN I/O
CHANNEL NUMBER).
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
WHEN CALLED, THE DRIVER WILL FIRST PROCESS THE CHANNEL NUMBER,
CONVERTING IT FROM FLOATING POINT TO BCD. IT WILL THEN PROGRAM THE
SCANNER FOR THE DESIRED CHANNEL NUMBER, FUNCTION AND DELAY AND RETURN
TO THE CALLING PROGRAM. IN THE EVENT THAT A CALLING PARAMETER IS
INCORRECTLY SPECIFIED, THE DRIVER RETURNS TO THE CALLING PROGRAM WITH
THE APROPRIATE ERROR INDICATION.
THE DRIVER IS CALLED FROM BASIC AS:
CALL (1, C, P, S)
WHERE C - A VARIABLE OR CONSTANT SPECIFYING THE DESIRED
CHANNEL NUMBER.
P - A TWO-DIGIT VARIABLE OR CONSTANT SPECIFYING
THE DESIRED DELAY AND FUNCTION, AS SHOWN BELOW -
ONES DIGIT - DELAY (MS)
-----------------------
(150V) (150V)
0 15 22
1 17.5 27
2 22 22
3 27 97
4 42 145
5 62 500
6 145 145
7 500 500
TEN DIGIT - FUNCTION
--------------------
0 AC OR DC VOLTS
1 FREQUENCY
2 OHMS
S - A VARIABLE INDICATING THE STATUS, AS SHOWN
BELOW, UPON RETURN TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
STATUS
------
-1 COMMAND ERROR
0 NORMAL RESPONSE
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THIS PROGRAM SHOULD BE USED ONLY IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE HP20392A BASIC
INTERPRETER. USE WITH ANY OTHER VERSION OF THE BASIC INTERPRETER WILL
RESULT IN UNSUCCESSFUL PROGRAM EXECUTION.
TO OVERLAY THE MATRIX OPERATIONS OF THE INTERPRETER WITH THIS PROGRAM,
THE N OPTION MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTROL STATEMENT DURING ASSEMBLY.
X17901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP12551B RELAY REGISTER INTERFACE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
USED WITH THE HP12551A OR 12551B RELAY OUTPUT REGISTER, THIS ROUTINE
OPENS OR CLOSES ANY SPECIFIED RELAY CONTACT. IN ADDITION, ALL RELAY
CONTACTS CAN BE OPENED SIMULTANEOUSLY. AFTER CONTACT OPENING OR
CLOSURE, THE ROUTINE REMAINS IN A WAITING LOOP FOR APPROXIMATELY 300
MILLISECONDS TO ALLOW TIME FOR RELAY CONTACTS TO SETTLE.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS ONE HP12551A OR 125518 RELAY OUTPUT REGISTER,
WITH INTERFACE KIT.
THIS ROUTINE IS FORTRAN CALLABLE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE DRIVER MAY BE CALLED TO OPEN OR CLOSE A DESIRED RELAY CONTACT OR
OPEN ALL OF THE CONTACTS SIMULTANEOUSLY. WHEN CALLED TO OPEN OR CLOSE A
SINGLE CONTACT, IT WILL PROCESS THE CONTACT NUMBER, DETERMINING IF IT IS
IN THE RANGE OF 0 TO 15 AND THEN FORMING A WORD WITH A SINGLE BIT SET IN
THE CORRESPONDING POSITION. WHEN CLOSING A CONTACT, THIS BIT IS MERGED
WITH THE PREVIOUS PATTERN AND WHEN OPENING A CONTACT, THIS BIT IS
COMPLEMENTED AND USED TO MASK THE PREVIOUS CONTACT PATTERN. THE NEW
PATTERN IS THEN OUTPUT TO THE RELAY REGISTER, WHICH OPENS OR CLOSES
THE DESIRED CONTACT, AND THE DRIVER WILL THEN WAIT IN A PROGRAM LOOP
FOR APPROXIMATELY 300 MILLISECONDS TO ALLOW THE CONTACTS TO SETTLE.
IT THEN RETURNS TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
WHEN CALLED TO OPEN ALL RELAY CONTACTS SIMULTANEOUSLY, THE DRIVER WILL
OUTPUT A PATTERN OF 0'S TO THE RELAY REGISTER AND IT WILL THEN WAIT
IN A PROGRAM LOOP FOR APPROXIMATELY 300 MILLISECONDS TO ALLOW THE
CONTACTS TO SETTLE. IT THEN RETURNS TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
CLOSE A DESIRED RELAY CONTACT, THE DRIVER IS CALLED FROM FORTRAN AS:
CALL CLRLY (ICONT)
OPEN A DESIRED RELAY CONTACT, THE DRIVER IS CALLED FROM FORTRAN AS:
CALL OPRLY (ICONT)
WHERE ICONT - AN INTEGER VARIABLE OR CONSTANT IN THE RANGE
OF 0 TO 15, WHICH SPECIFIES THE DESIRED CONTACT.
OPEN ALL RELAY CONTACTS SIMULTANEOUSLY, THE DRIVER IS CALLED FROM
FORTRAN AS:
CALL ALLOP
THIS PROGRAM IS INTENDED FOR USE ALSO WITH THE HP12551A RELAY REGISTER
INTERFACE KIT.
TO CONFIGURE THE HP12551B RELAY REGISTER INTERFACE DRIVER FOR A PARTI-
CULAR I/O CHANNEL MODIFY STATEMENT
#0105 (RELAY EQU 25B ASSIGN I/O ADDRESS).
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X18001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS - DOS-M HP2331 XY SCOPE DISPLAY
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER SCOPE GRAPHIC
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB FTN2
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
16K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
POINT, CHARACTER AND GRAPH DISPLAY ARE AVAILABLE IN CONNECTION WITH
HP2331 X-Y SCOPE SUBSYSTEM. THE SOFTWARE GENERATES POINT COORDINATES
(8 BIT FOR X, 8 BIT FOR Y) INTO A USER DEFINED BUFFER AND PROVIDES
FOR IMAGE REFRESH OUT OF THE BUFFER EVERY 20 MSEC. CALLS ARE COMPATIBLE
WITH BCS HP2331 SOFTWARE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
DIFFERENCES TO BCS SCOPE SOFTWARE:
1. WILL OPERATE IN 16K MINIMUM DOS OR DOS-M ENVIRONMENT, BUT REQUIRES
THE SECOND DMA CHANNEL CONSTANTLY DURING DION. IN DOS-M DVR13 WILL
(CONTROLLED BY THE CALLING ROUTINE SCOPE) AUTOMATICALLY SELECT DMA
CHANNEL 7 SO AS NOT TO DISTURB DVR31 WHICH CAN ONLY OPERATE ON
CHANNEL 6.
2. CALL SCOPE (WITH DOS LOGICAL UNIT)
ONLY DIFFERENCE
3. FOR BETTER OPERATION:
- TRY TO KEEP SYSTEM QUIET, I.E., DO NOT CONSTANTLY CALL EXEC IN
LOOP, USE WAIT ROUTINE FOR WAITING!
- USE DIOFF AND DION EXTENSIVELY
ATTENTION : SYSTEM ASSUMES THE FOLLOWING CODING IN DISC-MONITOR
X18101
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BCS POWER FAIL TTY DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS BCS TELEPRINTER DRIVER INCORPORATES A POWER FAIL ROUTINE FOR ANY
HP21XX COMPUTER WITH POWER FAIL. IT SAVES AND RESTORES ALL THE
REGISTERS INCLUDING THE SWITCH REGISTER. IF THE AUTOSTART OPTION IS
AVAILABLE, THIS DRIVER WILL RESTART THE PROGRAM AT THE INTERRUPTED
POINT AND RESTORE THE TELEPRINTER TO ITS PREVIOUS STATUS. IF THE FULL
CAPABILITY OF THIS ROUTINE IS USED TO DRIVE A COMPLETE PAPER TAPE SYSTEM
INCLUDING PHOTOREADER AND HIGH-SPEED PUNCH, THEN THIS DRIVER ALONE WILL
REVIVE THE COMPLETE PAPER TAPE SYSTEM AFTER AUTO-RESTART.
EQUIPMENT REQUIRED IS ANY 4K HP COMPUTER WITH POWER FAIL, AN HP2752A
OR 2754 TELEPRINTER, AND OPTIONALLY, AUTO-RESTART.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES.
PREPARE A STANDARD BCS WITH AN EXTRA ENTRY AT CONFIGURATION TIME -
4, 102004 FOR NON-AUTORESTART
4, XY, P.00 FOR AUTORESTART WHERE XY IS THE LINK LOCATION
LOAD DRIVER AT PCS TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS MODULE OF THE HP2116 BASIC CONTROL SYSTEM SOFTWARE IS DESIGNED TO
OPERATE THE ASR 33/35 TELE-TYPEWRITER. THE FUNCTION OF THIS DRIVER IS
TO INITIATE, CONTINUE AND COMPLETE A READ/WRITE OPERATION REQUESTED
THROUGH INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROL.
THE DRIVER ACCEPTS AND PROCESSES A READ OR WRITE REQUEST IN EITHER ASCII
OR BINARY MODES. KEYBOARD MODE MAY BE SELECTED FOR A SINGLE READ
OPERATION. THE SPECIAL P-FORMAT FOR BINARY INPUT MAY ALSO BE SELECTED
FOR A SINGLE READ OPERATION.
THE DRIVER WILL REJECT A -FUNCTION SELECT- REQUEST AS NONE OF THE
DEFINED FUNCTIONS IS APPLICABLE FOR THE ASR DEVICE.
THE DRIVER PROVIDES FOR A SIMULATED END-OF-TAPE CONDITION WHICH IS
DETERMINED BY A FIXED NUMBER OF CONSECUTIVE FEED-FRAMES BEFORE THE
FIRST DATA CHARACTER OF A RECORD IS READ. THE NUMBER OF FEED-FRAMES
IS REPRESENTED BY A NEGATIVE CONSTANT AT THE LABEL - FFCT - IN THE
DRIVER. THE CONSTANT IS SET FOR 10 BUT MAY BE CHANGED TO ANY DESIRED
VALUE BY RE-ASSEMBLING THE DRIVER.
REFER TO A BCS MANUAL FOR A DESCRIPTION OF THE REQUEST CALLS TO IOC AND
THE RECORD FORMATS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X18201
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
HP12551B RELAY REGISTER INTERFACE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
HP BASIC
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THE ABSOLUTE MODIFICATION TO THE HP20392A BASIC SYSTEM OPENS OR CLOSES
RELAY CONTACTS ON THE HP12551B RELAY REGISTER. IT CHECKS THE RANGE
AND PROCESSES THE CONTACT NUMBER. THE DRIVER WAITS IN A LOOP TO ALLOW
THE CONTACTS TO SETTLE BEFORE RETURNING TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
THE HP2752A TELEPRINTER, AND HP12551B RELAY REGISTER INTERFACE ARE
NECESSARY HARDWARE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
USUAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
1. THIS PROGRAM SHOULD BE USED ONLY IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE HP20392A
BASIC COMPILER. USE WITH ANY OTHER VERSION OF THE BASIC COMPILER
WILL RESULT IN UNSUCCESSFUL PROGRAM EXECUTION.
2. TO OVERLAY THE MATRIX OPERATIONS OF THE COMPILER WITH THIS PROGRAM,
THE N OPTION MUST BE INCLUDED IN THE CONTROL STATEMENT DURING
ASSEMBLY.
3. THIS PROGRAM IS ALSO INTENDED FOR USE WITH THE HP-12551A RELAY
REGISTER INTERFACE KIT.
4. TO CONFIGURE THIS PROGRAM FOR USE WITH DIFFERENT I/O CHANNELS,
FOLLOW THE PROCEDURE BELOW.
A. LOAD THE BASIC COMPILER, USING THE BBL.
B. LOAD THE HP12551B RELAY REGISTER INTERFACE DRIVER, USING THE BBL
C. LOAD ADDRESS TO 77B.
D. LOAD THE SWITCH REGISTER WITH THE SELECT CODE OF THE RELAY
REGISTER INTERFACE CARD.
E. PRESS PRESET.
F. PRESS RUN.
THE COMPUTER WILL NOW HALT WITH A 102077 IN THE T-REGISTER AND THE
DRIVER IS READY FOR USE.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE DRIVER MAY BE CALLED TO OPEN OR CLOSE A DESIRED RELAY CONTACT OR
OPEN ALL OF THE CONTACTS SIMULTANEOUSLY. WHEN CALLED TO OPEN OR CLOSE
A SINGLE CONTACT, IT WILL PROCESS THE CONTACT NUMBER, DETERMINING IF IT
IS IN THE RANGE OF 0 TO 15 AND THEN FORMING A WORD WITH A SINGLE BIT SET
IN THE CORRESPONDING POSITION. WHEN CLOSING A CONTACT, THIS BIT IS
MERGED WITH THE PREVIOUS PATTERN AND WHEN OPENING A CONTACT, THIS BIT
IS COMPLEMENTED AND USED TO MASK THE PREVIOUS CONTACT PATTERN. THE NEW
PATTERN IS THEN OUTPUT TO THE RELAY REGISTER, WHICH OPENS OR CLOSES
THE DESIRED CONTACT, AND THE DRIVER WILL THEN WAIT IN A PROGRAM LOOP
FOR APPROXIMATELY 300 MILLISECONDS TO ALLOW THE CONTACTS TO SETTLE.
IT THEN RETURNS TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
WHEN CALLED TO OPEN ALL RELAY CONTACTS SIMULTANEOUSLY, THE DRIVER WILL
OUTPUT A PATTERN OF 0'S TO THE RELAY REGISTER AND IT WILL THEN WAIT IN
A PROGRAM LOOP FOR APPROXIMATELY 300 MILLISECONDS TO ALLOW THE CONTACTS
TO SETTLE. IT THEN RETURNS TO THE CALLING PROGRAM.
TO CLOSE A DESIRED RELAY CONTACT, THE DRIVER IS CALLED FROM BASIC AS:
CALL (1, N)
TO OPEN A DESIRED RELAY CONTACT, THE DRIVER IS CALLED FROM BASIC AS:
CALL (2, N)
WHERE N - A VARIABLE OR CONSTANT, IN THE RANGE
0 TO 15, WHICH SPECIFIES THE DESIRED
CONTACT.
TO OPEN ALL RELAY CONTACTS SIMULTANEOUSLY, THE DRIVER IS CALLED FROM
BASIC AS:
CALL (3)
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X18301
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
BASIC CALLABLE LINE PRINTER DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PRINTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
HP BASIC
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
8K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ROUTINE PROVIDES THE HP BASIC SYSTEM 20392A WITH A LINE PRINTER
CAPABILITY FOR THE HP2778A. A SPECIAL TECHNIQUE OF LINE PRINTER
BUFFERING ALLOWS THE HP2778A TO OPERATE AT MAXIMUM SPEED AND UTILIZE
THE FULL LINE PRINTER CARRIAGE WIDTH.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
1. EDIT FOR YOUR SYSTEM. (NECESSARY EDITS ARE EQU STATEMENTS AT
BEGINNING OF TAPE.)
2. ASSEMBLE. (USE N OPTION TO OVERLAY MATRIX FUNCTIONS).
3. PREPARE NEW CONFIGURED BASIC IN ACCORDANCE WITH MANUAL OR LOAD
PRECONFIGURED BASIC, AND OVERLAY THE ABSOLUTE FOR THIS ROUTINE
USING THE BASIC BINARY LOADER.
4. PTAPE THE ENCLOSED ROUTINE AND EXECUTE, OR WRITE YOUR OWN PROGRAM
TO VERIFY OPERATION. REFER TO PROGRAM LISTING FOR VARIOUS OPTIONS.
#27 LPP EQU 60 PRINTER LINES PER PAGE
#70 LP EQU 20B DEFINE LINE PRINTER I/O SLOT
#99 COLUM EQU 132B COLUMNS PER LINE
THE TECHNIQUE OF LINE PRINTER BUFFERING HAS TWO EFFECTS:
1. THE LINE PRINTER DOES NOT SLOW DOWN TO THE "1/2 SPEED" TYPICAL
OF THE BCS DRIVER'S TTY MODE.
2. THE FULL LINE PRINTER CARRIAGE WIDTH CAN BE UTILIZED USING THE
FOLLOWING PROGRAMMING TECHNIQUE.
A. USE THE ODD/EVEN MODE (SWR = 0)
B. OUTPUT LESS THAN 72 CHARACTERS USING ODD LINE NUMBERED PRINT
STATEMENTS ENDING WITH SEMICOLONS.
C. EXECUTE A SIMPLE "PRINT" STATEMENT ON AN EVEN LINE. THIS WILL
RESET BASIC'S INTERNAL COUNTER.
D. OUTPUT ADDITIONAL (<72) CHARACTERS USING ODD LINE NUMBERS. THE
FINAL PRINT STATEMENT MUST NOT END WITH A SEMICOLON. FEED
ROLLER PRESSURE CAN BE RELEASED ON A TELETYPE TO AVOID PAPER
WASTE.
IN ORDER TO USE THIS DRIVER, MAKE THE NECESSARY EDITS FOR CONFORMANCE
WITH YOUR SYSTEM. THEN PREPARE A CONFIGURED BASIC SYSTEM IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE INSTRUCTIONS IN THE BASIC MANUAL. IF DESIRED, AND YOUR CURRENT
CONFIGURED BASIC CONTAINS NO CONFLICTING SUBROUTINES, THE ABSOLUTE TAPE
MAY BE LOADED IMMEDIATELY AFTER THE BASIC SYSTEM, USING THE BBL.
ENTRY POINT:
LNPR - SETS UP THE DRIVER TO PROCESS ALL I/O REQUESTS FROM THE
SYSTEM. IF NECESSARY, OUTPUTS A FORM FEED REQUEST TO THE
LINE PRINTER. INVOKED BY STATEMENT CALL(1), OR BY VALUE
SPECIFIED BY X IN PROGRAM LISTING. CHANGES ENTRY POINT
TO BEGINNING OF PROCESSING ROUTINE.
CALL(X) - SETS UP THE DRIVER SO THAT FUTURE PRINT REQUESTS WILL BE
PROCESSED THROUGH THIS ROUTINE. THE LINE PRINTER IS
ASSUMED TO BE AT TOP OF FORM (TOF) AT THIS TIME. ANY
SUBSEQUENT CALL(X) WILL RESULT IN A TOF INSTRUCTION TO
THE LINE PRINTER, UNLESS THE LINE COUNT INDICATES PAGE IS
ALREADY AT TOF BASED ON LPP LINES PER PAGE.
00074 LPP EQU 60 PRINTER LINES PER PAGE
00001 X EQU 1 SUBROUTINE CALL NUMBER
AFTER EXECUTION OF THE CALL(X) STATEMENT, ALL PRINT REQUESTS FROM THE
BASIC SYSTEM WILL BE DIRECTED TO OUTPUT EQUIPMENT IN THE FOLLOWING
MANNER:
15 - SWITCH REGISTER - 0 OUTPUT
------------------------ ------
X 1XX XXX XXX XXX XXX ALL OUTPUTS GO TO THE LINE PRINTER.
(INCLUDES SYSTEM COMMANDS AND LIST OUTPUT).
1 0XX XXX XXX XXX XXX ALL OUTPUTS GO TO THE TERMINAL.
(NORMAL BASIC OPERATION).
0 0XX XXX XXX XXX XX0 ALL SYSTEM MESSAGES GO TO THE TERMINAL.
ALL EXECUTING PROGRAM OUTPUTS GO TO THE LINE
PRINTER.
0 0XX XXX XXX XXX XX1 SELECTIVE OUTPUT. ODD NUMBERED PROGRAM
PRINT STATEMENTS GO TO THE LINE PRINTER.
EVEN NUMBERED PRINT STATEMENTS GO TO THE
TERMINAL. SYSTEM MESSAGES GO TO THE
TERMINAL.
THE FORMAT OF THE OUTPUT WILL BE EXACTLY THE SAME WHETHER DIRECTED TO
THE LINE PRINTER OR THE TELETYPE (EXCEPT AS AFFECTED BY FORM CONTROLS
INHERENT IN THE EQUIPMENTS).
WHEN AN INCOMPLETE LINE (A PRINT STATEMENT ENDING WITH A SEMICOLON) IS
OUTPUTTED TO THE LINE PRINTER, IT WILL BE BUFFERED IN THE PRINTER.
SUBSEQUENT OUTPUT DIRECTED TO THE LINE PRINTER WILL BE ADDED TO THE
LINE PRINTER BUFFER. THE BUFFER WILL NOT BE PRINTED UNTIL A NORMAL
(NO ENDING SEMICOLON) PRINT STATEMENT IS OUTPUTTED TO THE LINE PRINTER,
WHEN BASIC'S INTERNAL COUNTER REACHES 72 CHARACTERS DURING AN OUTPUT
TO THE LINE PRINTER, WHEN THE CHARACTER COUNT EXCEEDS "COLUM" SIZE OF
THE PRINT DRUM, WHEN PROGRAM EXECUTION CEASES AND THE SYSTEM RETURNS
TO THE COMMAND MODE, OR WHEN A PROGRAM INPUT STATEMENT IS EXECUTED.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
IF THE LINE PRINTER IS NOT READY WHEN THE CALL IS MADE, THE TTY WILL
PRINT *EQR, AND THE COMPUTER WILL HALT WITH 102070 IN THE MEMORY
REGISTER.
**MISCELLANEOUS:
SEE THE PROGRAM LISTING FOR SPECIAL SWITCH OPTIONS, AND OTHER
CONSIDERATIONS.
X18401
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
CORE SIZE INDEPENDENT PHOTO READER STO DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
4K
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS ONE HP2752/54 TELETYPEWRITER SIO DRIVER CAN REPLACE ALL THE
DIFFERENT CORE SIZE VERSIONS OF SUCH SIO DRIVERS. IT HAS THE ABILITY
TO AUTOMATICALLY DETERMINE THE MEMORY SIZE OF ANY HP2100 SERIES COMPUTER
DURING THE NORMAL SIO CONFIGURATION PROCESS. THIS IS ACHIEVED BY A
SELF-CONTAINED MODIFICATION TO THE CONFIGURATION SECTION OF THE STANDARD
SIO DRIVER. THE ENTIRE PROCESS IS TRANSPARENT TO THE USER AND ACTS
AS IF HE HAD LOADED AND CONFIGURED THE SPECIFIC DRIVER FOR HIS MEMORY
SIZE.
USEFUL FOR HP 2737/48/58 PHOTO READERS.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. DRIVER TAPE IS LOADED USING BASIC BINARY LOADER
2. LOAD ADDRESS 2
3. PUT SELECT CODE OF PHOTO READER IN BITS 0-5 OF SWITCH REGISTER
4. PUSH PRESET, THEN RUN
5. HALT 77B INDICATES SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION OF CONFIGURATION I.E.,
INCORPORATION OF DEVICE S.C. INTO ALL I/O INSTRUCTIONS AND MOVE
OF SIO TO COMPUTED AREA
6. FOR USE OF SIO IN NON-STANDARD (HP SUPPORTED ARE THOSE PROGRAMS
WHICH ARE DISTRIBUTED AND MAINTAINED BY HEWLETT PACKARD AND THUS
REFERRED TO AS STANDARD) PROGRAMS REFER TO THE ASSEMBLER
REFERENCE MANUAL APPENDIX E FOR COMPLETE DESCRIPTION OF CALLING
SEQUENCES
NOTE: THIS DRIVER MUST BE LOADED AFTER THE TTY AND LINE PRINTER
DRIVERS, IF PRESENT, AND BEFORE THE PUNCH SIO DRIVERS.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THIS PROGRAM REPLACES ALL THE DIFFERENT CORE SIZE VERSIONS OF PHOTO
READER (PR) SIO DRIVERS DUE TO ITS UNIQUE ABILITY TO AUTOMATICALLY
ASCERTAIN THE MEMORY SIZE OF ANY HP 2100 SERIES COMPUTER DURING THE
NORMAL SIO CONFIGURATION PROCESS.
THIS IS ACHIEVED BY A SELF-CONTAINED MODIFICATION TO THE CONFIGURATION
SECTION OF THE STANDARD HP SIO DRIVER. WHEN THIS DRIVER IS LOADED VIA
THE BINARY LOADER INTO ANY SIZE COMPUTER, IT INITIALLY RESIDES IN THE
LOWEST 4K MODULE OF MEMORY, IN THE APPROPRIATE SIO AREA. THEN, AS THE
USER STARTS THE NORMAL CONFIGURATION PROCEDURE (LOAD ADDRESS 2 PUT
SELECT CODE OF PR IN SWITCH REGISTER, THEN PRESS PRESET THEN RUN), THE
CONFIGURATOR ROUTINE FIRST MERGES THE SELECT CODE OF THE DEVICE INTO
ALL I/O INSTRUCTIONS. THEN THIS ROUTINE ASCERTAINS THE MEMORY SIZE OF
THE COMPUTER BY A SEARCH PROCEDURE THAT CHECKS FOR MEMORY WRAP AROUND
(2116,2115,2114) OR NON-EXISTENT MEMORY (2100A) DEPENDING UPON THE
PARTICULAR COMPUTER.
THE CONFIGURATOR THEN AUTOMATICALLY RELOCATES THE DRIVER TO THE APPRO-
PRIATE SIO AREA AND MODIFIES THE LINKAGE LOCATIONS AS REQUIRED. THE
CONFIGURATOR THEN RELEASES ITSELF AND MAY BE OVERLAID BY SUBSEQUENT
PROGRAMS OR DRIVERS. THIS PROCESS IS TRANSPARENT TO THE USER AND ACTS
AS IF HE HAD LOADED AND CONFIGURED THE SPECIFIC DRIVER FOR HIS SIZE
MEMORY.
THIS DRIVER PROVIDES THE INPUT FACILITY REQUIRED BY THE ASSEMBLER,
SYMBOLIC EDITOR, AND FORTRAN COMPILER. THE LINKAGE ADDRESS FOR THIS
FACILITY IS AT LOCATION 101B IN THE SYSTEM LINKAGE TABLE.
THE FOLLOWING GIVES RECORD FORMATS RECOGNIZED BY THE PAPER TAPE READER:
ASCII * A GROUP OF CHARACTERS TERMINATED BY A RETURN/LINE FEED.
THESE CODES INPUT BEFORE THE FIRST DATA CHARACTER OF A
RECORD ARE IGNORED, A RUB-OUT CODE CAUSES THE CURRENT
RECORD TO BE DELETED AND THE NEXT RECORD INPUT. A LINE-
FEED MUST TERMINATE THE CURRENT RECORD.
BINARY* THE FIRST CHARACTER OF A BINARY RECORD CONTAINS THE WORD
COUNT OF THE ENTIRE RECORD. THIS VALUE DETERMINES THE
NUMBER OF WORDS (UP TO THE BUFFER LENGTH REQUESTED)
TO BE TRANSMITTED
ENTRY POINT:
PT.R = STD. PAPER TAPE INPUT = 101B
THE SIO CALLING SEQUENCE IS:
P = JSB 101B,I
P+1 = RETURN
UPON ENTRY TO THE DRIVER A POSITIVE VALUE IN THE A REGISTER SPECIFIES
THE NUMBER OF ASCII CHARACTERS TO BE INPUT. A NEGATIVE VALUE IN THE
A REGISTER SPECIFIES THE NUMBER OF BINARY WORDS TO BE TRANSFERRED
(A = 2'S COMPLEMENT OF BINARY WORDS TO BE TRANSFERRED)
THE B REGISTER UPON ENTRY CONTAINS THE BUFFER ADDRESS.
THE A REGISTER, UPON RETURN FROM THE READER SIO CONTAINS THE NUMBER
OF WORDS OR CHARACTERS TRANSFERRED.
NOTE: IF A = 0 UPON RETURN AN END-OF-TAPE CONDITION WAS
SENSED. (10 BLANK FRAMES WERE READ)
SEE HP ASSEMBLER REFERENCE MANUAL APPENDIX E FOR
COMPLETE SIO DESRIPTION.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
AS THIS DRIVER IS LOADED INTO THE LOWER 4K OF ANY COMPUTER, THE DRIVER
MUST BE LOADED BEFORE ANY SOFTWARE PACKAGE THAT REQUIRES THIS AREA TO
OPERATE. FURTHER THIS MODULE MUST BE LOADED AFTER THE TTY AND LINE
PRINTER AND BEFORE THE PAPER TAPE PUNCH IN THE EVENT THAT THESE DEVICES
ARE TO BE USED.
NOTE: IF AN ERROR IS MADE DURING CONFIGURATION THEN THE TAPE
MUST BE RELOADED USING THE BINARY LOADER, AND RE-CONFIGURED.
X18501
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M CENTRONICS 101-A LINE PRINTER DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PRINTER
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DOS-M DRIVER CONTROLS OUTPUT OPERATIONS FOR A CENTRONICS 101A
LINE PRINTER WITH A SERIAL OR PARALLEL INTERFACE AND WITHOUT THE
AUTOMATIC LINE FEED OPTION. IT IS DESIGNED TO UTILIZE THE SPECIAL
FUNCTIONS OF THIS LINE PRINTER SUCH AS VERTICAL TAB, FORM FEED,
ELONGATED CHARACTERS AND OVERPRINTING. ONLY ASCII CHARACTERS CAN BE
OUTPUT.
THE DRIVER WILL NOT SUPPORT A TELETYPE OR THE SYSTEM CONSOLE.
DVR00 MUST BE INCLUDED AT THE TIME OF SYSTEM GENERATION.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
USUAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES
INCLUDE DVR00 AT TIME OF SYSTEM GENERATION. OUTPUT CONSISTS OF A
STRING OF ASCII CHARACTERS TERMINATED BY A LINE-FEED AND CARRIAGE
RETURN. THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS OUTPUT IS DESIGNATED BY THE BUFFER
LENGTH IN THE REQUEST. A ZERO BUFFER LENGTH CAUSES ONLY A LINE-FEED
AND CARRIAGE RETURN.
WHEN USED AS THE FIRST CHARACTER IN A BUFFER:
"!" INDICATES VERTICAL TAB
"/" INDICATES FORM FEED, AND
"*" INDICATES ELONGATED CHARACTERS
WHEN USED AS THE LAST CHARACTER IN A BUFFER:
"_" (LEFT ARROW OR UNDERLINE)INDICATES NO LINE FEED OR RETURN, AND
"^" (UP ARROW OR CARET)INDICATES OVERPRINT (RETURN, NO LINE FEED).
I.00 IS THE ENTRY POINT FOR THE INITIATION SECTION.
C.00 IS THE ENTRY POINT FOR THE COMPLETION SECTION.
THE INITIATION SECTION IS CALLED FROM IO CONTROL TO INITIATE A DEVICE
AND INITIALIZE A DATA TRANSFER.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
- ADDRESSES OF DEVICE EQT ENTRY SET IN "EQT1-EQT17"
(A) = I/O ADDRESS OF DEVICE
(P) JSB I.00
(P+1) -RETURN-
(A) = O, OPERATION INITIATED, OR
(A) = REJECT CODE:
1) DEVICE DOWN OR READ REQUESTED
2) DEVICE IN USE
3) OR GREATER, ILLEGAL REQUEST
THE COMPLETION SECTION IS CALLED BY CENTRAL INTERRUPT CONTROL TO
CONTINUE OR COMPLETE AN OPERATION.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
- ADDRESSES OF DEVICE EQT ENTRY SET IN "EQT1-EQT17"
(A) = I/O ADDRESS OF DEVICE
(P) JSB C.00
(P+1) -COMPLETION RETURN-
(P+2) -CONTINUATION RETURN-
-COMPLETION RETURN:
A = 0, SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION WITH -
B = # WORDS OR CHARACTERS TRANSFERRED.
-CONTINUATION RETURN:
REGISTERS MEANINGLESS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE CENTRONICS 101-A LINE PRINTER SHOULD BE ORDERED WITHOUT THE
AUTOMATIC LINE FEED OPTION. THIS DVR00 DOES NOT SUPPORT A TELETYPE
OR THE SYSTEM CONSOLE.
X18601
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M SYSTEM TELEPRINTER WITH PAPER TAPE I/O
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PRINTER PAPER TAPE
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DRIVER, A MODIFIED VERSION OF THE STANDARD DOS-M TELETYPE DRIVER,
ALLOWS THE SYSTEM CONSOLE TELETYPE TO BE USED FOR PAPER TAPE I/O. SET
BIT 15 OF THE SWITCH REGISTER DISPLAY BEFORE EXECUTING A DIRECTIVE SUCH
AS (:STORE,R,PROG,1) AND NO OPERATOR ATTENTION WILL BE GENERATED BY THE
TAPE READER. BOTH BINARY AND ASCII RECORDS CAN BE INPUT AND OUTPUT ON
THE TELETYPE.
DVR00 MUST BE INCLUDED AT THE TIME OF SYSTEM GENERATION.
THIS DRIVER REQUIRES ONLY A MINIMUM DOS-M.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
USUAL ASSEMBLY PROCEDURES.
INCLUDE DVR00 AT TIME OF SYSTEM GENERATION. SET BIT 15 IN THE SWITCH
REGISTER DISPLAY BEFORE ENTERING A DOS-M DIRECTIVE TO USE THE CONSOLE
FOR PAPER TAPE I/O.
-RECORD FORMATS:
ASCII (INPUT): A STRING OF CHARACTERS TERMINATED BY A LINE-FEED. IF THE
REQUESTED LENGTH IS FULFILLED BEFORE A LINE-FEED, THE
REMAINING CHARACTERS ARE IGNORED UNTIL A LINE-FEED IS
INPUT. THE 8-LEVEL BIT (BIT 07) IS SET = 0 FOR 7-BIT
ASCII CODE.
SPECIAL CHARACTER PROCESSING:
RETURN - ALWAYS IGNORED AND IS NOT TRANSMITED TO USER BUFFER
LINE-FEED - IGNORED IF INPUT BEFORE THE FIRST VALID CHARACTER OF A
RECORD; RECORD TERMINATOR AT THE END OF A RECORD AND IS
NOT TRANSMITTED TO BUFFER OR COUNTED.
CONTROL/A - DELETES PREVIOUS CHARACTER
RUB-OUT - DELETES CURRENT RECORD; AFTER LINE-FEED IS INPUT, NEXT
RECORD IS READ.
ASCII (OUTPUT): A STRING OF CHARACTERS, THE NUMBER DESIGNATED BY THE
"BUFFER LENGTH" IN THE REQUEST, TERMINATED BY A RETURN
AND LINE-FEED (SUPPLIED BY THE DRIVER).
SPECIAL CHARACTER PROCESSING:
LEFT-ARROW: IF A LEFT-ARROW IS THE LAST CHARACTER IN THE USER
BUFFER, THE RETURN/LINE-FEED AND ARROW CODES ARE NOT
OUTPUT.
A ZERO BUFFER LENGTH CAUSES ONLY A RETURN/LINE-FEED
TO BE OUTPUT.
BINARY(INPUT): A STRING OF CHARACTERS SPECIFIED BY THE BUFFER
"LENGTH" IN THE REQUEST.
"V-FORMAT": IF THE "V" FIELD IN THE CONTROL WORD OF
THE REQUEST = 1, THE LENGTH OF THE RECORD IS
DESIGNATED (IN WORDS) BY THE FIRST CHARACTER OF THE
RECORD. THE WORD COUNT INCLUDES THE FIRST WORD. IF
THE WORD COUNT IS LARGER THAN THE BUFFER LENGTH, THE
BUFFER LENGTH IS USED.
BINARY(OUTPUT): A STRING OF CHARACTERS SPECIFIED BY THE BUFFER
"LENGTH" IN THE REQUEST.
-SIMULATED END-OF-TAPE: IF 30 FEED-FRAMES (ZEROS) ARE INPUT BEFORE
THE FIRST CHARACTER OF A RECORD, AN EOT
INDICATION IS SET IN THE STATUS FIELD (BIT 05
OF WORD 5) OF THE EQT ENTRY AND THE INPUT
TERMINATED. IF THE EOT BIT IS SET WHEN THE
CONDITION IS ENCOUNTERED, THE EOT IS IGNORED
AND CHARS ARE INPUT UNTIL A RECORD IS STARTED
(I.E., LEADER IS AUTOMATICALLY SKIPPED AFTER
EOT).
-CONTROL FUNCTIONS ACCEPTED:
10 - TEN INCHES OF ZEROS (FEED-FRAMES) ARE OUTPUT FOR LEADER/
TRAILER.
11 - LINE SPACING: THE PARAMETER WORD OF THE REQUEST DETERMINES THE
NUMBER OF LINE-FEEDS TO BE OUTPUT.
07 - THE EOT STATUS BIT IS SET TO ALLOW "LEADER" TO BE SKIPPED ON
THE NEXT INPUT REQUEST.
-SYSTEM TELETYPE PROCESSING: THE SYSTEM TELETYPE IS ALWAYS LEFT IN
THE "INPUT STATE" WITH CONTROL SET/FLAG
CLEARED TO LEAVE THE KEYBOARD ACTIVE.
IF A KEY IS STRUCK WITH NO INPUT IN
EFFECT, THE FLAG "OPATN" IN BASE PAGE
IS SET NON-ZERO. IF A KEY IS STRUCK
DURING AN OUTPUT OPERATION TO THE SYSTEM
TTY, THE FLAG IS SET.
I.00 - ENTRY POINT FOR THE INITIATION SECTION.
C.00 - ENTRY POINT FOR THE COMPLETION SECTION.
THE INITIATION SECTION IS CALLED FROM I/O CONTROL TO INITIALIZE A DEVICE
AND INITIATE A DATA TRANSFER OR CONTROL FUNCTION.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
- ADDRESSES OF DEVICE EQT ENTRY SET IN "EQT1-EQT17" -
(A) = I/O ADDRESS OF DEVICE
(P) JSB I.00
(P+1) - RETURN -
(A) = 0, OPERATION INITIATED, OR
(A) = REJECT CODE:
2, ILLEGAL CONTROL REQUEST, OR CONTROL FUNCTION HAS
BEEN DONE (I.E., SET EOT STATUS).
THE COMPLETION SECTION IS CALLED BY CENTRAL INTERRUPT CONTROL TO
CONTINUE OR COMPLETE AN OPERATION.
CALLING SEQUENCE:
- ADDRESSES OF DEVICE EQT ENTRY SET IN "EQT1-EQT17" -
(A) = I/O ADDRESS OF DEVICE
(P) JSB C.00
(P+1) --COMPLETION RETURN --
(P+2) --CONTINUATION RETURN --
COMPLETION RETURN:
(A) = 0, SUCCESSFUL COMPLETION WITH
(B) = # WORDS OR CHARS. TRANSFERRED
(A) = 2 IF SIMULATED EOT ENCOUNTERED,
(B) = 0
CONTINUATION RETURN: REGISTERS MEANINGLESS.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
X18701
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MULTI TERMINAL BCS DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER TERMINAL
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
BCS
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
D.00C IS A MULTI-TERMINAL BCS DRIVER CAPABLE OF OPERATING SIMULTANEOUSLY
ANY NUMBER OF TELETYPES, TAPE READERS, TAPE PUNCHES AND EQUIVALENT
DEVICES. IT IS DESIGNED TO TAKE THE PLACE OF THE STANDARD BCS DRIVERS
D.00, D.01 AND D.02. IT USES INDIVIDUAL CONTINUATOR ENTRIES FOR EACH
DEVICE AND A COMMON PROCESSOR ROUTINE. IN ADDITION TO THE STANDARD BCS
FEATURES, D.00C PROVIDES AN OPERATION-ATTENTION MODE, WHICH OPERATES
INDIVIDUALLY FOR EACH DEVICE. D.00C ALSO ALLOWS THE FOLLOWING CHARAC-
TERS IN ASCII INPUT MODE: CONTROL (A) DELETES A CHARACTER, CARRIAGE-
RETURN TERMINATES A RECORD, AND RUB-OUT DELETES A RECORD.
THIS DRIVER CAN BE USEFUL IN DEDICATED DATA PROCESSING SYSTEMS WHERE
A NUMBER OF OPERATORS HAVE FULL ACCESS TO A PROGRAM. TO SIMPLIFY
PROGRAMMING FOR SUCH A TIME-SHARED MODE, A SET OF FORTRAN CALLABLE
UTILITY ROUTINES IS INCLUDED IN THIS PACKAGE. THESE UTILITIES USE THE
CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM HP22591A, STRIPPED FORTRAN FORMATTER FOR INTERNAL
CONVERSION (STRIF).
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
ASSEMBLE THE SOURCE D.00C.
THE ROUTINE D.00C PROVIDES FOUR ENTRIES TO THE CONTINUATOR SECTION. IF
MORE THAN FOUR DEVICES ARE TO BE OPERATED SIMULTANEOUSLY, INSERT
ADDITIONAL ENTRIES AS DESCRIBED IN THE PROGRAM LISTINGS, AND REASSEMBLE
THE ROUTINE. WHERE ANY ENTRY POINTS REMAIN UNUSED THEY DO NOT HARM THE
SYSTEM. EACH ENTRY REQUIRES 9 WORDS OF MEMORY.
USE THE STANDAD BCS MODULES (PCS, .IOC., LOADR, ADDITIONAL DRIVERS)
TO SET UP A CONFIGURED BCS. THE OBJECT TAPE OF D.00C REPLACES THE
OBJECT TAPES OF D.00, D.01, AND D.02; DO NOT LOAD THESE STANDARD
DRIVERS. THE DIALOG ON THE SYSTEM TELETYPE IS ESSENTIALLY THE SAME AS
WITH THE STANDARD DRIVERS, WITH THE SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS DESCRIBED
BELOW.
IN THE "EQT" ENTRY USE THE APPROPRIATE NAMES:
D.00 FOR TELETYPES (OR EQUIVALENT DEVICES),
D.01 FOR TAPE READERS,
D.02 FOR HIGH SPEED TAPE PUNCHES.
EACH NAME MAY BE ASSIGNED TO ANY NUMBER OF DEVICES, OR MAY REMAIN
UNUSED. THE NAME AS USED IN THE "EQT" DEFINES THE EQUIPMENT TYPE
AND CONTROLS THE MODE OF OPERATION. E.G., A D.02 ENTRY WILL REJECT
INPUT REQUESTS AND WILL INDICATE A "TAPE LOW CONDITION", AS SPECIFIED
FOR THE STANDARD DRIVER D.02.
IN THE "INTERRUPT LINKAGE TABLE" USE THE ENTRY NAMES OF THE CONTINUATOR
SECTION RATHER THAN THE NAMES I.00, I.01, I.02. THE ORIGINAL ROUTINE
D.00C HAS THE FOUR NAMES C.N1, C.N2, C.N3, C.N4; ADDITIONAL NAMES MAY
BE INSERTED. THE NAMES MAY BE USED IN ANY ORDER; THE DRIVER WILL
ESTABLISH THE PROPER LINKAGE TO THE INITIATOR SECTION AND TO THE
ACCORDING ENTRY POINT. ANY ENTRY POINT MAY REMAIN UNUSED, OR IT MAY BE
ASSIGNED TO MORE THAN ONE DEVICE; HOWEVER, ONLY ONE OF THOSE DEVICES CAN
BE OPERATED AT A TIME.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
D.00C IS A MULTI-TERMINAL BCS-DRIVER. ITS INITIATOR SECTION HAS 3
ENTRIES: D.00, D.01, D.02. THE EXTERNAL REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS OF
THE DRIVER ARE IDENTICAL WITH THOSE OF THE STANDARD BCS DRIVERS
(EXCEPTIONS SEE BELOW). HOWEVER, WHILE A USUAL BCS DRIVER CAN SERVE
ONLY ONE DEVICE AT A TIME, THIS DRIVER HAS THE CAPABILITY OF OPERATING
ANY NUMBER OF INPUT/OUTPUT DEVICES SIMULTANEOUSLY. THIS IS OBTAINED BY
INDIVIDUAL CONTINUATOR ENTRIES FOR EACH DEVICE, AND A COMMON PROCESSOR
ROUTINE. THEY CAN BE LINKED TO THE INITIATOR ENTRIES IN ANY ORDER AT
CONFIGURATION TIME BY THE STANDARD "PREPARE CONTROL SYSTEM" ROUTINE.
THE FOLLOWING FEATURES ARE PROVIDED IN ADDITION TO THE STANDARD BCS
SPECIFICATIONS:
1. IN "ASCII INPUT MODE" A "CONTROL-A" DELETES THE PRECEEDING CHARACTER
THE DRIVER REPLIES WITH A BACK-ARROW. A "CARRIAGE RETURN"
TERMINATES THE RECORD, THE DRIVER REPLIES WITH A "LINE FEED". A
"RUB-OUT" DELETES A RECORD, THE DRIVER REPLIES WITH "/", RETURN,
"LINE FEED".
2. IN "OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE" A SOFTWARE FLAG IS SET IF THE OPERATOR
STRIKES A KEY OF THE TERMINAL, WHILE IT IS OUTPUTTING DATA OR IS
STANDING BY. THE OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE CAN BE TURNED ON OR OFF
INDIVIDUALLY FOR EACH DEVICE.
LIB.C IS A SET OF FORTRAN-CALLABLE ROUTINES THAT SIMPLIFY THE USE OF
D.00C IN A SYSTEM WITH TIME-SHARE CAPABILITY.
THERE IS NO DIFFERENCE CONCERNING INPUT/OUTPUT, STATUS AND CLEAR
REQUESTS COMPARED TO THE STANDARD DRIVERS D.00, D.01, D.02. ALL
STANDARD ROUTINES SUCH AS THE FORMATTER, READ OR WRITE INSTRUCTION, ETC.
CAN BE USED.
IN ADDITION TO THESE FEATURES THE DRIVER HAS THE "OPERATOR ATTENTION"
CAPABILITY. A FUNCTION REQUEST TURNS THE OPERATOR ATTENTION MODE ON
OR OFF. WHEN THE OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE IS ACTIVATED, THE DRIVER SETS
A STATUS FLAG AS SOON AS THE OPERATOR STRIKES A KEY WHILE THE TERMINAL
IS OUTPUTTING DATA OR IS STANDING BY.
THE OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE IS INACTIVE, UNLESS IT IS TURNED ON. THIS
IS ACHIEVED BY A FUNCTION REQUEST TO .IOC., WHERE WORD 2 OF THE REQUEST
HAS THE FOLLOWING FORM:
BITS 15 TO 11 = 001, BIT 8 = 1,
BITS 5 TO 0 = UNIT NUMBER, OTHER BITS MEANINGLESS.
THE OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE IS TURNED OFF BY A SIMILAR FUNCTION REQUEST
WITH BIT 8 = 0 IN WORD 2. NOTE THAT .IOC. REJECTS THE CALL IF THE
DEVICE IS "BUSY". HOWEVER, INPUT/OUTPUT REQUESTS MAY BE GIVEN WHILE
THE OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE IS CONTINUOUSLY BEING ACTIVE.
IF A KEY OF THE TERMINAL IS STRUCK WHILE THE OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE
IS ACTIVE AND WHILE THIS DEVICE IS NOT PERFORMING AN INPUT OPERATION,
BIT 0 OF WORD 2 IN THE EQUIPMENT TABLE IS SET TO 1. A STATUS REQUEST
FETCHES THIS WORD INTO THE A-REGISTER, WHERE IT CAN EASILY BE TESTED.
NOTE THAT A "LINE FEED" OR A "NULL" (FEED HOLE ONLY) DO NOT SET THE
OPERATOR-ATTENTION FLAG IF INPUT WHILE THE DEVICE IS STANDING BY. THIS
FEATURE IS CONVENIENT WHEN DATA IS INPUT THROUGH THE TAPE READER OF THE
TELETYPE.
A CLEAR REQUEST TURNS THE OPERATOR-ATTENTION MODE OFF AND CLEARS THE
OPERATOR-ATTENTION FLAG (BIT 0 IN WORD 2 OF EQT). NOTE THAT THIS IS
THE ONLY REQUEST THAT RESETS THIS FLAG; OTHER REQUESTS DO NOT AFFECT IT.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
TEMPORARILY THE DRIVER OPERATES WITH THE INTERRUPT SYSTEM DISABLED.
THE PROGRAMMER MUST MAKE SURE THAT THIS FACT DOES NOT CAUSE ERRORS
(E.G., DATA LOSS WITH HIGH-SPEED SYNCHRONOUS I/O DEVICES SUCH AS
HP 2020 MAG TAPE).
THE CONTINUATOR ROUTINE REQUIRES MORE PROCESSING TIME THAN THE STANDARD
BCS DRIVERS. WHILE THIS FACT IS NOT PERCEPTIBLE ON TELETYPES, FAST
DEVICES SUCH AS TAPE READERS ARE SOMEWHAT SLOWED DOWN. WHERE NECESSARY
THE STANDARD DRIVER D.01 CAN BE USED FOR THE TAPE READER, WHEREAS D.00C
SERVES THE TELETYPES. IN THIS CASE DELETE THE ENTRY POINT "D.01" IN
D.00C AND RE-ASSEMBLE THE DRIVER.
A USER WHO SIMPLY REPLACES THE STANDARD DRIVERS D.00, D.01 AND D.02
BY D.00C GETS THE ADVANTAGE OF PERCEPTIBLY SAVING MEMORY, BUT DOES NOT
EXHAUST THE "TIME-SHARE" CAPABILITY. TO DO SO HE HAS TO CALL THE
DRIVERS THROUGH .IOC. AND APPLY INTERNAL CONVERSION RATHER THAN USING
THE STANDARD REQUESTS THROUGH THE FORMATTER. PROGRAMMING IN THIS MODE
IS GREATLY SIMPLIFIED BY A SET OF UTILITY ROUTINES INCLUDED IN THIS
PACKAGE ("LIB.C"), AND BY THE CONTRIBUTED PROGRAM HP 22591, STRIPPED
FORTRAN FORMATTER FOR INTERNAL CONVERSION (STRIF). A SIMPLE EXAMPLE
IS GIVEN IN THE "TEST CASE". THIS SAMPLE FORTRAN PROGRAM "DEMOC" AND
THE COMMENTS IN THE ROUTINES "LIB.C" GIVE ENOUGH INFORMATION HOW TO USE
THE DRIVER.
X18801
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DOS-M DRIVER FOR CENTRONICS 101A LINE PRINTER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER PRINTER CENTRONICS
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? YES
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DOS-M DRIVER CONTROLS THE CENTRONICS 101A LINE PRINTERS. IT IS
INTERFACED TO HP2100 SERIES COMPUTERS WITH A POSITIVE TRUE MICROCIRCUIT
CARD HP12566. THE DRIVER PROVIDES AUTOMATIC PAGING AND CARRIAGE
CONTROL.
THE HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS INCLUDE: DISC, CENTRONICS 101A OR 101 LINE
PRINTER, MICROCIRCUIT INTERFACE CARD, POSITIVE TRUE.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
WHEN A CALL IS FROM A USER PROGRAM, THE DRIVER INTERPRETS THE FIRST
CHARACTER OF THE BUFFER AS CARRIAGE CONTROL ACCORDING TO THE FOLLOWING
TABLE:
CHARACTER MEANING
--------- -------
1 GO TO NEW PAGE
2 VERTICAL FORMAT CONTROL
E ELONGATED CHARACTERS
ANY OTHER CHARACTER SAME AS TTY
WHEN THE CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARACTER IS "1", "2", OR "E", IT IS PRINTED
AS A BLANK. ANY OTHER CHARACTER IS PRINTED AS IT APPEARS, GIVING
OPERATION SIMILAR TO THAT OF A TELETYPE. IN NORMAL OPERATION A "BLANK"
SHOULD BE USED AS A CARRIAGE CONTROL CHARACTER.
THE DRIVER WILL ALSO PROCESS CLEAR REQUESTS, PAGE EJECT REQUESTS, AND
LINE SPACES AS DESCRIBED IN THE DOS-M MANUAL.
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THE MICROCIRCUIT CARD MUST BE MODIFIED TO BE COMPATIBLE WITH THE
CENTRONICS LINE PRINTER. THE PRINTER WANTS TO SEE A .5 MICROSECOND
(OR LONGER) PULSE ON THE DATA STROBE LINE. THIS CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED
BY BREAKING THE DEVICE COMMAND LINE ON THE INTERFACE CARD (GOES TO
PINS 22 AND Z) AND ADDING A ONE-SHOT WITH A PULSE WIDTH OF 1 MICRO-
SECOND. THIS CAN BE DONE USING AN SN74121N WITH THE FOLLOWING CONNEC-
TIONS: (1) 82PF BETWEEN PINS 10 & 11, (2) 18K OHMS BETWEEN PINS 11 AND
14, (3) INPUT TO PIN 4, (4) OUTPUT (PINS Z, 22) TO PIN 1, (5) PIN 7
TO GROUND, (6) PIN 14 TO +5V. THERE IS ROOM TO MOUNT THE 1C BY U23
AND U24. GROUND CAN BE PICKED UP ALONG THE EDGE OF THE CARD AND +5V
ON THE + SIDE OF C12.
X18901
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
MODIFIED DOS-III SYSTEM CONSOLE DRIVER
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER TERMINAL
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M DOS-3
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? NO
**ABSTRACT:
THE PROGRAM IS SIMILAR IN NATURE TO THE OFFICIAL DVR05, WITH THE
FOLLOWING MODIFICATIONS MADE IN ORDER TO PROVIDE COMPATIBILITY WITH
HP3000 TERMINALS.
1. THE USER SIGNALS COMPLETION OF AN INPUT LINE BY TYPING CARRIAGE
RETURN ONLY. THE DRIVE ECHOES THE CARRIAGE RETURN AND ALSO OUTPUTS
A LINEFEED.
2. BOTH CONTROL/A AND CONTROL/H DELETE SINGLE CHARACTERS ON INPUT.
THE DRIVER OUTPUTS A BACK-SLASH (OCTAL 134) FOR EACH CHARACTER
DELETED.
3. BOTH RUBOUT AND CONTROL/X DELETE AN ENTIRE INPUT LINE. THE DRIVER
OUTPUTS THREE EXCLAMATION MARKS, FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE RETURN AND
LINEFEEED.
THIS DRIVER WILL FUNCTION SIMILARLY TO THE ORIGINAL DVR05, THEREFORE
IT CAN HANDLE ALL TERMINALS SUPPORTED BY THE ORIGINAL.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
THIS DRIVER MUST BE ASSEMBLED AND CONFIGURED INTO A DOS-M OR DOS-III
SYSTEM AS THE SYSTEM IS GENERATED.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS:
THIS DRIVER REQUIRES NO SPECIAL TECHNIQUE FOR THE HP 3000 USER. THE
DOS-M OR DOS-III USER WHO IS FAMILIAR WITH THE ORIGINAL DVR05 WILL
HAVE TO RETRAIN HIS OR HER FINGERS TO AVOID STRIKING THE LINEFEED
KEY FOLLOWING THE CARRIAGE RETURN. THE DRIVER AND THE OPERATING SYSTEM
REACT TO SUCH A LINEFEED JUST THE SAME AS IF THE USER TYPED ANY OTHER
KEY: OPERATOR ATTENTION. THE OPERATING SYSTEM WILL OUTPUT THE OPERATOR
ATTENTION ASTERISK, AND THE USER MUST THEN ENTER SOME NON-ACCEPTABLE
DIRECTIVE OR CHARACTER (LIKE A SINGLE BLANK) FOLLOWED BY A CARRIAGE
RETURN IN ORDER TO "CLEAR" THE OPERATOR ATTENTION PAUSE.
X19001
PLUS/1000 LIBRARY CONTRIBUTION
---------------------------------------------------------------------
**DATE CODE: 2001
**PROGRAM NAME:
**PROGRAM TITLE:
DVR-37 DOS DRIVER FOR ASCII BUS
**REVISION? NO
**PACKAGE: 99 **CATEGORY: 5 **SUBCATEGORY: 2
**KEYWORDS:
DRIVER ASCII
**LANGUAGES:
ASMB
**COMPUTER TYPE:
**OPERATING SYSTEMS:
DOS-M
**MEMORY REQUIREMENTS:
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM SOFTWARE? NO
**DEPENDENT ON SYSTEM HARDWARE? YES
**ABSTRACT:
THIS DRIVER (DVR37) OPERATES UNDER THE CONTROL OF THE I/O CONTROL MODULE
OF THE D.O.S. EXECUTE.
THIS DRIVER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR:
1. CONTROLLING INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA TRANSMISSION WITH THE I/O CARD.
2. OUTPUTTING THE CONTROL WORD WHICH IS USED TO SELECT THE OPERATING
MODES AND BUS FUNCTIONS THAT THE BUS I/O CARD IS TO PERFORM.
HARDWARE REQUIRED: DISC, HP-IB I/O CARD (59310A), AND ANY DEVICE(S)
OPERABLE ON ASCII BUS SYSTEM.
**FILES IDENTIFICATION:
(NOTE: FILES IN THIS CONTRIBUTION HAVE THE SAME NAME AS THE
DOCUMENTATION FILE WITH THE LAST 2 DIGITS INCREMENTED.
E.G.: A00101, A00102, A00103, ETC.)
FILE# 1: DOCUMENTATION FILE
FILE# 2: SOURCE
FILE# 3: SOURCE
**LOAD INSTRUCTIONS:
1. ASSEMBLE THE DRIVER PROGRAM (DVR37), AND MAKE ITS RELOCATABLE BINARY
TAPE.
2. STORE THE RELOCATABLE BINARY ON THE DISC TOGETHER WITH THE SYSTEM
TAPES AT THE DISC SYSTEM GENERATION TIME, ACCORDING TO THE "GENERA-
TING DOS-M" (MANUAL PART NO. 5951-1375).
3. AND ESTABLISH THE EQT TABLE ENTRY, DEVICE REFERENCE TABLE, AND INTER-
RUPT TABLE CAREFULLY.
**RUN INSTRUCTIONS:
**INPUT/OUTPUT EXAMPLES:
**PROGRAM DESCRIPTION:
THE DVR37 PERFORMS THE CONTROLS TO SELECT THE OPERATING MODE AND BUS
FUNCTIONS, INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA TRANSMISSION WITH THE DEVICE(S), UNDER
CONTROL OF THE DISC OPERATING SYSTEM.
1. I/O OPERATION
AN EXEC-CALL FOR TRANSFERRING INPUT AND OUTPUT DATA IS CONFORMABLE
WITH THE READ/WRITE INSTRUCTION ON THE "MOVING HEAD DISC OPERATING
SYSTEM" (SECTION III EXEC CALLS; MANUAL PART NO. 02116-91779).
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT EXEC
.
.
.
JSB EXEC (TRANSFER CONTROL TO DOS-M)
DEF *+5 (RETURN POINT FROM DOS-M)
DEF RCODE (REQUEST CODE)
DEF CONWD (CONTROL INFORMATION)
DEF BUFFR (BUFFER LOCATION)
DEF BUFFL (BUFFER LENGTH)
(RETURN POINT)
.
.
.
RCODE DEC 1 (OR 2) (1=OUTPUT, 2=INPUT)
CONWD OCT CONWD (SEE COMMENT)
FOR INPUT
BUFFR BSS N (BUFFER N-WORDS)
BUFFL DEC N(OR -2N)(SAME N; WORDS(+) OR CHARACTERS(-))
FOR OUTPUT
BUFFR ASC M,XXXXX (BUFFER STORED OUTPUTING CHARACTERS, M=NO. OF
BUFFL DEC N(OR -2N) CHARACTERS, X=CHARACTER)
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL EXEC(ICODE,ICONW,IBUFF,IBUFL)
--- COMMENT: CONWD ---
THE CONWD CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FIELDS:
000----K0VLLLLLL
K: USED WITH KEYBOARD INPUT, SPECIFIES PRINTING THE INPUT
AS RECEIVED IF K=1. IF K=0, "NO PRINTING" IS SPECIFIED.
M: DETERMINES THE MODE OF DATA TRANSFER. IF M=0, TRANSFER
IS IN ASCII CHARACTER FORMAT, AND M=1, BINARY FORMAT.
LLLLLL: DEVICE LU NUMBER.
2. CONTROL OPERATION
CALLING SEQUENCE - ASSEMBLY LANGUAGE
EXT EXEC
.
.
.
JSB EXEC (TRANSFER CONTROL TO DOS-M)
DEF *+3 (POINT OF RETURN FROM DOS)
DEF RCODE (REQUEST CODE)
DEF CONWD (CONTROL INFORMATION)
(RETURN POINT)
.
.
.
RCODE DEC 3 (REQUEST CODE = 3)
CONWD OCT CONWD (REQUIRES FOR SOME CONTROL FUNCTIONS; SEE
COMMENT)
CALLING SEQUENCE - FORTRAN
CALL EXEC(ICODE,ICONW)
--- COMMENT: CONWD ---
THE CONWD CONTAINS THE FOLLOWING FIELDS:
000FFFFFFFLLLLLL
F: FUNCTION CODE
FUNCTION CODE ACTION
(OCTAL)
001 BUS CLEAR (SET IFC LOW)
002 SWITCH BUS TO LOCAL (SET REN HIGH)
003 SWITCH BUS TO REMOTE (SET REN LOW)
004 CLEAR ACTIVE CONTROLLER STATUS
005 SET ACTIVE CONTROLLER STATUS
044 DISABLE COMMAND MODE(SET ATN & EOI HIGH)
046 ENABLE COMMAND MODE (SET ATN LOW, EOI HIGH)
060 DISABLE LISTEN AND DISABLE TALK FUNCTIONS,
DISABLE COMMAND MODE
061 DISABLE LISTEN AND ENABLE TALK FUNCTIONS,
DISABLE COMMAND MODE
062 ENABLE LISTEN AND DISABLE TALK FUNCTIONS,
DISABLE COMMAND MODE
063 ENABLE LISTEN AND ENABLE TALK FUNCTIONS,
DISABLE COMMAND MODE
064 COMBINED 044 AND 060
065 COMBINED 045 AND 061
LLLLLL: LU DEVICE NUMBER
**ADDITIONAL EXITS OR DIAGNOSTIC MESSAGES:
**MISCELLANEOUS: